1 Rs > 
Od 


0 
iv 


arte 
somaet 


ee 


Sf. 1902.4 


i 
rT * ‘ ~ 
i» 
4 
. 
7 
' % 7 7 
7 i 
' ‘ 
‘ 
t ) 
‘ns { 
- ; } 7 
: \ 
e 
ie 
2 \ 
— 
a - 
‘ 4 
i 
: {i 
i 7 1 
2 7 
3 
- 
¥ 
© s 
2 
i : 
' 1 
\ 
A 
ul 7 c 
) : 
‘ 
\ 
io}. 
op 
a { 
‘ 
: 7 iv 1 = 1 
afeeye 4 
cg r ; 
‘ 
i 
i 
nie 
i 


Ei 
—— 
- 4 


c ASIATIC RESEARCHES 
Transactions of the Socicty, 
INSTITUTED IN BENGAL, 


THE HISTORY, THE ANTIQUITIES, THE ARTS AND 
SCIENCES, AND LITERATURE 


OF 


A St A. 


VOLUME XVII. 


CALCUTTA: 


‘PRINTED AT THE BENGAL MILITARY ORPHAN PRESS, 


BY G. H. HUTTMANN. 


° 
> | 


a 


Wifes 


CONTENTS OF THE 17th VOLUME. 


I. Page 
Statistical Report on the Bhotia Mehals of Kamaon. By George William 
LGD LOST 56060 bobo tbo (0b Ob 00UR 0000.6 dauKoms OabOu Ub ebO woa nO mOrSHOOnIOS 1 
If. 
An Essay on the Extraction of the Roots of Integers, as practised by the Arabs. 
PERMA OIE MUULLC Ns toca) leltsiel Velie eilcieleyelcisl siolersis)e:clsielelbhe:cie’ol iplel a) ei\e\e'« ee) eels a/*' «a ol 
111. 


Sketch of the Religious Sects of the Hindus. By Horace Hayman Wilson, Esq... 169 


IV. 
Memoir of a Survey of Asam and the Neighbouring Countries, executed in 
1825-6-7-8. By Lieutenant R. Wilcox, ....2++++ feb eee eeecleenenerneen oe Old 
V. 
Census of the Population of the City of Benares. By James Prinsep, Esq.....-- 470 
VI. 


Journey across the Pandua Hills, near Silhet, in Bengal. By H. Walters, Esq... 499 


Vil. 
Route from Cathmandu, in Nepal, to Tazedd, on the Chinese Frontier, with some 
occasional allusions to the Manners and Customs of the Bhotiahs, by Amir, 
a Cashmiro-Bhotiah by birth, and by vocation an Interpreter to the Traders 


on the Route described. Communicated by B. H. Hodgson, Esq.+....++++« ol3 


iv CONTENTS. 


VIII. Page 
Census of the City of Dacca. By Henry Walters, Esq. coccevccccssceeceveets 530 


IX. 
Description of Select Coins, from Originals or Drawings in the possession of the 
Asiatic Society. By H. H. Wilson, Esq..cseseeescesssceccarececsscors 659 
X. 
Remarks on the portion of the Dionysiacs of Nonnus relating to the Indians. 


By H. H. Wilson, Esq. .scseeeeeceees «hela sae vee oleh eae 607 


LIST OF PLATES. 


Map of Asam and the Neighbouring Countries, to face page.....essceeseeees ~.. ol4 
Section-of thesPandua Pills, (15 cis eyoire s ccc'ejeiaisuare wieie rele! cisileterenes ha ie ereial a voegavaleete cites 502 
View in the Kaya Hills,..........0.000- Shara lovsieaae oie lee «fele/siafers aie iajalslerersteteneteiane 506 
Sketch of the Bhtiban Cave, ......... Nabe OAK pan in NG RV ee 512 


Ancient Coins, five Plates, at the conclusion of the description of them,.....ssee.-- 606 


STATISTICAL REPORT 


ON THE 


BHOTIA MEHALS 


OF 


KAMAON. 


By GEORGE WILLIAM TRAILL, Esa. 


Commissioner for the affairs of Kamaon. 


Tur name of Bhot is here, properly speaking, applicable only to 
the Himalaya ranges, which once formed a part of the adjacent Tvbet 
province of Bhot. Since the annexation of that tract to the states of 
Kamaon and Gahkrwal, a portion of the neighbouring Pergunna has been 
incorporated with the several Bhot Mehals. These villages have mostly 
continued in the occupation of the Hindu proprietors, and as they offer 
no peculiarities in regard to produce or management, no further notice of 
them will be taken in the present report, which will, consequently, refer 


solely to Bhoé in its restricted sense. 


The northern boundary, as recognized by the Tibet Government, 
extends to the commencement of the Table Land: for the southern 
boundary the opposite base of the Himalaya range may be assigned. 
With these limits, Bhot may be estimated as forming one-third of the 

b province. 


9 BHOTIA MEHALS 


province. The southern line of demarcation is, by no means, continued or 
well defined, intervals between the snowy peak presenting themselves 
in the neighbourhood of the principal rivers; the most considerable of 
these occurs at the foot of the Nit Pass, where the line of perpetual 


snow recedes full a quarter of a degree to the north: 


At the intervals in question, are found the mouths of the Tartar 


Passes, five in number, and commencing from the west, as follows :— 


Mana, on the Saraswati,....... 
Nitt, on the Duli,........ BRO 


Juwar, on the Gauri,.......... 


| Branches of the Ganges. 


Darma, on the Dhouli, ........ “Branches of the Sarda or Gogra. 
Byanse, on the Kali,.......... 


The productive and habitable portion of Bhot, is confined to the 
passes and their immediate neighbourhood, and does not exceed a 
sixteenth of its total extent; the remainder consists of snow or barren 


rocks. 


The minimum elevation in the several passes may be taken at 
six thousand feet above the sea, while at their crests, the height varies: 
from above twenty thousand feet on Mana, to about fifteen thousand feet 
on Byanse. The altitudes of the peaks, have been calculated by 
Captain Webb : the maximum appears to be above twenty-five thousand 
feet.* 

The 


Nore.— The height of the Peak Nanda Devi, is, by Captain Webb’s operations, 25,669 feet. 
Ditto ditto, by Major Hodgson and Captain Herbert, 25,749 ditto. 
Mean height 25,709. 


OF KAMAON. 3 


|The paths to the passes, continue along the upper part of the 
rivers abovementioned, till near the crest of the ridge, which is cross- 
ed in those parts offering least difficulty in the ascent, and it is here only 
that snow is not met with during the season of intercourse. Roads of 
communication through the Himalaya unite the passes from east to 
west, but these are passable, during a few days only in each year, and are 
considered at all times as dangerous by the Bhotias themselves. Roads 
of this description formerly used, are now impracticable, owing to the 
increase of snow. The interior of the Himalaya, except at the passes and 
paths in question, is inaccessible, and appears to be daily becoming more 
so from the gradual extension of the zone of perpetual snow. The 
Bhotias bear universal testimony to the fact of such extension, and 
point out ridges now never free from snow, which, within the memory 
of man, were clothed with forest, and afforded periodical pastures for 
sheep: they even state, that the avalanches, detached from the lofty peaks, 


occasionally present pieces of wood frozen in their centre. 


The roads in the passes are carried as near as possible to the 
margin of the river, and only deviate from thence as a last resource, where 
a rocky precipice, impassable by other means, presents itself. Obstruc- 
tions of this nature, which are here frequent, are, if feasible, avoided by 
means of bridges: as they are surmounted by the aid of a scaffolding 
formed of spars, and supported by joists, fastened horizontally in the 
face of the rock, this expedient is only pursued where natural crevices or 
ledges are available. Where a passage over the obstruction is inevitable, 
a considerable detour is usually necessary for that purpose, and the road, 


in these cases, is always difficult, and sometimes attended with danger. 


The bridges are of the Sanga kind, and being intended for the 
passage of laden animals, they are made with greater attention and better 
materials, 


4 BHOTIA MEHALS 


materials, than are commonly given by the Zemindars of other parts of 
the province, to such erections. In the early part of the season, natural 
bridges of snow, formed from the accumulation of avalanches, abound, 
more particularly in the upper part of the Ghats, where the stream is 


invisible during much of its course. 


The frequency of mountain slips, “ Paira,” renders the preservation 
of the road an object of constant toil to the Bhotias. By accidents of 
this nature, the course of the river is sometimes completely blocked up 
for two or three successive days, and every part of the path-way, within 
its reach, is swept away by the accumulated torrent, not an atom of soil 
being left on which to found a new road ; on forming the latter, a deviation 


from the old line and level, becomes necessary in consequence. 


The passes, taking their whole extent, may be said to be barely prac- 
ticable. The Bhotias travel through them without difficulty under burthens, 
but natives of other quarters of the hills are compelled, in many places, to 
proceed with the utmost caution, even without loads; at such points ani- 
mals of every description require the assistance of manual labor; the larger 
kinds, such as poneys and cattle, are raised or lowered, according to the 


nature of the obstruction, by means of slings passed round their bodies, 


Comparatively speaking, the Niti is considered as the best, the 
Juwar as the most difficult pass in this province. A tradition is here 
current, that when Bhot was originally conquered by the Kamaon power, 
a road was formed by the invading army to facilitate its progress 
through the Ghat; this operation, the commander (Raja Baz Bahader 
Chand) is said to have personally superintended, paying a rupee with 
his own hand, for every cup full of earth brought to the spot. This tale 


doubtless partakes of the usual style of Eastern hyperbole, but it is 
deprived 


OF KAMAON. 5 


deprived of much of its apparent exaggeration, on inspection of the country 
in that quarter. During the rainy season, to insecurity under foot, must 
be added insecurity over head. Fragments of rock, ‘ Gull,” and ava- 
lanches, “ Hiin Gull,’ are continually detached from the impending 


cliffs, and annually occasion fatal accidents in each of the Ghats. 


The Bhot Mehals present only fifty-nine villages, within the Ghats, 
distributed as under-mentioned ; comparatively speaking, these are of 
good size, the village of Melim, alone (in the Jwvar pass,) contains near 

-two hundred houses, a number greater than is to be found in any other 


village in the province. 


No. of Villages. No. of Houses. 
Mana, te ie: 3 ia ae ah, 125 
Niti, at: a 10 ae Ie MM: 219 
Mr Maiuoaiias Vocekoieddh «area olds ied oad O45 
Darma, as fl 24 Sie "3 ry 342 
Byanse, As bp 9——59 Fs ..  184——1325 


The houses are commonly large, consisting of two or more stories, 
“substantially built of stone, with sloping roofs of slate, planks, or gravel 
beat smooth; where this last material is made use of, a previous layer of 
birch-bark, is requisite to render the roof water-proof. In the choice 
of a site for building, security from avalanches forms the primary con- 
sideration ; but even the greatest foresight sometimes proves vain. In 
1822, more than twenty houses were swept away by an avalanche in 
the village of Mana; although it is, at least, two miles distant from the 
peak, whence the destructive mass must have proceeded. This catastro- 
phe took place, fortunately, during the periodical absence of the inha- - 

bitants. ) 
c No 


6 BHOTIA MEHALS 


No complete enumeration has been made of the population in Bhot, 
but sufficient data exist for computing the average of residents in each 
house to exceed seven. The Bhotvas are, generally, in good circumstances, 
and many individuals possess one or more slaves or domestics, who, with 
their families, live under the same roof with their masters. This estimate 
will, give a total of near ten thousand inhabitants, of whom, probably, 
nine-tenths are Bhotias, and one-tenth natives of other parts, chiefly 
artificers of low caste. The Bhotias, who reside permanently in the vil- 
lages, at the mouth of the Ghat, and not included in the foregoing, may 
be estimated at about five hundred. Prejudices in regard to caste, joined 
to the jealousy of the Bhotias for their commercial monopoly, prevent the 
permanent establishment of Hindus within the Ghats; by the latter 


cause also, further emigrations from 7vbet are impeded. 


The following brief view of the climate must be understood as 
solely applicable to the habitable parts ; the state of temperature in the 
elevated portion contiguous to, or within the zone of perpetual congela- 
tion, will only be cursorily noticed; as influencing the productions of the 


soil. 


In the absence of a regular series of observations, general remarks 
only can be offered. During full half the year, the surface is wholly 
covered with snow; this begins to be about the end of September, and 
continues to accumulate to the beginning of April. Thaw then becomes 
predominant, though partial falls occur till even late in May.. In open 
and level situations, unaffected by drifts or avalanches, the bed of snow 
which, at its maximum depth, varies in different years, from six to twelve 
feet, is wholly dissipated by the first week in June ; in ravines and hol- 
lows, it does not entirely disappear before the middle of July. The sea- 


sons of spring, summer, and autumn, are comprised within five months, 
from 


OF KAMAON. ” 


from May to September inclusive; but an interval of four months, with- 
out a fall of snow, is rare. During these seasons, the thermometer (Fah- 
renheit,) at sun-rise ranges from 40° to 55°, and at mid-day, from 65° to 
75° in the shade, and from 90° to 110° in the sun. 


Towards the middle of August, the temperature becomes precarious, 
and liable to sudden changes, consequent on the state of weather which 
may prevail on the surrounding heights; falls of snow, in that quarter, 
producing slight frosts in the neighbouring valleys: by such occurrences 
the ripening crops are sometimes wholly burnt up. The Brhotias firmly 
believe that falls of snow may be induced by concussions in the air. 
The use of fire arms, musical instruments, and, in Darma, even the 


scrubbing of metal vessels, are prohibited in the neighbourhood of vil- 


lages. 


Rain is here neither heavy nor frequent ; there is, however, a constant 


succession of dense clouds and mists. 


The soil is commonly black, and contains much decayed vege- 
table matter washed down by the melted snows; it would however 
appear to require large supplies of manure to render it productive. The 


surface is every where extremely stony. 


After the preceding notice of the climate, it is almost superfluous 
to mention, that only one crop is obtained in each year, the agricultural 
products are “ Phapar” and “ Ugal,” two varieties of buck-wheat, 
“Ua Jao” and “ Jao,” beardless and common barley. Wheat and 
‘“‘ Marsa,” a species of amaranthus, are partially cultivated. In the 
richest and best watered lands, barley yields a return of from twenty 
to forty fold, according as the temperature may be affected by the 


proximity 


8 BHOTIA MEHALS 


proximity of seow. In the poor lands, which may not be capable 
of irrigation, from three to six for one, is the average produce. The 
“ Phapar,” which does not require irrigation, gives from thirty to forty 
fold. 


Both wheat and “ Marsa” are uncertain, the crop in many seasons 
never reaching maturity, and in the most favorable years being far from 
abundant. ‘“ Phapar”’ would appear to be indigenous, as it is to be found 


wild on all high mountains. 


The operations and implements of husbandry present no novelties: 
the ploughing commences as early as the melting of the snow will — 
admit, and the sowing is commonly compieted by the first week in June. 
By the middle of September, the crop is ready for the sickle: to this 
period the irrigation of the wheat and barley is continued, the streams 
of melted snow being directed for that purpose, whenever available. Se- 
vere winters, attended with heavy snows, prove more or less injurious in 
their consequences to the succeeding crops. The Bhoé villages are all 
situated on the northern side of the great chain of Himalaya Peaks, and 
are all, in some degree, subject to the influence of its snows and of its 
shade. By any unusual accumulation of snow on the summit, the in- 
ferior bed is forced down, and with it, the influence of, if not the line of 
perpetual congelation itself, descends: those villages which are con- 
tiguous to the peaks, and are unsheltered by intervening heights, suffer 
severely from such occurrences, as it sometimes requires the heat of 
more than one summer to throw back the snow to its former level. The 
village of Laspa, in the Juwar Ghat, has been rendered wholly unproduc- 
tive during two years, by an incident of this kind. This village lies on 
the northern base of the great peak of Nanda Devi, but is the southern- 
most and least elevated within the Ghat: the peculiarities of its situation, 

as 


OF KAMAON. 9 


as the link of connection between Hindustan and Turtary, and the proxi- 
mity of astill more sterile country in the latter, could alone induce cultiva- 


tion in a tract where production is always precarious and never abundant. 


Turnips and leaks are the only vegetables raised in Bhot, but many 
useful roots and herbs are spontaneously produced, among these are, the 


wild garlic, celery, rhubarb, frankincense (Mari or Balchar) Laljari, 


Chora, Bhotkes, and Katki, objects of export to Hindustan. The rhubarb 


is somewhat inferior in its color and properties to the Turkey, and the 
Bhoitias do not take it inwardly, though they apply the powder to wounds 
and bruises: it is also used as an ingredient in the formation of a red dye, 
in conjunction with Manjith and Potash. The Manjith is here extreme- 


ly abundant; but, except for local consumption, is in no demand. 


The indigenous fruits are gooseberries, currants, red and white, rasp- 
berries, strawberries, and pears, none of which receive culture. Apricots 


and peaches have been partially introduced by the Bhotias, but attain 


neither size or flavor. Walnuts and hazlenuts are common in the low 


grounds; the nut of the former contains little or no kernel, the latter is 


small, but well tasted. 


The forests in the southern and least elevated parts of the Ghat, of- 
fer many varieties of tree common to other parts of the province: the most 
flourishing of these are the oaks and pines of different kinds. Specimens 
of the “ Deodar,” pine, and of the “‘ Sury?,” or Arbor Vite, with trunks 
of from twenty to twenty-five feet in circumference, are by no means un- 


common. 


With the increase of elevation, a gradual change in the com- 


position of the forests takes place: to red Rhododendrons, Deodars, and 
d oaks, 


10 BHOTIA MEHALS 


oaks, succeed the “ Ravsalla,” or king pine, “ Thiers,’ or Yew, 
« Naspati,”* or white Rhododendron, and “ Bindhara,” or juniper, while 


above all is found the Bhoj, or birch, on the very verge of perpetual snow. 


The bark of this latter is highly useful, as a substitute for paper, and 
for other domestic purposes, and is exported in considerable quantities to 
the plains. The sprigs of the “‘ Bindhara,” (juniper) and of the ‘ Suryi,” 
(Arbor Vite) are used in the preparation of yeast, “ Balma.” The most 
common shrubs are the ‘“ Parpinja,” (ground cypress,) dog roses, red 


and white, and sweet briar. 
Flowers are plentiful, more particularly the Iris and Anemone. 


The domestic animals are horned cattle, ponies, sheep, goats, dogs, 


and cats. 


The horned cattle are of three kinds. 1st. The common hill black 
cattle, of which a few are carried up for the supply of milk, and of agri- 
cultural labor. 2ndly. The “ Stra Gai,” or Yak, imported from Tartary, 
chiefly for the purpose of carriage, for which it is well adapted by its 
strength: its employment is, however, restricted to the Himalaya, owing 
to its extreme susceptibility of heat and moisture. The third kind 
consists of mules, bred between the two foregoing species. Where the 
sire is a Yak, the produce is called “ Jabbu,” and in the opposite 
cross, it is called ‘* Garjo.” These breed freely together, or with the 
parent stock; but in the former case, the race degenerates: in the 
latter, the produce resumes the character of the parent, into which it 


may 


* & Naspati,” so called from the leaf being used dry, and pounded as snuff. 


OF KAMAON. 11 


i) 


may be re-bred. Of these mules, the “ Jabbu’ is the most valuable, 
being found to possess the good qualities of both parents in an essential 
degree. The value of the Yak and of the Jabbu is nearly the same—from 


fifteen to thirty rupees for each animal. 


Sheep and goats are numerous, and form the principal means of 
transport; they are not, however, bred to any great extent by the Bhotias, 
but are purchased by them in the villages, along’ the south base of the 

Himalaya, the animals of that quarter alone, being found capable of 
_ standing the changes of climate and the unceasing labor to which their 
employment subjects them. The pasture on the ranges adjoining to the 
Himalaya, is found in a peculiar degree nutritive to sheep; on the melt- 
ing of the winter snows, towards the end of March, these mountains which, 
though lofty, are by no means precipitous, become covered with verdure, 
and are then resorted to by the flocks of the neighbourhood. A few days 
are said to suffice to restore the animals to condition, though ever so 
much reduced by the fasts and rigors of the preceding winter. The grass 
of these pastures is distinguished by the shepherds, under a particular 
name, and has the universal reputation of being inexhaustible, the growth 
during the night being said to compensate fully for the consumption of 
the day. The flocks continue here till the commencement of the rains, 
when they are driven to less rich pastures on the more southern ridges ; with 
the setting in of winter, they return to the villages. During this season, 
the sheep are compelled to browse with the goats; branches, chiefly of the 
oak, being cut down for them: the use of Bhist is here unknown, though 
the animalsare turned into the stubble fields; neither is hay, though stor- 
ed in small quantities for cattle, ever given to sheep. In some 
parts of Garhwal, the leaves of trees, particularly of the mulberry, are 
dried and stocked in-autumn, to serve as fodder for the winter. The 
“ Kimmi,” or mulberry, is there, consequently, much valued, and the 


property 


13 BHOTIA MEHALS 


property in its foliage forms an object of sale and purchase, distinct 


from the land. 


While on the mountains, the flocks are secured during the night in 
folds ; these are situated along the ridges, and being intended for annual 
resort, are substantially built with layers of dry stone: the wallis raised to 
nine or ten feet, so as to exclude beasts of prey: only a single door of en- 
trance is left, and that of the smallest dimensions, with the same view, 
as the leopards, when the door is high, break it down without difficulty, 
by leaping against it. In the interior, sloping chhappers are erected along 
one or more sides, according to the number of animals to be sheltered. 
Every village has commonly its separate fold at each of the periodical 
pastures ; the ridges in question, consequently, exhibit the appearance of 
a chain of fortified posts, the resemblance being increased by the indi- 
vidual sites of these erections, which, with a view to facility of draining, 


are placed on the summits of rising grounds. 


The wool is of good quality, andis wholly consumed on the spot, in 


the manufacture of blankets. 


The sheep carries a burthen of from five to eight seers, and the goat from 
six to twelve seers: all dry commodities, the weight of which can be equally 
apportioned on both sides, may be conveyed on these animals. Grain, 
borax, salt, gér and such articles, are sewn up in small saddle bags, cal- 
led “ Karbik,’ made of worsted, and cased with leather; these are laid 
across the back, and are secured merely by a crupper and a breast-band. 
Wool and other products of the same description, are formed into similar 
packages, and loaded in the same mode, but without bags. Laden sheep on 
short journeys, can accomplish seven or eight miles a day ; but for acontinu- 


ance, cannot keep up a greater rate than five miles ; they travel only for a 
short 


OF KAMAON. 13 


short time in the morning and in the evening, during the heat of the day, 
they are unloaded and suffered to graze. Goats are chosen, from their 


superior boldness and activity, as leaders of the flock, and are furnished 
with bells. 


The common diseases of sheep, such as rot, mange, small-pox, &c. 
are all here prevalent, and in some years, extremely destructive; the 
goats are further liable, in wet weather, to a species of Barsati, called 


“ Khiri,” which frequently terminates in the loss of the hoofs. 


The casualties are further augmented by exposure and fatigue, by 
accidents, and by wild beasts ; and as the females—even those with young 
at their feet—are not exempted from labor, it can be a matter of no sur- 
prise, that the Bhofia annually finds himself called on to make a fresh 
outlay for keeping up his stock. Many of the Jowart Bhotias possess 
flocks of Tibet sheep ; this is a powerful long-legged animal, resembling 
the Iceland ram, and similarly subject to produce an additional number of 
horns, individuals being sometimes found with as many as five horns. 
This sheep carries from fifteen to twenty seers, its wool is also of a 
superior kind, known in commerce under the name of Bayengi, and 
the price is, at the same time, not greater than that of the common hill 
sheep; these considerations wotld lead to its exclusive introduction were 
it found capable of enduring the change of climate, but failure in this lat- 
ter point, restricts its employment, as in the Yak to the Himalaya and its 
native country. These flocks are, in consequence, kept by their owners 
at some adjoining village in Tibet, and are brought into use on the 
opening of the upper part of the Ghat. The goats consumed for food 
and sacrifices, are also procured from Tibet; they are of the description 
which yields the shawl wool, and are to be purchased there at from twelve 


annas to two rupees each. 
e The 


14 BHOTIA MEHALS 


The horses in use here, are small stout ponies of Tartar breed, called 
“ Gints:” these animals are remarkably sure-footed, and consequently, 
well adapted for the rocky and precipitous roads of the hills; they have 
the further merit of not requiring shoes, and are invariably ridden unshod. 
The price has, of late years, been much enhanced by the demand of 
European gentlemen; a poney of good qualifications not being procurable 


for less than from sixty to one hundred rupees, near treble the former rates. . 


Dogs are of two species, the Tibet, a large animal with a shaggy 
coat, kept for guarding sheep against the depredations of wild beasts: and, 
the Hill SAzkari, or hunting dog, which does not differ in appearance from 
the common pariah dog of the plains, but is valuable from his qualifications 
for the chase. They are commonly used singly, or at most in pairs, and. 
from their perseverance and goodness of nose, are generally successful in 
their pursuit of game. The deer, when raised, is driven by them down 
into the glen, where a part of the hunters lie in wait, armed with spears 
or matchlocks.. The Bhotias are particularly fond of this sport, and pay 
comparatively large prices for dogs of good character. To improve the 
breed, they sometimes cross the Shikari dog with the “‘ Bownsa or Koya,” 
(wild dog) caught young and reared with that, view This animal cannot 
be made available for hunting, as it seizes indiscriminately on every 


animal, whether wild or domestic, which comes in view, . 


Dogs of the Tibet breed are subject to hydrophobia: the treatment 
employed by the Bhotias in cases of bites from animals in that state is 
simple, and said to be generally efficacious : the part bitten is immediately 
subjected to the operation of burning, either by Guls, or by a red hot. 
iron, and a ligature is at the same time tied above the wound. For the 
space of fifteen days, the patient is debarred from the use of salt, spices, 
and: heating food, and for the same period is daily magnetised by some 

skilful 


OF KAMAON. 15 


skilful adept. The efficacy of the treatment depends on the actual cautery. 
The magnetism is not likely to be of much use. Of the success of this 
system of treatment, an instance fell under my own observation, in which 
nota shadow of doubt could exist of the rabidness of the animal by which 


the bite was inflicted. 
The wild animals peculiar to Bhot are— 


The <“ Barji,” or tawny bear, said to be white in winter. This 
animal exceeds the common black species in size, and is carniverous. 
“ Bharel,’ wild sheep, found only in the loftiest parts of the Himalaya, 
its size is that of the hill ram, color grey, with black points, hair thick 
and wiry, horns remarkably large and heavy, but curled as in the com- 
mon ram. Vulgar fame represents this animal as falling, ultimately, a 
victim to the weight of his horns, being rendered thereby incapable of 
moving. ‘‘ Kasturi,” musk deer, requires no description: it abounds along 
the base of the Himalaya, where it isin a great measure secured from the 
pursuit of hunters by the difficulties of the country; but for this circum- 
stance, the value of its produce would, probably, have long since led to its 
extermination. The quantity and quality of the musk, are supposed to 
depend on the animal not being wounded, previous to the excision of the 
bag. Recourse is, consequently, very rarely had to fire arms for its destruc- 
tion. Pit-falls and snares are. the means commonly resorted to for this 
‘purpose. In the latter mode, a fence of thick bushes is carried along the 
face of the mountain, a few small openings being left at distant intervals : 
in these are set the snares, and the animals are caught when descending 
at night to feed. A few are occasionally run down by dogs. Musk sells 
on the spot at from eight to twelve rupees the Tola. The number of deer 
killed in a season seldom, probably, amounts to a hundred, though, from 
the impositions practised in the sale of this article, full double that number 
of 


16 BHOTIA MEHALS 


of musk bags, exclusive of those imported from Tartary, are annually 
disposed of in this province. “ Bhia,” Marmot, a small brown kind, 
numerous in the upper parts of the Ghats. “ Kukar,” ferret, small, of an 
orange color, abounds in the villages, where it burrows in the walls of the 
houses: zeal in destroying rats secures to it the protection of the inhabit- 
ants. The rats are numerous; they offer the peculiarity of tails not exceed- 
ing halfan inch in length. Most of the animals here enumerated have the 
reputation, as noticed in the case of the “ Barji,” of assuming, in winter, 
the appearance of the surrounding snow. The inaccessibility of the interior 


during that season, renders the ascertainment of this fact difficult. 
The birds peculiar to Bhot consist of the— 


Falcon and hawk, which breed on the southern ranges ; these birds 
once formed an article of profitable export to Hindustan, but the demand 
is now trifling. They are caught in decoys called “ Kothas,” which are 
formed by a wall of netting erected on three sides, the fourth side and 
thetop being left open ; on this side the fowler lies concealed and by sud- 
denly emerging when the hawk stoops to seize the bait, drives it in 
rising against the nets. The bait used is commonly a pigeon. The 
spots adapted for these “ Kothas,” and at the same time the resort of the 
hawks, are far from numerous, they are all situated on high and open 


ridges, far removed from the villages. 
“ Him Wal,” (bird of snow,) the Ptarmigan. 
“© Mikao,” wild pigeon, mottled black and white. 
“ Kyang,” Cornish chough, easily known from the common jack- 


daw, by its bright scarlet bill and legs. During the summer season, 
many 


OF KAMAON. 17 


_many of the common species of birds, large and small, migrate thi- 
ther. | 


Neither fish nor reptiles of any kind exist. 


Insects are far from abundant, although they swarm along the conti- 


guous ranges. 


The “ Bhaunr,” or wild bee, which builds its nest in the southern 


parts of the Himalaya, has been already noticed. 


Granite and quartz appear to be the prevailing descriptions of rock. 
The only minerals yet discovered are iron, sulphur, and yellow arsenic. 
The ore of the former abounds, but is used only for red coloring matter ; 
the second is found in two or three hot springs at the mouth of the Juwa 
pass, but not in sufficient quantity to repay the labor of working for. 
The yellow arsenic is dug for in two or three places within the Darma 


and Juwdr Ghats, but the aggregate produce is trifling. 


Rock crystal is common, and specimens of considerable magnitude 


are occasionally procured. Fossil bones and organic remains exist in the 


most elevated parts of the Ghats. The former, here called “ Bijli 
Har,” \ightning bones, are chiefly found at the crest of the Nit pass: 
the latter, called “ Chakar Patar,’ from its resemblance to a _ wheel, 
is procured in a ravine on the northern face of the Mana pass. In both 
instances, the elevation may be assumed at seventeen thousand feet above 


the sea. 


Hot springs are numerous throughout the Himalaya chain, the tem- 


perature is found nearly the same in all, from 130° to 138° of Fahrenheit. 
f No 


18 BHOTIA MEHALS 


No volcano is positively known to exist, but there are grounds for sus- 
pecting that the Nanda Devi peak contains something of the kind; the 
Bhotias and natives of the neighbouring districts bear unanimous testi- 
mony to the occasional appearance of smoke on its summit: this is attri- 
buted by them to the actual residence of a deity, and has, accordingly, in- 
vested that peak with particular sanctity. A religious Melais held every 
twelfth year, at the highest accessible point, which is, however, about a 
mile from the summit: further progress is rendered impossible by a wall 
of perpendicular ice. The dangers and difficulties incurred by the pilgrims 
are represented as most appalling, and of the many hundreds who start at 
each successive period, not fifty find courage to complete the enterprise. 
Under these circumstances, it is scarcely possible that the question of a 
crater can be ever decided by actual inspection. Itis but just to add, 
that the extreme altitude of this peak, (already noticed) joined to its 
monolithic appearance, might, independent of any other considerations, 


have rendered it sacred in Hindu Mythology. 


Personal appearance, language, religion, customs, and tradition, all 
unite in pointing the origin of the present inhabitants to the adjoining 


Tartar province of 7%bet. 


In the Mana, Niti, Juwar, and Byanse passes, the principal Bhotias 
still trace the emigration of their individual ancestors from some one of 
the villages or towns in that quarter. The colonization of these Ghats, 
would not appear to have taken place simultaneously throughout their 
extent: the first body of emigrants established itself in the villages at the 
mouth of the Ghat from which the Hindu occupants were forcibly dri- 
ven, the remaining villages were settled by succeeding adventurers at dif- 
ferent intervals, and migration continued to be directed thither till the 


final dismemberment of the Himalaya chain from Tibet. The intimate 
intercourse 


OF KAMAON. 19 


intercourse which has continued to subsist with the mother country since 
that event, has prevented a variation in language, and the dialect spoken 


in those Ghats, is strictly that of the adjoining Tartar tribe. 


These observations do not apply to the Darma Ghat: its inhabitants, 


though equally of Tartar origin, are traditionally derived from a different 


race, and their settlement is traced through the circuitous route of 
Hindustan. They are here considered as the descendants of a body of 
Mongol Tartars, which was left to secure possession of Kamaon after its 
subjection to Timur. This force, thinned by disease and the sword, 


ultimately retreated to the Darma pass, and there formed a permanent 


establishment. 


| The histories of Timur, mention the subjugation of these hills by 
gone of his Atabegs, a fact which is also confirmed by the local records; 
these consist of little more than an enumeration of former Rajas, with the 
duration of their respective reigns ; they, however, note an interregnum of 
about twenty years, during which the Mogul sway continued. Vestiges 
of this race are still found in the centre of the province, particularly at 
Dewara and Bageswar, consisting of tombs, constructed with large flat 
tiles, and, in other respects, substantially built; these cannot, consequent- 
ly, be attributed to the aborigenes, who were too rude to have made use 
of tiles or bricks for any purpose, while they differ both in form and ap- 
pearance from the graves of Jogis, the only class of Hindus which adopts 
sepulture. It is therefore to Tartars or Mohammedans only that these 
graves can be ascribed. The extreme sanctity of Bdgeswar, a principal 
“ Prag,” or Jamtrdn, precludes the supposition that either of these sects 
would have been suffered, as subjects of a Hindu government, to pollute 
that place with their dead, while the Mohammedans, as is well known, 
were never able to effect any conquests within these hills. By the 


a natives, 


90 BHOTIA MEHALS 


natives, these tombs* are called Mogul. The Darma Bhotias, from the 
association of the Mohammedan creed with the name of Mogul, repel, as 
an insult, the extraction here attributed to them; they are, nevertheless, 
unable to assign any other, while the difference in language, customs, and 
dress, particularly of the females, proves that they could not have had a 
common origin with the other Bhotias. No opportunity has been offered 


for comparing the Darma dialect with that of the Moguls. 


The religion of the Bhoteas has been naturally influenced by their 
peculiar situation and pursuits, subjected to a government which, as re- 
garded the infringement of its religious tenets, was ever intolerant. The 
Bhotias have been compelled to conform with the Hindu prejudices ; 
continued intercourse with the latter sect has also led to a gradual adop- 
tion of many of its superstitions, while the annual communications main- 
tained with Tibet have served to keep alive the belief of their fore- 
fathers. The Bhotias may now be regarded as Pantheists, paying equal 
adoration at every temple, whether erected by the followers of Brahma, 
of Budd,h, or of the Lama. The only temples in Bhot are small rude 


buildings erected with loose stones, merely sufficient to shelter the idol. 


The Bhotias have no priests of their own caste, but avail themselves, ac- 


cording to circumstances, of the services of a Brahmin or of a Lama. 
Among the Darma Bhotias, divination is practised ; the omens are taken 
from the reeking liver of a goat or sheep, sacrificed for the purpose, by rip- 
ping up its belly. No undertaking of importance is commenced without 
this ceremony ; when the first augury proves unfavorable, fresh animals 


are sacrified, and further inspections made; the result of the majority of 


omens 


* Gold ornaments and arms, are reported to have been occasionally found on them, several 
graves have been exposed in digging foundations at Bégeswar since 1815, but they contained only 
small earthenware lamps. 


* 


OF KAMAON. 21 


omens decides the question. The office of diviner appears to be assumed 
indiscriminately by all males of good age; certain previous purifications 


are undergone on each occasien. 


The Bhotias ought necessarily to have no distinctions of caste: the 
Mana, Nitti, and Juwdr Bhotias, however, pretend to consider those of 
the Darma and Byanse Ghats as an inferior sect, and neither eat nor 
intermarry with them. The descendants of the first colonists in the 
villages at the mouths of the Ghats, who now confine their pursuits 
to agriculture, and maintain no direct intercourse with Tvbet, affect similar 

pretensions in regard to the Bhotias within the Ghats, while all unite 
in assumptions of superiority to the Natives of Tvbef, though on their 
annual visits to that country, they are compelled to drink tea at the 
houses of their several correspondents, such ceremony being there an 
indispensable preliminary to every commercial dealing. Of late years, 
‘the Juwdar Bhotias have affected to imitate the niceties and scruples of 
Hindus, in regard to food, and have assumed the designation of ‘“ Sinh;” 
but they have derived no consideration from these pretensions, and con- 
tinue to be regarded with abhorrence by the Hindus, as descendants from 
a cow-killing race. The policy which may have dictated this line of con- 
duct having now ceased, with the abrogation of the Brahminical govern- 
ment, it may be expected that these pretensions will gradually disappear, 
and that the Bhotias will relapse into the unscrupulous habits of their 


Tartar ancestors. 


In the institution of marriage, the inclinations and will of the fe- 
male appear to have greater weight than is common in the east, both in 
regard to the formation of such engagements, and in the subsequent 
domestic management. Contracts are formed at an early age, but the 


marriage is not commonly concluded till the parties arrive at maturity. 
Should 


oOo 
Sn] 


~~ 


bh 


22 BHOTIA MEHALS 


Should the female in the mean time make a choice for herself, the previ- 
ous contract is compromised by the payment of a sum of money. The 
consideration given by the bridegroom to the father of the bride, varies 
from three hundred to one thousand rupees: a corresponding portion is 
returned, which consists of domestic stock, live and dead, and in some of 
the Ghats is considered as the property of the wife, by whom it is manag- 
ed for her own benefit. The females are chiefly employed in weaving 
blankets and coarse serges; the produce of their looms, after supplying 
the family with clothing, is also, in a great measure, at their own disposal. 
The nuptial ceremonies are uninteresting, they are invariably accompa- 


nied with riot and drunkenness. 


The Bhotias universally burn their dead; in Darma, this ceremony 
is performed in the month of Kartik only.; the bodies of those who die 
intermediately, are committed temporarily to the earth, and at the ap- 


pointed season, the remains are taken up and burnt. 


On these occasions the heir of the deceased is expected to entertain 
the whole of his kindred, and is commonly impoverished by the prodiga- 
lity of the expense incurred. A number of goats and Yaks, according to 
his means, are sacrificed at the pile; of the latter animals, one is selected 
for the particular service of the deceased, and is previously led about with 
many ceremonies, adorned with flowers and laden with cloth, sugar, spice, 
and such articles ; precedence in the sacrifice is also given to it, and the 
decapitation is performed by the son-in-law, or some other near relation 
to the deceased. In the selection of this Yak, the departed spirit is ap- 
pealed to, and its choice is supposed to be indicated in the animal which 
is the first to shake its tail, when the stall is inspected by the heir. The 
Bhotias universally profess extreme yeneration for the manes of their 
fore-fathers, small monuments to their memory are numerous in the 

vicinity 


OF KAMAON. 23 


yicinity of villages, generally on the summit of some height ; distinguished 
individuals are further honored by images of silver or stone, and by the 
annual celebration of festivals, on days dedicated to the purpose, when 
the image is carried in procession about the village; and receives offer- 
ings and worship. Among the Darma Bhotias, when an individual dies 
absent from his native village, a clue of worsted is conducted to it from 
the spot where death occurs. In families of consideration, the thread is 
extended unbroken throughout ; by the poorer classes, it is only laid, in 
cases of considerable distance, along difficult parts of the road ; the object 
of this superstition is to enable the departed soul to join the spirits of 


his ancestors. Suttees occasionally take place in Juwar. 


The original languages of Bhot have been previously noticed, they 
are current only in verbal intercourse, as scarce an individual is to be found 
in Bhot capable of reading or writing the Tibet, while of the Darma dia- 
lect, it does not appear that any characters were ever in use. In the 
Mana, Niti, and Juwar passes, the Hindustani has become naturalized, 
and forms the medium of both colloquial and written communications ; 
in Darma, it is also current, though not so generally ; in Byanse, it has 
hitherto made only a partial progress, as the necessity for its acquisition 


commenced at a recent period. 
In the division of time, the Hindu method is followed exclusively. 


In weighing and measuring commodities, the Bhotias have necessa- 
rily two modes of computation, that of the hills and that of bet; 
the former has been noticed in a preceding report; of the latter, it will be 
sufficient to enumerate the denominations which are in most common 


use, 


Gram, 


24 BHOTIA MEHALS 


Gram, salt, borax, &c. are sold by measures of capacity, as follows : 


8 handfulls make one “ Phirtwa.” 
8 “ Phirtaea” make one “ De.” 


1 aa Ba ih RO a ee ,» one * Dobu,” or “-Guama.” 


This “ Doda’ is equivalent to the Kacha maund of twenty seers; in 
some articles it contains eighteen ‘“ De.” Within the Ghats, the articles 
above-named are also calculated by the “‘ Karbich,” or sheep saddle-bag, 


taken at four “ Nalis.” Grain is also computed by the 


Nalis. 
“« Liyattor,” large “ Karbich,” equal to ....... 20 
 Swola,” or basket, .......... dittoxePr eos, 60 
T hanch; or’ skins 220028 85%, A: ditto Yo@1ay 8, 60 


Wool, sugar, hardware, &c. are weighed by the steelyard, which is 


divided into “ Nega.” The Nega is about ten sicca weight. 


Prepared tobacco, Gir, &c. are divided into small flat cakes, called 


‘« Pola,” of which from ten to twelve sell for the rupee. 


Cloth is measured by the “ Zhi,” or cubit, or by the “ Khak,” 
Khagam, or breadth. 


In fine goods, broadcloth, chintz, &c. the piece is computed at eight 
‘“« Khak.” In coarse calicoes, twenty-eight breadths are required to com- 
plete the piece. Broadcloth is commonly sold by the “ Baku,” equal to 
two breadths, and so called from being the quantity required to make up 
a robe of that name. Gold is calculated by the “ Sarswo,” or “ Phetang,” 
equal to seven and a half Mdsas. Gold-dust, separated into “‘ Phetangs,” 
each tied up in a bit of cloth, is current as coin at eight rupees the 


“ Phetang.” 


t 


OF KAMAON. 25 


« Phetang.” Silver is computed at the “ Jy,” or Temasht, (three Masas) 
and the “ Gorma,” or current rupee equivalent to four “ Syd.” The “ Jyit” 
is coined at Ladakh, and is of very uncertain standard: of late years, its 
metal has been improved. In this province it is called ‘“ Gangatasst,” 
and passes at the rate of something more than five to the milled Furracka- 
bad rupee. In large payments, ingots, called “ Lakalo,” or “‘ Doja,” are 
used, these bear the Lhassa stamp, and are very pure silver; the “‘ Doja” 
weighs seven hundred and sixty Jyzs, and is current at something less 


than two hundred rupees. 


Bhot, for a considerable period subsequent to its colonization, form- 
ed an integral part of the mother county. The trade carried on by its 
inhabitants rendered them, in some degree, dependant on the will of the 
neighbouring Cis Himalaya chiefs; but they were long able to repel 


the contracted efforts of the latter, made for their subjugation. 


The ultimate union of these principalities in the monarchies of Garh- 
wal and Kamaon, about three centuries ago, led to the conquest of the 
Mana, Niti, Juwdr and Darma passes, by those states respectively. 
The Byanse pass was severed from the principality of Jwmla and annexed 
to Kamaon by the Gorkha power, about thirty years past. In becoming 
subjectito the Cis Himalaya powers, the Bhotias were by no means with- 
drawn from their allegiance to the parent state, but still continued to ac- 
knowledge the supremacy of both; an anomalous state of subjection, which 


their paramount interests in continuing to be the medium. of commercial 


_intercourse between Hindustan and Tartary, will tend to perpetuate. The 


price extracted by each government for its protection, though much the 
same in its component details, is very unequal in its amount. The revenue 
demands of the Tbet government consist of “ Sink Thal,” land revenue. 
“Ya Thal,” tax on sun-shine. “ Kién Thal,” tax on the profits of trade. 

h These 


9G BHOTIA MEHALS 


These items are all levied at fixed and invariable rates. The “ Sink 
Thal” is assessed at twelve ‘“ Polas” of Gur per Kanch, on the Khalsa 
lands; but as a great portion of each village is held rent-free, on former 
grants, the aggregate payments under this head are very trifling. The 
“ Ya Thal,” which, from its name, has probably originated in the migra- 
tory habits of the Tartars, who, during the winter, remove to the, warmest 
situations, is assessed at one cake of “‘ Balma,” or dried yeast per house. 
The above dues are collected by Tbet officers, who visit the Ghats with 
that view: the whole is received in kind, though the Gur and yeast are 
partly commuted for sugar, grain, spirits, and coarse calicoes. The 
“ Kiin Thal” is levied in the shape of transit duties, “ Kin Kal,” at 
the rate of ten per cent: on grain. These are also collected in kind, at 
the first mart visited by the Bhotias, the loads of every tenth sheep, toge- 
ther with the wool on its back, are there taken, unless commuted by the 
payment of twenty-seven ‘‘ Polas” of Gur per sheep. Duties are also 
levied on some few articles, agreeably to the rates fixed by an antient 
tariff; commodities not included in that schedule, pass free. Broadcloth, 
and many articles, the exportation of which from hence commenced ata 
comparatively recent date, fall under the last description. In some cases, 
individuals are subjected to a tax, called “‘ Huro,” or plunder, substituted 
for the “‘ Kitz Kal,” or transit duties, and levied at nearly the same 
rates. This, from its name, should be a species of policestax, an 
insurance against robbery. The inhabitants of the northern village at 
the head of each Ghat, enjoy certain immunities from these duties, 
and are, moreover, authorized by the Trans Himalaya government to 
levy atransit duty of ten per cent. on the salt or borax of the Tibet 
traders visiting the Ghat. This duty, as well as the “ Kidénkal,” paid 
by the Bhotias, is levied only on the first investment of each trader, dur- 
ing the season. | 


In 


OF KAMAON. 27 


In matters of police, the Bhotias are held responsible for the com- 
munication to the neighbouring authorities of all important transactions, 
which may occur in the Himalaya states. The local tribunals take cog- 
nizance of all cases brought before them by the Bhotias, whether originat- 
ing in Tibet or elsewhere. In civil proceedings, the decrees of the court 
written in the Tibet character and language, and sealed by the presiding 
officers, are delivered to the successful parties. A confirmation of these 
documents where they affect general interests, as also of grants exempting 
lands from public assessment, are obtained by the parties concerned from 
succeeding governors. It does not appear, that this government ever ori- 
ginates any enquiry into crimes or offences committed by the Bhotias else- 
where, than in Tibet; nor does it delegate any power, judicial or fiscal, to 
the Bhotia village functionaries. Such are the marks of subjection which 
the mother country continues to demand from the Bhotias. Those exacted 
by their Hindoo conquerors have ever been more costly and more extensive. 
On their final subjugation, the Bhot Mehals were subjected to a tribute 
in gold-dust ; the quantity to be paid by each village, was ascertained and 
recorded in “‘ Kanch,” or Tola, Masa; and Ratti, the detailed cess, fixed 
under these denominations, has since constituted the standard estimate of 
each village, and represents the modes of measurement in use elsewhere. In 
Niti, the assessment was calculated in ‘‘ Damolu,”’ equivalent to half a 


“ Kanch.” The assets made available to the government demand, comprised : 


ist. Profits of trade. 

2d. “ Tandkar,” or loom-tax. 

3d. Produce of agriculture. 

4th. Produce.of jungles, (roots and drugs). 
sth. Musk. 

6th. ‘“ Kota Baz,” hawks. 


7th. ‘* Bhera,” or wild bees’ nests. 
In 


33 BHOTIA MEHALS 


In the Kanungo records, the original Jama is made up of separate 
sums, under these several heads. The aggregate of tribute imposed on 


each Ghat was as follows : 


Kanch. Masa. Ratti. 


JTUWALP ALIS: DOW OMG esd, SOULS LISiowauTlS 

Darmayian Lc, . SON ae wiseomue, 363): Dolsvus 

Byanse ss. 2a eo ae aL en, Tlai9 sO 
Damola 

INKEIFOROD ATG FOR TOOLS. 206 0 O 


Mana appears to have been, from the first, granted in religious assign- 
ment to the temple of Badarindth, therein situate. Byanse, as before 
noticed, was only conquered a few years past by the Gorkhas, the Jama 
paid to its former government, Jumla, has been assumed with the view 
to comparison. The rents of two villages in that Ghat which, as being 
east of the Kali river, fall within the Gorkha territories, are excluded. 
The above formed the ordinary revenue. The Bhotias were, at the same 
time, equally liable with other subjects to the extraordinary demands, in 
the shape of aids and reliefs, on occasions of the marriage of the sovereign, 
or of his son or daughter, of war, &c. But as their assessment included a 
tax on trade, they were:exempted from the payment of transit and bazar 


duties, throughout the dominions of their prince. 


The villages below the Ghats incorporated with these Mehals were 
subjected to the same system of assessment, the only variation being in 
the detail of assets, of which, profits of trade form no part. The absence 
of this item is compensated by the increase under the head of agricul- 
ture, arising from an additional crop. Asa considerable proportion of 


the land in these villages has been gradually acquired by the Bhotias in 


property, 


OF KAMAON. 29 


property, either through grants or purchases, a view of the amount of 
their rents will not be irrelevant. 


Kanch. Masa. Rati. 


Dayan eal. ORL NEE MN SE, 398 5 6 

DAE. ORI SOMO BAY GL AD oy iid gt oO 
Dumola. 

INGHIG he Lea BEET: RS TASB Hew EQS CO?” GO 


This last sum is exclusive of the rents of Joshimath and other vil- 
lages assigned to Badarinath, but which form a part of the district of 
Paenkhanda, in which the Nitti pass is also included; the latter name, 


from being more generally known, has been here adopted. 


Mutual convenience naturally led to the commutation of the original 
article of tribute. The equivalent insilver, was settled at twelve rupees the 
“« Kanch,” and a fixed and permanent valuation was made of various com- 
modities, the produce of Tvbet, or of Bhot, which were received in payment: 
as the market prices of these articles fell below the rates in the original 
schedule, it became the object of the Bhotias to extend their payments in 
them : the proportion was, ultimately, established at one-half in kind, and 
the rest in coin; and in the event of the Bhotias being required to pay 
the whole of their assessment in money, a deduction of twenty-five per 
cent. was allowed on the portion payable in merchandize, such being, in 
point of fact, the actual depreciation in the current prices from the rates 
fixed in the original appraisement. During the government of the Rajas, 
the public demand continued unaltered, though subject in its liquidation to 
the variations, arising from the depreciation above noticed. The greater 
part of the revenue was assigned to the garrisons of forts in the mouths 
of the ghats, and to the payment of the civil local functionaries. The 
residue was collected on the spot, by an Officer annually deputed from 


rl the 


30 BHOTIA MEHALS 


the court for that purpose, to whom also was granted authority for adju- 
dicating the civil and criminal pleas pending among the Bhotias. The 
internal management was left to the Defterts or Patwdris, and to the 
“ Birhas,” or heads of villages, by whom also the detailed cess was ap- 
portioned, being laid every third year wholly on the land, and during the 
intervening period levied in the shape of a capitation, or rather of a pro- 
perty tax. The “ Burhas,” in addition to the usual dues on marriages, 
&e., received a small public allowance from the rents of their respective 
villages: they were also assisted by petty officers, corresponding with the 
Mukaddam and Kotwal of the Hindu village institutions. These, again, 
were similarly remunerated. ‘The garrisons above-mentioned, appear to 
have been retained in the ghats, principally with the view of protecting 
the inhabitants from the incursions of the Bhotias of the neighbouring 
ghats, more particularly of the “ Jdés,’* or natives of “ Jamla,” a Bhotia 


state, eastiof the Kal. 


On the Gorkha invasion, the principal opposition made to their arms 
was from the Bhotias : for the period of nine years, after the submission 
of the rest of Kumaon, the Jwvaris frustrated every effort made for their 
conquest, and it was a consideration of their commercial interests, rather 
than any successes of the invaders, which ultimately induced a subjection 
to that power. This resistance on the part of the Bhotias, joined to an 
exaggerated reputation for wealth, marked them out for peculiar exac- 
tions: the public demand rose gradually to Rupees 7,000 in Niti, 12,500 
in Juwar, 10,000 in Darma, and 5,000 in Byanse, while in some years 
nearly double those sums were extorted, under various pretences, by the 


officers 


* As the Jats of Hindustan are considered of Tartar race, may there not have been some 
original connection between their ancestors and the Jats of Jamia. 


OF KAMAON. 31 


officers employed in the collection. The gross receipts of the inhabitants 
from every source of production, were inadequate to answer such ex- 
cessive impositions, the capital and stock of individuals were gradually 
dissipated in their liquidation, and ultimately a load of debt was incurred 
for that purpose. When both the means and credit of the individual were 
exhausted, emigration became his only resource; in this manner, the 
depopulation of the ghats was rapidly taking place, when the magnitude 
of the evil led to the interference of the Supreme Government. An officer 
of reputation, Captain Bracti1 Tuapa was especially deputed from Nepal, 
for the re-settlement of the Bhot Mehals; under his vigorous superin- 
tendance, the present difficulties of the Bhotias were, in a great degree, 
removed by the enforced restoration of a portion of the exactions, and 
by the reduction of the demands of their creditors to the mere principal 
sum actually advanced ; while the principal source of these difficulties 
was cut off by a remission in the public revenue, reduced to 4,700 for 
Niti, 8,000 for Juwvdr, 7,000 for Darma, 2,700 for Byanse. The establish- 
ed principle of liquidation, half in money and half in merchandise, con- 
tinued in force, but no longer afforded to the Bhotias its former advan- 
tages. The whole of these Mehals were included in the Military 
assignments, and their revenues were either collected by the Assignees 
themselves, or were leased by them to some responsible individual; in 
either case, the demand for the half in merchandise was commonly 
disposed of in gross to some of the Almora Sahas, by whose skilful 
management it was raised to a full equality in value with the money half, 
at the expence of the Bhotias. 


The government Jama was imposed on each Ghat in one gross sum, 
and the detailed assessments left to be settled by the Buérhas among 
themselves: in this measure they always assumed the original amount of 


the village tribute, as the standard for calculation. 


On 


32 BHOTIA MEHALS 


On the introduction of the British government in 1872 Sambat, the 
authorized collections of the two preceding years, were assumed as a 
standard for the Jama of the current year; as the whole demand was 
fixed payable in coin, in Farakhabad Kaldér Rupees, a deduction of 
twenty-five per cent. was granted on the half hitherto paid in merchan- 
dise, and a further deduction to the same amount was allowed for the 
discount on the Gorkha currency. The net Jama, which on the existing 
system was imposed in one gross sum on each Mehal, including the 
villages below, as well as those within the Ghats, stood at Fd. Rupees 


11,565. 


In the year 1875 S. a general abolition of the customs and transit 
duties throughout the province took place; the tax on the profits of trade 
hitherto levied from the Bhotias, as partaking of the same nature, was 
included in that measure: a partial remission on the same account was 
made in the Jama of some of the lower villages, while both in these, and 
in Bhot, the items of musk, bees’ wax, and hawks, were struck out of the 


available assests. By this arrangement, the net revenue was reduced to 


Fd. Rupees 4124. 


This demand continued in force for the remaining term of the first 
triennial settlement, at the second triennial settlement, in 1877 S. and at 
the recent quinquennial settlement, in 1880S. a progressive rise took 
place, on a view of the increase of cultivation, brought about principally by 
the return of tenants, who had emigrated during the Gorkha government, 


and finally amounted to Fd. Rupees 5812. 


The revenue of every year has invariably been liquidated without a 


balance. 


For 


OF KAMAON. 33 


For the internal management of these Mehals, the only public officer 
retained in them is the Patwari, who receives from the village Birhas 
the amount of their Jama, and remits the same to the Sader treasury. 
By this functionary are also made the reports connected with Police, re- 
lating to casualties, &c. Criminal offences are rare ; the total number since 
1815, has been confined to four, of which two were murders, one a case 
of arson, and the fourth a petty theft: the three first-mentioned crimes 
were perpetrated from motives of revenge. In the same period two 
inroads, by subjects of a foreign state, have occurred. In the winter of 
1822, the village of Melam in Juwar, was plundered by a band of Tartars, 
during the periodical absence of its inhabitants. A part of the plunder 
has since been recovered through the authority of the Lhassan viceroy, at 
Gartokh; but the owners have hitherto declined receiving it, unless ac- 
companied with an indemnification for the missing portion. The pro- 
perty in question, consequently, remains in deposit at the Gartokh Police 
Office. The second inroad took place in 1823, at the Byanse Ghat, 
the whole of the villages in which were subjected to a forced contribu- 
tion by a party of Jats, from Jumla, on some antiquated claim of tri- 
bute. The whole plunder amounting to about 2,000 rupees in value, has 


since been recovered and restored through the intervention of the Gorkha 
chiefs in Datit. 


The only manufactures in Bhot are woollens, consisting of blankets, 
and serges of various descriptions; these are partly consumed by the Bho- 
tias, in clothing, tents, &c.; the residue is disposed of in other parts of 
the province: this manufacture is not confined to any distinct class, but 
is carried on indiscriminately by the females of all ranks: the weaving is 
performed sitting, one end of the web being fastened to a stone, or stake 
fixed in the ground, the other secured by a strap to the body of the weav- 
er; the yarn is prepared by the males, who may, at all times, be seen 


k engaged 


34 BHOTIA MEHALS 


engaged in that employment, with a spindle in their hand, and a roll of 


wool round their wrist. 


Trade, as has been already incidentally noticed, forms the primary 
object of importance to the Bhotias, and is the principal, if not sole con- 
sideration which retains them in the unfertile villages of Bhot; now, that 
waste lands, of a far superior quality in the northern pergannas, every 
where present themselves for occupation. The adjoining province of 
Tibet, here called ‘“ Bhot,’ and “ Hiundes,” (snow land) indiscrimi- 
nately, holds out peculiar attractions to commerce. Subjected, by the rigor 
of its climate, to perpetual sterility, it depends on the surrounding coun- 
tries for almost every commodity, both of necessity and of luxury; to 
remedy these deficiencies, it has, at the same time, been amply furnished 
by nature with a variety of valuable products; its rivers and deserts 
abound with gold, in its lakes are produced inexhaustible supplies of salt 
and borax, while to its pastures it is indebted for wool of an unrivalled 
quality. In addition to these staple articles, ‘‘ Hiwndes’ yields many 
other articles of commercial demand, such as drugs, coarse precious stones, 
Chaonr tails, Tangans, &c.: with these wants and resources, the Hiundes 
has naturally attracted the resort of numerous traders from every quar- 
ter, and has, in consequence, become a general mart, in which not only the 
wants of its inhabitants, but the demands of foreign merchants also are 
supplied. A periodical fair takes place annually in September, at Gartokh, 
the residence of the Lhassan viceroy, which is principally attended by 
traders from Hindustan, Ladakh, Cashmer, Tartary, Yarkhand, Lhassa, 
and Seling, or China proper: under the first description are included, the 
Bhotias of this province, though at present those of the Juwdar Ghat, 
alone enjoy the unrestricted privilege of visiting Gartokh. The trade of 
Hiundes is an exclusive system of monopoly and restriction, which ap- 


pears to have been originally established for the encouragement of local 
and 


OF KAMAON. 35 


and particular interests, and is now pertinaciously adhered to, partly 
from a reverence for ancient forms, and partly through the influence of the 
Chinese power. The intercourse to which the Bhotias are admitted, is 
considered as a measure of sufferance, and a formal permission is requi- 
site for its annual renewal. The trade from each Ghat is confined to 
some proximate town, beyond which the Bhotias are prohibited from pro- 
ceeding without especial licence obtained from the local authorities, the 
Juwart Bhotias alone, in consideration of military services rendered by 
their ancestors, enjoying an immunity from these regulations. On the upper 
parts of the Ghats becoming practicable, special missions are dispatched 
by the Bhotias, to their respective marts. These Vaskils are each attend- 
ed by a single follower only, and carry a small offering of established 
value ; on reaching their destination, they make a full report of the state 
of politics and of health in this quarter, the heads of their information 
are taken down in writing, for transmission to the viceroy at Gartokh, 
and they then receive their dismissal, together with a return in gold- 
dust, equivalent to the offering brought by them. AH tuniya officer 
commonly accompanies or immediately follows the Vaktl for the pur- 
pose of verifying the statements made by him, and to collect the tribute 
due from the Bhotias. On the fiat of this officer, depends the re-opening 


of the intercourse. 


This regulation would appear to be intended chiefly as a precaution 
against the introduction of small pox, or other contagious disorders, as even 
the British invasion of the hill states occasioned no interruption in the in- 
tercourse with Hiundes, although that event undoubtedly created a consider- 
able sensation there. When the small pox is ascertained to prevail in 
any Ghat, all communications with its inhabitants is temporarily prohi- 
bited. The commercial operations of the season usually commence by 
the arrival of the Hiuniya traders in Bhol, as the superior strength and 


hardihood 


36 BHOTIA MEHALS 


hardihood of their sheep enable them to cross the snow earlier than the 
Bhotias ; from this period (about the end of July,) till the middle of Octo- 
ber, the flocks of both parties are employed in plying with loads between 
the marts and the Ghat villages. The Hiuniya traders do not visit any 
villages below the Ghats, deterred partly by the jealousy of the Bhotias 
and partly by a dread of the climate. The landholders of the northern 
pergannas, who transport their own produce into Bhot, are deterred by 
the same causes from proceeding to Hiundes; even in Bhot they are pre- 
cluded from dealing directly with the Hiuniyas, whom they may meet 
there, but are compelled to barter their merchandize with the Bhotvas. 
A few of the Almora merchants occasionally visit the nearest marts in 
Hiundes, more particularly Taklakot, at the head of the Byanse pass ; 
but their ignorance of the V%bet dialect, and their want of the means of 
carriage, render them dependant, to a great. degree, on the Bhotias, and 
prevent them from trading in those articles of bulk, such as gram, gir, 
&c. which afford the most certain and profitable returns. The Bhotias, 
consequently, enjoy, to a great extent, a monopoly of the carrying trade 
from Hindustan to Tartary, in the supply of the local demands, in Hiun- 
des, and the system in force there operates to confirm a complete mono- 
poly. The regulation which restricts the trade of each Ghat to a prescribed 
mart, affects the inhabitants of the latter equally with the Bhotias; this 
system is further extended even to individual dealings, and every trader 
has his privileged correspondent, with whom he alone has the right to 
barter. These individual monopolies, if they may be so called, are con- 
sidered as hereditary and disposable property, and where the correspon- 
dent becomes bankrupt, the trader is under the necessity of purchasing the 
right of dealing with some other individual. From successive partitions 
of family property, and from partial transfers, this right of Arath has been 
gradually sub-divided, and many Bhotias collectively, possess a single cor- 
respondent. This system differs so far from that of the Hong merchants 
in 


OF KAMAON. 37 


in China, that it leaves to every Hiuniya the power of trafficking directly 
with the foreign trader, though it restricts his dealings to particular indi- 
viduals: the only persons who appear to be exempt from its operation in 
Hiundes, are the local officers, civil and military, and the Lamas. On the 
dealings of foreign merchants with each other, it has no effect. A brief 


notice of the several principal exports and imports may now be taken. 
EXPORTS. 


Grain forms the staple article of Bhotia export; it may be computed 
that from twenty to thirty thousand maunds of every kind, annually find 
their way to Hiundes, through the five passes collectively; the high prices 
and rapid sale, which this article invariably commands in that country, 
lead to the presumption, that the present state of supply is insufficient to 
the wants of the inhabitants ; but no considerable augmentation in the for- 
mer can be expected to take place with the present inefficient means of 
transport, to which the Bhotias are confined by the difficulties of the 
passes. As the Himdlaya villages yield no disposeable surplus produce, 
the supplies for Hiundes are drawn from other parts of the province, 
chiefly from the northern pergannas. The Bhotias make their purchases 
in the same manner as the Binjaris, by carrying salt to the villages, and 
bartering it for grain. As soon as the loads of the whole flock have been 
exchanged, it is driven to an intermediate depdt, where the grain is stored 
and from whence freshloads ofsalt are brought by the sheep. During the 
cold months this system extends to the midland pergannas ; from the 
end of March the flocks ply in the northern districts, and from the begin- 
ning of May they are employed in transporting the grain from the foot of 
the Ghat to the Himdlaya villages. For the convenience of this traffic, 
the Bhotias have, accordingly, three depdts—one at their Bhot village, the 
second atthe base of the Himdlaya, and the third, some three or four 

1 days’ 


33 BHOTIA MEHALS 


days’ journey below. Grain, to a partial extent, is conveyed by the north- 
ern landholders on their own sheep, to the Himalaya villages, and there 
similarly bartered for salt. The rates of barter which now commonly 
prevail, may be stated as follows. In the midland and northern pergannas, 
from three to four of wheat or rice for one of salt, and within the Ghats, two 
of wheat or rice for one of salt. To the Hiuniyas, however, the Bhotias 
give only one of wheat or rice for two of salt in Bhot, while in Miundes, 
they exact double that proportion. Coarse grains, such as mandua, 
chenna, &c. generally average half the value of the finer descriptions 
above mentioned, in this system of exchange. The advantages of this 
trade to the inhabitants of the northern districts, will be fully appreciated 
on a view of the state of prices, which, at this moment, prevails in differ- 
ent parts of the province. From the nature of the country, its agricul- 
tural produce cannot be made available for distant markets, and the 
fluctuations of price which may there take place have, beyond a certain 
sphere, no influence on prices in the interior. At Almora, which is sup- 
plied from the midland districts of Kamaon (proper), wheat is now selling 
at twenty-five sérs the rupee. In the southern villages, both of Kamaon 
and Garhwal, from whence exportation to Rohilkhand takes place, the 
price is nearly the same. In the whole of the northern pergannas, 
whence the Bhotias derive their supplies, the average price may be 
quoted as still higher. In the western midland pergannas of Garhwal, 
to which none of these demands extend, wheat is selling at two maunds 


the rupee, and purchasers even at that rate are not forthcoming. 


Calicoes.—From the constant use of woollen clothes throughout the 
year, the consumption of cotton fabrics in Hiundes is small; the demand 
is confined to the coarsest descriptions, as quantity, not quality, is the 
first consideration with the Hiuniya purchaser. Europe prints are in 
partial request among the chiefs and foreign merchants. The aggregate 


value 


OF KAMAON. 39 


value of exports, under this head, cannot be estimated at above ten thou- 


sand rupees annually. 


Hard-ware—including cooking utensils of copper, brass, and iron, 
coarse cutlery, swords, matchlocks, &c. is exported to the extent of about 


ten thousand Rupees. 


Broad Cloth.—N ot more than thirty bales, chiefly of a coarse quality 
are annually disposed of by the Bhotias, but did facilities exist for pro- 
curing cloths of the desired qualities and colors, the sales might be very 
considerably increased. The common military colors, such as red, yel- 
low, blue, green, and grey, are the only ones generally procurable by the 
Bhotias—of some of these colors, the use in Tartary is confined to pecu- 
liar sects and classes, and for the others, the taste has been long exhausted. 
Cloths of unusual color, such as olive, various shades of brown, &c. 
invariably command a quick sale. The enormous advance laid by the 
Bhotias on the prices of this, as well as other articles of export, must 


also tend to lessen the demand. 


Coral—is prized, as an ornament for females, even above precious 
Stones ; the large bright scarlet beads of Mediterranean coral, will com- 
mand almost any price. Inferior descriptions also command a ready sale, 


though at lower rates. 


Pearls,—In these, size is the principal desideratum, shape and color 
are points of less importance ; no difficulty is consequently experienced 
in supplying the demand to its full extent. The export in this, and the 


preceding article, averages about five thousand rupees in value annually. 


Gur—about one thousand maunds. 


xv . . 
Suga 


AO BHOTIA MEHALS 


Sugar Candy—one hundred maunds. 
Spices—ten maunds. 
Dyes—chiefly lac and indigo, ten maunds. 


Wooden Vessels—chiefly cups for tea, are in considerable demand; 
there are turned from various kinds of wood ; those in greatest request are 
formed of the knot of a particular tree, which is to be found only in the 
eastern hills, near and beyond Katmandu, whither the turners from Bhot 
annually resort. Tea-cups of this wood are deemed by the Tartars to 
possess peculiar virtues, and an unblemished specimen will sell as high 
as fifty rupees ; the price of ordinary cups varies from four annas to two 


rupees each. 


Timber—in the shape of spars and planks, for building, is carried 
for sale to the nearest marts. Indigent Bhotias, who have no other capi- 


tal but their labor, carry on this traffic. 


Cabinet-ware, glass-ware, and a variety of other commodities are parti- 


ally exported : their ageregate value may be assumed at ten thousand rupees. 
IMPORTS. 


Salt—-the natural produce of lakes in Hiundes, is universally pre- 
ferred in this province, for culinary purposes, to the Sdmbher and other 
cheap kinds of salt, from the plains: the latter are considered compara- 
tively bitter and unpalatable, and are only used for cattle. The relative 
prices of the two kinds of salts in question at Almora, are from six to 


seven rupees the maund for Bhot, and three to four rupees for plain salt. 
The 


OF KAMAON. Al 


The Bhotias never part with their salt, except in barter for agricultural 
produce, and by adhering rigidly to this ryle, they are enabled to command 
a supply of the latter, even in the most unfavourable seasons. The total 


quantity of salt imported, may be assumed one year with another at 
fifteen thousand maunds. 


Tincal—also the natural produce of a lake in Hiundes, for some 
years subsequent to 1815, formed the most profitable article of specula- 
tion, but the demand has now greatly declined. During the Gorkha 
government, that is, up to 1814, not more than a thousand to fifteen hun- 
dred maunds of tincal ever reached the plains through this province during 
the year. On the British invasion, and even before the conquest, was 
completed, large advances were made by British merchants to the Bhotias, 
for the provision of this article. By the competition among the former, 
the amount of their advances was rapidly augmented up to 1818, when the 
quantity imported exceeded twenty thousand maunds, as it did also in the 
two following years 1818 and 1819. This import, as compared with the 
demand in England, for which market it was chiefly intended, would ap- 
pear to have been excessive. Heavy losses, and a consequent withdrawal 
of capital from the speculation were the consequences. The supply has 
since as rapidly decreased, and may be now stated, at seven to eight 
thousand maunds. During the above periods, the price has been subject 
to the same fluctuations up to 1814, the market rate of this article, in 
its unpicked state, never exceeded three and a half rupees the maund, at 
the marts of Kdsipur and Beldri; in 1818, it had risen to fourteen 
rupees the maund, and some partial sales were made in that year 
as high as sixteen rupees; during the two following years 1819-20, 
the price ranged between twelve and fourteen ; it has since gradually fallen 
to eight, at which it may now be quoted. ‘The article is imported by the 


Bhotias, in its original state, as procured from the lake. By the merchants 


m the 


4D, BHOTIA MEHALS 


the tincal, or natural crystals, are picked for the Europe market, and 
the dust is prepared into refined borax. The residuum, consisting of 
river sand, is always considerable, varying in different years, from twenty 
to above thirty per cent. The Bhotias are not accused of adulterating 
the article, though the petty hill traders, who purchased it from them, 
were, for some time, guilty of such practice to a great extent; the refusal 
of the plain merchants to take the article from these people, except with 
a specific assurance against loss in refining, beyond a given proportion, 
has checked this fraud. The prices in Hiundes correspond with those 
of salt—this article being similarly obtained in barter for grain. A view 


of the state of import in Great Britain, during the period in discussion, 


may not be irrelevant :— 


Years. Value. Years. Value. Years. Value. 


1814.... £10,620 1817.... £32,573 1820.... £209,175 


1815.... 59,200 1818.... 76,666 1821.... 51,651 
1816.... 103,301 1819.... 215,591 1822..... 25,268 


The above statement is taken from a periodical publication, where it is 


given in the amount of Indian import alone. 


Wool—the produce of the Tartar sheep, known in commerce under 
the name of berjengi, is imported to the extent of five or six hundred 
maunds—part of which is consumed by the Bhotias in the manufacture of 
« Pankhis,’* and the remainder is taken off by the zemindars of the 


northern pergannas, for blankets; the money price may be stated at 
fourteen 


* The Pankhi is a species of serge, varying in quality, some having the wool left long on 


one side. 


OF KAMAON. 43 


fourteen to fifteen rupees the maund, but it is usually disposed of by the 
Bhotias in barter for oil, or other produce. The supply above noticed is 
almost wholly obtained from the flocks of Hiwniya sheep, which visit 


Bhot, laden with salt, or borax, and are there shorn. 


Shawl Wool—the produce of the Tibet goat, was temporarily im- 
ported during three years, with a view to the provision of the Compa- 
ny’s investment: this demand has since ceased. This article may be 
procured, through the Bhotzas, to any extent, deliverable at Bagéswar in 
its rough state, mixed with hair, at from thirty-six to forty rupees the 


maund. 


Gold-dust—procured from the sands of every river in Hiundes, and 
also obtained in small lumps by digging near the surface in various parts 
of the deserts, is imported in small quantities. The frauds found to be 
practised by the Hiuntyas or Bhotias, in alloying this metal and in mix- 
ing copper or brass filings with the dust, have created a general distrust 
in the purchase of this article: not more than hundred phetangs, or eight 


hundred rupees worth annually find a sale. 


The remaining articles of import, comprising coarse shawls and 
pattu, inferior silks, cow-tails, ponies, drugs, dried fruits, harital, saffron, 
cured leather, similar to the Russian, &c. &c., may be assumed at twenty 


thousand rupees annual value. 


As during some years from 1816 to 1821, the value of the imports 
greatly exceeded that of the exports, the deficiency on the latter was 
supplied by coin. Furakhabad new rupees, to a considerable amount, 
then found their way to Hiundes, of which they became the favorite cur- 


rency. 
It 


4A BHOTIA MEHALS 


It now only remains to offer a few observations on the former and 
present state of this commerce. During the time of the Rajas, the Juwari 
Bhotias alone traded on the products and manufactures of the plains, the 
Bhotias of the other Ghats confining their dealings to grain ; these latter 
under the Gorkhali government, have extended their speculations, and the 
trade of the Juwaris differs from that of the other Bhotias now, only in 
its superior extent. In the early stages of this commerce a regulated and 
fixed assize appears to have been made by the T'rans-Himalaya govern- 
ment, agreeably to which the commodities of the two countries were re- 
quired to be bartered against each other. The commodities of Hindusthan, 
from the smallness of the supply, and from the exactions and robberies 
to which they were subject in transit through the hills, were appraised at 
high rates; though these causes have been wholly or partially removed, 
their original effects remain in force, and the Bhotias continue to exact, 
the old and arbitrary prices. Since 1815, a most material improvement in 
favor of these traders has taken place; by the encreased facilities of com- 
munication with the plains and by the total abolition of. transit duties, 
the imports from thence are now furnished in greater abundance and at 
reduced prices, at the same time by the influx of capital from the same 
quarter, the demand and value of every article of import from Tartary, 
have been considerably enhanced : of these advantages, encrease of sales 
is the only one of which the Hiuntyas have partaken in common with 
the Bhotias. Were more equitable principles to be introduced in the 
transactions of this commerce and were the commodities of Hindusthan and 
Europe, offered on fairer terms in the Hiuniya market, it is difficult to 
say to what extent the demand might be augmented, while the Bhotias 
retain their existing monopoly no such desirable modifications can be 
anticipated, as a continuance of the present exhorbitant rates of profit is 
almost indispensible to avert general bankruptcy, which must otherwise 
result from the heavy load of debts, with which the Bholias are universally 

saddled. 


— 


OF KAMAON. 45 


saddled. From the establishment ofa direct intercourse between the 
Almora merchants and those of Tartary, the desired object will doubtless 
be gradually gained, the same capital will continue vested in the trade, 
but the whole profit of the speculation will there fall to the capitalists, 
while the losses to which the latter is now constantly subjected from the 
failure of the intermediate trader, will be prevented; under such circum- 
stances the rates of profit would naturally be lowered, and the demand 
and supply of exports from Hindusthan might be expected to increase. 
To the Bhotia the disadvantages resulting from such a change would be 
more apparent than real, in the trade of the most profitable article of bar- 
ter, grain, little or no competition could be offered, and though he might 
no longer be able to speculate in the commerce between Hindusthan and 
Tartary, yet the necessity of his services as a carrier would always 
enable him to command a considerable proportion of the gross returns of 
that trade. 


It would here be desirable to offer some accounts of the adjoining 
Trans-Himalaya state, but the watchful care with which the entrance of 
Europeans is prevented, the extreme precautions with which Natives of 
India, not Bhotias, are admitted, and the jealous restrictions to which even 
the Bhotias are subjected, preclude the acquisition of any particular and 
authentic information on points, connected with the local administration 
and resources of that country; a few general notices may, however, be 
given. 


The province of Hiundes is by its inhabitants called «“ Narz,” while 
at Ladakh and to the westward, it appears to be known by the name of 
Chang or Jhang Tang, an appellation nearly synonimous with Hiundes. 
It is subject directly to the Lama at Lassa, and is administered by offi- 
cers deputed or appointed from thence. 

n The 


AG BHOTIA MEHALS 


The chief government is entrusted to two Officers conjointly, who are 
called Garphans, with the additional title of Urgéi Ma, and Urgii Ya. 
They reside at Gartokh, and are relieved after three years: natives of 
Lassa and of that neighbourhood, are invariably nominated to these situa- 
tions. The province is subdivided into districts, each containing a certain 
number of towns and villages. The internal administration in each dis- 
trict is similarly confided to two officers, called the Deba, and Vazir, 
whose appointment also emanates from Lassa; the Deba, commonly a na- 
tive of the eastern provinces, is also changed every three years ; the Vazir 
who is one of the principal inhabitants of the district, holds his situation 
during good behaviour. The measures of these officers are subject to the 


controul of the governors at Gartokh. 


The Urgi Ma and Deba appear respectively to enjoy superior conse- 
quence and consideration, but to give effect to their acts the concurrence 


of their colleague is indispensible. 


The only regular military force in the province is said to consist of 
two hundred horse, stationed at Gartokh ; this body must have been ori- 
ginally recruited from Tartary, as the men of which it is composed are 
described by the Bhotias as a horse eating race. Each town and village 
has its enrolled militia, liable to be called upon whenever their services 
are required. The religious institutions are under the exclusive control 
of the provincial and district Lamas, who also appear to exercise consi- 


derable influence in the local civil administration. 


A rapid communication with the Capital, Lassa, is kept up by means 
of a horse post, the stages are from fifteen to twenty miles apart, and four 


horses with their riders are retained at each. 


The 


OF KAMAON. An 


The several public establishments are all remunerated by grants of 
revenue in its different branches. These latter have already been enu- 
merated (para. 37). Of the aggregate resources of the province no esti- 
mate can be obtained; from the concurrent testimony of the Bhotvas, it 
would appear that the Hiuniyas are grievously taxed and oppressed 
under their theocratical form of government. The towns and marts to 


which the trade from each Ghat is respectively confined, are as follows : 


Mana, .. to .. Chaprang. Dharma, .. to .. Kiunlang. 
Niti, .. to .. Dapa. Byanse, .. to .. Taklakot. 


These are severally the principal towns of districts, and as such the 
residence of a Deba and a Vazir. The Juwdit, as before observed, have 


a general licence to trade in every part of the province. 


Few opportunities have occurred for obtaining an insight into the 
peculiar usages and customs of the Bhotias, as when down in the Hindu 
portion of the province,—they conform generally to the practises in use 
there. In their personal appearance the Bhotias are perfect Tartars, and 
exceed the natives of this province in size and stature, more particularly 
the Dharma Bhotias, among whom individuals possessing extraordinary 


strength are far from uncommon. 


The dress of the male sex is in all the Ghats nearly similar, consisting 
of the common eastern robe and loose trowsers, with a skull cap, all of 
woollen stuff, to these is added a kamarband of calico. The Dharma 
and Byanse Bhotias invariably wear woollen boots, reaching nearly to the 
knee: these are composed of stuffs of different colors sewn chequerwise. 


The soles are of buffalo-hide. 


The 


AS BHOTIA MEHALS 


The Bhotias of the other Ghats also use boots, of plain woollen stuff, 
when travelling over snow. In the Mana, Nitti and Juwdr Ghats, the 
females adopted the dress worn by the same sex, and corresponding 
classes in the northern pargannas. The Dharma and Byanse women 
retain a Tartar dress. This consists of a web of cloth folded round the 
body, and descending from the waist to the ancles in the form of a 
petticoat, at the waist it is secured by a girdle, commonly of leather: 
above this is a shift without sleeves, reaching below the knee, while 
above all is a narrow hood fixed on the top of the head and covering all 
but the face, shewing a tail descending down the back nearly to the 
heels ; a pair of boots, similar to those of the men, completes the equip- 
ment. The above articles of dress are all made from woollen stuff dyed 
either red or dark blue, having narrow white stripes. The ornaments of 
these ladies baffle description and bear no resemblauce to any thing worn 
elsewhere : the most prominent are the ear-rings, commonly of pewter, 
which in size and shape, may be compared to a massive house door key. 
Strings of large pieces of coarse amber are worn round the neck in addi- 
tion to two or three indescribable necklaces. The Bhotias of both sexes, 
and of all classes in every Ghat, carry suspended from the waistband by 
small chains or thongs of leather, a variety of instruments of daily use, — 
such as knife, Spoon, scissars, awl, packing needle, tweezers, steel flint, 
tobacco, paunch, &c. The Bhotias consume large quantities of food, 
particularly of animal, of which a constant supply is afforded to them in 
the carcases of their sheep and goats which die from fatigue or disease. 
The Mana, Nitti and Juwdr Bhotias scrupulously abstain from the use of 
beef of every description; by the Dharma and Byanse Bhotias the Chownr- 
Gae is eaten, and the common kine would probably not be spared by them, 
but for the general prohibition against the slaughter of that animal which 
is in force in this province. The Bhotias are much addicted to the use of 
spirituous liquors, in extenuation of which practice they plead necessity 

from 


OF KAMAON. 49 


from the nature of the climate in Bhot ; when collected together in any 
place, they have frequent drinking parties, which are continued during 
the whole night, and sometimes kept up even for the ensuing day. Intox- 
ication with them does not, however, lead to riot or disorder. The liquor 
in use is of two descriptions—‘ Dédru,” or Whisky, produced by distilla- 
tion, and “Jan,” obtained by simple fermentation: the latter is the favo- 
rite beverage. Both are procured from rice: to hasten the fermentation 
dried yeast, ‘‘ Balma,” reduced to powder, is added : a few hours only are 
required to render the “‘ Jan” fit for use. The “‘ Balma” is prepared from 
the meal of barley or other coarse grain, on which an infusion of the ber- 
ries or sprigs of the juniper, or of the “ Svir7,” in water is made to filter : 
the dough is kneaded, and when ready, dried in small cakes for keeping. 
The Balma is said to retain its properties for many years: its manu- 
facture, which is tedious, forms the exclusive occupation of particular 


individuals. 


Of the Bhotias, it may be observed generally, that they are an honest, 
industrious and orderly race, possessed of much good humour and patience: 
in their habits they are commonly dirty, more particularly the Dharmias, 
who openly profess an hereditary prejudice against ablutions of every 
kind; to this profession they fully act, and, except on particular occasions 
of religious ceremony, never wash either their hands or face. The skirts 
of their dress serve to cleanse both their persons and their cooking uten- 
sils—to scrub the latter, either with sand or water, would, they conceive, 
be attended by disastrous consequences, as already noticed in treating of 
the climate. 


o In 


50 BHOTIA MEHALS OF KAMAON. 


In concluding this report, it may be added, that, on those points of 
rural and domestic economy which have been passed unnoticed, little or 
no variation exists from the practices followed in other parts of the pro- 


vince, and already detailed in a previous report. 


II. 


Il. 


AN ESSAY 


THE EXTRACTION OF THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 


By JOHN TYTLER. 


Ir any integer value greater than unity be assigned to the Symbol 10, and 
the letters a, 6, c, d, &c. be each some integer less than 10 so determined, 
and 2 be also some integer, then, as is well known, all finite integers, and 


some fractions, may be expressed by a’series of this form— 


n n—l n—2 —3 


n 
G10 0 ERG TORoNSe40500 i) be A100 lo&el 


(2.) The value generally assigned to 10 for this purpose, is the num- 
ber of the human fingers, the integers a, b, c, d, &c. are called Digits ; and 


fractions expressible by this series, are called Decimal Fractions 


(3.) Now the problem which the art of Arithmetic properly so called, 


proposes to resolve is this, having A and B, two numbers expressed by 
P 


52 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


the above series, it is proposed to express Z, by a similar series, in the 


following seven equations. 


ota Ae Aas os TVs Aves BS Ze 
B 
TE Ae Be Vo. Aes 
TE A Xe Bs 47: VI A Z. 
Vi. A EB 


All other operations on numbers, belong either to the synthetical or 


analytical part of Algebra. 


(4.) These operations, in the above order, successively become more 
and more complicated, and hence to form an estimate of the state of arith- 
metic among any people, it is sufficient to enquire into the method by 
which they perform the most complicated of these operations with which 


they are acquainted. 


(5.) Conformably to this, I here propose to enquire into the method 
by which the Arabians, supposing A and B to be integers, express Z in the 


sixth equation or A = Zz or in other words, the Arabian method of 
extracting the Roots of integer powers. This method is contained in 
the Ayoun-ul-Hisab, a book, respecting which the reader will see all 
that I know in vol. XIII. of the Researches, p. 461. I believe the Arabs 
never attempted any general method for the seventh equation, which is 
the foundation of the Theory of Logarithms, except mere tentation. 
The extent of their knowledge on the subject of negative exponents, 
may be seen either in Mr. Stracuey’s History of Algebra, published 
in the Asiatic Researches, vol. XIL. p. 177, or in the Calcutta edition of 
the Arabico-Persic Kholasut-ul-Hisab, p. 313, et seq. I do not find any 


trace of their acquaintance with fractional exponents. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 53 


(6.) Jam induced to hope that this enquiry may be the more interest- 
ing, from not having been able to find it undertaken any where else ; it is 
neither mentioned in Mr. Coresrooxe’s elaborate translations of Sanscrit 
Algebra and Arithmetic, nor in Dr. Taytor’s Lilawati. Inthe Researches 
vol. XII. Mr. Srracuey gives from the Kholasut-ul-Hisab, a full and 
accurate account of Arabian Arithmetic, as far as Multiplication, but is 
silent respecting the extraction of Roots. He observes, p. 171—“‘ On the: 
other Rules nothing is delivered differing so much from those contained 
in our common books of Arithmetic, as to require specific mention.” Mr. 
STRACHEY was probably led into this opinion from his having only consult- 
ed the Kholasut-ul-Hisab, a work far inferior, as I have reason to believe, 
either to the Ayoun-ul- Hisab, or its predecessor, the Miftah-ul-Hisab, and 
which contains no more than the extraction of the Square Root. To that 
edition of the Kholasué-ul-Hisab, which was printed at Calcutta in 1812, 
with a Persian translation, by Mouluvee Roshun Alee, (1 presume the 
same mentioned by Mr. Srracuey at p. 167, ibid.) there is indeed added an 
Appendix, containing the extraction the Cube Root, by Nujm-Uddeen Alce 
Khan; but this last contains no more than the bare rule, goes to no higher 
powers, and sets out by declaring, wu.) wl BR yep upne ois Nan ra p= | 
p-. 466. ‘ The extraction of the Cube is one of the greatest difficulties in 
the science of Arithmetic.” And even this rule, as far as I can find, has 


never been translated into English. 


(7.) In the 35th number of the Edinburgh Review, Professor Piay- 
FAIR (1 suppose) employs pages 201 and 202 in explaining the method 
used by the Greeks, for the extraction of the Square Root: and this pre- 
cedent will, I hope, be a sufficient justification of me for employing so 


much time upon the present subject. 


(8.) For this purpose it will be necessary to have a general demon- 


stration of the extraction of the Roots of all powers, and as it would 


54 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


perhaps be difficult to refer to a book in which this is detailed so minutely 
as is required here, I shall endeavour to give one, and shall, accordingly, 


arrange the present Essay in the following order. There shall be given— 


I. A general demonstration of the extraction of the Roots of all 


powers. 


If. An example of this operation after the common European 


method, exhibiting its conformity to the demonstration. 


Tif. A similar example after the Arabian method, with a similar 
exhibition. i 


IV. Anextract from the original Ayoun-ul-Hisab, containing the 


Rule, together with a translation and remarks. 
(9.) Then to begin orderly— 


I. In this demonstration, the symbol Z shall be used to express 
less than > to express greater than, and then the following Lemmas must 


be premised. 
Lemma 1. The x™ power of 10 is 1 with »cyphers to its right hand. 


‘Thus the first power of 10 is 10, the second is 100, the third is 1,000, 
the fourth is 10,000, &c. that is 1 with 1, 2, 3, 4, &c. cyphers to its right 


UA 


hand. 


Lem. 2. Hence the n™ power of 10 contains x + 1 figures, and is 


the least possible number which can do so. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 55 


For 10 contains 2, or 1 + 1 figures and all less numbers contain only 
one, again 100 contains 3 or 2 + 1 figures, and all less numbers contain 
only oneor two, again 1000 contains 4 or 3 + 1 figures, and all less numbers 


contain only one, two, or three, and 10=10', 100=107, 1,000=103, &c. 


Lem. 3. Hence the x™ power of a Digit, as defined in paragraph 2, 


cannot contain more than x figures. 


. For let a be any Digit then a* Z 10°, but 10" is the least number 
which contains x + 1 figures, hence a® must contain less than » + 1 


figures, that is not more than n. 
Lem. 4. The greatest number which contains only x figures is 10°—1. 


For the greatest number with 2 figures is 99 = 100 — 1 = 10’—1. 
The greatest number with 3 figures is 999 = 1,000—1 = 103— 1. The 
greatest number with 4 figures is 9,999 = 10,000 — 1 = 10*— 1, &c. 


Lem. 5. Let a be the number of figures in the integer A. Then the 


number of figures in A* is not greater than za, nor less than m (a—1) + 1. 


For by Lem. 4. since there are a figures in A, so the maximum 


of A is 10°*—1, and maximum of A® is 10*—1 | which is evidently less 


an 
than 10| or 10%. But 10% is by Lem. 2. the least number which can 
contain an + 1 figures. And hence (10*—1)* or A*® must contain less than 


an + 1 figures, that is not more than an. 


Again, since there are a figures in A, so by Lemma 2 the minimum 


of A is 10° and minimum of A’ is 10°"| = 10°" and by Lem. 2 10°""" 


contains (a—1) x + 1 figures. 


56 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(10.) It would take up a great deal of room to go on demonstrating 
the following propositions generally for every value of x. It will be much 
shorter, and equally legitimate, to fix upon an individual index, and 
demonstrate the extraction of that Root, and then the demonstration 
may be easily extended to any other Power whatever, by means of the 
Binomial Theorem. In doing this, I must endeavour not to assign the 
value of the index » so high as to render the process unnecessarily prolix 
and cumbersome, and, on the other hand, it must not be taken so low as to 
render its extension to higher values, obscure and unsatisfactory. Be- 
tween these two extremes, I shall chuse the number 6, and, making »=6, 


shall proceed to demonstrate the extraction of the 6th Root. 


(11.) By the Binomial Theorem (#+2z)* = a° + Ga5z + 154427 + 202323 
+ 15a*2* + Gaze + 2°. 


andhence «+2 = a® + 6arz + 15a4*2° + 200323 + 154724 + 6a25 +2°. 


Now let s andtbe any real numbers, and there be given the number 
s§+t, in which s is known, then if there can be found a number such, that 
6 s> x that found number 7 


15° s* x that found number | | When all added together, the 
3 


20° s? x that found number | sum should be = é, then is 
‘i 4 


r 


s + that found number, the 
Gth Root of s° + 6. 


15° s* X that found number | 


5 
6s that found number | 
6 


that found number | 


SS 


For let this found number be w, then evidently the above expression 
becomes 
6s) Kw + 15st x w + 208? x w 4 15s? x wt + 6s X ww Se 
and then 8 + 68° + L5s'u? 4 205°? 4 15s’u*t + 6s + wos +t 


iL Re ‘ 
and then | s° +t ig 4 6s 15s‘? 4 20s°u? 4. lds’us 4. Gsu? + wv = 8 fw 
as above by Binomial Theorem. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. a7 


(12.) But if no such number can be found then is s°+éa surd to the 


Bs cafe Nea 
6th Power. If not, let s°+¢ be Rational, and let | s°+é¢ =v. Theneither 


OAS 7 = Or >s. 


First let » = s then v° = s® and Z s* + é. But by supposition 


Gilimgerr nes, S . 
v= | s°+¢ and also v° =s°+¢, which is absurd. 


Second. Let v Z s, then by similar reasoning v° is Z s° 
and consequently Z s° + ¢ and also = s*® + ¢, which is also ab- 
surd. 


Third Let v > sandletv—=s+w. Thenv® = (s+w) =s' +8 
=s° +6385 w + 15 54 w* + 20 53 w? +:15 57 wt + 6sws + w’. Hence w 
answers the conditions of par. 11, which yet by supposition no number 


can answer, which is also absurd. ‘ 


(13.) Let then s* + ¢ be integers and thus irrational, and let w be the 
greatest possible integer such that 655 w + 15 st u% + 20 53 w3 + 15 s* u* 
+ 6suw + u° Zt, then is s + uw, the greatest integral approximate 6th 
Root of s° + ¢. That is (s + u)°Z s° + tand(s +u+1)° >s6+¢. For 
if not let v be an integer > s + uw and such that v° Z s° + ¢. Then since 
v>s+t+uands+u>ssoalsov >s. Letv = s + wand then as before 
v=—(stwy=s? +65 w +15 s* we + 2053 w3 + 1557 wt + 6505 
+ w° and Z s° + ¢. Subtract s* from both sides, there remains 6 s° w 
+ 15 s* w* + 20 s? w? + 1557 wt + 6Gsw> + ww Z t. But sincev > 
s+uandv = s + wsow > u, and fulfils the conditions of par. 11, 
consequently w both is, and is not the greatest number that fulfils these 
conditions, which is absurd. 


58 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(14.) For the same reasons as in par. 10, I shall suppose the present 
operation to be performed on a number whose 6th Root consists of 6 
figures. Let then M be a surd to the 6th power, and let its approximate 
6th Root be m,sothatm® Z and (m+ 1)§ > M. Then since mconsists by 
supposition of 6 figures, so M will contain not more than 36, nor less 
than 31 figures. 


If not, then either M contains fewer figures than 31, or more than 36. 


First, let M contain fewer than 31. Now since m contains 6 figures, so 
by Lem. 5, m° contains at least 6 x 5 + 1, or 31 figures, which is absurd. 


Second, let M contain more than 36. Now since maximum of m by 


Lem. 4 is 10°—1 so maximum of m + 1 is 10° and hence maximum of 


6 
(m + 1)% is 10° | or 103° which by Lem. 2 is the least number that can 
contain 37 figures. But M Z (m + 1)° by supposition. That is, M must 
always be less than the least number with 37 figures, and, consequently, 


cannot contain more than 36. 


(15.) Asamedium, let us suppose that M contains 33 figures, then by 
the known properties of the series of par. 1, » will there be = 32, and M 
may be thus represented, supposing the coefficients of the powers of 10 to 
be Digits. | 


a: 10> + b 10" +e 10% +d: 107? +e 10*° + f° 10°77 4 g- 10% 
4 hy 10% 4+ & 1074 4 7 10% + k 10% +0 10 + m: 10*° + n° 10° 
+p: 10% + g 10°? + 7° 10° + 5s 10'S 4+ & 10°* + uw 10 + wv 10% 
+ w 10" + a 10'° + y° 109 4 2 108 + a 107 + 6 10° + y. 10° 
+0 10* + «103? +2 10% + 2. 10 + 4. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 59 


For abbreviation, let @ be put = 10 and let M be distinguished into 


parts or periods of 6 figures each, counting from the units place, that 


is, from 6 backwards. 


abs d og? 
+e? 
+4 9" 
+ wo" 
+7 @ 


+ (a @ 
+9 
+ (Y? 
+ (woe 
+7? 


d ¢ 
Iv 
gv 
w ge 


¥ ¢° 


Then M will assume this appearance. 


2 Ouchi BOF ott PY 
te C8 - f.@77 tee 25 by hi Gh ott, "4 
Tile Cae OG MIDE che MeO. POLE 
+rge4+sG¢5 +t Ot + uo 4+ v o% 
fe OO ty Po 28 +2 go" +6 9° 
Be POY PE tie OF. Pct Cie ee ly yb 

which is equal to 

(ag? +59 +0) xX o% 
Hee tfPo teeth +4) x ** 
tike* +18 Fimo? +tao,+p) x 
HT Oh S20) MibkeotaO2s hn B® sf Pe Onir% OFF 
ee" Bye?) iz-02., + «@ + 8) X 9° 
Ay 8 Ob cE + Oh oA Gre? A ob. ne A shail 
Then for abbreviation let there be put 

Oe Heo @.. Lee pa A 
tegtfe +e +ho +? oB 
+ke4tile +me +ne +p =O 
tre ts¢g + Ee +ug +H =D 
tee ye -AaP tap +8 = B 
ie et A Slelack Ge ot Td ile pila oe F 

And then M becomes 

+Bo*4+Cee +Der + ER +F. 


A o” 


which a very little consideration will shew may be thus expressed— 


Ag’+B 


peak 


+E | o+F 


in which expression A contains only 3 figures, and B, C, D, E and F 


¥ 


R 


each contain 6, and hence by Lem. 4 each of these numbers Z 9°. 


60... AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(17). Now let the highest approximate 6th Root of A be a, so that 
a Zand(a +1) >A. Thenisaa Digit. Ifnota = or > ¢. 


First. Leta = 9, then a® = ¢° and contains 7 figures by Lem. 2, 


and yet A only contains 3 figures, which is absurd. A fortiori a cannot 


be > 9¢. 


(18). Let A—a® = R, then RZ 6a> + 15 a* + 200° +150’ 4+ 6a 
+1. [fnot R= or'> 6 a 151a* 4 20-0 115 @? 46 a + 1. 


First, let it be equal. Then A — a = 6a + 15 a* + 20a° 4 15a’ 
+6a+1,andAza 4+ 604 15a* +20a@ 4 15a? +6a+1= 
(a + 1). And yet by supposition A Z ( a+ 1)’—which is absurd. 


Second, a fortiori it cannot be greater. 


(19.) Since A—a® = RandA=a°+ R,soA+ B= (a +R) 
B= @ gf Re VB jae" e “Roe ss B). Now since 


OQ a 


[a el * = a@ so by Par. 13) a @ will here represent the S and R ¢° + 
B the ¢ of that Paragraph and if 6 be the greatest possible integer such 
that’ 6. @° 9"| 5° 4 15 ae | 4-62 + 20c-a oil? OF 4° 1S ae | 20 * 
6. aq. 65 + b® that is, 6a’ ¢. b+ 15 a* 9* 62 + 200a0° Pb 4+ 15 a? 2 6? 
+ 6a 96° + 6° should be less than R g* + B,thenis ag + 6 the 
highest approximate 6 Root of a g|° + Re® + BorAg® + B. and & 
will represent the u of Par. 13). 


(20.) In this case 6 when found must be a Digit. If not 6 =or>¢. 
First. Let 6= o. Then 6 a g5b 4+ 15a*@* 8? +200 ¢? B+ 


bad go 4+ 6apb + R= Gare + 15 ag + 20a oP + 15a? gy + 
6a¢°+¢°. Now R by Par. 18 2 6a + 15 at + 20 a + 15 a? + 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 61 


6a + 1, and since R is an integer, so Maximum of R is 6 a5 + 15 a* + 
20 a? + 15 a -+- 6a, and Maximum of R ¢° is 6 a5 9° + 15 a* 9 + 20a 
o + 15a? ¢ + 6a ¢°. Again by Par. 17). B contains 6 figures and 
hence by Lem 4). Maximum of B is g’—1. Hence Maximum of R ¢° 
+Bis6a°o? + 15 a*¢e + 2008 4+ 15 a2 9 + Gae’ + —1. 
But 6 a ¢ + 15 a* ¢° +20 a> 9° + 15 a* ¢° + Gag® + 9° exceeds 6 a3 
go? +15 a* ¢% + 20a3 9° + 15 a2 ¢*§ + Gag? + o®—1, by Unit. That 
is, 1f6 = 9, then6a0° b+ 15407 ¢* 6? +200 ¢ 6? + 15a? 9? b*+ 64a 
o 6° + b°, must exceed Rg* + Bat least by 1, and yet is also Z R g® + 
B which is absurd. <A fortiori b cannot be > @. 


(21.) Then let A g° + Bbeput = P andao + b= »p, then since p 
is the approximate Root of P, so p* Zand (p + 1)° >P. Let P—p* = R’. 
Then is R’ Z 6 p> + 15 p* + 20 p>? 4+ 15p*? +6 p+ 1. Ifnot Rh’ = or 
> 6 pS + 15 p* + 20p? 4+ 15 p? + Gp + 1. 


First. Let it be equal. Then P—p* = 6 p> + 15 p* + 20 p? + 15p* 
+6p+i,andP = p°'+6pi 4 15 p+ + 20p? + 15p? + 6p4+1i= 
(p + 1)*. And yet by supposition P Z (p + 1)® which is absurd. Second. 


A fortiori it cannot be greater. 


(22.) Since P—p* = R’ andP =p* + R/soP 9° +C =A o* + Bio? 
+ C = (p? + BR) oe + C= poe + Roe + C= pol? + (R’o* +O). 
Now since ] P 9|° = po@so by Par. 13). p go will here represent the S and 
R’o° + C the ¢ of that Paragraph, and if ¢ be the greatest possible integer 
such that 6 po|5c + 15° po\4c? +20: pol|3c? + 15° po|%c* + 6p 
pc> +c° that is 6 p> g5 c + 15 p* o* c*? +20 p’erc? + 15 p* 92 c+ + Cp 
gc® + c° should be less than R’ g° + C then is p » + ¢ the highest ap- 
proximate 6th Root of pg|* + R’o® + Cor P 9° +Cor|Ag? + B| g° 
-+- C and ¢ will represent the w of Par. 13). 


62 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(23.) In this case c when found must bea Digit. If note = or > o 


First, let c = 9 then 6 p’ 9° c + 15 p* 9* c* + 20p? g*c3 + 15p?2 2 e4 
+6poc> + c& = 6 p> o® +15 p*o® +20 p* o° +15 p* 9° +6 pe +¢°. 
Now R’ by Par. 21)2 6 p> + 15 p* + 20 p? + 15p? + 6p + 1, and since’ 
R’ is an integer so Maximum of R’ is6p> + 15 pt +20 p3 + 15 p*4+6p 
and Maximum of R’ 9° is6 p® ¢° + 15 pt ¢° + 20 p> ¢° + lip? ¢§ +6 pos. 
Again by Par. 17). C contains 6 figures and hence by Lem 4. Maximum 
of C is g°—1. Hence then Maximumof R’ 9° + Cis 6 p* 9° + 15p4 9% 4 
20 p? go + 15 p? o° + Gp o> + g°—1. But 6 p*® 9° + 15 p* o° + 20 p? 9° 
+15p? o° +6 po + 9° exceeds 6 p* 9° +15 p* p® + 20 p? O° 4 15 p? 9° 
+6po° + ¢°—1 by Unit. That is, ife = 9, then 6 p* ¢° ¢ + 15 p* 94 ¢? 
+ 20 p? oc + 15 p? 9? c+ + 6Gpoeec® + c® must exceed R’g* + C at 
least by 1, and yet is also Z R’ ¢° + C, which is absurd. A fortiori c 
cannot be > 9. 


(24.) Then let P g° + C be put= P’and pg +c = p’ then since p’ 
is the greatest approximate Root of P’ so p’® < P’ and (p’ + 1)°> P’. Let 
P’—p’e =R.” Then by similar reasoning to that by which R’ was proved 
Z6p> +15 pt +20 p> + 15 p? +6 p + 1, may R” be proved Z 
Gp’? 4+ 15 p'* + 20p'? 4+ 15 p’? +6p’ +1. And by continuing with P’ and p’ 
the same reasoning that was applied to P and p, there will be found 


po + dor p” the highest approximate Root of P’¢g° + D or P.” That 
is|po +cec|o+dor lee: +b6|o+4¢e | » + dis the greatest approxi- 
mate Root of | P 9° + c| o° 4. Dior |] Ag? +B |o° +c}|¢° + Dand 


Pip! will be equal to R”. 


(25.) And by a continuation of the same reasoning, there will suc- 


cessively be found— 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 63 


First. fon, | cee Oot 


~ + d\o +e, the great- 


as 


est approximate 6th Root of P” or P’ ¢° +E, or| | Age+B 


ge +C 
¢° +E. And P”—p'’ will be = R”. 
Second. p® =p ¢+f= lagtblotelo+alote otf 


the greatest approximate 6th Root of P” or P” ¢° + F or 
| Pee | cee og +D 
number M proposed in par. 16). and Pipi" = R’. That is p” = m of 


0° +E | ¢° + F, which is the original 


par. 14). 


(26.) And evidently similar reasoning may be continued to any 
length. Let it now be proposed to pursue this operation so as to find a 
certain number of decimal places in the Root, and to avoid as before 
par. 10), the trouble of a general demonstration let it be proposed to find 
the Root to 3 decimal places. Then multiply M by ¢° X3 or ¢'8, and by 
the principles of the series in par. 1). M 9'* will contain 33 + 18, or 51 
figures as by par. 15). And of these, as will easily be perceived, the 18 


lowest places are Cyphers. That is by the reasoning of par. 15. 


Met =Ag* + Bo" 4+Co% + Do” + Eg* + Fo +09" + 09% +0. 
and, consequently, by operating according to the principles given above, 
the approximate Root will be found of this form. 

agh+og’ tee tdgtegtfotee thot k. 
Let this Root be put = w so that p° Z and (w + 1)° > Mg’. Then 


Ss 


G4 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


us M 8 Bh Cut 19° 
evidently — Z —that is 2 M. And similarly ———— > M. Hence 
g* ¢'8 ge? 
4) pw ENG Oa aie pat | 
then |—— or — Z M® and® | ———— or 
ee iy Oe ¢v 
_ & a +bo' + coo + de beet ho te ost ko tik 
That is — or ——-_-—— 7 poe eT a 
° g 
is the approximate 6th Root of M, and is equal toa g + bo* +c¢p> +d 9¢° + 


> M*. 


3 


eo +fe+go* +he” +kg” which, according to the well known laws of 
the series of par. 1,) contains 3 decimal places; viz. g @ +ho”? + kom. 


b+ 1 


And since 


> M* so is— the highest approximate Root with 3 de- 
om v 
cimal places. 


(27.) If for 3 decimal places, there be required any other number, 

then let the number of decimal places required be put = z, and then it is 
pe 

obvious that in this reasoning for M g°** and—— there is to be substituted 
6 g"* 

, and the very same process will give a Root with a z number 


we 

M°*” and 
g° 

of decimal places. 


(28.) But I have not been able to find that the Arabs were acquaint- 
ed with this method of approximating to the truth, and I therefore pro- 
ceed to explain their contrivance for adding a fraction to the integral 
approximate Root, such that the sum should of course be greater than 
that integral Root, and yet less than the truth, and consequently should 
approximate still more nearly to the truth. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 65 


Let M be a surd integer to index n, and m its approximate root, so 
that m® Z and (m-+-1)" > M. Let M—m" = r andM=m>+4+ r. Then 

—_—_—_—_——_ 

r r 
a That is m + ——— 
(m + 1)"—m'". (m + 1) "—m" 
approximate x‘ Root of M, greater than m the integral Root. 


is an 


is M always > m + 


For as before, let n be expounded by 6. Then obviously (m + 1)°— 
mo = 6m + 15 m* + 20m? +15 m7 4+6m-+41. Nowsince*{M > m let 
‘iM = m+. Thensince *\M Z m4 1, sox Z land is a proper frac- 
tion. Then M = (m+2a)° = m° + 6mix + 15 m*a* + 20 mia? + 15 m* a4 
+ 6ma> + a° and M—m* = Gm5 x +15 m4 a + 20m a? + 15m? a* + 6m a> 


r 6 mi « + 15 m* a + 20 m* x 
+ 2° = r. Hence OW es isa 
(m+ 1)°—m° Gm eho 1S an + 20 m3 
+ 15 m* v* + 6ma> + x r 
+. Thenz > 
+ 15m* +4+6m +41 (m+ 1)°—m°: 
7 r 
If not, then «2 = or 7 ——————— First let «2 = 
(m-+-1)°—m°. (m-+1)°—m*. 


6m x + 15m* x27 + 20m’ a? + 15m" v* + 6ma> + x? 
Then ¢ = ST and hence 
6m> +15m* +20m> +15m* 46m 41 


6ma+ 1lom*r+200mMaer+15mer+6mer+-r= 6m x + 15 m* 2 
+ 20 m3 2° + 15 m* «* +6ma> + 2°, an equation which is evidently 


absurd, unless 7 = 1. But 2 is also a proper fraction, which is absurd. 


r 


Secondly, a fortiori z not 2 ——— for then also 6m*>x + 15 m* x 
(m + 1)°—m* 
+20 ma2+15mert+6me+r4rZ Cm a + 15.m* 2 + 20 m? 23 


+ 15 m* vt + 6m a> + x, which requires 2 to be > 1. also absurd. 


© 


66 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Yr r 
Then since x >———————_ som + #> m + ——————— and (m-+-x)§ 
(m+ 1)>—m*. (m+ 1)S—m°. 
r : 
or Malso > m +———————__ as above. 


mu--+1)&®&—mS5, 
Ga -- 1) 


(29.) Here it is evident, that if any constant value be assigned to 
m, then if » be small, that is in case the integral Root differ but little from 


73 
the true Root, then the fraction 


is also small, but if r be 
(m + 1) 7m? 
large, that is in case the integral Root, differ much from the true Root, 
FS 
then the fraction 


is large. That is, the compensation made 


(om + 1) °—im" 


by the fraction is proportionate to the error of the integral Root. 


30.) I need scarely add, that whenever it is required to extend the 
above demonstration to any other index than 6, then for the individual 
numbers 6, 15, 20, 15, 6, 1, there are to be substituted the general co-efii- 


a n—l n' n—I1 n—2 n° n—1* n—2Z° n—3 
cients of the binomial theorem x, 


9 = aman Te 


2 a 7 Ae NGS Tah yr | 
&c. and the same reasoning applied as that given above. 


(31.) I now proceed in order :— 

/ 

Il. To exemplify the above demonstration, by the actual extraction 
of the 6th Root of a given number, according to the directions contained 
in European books of Arithmetic. I therefore chuse to extract the 6th 
Root of the number 

166, 571, 800, 758, 593, 887, 308, 296, 025, 335, 490. 
which consists as in par. 14) of 33 figures. And the operation is thus 
exhibited. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 67 


166, 571, 800, 758, 593, 887, 308, 296, 025, 335, 490. (234567 


84, 035, 889 
18, 535, 911, 758, 593 
16, 134, 619, 913, 216 
9, 401, 291, 845, 377, 887, 308 
2, 116, 025, 521, 169, 640, 625 
"985, 266, 324, 208, 246, 683, 296, 025 
255, 443, 315, 383, 323, 683, 729, 856 
29, 823, 008, 824, 922, 999, 566, 169, 335, 490 
29, 823, 008, 824, 922, 999, 565, 181, 681, 169 
987, 654, 321. 


(32.) And the Rule given for its performance is as follows : 


Article (a). Place a dot over the units place and over every succeed- 
ing 6th figure, counting to the left hand, that is, over the 7th, 13th, 19th, 
25th, and S5ist places. Then beginning at the left hand; call 166 the 
first period; 571,800 the second period; 758,593 the third period; and 


So On. 


(6). Find the nearest approximate 6th Root of the first period 166. 
This by trial is 2, For 2° = 64 and Z 166 and 3° = 729 and > 166. Write 
this 2 separated by a semicircle to the right hand of the given number, 
and call it the first found figure of the Root. 


(c). Call the Gth Power of the first found figure of the Root which 
is 2° = 64, the first Subtrahend. 


68 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(d). Subtract 64, this first Subtrahend from 166 the first period, and 
call 102 the first Remainder. 


(e). To the right hand of the first Remainder annex the second 
period 571,800, so as to make it 102,571,800. Call this the first Re- 


solvend. 


(f). Seek the greatest number with the following properties. That 


if there be taken— 


6 X (ten times the first found figure of the Root)> x (this sought 


number) 


+ 15 x (ten times the first found figure of the Root)* x (this sought 


number)? 


+ 20 xX (ten times the first found figure of the Root)* x (this sought 


number); 


+ 15 xX (ten times the first found figure of the Root): x (this sought 


number )+ 


+ 6 xX (ten times the first found figure of the Root) x (this sought 


number) 
Lae (this sought number).° 


The sum of all these added together may not exceed the first Resol- 
vend 102,571,800. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS; 69 


Then 3 is the number which fulfils these 


conditions. For since 2 is 


the first found figure of the Root, if 3 is the sought number, the above 


expression becomes— 


6:205°3 
4+ 15:204-3? 
+ 20:203-35 
+ 15:202°34 
+ 620 °3 

+ 3° 


Z. 102,571,800. And 3 is 
conditions. For if 4 be 


number, it will become— 


6:205°4 

+ 15:204-42 
+ 20-203-43 
+ 15°202-44 
+ 620 -45 
46 


— 6°3,200,000: 3 


== Lor 


==, 20 


160,000° 9 
8,000° 27 
400° 81 
20°243 

729 


— 


| 


57,600,000 
21,600,000 
4,320,000 
486,000 
29,160 
729 


——i ol 


84,035,889, which is 


the greatest number which will answer these 


substituted in this expression for the sought 


= 6°3,200,000° 4 


==) lio: 


20: 


160,000° 16 
8,000: 64 
400° 256 
20°1024 

4096 


76,800,000 
38,400,000 
10,240,000 
1,536,000 
122,880 
4,096 


——— 


127,102,976, which is 


> 102,571,800, and consequently would not answer. 


(b’). Place 3, the number now found, to the right hand of 2, the first 


found figure of the Root, in the semicircle Article b.) so as to make it 23. 


Call 3 the second found figure of the Root, and 23 the found figures of the 


Root. 


70 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(c’).. Call 84,035,889 the sum found by Art. f.) the second Subtrahend. 


(d’). Subtract 84,035,889 the second Subtrahend from 102,571,800 the 
first Resolvend, and call 18,535,911 the second Remainder. 


(ec). To the right hand of the second Remainder annex the third 


Period 758,593 so as to make it 18,535,911,758,593. Call this the second 


Resolvend. 


(f’). Seek the greatest number with the following properties. That 
if there be taken— 


6 xX (ten times the two first found figures of the Root): x (this 


sought number) 


+ 15 x (ten times the two first found figures of the Root)* x (this 


sought number.)? 


+ 20 x (ten times the two first found figures of the Root)? x (this 


sought number.): 


+ 15 xX (ten times the two first found figures of the Root): x (this 


sought number) 


+ 6 X (ten times the two first found figures of the Root) x (this 


sought number.)é 
+ (this sought number.)¢ 


The sum of all these added together may not exceed the second 
Resolvend 18,535,911,758,593. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 71 


Then 4 is the number which fulfils these conditions. For since 23 


are the two first found figures of the Root, if 4 is the sought number, the 


above expression becomes— 


6:2305°4 

4+ 15°2304-42 
+ 20:2303-43 
+ 15°2302°44 
“+ 6:230' -4° 
ne a 


is Z 18,535,911,758,593. 


answer these conditions. 


I] 


I] 


6°643,634, 300,000" 4 


2,798,410,000° 16 
12,167,000° 64 
52,900° 256 

230° 1024 


15,447 ,223,200,000 
671,618,400,000 
15,573,760,000 
203,136,000 

1,4 1 3,120 

4,096 


16,134,619,913,216, which 


And 4 is the greatest number which will 


For if 5 be substituted in this expression for the 


sought number, it will become— 


6:2305°5 

4 15°2304-57 
+ 20:2303-53 
+ 15°2307-54 
+ 6:230° 55 
5° 


6-643,634,300,000° 5 
15° 2,798,410,000° 25 
20 12,167,000° 125 
15° 52,900° 625 


230° 3,125 
15,625 


l] 


— 


— 


19,309,029,000,000 
1,049,403,750,000 
30,417,500,000 
495,937,500 
4,312,500 

15,625 


20,389,350,515,625, which 


iS >18,535,911,758,593, and consequently would not answer. 


b’. Place 4, the number now found, to the right hand of 23, the two 


first found figures of the Root in the semi-circle Art. 6,) so as to make 
it 234. Call 4the third found figure of the Root, and 234 the found figures 


of the Root. 


72, AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


ce’. Call 16,134,619,913,216, the sum found by Art. /’,) the third 
Subtrahend. 


d@. Subtract 16,134,619,913,216 the third Subtrahend from 
18,535,911,758,593 the second Resolvend, and call 2.401,291,845,377 the 


third Remainder. 


e’. To the right hand of the third Remainder annex the fourth 
Period 887,308, so as to make it 2,401,291,845,377,887,308. Call this the 
third Resolvend. 


And this operation must be analogously continued thus— 


f’. Seek the greatest number with the following properties. That. 
if these taken— 


6 X (ten times the found figures of the Root)’ x (this sought 


number). 


+ 15 X (ten times the found figures of the Root)* x (this sought 


number)’. 


+ 20 x (ten times the found figures of the Root)? x (this sought 


number)’. 


+ 15 X (ten times the found figures of the Root’ x (this sought 


number)*. 


+ 6 X (ten times the found figures of the Root) x (this sought 


number)*. 


* AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 73 


+ (this sought number)’. 


The sum of all these added together may not exceed the last 


Resolvend. 


(b'".) Place the number now found to the right hand of the found 
figures of the Root in the semicircle Art. b ). Call the number now found 
the last found figure of the Root, and the whole of the figures in the semi- 
circle, the found figures of the Root. 


(c".) Call the sum found by Art. f” the last Subtrahend. 


(d’”.) Subtract the last Subtrahend from the last found Resolvend, 
and call the Result the next Remainder. 


(e".) To the right hand of this Remainder annex the next Period, 
and continue this circle of operations till there be no period in the origi- 


nal given number so to annex. , 
And thus it will be found that— 
The fourth figure of the Root is 5. 
The fourth Subtrahend is— 


6234055 4 15:2340%5? + 202340353 4 15-2340°54* + 6-2340°55 4 5° 
= 2,116,025,521,169,640,625. 


The fourth Remainder is 285,266,324,208,246,683. 
Then the fifth figure of the Root is 6. 
The fifth Subtrahend is 255,443,315,383,323,683,729,856. 


The fifth Remainder is 29,823,008,824,922,999,566, 169. 


- 


«4 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Then the sixth figure of the Root is 7. 
The sixth Subtrahend is 29,823,008,824,922,999,565,181,681,169. 


And the sixth Remainder, with which the operation concludes, is 
987,654,321. 


(33). I now proceed to show the conformity of this Rule, with the 
demonstration given in Par. 11). et seq. and for this purpose must pre- 


mise the following— 


Lemma 6. If to the right hand of a Row of a figures another Row 
consisting of an x number of places be annexed, this is equivalent to 
multiplying the first Row by 10° and adding to the product the number 


expressed by the second Row. 


Thus let 9,876 be a Row of figures, and 123,456 a second Row. In 
this second Row there are 6 figures, then if it be written to the right hand 
of, and in one line with the first Row, it will become 9,876,123,456 = 
9,876,000,000 + 123,456 = 9,876 + 10° + 123,456. This is too evident to 


require farther illustration. 


(34.) Now M (Par. 15.) is expounded in the present example by the 
number 166,571,800,758,593,887,308,296,025,335,490, so placing the dots 
over every 6th place, as directed in Par. 22, Art. a). distinguishes it by 


Lem. 6 as follows: 


166,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000. 
+ 571,800,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000. 
4+ 758,593,000,000,000,000,000,000. 

+ 887,308,000,000,000,000. 

4. 296,025,000,000. 

4. 335,490. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. ee 


That is equal to 
166:10° “1 571,800°1074 + 758,593°10' + 887,308°10'% + 296,025°10° 
+ 335,490. 


Then evidently by Par. 16.) 
166 consists of 3 figures, and expounds A. 


571,800 consists of 6 figures, and expounds B. 


TOSCO G aE MT Ee herr. similarly expounds C. 
OSEBOSe a et cstls sons o's similarly expounds D. 
296,025 .............. Similarly expounds E. 
SI,AI0 | oi cle wipers +2 similarly expounds F. é 


And hence, by the reasoning of Par. 16) M becomes equal to, 
(g being put = 10) 


| 166 ¢° + 571,800 
g° + 335,490. 


e° + 758,593 | ¢° + 887,308 | ¢° + 296,025 


a And hence in succession— 
A 9° + B or P is expounded by 166 ¢° + 571,800, or 166,571,800 by Lem. 6. 


IA ¢° + Bi) o + CorP o + CorP’ by |166 ¢° + 571,800] @ + 758,593, 
or 166,571,800,758,593. 


fe ees g° + D or P’ ¢ + D or FP’ by 
| 166 ¢° +: 571,800 | ° + 758,593 | g° + 887,308, or 166,571,800,758, 


593,887,308 


WwW 


76 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


| | Ao 4B g+C | +D | o°+E or P’ +E or P” by 


| Cet) ee 
166, 07 1,800,758,593,887,308,296,025.. 


g° + 887,308 | o° + 296,025, or 


And hence P” 9° + F or P"’ by the same number as M (Par. 25.) 


(b.) Now the highest approximate Root of 166 or Ais 2. Hence 
2, the first found figure of the Root, expounds a (Par. 17). 


(c.) Then 2° = 64 = first Subtrahend, expounds a’°. 


(d.) Then 166 — 64 = 102 expounds A — a® or R and is first 


Remainder. 


(e.) Since B is expounded by 571,800 and consists of 6 figures, so 
102,571,800 by Lem. 6 expounds R ¢° + B, and is first Resolvend. 


 (f.) Since ais expounded by 2, so a @ is expounded by 20, and a* g? 
or a ¢\* by 20", and a? ¢° or a ¢|* by 20%, &c. hence Gas g> + 15 a* ¢* + 20a’ ¢3 
+ 15 a* o + 6a 9 + 1 isexpounded by 6: 205 + 15°20 + 20:20? + 15°20° 
+ 6:20 + 1, and since 3 substituted as directed produces by the sum 6°205°3 
+ 15°204-3* + 20:20%3* + 1520734 4 6-20-35 + 3° a number 84,035,889 
smaller than 102,571,800 or R ¢° + B, and since 3 is the greatest number 
which will do so, so 3 expounds the 6 of the sum 6 a’ ¢° b + 15 a* 9* 0’ 
+ 2007 ¢ B + 1507 ¢7 b+ + 6a9 6 + 0 as by Par. 19). 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. wg 


(b’.) Then 3, the second found figure of the Root, expounds 6 (Par. 20) 
and since 2 expounds a, and there is but one figure in 6, so by Lem. 6) 
ao + bis expounded by 23. And since p by Par.21) =—ao + bsopis 
expounded by 23. And hence 23 is the highest approximate Root of 
A ¢° + B or P or 166,571,800, the two first periods of the given number. 


As is easily tried, for 23° = 148,035,889, which is less, and 
24° = 191,102,976, which is greater than 166,571,800. 


(c'.) Then 84,035,889 the second Subtrahend expounds 6 a5 95 b 
+ 15 a* ot D + 200° 9° b3 + 1507 ¢7 b* + 6a985 + BS. 


(d’.) Sinceby Par. 19.)A ¢°+B=a°¢' +Ro° +Bs0A¢g° +B 
—a>¢? = Rog + B. Subtract from both sides of this equation the 
second Subtrahend by Art. c’,) and it becomes A ¢° + B — a’ ¢° 
—6a° ob — 15 a* o* b* — 2003 3 B — 15a ¢° b* — Gag DS — DS 
— Ro + B— (6a 956+ 1504+ ¢* b? + 20 a gb? + 1507 ¢’ b* + 6ag¢b5 + b°) 
—~Ae’+B—(a@ 0 +60 9 b6415a* ¢* b* +20 a3 ¢3 BF + 15 a ¢ bt 
4+ 6aob5 + 0) = (Ag’ + B)—(a 9 4+) = by Par. 21) to P — p° = RY. 
Then since R ¢° + Bis expounded by 102,571,800 and 6a* 9° b + 15a* 94 b2 
+ 20 a? 9° 6% + 15a? g? b4 + Gag b> 4+ DB is expounded by 84,035,889 
so(Ro* + B)— (6a 9° b+ 15 at of 6? 4+ 20 a3 g OF + 15 a? g2 b4 
+ 6aq b> + 6°) or P — p* or HF’ is expounded by 102,571,800 — 
84,035,889 = 18,535,911 the second Remainder. 


(e.) Since C is expounded by 758,593 and consists of 6 figures, so 
by Lemma 6,) 18,535,911,758,593 expounds R’ 9° +° C, and is the second 


Resolvend. 


(f'.) Since a g + 6 or p is expounded by 23, so p 9 is expounded by 
230 and p* ¢* or p ¢|* by 230% and p? @ or p ¢|} by 230°, &c. hence 6 p> ¢5 


73 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


4 15 p* ot + 20p? o + 15 p? 9? + 6po + 1is expounded by 6:230° 
+ 15°2304 + 20°230° + 15°230° + 6-230 + 1, and since 4 substituted as 
directed, produces by the sum 6°2305°4 + 15-2304-42 + 20:2302-4: 
4 15°230°:44 + 6:230°4° + 4° a number 16,134,619,913,216 smaller than 
18,535,911,758,593 or R’ g° + C, and since 4 is the greatest number which 
will do so, so 4 expounds the c of the sum 6 p> g>c + 15 p* 9* c? + 20 p® g &° 
4+ 15 p’ oct +6poc +c as by Par. 22.) 


(b".) Then 4, the third found figure of the Root, expounds c (Par. 23.) 
and since 23 expounds a @ + 6 or p, and thereis but one figure in ¢, so by 
Lem. 6.) (ag + 6) 9 + corpo+e is expounded by 234. And since 
p’ by Par. 24 = po + € so p’ is expounded by 234. And hence 234 is 


the highest approximate Root of | Ag’ + B| o® + Cor Po + CorP,, or 
166,571,800,758,593 the three first periods of the given number. 


As is easily tried, for 234° = 164,170,508,913,216, which is less, and 
235° = 168,425,239,515,625, which is greater than 166,571,800,758,593. 

ce’. Then 16,154,619,913,216, the third Subtrahend, expounds 6 p*¢°e + 
15p*g*c? + 20p*g’c? + 15p*g7c* + Gpgc> + c® by Par. 23.) 


d’, Since by Par. 22)P¢ + C= pie? +R e+ C soPe 4+C 
—p oe — R’¢ + C. Subtract from both sides of this equation the 
third Subtrahend by Art. ¢’). And it becomes P 9° + C —p° 9° — 6 p> 
gc—15 p* o* & —20p' gee — 15 p* o c+ — 6pode—e = BR oe + 
C— (6p oc + 15 p* otc? + 2p? gc +15 p* og? ct + 6poe + c’) 
— (P ¢° + C)— (po + ce) = (by Par. 21.) P’ — p® = R”. Then since 
R’ ¢ + Cis expounded by 18,535,911,758,593, and 6 p> gc + 15 p* otc 
+ 20p¢c-+ 15 p* oct + 6 pec’ +c is expounded by 16,134,619, 


913,216, so R! g + C —(6p5 g% ¢ + 15 p4 gt c? + 20 p?¢°c3 + 15 p* g* c* 


~ 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 79 


+ 6poc> + c°) or P’ — p’ or R” is expounded by 18,535,911,758,593, 
— 16,134,619,913,216, or 2,401,291,845,377 the third Remainder. 


And by a continuation of analogous reasoning, it will be found that 


dis expounded by 5, the fourth found figure of the Root. 


6 p> gd + 15 p* o* d* 4 20 p? gd? + 15 pp’ pd + 6p'od + 
d° is expounded by 2,116,025,521, 169,640,625, the fourth 
Subtrahend. 


po+dorp” by 2,345, and that is the approximate sixth Root of 
166,571,800,758,593,887,308, the four first periods of the given 


number. 


Pp! — p's is expounded by 285,266,324, 208, 246,683, the fourth 


Remainder or R’”. 
e is expounded by 6, the fifth found figure of the Root. 


6 pe5e + 15p’*o*e* + 20 pre? + 15 p’*e’e* + 6 p’ge> + e€° is 
expounded by 255,443,315, 383, 323, 683,729,856, the fifth 


Subtrahend. 


po + e or p’” by 23,456, and that is the approximate sixth Root of 
166,571,800,758,593,887,308,296,025, the five first periods of the 


given number. 


Pp” — p'”® is expounded by 29,823,008,824,922,999,566,169, the fifth 


Remainder or R’. 


30 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


f is expounded by 7, the sixth found figure of the Root. 


6 pls go f -- 15 p”* orf? a 20 pe Oye +. 15 pl’ oO fe |. 6 pl” of 
+ f° is expounded by 29,825,008,824,922,999,565, 181,681,169, 
the sixth Subtrahend. 


pl’ o + for p” by 234,567, and that is the approximate sixth Root of 
the given number, 166,571,800,758,593,887,308,296,025,335,490. 
That is p” = m. 


P” — »'° is expounded by 987,654,321 the last Remainder, and since 
by Par. 25). P'’ = Mso P*— pi’ = RY = M—m* =r of 
Par. 28.) 


And it is evident this reasoning may be continued to any number of 


periods. 
(35.) I now proceed in order to— 


Ill. Exhibit this operation as directed by the Arabian Arithmeti- 
cians, and then explain its conformity to the original Demonstration. 
This operation occupies a much more extended space, andis delineated 


in the annexed Diagram.—(See Lithographized Figure.) 


(36.) The outlines which constitute the upper part of this Diagram, 
and are there called the Rank of the Number, and contain the same figures 
as in the European Operation of Par. 31), are technically called by the 
Arabian Arithmeticians \; )+« JS Shukloon Mimbureeoon, or Pulpit Dia- 
gram or Figure, from its fancied resemblance to the ascending steps which 
constitute a Mohammadan Pulpit. This term will perhaps sound oddly 
in European ears, but we shall be less inclined to deride the quaintness of 


AN e\e|A| 0 e|Z|al4|a|Z\|Z\Z\e | 4. 
iN ele |2\e| ai viz iel2\el4| al eli |e ele Wb 
\ alalelale\el\élaialZidZ\e\ . g 
Ny Zl Ale elelele|zi7|z\A7 ele) zi le le le S 
=~ ABE A\A\ Z| ele |Az|Z |Z] Zhe sf 
X FAVA EWA PAA lal cal AAPA VAVA Falla g 
NN : CAAA Gal PALA PAVAVAL OB 
. A\wicls\Fla\AZi7\iZlelelelielele i 
} == ile ie 
ENG | ee zp, 
F ” 
wv 
‘ LI | ‘ 
: E y 
Cee ae i, Z 
A\ele|Z x 
XK | Y\al¢ ax 
; | VAVAIEAE 6 
y) Lela lee oD 
N Alelalz 2 
ny 
. 4 saa manePRRAAAddae My 
. PIF IA\Z A122 Be 
| LAA all AA ap 
W r FI AAIAAZIG |G \E WA 
) LPIZIA eI ZIZIG] le LD 
Q ‘ PALAVALARAIA ALAA Me) 
| AP\AEA\elelZ\A\z\A| | W 
R ot rl Melee 1 1111 bes 
AZ elezielelz|elelelz|z 
WN Karat aialla anal al A 7 7) 
: alel\Alaele\a\elelele|z L@ 
S aIAeK ele iZiiZz\aele llr ad 
y aA AA lz\4 up 
<A elAle|Z\ele|7\4lrlelele uf, 
AY alle Biel Al elelelel> fh. 
\ SX Vlg elec lel val 
\ Azlel\/\Alelizielelz a 
N\ Z\Z\é\4| 2lelelels | ae 
NS PalvalalValeal ra c at 
WAIANAE lel ala\cle\s ele | es 
IN Gaaee aaaaaaacl EIA] P 
<< Alel4iaielellelelejelelalr Lele Ted 
XQ Alec lela feleloL x 
~~ 7 ale Ae Z\AZ\2 alrlelr nh 
N Eg J\e\2\4\Z\7 \elel7 "5 
NS AVA ala cal Fal a a al al A eal Wa cal a f 
\ Va ele l\Zelelzia|e\s 4 
. P4412 217+ 3) 
SH A liz. all 
Pp 
N Z 
| em 
1X a ai 
XS e j. 
. £ fo 
rar AZ 
x hal P| 2 Or 
\s | |Z\2leve alr 2a 
XY PNA OIE Ae I | 
INN air\e\alele|elr ‘2 
S\ F\F\e\a\2\a\2 ut 
‘ Filey |e \4i\zle ia 
yy Bata Z\elalZle lz lelelele -2 
NAN ae vila\Ale lela leiallelz vie alll 
NWN 1 a \2\7 EaLALALAAl2 el 
eRe | Ve Flair lale\Aly\ 217 ne dl 
~x ¥ + + A\elZ elele \e Nha 
Ns Z\A\F |S Ale le Ale \e\airle ia 
i we \s als e1a\4 |@ ba mel 
YS _ A\PNE NE ie a 
RA ZAIZe\P\A\7 Pies 
eS Z\A\ale Al \7 Tamil bt 
DS PIEIZ 2 |e |e lZ 7 [ ‘| ila 
~s g y 7 V Zlele le \AlziFle ia ev al 
| S eZ a a\ ele lel ArblA. AVAL VAlAll £ 
lev lela lele|Zizielelelallel7ial ize Zee ee 
Hl eZ Z|7)4)7 7 |a| dels viel i444] shi 1e|4\2 |e 17 lel? Tt] 5 
ele lz lela|e le |_| ai 
AAR AAR AR ABA AReradaaoaalas [= 
a\o\rlelelel4la\s\ala MAA tlelelalalele le lelé le one 
a “nanuananacanaqeaase ral es 
Bias ele\e\\éla\|e |e Z\e\2 Zlelale le ; i 
i vA ara Viel ielele le on | 
4 Li alelZ\ele|Z\Z\ ele |r| els Wa 
fe AVA ATA VAVAN Eel 
3 (AARAI EA eal Wea % 
i — a sas} i 
PPULE CU 77 VW 
, G7 KD 
UCMVOV)/ f= PP? 2, y} y ) \ 3 
. Vi aaa okay oe NA 
| ‘2 NUNS 
BERS het ao N 
SS nce eeres = an Plea | 


“0b 688 B00 ba 90g Lop be onl oop LOU 


OAM ; 
Yi. fe 


rs 


| Herb the Dyna Fru les! Mu Gp ade glfhe Am tor—~ OAL ELIE EI PE 
7 "pe | 


| ; 
SS =e = Se a 
IN Ea waar: a _ a= 
nN = c sal 
NN = os ail 
iS = af lies Bee = 
me YW = ee tee = == 
Eon Zz Sa S eo 
= 8 Se ees = 
2 SS eS en 
SY sy Il is = 
5S is 
Sols 8] Ny Lato a= 
SAIN H} sw as 
Negi VSN a = = : 
iL SHINS > 
sh SIRS 
: I xy | 
= ISSUE SES) | | 
SJ sa} Se] ~~ 1 | 
e f fi — | 
Se Bee SS SS an rs 
pe IE 2 = eS : 
rere ae a | sis | 
AINAISATS VPASSS S/SiNisis | 
[SNES | 59 =PSPeRs | SISINININIS | 
~ cr az a NEN ENS | : i 
= R | | 
: aa SRS RNIN IS Sse 
STRAIN NE NIX 
— aI J a : oe aa Py | | ; ~ T =a | 


DSSS Ay PIR ROUGE TCE rc Go A Re Ge ee Re ea < Fre 
eS yS5 aKa WARREN SG = UR irs “YER Sa ie OES Ce sine HS BQ KR bod QouN LN mA O Rowers ’s “hina Go A ‘Bly BSS Rio He Rw Kp 820 AS 8 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 81 


the expression when we recollect how many of our own technical phrases, 
if literally translated would, to an Arab, appear equally worthy of ridi- 
cule. How would an Anatomist defend the Carpet of the Eye, the Boat 
fad Moon bones of the Wrist, the greater and lesser Couriers of the 
Thigh, the Bedpost processes of the Scull, and the dancing Net of the 
Brain ; and innumerable other names equally fantastic. Nor is even the 
~ severe Science of which we are now treating, quite exempt from this cen- 
sure. What shall we say of the Forefinger of a Power, or the Chain of a 
Root? 


(37.) Then divide the given number into Periods by dots, as directed 
in Par. 32 Art. a). Draw a Pulpit Diagram, ascending to the left hand, 
having as many steps as there are periods inthe given number. From 
each step draw longitudinal lines down the page, so as to have in each 
step a place for each figure of the corresponding period, between the in- 
terstices of each two longitudinal lines. Write the figures of each period 
regularly in the highest part of each of these interstices, in the several 
corresponding steps, and immediately under the line which constitutes 
the upper boundary of the Pulpit. Produce these longitudinal lines as 
far as convenient. Then divide the whole figure thus constituted by cross 
lines into as many divisions, nearly equal, as there are units in the Index 
of the Root to be extracted. , 


(38.) That is in the present case, make a Pulpit Diagram of 6 steps, 
divide the highest and left hand step by longitudinal lines into 3 intersti- 
tial spaces, in which write the 3 figures of the first period, as in Par. 31). 
Then divide each lower step into 6 interstitial spaces, in which write the 
figures of their corresponding periods. Divide the whole figure by cross 
lines into 6 divisions of nearly equal length. For distinction I have, in the 
example, made the cross lines, which are the boundaries of these divi- 


sions, double. Call the lowest of these divisions the Rank of the Latus, 


82 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


or first Rank ; the next upper division the Rank of the Square ; the next 
the Rank of the Cube; the next the Rank of the Biquadrate ; the next the 
Rank of the Quadratus Cubi; and the next, which constitutes the Pulpit 
Diagram, call the Rank of the Number. This I have divided from the 
other Ranks by a triple cross line. Again, in reverse order, call the Rank 
of the Quadratus Cubi, also the last Rank or second Rank of the Num- 
ber ; and call the Rank of the Biquadrate, also the second last Rank or 
third Rank of the Number; and call the Rank of the Cube, also the third 
last Rank or fourth Rank of the Number; and call the Rank of the 
Square, also the fourth last Rank or fifth Rank of the Number ; 


Before proceeding farther, two phrases are yet to be explained. 


(39.) When, in this operation, one number is said to be written oppo- 
site to another, it is hereby meant, that whatever be the distance between 
these two numbers, yet with respect to the interstices formed by the 
whole length of the longitudinal lines, the units of the one number are 
written in the same interstice as the units of the other, the tens of the 
one number in the same interstice as the tens of the other, the hundreds 
of the one number in the same interstice as the hundreds of the other, and 
so on; all the higher corresponding degrees of the two numbers being 


respectively in the same interstice. 


Thus in the Rank of the Biquadrate, at the letter of reference y/, the 
number 986,144,576 is written opposite the number 18,535,911,758,593, _ 
which is at the letter / in the Rank of the number or Pulpit Diagram, 
for 6, the units of the first number is written in the same interstice of the 
longitudinal lines as 3, the units of the second ; and the tens of both num- 
bers, viz. 7 and 9, are in the same interstice to the left of the units, and 
the hundreds of both numbers, viz. 5, and 5, are in the same interstice to 


the left of the tens, and so of the thousands 4 and 8, &c. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 833 


(40). When a number is said to be transferred any number of places 
to the right hand, it is hereby meant that a copy of this number should 
be made immediately above itself with this condition, that counting from 
the units of the number said to be transferred as many interstices to the 
right hand as the number of places which it is said to be transferred, the 
units of the transferred number are to be written in the last or most right 
hand of these interstices, and the tens of the transferred number are to be 
written in the interstice immediately to the left hand of that last, and the 
hundreds in the interstice next to the left of the tens, and the thousands 
in the interstice next to that, and so on through all the degrees, so that 
each degree of the number in question should be copied as many interstices 


to the right hand, as the number of places which it is said to be transferred. 


Thus in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi at the letters é and w, the num- 
ber 192 is transferred one place to the right hand, for the unit 2 is copied 
above it one interstice to the right hand of the original 2, the tens 9 is 


copied one interstice to the right hand of the original 9, and so of 1. 


And in the Rank of the Biquadrate at the letter 6’ and y/ the number 
4,197,615 is transferred 2 places to the right hand, for the unit 5 is copied 
above it two interstices to the right hand of the original 5, the tens 1 is 
copied two interstices to the right. hand of the original 1, the hundreds 
6 is copied two interstices to the right of the original 6, and so of 7, 9, 
1, and 4. 


And in the Rank of the Cube at the letter # ands” the number 
256,258,080 is for similar reasons said to be transferred 3 places to the 
right hand, and so in the Rank of the Square at the letter w” and //” 
821,340 is transferred 4 places, and in the Rank of the Latus at the 
letter 7’ and g" 140,736 is transferred 5 places to the right hand. 


6 


84 “AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


(41.) I now proceed with the Arabian Rule. 
Seek the greatest number with the following conditions— 


1. That if it be written at the bottom of the Rank of the Latus, that 
is completely at the bottom of the whole figure and opposite the first 


period, that is in the same interstice as 6 the units of 166 Par. 38.) 


2. And if it be multiplied into itself, and the product written in the 


Rank of the Square again opposite the first period. 


3. And if it be again multiplied in this product, and the second pro- 


duct written in the Rank of Cube again opposite the first period. 


4. And ifit be again multiplied into this second product, and the 
third product written in the Rank of the Biquadrate again opposite the 


first period. 


5. And ifit be again multiplied into this third product, and the 
fourth product written in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi again opposite 


the first period. 


6. And if it be again multiplied into this fourth product that the 


fifth product be not greater than the first period of the given number. 
Then 2 will be found the number answering these conditions, for 
a. Write 2 in the bottom of the Rank of the Latus, as by Art. 1.) 


b. Multiply this 2 into itself, and write the product 4 in the Rank of 
the Square, as by Art. 2.) 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 85 


c. Multiply the 2 again into this 4, and write the product 8 in the 
Rank of the Cube, as by Art. 3.) 


d. Multiply the 2 again into this 8, and write the product 16 in the 
Rank of the Biquadrate, as by Art. 4.) 


~ e. Multiply the 2 again into this 16, and write the product 32 in the 
Rank of the Quadratus Cubi, as by Art. 5.) 


Jf. Multiply the 2 again into this 32, and the product is 64, which is 
less than 166, as by Art. 6.) 


And 2 is the highest number which will answer these conditions. 
For let 3 be substituted in these operations and they will successively 
become 3 X 3 = 9, 9. X 3 = 27,27 X 3=— 81,81 X 3 = 243,243 x 3 = 729, 
which last product is greater than 166. 


g. Call this last product 64, which answers the condition, the first 
Subtrahend, write it opposite to and immediately under 166, the first 
period. 


. 


h. Write the found figure 2 above 6, the units of the first period, 
and exterior to and immediately above the Pulpit, or as it may be called 
the Anabathroidal Diagram. This is the first figure of the Root. 


2. Subtract the first Subtrahend from the first period, and 102 is 
the first Remaider. 


j. Write 102, the first Remainder, on a line with the figures of the 
second period in the next descending right hand step of the Pulpit Dia- 


gram, so as to form the number 102,571,800. This is the first Resolvend. 


36 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


k. Add 2, the first found figure of the Root, to itself, and write the 
sum 4 in the Rank of the Latus opposite to and immediately above the 
2 formerly written there by Art. 6). This 4 is now the upper number in 
the Rank of the Latus. 


t. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root, into this 4, and write 
the product 8 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 
above the.4 formerly written there by Art. c). 


m. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 8 and 4, and write 
the sum 12 opposite to and immediately above them. This 12 is now the 


upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


n. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root, into this 12, and 
write the product 24 in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately 
above the 8 formerly written there by Art. d). 


é¢ 


p. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 24 and 8, and write 
the sum 32 opposite to and immediately above them. This 32 is now the 


upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


q- Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root, into this 32, and 
write the product 64 in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and imme- 
diately above the 16, formerly written there by Art. e.) 


y. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this 64 and 16, and 
write the sum 80 opposite to and immediately above them. This 80 is 


now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


s. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root, into this 80, and 
write the product 160 in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to and 
immediately above the 32 formerly written there by Art. f). 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 87 


t. Add together in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi this 160 and 32, 


and write the sum 192 opposite to and immediately above them. 


wu. Transfer this 192 one place to the right hand. 'This 192 so trans- 
ferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


v. Add 2, the first found figure of the Root to 4, the upper number 
in the Rank of the Latus by Art. 4, and write the sum 6 opposite to and 
immediately above it. This 6 is now the upper number in the Rank of 
the Latus. 


w. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 6, and write 
the product 12 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 
above 12, the upper number in that Rank by Art. m. 


x. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 12 and 12, and 
write the sum 24 opposite to and immediately above them. This 24 is 


now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


y. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 24, and write 
the product 48 in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above 
32, the upper number in that Rank by Art. p. 


z. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 48 and 32, and write 
the Sum 80 opposite to and immediately above them. This 80is now the 


upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


«. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 80, and write 
the product 160 in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and immediate- 
ly above 80, the upper number in that Rank by Art. 7. 


Z 


88 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


@. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this 160 and 80, and 


write the sum 240 opposite to and immediately above them. 


y. Transfer this 240 to the right hand 2 places. This 240 so trans- 
ferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. ~ 


6. Add 2, the first found figure of the Root to 6, the upper number in 
the Rank of the Latus by Art. v, and write the sum 8 opposite to and imme- 


diately above it. This 8 is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


¢. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 8, and write 
the product 16 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 
above 24, the upper number in that Rank by Art. «. | 


2. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 16 and 24, and write 
the sum 40 opposite to and immediately above them. This 40 is now the 


upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


y. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 40, and write 
the product 80 in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately 
above 80, the upper number in that Rank by Art z. 


6. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 80 and 80, and write 


the sum 160 opposite to and immediately above them. 


i. Transfer this 160 to the right hand 3 places. This 160 so trans- 


ferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


x. Add 2, the first found figure ofthe Root to 8, the upper number in 
the Rank of the Latus by Art. 6) and write the sum 10 opposite to and 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 89 


immediately above it. This 10 is now the upper number in the Rank of 
the Latus. 7 


a. Multiply 2, the first found figure of the Root into this 10, and 
write the product 20 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and imme- 


diately above 40, the upper number in that Rank. 


yw. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 20 and 40, and write 


the sum 60 opposite to and immediately above them. 


». ‘Transfer this 60 to the right hand 4 places. This 60 so transfer- 


red is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


-€. Add 2, the first found figure of the Root to 10, the upper number 
in the Rank of the Latus Art. z) and write the sum 12 opposite to and 


immediately above the 10. 


x. Transfer this 12 to the right hand 5 places. This 12 so transfer- 


red is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


Then seek the greatest number with the following condition— 


1. Thatif this sought number be written in the interstice to the 


right hand of 12, the upper number by Art. 7 in the Rank of the Latus. 


2. And this sought number be multiplied into the whole figures now 
uppermost in the Rank of the Latus, and the product written in the Rank 
of the Square opposite 571,800, the second period of the given number, 
which stands in the Rank of the number or Pulpit Diagram, and imme- 


diately above 60, the upper number by Art. » in that Rank. 


90 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


3. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


4. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the pro- 
duct written in the Rank of the Cube opposite to 571,800, the second period 
as before, and immediately above 160, the upper number by Art. « in that 
Rank. 


5. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


6. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum and the pro- 
duct written in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to 571,800, the second 
period as before, and immediately above 240, the upper number by Art. 7) 
in that Rank. 


7. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


8. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the pro- 
duct be written in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to 571,800, 
the second period as before, and immediately above 192, the upper num- 
ber by Art. w in that Rank. 


9. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 91 


10. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, this pro- 


duct should not be greater than 102,571,800, the first Resolvend by Art. 7. 


Then 3 will be found the number answering these conditions. For— 


e. Write 3 in the interstice to the right hand of 12, the upper num- 
ber by Art. 7) in the Rank of the Latus, and it becomes 123, and is now 
the upper number in that Rank. 


o. Multiply the found 3 into this 123, and write the product 369 in 
the Rank of the Square opposite to 571,800, the second period, and imme- 
diately above 60, the upper number by Art. ») in that Rank. 


z. Add the figures in this situation, 369 
60 


and it becomes 6,369. Write this sum opposite to 
and immediately above 369, and this 6,369 is now the upper number in 


_ the Rank of the Square. 


v. Multiply this found 3 into this 6,369, and write the product 19,107 
in the Rank of the Cube opposite to 571,800, the second period, ‘and 
immediately above 160, the upper number by Art. s) in that Rank. 


Add the figures in this situation, 19;107 
160 


and it becomes 179,107. Write this sum op- 
posite to and immediately above 19,107, and this 179,107 is now the upper 
number in the Rank of the Cube. 


x, Multiply the found 3 into 179,107, and write the product 537,321 
in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to 571,800, the second period, and 


immediately above 240, the upper number by Art. y in that Rank. 
Ac 


92 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


~). Add the figures in this situation, 537,321 
240 


and it becomes 2,937,321. Write this sum op- 
posite to and immediately above 537,321, and this 2,937,321 is now the 


upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


#. Multiply this found 3 into this 2,937,321, and write the product 
8,811,963 in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to 571,800, the 
second period, and immediately above 192, the upper number by Art. wu in 
that Rank. 


\, Add the figures in this situation, 8,811,963 
192 


And it becomes .. 28,011,963. Write this sum opposite 
to and immediately above 8,811,963, and this 28,011,963 is now the upper 
number in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


«w. Multiply this found 3 into this 28,011,963, and the product is 
84,035,889, which is less than 102,571,800, the first Resolvend by Art. 7. 


\ 


And 3 is the highest number which will answer these conditions. 


For let 4 be substituted in these operations, they will successively become— 


The number ing ............124. ° The product ine .. 124 xX 4= 496 
A496 we 

60 4 

The sum, Ines. G esate stella 6,496. The product inv ........ 25,984 
25,984 185,984 


160 4 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. | 93 


Mines fim ig (ap esl sere’ 185,984. The product iny...... 743,936 
743,936 3,143,936 

940 4. 

MWe SUM Ua Wy Gi ee). 63 eas 3,143,936. The product in» .. 12,575,744 
12,575,744 31,775,744 

192 Pan: | 

The sum in| ............. 31,775,744. The product in cs.. 127,102,976 


which last product is greater than 102,571,800. 


~. Write the found figure 3, which answers the conditions above 0, 
the units of the second period 571,800, and exterior to and immediately 
above the Pulpit Diagram. This is the second found figure of the Root 


«». Call this last product 84,035,889, which answers the conditions 
the second Subtrahend, write it opposite to and immediately under 
102,571,800, the first Resolvend. 


“&. Subtract 84,035,889, the second Subtrahend, from 102,571,800, 
the first Resolvend, and 18,535,911 is the second Remainder. 


j'. Write 18,535,911, the second Remainder, on a line with the figures 
of the third Period in the next descending right hand step of the Pulpit 
Diagram, so as to form the number 18,535,911,758,593. This is the 


second Resolvend. 


k!. Add 8, the second found figure of the Root, to 123, the upper 


number in the Rank of the Latus by Art. g), and write the sum 126 in the 


94 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Rank of the Latus, opposite to and immediately above it. This 126 is now 


the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


!’. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 126, and 
write the product 378 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and imme- 


diately above 6,369, the upper number in that Rank by Art. 7). 


m’. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 378 and 6,369, and 
write the sum 6,747 opposite to and immediately above them. This 6,747 


is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


n’. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 6,747, 
and write the product 20,241 in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and 
immediately above 179,107, the upper number in the Rank by Art. 9. 


p’. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 20,241 and 179,107, 
and write the sum 199,348 opposite to and immediately above them. This 


199,348 is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


q. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 199,348, 
and write the product 598,044 in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to 
and immediately above 2,937,321, the upper number in that Rank 


by Art. ». 


7’. . Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this 598,044 and 
2,937,321, and write the sum 3,535,365 opposite to and immediately above 
them. This 3,535,365 is now the upper number in the Rank of the 


Biquadrate. 


s’. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root into this 3,535,365, 
and write the product 10,606,095 in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi, 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 95 


opposite to and immediately above 28,011,963, the upper number in that 
Rank by Art. |. 


i’. Add together in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi this 10,606,095 
and 28,011,963, and write the sum 38,618,058 opposite to and immediately 


above them. 


w. Transfer this 38,618,058 to the right hand one place. And this 
38,618,058 so transferred, is now the upper number in the Rank of the 
Quadratus Cubi. 


wv. Add 3, the second found figure. of the Root, to 126, the upper 
number in the row of the Latus by Art. 4’, and write the sum 129 opposite 
to and immediately above it. This 129 is now the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus. 


w’. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 129, 
and write the product 387 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and im- 
mediately above 6,747, the upper number in that Rank by Art. m’. 


x’. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 387 and 6,747, and 
write the sum 7,134 opposite to and immediately above them. This 7,134 


is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


y'. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into 7,134, and 
write the product 21,402in the Rank of the Cube opposite to immediately 
above 199,348, the upper number in that Rank by Art. p’. 


z’. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 21,402 and 199,348, 
and write the sum 220,750 opposite to and immediately above them. 


This 220,750 is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 
Bl 


96 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


a’. Multiply 3, thesecond found figure of the Root, into this 220,750, 
and write the product 662,250 in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to 
and immediately above 3,535,365, the upper number in that Rank by 
Art. 7". 


6’. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this 662,250 and 
3,535,365, and write the sum 4,197,615 opposite to and immediately above 


them. 


y. Transfer this 4,197,615 to the right hand two places. This 4,197,615 
so transferred, is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


do’. Add 3, the second found figure of the Root, to 129, the upper num- 
ber in the Rank of the. Latus by Art. v', and write the sum 132 opposite 
to and immediately above it. This 132 is now the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus. 


. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 132, and 
write the product 396 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and imme- 
diately above 7,134, the upper number in that Rank by Art. 2’. 


@. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 396 and 7,134, and 
write the sum 7,530 opposite to and immediately above them. This 


7,530 is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


7. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 7,530, and. 
write the product 22,590 in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and imme- 
diately above 220,750, the upper number in that Rank by Art. 2’. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 97 


é’. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this 22,590 and 220,750, 
and write the sum 243,340 opposite to and immediately above them. 


/. Transfer this 243,340 to the right hand three places. This 243,340 
so transferred, is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


z'. Add 3, the second found figure of the Root, to 152, the upper num- 
ber in the Rank of the Latus by Art. 0’,) and write the sum 135 opposite 
to and immediately above it. This 135 is now the upper number in the 


Rank of the Latus. 


x. Multiply 3, the second found figure of the Root, into this 135, and 
write the product 405 in the Rank of the Square opposite to and imme- 
diately above 7,530, the upper number in that Rank by Art. ¢.) 


gl. Add together in the Rank of the Square this 405 and 7,530, and 


write the sum 7,935 opposite to and immediately above them. 


Y. Transfer this 7,935 to the right hand four places. This 7,935 so 


transferred, is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


#, Add 3, the second found figure of the Root, to 135, the upper num- 
ber in the Rank of the Latus by Art. z’,) and write the sum 138 opposite to 


and immediately above the 135: 


e. Transfer this 138 to the right hand five places. This 138 so trans- 


ferred, is now the upper number in the the Rank of the Latus. 


Then seek the greatest number with the following conditions— 


V’. Thatif this sought number be written in the interstice to the right 


hand of 138, the upper number by Art. ¢ in the Rank of the Latus. 


98 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


9’. And the sought number be multiplied into the whole figures now 
uppermost in the Rank of the Latus, and the product written in the Rank 
of the Square opposite 758,593, the third period of the given number, 
which stands in the Rank of the number, or Pulpit Diagram, and imme- 
diately above 7,935, the upper number by Art. / in that Rank. 


3’. And the figures of this product, and that upper number be in 
this situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and imme- 


diately above the product. 


4’. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the pro- 
duct written in the Rank of the Cube opposite to 758,593, the third period 
as before and immediately above 243,340, the upper number by Art. /in 
that Rank. 


5’. And the figures of this product, and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


6’. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the pro- 
duct written in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to 758,593, the third 
period as before and immediately above 4,197,615, the upper number by 
Art. »/,) in that Rank. 


7’. And the figures of this product, and that number be in this situa- 
tion added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 
above the product. 


8’, And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the 
product written in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to 758,593, 
the third period as before and immediately above 38,618,058, the upper 
number by Art. w’,) in that Rank. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 99 


9. And the figures of the product, and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 


above the product. 


10’. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, the product 
should not be greater than 18,535,911,758,593, the second Resolvend by 
Att: 77 


Then 4 will be found the number answering these conditions, for-—— 
e’. Write 4 in the interstice to the right hand of 138, the upper 


number by Art. 7’) inthe Rank of the Latus, and it becomes 1,384, and is 


now the upper number in that Rank. 


o’. Multiply the found 4 into this 1,384, and write the product 5,536 
in the Rank of the Square opposite to 758,593, the third period, and 
immediately above 7,935, the upper number by Art. »’ in that Rank. 


7’, Add the figures in this situation, 5,536 
7935 


And it becomes .... 799,036. Write this sum opposite 
to and immediately above 5,536, and this 799,036 is now the upper number 


in the Rank of the Square. 


v’. Multiply this found 4 into this 799,036, and write the product 
3,196,144 in the Rank of the Cube, opposite to 758,593, the third period, 
and immediately above 243,340, the upper number by Art. / in that Rank. 


g’. Add the figures in this situation, 3,196,144 
243,340 


And it becomes ... 246,536,144. Write this sum 


opposite to and immediately above 3,196,144, and this 246,536,144 is how 


the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 
Cova 


100 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


z. Multiply this found 4 into this 246,536,144, and write the pro- 
duct 986,144,576 in the Rank of the Biquadrate, opposite to 758,593, the 
third period, and immediately above 4,197,615, the upper number by Art. 9 
in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


/. Add the figures in this situation, 986,144,576 
41,976,15 


And it becomes .. 42,962,294,576. Write this sum 
opposite to and immediately above 986,144,576, and this 42,962,294,576 is 
now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


a. Multiply this found 4 into this 42,962,294,576, and write the pro- 
duct 171,849,178,304 in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi, opposite to 
758,593, the third period, and immediately above 38,618,058, the upper 
number by Art. a’ in that Rank. 


VY. Add the figures in this situation, 171,849,178,304 
3,861 ,805,8 


———— 


And it becomes .. 4,033,654,978,304. Write thissum 
opposite to 758,593, the third period, and immediately above 171,849,178,304, 
and this 4,033,654,978,304 is now the upper number in the Rank of the 
Quadratus Cubi. 


w’. Multiply this found 4 into this 4,033,654,978,304, and the pro- 
duct is 16,134,619,913,216, which is less than 18,535,911,758,593, the second 
Resolvend by Art. 7’. 


And 4 is the highest number which will answer these conditions. 


For let 5 be substituted in these operations, and they will be- 
come— 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 101 


The number in ¢ .......... 1,385. The product ino’ .. 1,385 « 5 = 6,925 
6,925 800,425 

793,5 5 

The sum in?’.......... 800,425. The product inv .... .... 4,002,125 
4,002,125! 247,342,125 

243,340 5 

The sum in @ ...... 247,342,125. The product iny’ .... 1,236,710,625 
1,236,710,625 43,212,860,625 

A1,976,15 5 

The sum in of .... 43,212,860,625. The product in o’ .. 216,064,303,125 
216,064,303,125 4,077,870, 103,125 

3,861 ,805,8 : i) 


Thesum in \' .. 4,077,870,103,125. The productin w’. .20,389,350,515,625 


which last product is greater than 18,535,911,758,593. 


«’. Write the found figure 4, which answers the conditions above 
4, the units of the third period 758,593, and exterior to and immediately 
above the Pulpit Diagram. This is the third found figure of the Root. 


=’. Call this last product 16,134,619,913,216, which answers the 
conditions the third Subtrahend, and write it opposite to and immediately 
under 18,535,911,758,593, the second Resolvend. 


102 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


“&/. Subtract 16,134,619,913,216, the third Subtrahend, from 
18,535,911,758,593, the second Resolvend, and 2,401,291,845,377 is the 
third Remainder. 


And proceed analogously through all the following Periods of the 


given number : 
Thus— 


j’. Write the last Resolvend on a line with the figures of the next 
Period in the next descending right hand step of the Pulpit Diagram. 


These whole figures are the next Resolvend. 


k’. Add the last found figure of the Root to the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


Vv. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum, and 
write the product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 


above the upper number in that Rank. 


m’. Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


them. ‘This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


2”. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum, and write 
the product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above 


the upper number in that Rank. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 103 


p’. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 


upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


q'. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum and 
write the product in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and imme- 


diately above the upper number in that Rank. 


ry’. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this product and 
that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 
them. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biqua- 


drate. 


s’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum and 
write the product in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to and 


immediately above the upper number in that Rank. 


_ i’. Add together in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi this product 
and that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately 
above them. 


wu’. ‘Transfer this last sum to the right hand one place. This sum 


so transferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Quadratus 


Cubi. 


v’. Add the last found figure of the Root to the upper number in 
the Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and imme- 


diately above it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the 
Latus. 


104 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


w’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum, and 
write the product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately | 


above the upper number in that Rank. 


a’. Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


y’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum and 
write the product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately 


above the upper number in that Rank. 


2”, Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


«’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum, and write 
the product in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and immediately 
above the upper number in that Rank. 


Bp”. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this product and 
that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


them. 


y’. Transfer this last sum to the right hand two places. This sum 


so transferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


x’, Add the last found figure of the Root to the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 105 


e’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum and 
write the product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 
above the upper number in that Rank. 


e”. Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 
This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 

7’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum and write 
the product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above 


the upper number in that Rank. 


#’, Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 
Uf 


i”, Transfer this last sum to the right hand three places. This sum 


so transferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


7’. Add the last found figure of the Root to.the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 
it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 

x%’. Multiply the last found figure of the Root into this sum, and 
write the product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately 
above the upper number in that Rank. 

we 
that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately 


Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and 


above them. 


106 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Y. Transfer this last sum to the right hand 4 places. This sum so 


transferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


Ye 


&”, Add the last found figure of the Root to the upper number in 
the Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately 


above it. 


«’. Transfer this sum to the right hand 5 places. This sum so 


transferred is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


Then seek the greatest number with the following conditions: 
e”. Thatif this sought number be written in the interstice to the 
right hand of the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 

o”. And this sought number be multiplied into the whole figures now 
uppermost in the Rank of the Latus, and the product written in the Rank 
of the Square opposite to the next period of the given number, which 
stands in the Rank of the number, or Pulpit Diagram, and immediately 


above the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


7’. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in 
this situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and imme- 
diately above the product. 

4 


v’. Andthe sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the 


product written in the Rank of the Cube opposite to the next period - 


and immediately above the upper number in that Rank. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 107 


g’. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and imme- 


diately above the product. 


y’. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the 
product written in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to the next 


period and immediately above the upper number in that Rank. 


J’. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in 
this situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and imme- 


diately above the product. 


o’. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, and the 
product written in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to the next 


period and immediately above the upper number in that Rank. 


Y’. And the figures of this product and that upper number be in this 
situation added together, and the sum written opposite to and immediately 
above the product. 


cw”. And the sought number be multiplied into this sum, then the 
product shall not be greater than the last Resolvend. 


c’”. Then write the found number which answers these conditions 
above the units of the next period, and exterior to and immediately above 


the Pulpit Diagram. This is the next found figure of the Root. 


<”. Call the last product which answers these conditions the 
next Subtrahend, write it opposite to and immediately under the last 
Resolvend. 


108 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


ey, Subtract this last found Subtrahend from the last Resolvend, 


and the result is the next Remainder. 


And by this circle of operation there will successively be found— 


For the 4th period 


wu’. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Quadratus 


Cubi = 4,209,500,228,544. 


oy’. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Biquadrate 
= 44,973,293,040. 


’. 


The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Cube 
= 256,258,080. 


Y, 'The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Square =821,340. 
x’. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus = 1,404. 
cu”, The sought number or fourth figure of the Root = 5. 
ws’, The fourth Subtrahend = 2,116,025,521,169,640,625. 


ww”, The fourth Remainder = 285,266,324,208,246,683. 


ee SR a 


For the 5th period 


et 2 en 


w”’, ‘The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Quadratus 
Cubi = 425,466,612,625,293,750. 


| 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 109 


y’”. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Biquadrate 
= 453,589, 139,259,375. 


/’, The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Cube 
= 257,904,272,500. 


y”, The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Square 
= 82,485,375. 


a, "The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus — 14,070. 
/”, The sought number or fifth figure of the Root — 6. 

wy”, The fifth Subtrahend = 255,443,315,383,323,683,729,856. 

ws”. The fifth Remainder = 29,823,008,824,922,999,566, 169. 


——- For the 6th and last Period ——-_—______—___—- 


wu’. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Quadratus | 
Cubi = 42,601,119,820,029,578, 182,656. 


7”. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Biquadrate 
= 4,540,535,451,486,781,440. 


‘*, The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Cube 
= 258,102, 288,056,320. 


”. The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Square 
= 8,252,759,040. 


110 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


x’, 'The upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus = 140,736. 


«”, The sought number or sixth figure of the Root = 7. 


wi’, The sixth Subtrahend = 29,823,008,824,922,999,565, 181,681,169. 


Ww’. The sixth and last Remainder = 987,654,321. 


Hence then the integral approximate Root of the given number is 
234,567, and the last Remainder 987,654,321 is the Numerator of a Frac- 
tion, which is to be added to the integral Root, so as to afford a nearer 
approximate to truth. And the Denominator of this Fraction is found 


by the following process— 


<: Add the last figure of the Root to the upper number in the Rank 
of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above it. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


~: Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately above the 
upper number in that Rank. 


c: Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


¢- Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above the 
upper number in that Rank. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. | 111 


o. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


o. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and immediately 


above the upper number in that Rank. 


»y Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this product and 
that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


them. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


53. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi opposite to and immediately 


above the upper number in that Rank. 


uw». Add together in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi this product 
and that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately 


above them. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the 
Quadratus Cubi. 


And these operations are analogous to those from k” to ?’. 


vu. Add the last figure of the Root to the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


ue. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately above 


the upper number in that Rank. 
ita | 


112 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


ve. Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


L. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above the 


upper number in that Rank. 


&. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


¢. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Biquadrate opposite to and immediately above 


the upper number in that Rank. 
é. Add together in the Rank of the Biquadrate this product and 
that upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


them. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


And these operations are analogous to those from v” to 6”. 


«3. Add the last figure of the Root to the upper number in the 
Rank of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


it. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


g. Multiply the last figure of the Root into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately above 


the upper number in that Rank. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 113 


S$. Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


uly Multiply the last figure of the Root into the sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Cube opposite to and immediately above the 
upper number in that Rank. 


J. Add together in the Rank of the Cube this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above 


them. This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


And these operations are analogous to those from 6”. to 6”. 


» Add the last figure of the Root to the upper number in the Rank 
of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above it. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


yw: Multiply the last figure of the Rank into this sum, and write the 
product in the Rank of the Square opposite to and immediately above the 


upper number in that Rank. 


» Add together in the Rank of the Square this product and that 
upper number, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above them. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


And these operations are analogous to those from z” to w’’. 


» Add the last figure of the Root to the upper number in the Rank 
of the Latus, and write the sum opposite to and immediately above it. 


This sum is now the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


114 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


And this operation is analogous to that of 2’. 


us Then add together the upper numbers in each Rank as found 
by Arts. Qe ¢ Jss and an additional Unit. The sum of all these will 
be the Denominator of the Fraction, to be added to the integral Root as 


required. 


And performing these operations in this example with the last figure 
of the Root 7, the Result will be as follows : 


The upper number in the Rank of the 
4,260,747 ,694,903,334,607 331,985,642. Quadratus Cubi. 
45,410,774,905,552,940,176,815. Biquadrate, 
258, 125,396,471,245,260. Cube. 
825,325, 162,335. Square. 
1,407,402. Latus. 
1. The additional Unit. 


4.260,793,105,941,366,382,119,977,455. The sum or‘Denominator. 


Flence, then, finally, the approximate 6th Root of the given number. 
166,57 1,800,758,593,887 ,308,296,025,335,490 
is the mixed number. 


987,654,321 
DAG G Stee eh cis aie T el vets, stevie hos pg 


4,260,793, 105,941,366,382, 119,977,455 
And this concludes the operation according to the Arabian method. 


(42). I now proceed to show the conformity of the above operation 


with the demonstration of Par. 11). et seq. and for this purpose must 
premise the following Lemmas. 


! 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 115 


Lemma 7. If two rows of figures be written mutually parallel, but 
so that the units of the first row be opposite the »™ place of the second, 
the tens of the first opposite to place x + 1 of the second, the hundreds of 
the first opposite to place » +:2 of the second, &c. and the rows be in this 
situation added by the common Rule of Addition, this is equivalent to 
the first row having added (the second row) x (10°). 


Thus if there be written for the first row, 56,789. 
for the second row, 123: 
08,019. 


Then since 3, the units place of 123 is written opposite the tens or 
2d place of 56,789, and since 2— 1 = 1, so this is equivalent to 56,789 + 
123 X 10° = 56, 789 + 1,230. 


Similarly if there be written 56,789. 
123. 


69,089. 
Then since the 3 is here written opposite the hundreds, or 3d place 


of 56,789, and since 3 — 1 = 2, so this is equivalent to 56,789 + 123 x 
107 — 56,789 + 12,300. 


Similarly if there be written 56,789. 
123. 


179,789 


This is equivalent to 56,789 + 125,000. 


Gl 


116 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 
No demonstration is required here. 


43.) The division of the given number into periods written in the 
Pulpit Diagram, by Par. 37 and 38), is evidently the same as in the 
European Rule, Par. 32) and is therefore explained in Par. 34). Then 


Since 166 the first period = Aso asin Par. 34 Art. 0.) its nearest 


approximate 6th Root which is 2, is = a. 
a. Then2 = ais the number written in the Rank of the Latus. 


6b. Then? X2—=>4=—-ax*a=a is the number written in the 


Rank of the Square. 


ce. Then 4 x 2=8—a’* Xx a =a? is the number written in the 
Rank of the Cube. 


d. Then8 x 2=>16=a3 XK a= a‘ isthe number written in the 
Rank of the Biquadrate. 


e. Then 16 X 2 = 32 = a* X a = a’ is the number written in the 
Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


Jf. Then 32 x 2 = 64= a° X a = a’ is the number written in the 
Rank of the Number or Pulpit Diagram, and is the first subtrahend, 
agreeing with the first subtrahend of the European method, Par. 34 Art. c.) 


g.h.t. Then 166 — 64 = 102 = A — a’ and is the first Remainder 
which agrees with the first Remainder of the European method, Par. 34 
Art. d) and is therefore = R. (Par. 18.) 


j. Since by Par. 34 Art. ¢.) 102,571,800 = Rg° + B, hence the first 
Resolvend of the European and Arabian methods agree. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 117 


k. ‘Then by Art. a.) since2 =aso24+2=>4=a+a= 2a, and 
is the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


l. Then4 xX2>8= 2a X a= 2a’, and is the product written in 
the Rank of the Square. 


m. By Art. 6.) since4 = a* so 8 +4 = 12 = 2a*+ a = 3 a’, and 
is the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


n. Then 12 x 2 = 24=3a’* X a= 3a’, andis the product written 


in the Rank of the Cube. 


p. By Art. c.) since 8 = a’ so 24 + 8 = 32 > 3a + 4° = 4 a', and 
is the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


q. Then 32 x 2= 64=4a X a= 4a‘, andis the product written 
in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


r. By Art. d.) since 16 = a* so 64 + 16 = 80 = 4 a* + a* = 5 a4, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


s. Then 80 x 2 = 160 = 5a* X a = 5a’, and is the product writ- 
ten in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


t. By Art e.) since 32 = a* so 160 + 32 = 192 = 5a5 4+ a = 6 a, 


and is the sum written in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


wu. By the transference of 192, its units are put under the 6th place 
of the second period, and hence 6 a* thus transferred, is the upper num- 
ber in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


v. Then by Art. &.)since4 = 2aso2+4=—6=>a+2a= 38a, 


and is the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


118 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


w. Then6 x2—12=3axXa= 3a, and is the product written 
in the Rank of the Square. 


a. By Art. m.) since 12 — 3 aso 124+ 12=24—30 +30 = Ga’, 


and is the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


y- Then 24 x 2= 48 = 6a’ X a= 6’, and is the product written 
in the Rank of the Cube. 


z. By Art. p.) since 32 = 4a’ so 48 + 32 = 80= 60° 44a = 100°, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


«. Then 80 x 2= 160 = 10a X a= 10a’, andis the product writ- 
ten in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


6. By Art. r.) since 80 = 5 a‘ so 160 + 80 = 240 = 10 at + 5a* = 


15 a‘, and is the sum written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


y. By the transference of 240, its units are put under the 5th place 
of the second period, and hence 15 a‘ thus transferred, is the upper number 


in Rank of the Biquadrate. 


0. Then by Art. v.) since6 = 3a8024+6=8 =>a4+3a= 4a, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


« Then’ x2=16=4axX a= 4a’, andis the product written in 
the Rank of the Square. 


¢. By Art. x.) since 24 = 6a’so16 +24 = 40— 6a +4 a* = 10a’, 


and is the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


q. Then 40 x 2=> 80= 10 a* X a = 10 a’, and is the product writ- 
ten in the Rank of the Cube. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 119 


6. By Art. z.) since 80 = 10a’ so 80 + 80 = 160 = 10 a° +. 10 a? 
= 20 a3, and is the sum written in the Rank of the Cube. 


s. By the transference of 160, its units are put under the 4th place of 
the second period, and hence 20 a? thus transferred, is the upper number 
in the Rank of the Cube. 


z. Then by Art. 0.) since 8 = 4aso2+8=10-a+4a— 5a, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Latus. 


a. Then 10 X 2=20=5a xX a= 5a’, and is the product written 
in the Rank of the Square. 


uw. By Art. Z.) since 40 = 10 a’so 20 + 40 = 60 = 5a* + 10a’? = 15 a’, 
and is the sum written in the Rank of the Square. 


». By the transference of 60, its units are put under the 3d place of 


- the second period, and hence 15 a’ thus transferred, is the upper number 


in the Rank of the Square. 


£. Then by Art. 2.) since 10 =5aso2+4+ 10 = 12 =>a+5a = 6a, 
and is the sum written in the Rank of the Latus. 


a. By the transference of 12, its units are put under the second place 
of the second period, and hence 6 a thus transferred, is the upper number 
in the Rank of the Latus. 


1. Then if there be a Digit annexed to the right hand of the upper 
number in the Rank of the Latus, since by Art. 7) this upper number 


H 1 


120 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


= 6a, So with the annexed Digit the whole figures will, by Lem. 6, become 
— 6a 9 + that Digit. 


2. Then if that Digit be multiplied into these figures, the product 
will become 6a 9 X that Digit + that Digit.|* Then if this product be 
written in the Rank of the Square opposite to the second period, then 
since by the transference of Art. », the units of the upper number in the 
Rank of the Square, are put under the 3d place of the second period, so 


they are also put under the third place of this product. 


3. Then if this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together since by Art. ») that upper number = 15 a’, so by Lem. 7, 
the sum = 6a 9 X that Digit + that Digit |» + 154% x g* = 15 a’g? + 
Gag X that Digit + that Digit]. 


4, Thenif that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will 
become 15 a* ¢” x that Digit + 6a 9 x that Digit |? + that Digit }}. Then 
if this product be written in the Rank of the Cube, opposite to the second 
period, then since by the transference of Art. .«, the units of the upper 
number in the Rank of the Cube, are put under the 4th place of the second 
period, so they are also put under the 4th place of this product. 


5. Then if this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together since by Art. s, that upper number = 20 a’ so by Lem. 7, the 
sum — 15 a* ¢* x that Digit + 6a 9 x that Digit |? + that Digit |* + 20a° 


Xo = 2003 ¢3 + 15a’ ¢ x that Digit + 6a x that Digit!’ + that Digit)? 


6. Then if that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will be- 
come 20 a® ¢? x that Digit + 15 a’ ¢’ x that Digit|” + 6a 9 x that Digit] * 
+ that Digit.|+. Then if this product be written in the Rank of the 
Biquadrate, opposite to the second Period, then since by the transference 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 121 


of Art. y, the units of the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate, 
are put under the 5th place of the second period, so they are also put 
under the 5th place of this product. 


7. Thenif this product and that upper number be in this situation ad- 
ded together since by Art. y) that upper number = 15 a* so by Lem. 7, the 
sum = 20 a’ ¢? x that Digit + 15 a°¢’ x that Digit |? + 6a 9 x that Digit]: 
4 that Digit|* + 15a* x 9* = 15a*¢* 4 20 a? ¢? x that Digit + 154° ¢* 
x that Digit|?+ 6a 9 x that Digit |* + that Digit |. 


8. Thenif that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will be- 


come 15a* ¢* x that Digit + 20a’ ¢° x that Digit|*+ 15 a’¢° x that Digit |° 


+ 6a9 X that Digit |* + that Digit|’. Thenif this product be writtenin 
the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi, opposite to the second period, then since 
by the transference of Art. u, the units of the upper number in the Rank 
of the Quadratus Cubi are put under the 6th place of the second period, 
so they are also put under the 6th place of this product. 


9. Thenif this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together since by Art. w) that upper number = 6 a*, so by Lem. 7, 


the sum = 15 a* 9* x that Digit + 20 a3 ¢3 x that Digit|* + 15 a? ¢ 


x that Digit|>+ 6a9 x that Digit|* + that Digit|> + 6 a x ¢ = 645 @5 
+15 a‘ 9* x that Digit + 20 a3 ¢? x that Digit| 


2 +15 a ¢* xX that Digit)’ 


4+ 6a X that Digit|* + that Digit|>. 


10. Thenifthat Digit be multiplied into thissum, the product will be- 
comeG6a’ ¢° x that Digit + 15a* ¢* x that Digit |* + 20a’ ¢° x that Digit!” 
+ 15a°¢* x that Digit|* + 6a x that Digit|* + that Digit |°, which is 
required to be not greater thanR 9° + B by Art.7). Now this is evidently 
the same as the expression of Par. 20). 6 a g° 6 + 15a‘ g' b° + 20 a’ ¢° O° 


122 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


+ 15a ¢ b' + 6ag 55 + 6% having that Digit substituted for b. And 
since6e b+ 15a gh +200 Pb 4+ 15a ¢ b'+ 6ag dbs +05, must 
also be not greater than R ¢° + B, and since this must be a Digit so it 
is evident that the present operation from Art. 1 to 10) is equivalent to 
seeking the 6 of Par. 20). and since 3 by Art. e et seq.) is the found Digit, 
so 3 also expounds the 6 of Par. 20) and then— 


‘ », Since by Art. +) 12 = 6a, and since 3 contains one figure, so 
123 =6ag + 6 by Lem. 6,) and is the upper number in the Rank of 
the Latus. 


co. Then 123 x 3 = 369 = (6a94+060)xb = 6a9b4 B, and is 
the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


y. Then since by Art. ») 60 = 15a’, with its units put under the 
3d place of 369, so by Lem. 7,) their sum in this situation = 369 + 60 x 10° 
= 369 + 6,000 = 6,369 = (6agb46) +1509 = 15a ¢46a9b4 8, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


v. Then 6,369 x 3 = 19,107 = (15 a°g? + Gag+h) xb=15a¢°b 
+ 6a 90 4+ 2, and is the product written in the Rank of the Cube. 


g. Then since by Art. ») 160 = 20°, with its units put under the 
Ath place of 19,107, so by Lem. 7,) their sum in this situation = 19,107 
+ 160 x 10° = 19,107 + 160,000 = 179,107 = (15 a’ pb+6agur +b’) 
+20¢x@¢=20e0e¢+4+ 15a 9b + Gaglh + BW, and is the upper 
number in the Rank of the Cube. 


~ Then 179,107 X 3 = 537,321 = (200° + 150° gb +6492 +5) 
Xb= WG PO+15e PL +6agh + BH, and is the product written 
in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 123 


~). Then since by Art. y) 240 = 15 a‘, with its unit put under the 
5th place of 507,321 so by Lem. 7,) their sum in this situation = 537,321 
+ 240 x 10‘ = 537,321 + 2,400,000 = 2,937,521 = Qe pb+4 15a’ gb 
+6aeh+)4+ 15a xg=lbage+We’Pb4+15e0e VY +6agb' 
+. b*, and is the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


a. Then 2,937,521 x 3 = 8,811,963 = (15 a* ¢* + 20403 ¢7b + 15a’* ¢* b 
+ 6a904 0) xX b= 15a@Gb4 20 PVV+ bePV+6ag v 
+ 05, and is the product written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


\. Then since by Art. w). 192 = 6 a’, with its units put under the 6th 
place of 8,811,963, so by Lem.7), their sum in this situation = 8,811,963 
4192 x 10°= 8,811,963 + 19,200,000 = 28,011,963 =(15a' gb +20 0¢° 
+150°¢?@+6agh+6)) +60 XP a=6aeePst lag b+ 20a 9b 
+15a°¢? B+6agh + 0 


<. Then 28,011,963 x 3 = 84,035,889 = (6a ¢ + 15 at gb 
+20 a¢°b2 +1502 02° 4+ Gag bt + 3B) Xb = a G5 + 15 a* ot 
+ 20 a g3 3 + 15 a7 g* b+ + Gag b> + 0, and is less than 102,571,800, 
or Rg + B by Art. j. 


~ Then since 3 is the greatest number which answers this condi- 
tion, so 3 is the second figure of the Root, and agrees with the second 
figure of the Root found by the European method in Par. 34, Art. b’). 


« And 84,035,889 expounds the second Subtrahend, which agrees 
with the second Subtrahend found by the European method in Par. 34, 
Art. c’. 


«> And since by Art. 7) 102,571,800 = R ¢° + B, so 102,571,800 — 
84,035,889 = 18,535,911 = R g® + bi (6 agob + 15 at g* b* + 20 a? 
it tal 


124 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


3b +154 ¢° b4 + 6a¢ 65 + 6°) and is the second Remainder, which 
therefore agrees with the second Remainder found by the European 
method in Par. 34, Art. d’, and is therefore = R/’ (Par. 21). 


j'. Then as in Par. 34 Art. e') 18,535,911,758,593 expounds R/ 9° 
+ C, and hence the second Resolvend of the European and Arabian 


methods agree. 


k’. Then by Art. 2). Since 123=6a9 + 6,503 + 123 = 126 = b 
+ (ag9+ 6)=6ag +2 4, and is the upper number in the Rank of the 
Latus. 


’. Then 126 xX 3= 378 = (6a9 +426) Xb6=6a9b42 0B’, andis 
the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


m’. By Art. 7). Since 6,369 = 15 a’ g? + 6a06 + b’, so 378 +6,369 
= 6,747 = (6a9b+4 26’) + (15a @ 4+ 6a9b4 07) = 150 G+ 12 agb 
+ 6°, and is the upper number in the Rank of the Square. 


n’. Then 6,747 x 3 = 20,241 = (lb ¢ +12 a96436) xb= 
ba ¢ b+ 12a¢ 6° + 306%, and isthe product written in the Rank of the 
Cube. 


p'. By Art. 9). Since 179,107 = 20° ¢3 + 15a ¢'b +6400 45%, 
so 20,241 + 179,107 = 199,348 = (15 a? ¢?b + 12a 98 4 35°) + (2003 ¢3 
+ 15¢7°¢76b6+4+6a004+0)= 20007 +300¢6b+ 18a00? +4 83, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


q’. Then 199,348 x 3 = 598,044 = (20 @ ¢? + 300° 9g? b +18 a9 b? 
+465)xb=200¢36 + 300¢b' +18 ag 6° +4 64, and is the 
product written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 125 


r’. By Art. J). Since 2,937,321 = 15 a* 9* + 200 b+ 150 bo 
+ 6a0 63 + b+, so 598,044 + 2,937,321 = 3,535,365 = (200° 9? b + 
3007 ev + 18ag8 + 464) + 15 a* 94 + We Pb4 1a GP + 
6a00? + b4)— 150+ 9? +40 Gb+4+ 450 0 + Wag b + 5 Dd, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


. Then 3,535,365 X 3 — 10,606,095 = (15 a* 9* + 40a 9 b + 45 
eg hb +24a00845b*)x b= 15 aot b+ 40 w 2 + 450 gb 
+ 24 a b* + 5 05, and is the product written in the Rank of the 
Quadratus Cubi. 


t’. By Art. {). Since 28,011,963 = 6 ao + 15 a* o* b + 20 a? ¢? b 
4+ 150° ¢?b3? + 6a¢ b* + 55, so 10,606,095 + 28,011,963 = 38,618,058 = 
(5batgb+ 400 7h 4+ 450° P+ 24a06'456°)4+ (6a 7g 4+ 15 
aeb+20¢ePRP 4+ 1e0e?7h +6a00' +6) =6a op? +300 Gb + 
6007 + 600 7b 4+ 30000460 =6(ae¢ +50 Cb 4+100 ¢ 
V+ 10¢e?bH4+5a06'+ 6°) = 6 (ap + by’, and since ag + bis =p 
by Par. 21), so 6 (a9 + b)’ = 6p’, and is the sum written in the Rank of 
the Quadratus Cubi. 


u’. By the transference of 38,618,058, its units are put under the 6th 
place of the third period, and hence 6 p’ thus transferred is the upper 
number in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


vo’. Then by Art. k/.) Since 126 = Gag + 26,803 + 126 = 129 = 
b+ 6ap + 26) = 6a +3 5, and is the upper number in the Rank of 
the Latus. 


w’., Then 129 x 3 = 887 = (6a9 +36) xb=6a06+4 3 6, and 
is the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


126 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


x’. Then by Art. m’.) Since 6,747 = lia’ ¢? + 12496 +4 3B, so 
387 + 6,747 = 7,134 = (6090430) 4+ (15a0¢ 4+ 124064 30)= 
15@°¢+ 18496 +4606’, and is the upper number in the Rank of the 


Square. 


y. Then 7,134 xX 3 = 21,402 = (15 a’ @ + 18 a9 6 + 6 Bb’) 
Xxb= 1509 b+ 18a006°+ 606, and is the product written in the 
Rank of the Cube. | 


2’. Then by Art. p’.) Since 199,348 = 20a 8 4+ 300°? b +18 a0? 
4+ 4 b*, $021,402 + 199,348 = 220,750 = (15 a b+ 18a 00? + 6 DB’) 
+ (20@¢ + 300°C) 4+ 18498446) = 0008445 ae b+ 36 
ao b°+ 1006’, and is the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


e, Then 220,750 X 3 = 662,250 = (20a ¢ 4+ 450° ¢’ b+ 36a00 
+100) xb=Me@dPb+ 45a ¢ bv? + 36a + 10 b', and is the 
product written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


‘p'. Then by Art 7’) Since 3,535,365 = 15 a* go 4+ 400° @ 6 +45 a 
gb + 24a9b) + 5 bY, so 662,250 + 3,535,365 = 4,197,615 = (20 a? g°d 
+45@ B+ 36a004 100) 4+ 5 a¢ +400 0 b4 45a’ og B+ 
2agh +56) = 1lba'gt+ 600 Pb+4+900 oF B+ 60ag 4 15 
=15(a¢g+4e0Pb+6¢¢7V4+4a—gh 46) = 15 (ao + b )*, and 
sinceag + bis = p by Par. 21, so 15 (ag + 6) = 15 p‘, and is the sum 
written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


y’. By the transference of 4,197,615, its units are put under the 5th — 
place of the third period, and hence 15 p* thus transferred, is the upper 
number in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS, 127 


. Then by Art. v’.) Since 129= 6a9 + 36,803 + 129= 132 = 6b 
+(6ag+ 36) =6aq44 4, and is the upper number in the Rank 
of the Latus. 


e OW hen h32i5¢ 3 = 396 = (6a9+ 45) XD — 6aob + 4 5%, and 
is the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


@?. Thenby Art. 2.) Since 7,134 = 15 a’ ¢ + 18 agb+ 6B, s0 396 
4+ 7,134 = 7,530 = (6a964408)4 (l5@¢+18a¢960466) = 
15a’ o + 24a 96 + 10 8’, and is the upper number in the Rank of the 


Square. 


7. Then 7,530 x 3 = 22,590 = (15 a’ ¢° + 24a96 + 1007) xb 
= 15a° gb + 24a¢gb? + 100%, and is the product written in the Rank 
of the Cube. 


#. Then by Art. z’.) Since 220,750 = 20a°9* + 45a’¢’b + 36a 95° 
+ 10 5° so 22,590 + 220,750 = 243,340 = (15 0° b +24a08° + 10 3’) 
+ (009445 40° b +36 a9 0? +106) = 20a o + 600°g?d + C0agb 
+206=20(0e0°?° + 3a°¢b+4+3a00' + b) = 20 (ag + O)', and since 
ago + bis = p by Par. 21). so 20 (ag + 6)? = 20 p’, and is the sum 
written in the Rank of the Cube. 


’. By the transference of 243,340, its units are put under the 4th place 
of the third period, and hence 20 p’, thus transferred, is the upper number 
in the Rank of the Cube. 


x’. 'Thenby Art. 0’). Since 132 = G6a9 +4bs03+4 132 =135=— 5 
+ (6a9+4+46)= 6a + 5 5d, and is the upper number in the Rank of 
the Latus. 


128 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


V7). Then 1385 X 3= 405 =(6a9+56)xb=6agpb +5 0%, and 
is the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


vw’. Then by Art. 2.) Since 7,530 = 15a’ ¢? + 24a96+ 100 80 
405 + 7,530 = 7,935 = (6a9b + 5B) + (150° ¢? +24a96 + 108%) = 
a+ 30a9b6+ 15V=15(e¢+2a9b+0')=15 (ag + bP, and 
since ag + bis = p by Par. 21) so 15 (ag + 6)? = 15 p’, and is the sum 
written in the Rank of the Square. 


y. 


By the transference of 7,935, its units are put under the 3d place 
of the third period, and hence 15p’, thus transferred, is the upper number 


in the Rank of the Square. 


#. Then by Art. z’.) Since 135 = Gag + 565038 + 135 = 1388 = 
6+ (6a9+45b)=6a97+6b=6(49+4 5), andsinceag+ bis=p 
by Par. 21) so 6 (ag + 6) = 6p, and is the sum written in the Rank of 
the Latus. 

z', By the transference of 138, its units are under the 2d place of the 
third period, and hence 6 p, thus transferred, is the upper number in the 


Rank of the Latus. 


1’. Then if there be a Digit annexed to the right hand of the upper 
number in the Rank of the Latus, since by Art. 7’) this upper number = 6p 
so with the annexed Digit, the whole figures will, by Lem. 6) become = 
6p¢ + that Digit. 


2’. Then if that Digit be multiplied into these figures, the product 


will become 6p¢ x that Digit + that Digit). Then if this product be writ- 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 129 


ten in the Rank of the Square opposite to the third period, then since by 
the transference of Art. »’, the units of the upper number in the Rank of 
the Square are put under the 3d place of the third period, so they are 
also put under the 3d place of this product. 


3’. Then if this product, and that upper number be in the situation 
added together, since by Art. »’) that upper number = 15 p* so by Lem 7). 
the sum = 5po x that Digit + that Digit? + 15 p? x @ = 15 p?¢? +6 
po x that Digit + that Digit.|’ 


4’, Then if that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will 
become 15p7 ¢’ x that Digit + 6 po x that Digit|* + that Digit |3. Then if 
this product be written in the Rank of the Cube, opposite to the third 
period, since by the transference of Art. /, the units of the upper number 
in the Rank of the Cube are put under the 4th place of the third period, 


so they are also put under the 4th place of this product. 


5’. Then if this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together, since by Art. /) that upper number = 20 a’ so by Lem. 7). 
the sum = 
15 p*@ x that Digit + 6p 9 x that Digit|? + that Digit? + 20p* xo = 
20p*¢* + 15p? ¢? x that Digit + 6p @ x that Digit|* x that Digit |°. 


6’. Then if that Digit be multiplied into this sum the product will 
become 20 p* ¢° x that Digit + 15p? ¢® x that Digit|® +6 po x that Digit|* 
+ that Digit|*. Then if this product be written in the Rank of the 
Biquadrate opposite the third period, since by the transference of Art. 9/) 
the units of the upper number in the Rank of the Biquadrate are put un- 


der the 5th place of the third period, so they are also put under the 5th 
place of this product. 


130 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


7’, Then if this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together, since by Art. 7’) that upper number = 15 p * so by Lem. 7) 
the sum = 

20 p'¢? X that Digit +15 p’ g* x that Digit |* + 6 po x that Digit |? + 
that Digit |* + 15 p* x gt = 15 p' go! 4+ 20p’ ¢ x that Digit + 15 p* ¢ x 
that Digit|* + 6pe x that Digit|? + that Digit)". | 


8’. Then if that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will be- 
come 15 p'¢' x that Digit + 20p’ 9 x that Digit |? -+ 15p’¢’ x that Digit]? + 
6 pq X that Digit|* + that Digit|’. Then if this product be written inthe 
Rank of the Quadratus Cubi, opposite the third period, since by the 
transference of Art. w’, the units of the upper number in the Rank of the 
Quadratus Cubi are put under the 6th place of the third period, so they 
are also put under the 6th place of this product. 


9’. Then if this product and that upper number be in this situation 
added together, since by Art. uw’, that upper number = 6 p* so by Lem. 7) 
the sum = 15 p*¢* x that Digit + 20 p? @ x that Digit|* + 15 p*¢? x 
that Digit|? + 6p¢ x that Digit|* + that Digit|> + 6p> x g° = 6 p*¢s + 
15 p* ¢* x that Digit + 20 p* 9? x that Digit|’ + 15p° ¢* x that Digit)? 
+ 6po x that Digit|* + that Digit|°. 


10’. Then if that Digit be multiplied into this sum, the product will 
become Gp*9° x that Digit + 15p*¢* x that Digit |’ + 20p*¢° x that Digit}? 
+ 15p*¢’ X that Digit |* + 6p¢ x that Digit ? + that Digit)’, which is requir- 
ed to be not greater than Rg’ + C by Art.j’.) Now this is evidently the 
same as the expression of Par. 23.) 6 p> gc + lo ptgc? + 20p' ge + 
15 pg? c* + Gpge> + ce’, having that Digit substituted for c. And since 
Gp ee+ lo pte ce +20 pi ¢e+ 15 p’ g’c* +6 poe +c, must also 
be not greater than R’ 9° + C, and since this c must be a Digit, so it is 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 131 


evident that the present operation from Art. 1’ to 10’.) is equivalent to seek- 
ing the c of Par. 23) and since 4 by Art. ¢’. et seq. is the found Digit, so 4 


also expounds the ¢ of Par. 23) and then— 


e’. Since by Art. #) 138 = 6p, and since 4 contains one figure, so 
13884 =6po +c by Lem. 6) and is the upper number in the Rank of the 
Latus. 


o. Then 1,384 x 4= 5,536 = (6po+e) Xc=6poe X c’, andis 


the product written in the Rank of the Square. 


’, Then since by Art. wv’). 7,935 = 15 p*, with its units put under 
the 3d place of 5,536 so by Lem. 7) their sum in this situation — 5,536 
+ 7,935 X 10° = 5,536 + 793,500 = 799,036 = (6 p ge + c*) + 1p? x 
= 15 p* ¢ X 6pee 4c’, and is the upper number in the Rank of the 
Square. 
v. Then 799,036 x 4 = 3,196,144 = (15 p?¢? X 6ppe Xe’) xXc= 
5p’ ge +6poc* + c’, and is the product written in the Rank of the 
Cube. 


g’. Then since by Art. 6), 243,340 = 20 p’, with its units put under 
the 4th place of 3,196,144 so by Lem. 7) their sum in this situation = 
3,196,144 + 243,340 xX 10° = 3,196,144 + 243,340,000 = 246,536,144 = 
(l5piec+Gppe +e) +20pxePa2wp eg +isp ge +6poc 
ce’, and is the upper number in the Rank of the Cube. 


—- 


vi. Then 246,536,144 x 4 = 986,144,576 = (20 p> ¢ 4 15 p’ gee + 
Gpee+e)xc=zaWpPe+lbprvre+6poe4c', and is the pro- 
duct written in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


132 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


{. Then since by Art. 7) 4,197,615 = 15 p‘, with its units put 
under the 5th place of 986,144,576 so by Lem. 7) their sum in this situa- 
tion = 986,144,576 + 4,197,615 x 10* = 986,144,576 + 41,976,150,000 = 
42,962,294,576 = (0p gic + lbp’ Pe+6poR+ce)415pxer 
lb po+0poee+ bpec+6poece +c‘, and is the upper number 
in the Rank of the Biquadrate. 


wo. Then 42,962,294,576 x 4 = 171,849,178,304 = (15 p* o! + 20 p® gc 
et bpeve+6poe+ec') 4 c= 15 p* oc +20 p’ gc? + bpee+ 
6poct+c,and is the product written in the Rank of the Quadratus 
Cubi. 


Y. ‘Then since by Art. ¢’) 38,618,058 = 6 p’, with its units put under 
the 6th place of 171,849,178,304 so by Lem. 7) their sum in this situation = 
171,849, 178,304 + 38,618,058 & 10° = 171,849,178,304 + 3,861,805,800,000 
= 4,053,654,978,304 = (15 p* o*c+20p? gc? + 15 pe e+6poc +e’) 
+6pP xpPpr6pePr+lpee+0pPPe+bypee+6podte’, 
and is the upper number in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi. 


w’. Then 4,033,654,978,304 x 4 = 16,134,619,913,216 = (6 p> ¢F + 
ptge + WpPe+ bpPe+t6popet+eo)xexa6ppet 
5 ptore +20p ee + lop? gc? + 6poc? +c) and is less than 
18,535,911,758,593, or R’ ¢° + C by Art 7’. 


«’. Then since 4 is the greatest number which answers this condi- 
tion, so 4 is the third figure of the Root, and agrees with the third figure 
of the Root found by the European method in Par. 34, Art. b’.) 


’, And 16,134,619,913,216 expounds the third Subtrahend, which 
agrees with the third Subtrahend found by the European method in 
Par. 34, Art. c”). 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 133 


“y, And since by Art. 7’) 18,535,911,758,593 = R’ ¢° + C, so 
18,535,911,758,593— 16,134,619,913,216 = 2,401,291,845,377 — R’ 9 + 
C—(6p’ ee + lope’? + 20 pee + 15 p’ ect + 6p oc’), and is 
the third Remainder, which therefore agrees with the third Remainder 
found by the European method in Par. 34, Art. d’, and is therefore = R/’ 
Par. 24. 


And by the circle of exposition there will successively be found— 
—-—— For the 4th Period 


u’. 4,209,500,228,544, the upper number transferred in the Rank of 
the Quadratus Cubi = 6 p”. 


y’. 44,973,293,040, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 
Biquadrate = 15 p™. , 


i”. 256,258,080, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 
Cube = 20 p”. 


Y’, 821,340, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the Square 
= op’. 


x’, 1,404, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus 


6 p’. 


lI 


—”. 5, the sought number, or fourth figure of the Root = d. 


wm”, 2,116,025,521,169,640,625, the fourth Subtrahend = 6 ps 95 d + 
15 p* o* d? + 20 p® gd? + 15 p” 9g d* 4+ 6p’ ods + d°. 


134 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


ws’, %85,266,324,208,246,683, the fourth Remainder — R”. 
a ee Por ithe Sth Period 


wu”. 425,466,612,625,293,750, the upper number transferred in the 
Rank of the Quadratus Cubi = 6 p”. 


¥’. 453,589,139,259,375, the upper number transferred in the Rank 
of the Biquadrate = 15 p”. 


“”, 257,904,272,500, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 
Cube = 20 p”. 


Ue 


Y”. 82,485,375, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 
Square = 15 p”. 


a”, 14,070, the upper number ‘transferred in the Rank of the Latus 


ww”. 6, the sought number, or fifth figure of the Root = e. 


we”, 955,443,315,383,323,683,729,856, the fifth Subtrahend = 6 p’5 ¢° ¢ 
+15 p* ore +20 p®GPe+ 15 p’ eet + 6p’ ge + e°. 


wy” 29,823,008,824,922,999,566,169, the fifth Remainder = R*. 


RS Sy 


For the 6th Period 


u”. 42,601,119,820,029,578, 182,656, the upper number transferred in 
the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi = 6 pe 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 135 


iv 


yY”. 4,540,535,451,486,781,440, the upper number transferred in the 
Rank of the Biquadrate = 15 p’. 

*”,  258,102,288,056,320, the upper number transferred in the Rank of. 
the Cube = 20 p’”. 

y’, 8,252,759,040, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 
Square = 15 p”. 

x’, 140,736, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus 
= 6 p”. 


c". 7, the sought number, or sixth figure of the Root = f. 


wi’, 99,823,008,824,922,999,565,181,681,169, the sixth Subtrahend, 
= 6 plo f +15 pl of +20 p'? Of? +15 p” eft + 6p ofi rf. 


eI", 987,654,321, the sixth and last Remainder — R” that is — r of 


Par. 28) as in the European method Par. 34). 


Then by the Analogous operations of Articles ¢ tos, to find the 
Denominator of the Fractional Part of the Root, there will be as follows: 


LU». 4,260,747,694,908,334,607,381,985,642, the upper number trans- 
ferred in the Rank of the Quadratus Cubi = 6 p"’, and since by Par. 25) 


p’ =m so this is also = 6 m’. 


¢. 45,410,774,905,552,940,176,815, the upper number transferred in 
the Rank of the Biquadrate = 15 p'* = 15 m* by Par. 25). 


M 1 


156 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


J. 258,125,396,471 245,260, the upper number transferred in the 
Rank of the Cube = 20 p? = 20 m? by Par. 25). 


5. 825,325,162,335, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the 


Square = 15 p™? = 15 m’ by Par. 25). 


x. 1,407,402, the upper number transferred in the Rank of the Latus 
_ 6 p — 6m by Par. 25). 


us- Hence then the sum with the additional Unit = 4,260,793,105, 
941,366,382,119,977,455 = 6 m> + 15 m* + 20m + 15m +6m+1= 
(m + 1)° —m°, and since by Art. ~'"). 987, 654, 321 = r of Par. 28) and 
by Par. 34). 234,567 = mso m + alain tale = the mixed number 
(m + 1)* — m% 
987,654,321, 


234,567 —____________________ and is by Par. 28). the approximate 
4,260,793,105,941,366,382,119,977,455, 


6th Root of the given number M, or 166,57 1,800,758,593,887,308,296,025, 
339,490. 


(44.) To prove by tentation that this is the Case, would require the 
actual involution of the above mixed number, which is the approximate 
Root, to the sixth Power, a task of vast labour, which, after so much cal- 
culation, I willingly decline, as it could serve little purpose except the 
mere gratification of curiosity, and therefore to illustrate this part of the 
subject, I shall chuse the following examples in simpler numbers, but 
which, in all probability, will be thought sufficiently complicated. Besides 
their present use, they will afterwards be satisfactory for reference ina 


future part of this paper. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 187 


Then by the method of Par. 28. 
—— First. Let there be sought the approximate 6th Root of 65.——__—_—— 


Here, since 2° — 64, and which is Z and 3° = 729, which is > 65, soM 
= 65, m = 2, and (m + 1)°—m° = 729 —64 = 665, and r = M — m° 


- 
— 65 —64 = 1. And hence the approximate Root, or m + 


Gm + 1)° — m° 


Suereee. yd hen 24. | 6 


1 1 1 1 1 1 
2° 6:2 ——— 4. 15+2* ——— + 20-28, —— 4 15°2%, —— +4 6:2 —— +4 
665 665? 665° 665* 665° 665° 


d 6 2% G55 4 15+ 2 665% 4 20+ 2% 665° + 15+ 2° 665? + 6. 2.665 4 1 
4 + LS LT A 


or 


665° 
equal to 
24,969,477,535,800,000 = 6°2°°665° 
46,935,108,150,000 = 15.2*.665* 
47,052,740,000 — 20.2°.665° 
26,533,500 = 15.2°.665° 
7,980 = 6.2.665 
1 
665° = 86,482,825,840, 140,625 )25,016,459,723,231,481, (0 + 64 = 64 


25,016,459,723,231,481 

Hence the deficiency in this case is 65—64-—_______—__ = 
86,482,825,840,140,625 

61,466,366,116,909,144 7 


86, 482,825,840, 140,625 


——— Second. Let there be sought the approximate 6th Root of 396 


138 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Here M = 396, mis the same as before, and r — 396 — 64 — 332. And 


hence the approximate Root is 2322. Then2 22 


6 


6 


332 3322 332° 332+ 3325 3328 
2° 4. 62% ——. 4. 15:24 —_ 4. 20-2 
665 665° 6 


“a or 
65° 665% 665° 665° 
625-665-332 4 15°2*665*.332" 4 20-2°-665°-332° 4 15:2°-665°-332* + 6-2-665-3395 4 3325 
644 - 


or 
665° 


8,289,866,541,885,600,000 = 6:2°-665°-332 
5,173,375,360,725,600,000 = 15:2*-665"332?. 
1,721,865,282,968,320,000 — 20:2°-665°-332° 
322,364,252,224,896,000 = 15°2%6657-332* 
32,187,949,395,087,360 = 6°2°665°332° - 
1,339,147,769,319,424 = 332° 
665° = 86,482,825,840, 140,625) 15,540,998,534,968,822,784 (179 + 64 = 243 
15,480,425,825,385,171,875 
-60,572,709,583,650,909 


ss 


60,572,709,583,650,909 
Hence the deficiency in this case is 396—243 ———_______ 
86,482,825,840, 140,625 
25,910,116,256,489,716 
a quantity no less than 152 ————_-——__ 
86,482,825,840, 140,625 


Third. Let there be sought the approximate 6th Root of 397 


Here M = 397, m is the same as before, and r = 397 —64 = 333. 


And hence the approximate Root is 2222. Then 223:|° 


660° 665 — 


333 $33? 333° 333* 3332 333° 
2° 4 62% ——. 4 15-24%, —— + 20°2° + 15:2% —— + 6:2-—— + 

665 665° 065° 665* 665° 665° 
6-2°-665°-333 +L 15-24-665*-333" + 20-2°-665°-353° + 15:2?-665*-333* + 6-2:665-333° + 333° 


or 


64-4. or 
665° 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 139 


8,314,836,019,421,400,000 — 6°2°:665°:333 


5,204,587,207,645,350,000 = 15°2°665*' 333° 


1,737,471,218,191,380,000 = 20:2°:665* 333° 


326,265,741,912,253,500 = 15'2?665°333+ 
32,675,636,708,806,140 = 6:2 -665 °333° 
1,363,532,208,525,369 — 333° 
665°— 86,4$2,825,840, 140,625) 15,617, 199,356,087,715,009 ( 180 +64 = 244 
15,566,908,651,225,312,500 


°90,290,704,862,402,509 


a 50,290,704,862,402,509 
Hence the deficiency in this case is 397244 ———— 


—_—_——_-—a quantity 
86,482,825,840, 140,625 


j 36,192,120,977,738,116 
yet greater than before, beingno less than 152 


86,482,825,840,140,625 


Fourth. Let there be sought the approximate 6th Root of 728 —— 


Here M = 728, mis the same as before r — 728 — 64 = 664. And 


hence the the approximate Root is24¢+, Then2 #°4| 


Sis 
0o085 
664 6642 664° 664+ 664° 6645 
25 4. 62% rR Ngo Rerere ees et 20 ieee Mle ATELY 5 gee 2A gio a eae Or 
665 6652 6653 6654 665° —- 665° 


6:2°:665°:664 + 15-2*-665*-664? + 20-2°-665°-6645 + 15:2?-665°-664* + 15°2-665-664° + 664° 
64 4 


665° 


16,579,733,083,771,200,000 — 6:2°.665°.664. 
20,693,501,442,902,400,000 — 15°2*.665'.664* 
13,774,922,263,746,560,000 = 20°2°.665°.6643 
9,157,823,035,598,336,000 = 15.2°.665°.6644 
1,030,014,380,642,795,520 = 6.2.665:664° 
85,705,457 236,443,136 = 665° 
665° = 86,482,825,840, 140,625)57,321,704,663,897,734,656 (662 + 64 = 726 
57, 251, 630,706, 173,093,750 


70, 07: 3, 957, i 24, 640, 906 


N l 


140 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


70,073,957,724,64.0,906 
and is 


Hence the deficiency in this case is 728 — 726 ——— 
86,482,825,840, 140,625 


spalbeia eer 16,408,868, 115,499,719 
again diminished to 1 —-———— 
86 482,825,840, 140,625 


45.) It is obvious that the operation and exposition may easily be 
extended to any other power, by the method of Par. 30), and by having as 
many Ranks as there are units in the index of the power and analogically 
adapting the circle of operations to these Ranks. It would be both curi- 
ous and entertaining to investigate those properties of figurate numbers 
by which the upper transferred number in each Rank becomes the found 
figures of the Root involved to the index of that Rank and multiplied by 
the proper co-efficient of the Binomial Theorem, and the succeeding ope- 
rations finally produce for each period, the last found figures of the Root 
multiplied by ten, and having then added the next figure of the Root, 
and the sum being involved to the index of the given power, and then 
having subtracted the last found figures of the Root multiplied by ten, 
and involved to the index of the given power. But such an inquiry would 
swell the present paper beyond all bounds of moderation, and must there- 


fore be omitted. 


46.) From all this ample detail, it appears that the advantages pro- 
posed by the Arabian Arithmeticians in the complicated apparatus of 
calculation required for the Pulpit Diagram, is first, that the Root may be 
extracted, as it were mechanically, without previous knowledge of the 
co-efficients of the Binomial Theorem, which are here produced by the mere 
arrangement of the Ranks; and next, that throughout all the intricacies 
of this operation it should never be necessary to multiply by a number 
higher than a Digit. Ishall not undertake to decide, whether these objects 


were sufficiently important to justify the employment of means so 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 141 


laborious, but shall only observe with respect to the last of them, that we 
may hence form some judgment how much the old Arithmeticians must 
have been perplexed and retarded by the labour of long multiplication. 
We, who enjoy the benefits of the great discovery of Logarithms, can 
now scarcely form an estimate of the difficulties with which they had to 
contend from this want, and the facilities which we enjoy from their use. 
While, therefore, the Arabian method of extraction may inspire us with 
more gratitude to Lord Napier, we must not too hastily condemn it as 
uselessly laborious, till we can show that, without a knowledge of his 
discovery we could have more happily succeeded in the facilitating and 
abbreviation of calculation. Should, after all these considerations, the 
intention of the Arabian operation be thought of little value, and the labour 
‘employed to accomplish it misused, yet the artful contrivances by which 
it is attained, and the skilful adaptation for this purpose of the simple 
principle of the variation of the signification of symbols from the variation 


of their situation, must, I think, in justice, always cause the Pulpit 


. Diagram to be considered a deserving monument of Arabic ingenuity. 


47.) It now remains, according to the originally proposed arrange- 


ment— 
IV. That I should give the extract from the original Ayoun-ul-Hisab, 
containing the above Rule, accompanied by a translation, and then offer 


some explanatory Remarks. 


48.) And the extract is as follows : 


EEE pee emis ty Naty Sie 


cols , a ds Lane Ly jae Wes en? ale | &> 4) | use cy lelaal eid | cla “i 
Ode Fda dm yd SS Us je wm 9 Lay ddl chad Ipoh mb yall Soe cols 
hg od \ ST wy 5 39> sal | ws | pal | § dx ‘aud lok Vales | 3) helical | ues 3 @) jaro 


142 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 
Cad) acti) do SI ele yall Sphere Atgb Ubyks Gaal pelye ye eye! 
Bpe fay wl, ul el pel g ENE byLSV oy UV yell dye eye y 
Syn S ready per le pod phot le Sb oS ol CAG y chet! Md 
pLEN Seed amen 9 Igh plead yo Ly90 gay be pow Wes bib cell ol 
godt ie MH aan ol JI dG, Gat Ce Sy JUL ie yy eld) Cie 
BU sod} ote cas? ool Vann | che Gh, ah, ole! jew Sys] TIE teed y 
EG dial ~ pil) Cte dh Gee ol gdh Vasey ood! 1b da’ Le te gs daall 
BUT pool 4 dy M de yoll cole po GE oadl po SoM goal peed eel 
bei wo SS sled! mle M1 & Kilt my wl od) V3Sm 5 dW] de all cole po 
phi) Dine be All dalds lad Sy OL I) ye oe SI lb i ne 
Sl get collide beady yey bly dL | er Bl da ht oye usa tht 
vidas ded Jods do FSW ApS cM eel Cs She Sle Jt dent 
sed Wdler pha cio hist ys clel phe b dedi alin, lob 1dr py dd 
SU te aS GEA G SUI Gy Jol yay dhe mays» Sett Cat tI 
ryt yl adh Vey Cae} Cio eel So aS my JU G GEA! Cy pee 
Mba pale cust oan) be d Sele] payed vad! GU be bp led GU gill 
Sli gill oa tegee Wolo | slat Gast Spiel! b el ys! US mes yl et s 
el ba) cast BW peg y cad | jee ye adled leo pd I) ele! | Unita’ 
bbe he SEAN yb Loe ty Les ppl IS pe pected GN yy all 538 p poll 
JW che bbe he Goll angi y eet Bow di y aad) GU Cid Fe all Un 
1 Qh AS 4 eal eto dhe ade Sold agi y Sle geet] bam pi, 


by pai Vy 
Bo 5b Eo py Ce Ga GE ctl! Cd caret ins vad! Gd te o pret] 
dy ‘ wnt | A ptig dod oth U Cad ell rie $b use di U Spo GUI 
eV tc Ele de old) ag 5 paral] Sapa g JUL ie dle le ola 
dt 4 atl ric gle ide dod! gl, eo salen ad! 1a, 
te hel EIU yo gdh) Cie Ele he GE ay 5 6b ete ar etal! GIT caret! | 
tld cis bbe le BU a Bolly GUL uae Gh JT VSG yg ede be & asi y val 
aly pdshl yy Al ore IW) di I dla} csdler? Gerd! I) akiy » cial] GN 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 143 


ole mig s ibd! o all boll dle: Gye! wi yield olye!| SG mei I 
Bad) be ed bb bS 58 be yo 2 pe bet Len yet de pe pet) Gy paell 
Lad GE) os dole Gb Goll St ad! so no dl ey Sb 
fool) G rleney HS) ot pS) os Bad gd VG Cie Ele ple oly Cte Id my 
poe! wan, phd | Vie inl gd’, p dscall yy all CN 0 ada Ly dle apes 
Lend ly ys i SU Cte G be gle Jelsl Ga jy hdl cis Gd pled sly sy Sta 
pee a sly s Ul VT Vey Call Cie ble ie Gola bojy JU ee da 
sbde 1d 4 dlat ee wad (Clu! callie bg dole) my, owWlilie g 
ro yect Gill yy all Gad eye l c wl bot ene’ GUI bay ead je lew bbe y 
oa yo hell cdo ble phe GU yd] ay ji gi Loe y Vee dade Gy LN yy ol] ON 
Vdc Me enti did! BA ode d> 9)! wb ye be a Ges 9 Cte cio Je Jus sl 
Dad! BE Ele pe lS cara | Ms) Eye Gad! Cee erst VI yd | dle ii, 
NN 5 HU 6S Lew dad oI STIL BGO, yar all bles Li 
goal GE te GB pratt Boal ok frljpb endl Gb wlo es ble Gots OI 
dls cll LS oye Aly Glare oad b Gt Gu d Ub ood! Cee d pp Al ye 
ee TEN aN She am MeV) oy dl Uy SN dale 5g pel nd ged st ls SoM 
d>Sy dole wi Uy Sal pel piss | Loa on) be dm yx? g ASW ay ye jad 
5 gid! be ph | ic ge spats beilelee gad ole e1gh & ya ght o pall eles 
Sel eben! 5 5 9SbM cyst l gah Lom ty ale iy Kesey oad | Cie ere’ | 
wr lel! § rgd) Grekin , lal oad! ye Gein lon ue oll pd) op 
ee se etd pny ee SN Lae bepc Neyer te eit iS Neat 

Woe dy dale oy AUIS de lt » ve ly ale v3 


49). Previously to giving the translation, I must remind the reader, 
that the Arabs, writing from right to left, call the most right-hand Period 
of the given number—the first, and the most left-hand, or highest in the 
Pulpit Diagram—the last, contrary to the directions of Par. 32). Conse- 
quently, what by the Author of the Ayoun-ul-Hisab is called the last 


o 1 


144 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS 


period, is, in my demonstration, called the first; and what he calls the 
former or preceding period, is, in my demonstration, called the next, or 
following period, and so on. It must also be noticed, that throughout this 
Extract, the word breadth means across the page from right to left, and 


length means down the page from top to bottom. 
50). Translation. 


“Chapter Tenth. From the Book calied the Ayoun-ul-Hisab, or 
Sources of Arithmetic. Of the extraction of the Latus of Powers 


generally. 


Let us draw a Pulpit Diagram of ascending steps, the number of 
which steps is equal to the number of periods of the given Power. Then 
let us divide the breadth of each step tnto places, the number of which are 
according to the number of the Index, except the highest step, and we 
are to divide that according to the number of the places of figures which 
are found in the last of the periods. Then let us draw from the points 
of division longitudinal lines, which, with the lines which form the height 
of the step, are to be drawn to such a distance as the operation may re- 
quire. Then let us produce the breadth of the step to the most left hand 
of the longitudinal lines, and let us divide the most right hand of the 
longitudinal lines into divisions, or ranks, according to the number of the 
Index of the Power, and it is sufficient that the length of the divisions 
be great enough to contain the same number of figures as the height of all 
the steps, and the length of the lowest of them be great enough to contain, 
in length, one period of the given Power. And let the lowest of the divi- 
sions be called the Rank of the Latus, and the division above it the Rank 
of the Square, and the division above it the Rank of the Cube, and so on 
till we reach the Rank of the number; and the figures exterior to the 


Diagram are called the external Row, and then to the division which is 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 145 


below the Rank of the number there is applied the name of second Rank 
of the number, and to that Rank which is below it there is applied the name 
of third Rank of the number, and so on till we reach to the Rank of the 
Latus. Then let us begin from the right hand, and let us write the first 
period of the number in the Squares of the first step, and the second 
period in the Squares of the second step, and so on till we have written 
all the places of figures in the small Squares, each place in a Square. 
Then let us seek the greatest number of the Digits, which being involved 
to the Index of the given number, can be subtracted from, 7. e. is less than 
the last dotted place, and the figures to its left hand. Now, if we were to 
arrange in a Table the Powers of the numbers from 2 to 9 to the Quadratus 
quadrati cubi cubi which is to the Index 10, that would facilitate the find- 
ing of this sought number. And when we have found it, let us place it in 
the external Row, and call that the top number which hence is the first found 
figure of the Root, and let us also put it in the lowest part of the Rank of 
the Latus, opposite to the last dotted place, and call that the bottom num- 
ber, and let us write its Square (and that is the product of the top number 
into the bottom) in the lowest part of the Rank of the Square, and 
let us write the product of the top number into the Square, and that is its 
Cube in the lowest part of the Rank of the Cube, and thus, until we multi- 
ply the top number into that which is in the second Rank of the number. 
Then let us write this product in the Rank of the number below what 
was written there and below that, there is written the products in the 
Ranks, so that their units should all be opposite the single top figure. 
And let us subtract the last product from that which is opposite it in the 
Rank of the number, and let us write the Remainder below the latitudinal 
line drawn above the former period, so that it may be one line with this 
period. Then let us add the top number to that which is in the Rank of 
the Latus, once, for the second Rank of the number, and let us multiply 
it, the top number into the sum, and let us add the product to that which 


is in the Rank of the Square, and let us multiply it into the sum there, 


146 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


and let us add the product to that which is in the Rank of the Cube, and 
thus until we multiply it into the sum in the third Rank of the Number, 


and transfer the sum of this product and the number in the second Rank of 


the number, to the right hand in this Rank one place. Then let us add 


the top number the second time to that which is in the Rank of the Latus 
for the third Rank of the number, and let us multiply it into the sum, and 
let us add the product to that which is in the Rank of the Square, and 
let us multiply it into the sum, and let us add the product to that which 
is in the Rank of the Cube, and so on till we have added its product 
into the sum in the fourth Rank of the Number to that which is in 
the third Rank, and let us transfer the sum to the right hand two 
places, then let us add the top number to that which is in the Rank 
of the Latus a third time, for the fourth Rank of the Number, and 
let us operate with it as I have explained, and so on until we arrive 
at the addition of the top number to that which is in the Rank of 
the Latus for that same Rank, and its transference to the right hand, 
so that its units should be opposite the second place of the preced- 
ing period. And let it be known that we write the products in the Ranks, 
so that their units should be under the single top figure, and we write 
the result of the addition above the items after erasing them by a latitu- 
dinal line, and this will be the Number which is above the lines in all the 
Ranks, except the Rank of the Number, because the progress of the ope- 
ration in all, except that Rank, is upwards. And that the product of the 
multiplication of the top Number into that which is written in each Rank 
is added to that which is in the Rank above it. Then let us seek the 
greatest of the units, which, if we write it in the external Row opposite 
to the first place of the preceding period, and below it in the lowest part 
of the Rank of the Latus to the right of the Number written there and 
multiply it into that which is in the Rank of the Latus, and add the pro- 
duct to that which is in the Rank of the Square, then multiply it into 
that which is in the Rank of the Square, and add the product to that 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 147 


which is in the Rank of the Cube, and so on until it be multiplied into 
the sum in the second Rank of the number, and the product written in 
the Rank of the number this can be substracted from, 7. e. is less than that 
which is opposite to it, and when we have found it, such a number, let us 
operate with it as I have explained, and let us write the remainder below 
the latitudinal line drawn over the former period, so that it may be one 
line with the places of the former period annexed to it. Then let us add 
the new found top number to that which is in the Rank of the Latus one 
time after another, for the Rank one after another, and let us operate 
with it as was done before, and if we cannot find a number with this pro- 
perty, let us put cypher in its place, and transfer that which is in the 
Ranks, which are below the Rank of the number, once again to the right 
hand as was done before, that which is in the second Rank of the num- 
ber one place, and that which is in the third, two places, andsoon. Then 
let us seek the greatest of the units and operate with it as we have detail- 
ed above, and so on until the product of the top number placed opposite 
the units of the original given number into the sum in the second Rank of 
the number be substracted from that which is written in the Rank of the 
number, and if nothing remains, that number is rational, and the number 
written in the external Row, 7. e. above the Pulpit Diagram, are its Latus 
Primum, and if any thing remains then it is Surd, and its Latus Primum, 
technically speaking, by approximation, is that which is in the external 
Row, with a fraction of which the numerator is the remainder, and the 
denominator is that which is between, 2. e¢. as the difference between the 
power of this said written number, and the power of (this number having 
unit added to it). Then let us employ the single figure placed opposite 
the units of the given number as we employed the other numbers, except 
the transference of them, and let that which is in all the Ranks below the 
Rank of the number be added together into one sum, and let us add to 
that unit, and that is the said denominator, and the power produced 
Pau 


148 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


from the Latus thus taken, is always less than the given number. And 
this difference is considerable in every power except the Square. And for 
finding the denominator of the fraction in the operation on the Cube, we 
may multiply the figures of the external Row into itself, increased by unit, 


and the product into three, and add to that unit.” 


After the prolix detail in the former part of this paper, it would be 
very useless to make many comments on the above extract, and I have 


only therefore to add a few cursory observations. 


51). The directions given for erazing the added items, and merely 
writing their sum in the same place, will account for the Ranks being in 
the extract directed to be so much shorter than they appear in the full 
Diagram given by me. 


52). The Rationale of the directions given for the treatment of 
cypher, when it occurs as one of the found figures of the Root, is so easily 
understood, that it would be needless to elucidate them by any expla- 


nation. 


53). The last sentence respecting the denominator of the fraction 
in the Cube is also easily comprehended. The figures of the external 
Row are those of the approximate integral Root written above the Pul- 


pit Diagram, and are consequently = m of Par. 28). Then the Rule of 


the Text evidently is | | m x le + 1| | Xx 3|$1=38m4+3m+1= 


(m + 1)*’—m’. 


54). What I have here said of the increase of the error of deficiency 


corresponding to the increase of the index of the power, would, if true, be 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 149 


very tedious to demonstrate, and excessively laborious to exemplify. I 
shall not therefore, by entering upon this task, render this very long paper 
yet unnecessarily longer, but asa proof of this assertion I refer to the great 
deficiency in the 2d and 3d example of Par. 44). This imperfection, the 
Arabians seem to have been fully sensible of, and anxious to remedy ; and 
I shall conclude with an account of their attempts for this purpose in the 
extraction of the Square Root. Of these I have not been able to obtain 


the Arabic original, but their detail is as follows. 


55). Let on the principles of Par. 28). <A, be a surd to the 2d 
Power, of which a, is the approximate integral Square Root, so that a Z 
A and (a+ 1)*or@ +2a4+1is >A. ThenletA—@’=randa +r 
= A. Then evidently r 2 2 a+ 1 and the Root, to be assumed is 


r r 
=a+ 
(a 4+ 1)’—a? 2a+l. 
r 2 ar 7 
tion is evidently A —|a + = (a +r) — (« ~— — ate 

2a+1 2a+1 (2a +4 1)% 
(2a + 1) r—?? 

= . Now sincer 22a+1so0r°orrrZ (2a + 1)r, and 
(2a + 1)* 

hence this can never be a negative expression, but must be always posi- 


Then the deficiency arising from this assump- 


tive and real. 


56). Then the Arabian Arithmeticians observe that the deficiency 
incurred by employing this assumed Root as the true Root, must always 
be less than i. To prove this, if to a be assigned any constant value, 
then r may be considered as a variable. For the only known properties 
of r are that it should be real, and 2 2a-+ 1. Hence ifabe put = 1, 
then 2 a + 1 = 3, and r is expoundable by 1 and 2. If a be put 
— 2, then 7 is expoundable by 1, 2, 3, 4. If a be put = 3, thenr 


is expoundable by 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, andsoon. The shortest and most 


150 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


direct way therefore of proceeding will be to enquire upon these condi- 
(2a+1)r—r 


(Qa 41) 
for this purpose let it be put into Fluxions, and it will become 2 ar 47 


tions what is the maximum value of this expression 


Then 


Qrr = 0, and hence 2a +1—=2randr=a+4. Hence it appears that 
the greatest deficiency is whenr = a + 3. Substitute this value of r and 
(2a 4 l)r—9r (a + 3) (a + 3) 

(24 + 1) app 4(a+ 3) 
ais an integer, so a + 4 is evidently a fraction. But ris also an integer, 
and hence can never be equalto a + 4. Thatis the value of 7» can never 
be such as to render the deficiency a maximum. In other words, the defi- 


ciency must always be Z 4. 


the expression = +. Nowsince 


57.) As an illustration of this, let us take the following three sets 
of examples. 


Let A = 2=1°+ 1. Thena = landr = 1 and2a+41= 2, and 
assumed Root = 11. 


Then 13)? = 1 +2 ++4 = 14, and the deficiency = 2. 


Let A =3=1°+2. Thena=1,r= 2, and assumed Root = 1%. 


Then 12 


*=-14+4+44= 2", and deficiency = 3. 


ESSER elec LU ema eaT np TO enn) (5 RN 


LetA=5=2+41. Thena=2,r = 1 and2a +41 = 5 and 
assumed Root = 21. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 


Then 23)? = 44444 = 4 21, and deficiency = ;“. 


25 


Let A = 6=2?42. Thena =2,r= 2, and assumed Root — 22. 


Then 22|*= 4+ 24 4 = 512, and deficiency = 5%. 


0 


Let A= 7 = 2? 4 3. Thena = 2r =3, and assumed Root = 2:3. 


93)? = 44 12 4 2 '— 612, and deficiency — -. 


25 


Let A = 8= 2’ 4 4. Then a = 2, r = 4, and assumed Root = 24. 


Then 24|?= 44 46 + 16 — 721, and deficiency = .4.. 


25 


WetAt—) 10° 3) -F1.Then a, = 3\r — land 2.4/1 — 7) and 


assumed Root = 31. 


Then 34\?7=9 +44 3 = 945, and deficiency = =. 


Let A = 11 = 3° + 2. Then a = 3, r = 2, and assumed Root = 32. 


Then 32\?= 9 + 12 4+ 4 = 1022, and deficiency = 13. 


Let A = 12= 3° + 3. Thena = 3,r = 3, and assumed Root = 3:. 


Then 33 |? = 924eR?) -Fep Son 


9 


, and deficiency = 1%. 


Let A= 13 = 3? 4+ 4. Thena = 37r = 4, and assumed Root = 34. 


Then 3#|? =9 + 24 +19 = 1284, and deficiency = 43: 


Qi 


152 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 
Let A = 14 = 3°+ 5. Thena= 3r = 5, and assumed Root = 34. 


Then 321? = 9 + 89 + 25 — 1338, and deficiency = +12. 


LettA = 15= 3°+6. Thena= 3r= 6, andassumed Root = 35. 


e 


7 = 9+ 16 + 36 = 1443, and deficiency = -%. 


From these examples we may observe— 


58). That the deficiencies are in every case 2.4 according to Par. 57). 


Fr 


59). That when the remainder is very great or very small, the defi- 
ciency is small, but when the remainder is a medium, that is, as it ap- 
proaches to be equal to a + 3, the deficiency becomes great, and is great- 
est when the deficiency is = a,and =a+ 1. That is, it is greatest in 
the 3d set of cases wheny = 3and = 4. Im the 2d set of cases when 
r= 2and= 3. And in the Ist set of cases, of course when r = 1 and = 2. 
This observation is confirmed by the examples of Par. 44). For in the 
Ist and 4th examples where r = 1 and = 728 that is very small and very 
great, the deficiency is small, and in the 2d and 3d examples whenr = 


332 and = 333, that is, a medium, the deficiency is great. 


60). And that when A is equally distant from a* below, and (a + 1)* 
above the deficiency is equal. That is the deficiency is equal when A is 
equal to a + 1 and (a + 1)*—1, and the deficiency is equal when A is 
equal to a? + 2 and (a + 1)*— 2, and the deficiency is equal when A is 


equal to a? + 3 and (a + 1)* — 3, and so on. Thus— 


— ee 


In the Ist set of Cases. 


When A = 2 = 1° + 1, and when A = 3 = 2°—1, the deficiency is 


the same, viz. 2. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 153 


————__ ——___-—__——_——. In the 2d set of Cases. —————---____-__--____- 


When A = 5 = 2? + 1, and when A = 8 = 3*—1, the deficiency is 


the same, viz. 


4 
ay? 


oO 


When A = 6 = 2’ + 2, and when A = 7 3°—2, the deficiency is the 


same, VIZ: =5. 


Imuthe*Sdiset Of Wasesi: (a ha ae ae See 


eee 


When A = 10 = 3° + 1, and when A = 15 = 4’—1, the deficiency 


is the same, viz. —®. 


c=) 


When A = 11 = 3? + 2, and when A = 14 


I] 


4°—2, the deficiency 
is the same, viz. 1°. 


When A = 12 = 3° + 3, and when A = 13 = 4°—3, the deficiency 


is the same, viz. +2. 


This is easily proved generally, for since by Par. 57) the excess of 
(2a 4+ 1)r 


(2.@ + 1) 
power whose Root is required be (a + 1)*—r. This is = a* + 2a+4 1—, 


a 


let the surd 


a* + 7 over the Square of its assumed Root, is 


and hence the remainder is in this case 2 a + 1—r. This being the 


numerator, and 2a + 1 still being the denominator, the assumed Root 


2a+ l—r r 
is in this case a + —= a + I— and hence the deficien- 
-2atl 2a+1 
7 2 (2a + 1)7r—7"* 
ey is (a + 1)? —(a 4+ 1— ) = —— —— the same expres- 
2a +1 (2a 4 1) 


sion as before. 


154 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


61. But this observation will by nomeans apply to powers higher 


than the Square, as will appear from the following examples in Cubes. 


Let A be a surd Cube, of which a is the approximate Root, and r the 


remainder as before. Then on the principles of Par. 28), the assumed 
Ue r 


Root of Aisa + =‘a.+ 
(a + 1)°—a?* 3a’ 4+3a+tL1 


Then 


Let. A = 2 = 1) -b.). ps Thenye =, bers Jy and.3.02.- 3.4 alg 


and assumed Root = 1+. 


Then 14 |*>1+2444+54 = 14%, and deficiency = 414. 


LetA =3= 2 +2. Thena = 1,7= 2, and assumed Root = 12. 


=1+4412 + 3. = 2438,, and deficiency = 2°. 


343? 


Then 22 |° 


Let A = 4=1+3. Thena = 1,r = 3, and assumed Root = 12: 


Then 12 |? = 1 2 4 21 4 21 = 930 and deficiency ==)1-22. 


LetA=5= 1234 4. Thena = 1,r = 4, and assumed Root = 14. 


Then 14% = 1+ 3 + 4° bs = 3502 and Se Sa eee 


49 343 


LetA=6=10+45. Thena=I,r = 5, and assumed Root = 14. 


ie oe a ee i26) = 5 ts and, deficiency: =e, 


Let A= 7 = 1 +6.” Then a = 1, 7 = 6, and assumed Root = 1. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 155 


Then 12)? = 1 + 18 + 198 4 216 — 6129, and deficiency = 224. 


62). It also appears from hence that the deficiency in the form 


a* +7, is always less than in the form (a + 1)*—r. For— 


When A = 2 = 1° + 1, deficiency = 17‘, and whenA = 7 = 2°—1, 


there is a greater deficiency 2°+. 


When A = 3= 1° 4 2, deficiency = 2°°, and whenA=6 = 2° — 2, 


owe 343 


3.0. 
3 Shr 


there is a greater deficiency 23 


WhenA=4=1 +3, Paar = 1 3,, andwhen A = 5 = 2'— 3, 


there is a greater deficiency 1,1; 


This is also confirmed by the examples of Par. 44), for there the 
deficiency in the first example, or 2° + 1, is less than that in the fourth 
example, or 3° — 1. And the deficiency in the second example, or 2° + 332, 


is less than that in the third example, or 3° — 332. 


63). And we may also observe that the deficiencies produced by 
assuming the Cube Root are greater than by assuming the Square Roots 


of the same number. Thus— 


R) 

By the assumed Yo 2 deficiency is %. By the assumed 3/9 there is greater deficiency 474. 
al; 

By the assumed 2/5 3 deficiency is 2. By the assumed 3/3, there is greater deficiency $99. 


i 
2 


Z 

By the assumed A/ 5 deficiency is ;. By the assumed o/s there is greater deficiency 14,',. 
al af 

By the assumed 2/6 deficiency is >. By the assumed 2/6 there is greater deficiency 332. 
1 


L 2 
By the assumed fy 7 deficiency is ;°;. By the assumed A there is greater deficiency 294, 


Agreeable to what was conjectured in the latter part of Par. 54,) 
and which was confirmed by the very great deficiencies in example 2d 
and 3d of Par. 44.) 


156 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


64). It may be presumed the Arabians would be anxious to correct 
or diminish such important deficiencies as these. The method they have 


employed for this purpose in the Square is as follows: 


Tr 


The assumed Root of a? +rby Par. 55), is a@ + that is, 
2a+tl 
ri 
a + —————. Instead of 1 here employed as the multiplier of r, and 2a, 
2a x14 


let there be substituted the general real integer z, and this expression will 
TZ 
become a + ————— in which z may be taken any integer at pleasure. 
2az+1 


TZ 
Then if this expression a + 


be assumed the approximate Square 
2az+1 


Root of a’? + r, the deficiency in this case will evidently be a? + r — 


rz é (2az+1l)r—r2 
( + raed = ———___—————.. Let. any constant value be given 
2az+1 (2az + 1)? 


to z and put this expression into Fluxions as in Par. 56), and then 
2az+1 


Qazr+r—22*rr = oandr = ————\. Substitute this value of r 
ae 


(2az + 1) r—r? 2 
—_— becomes 


and the expression 
(2az +4 I)? 


(2az+1 (2az +4 1)? 
(2a 2-4 1) = 
2 


i ee 


Qaz 4,1)? Ax? 
1 
65). Now as 


evidently becomes less, as z becomes greater, so 
4 2? 


it might at first be supposed that if z were taken very large, the error 
would be very inconsiderable. But then it must be observed that since 2° 
increases faster than z, so if z be taken. very great, the numerator 


2az+1)r —r* 2z* becomes negative, and since the denominator 
8 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 157 


(2az + 1) r—yr* 2 


(2az+ 1)’ is positive so the fraction which expresses the 


(2az +1)? 
deficiency will also be negative. Now a negative deficiency is an excess. 
That is by taking z too large, the assumed Root will be greater than the 
1 


truth instead of less. In this case the positive fraction is greater 


42? 


than 0, and all the negative values of , though they may be 


(2az + 1)? 
numbers of a greater denomination, yet as they are all less than 0, so they 
1 


are also all less than positive , which hence is still truly a maximum. 


4 2? 


(2az +4 1)r—r’ 2 
66). Now since this expression —-————----— when negative is the 
(2az +4 i)? 
rz 
amount of the negative deficiency produced by assuming a + —————as 
2az+1 
the true Square Root of a* + r, so if this expression have its signs chang- 


r222(Qaz+4 1)r 
ed it will become -—— and will be the positive excess pro- 
(2az +4 1)? 


duced by the same assumption. 


TZ Ayu 
For in this case since by supposition a + ————-| >a’ +7,s0 
2a2z2+]1 
ea 


ys in Par. 64) fora deficiency we 


instead of (a + r)— ( + 
2ae¢+ 1 
| —(@+r)= 


2az +1 


TZ 


y2 22 — (2az + 1)r 


have for an excess. ( + 
(2az-+ 1)? 
as above. 


67.) Now this expression increases in value both by the increase of 
r and of z. 


158 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


r2 22 (2az+4 l)r pe gf ip 
—- Then— 
(2az +4 1)? (2az + 1)? 2az+1. 


For 


— 


First. Since 7’ increases faster than r, so by increasing r the ex- 
Pig r 
pression ————— will increase faster than 
(2az 4+ 1)? 2az+1 
o2 22 i 
ence ————— — 
(2az-4 1)? 2az+1 


and hence their differ- 


will increase also. 


Second. Let @be another value of z greater than the present, and 


7 2 7? e 

let ——_ = wand = Then— 
(2az + 1)’ (242+ 1/ 

u(2az -+ 1)? E(2a-C + 1) 276 (2'a CMP)? 
——“—ara and hence « = —— —— 

2 CG  2az +. 1% 

Aa x 4 4aC27 4 3% 

soe x of piece 


Aa C2 4 honed C 


Then 40° @ 274 4a02 4+ 2 24¢C2+4AaCz + C. For 
*@ 2? = 4 a’ @ 2’, and since by supposition z Z Z, so 4 a Z 2°, or 
Cze-xzL44alCzxZ or4a@z, and for the same reason 2* Z @. 


AVWC2 +4aZlz* + 2° 
x —— or £ multiplied by a proper 


AVC#+4aC 842 


SNe 


Hence x = 


id s 


— 


(2az+ 1) 


fraction. That is z Z § and consequently the expression 


Lr 
which is 


increases by the increase of z. And again evidently 
2azs+1 


the subtracted part of the expression, is diminished by the increase of z, 


that is, as r is divided by a greater number. Then since the increase of z 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 159 


7? ed r 
——— to increase, and 
(2az + 1) DANONE oe ral | 


causes 


to diminish, soit must evi- 


dently cause their difference —_ —- ———__——_. {0 increase also. 


(Zaz + 1) 2azs+1 


Now r by Par. 55) is 2 2a + 1, that is, 7 is not greater than 2 a. 


hd ed r 
Substitute this value of r and the expression -————— — — 


(2Zaz4+1)? 2Qaz+1 


becomes 


Aa’? 2° 2a 


Ads’ 4+4az+1 2az+1 


4a’ 2 4a’ 2 

= Lik 
4e02+4az+1 4A a? 2? 
4a’ 3? 2a 4a’? 
i 
Aws4+4azs+1 2az+1 4@244a2+1, 

and consequently is, a fortiori, also Z 1; and since it is also by supposi- 


tion, positive and real, it must be a proper fraction. That is, though the 


Now since 4a@°2°+4az+1>4a’2’°so 


pa 


or 1. And evidently 


T & 
—-as the true Root of 
2az+1 


a’ + r continually increases both as x and » are taken greater and greater, 
yet, although 7 be taken as great as possible, and though z be taken as 


great as we please, yet this error must always be less than unit, which is 


error of excess committed by assuming a + 


the limit to which it continually tends, but cannot pass. 


68). This may be more directly, I will not say more satisfactorily, 
proved, in the method of modern Geometers, by considering Infinity as 


a2 gy 
T & Y i 


a positive Idea. In this case, since the expression ———_ — 


(Was ae ) Qiatpctt 


s 1 


160 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


is increased both by the increase of r and z, so evidently its maximum is 
produced when r and z are both maxima. Now by last paragraph, since 
y is not greater than 2a, so 2a is maximum ofr. And since g is any 
integer at pleasure, so Infinity is the maximum of zs. Substitute these 


4a® o? 


values of r and z, and this expression becomes 


4a o0°+tdaco +1 
2a 2a 
Now since 2a 0 + 1 is infinitely great, so 
2Zao+] 2a0 +1 
ais finite, becomes infinitely small, and vanishes. And the quantity 
4ac + 1 being an infinite of the first order, vanishes before 4 a ©* an 
4a’ 0’ 


infinite of the second order, and the expression is reduced to —>— = 1 
4a’ o* 


when 


as before. But it is to be considered whether it be correct Logic to 


ascribe positive properties to the negative idea Infinity. 


69). By this it is evident not much advantage is gained, for by 
Par. 56) the error on one side may be +, and here it may be 1 on the other. 
To correct this, and to render the error of excess as small as possible, the 


Arabian Arithmeticians direct that s should not be taken greater than 2, 


2r 
and hence the assumed Root of @ + risa + and the error ex- 
4a+1 
(2az+1)r—r (4a+1)r—4r 
pressed by —— — becomes -—_-—-—————.__ If in tthis 
(2az+1) (A.a,+ 1); 
case, the deficiency is positive, then by Par. 64), it cannot be greater 
1 1 1 
than or or —-. But if this expression is negative, it is evident 


43? 4:2? 16. 
that it can only become negative by the increase of r. Now as before 


maximum of ris 2a. Substitute this value of 7, and the expression 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. - 161 


(4at1)r—47r° 2a—8a 
eM A ae gimegyiae st and is the greatest denomina- 
(4a + 1,’ 16¢7e?+8a+1 


tion of the negative deficiency, and consequently as in Par. 66,) this expres- 


&a —2a 8a 2a 


l6a+8a41 (4a41% (4041) 


is the maximum of the positive error of excess. 


sion with its signs changed, thatis 


70). Now this expression increases by the increase of a. For let 
8a’ 


(4a 41) 


« be any other value greater than the present, and let = p, and 
8 ow? 

=. And then by the very same reasoning that was employed 
(4a +41) 16e°a@?48ad0 +a 
in Par. 67) with z, Z, a and, it willbe found that p = 7 x 


16e° a +8e'a+ a? 
and that 167 a? 4+ 8a@+aZ 1600 4+ 8a’ a 4+ a’, and consequently 
that p = x multiplied by a proper fraction, that is, p Zz. And hence 


8a’ 2a 2a 
increases by the increase of a. Again = 
4a+1) (4a+1) 16a°+8a-+1, 


and since a? increases faster thana, so 16 a* + 8a-+ 1 increases faster 


than 2a. That is, 2a 
——-— diminishes by the increase of a. And 


16a + 8a+1 
consequently by the same reasoning as in Par. 67,) the whole expression 
8a 2a 


—_— 


— ————— increases by the increase of a, and is by supposi- 

(4a+1) (4441) 

tion positive and real. And by a continuation of the reasoning of the 
8a 2a 8a 


a Ok 


aS 
(4a4+1)*> (4a@+1) (4a+1) 


same paragraph, it will be seen that 


162 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


8a 8a 

~— and consequently also Z or 4. That-is to say, the 
16a°+ 8a+1 16a@ 
2r 


error of excess committed by assuming as the Square Root of 


4a+l 
a? +rcontinually increases as ais greater and greater, but can never 
exceed the limit 4. This is also proved by the same consideration of 
Infinity, as in Par. 68. For if a be infinitely great, then, in the expression 


8 a’ —2a 


, 2a vanishes before 8a’, and 8 a + 1 vanishes before 16 a’, 
16¢7°+8a+4+1 


8 a’ 
and hence it will be reduced to = das before. 
16@ 


71). As an illustration of all this, let us resume the former 3 sets of 
examples of Par. 57,) and suppose z = 2, so that the assumed Root will 


IFT 
— and then— 
4a+l 


bea + 


deus 


Let A = 2 and assumed Root = 12. 


Then 12)? =14+4+4+ 4 = 124 and deficiency = =. 


Let A = 3andassumed Root = 1+, and in this case r = 2 a, and is 
a maximum. 


Then 14 |? = 1 +2 +4 14% = 36, and the excess is 56. 


Bee re ean eee Mee SEO EES I ad 9s eee 


Let A = 5 and assumed Root = 22. 


Then 22 | 


7 eet Ar 8) 4) = Ate and deficiency = ~.. 


Let A = 6 and assumed Root = 2+. 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 


Then 2+ 


*= 4+ 19 4 16 — 51° and deficiency = ;2- 


Let A = 7 and assumed Root = 25. 


Then 25|/? = 4 + 3 + 2° = 7, and deficiency = +. 


Let A = 8 and assumed Root = 24, and in this case r 


— 
— 


is a Maximum. 


a 


Then 323,|? = 9 + 42 + +4 = 9142 and deficiency = +25. 


Let A — 


Then 3,4,|7 = 9 + 24 + 34%, = 10152 and deficiency — 


Let A = 12 and assumed Root = 3-,4,. 


Let A = 13 and assumed Root = 3-2,. 


Then 3,8, 


°= 9 + 48 + 84 = 13% and excess = 34%. 


169 


yt | 


Teo 


7= 9+ 26 1 36 = 11166 and deficiency = —=3,. 


165 


2 a, and 


ns res 


164 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Let A — 14 and assumed Root = 31°. 


13 


Then 312)* = 9 + $2 +4 1338 = 1435, and excess = 35 


Let A = 15 and assumed Root = 312, and in this case 7 = 2aand 


is a Maximum. 


Then 312|7= 9 + 72 + 144 = 15,5, and excess = -85.. 


169 
And from these examples we may observe— 
72). That each deficiency Z ~; according to Par. 69.) 
73). That each excess Z + according to Par. 70, for even in the three 
cases where r is a Maximum, and consequently the excess should, by 
Par. 68 and 71), be greatest, the excess is 


When a = 1, only -%. 


When a = 2, it is greater, and becomes 23. 


When a = 3, it is still greater, and becomes 5. 
And we may hence also observe, that the excess increases with the 
increase of a, as by Par. 70). 


74). For more illustration, let z be taken = 3, and let other things ~ 


3 4r 
remain the same, and then the assumed Root will be a + —— and 
1 Ga+l 
or ;,as by Par. 64.) Then the same 


the deficiency must be Z 


43? 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 


three sets of examples will become as follow : 


Let A = 2 and assumed Root = 1. 


Then 12 


2 1 se 22 and €xcess — -2;- 


| Let A = 3 and assumed Root = 14 and vr, a Maximum. 


Then 12|/7=1+4 142435 =3 


| 


2 and excess = 22. 


g 
49 


| 


$$ a rrr 


Let A = 5 and assumed Root = 2-3 


DES, 


When 255)? => 44 12.4 9, = 4163 and deficiency = +45. 


Let A = 6 and assumed Root = 2-¢ 


13° 


| Then -229)| 4124 486 G10" and excess =" 12.) 


169 


Let A = 7 and assumed Root = 2-2.. 


ey 9 2 me 3.6 8.1 — 42 r ~ 42 
Then 22,|° = 4 4+ 2% + 83, = 743, and excess — 


212 — 44 48 and 144 — 692. and excess =22,. 


| Let A = 10 and assumed Root = 3,3. 


166 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, 


Then 33, |7 = 9 + 48 + 32; = 9344 and deficiency — 


10 . 
361 
Let A = 11 and assumed Root = 3,°,. 


Then 32, |* = 9 + 24.4 36 = 10352 and deficiency ;2,. 


Let A = 12 and assumed Root = 3,2,. 


2— 94 54 si = 122* and excess — 24 


Let A = 13 and assumed Root = 342. 


©: 
ma 


361 


°= 94+ + H+ = 13% and excess = 7h. 


Let A = 14 and assumed Root = 315. 


14139 and excess = 134, 


36 


R|> 


Ss 
—_— 
>) 
=) 
Nee 
as 

rw» 
II 
© 
+ 
ule 
+ 
eho 
ef 
lI 


Let A = 15 and assumed Root = 318 and 7, a Maximum. 


= 15242 and excess = 242. 


|| 
Cay 
+ 
aC 
[os] 
- 
e:|eo 
al 


And from these examples we may observe— 


75). That each deficiency 2 .',, as by Par. 75,) and each excess 
Z. 1, as by Par. 68,) and also that the deficiencies, though less in value, are 
yet fewer in number, and the excesses are both greater in number and 


value than in the examples of Par. 71.) 


76). For still farther illustration, let us take z = a great number 


= 100, and let us take the three examples in these sets wherein r is a 


AS PRACTISED BY THE ARABS. 167 


Maximum, and wherein consequently by Paras. 67 and 68,) the excess should 


100 r 
be as great as possible. Then the assumed Root will be a + 
200 a + 1 
100 Xx 2a 200 a 
mast : ay ot —— and then 
2000 a + 1 200 a + 1, 


Let A = 3 and assumed Root = 12°°. 


Let A — 8 and assumed Root — 2 400 


401° 


Then 24° 


OL 


BB a 1600 160000 — 158396 
— 4 aie SOL + 160801 = 8 ToeO801 


Let A = 15 and assumed Root = 360°. 


‘Then 3323/7 = 9 + t809 4 seocge = 15ggsge4, 


ool 


In which it will easily be observed, that the excesses, though large, 


are yet still Z 1, and that they increase with the increase of a. 


77). These speculations might easily be continued and diversified, 
and pursued into higher powers; but this, like all other Mathematical 
subjects, leads to interminable results, and as an abrupt conclusion must 
be made somewhere, so it is high time, considering the length of this 
Paper, that it should be made here. Some apology is, perhaps, necessary 
for the great length to which the Essay has already extended, and which 
is, indeed, much greater than I had supposed would have been necessary ; 


but it is not very easy to abridge such a detail without rendering it 


u 1 


168 AN ESSAY ON THE ROOTS OF INTEGERS, &c. 


obscure ; and I therefore hope the nature of the subject, which is both curi- 
ous in itself, and affords a complete estimate of the state of Arithmetic 


among the Arabians, will be a sufficient justification of my prolixity. 


78). I must conclude this Essay as my former, with an acknow- 
ledgement of my obligations to my very intelligent friend Dewan Kanh 
Jee, of Patna; by him I was furnished with the extract of the Ayoun-ul- 
Hisab. His Treatise of Arithmetic formerly mentioned, * and his oral 
explanation, enabled me to comprehend the obscure and studied brevity of 
the Arabian Author; and from the same sources I derived those observa- 
tions on the fractional part of the Root which form the basis of the con- 


cluding paragraphs of the present Essay. 


* See Essay on the Binomial Theorem, Vol. XIII. of the Researches, p. 466. 


IIl. 


SKETCH 


OF THE 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS, 


By HORACE HAYMAN WILSON, Ese. 


Secretary Asiatic Society. 


SAIVAS. 


Iw the former communication on this subject, which I had the honour to 
lay before the Society, I attempted to convey. a notion of the different 
classes amongst which the numerous worshippers of VisHNUv are distri- 
buted. In my present, I propose to compleat my task, and commencing 
with the followers of Siva and of Saxtt, conclude with those sects which 


are of a miscellaneous and less orthodox description. 


The worship of Siva in the districts along the Ganges, presents 
itself under a very different aspect from that of VisHnu, and with some 
singular anomalies. It appears to be the most prevalent and popular of 
all the modes of adoration, to judge by the number of shrines dedicated 


to the only form under which Srva is reverenced, that of the Linga; yet 


wil 


fi 


170 -} SKETCH OF THE 


it will be generally observed, that these temples are scarcely ever the 
yresort of numerous votaries, and that they are regarded with compara- 
tively little veneration by the Hindus. Benares, indeed, furnishes excep- 
tions, and the temple of Visweswara* is thronged with a never-ceasing 
crowd of adorers. There is, however, little solemnity or veneration in the 
hurried manner in which they throw their flowers or fruits before the 
image;} and there are other temples, the dwellings of other divinities, 


that rival the abode of Vesweswara in popular attraction. 


The adoration of Siva, indeed, has never assumed, in Upper India, a 
popular form. He appears in his shrines only. in an unattractive and 
rude emblem, the mystic purpose of which is little understood, or regard- 
ed by the uninitiated and vulgar, and which offers nothing to interest the 
feelings or excite the imagination. | No legends are recorded of this deity 
of a poetic and pleasing character; and above all, such legends as are 


narrated in the Puranas and Tantras, have not been presented to the 


* ¢ The Lord ofall,” an epithet of Srva, represented as usual by a Linga. It is one of the 
twelve principal emblems of this description, and has been, for many centuries, the chief object of 
veneration at Kasi or Benares. The old temple was partially destroyed by the Mohammedans 
in the reign of AURENGZEB: the present was built by AuALyaA Bar, the Mahratta Princess, and 
although small and without pretension to magnificence, is remarkable for the minute beauty of its 
architectural embellishments. 


+. A Hindu temple comprises an outer court, usually a quadrangle, sometimes surrounded by 
a piazza ; and a central edifice constituting the shrine. This, which in Upper India is generally 
of small dimensions, is divided into two parts, the Sabhd, or vestibule ; and the Garbhagriha, or 
adytum, in which the Image is placed. ‘The course of worship is the circumambulating of the tem- 
ple, keeping the right hand to it, as often as the devotee pleases: the worshipper then enters the 
vestibule, and if a bell is suspended there, as is commonly the case, strikes two or three times upon 
it. Hethen advances to the threshhold of the shrine, presents his offering, which the officiating 
Brahman receives, mutters inaudibly a short prayer, accompanied with prostration, or simply with 
the act of lifting the hands to the forehead, and departs. There is nothing like a religious service, 
and the rapid manner in which the whole is performed, the quick succession of worshippers, the 
gloomy aspect of the shrine, and the scattering about of water, oil, and faded flowers, inspire any 
thing but feelings of reverence or devotion. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 171 


Hindus in any accessible shape. The Sazvas have no works in any of the 
common dialects, like the Ramayana, the Bartta, or the Bhaktamala. 
Indeed, as far as any enquiry has yet been instituted, no work whatever 
exists, in any vernacular dialect, in which the actions of Siva, in any of his 
forms, are celebrated. It must be kept in mind, however, that these 
observations are intended to apply only to Gangetic Hindustan, for in 
the South of India, as we shall hereafter see, popular legends relating to 


local manifestations of Stva, are not uncommon. 


Corresponding to the absence of multiplied forms of this divinity, as 
objects of worship, and to the want of those works which attach impor- 
tance to particular manifestations of the favourite god, the people can 
scarcely be said to be divided into different sects, any farther than as 
they may have certain religious mendicants for their spiritual guides. 
Actual divisions of the worshippers of Siva are almost restricted to 
these religious personages, collected sometimes, in opulent and nu- 
merous associations; but for the greater part detached, few, and in- 
digent. There are no establishments amongst the Saivas of Hin- 
dustan, like those of Srinith or Puri; no individuals as wealthy as 
the Gokulastha Gosains, nor even as influential as the descendants of 
Apwaita and Niry4nanp. There are no teachers of ancient repute except 
Sanxara Acufrya, and his doctrines are too philosophical and specu- 


lative to have made him popular. 


The worship of Sty continues, in fact, to be what it appears to have 
been from a remote period, the religion of the Brahmanas.* SampBuu 
is declared, by MeNv, to be the presiding deity of the Brahmanical order, 
and the greater number of them, particularly those who practice the rites 


of the Vedas, or who profess the study of the Sdstras, receive Siva as 


* See a preceding Note—A. R. vol. XVI page 2. 


172 SKETCH OF THE 


their tutelary deity, wearhis insignia, and worship the Linga, either in 
temples, in their houses, or on the side of a sacred stream, providing, in 
the latter case, extempore emblems kneaded out of the mud or clay of the 
river's bed. The example of the Brahmans, and the practice of ages, 
maintain the veneration universally offered to the type of Siva; but it is 
not the prevailing, nor the popular condition of the Hindu faith, along 
the banks of the Ganges. We shall now proceed to specify the different 
classes into which the worshippers of Siva, as distinct from the mass of 


Brahmans, may be distinguished. 


DANDIS AND DASNAMIS. 


It is customary to consider these two orders as forming but one divi-| 
sion. The classification is not, in every instance, correct, but the practices 
of the two are, in many instances, blended, and both denominations are 
accurately applicable to the same individual. It will not be necessary, 


therefore, to deviate from the ordinary enumeration. 


- The Davis, properly so called, and the Tridafdis of the Vaishnavas, 
are the only legitimate representatives of the fourth Asrama, or mendicant 


life, into which the Hindu, according to the instructions of his inspired 


legislators, is to enter, after passing through the previous stages of student, __ 


householder and hermit.* It is not necessary, however, to have gone 


through the whole of the previous career, as the Brahman may pass from 


* Thus Menu, 6, 33. 


qay ad fewaaataqanaagT: | 
VAUATGA ATA AHA ACTA AA I 


« Having thus performed religious acts in a forest during the third portion of his life, let him 
become a Sanydsi, for the fourth portion of it, abandoning all sensual affection. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 173 


i) 


any one of the first orders to the last at once;* he is then to take up his 
staff and water pot, to derive from begging such a portion of food as is 
sufficient for his mere sustenance, and to devote the remainder of his day 


to holy study and pious meditation.t+ 


Adopting, as a general guide, the rules of original works, the David is 
distinguished by carrying a small Dafd, or wand, with several processes 
or projections from it, andl a piece of cloth dyed with red ochre, in which 
the Brahmanical cord is supposed to be enshrined, attached to it: he 
shaves his hair and beard, wears only a cloth round his loins, and subsists 


upon food obtained ready-dressed from the houses of the Brahmanas 


* So Menu, as expounded by Kuttuxa Buarra, 6, 38. 


Tatqet fens qatcacfaara 
GAGA TALIY WAU? TAF BTA Mt 
FAAMST TAMA WETAT Fatal Zia Stat | 
“ Having performed the sacrifice of Prajapati, &c. a Brahman may proceed from his house, 


that is, from the second order, or he may proceed even from the first to the condition of a Sanydst.” 
Indeed the intermediate stage of the Vanaprastha is amongst the prohibited acts in the al age. 


+ Agreeably to the high authority already quoted, 6, 41, &c. 


sunciafatamrn: ues srataara i 

aqney way fara: afeaFa 
Sactaad: gama aq aaa 

SaMAUNATAT Hiiaaathea 


“ Departing from his house, taking with him pure implements, his water-pot, and staff, keeping 
silence, unallured by desire of objects near him, Jet him enter into the fourth order.” 


“ Let him have no culinary fire, no domicile, let him when very hungry, go to the town for 
food, let him patiently bear disease, let him study to know God, and fix his attention on God alone. 


x 1 


174 SKETCH OF THE 


once a day only, which he deposits in the small clay pot that he carries 
always with him: he should live alone, and near to, but not within a city ; 
but this rule is rarely observed, and in general the Da#dis are found in 
cities collected like other mendicants in Maths.* The Dafdi has no par- 
ticular time or mode of worship, but spends his time in meditation, or in 
practices corresponding with those of the Yoga, and in the study of the 
Vedéuta works, especially according to the comments of SANKARACHARYA. 


As that teacher was an incarnation of Srva,} the Davdis reverence that 


* These are all founded on the following texts of Menu. 


FAAUTABUNT: Usalewt TAaaTy, 
faqetaaaiad cease 
LARAIL Sa a Vasa AS! 

Va vaat fe atatiaiaty qaanta 
Taya VAASS THIS Yaa 

ae utaHane families afareal 
Bas 4 faaret mans Fa a waa 
WUGAAATe Giaraaatfataang 


“ His hair, nails and beard being clipped, bearing with him a dish, a staff, and a water-pot, let 
him wander about continually without giving pain to any being.” 52. 


“ Only once a day let him demand food, let him not habituate himself to eat much at a time, 
for an anchorite habituated to eat much, becomes inclined to sensual gratification. 55. 


“ At the time when the smoke of kitchen fires has ceased, when the pestle lies motionless, 
when the burning charcoal is extinguished, when people have eaten and when dishes are removed, 
that is, late in the day, let the Sanydsi always beg food. 


“ For missing it let him not be sorrowful, nor for gaining it, let him be glad, let him care only 
for a sufficiency to support life, but let him not be anxious about his utensils. 57, Menu 6. 


+ This character is given to him in the Sankara Vijaya of MApDHAVA AcHAryA; his followers 
in the Dekhin assert that Srv A’s descent as Sankara, was foretold in the Skanda Purdna : a pro- 
phecy which, if found in that work, will assist to fix its date, but the passage has not been met with. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 175 


deity and his incarnations, in preference to the other members of the 
Triad, whence they are included amongst his votaries; and they so far 
admit the distinction as not unfrequently to bear the Satva mark upon 
the forehead, smearing it with the Tripundra, a triple transverse line made 
with the Vibhuii, or ashes which should be taken from the fire of an 
Agnihotra Brahman, or they may be the ashes of burnt cowdung from an 
oblation offered to the god*. They also adopt the initiating Mantra of 
all the Sativa classes, either the five or six syllable Mantra, “ Nama 
Stvaya,” or, “ Om, Nama Siviya.” The genuine Davdi, however, is not 


necessarily of the Sawva or any other sect; and in their establishments it 


* The material, or Vibhiti, and the efficacy of the mark, the Zripundra, are thus described 
in the Aastkhanda— 


HAITIA HHA TATA 
qaq sateen faquse AEA UI 


2 


The ashes of fire made with burnt cowdung, are the material fittest for the Z’ripundra. 


fauag qed ag wat felrqaaA 
HEIIIAAA_iIaN Ba Baaaas 
gaara a: qa ae atenta tet 
FaUUy MAHAR AIA TATA: | 
Whoever marks the Z’r7pundra with ashes, agreeably to rule, is purified from sins of the first and 


second degree: who makes it on his forehead without the Mantras, being ignorant of its virtue, 
will be purified from every simple sin. The mode of making it is thus laid down : 


UqAyY AAC MITA HITUAL | 
AAA AA FAMATS WaTAraa: 
AASA AA Lat fauasariaawtag | 


Beginning between the eye-brows, and carrying it to their extremity, the mark made with the 
thumb reverted between the middle and third fingers, is called the Z7ipundra. 


176 SKETCH OF THE 


will be usually found that they profess to adore Nirguna or Niranjane, 


the deity devoid of attribute or passion*. 


The Dardis, who are rather practical than speculative, and who have 
little pretence to the appellation beyond the epithet and outward signs 
of the order, are those most correctly included amongst the Saiva sects. 
Amongst these, the worship of Stva, as Buarrava, is the prevailing form, 
and in that case part of the ceremony of initiation consists in inflicting a 
small incision on the inner part of the knee, and drawing the blood of the 
novice as an acceptable offering to the god. The Dardis of every des- 
cription, have also a peculiar mode of disposing of their dead, putting them 
into coffins and burying them; or when practicable, committing them to 
some sacred stream. The reason of this is their being prohibited the 


use of fire on any accountf. 


Any Hindu of the three first classes may become Sanydsi or Danii, 
or, in these degenerate days, a Hindu of any caste may adopt the life 
and emblems of this order. Such are sometimes met with, as also 


are Brahmans, who, without connecting themselves with any community, 


* The Daniis of the North of India are the Sanydsis, or monastic portion of the Smartal 
Brahmanas of the South, of whom BucHANaAwn gives the following account: “ The most nu- 
merous class here, and which comprehends about one-half of all the Brahmans in the Lower Carnatic, 
is called the Smartal Sect, and its members are the followers of SANKARA AcHARYA. They are 
commonly said to be of the sect of Siva, but they consider Branma, Visunu and Iswara to be 
the same as the creator, preserver, and destroyer of the universe. They are readily distinguished 
by three horizontal stripes on the forehead, made with the ashes of cowdung.” (Buch. 1. 13). “ The 
Sanyasis are the Gurus of this sect ;’ (Ibid 305) and the Davidis have great influence and autho- 
rity amongst Saiva Brahmans of the North of India. 


+ In the South, the ascetic followers of both Siva and Visunu bury the dead ; (Dubois, 56) 
so do the Vaishnava Vairdgis and Sanydsis in the North of India, and the Sativa Jogis. The 
class of Hindu weavers called Yogis, have adopted a similar practice ; (Ward 1, 201) all the casts in 
the South, that wear the Linga, do the same, (Buch. I. 27), 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 177 


assume the character of this class of mendicants. These constitute the 
Danilis simply so termed, and are regarded as distinct from the primitive 
members of the order, to whom the appellation of Dasndmis is also appli- 
ed, and who admit none but Brahmans into their fraternity. 

The Dasnémi Davdis, who are regarded as the descendants of the 
original members of the fraternity, are said to refer their origin to SANKARA 
AcHARYA, an individual who appears to have performed a part of some im- 
portance in the religious history of Hindustan ; and to whom an influence 
has been often attributed much exceeding that which he really exercised. 
His biography, like that of most of the Hindu saints, is involved in consi- 
derable obscurity; buta few facts may be gleaned from such accounts as 
we have of him, upon which reliance may be placed, and to which it 


may not be uninteresting here briefly to advert. 


A number of works are current in the South of India relating to 
this teacher, under the titles of Sankara Cheritra, Sankara Katha, Sankara 
Vijaya, or Sankara Digvijaya, following much the same course of narra- 
tion, and detailing little more than SanKara’s controversial victories over 
various sects ; in most cases, no doubt, the fictions of the writers.,Of the two 
principal works of the class, one attributed to ANANDAGIRI, a pupil of 
Sankara, has already been noticed.* 'The otheris the work of MApuava 
Acuirya, the minister of some of the earliest chiefs of Vijayanagar, and 
who dates, accordingly, in the fourteenth century. Thisis a composition of 
high literary and polemical pretension, but not equally high biographical 
value. Some particulars of SAnKara’s birth and early life are to be found 


in the Kerala Utpattt, or political and statistical description of Malabar, 


* See Asiatick Researches, vol. XVI. page 10. 


Wark 


178 SKETCH OF THE 


although the work is sometimes said to have been composed by SanKARA 


himself. 


With regard to the place of Sanxara’s birth, and the tribe of which he 
was a member, most accounts agree to make him a ‘native of Kerala, or 
_ Malabar, of the tribe of Namburi Brahmans, and in the mythological lan- 
- guage of the sect, an incarnation of Stva. According to other traditions, 
he was born at Chidambaram, although he transferred his residence to 
Malabar, whilst the Kerala Utpatti recognises Malabar as his native 
place, and calls him the offspring of adultery, for which his. mother Sr 


Mandpevi was expelled her caste. 


In Malabar, he is said to have divided the four original castes into se- 
venty-two, or eighteen sub-divisions each, and to have assigned them their 
_ respective rites and duties. Notwithstanding this, he seems to have met 
with particular disrespect, either on account of his opinions, origin, or his 
wandering life. On his return home, on one occasion, his mother died, and. 
he had to perform the funeral rites, for which his relations refused to supply 
him with fire, and at which all the Brahmans declined to assist. SANKARA 
then produced fire from his arm, and burnt the corpse in the court yard of 
the house, denouncing imprecations on the country to the effect, that the 
Brahmans there should not study the Vedas, that religious mendicants 
should never obtain alms, and that the dead should always be burned 
close to the houses in which they had resided—a custom which is said 


to have survived him. 


All accounts concur in representing Sankara as leading an erratic 
life, and engaging in successful controversy with various sects, whether of 
the Saiva, Vaishnava, or less orthodox persuasions. In the course of his 


peregrinations, he established several Maths, or convents, under the presi- 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 179 


dence of his disciples, particularly one still flourishing at Sringeri, or 
Sringagiri, on the western Ghats, near the sources of the Tungabhadra. 
Towards the close of his life, he repaired as far as to Kashmir, and seated 
himself, after triumphing over various opponents, on the throne of Saras- 
watt. He next went:to Badarikdsrama, and finally to Kedarnath, in the 
Himdlaya, where he died at the early age of thirty-two. The events of his 
last days are confirmed by local traditions, and the Piiha, or throne of 
Saraswati, on which Sankara sat, is still shown in Kashmir ; whilst at the 
temple of Siva, at Badari, a Malabar Brahman, of the Nambur: tribe, 


has always been the officiating priest.* 


The influence exercised by Sankara in person, has been perpetuated 
by his writings, the most eminent of which are his Bhdshyas, or Com- 
mentaries on the. Sitras, or Aphorisms of VyAsa. A Commentary on the 
Bhagavad Gita, is also ascribed to him, as is one on the Nrisinha Tapanitya 
Upanishad: acento of verses in praise of Durea, the Saundarya Lahari, is 
likewise said to be his composition, as sometimes is the Amru Sataka, a 
collection of amatory Stanzas, written in the name of Amru, a Prince, whose 
dead body Sankara is fabled to have animated, that by becoming fami- 
liarised with sensual enjoyments, he might argue upon such topics with the 
wife of Madana Misra, who was more than equal to him in discussions of 
this nature, and was the only disputant he was unable to subdue, until 
the period of his transmigration had expired, and he had thence become 


practised in the gratification of the passions. 


Although no doubt of Sanxara’s existence, or of the important part 
performed by him in the partial re-modelling of the Hindu system, can 


be entertained, yet the exact period at which he flourished can by no 


* Asiatick Researches, vol. XII, page 536. 


180 SKETCH OF THE 


means be determined. I have, in another place, expressed my belief that 
he may have existed about the eighth or ninth century.* Subsequent 
enquiry has failed to add any reasons to those assigned for such an infer- 
ence ; but it has offered nothing to weaken or invalidate the conclusion 


there proposed.t 


* Preface to the Sanscrit Dictionary, page XVII. 


+ A Hélakénara Manuscript, in the possession of the late Col. Mackenzir, entitled Sankara 
Vijaya, (Mackenzie Collection 11, 34) gives the following list of the spiritual heads of the Sringeré 


establishment : 


1. Govinda Pada. 16. Chandra Sekhara Acharya. 

2. Sankara Acharya. 17. Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. 

3. Sanandana Acharya. 18. Sankara Bharati Acharya. 

4. Surasura Acharya. 19. Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. * 

5. Trotaka Acharya. 20. Purushottoma Bharati Acharya. 

6. Hastamalaka Acharya. 21. Ramachandra Bharati Acharya. 

7. Jnyanaghana Acharya. 22. Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. 

8. Jnyanottama Acharya. 23. Immadi Bharati Achéarya. 

9. Sinhagiriswara Acharya. 24. Abhinava Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. 
10. Iswaratirtha Acharya. 25. Sachchidananda Bharati Acharya. 
11. Nrisinha Martti Acharya. 26. Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. 
12. Vitarana Acharya. 27. Immédi Sachchidananda Bharati Acharya. 
13. Vidyasankara Acharya. 28. Abhinava Sachchiddénanda Bhératia Acharya. 
14, Bharati Krishna Acharya. 29. Nrisinha Bharati Acharya. 
15. Vidydsanya Acharya. 


This gives 27 descents from Sankara. As the Mahant is elected from the disciples, either 
by the Guru when about to die, or by the Swémalu, the spiritual chiefs of other establishments of 
the same sect, he is raised probably to the station in the prime of manhood, and in the ease and dig- 
nity of his sanctity has a favourable prospect of a Jong life. Twenty-five years to a Guru may there- 
fore be but a fair average allowance, and the above list comprises at that rate an interval of 657 
years: at what period it closes does not appear ; but the Hdlakdnara language is obsolete, and the 
work is possibly not less than two or three centuries old. This series of Gwrus is so far corroborative 
of the view elsewhere taken of SANKARA’s date; but as it has been extracted by a Pandit, from @ 
work which I could not consult myself, it is by no means certain that it is correct, and I do not 


wish to attach any undue importance to the authority. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 181 


The spiritual descendants of Sanxara, in the first degree, are variously 
named by different authorities, but usually agree in the number. He is 
said to have had four principal disciples, who, in the popular traditions, 
are called Padmapdda, Hastaémalaka, Sureswara or Mandana, and Trotaka. 
Of these, the first had two pupils, Zirtha and Asrama; the second, Vana 
and Aranya; the third had three, Saraswati, Puri, and Bhdrati ; and the 
fourth had also three, Girt or Gir, Parvata, and Sagara. These, which 
being all significant terms, were no doubt adopted names, constitute col- 
lectively the appellation Dasndmt, or the ten named, and when a Brahman 
enters into either class, he attaches to his own denomination that of the 
class of which he becomes a member; as VW%rtha, Puri, Gir, &e.* The 
greater proportion of the ten classes of mendicants, thus descended from 
Sankara Acuirya, have failed to retain their purity of character, and are 
only known by their epithets as members of the original order. There 
are but three, and part of a fourth mendicant class, or those called Virtha 
or Indra, Asrama, Saraswati, and Bharati, who are still regarded as really 
Sanxart’s Dafiis. These are sufficiently numerous, especially in and 
about Benares. They comprehend a variety of characters; but amongst 
the most respectable of them, are to be found very able expounders of 


the Vedanta works. Other branches of Sanscrit literature owe important 


* Tt is scarcely worth while perhaps to translate words of such common occurrence, but to 
prove what I have stated in the text,I subjoin their signification: Zértha, a place of pilgrimage ; 
Asrama, an order, as that of student, householder, &c.; Vana, a wood; Aranya, a wood; Saraswéti, 
the goddess of speech and eloquence ; Puri,a city; Bharati, speech, or its goddess ; Giri, a mouns 
tain; in common use it always occurs Gir, which implies speech; Parvata, a mountaineer ; 
Sdgara, an ocean; the names are always compounded with different terms. One of SanKARA’s 
disciples we have seen, called ANANDA Giri. The famous MApuava, when he became a Dandi, 
adopted the appellation of VipyARANYA. PGRANGIR, has been elsewhere adverted to, and other 
like names occur in some of the following notes. Bhdraéi is the prevailing title of the latter 
Sringagivt Gurus. 


182 SKETCH OF THE 


obligations to this religious sect.* The most sturdy beggars are also mem- 
bers of this order, although their contributions are levied particularly 
upon the Brahmanical class, as whenever a feast is given to the Brah- 
manas, the Dardis of this description present themselves unbidden guests, 
and can only be got rid of by bestowing on them a due share of the cates 
provided for their more worldly-minded brethren. Many of them practice 
-the Yoga, and profess to work miracles, although with less success than 
some members of the order in the days of the author of the Dadbistdn, 
who specifies one Dandadhari, as able to suspend his breath for three 
hours, bring milk from his veins, cut bones with hair, and put eggs into a 


narrow mouthed bottle without breaking them. 


The remaining six and a half members of the Dasnami class, although 
considered as having fallen from the purity of practice necessary to the 
Dandi, are still, in general, religious characters, and are usually denomi- 
nated Aiits:{ the chief points of difference between them and the preced- 
ing, are their abandonment of the staff, their use of clothes, money, and 
ornaments ; their preparing their own food, and their admission of mem- 
bers from any order of Hindus. They are often collected in Maths, as 
well as the Dandis, but they mix freely in the business of the world; they 
carry on trade, and often accumulate property, and they frequently off- 


ciate as priests at the shrines of some of the deities: } some of them even 


* SanxkARA and MApHAvVA are well known by their numerous and excellent works. The 
chief Vedanta writers, in like manner, were Dandis ; and the author of the Dasakumdéra, RAMASRAMA 
the Commentator on AMERA, and VisnyANESWARA, the Commentator on the texts of YAJNAVAL- 
KYA, were of the same class of ascetics. 


+ From =fafa Aéiti, a guest, a temporary dweller upon earth ; or weta Atééa, past away, 
liberated from worldly eares and feelings. 


{ The officiating priests at the celebrated shrine of ANNAPGRNA, in Benares, are Ais. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 185 


marry, but in that case they are distinguished by the term Samyogt, from 
the other Aiits. 


The chief practices and designations of the Dajdis, as generally charac- 
teristic of them, have been already adverted to, but a great variety prevails 
in the details.* Their philosophical tenets in the main, are those of the 
Vedanta system, as taught by Sanxari and his disciples; but they gene- 
rally superadd the practice of the Yoga, as taught by the followers of 
PaTanJAui, and many of them have latterly adopted the doctrines of the 
Tantras. Besides Sanxari, the different orders of Dardis hold in high 
veneration the Muni Darrartreya, the son of Arri, and ANAsuvA. By vir- 
tue of a boon bestowed upon Arri, or according to one legend, on-his wife, 
by the three deities BraumA, Visunv, and Siva, that sage had three sons, 
Soma, Darra, and Durvisas, who were severally portions of the deities 
themselves.| Darra, or Darrirreya, was eminent for his practice of the 
Yoga, and hence is held in high estimation by the Jogis, of whom we are 
next to speak, whilst, as an incarnation of a portion of VisHNUv, he is 


likewise venerated by the Vaishnavas. 
YOGIS or JOGIS. 


The Dardis are to the Saiva sects, what the followers of RA&MANuJA 
are to those of the Vaishnava faith, and a like parallel may be drawn _ be- 
tween the disciples of RAmMANanpD and those of Gorakuniru, or the 


Kanphata Jogis, the first pair being properly restricted to the Brahmanical 


* A specimen of the independent but scarcely orthodox Daféli, is presented in the well 
known personage Puran Gir, of whom Mr. Duncan published an account in the 5th volume of 
the Asiatic Researches. 


t+ Bhagavat, Book IV, and Mérkandeya Purdna, Chapter XVI. 


184 SKETCH OF THE 


_ order, intended chiefly for men of learning ; the two latter admitting mem- 
bers from every description of people, and possessing a more attractive 


popular character. 


The term Jogi or Yog?, is properly applicable to the followers of the 
Yoga, or Patanjala school of philosophy, which, amongst other tenets, 
maintained the practicability of acquiring, even in life, entire command 
over elementary matter, by means of certain ascetic practices. The 
details of these itis unnecessary to particularize, and accounts of them and 
of the Yoga philosophy, will be best derived from the translation of Buosa 
Devis’ Comment on the Pdianjala Sutras, in Warn’s Account of the Hindus, 
and Mr. Cotesrooke’s Essay on the Sdnkkya and Péianjala doctrines, in 
the Ist volume of the Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society. It is 
sufficient here to observe, that the practices consist chiefly of long con- 
tinued suppressions of respiration; of inhaling and exhaling the breath 
in a particular manner; of sitting in eighty-four different attitudes; of 
fixing the eyes on the top of the nose, and endeavouring, by the force of 
mental abstraction, to effect a union between the portion of vital spirit 
residing in the body and that which pervades all nature, and is identical 
with Siva, considered as the supreme being, and source and essence of all 
creation. When this mystic union is effected, the Yogz is liberated in 
his living body, from the clog of material incumbrance, and acquires an 
entire command over ail worldly substance. He can make himself lighter 
than the lightest substances, heavier than the heaviest ; can become as 
vast, oras minute as he pleases, can traverse all space, can animate 
any dead body, by transferring his spirit into it from his own frame, can 
render himself invisible, can attain all objects, becomes equally acquaint- 
ed with the past, present, and future, and is finally united with S1va, 
and consequently exempted from being born again upon earth. These 


super-human faculties are acquired, in various degrees, according to the 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 185 


greater or less perfection with which the initiatory processes have been 


performed. 


According to standard authorities, the perfect fulfilment of the ‘rites 
which the Yog? has to accomplish, requires a protracted existence and re- 
peated births, and it is declared to be unattainable in the present or Kal 
age.* The attempt is therefore prohibited, and the Yoga is prescribed in 
modern times. This inhibition is, however, disregarded, and the individuals 
who are the subjects of our enquiry, endeavour to attain the super-human 
powers which the performance of the Yoga is supposed to confer. They 
especially practice the various gesticulations and postures of which it 
consists, and labour assiduously to suppress their breath and fix their 
thoughts until the effect does somewhat realise expectation, and the brain, 
in a state of over-wrought excitement, bodies forth a host of crude and 
wild conceptions, and gives to airy nothings a local habitation and a 


name.{ A year’s intense application is imagined enough to qualify the 


* The Késtkhanda thus enumerates the difficulty or impossibility of completing the Yoga in 
the present age. 


aaafaa sfaaraataaneraaatare | 
AFUGQUTUAU He GAAS es: II 
“ From the unsteadiness of the senses, the prevalence of sin in the Kali, and the shortness of life, 


how can Exaltation by the Yoga be obtained.” 
Again— 


EN SS 
4 fergfa watt ara a faegia aait AH: | 
In the Kali age, the Yoga and severe penance are impracticable. 


+ Some who have commenced their career in this line, have carried the practice to several 
hours duration, at which time they have described themselves as becoming perfectly exhausted, 
with strange objects passing before them, and sparks of fire flashing in their eyes. One individual 


A l 


186 SKETCH OF THE 


adept,* whilst inferior faculties may be obtained by even asix month’s 


practice. 


There are few Jogis, however, who lay claim to perfection, and their 
pretensions are usually confined to a partial command over their physical 
and mental faculties. These are evinced in the performance of low mum- 
meries, or juggling tricks, which cheat the vulgar into a belief of their 
powers. A common mode of display is by waving a Chowr?, or bunch of 
peacock’s feathers, over asick or new-born infant, to cure it of any morbid 
affection, or guard it against the evil eye. A trick of loftier pretence 
has, of late, attracted some notice in the person of a Brahman at Madras, 
who, by some ingenious contrivance, appeared to sit in the air, and who 
boasted of being able to remain for a considerable period under water. 
He and his followers ascribed the possession of these faculties to his 


successful practice of the observances of the Yoga.t} 


quitted it from having at last a figure resembling himself always before him, and knowing this to 
be a deception, he wisely inferred the similar character of any other visionary creature of his con- 
templation and the absurdity of the practice. Dusors has some amusing anecdotes on this subject, 
(page 357, &c.) they are fully authenticated by the similar accounts which many Vairdgis, in Upper 
India, will readily furnish. The worthy Aspe may indeed be generally trusted when he confines 
himself to what he saw or knew: in much that he heard he was misled, and in almost every thing 
connected with the language and literature, and the religion or philosophy, as taught by classical 


authority, he commits egregious blunders. 


* seqaret faarereat atat qtauctrgm: | 
HRS Hafaar ars aA ATT It 


Leading a life of chastity and abstemiousness, and diligent in the practice of the Yoga, the 
Yogi becomes perfect after a year: of this there is do doubt. Hatha Pradipa. 


+ “ Sitting in the Air.—An exhibition at Madras has excited considerable curiosity. A Brah- 
min, old and slightly made, represented to be of high caste, contrives to poise himself in a most 
extraordinary manner in the air. He performs this feat at any gentleman’s house, not for money, 
but as an act of courtesy. The following is a description, from an eye-witness, given in a Calcutta 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 187 


In referring to the origin of this system, we must, no doubt, go back 
to some antiquity, although the want of chronological data renders it 
impossible to specify the era at which it was first promulgated. That it 
was familiarly known and practised in the eighth century, we may learn 
from the plays of Buavasutri, particularly the Mdlalt and Médhava,* 
and from several of the Satva Puranas, in some of which, as the Kiirma 
Purana, we have a string of names which appear to be those of a 


succession of teachers.t The cavern temples of the South of India, in 


paper.—“ The only apparatus seen is a piece of plank, which, with four pegs, he forms into a kind 
of long stool ; upon this, in a little brass saucer or socket, he places, ina perpendicular position, a 
hollow bamboo, over which he puts a kind of crutch, like that of a walking crutch, covering that 
with a piece of common hide: these materials he carries with him in a little bag, which is shown to 
those who come to see him exhibit. The servants of the house hold a blanket before him, and 
when it is withdrawn, he is discovered poised in the air, about four feet from the ground, in a sitting 
attitude, the outer edge of one hand merely touching the crutch, the fingers of that hand delibe- 
rately counting beads; the other hand and arm held up in an erect posture. The blanket was then 
held up before him, and they heard a gurgling noise like that occasioned by wind escaping from a 
bladder or tube, and when the screen was withdrawn he was again standing on terra firma. The 
same man has the power of staying under water for several hours. He declines to explain how he 
does it, merely saying he has been long accustomed to do so.” The length of time for which he 
can remain in his aerial station is considerable. The person who gave the above account says that 
he remained in the air for twelve minutes ; but before the Governor of Madras he continued on his 
baseless seat for forly minutes.” —Asiatic Monthly Journal for March, 1829. 


* See especially the opening of the 5th Act, and Notes. 


+  Srva, it is said, appeared in the beginning of the Kali age as Sweta, for the purpose of 
benefiting the Brahmanas. He resided on the Himdlaya mountains, and taught the Yoga. He had four 
chief disciples, one also termed Swera, and the others SwerastkHA, SweTAswa, and SwETALOHITA. 
They had twenty-eight disciples—Sutdra, Madana, Suhotra, Kankana, and twenty-four others. Of 
these, four, whose names are not mentioned, had ninety-seven disciples, masters of the Yoga and 
inferior portions of Siva. Those Brahmanas who recite the names of these teachers and offer to them 
libations acquire Brahmavidyd, or knowledge of spirit. That this long string of one hundred and 
twenty-five names is wholly fictitious, seems improbable, although the list is possibly not very 
accurate. The four primitive teachers may be imaginary ; but it is a curious circumstance that the 
word Sweta, white, should be the leading member of each appellation, and that in the person 
of Siva, and his first disciple, it should stand alone as Swera, the white. Srva, however, is always 


188 SKETCH OF THE 


the subjects of their sculptures, and the decorations of Siva and his 
attendants, belong to the same sect ;* whilst the philosophical tenets of 
Patanjali are as ancient perhaps as most of the other philosophical 
systems, and are prior to the Puranas, by which they are inculcated in a 
popular form. The practices of the Yoga are also frequently alluded to, 
and enforced in the Mahabharat.t There is little reason to question 
therefore the existence and popularity of the Yoga in the early centuries 
of the Christian era, but whether it was known and cultivated earlier must 
be matter of vague conjecture alone. As represented in the Sankaravijaya, 
(Section 41) the Yogis vindicate their doctrine by texts from the Vedas, 
but the applicability of the texts is there denied, and is certainly far from 


conclusive or satisfactory. 


The principal mode in which the Yoga takes a popular shape in 
Upper India, is probably of comparatively recent origin. This is the sect 
of Kanphata Jogis, who acknowledge as their founder, a teacher named 
GorAKHNATH, traces of whom are found in a Gorakhkshetra at Peshawer, 


mentioned by AsuLrazZt, and in the district and town of Gorakhpur, where 


painted white, and the names may be contrived accordingly; but we are still at a loss to understand 
why the god himself should have a European complexion. 


* In the temples of Salsette, Elephanta, and Ellora, the principal figure is mostly Srva, deco- 
rated with ear-rings, such as are still worn by the Kanphata Jogis ; the walls are covered with 
ascetics in the various Asanas, or positions in which the Yogi is to sit; a favourite subject of sculp- 
ture at Elephania and Ellora is the sacrifice of Daxsua disconcerted, and the guests, though 
saints and gods, put to rout, bruised and mutilated, by ViraBuapRa, and the Ganas of Srva, in 
revenge for that deity’s not having been invited, a story told in most of the Puranas which incul- 
cate the Yoga tenets. The cells attached to some of the temples are also indicative of Jogi 
residence, and one of the caves of Salsette is named that of Jogiswara, or SIVA, as lord of the Jogis. 
Transactions of the Literary Society of Bombay. Vols. 1 and 2. 


+ These allusions occur in the Vana Parva chiefly ; whilst in the Udyoga Parva, the ob- 
servances of the Yoga are detailed at considerable length, and strenuously enjoined. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 189 


also exist a temple and religious establishment of his followers. They 
hold also in veneration a plain near Dwaraka, named Gorakhkhetr; and a 
cavern or subterraneous passage at Haridwar. The Saiva temples of 
Nepal, those of Sambunath, Pasupatenath, and others, belong to the same 
system, although local legends attached to them, have combined in a 
curious manner the fictions of the Bauddha with those of the Brahmanical 


mythology.* 


From a Ghoshti,} or controversial dialogue between Kanfr and Goraku- 
NATH, it would seem that they were personally known to each other, but 
various texts in the Bijck allude to him as if recently deceased. In either 
case these two teachers may have been cotemporaries, or nearly so, and 
the latter therefore flourished in the beginning of the 15th century. Ac- 
cording to his followers, he was an incarnation of Siva; but in the contro- 
versial tract above named, he calls himself the son of Marsyenpra Nirn, 
and grandson of Apinitu. { Marsyenpra Nira appears to have been 
the individual who introduced the Yoga Saivism into Nepal: one of the 


works of the sect, the Hatha Pradipa, makes Marsyenpra prior to 


* See Asiatic Researches, vol. XVI. page 471, and Note. 


+ This has been printed in the first volume of Hindee and Hindustani Selections, for the use 
of the Interpreters of the Bengal Army, compiled by Captain Price. The discussion, in the form 
of a dialogue, occurs page 140. 


{ siiearan areit ARHATY A Wa | 
H aut ew HaaA I 


190 SKETCH OF THE 


Goraku by five spiritual descents,* and this would place the former in 
the 14th century, supposing the Kadir work to be correct in the date it 


attributes to the latter. 


If the date assigned by Hamitron to the migration of the Hindu 
tribes from Chitaur, the beginning of the 14th century, be accurate,} it is 
probable that this was the period at which the worship of Srva, agreeably 
to the doctrines of Matsyenpra, or Goraku, was introduced there, and 


into the eastern provinces of Hindustan. 


The temple of GorakunitH at Gorakhpur, according to the local 


tradition, was founded by Siva in the second, or T'reta age. Of its revolu- 


a 


* The list of teachers is thus particularised : 


1. Adinath. 17. Churpati. 

2. Matsyendra. 18. AKaneri. 

3. Sambara. 19. Pujyapada. 

4. Ananda. 20. Mityandatha. 

5. Bhairava. 21. Mranjana. 

6. Chourangi. 22. Kapala. 

7. Ména. 23. Bindu. 

8. Goraksha. 24. MKdahachandiswara. 
9. Virtipaksha. 25. Allama. 

10. Vilesa. 26. Prabhudeva. 

ll. Manthana Bhairava. 27. Goréchili. 

12. Siddhabuddha. 28. Dindima. 

13. Kanthada. 29. Bhaluhi. 

14. Paurandaka. 30. Nagabodha. 

15. Surdnanda. 31. Chandakapdlika. 
16. Siddhapada. 


The author of the Hatha Pradipa, ATMA RAMA, states that these and many more Mahasid- 
dhas, or perfect Yogis, are in existence. His names are possibly those of the Mahants, of a particu- 
Jar establishment: some of them are very unlike Hindu appellatives. If the date assigned to Gorak- 
ndath in the text be rightly conjectured, we cannot assign much more than fifteen years to each of his 


SUCCESSOrS. 


+ Hamiiton’s Nepal, page 14. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 191 


tions subsequent to that period, no account was preserved, until it was 
converted into a Mohammedan mosque by AuA-appin. The temple, after 
some interval, was re-built in a different situation by an association of the 
followers of GorAKHNATH, and this was possibly the period at which the 
sect assumed its present form. A similar fate, however, attended this 
edifice, and it was appropriated by Auranezrs to the Mohammedan 
religion. A second interval elapsed before a shrine was again erected 
to GorAKHNATH, when it was re-built on the spot on which it now 
stands, by Buppuaniru, according to instructions communicated to 
him by GoraxunAru in person. The present temple is situated to the 


west of the City of Gorakhpur, and attached to it on the south are three 


temples, consecrated to ManApeva, Pasuparinitu, and Hanuman. The 


inclosure also comprehends the tombs of several eminent members of 
this communion, and the dwellings of the Mahant and his resident 


disciples. 


GoRAKHNATH was a man of some acquirement, and has left specimens 
of his scholarship in two Sanscrit Compositions, the Geraksha sataka 
and Goraksha kalpa: third, the Goraksha sahasra Néma is, probably, 
of his writing. The celebrated Buarrrinart, the brother of Vixrami- 
DITYA, is said to have been one of his disciples, but chronology will not 
admit of such an approximation. According to the authorities of the sect, 
Goraku is but one of nine eminent teachers, or Naths. Of the perfect 
Yogis, or Siddhas, eighty-four are enumerated ; but it is said, that there 
have been many more, of whom several are still upon the surface of the 
earth. 


The Jogis of GorAKHNATH are usually called Kdnphatas, from having 
their ears bored, and rings inserted in them at the time of their initia- 


tion. They may be of any cast; they live as ascetics, either singly or in 


192 SKETCH OF THE 


Maths.* Srva is the object of their -worship—they officiate indeed, as the 
priests of that deity, in some places, especially at the celebrated Léé, or 
Staff, of Buarrava, at Benares. They mark the forehead with a trans- 
verse line of ashes, and smear the body with the same; they dress in 
various styles, but in travelling usually wear a cap of patch-work and 
garments dyed with red ochre. Some wear simply a Dhotz, or cloth 


round the loins. 


The term Jogi, in popular acceptation, is of almost as general appli- 
cation as Sanydasi and Vairdgi; and it is difficult to fix its import upon 
any individual class, besides the Kdnphata: the vagrants so called, fol- 
lowing usually the dictates of their own caprice as to worship and be- 
lief, and often, it may be conceived, employing the character as a mere 
plea for a lazy livelihood. The Jogis are, indeed, particularly distinguish- 
ed amongst the different mendicant characters, by adding to their reli- 
gious personification more of the mountebank than any others: most of 
the religious mendicants, it is true, deal in fortune-telling, interpretation of 
dreams, and palmistry; they are also often empirics, and profess to cure 
diseases with specific drugs, or with charms and spells: but besides 
these accomplishments, the Jogi is frequently musical, and plays and 
sings; he also initiates animals into his business, and often travels 
about with a small bullock, a goat, or a monkey, whom he has taught 
to obey his commands, and to exhibit amusing gesticulations. The 
dress of this class of Jogis is generally a cap and coat, or frock of many 


colours : they profess to worship Siva, and often carry the Linga, like 


* Solitary and independant living, however, appears to be improper, if the authority of the 
Hatha Pradipa is to be depended upon. 


atisy ufara St alia fags | 
Bald alo atay Gra Es Arfawar ti 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 193 


the Jangamas, in the cap ; all classes and sects assume the character, and 
Musselman Jogis are not uncommon. One class of the Hindu JSogis 
is called Sdringihar, from their carrying a Saringi, or small fiddle or lute, 
with which they accompany their songs: these are usually Bhdsha stan- 
zas on religious or mythological topics, amongst which, stanzas ascribed 
to Buarrinart, and a Pauranic legend of the marriage of Siva and Pir- 
VATI, are particularly celebrated. The Saringthars beg in the name of Buat- 
RAVA: another sect of them, also followers of that deity, are termed Divi- 
hars, from their trafficking in small pedlary, especially the sale of thread 
and silk, to the housewives of the villages ; another class adopt the name 
of Matsyendris, or Macchendris, from Matsyendra, whom they regard as 
their founder ; and a fourth set are Bhartriharis, from a traditional refer- 
ence to him as the institutor of this particular order. The varieties of this 
class of mendicants, however, cannot be specified: they are all errants ; 
fixed residences, or Maths, of any Jogis, except the Kdnphatas, rarely oc- 
curring : an observation that will apply to, perhaps, all the Sazva sects, of 


whom it yet remains to give an account. 
JANGAMAS. 


The worship of Stva, under the type of the Linga, it has been ob- 
served, is almost the only form in which that deity is reverenced.* It is 


“ Tn a well-governed and well-regulated country, fertile and prosperous, the Hatha Yogi (he 
who upholds the world in eternal continuity,) should reside in a solitary cell, within the precincts 
of a Math.” “Other directions follow, applicable to most establishments of a similar nature. 


The cell should have a small door, be neither too lofty, nor too low, be well smeared with cow-dung, 


and should be kept clean and free from reptiles: the Math should have a temple, a mound or altar, 
and a well, adjoining, and be enclosed by a wall. 


* Tts prevalence throughout the whole tract of the Ganges, as far as Benares, is sufficiently 
conspicuous. In Bengal, the temples are commonly erected in a range of six, eight, or twelve, on each 
side of a Ghat, leading to the river. At Kadna is a circular groupe of one hundred and eight temples, 


c 1 


194 SKETCH OF THE 


also perhaps the most ancient object of homage adopted in India, subse- 
quently to the ritual of the Vepas, which was chiefly, if not wholly, ad- 
dressed to the elements, and particularly to Fire. How far the worship 
of the Linga is authorised by the Vepas, is doubtful, but itis the main 
purport of several of the Purdnas.* There can be no doubt of its univer- 
sality at the period of the Mohammedan invasion of India. The idol 
destroyed by Manmup, of Ghizni, was nothing more than a Linga, being, 
according to MirKkuonp, a block of stone, of four or five cubits long, and 


proportionate thickness.{ It was, in fact, one of the twelve great Lingas, 


erected by the Raja of Bardwan. Each of the temples in Bengal, consists of a single chamber, of a 
square form, surmounted by a pyramidal centre; the area of each is very small, the Linga, of black 
or white marble, occupies the centre ; the offerings are presented at the threshold. Benares, how- 
ever, is the peculiar seat of this form of worship: the principal deity VisweswARra, as observed 
already, is a Zinga, and most of the chief objects of the pilgrimage are similar blocks of stone. 
Particular divisions of the pilgrimage direct visiting forty-seven Zingas, all of pre-eminent 
sanctity ; but there are hundreds of inferior note still worshipped, and thousands whose fame 
and fashion have passed away. If we may believe S1va, indeed, he counted a hundred Parérrdhyas 
in Kasi, of which, at the time he is supposed to tell this to Devt, he adds sixty crore, or six hundred 
millions, were covered by the waters of the Ganges. A Pardrrdhya is said, by the commentator 
on the Kast Khanda, in which this dialogue occurs, to contain as many years of mortals as are 
equal to fifty of Brahma’s years. Notwithstanding the acknowledged purport of this worship, it is 
but justice to state, that it is unattended in Upper India by any indecent or indelicate ceremonies, 
and it requires a rather lively imagination to trace any resemblance in its symbols to the objects 
they are‘supposed to represent. The absence of all indecency from public worship and religious 
establishments in the Gangetic Provinces, was fully established by the Vindicator of the Hindus, 
the late General Sruarr, and in every thing relating to actual practice, better authority cannot be 
desired. (Vindication, Part 1st, 99, and more particularly Part 2d, 135). 


* The Skanda Purdna, which contains the Kast Khanda, particularly inculcates the worship 
of Srva in this form; so do the Siva, Brahmanda, and Linga Puranas. 


+ The following is the passage from the Rozet as Sefa, alluded to: 


CY 


y\ aie Un) 9b 8 Madd 1 eS Reece Lehane Wo Ino ong Nod 9 805 Wy] Cain dy Bg Gy ga 


Boel 0 WS O yrs? d yA te y he? yee J jae Fay ple wy! i828 gt 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 195 


then set up in various parts of India, several of which, besides Someswara, 


or Somandth, which was the name of the Stva, demolished by Maumup, were 


so 8 bb dye 9 Sora) | usyl dies bas rye ly W29 bae gus BS Sa sh 


dans | boat wile da? di lan!) Sy WD pane we 


“ The temple in which the Idol of Somnath stood, was of considerable extent, both in length 
and breadth, and the roof was supported by fifty-six pillars in rows. The Idol was of polished 
stone, its height was about five cubits, and its thickness in proportion: two cubits were below ground. 
Maumup having entered the temple, broke the stone Somnath, with a heavy mace: some of the 
fragments he ordered to be conveyed to Ghizni, and they were placed at the threshold of the great 
Mosque.” Another authority, the Tebkaét Akbeeri, a history of Akber’s reign, with a preliminary 
Sketch of Indian History, has the following : 


Ja bey clog Leven) ya 2 leo gus we ‘, dss 9 lo ~ Mars uy ers Ad ter 
La 3 “ 

lic gue fy LG Ce Dg yy GLY Lyd ly y em b dear | dee Liew bh yy 

bole Al) he ithe 3 las Ee pdm 9,8 ylej od B daw y er) Pe Be Sno U 


O gra pee baad | 9 cals SETS pag G Nd» BO yg) dard Ole hh oh ae) 


py evel daar) Sgro doer JLo lp yle & VS ylej jp) ew l opae Sd 


9 % ‘ ZA : : om : 
tS atic ded pli Yo jty Km 5) de, OB) dats py lols O65) \, dali le’ | do 
Haas a 5) Ami Wile? dio pawl y adr pets Gey def Oey ery ley ol Uy esl 

fg ZA 
dents | OS pole Nam? wy 50) wage ly ty x08 am yb d> yl ie; 029 re geo Kine g 


oO») | a Oh rer 


“Tn the year 415 ( Hijera) Manmup determined to lead an army against Somnath, a city on 
the sea-shore, with a temple appertaining to the followers of BRAuMaA; the temple contained many 
idols, the principal of which was named Somnath. It is related in some histories that this idol 
was carried from the Kaaba, upon the coming of the Prophet, and transported to India. The 
Brahmanical records, however, refer it to the time of Krisnwna, or an antiquity of 4000 years. 
Krisuna, himself, is said to have disappeared at this place. 


«© When the Sultan arrived at Neherwaleh, (the capital of Guzerat) he found the city deserted, 
and carrying off such provisions as could be procured, he advanced to Somnath: the inhabitants of 


196 SKETCH OF THE 


destroyed by the early Mahommedanconquerors* Most, if not all of them, 


also are named in works, of which the date cannot be much later than the 


this place shut their gates against him, but it was soon carried by the irresistible valour of his 
troops, and a terrible slaughter of its defenders ensued. The temple was levelled with the ground : 
the idol Somnath, which was of stone, was broken to pieces, and in commemoration of the victory, 
a fragment was sent to Ghizni, where it was laid at the threshold of the principal mosque, and was 
there many years.” 


These statements shew that the idol was nothing more than a block of stone, of very moderate 
dimensions, like the common representation of the type of Siva. Fertsura, however, has converted 
it into something very different, or a colossal figure of the deity himself, and following Colonel 
Dow’s version of that compiler, the historian of British India gives the following highly coloured 
account of a transaction which never took place. “ Filled with indignation at sight of the gigantic 
idol, Maumup aimed a blow at its head, with his iron mace. ‘The nose was struck off from its 
face. In vehement trepidation, the Brahmans crowded round and offered millions to spare the 
god. The Omrahs, dazzled with the ransom, ventured to counsel acceptance. Maumup crying out 
that he valued the title of breaker not seller of idols, gave orders to proceed with the work of des- 
truction. At the next blow the éelly of the zdol burst open, and forth issued a vast treasure of 
diamonds, rubies and pearls, rewarding the holy perseverance of Maunmup, and explaining the 
devout liberality of the Brahmans!” (Vol. I. 491.) \ 


* The twelve Lingas are particularised in the Kedéra Kalpa, of the Nandi Upapurdana, 
where Siva is made to say—‘“ I am omnipresent, but I am especially in twelve forms and places.” 
These he enumerates, and they are as follow : 


1. Somanatha, in Saurashtra, i. e. Surat, in its most extensive sense, including part of Guze- 
rat, where, indeed, Patana Somnath, or the city of Somnath, is still situated. 


2. Mallikérjuna, or Sri Saila, described by Cotonet Mackenzie, the late Surveyor General. 
Asiatic Researches, Vol. 5th. 


3. Mahdkéla, in Ougein. This deity of stone was carried to Dehli, and broken there upon the 


eapture of Ougein, by ALtumsu. A. D. 1231,—Dow. According to the Tebkat Akberi, the shrine 
was then three hundred years old. 


4. Omkarais said to have been in Ujayin, but it is probably the shrine of MAHADEO, at Omkara 
Mandatta, on the Nurmadd. 


5. Amareswaraisalso placed in Ujayin: an ancient temple of Mawapeo, ona hill near (jayin, 
is noticed by Dr. Hunter, Asiatic Researches, Vol. 6th, but he does not give the name or form. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 197 


eighth or ninth century, and it is therefore, to be inferred, with as much 
certainty as any thing short of positive testimony can afford, that the worship 
of Siva, under this type, prevailed throughout India at least as early as the 
fifth or sixth century of the Christian era. Considered as one great branch 
of the universal public worship, its prevalence, no doubt, dates much 
earlier; but the particular modifications under which the several types re- 
ceived their local designations, and became entitled to special reverence, 


are not in every case of remote antiquity. 


One of the forms in which the Linga worship appears, is that of the 
Lingayets, Lingawants, or Jangamas, the essential characteristic of which 
is wearing the emblem on some part of the dress or person. The type is 
of asmall size, made of copper or silver, and is commonly worn suspended 
in a case round the neck, or sometimes tied in the turban. In common 
with the Saivas, generally, the Jangamassmear their foreheads with Vibhuti 


orashes, and wear necklaces, and carry rosaries, made of the Rudraksha seed. 


6. Vaidyandth, at Deogerh, in Bengal ; the temple is still in being, and is a celebrated place 
of pilgrimage. 


7. Ramésa, at Setubandha, the island of Ramisseram, between Ceylon and the continent ; 
this Lingam is fabled to have been setup by Rama. The temple is still in tolerable repair, and is 
one of the most magnificent in India. The gateway is one hundred feet high. It has been re- 
peatedly described, and is delineated in DANiEx’s Superb Plates of Indian Antiquities, from which 
it has been copied into Lancie’s Monuments de L’Hindoostan. 


8. Bhimasankara, in Dékini, which is, in all probability, the same with Bhiméswara, a Linga 
worshipped at Dracharam, in the Rdjyamahendri district, and there venerated as one of the principal 
twelve. 


10. Tryambaka, on the banks of the Gomati; whether the temple still exists I have no know- 
ledge. 


11. Gautamésa is another of the twelve, whose original site and present fate are uncertain. 
f 


12. Kedéresa, or Kedarandth, in the Himdlaya, has been repeatedly visited by late travellers. 
The deity is represented by a shapeless mass of rock. 


D iI 


198 SKETCH OF THE 


The clerical members of the sect usually stain their garments with red 
ochre. They are not numerous in Upper India, and are rarely encounter- 
ed, except as mendicants, leading about a bull, the living type of Nandi, 
the bull of Siva, decorated with housings of various colours, and strings of 
Cowri shells: the conductor carries a bell in his hand, and thus accom- 
panied goes about from place to place, subsisting upon alms. In the 
South of India, the Lingayets are very numerous, and the officiating priests 
of the Sativa shrines, are commonly of this sect,* when they bear the desig- 
nations of Arddhya and Pandaram.} The sect is also there known by the 
name of Vira Saiva. The following account of the restorer, if not the 
founder of the faith, as well as a specimen of the legends by which it is 


maintained, are derived from the Bdsava Purana. 


According to the followers of this faith, which prevails very extensively in the Dekhin, 
Baswa, Basava, Baswana, or Baswapa or Basavappa, different modes of writing his name, 
only restored this religion, and did not invent it. This person, it is said, was the son of 
Médiga Raya, a Brahman, and Madevi written also Madala arasu and Mahdmbd, inhabi- 
tants of Hinguleswar Parvati Agraharam, on the west of Sri Sacla, and both devout wor- 
shippers of Stva. In recompense of their piety, Nandz, the bull of Siva, was born on earth 
as their son, becoming incarnate by command of Siva, on his learning from NAreEpa, the 
decline of the Sazva faith, and prevalence of other less orthodox systems of religion. The 
child was denominated after the Baéswa or Basava, the bull of the deity. On his arriving 
at the age of investiture, he refused to assume the thread ordinarily worn by Brahmans, 
or to acknowledge any Guru, except Iswara or Stva. He then departed to the town of 
Kalydn, the capital of Bijala or Viyala Raya, and obtained in marriage Gangambd, the 
daughter of the Dandandyak, or minister of police. From thence he repaired to Sangamess 
wara, where he received from Sangameswara Swdmi, initiation in the tenets of the Vira Saiva 
faith. He was invited back from this place to succeed his father-in-law upon his decease, 


in the office he had held. 


* They also officiate in this capacity at the temple of Kedérndth, in Benares. 


+ This word seems to be properly Pdnduranga, (arsc¥:) pale complexioned, from their 
smearing themselves with ashes. It is so used in Hemachandra’s history of Mahdvira, when speaking 
of the Sativa Brahmans. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 199 


After his return to Kalydn, his sister, who was one of his first disciples, was delivered 
of a son, Chenna Basava, who is not unfrequently confounded with his uncle, and regarded, 


perhaps more correctly, as the founder of the sect. 


After recording these events, the work enumerates various marvellous actions, per- 
formed by Bésava and several of his disciples, such as converting grains of corn to pearls 
—discovering hidden treasures—feeding multitudes—healing the sick, and restoring the 


dead to life. The following are some of the anecdotes narrated in the Purdna. 


Basava having made himself remarkable for the profuse bounties he bestowed upon the 
Jangamas, helping himself from the Royal Treasury for that purpose, the other ministers 
reported his conduct to Byala, who called upon him to account for the money in his 
charge. Bdasava smiled, and giving the keys of the Treasury to the king, requested him to 
examine it, which being done, the amount was found wholly undiminished. Bijala thereupon 


caused it to be proclaimed, that whoever calumniated Bédsava, should have his tongue cut out. 


A Jangama, who cohabited with a dancing girl, sent a slave for his allowance of rice to 
the house of Bdsava, where the messenger saw the wife of the latter, and on his return re- 
ported to the dancing girl the magnificence of her attire. The mistress of the Jangama was 
filled with a longing for a similar dress, and the Jangama having no other means of grati- 
fying her, repaired to Basava, to beg of him his wife’s garment. Bésava immediately 
stripped Gangdambd, his wife, and other dresses springing from her body, he gave them all 


to the Jangama. 


A person of the name of Kanapa, who regularly worshipped the image of EkAmMREs- 
WARA, imagining the eyes of the deity were affected, plucked out his own, and placed them 


in the sockets of the figure. Siva, pleased with his devotion, restored his worshipper his eyes. 


A devout Saiva named Mahadevala Machdéya, who engaged to wash for all the Jan- 
gamas, having killed a child, the Raja ordered Bésava to have him secured and punished ; 
but Basava declined undertaking the duty, as it would be unavailing to offer any harm to 


o, sent his servants to seize and tie him to the 


the worshippers of S1va. Bijala persisting, 


legs of an elephant, but Machéya caught the elephant by the trunk, and dashed him and 


his attendants to pieces. He then proceeded to attack the Raja, who being alarmed, appli- 


200 SKETCH OF THE 


ed to Basava, and by his advice, humbled himself before the offended Jangama. Badsava 
also deprecated his wrath, and Machdya being appeased, forgave the king, and restored the 


elephant and the guards to life. 


A poor Jangam having solicited alms of Kinnaréya, one of Basava’s chief disciples, the 
latter touched the stones about them with his staff, and converting them into gold, told the 


Jangam to help himself. 


The work is also in many places addressed to the Jainas, in the shape of a dialogue 
between some of the Jangama saints and the members of that faith, in which the former 
narrate to the latter instances of the superiority of the Sazva religion, and the falsehood of 
the Jain faith, which appears to have been that of Biyala Raya, and the great part of the 
population of Kalyéna. In order to convert them Ekénta Ramdya, one of Basava’s disci- 
ples, cut off his head in their presence, and then marched five days in solemn procession, 
through and round the city, and on the fifth day replaced his head upon his shoulders. 
The Jain Pagodas were thereupon, it is said, destroyed by the Jangamas. It does not 
appear, however, that the king was made a convert, or that he approved of the principles 
and conduct of his minister. He seems, on the contrary, to have incurred his death by 
attempting to repress the extension of the Vira Sativa belief. Different authorities, al- 
though they disagree as to the manner in which Biala was destroyed, concur in stating the 


fact: the following account of the transaction is from the present work. 


“In the city of Kalyéna were two devout worshippers of Siva, named Allaya and 
Madhuvaya. They fixed their faith firmly on the divinity they adored, and assiduously 
reverenced their spiritual preceptor, attending upon Bésava whithersoever he went. The 
king, Bijala, well knew their merits, but closed his eyes to their superiority, and listening 
to the calumnious accusations of their enemies, commanded the eyes of Allaya and Madhu- 
vaya to be plucked out. The disciples of Bésava, as well as himself, were highly indignant 
at the cruel treatment of these holy men, and leaving to Jagaddeva the task of putting Byala 
to death, and denouncing imprecations upon the city, they departed from Kalyana— Basava 


fixed his residence at Sangameswara. 


Machéya, Bommidevaya, Kinnara, Kannatha, Bommadeva, Kakaya, Masanaya, Kola- 


tila Bommadeva, Kesirajaya, Mathirajaya, and others, announced to the people, that the 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 201 


fortunes of Biyala had passed away, as indicated by portentous signs ; and accordingly the 
crows crowed in the night, jackalls howled by day; the sun was eclipsed, storms of wind 
and rain came on, the earth shook, and darkness overspread the heavens. The inhabi- 


tants of Kalyéna were filled with terror. 


When Jagaddeva repaired home, his mother met him, and told him that when any 
injury had been done to a disciple of the Sazva faith, his fellow should avenge him or die. 
When Daksha treated Siva with contumely, Parvati threw herself into the flames, and so, 
under the wrong offered to the saints, he should not sit down contented: thus saying, she 
gave him food at the door of his mansion. Thither also came Mallaya and Bommaya, two 
others of the saints, and they partook of Jagaddeva’s meal. ‘Then smearing their bodies 
with holy ashes, they took up the spear, and sword, and shield, and marched together 
against Bijala. On their way a bull appeared, whom they knew to be a form of Basava 
come to their aid, and the bull went first, even to the court of the king, goring any one 
that came in their way, and opening a clear path for them. ‘Thus they reached the court, 
and put Bzjala to death in the midst of all his courtiers, and then they danced, and pro- 
claimed the cause why they had put the king to death. Jugaddeva on his way back, recall- 
ing the words of his mother, stabbed himself. Then arose dissension in the city, and the 
people fought amongst themselves, and horses with horses, and elephants with elephants, 
until, agreeably to the curse denounced upon it by Basava and his disciples, Kalyana was 


utterly destroyed. 


Basava continued to reside at Sangameswara, conversing with his disciples, and com- 
muning with the divine Essence, and he expostulated with Siva, saying * By thy command 
have I, and thy attendant train, come upon earth, and thou hast promised to recall us to thy 
presence when our task was accomplished.” Then Srva and PArvarf came forth from the 
Sangameswara Lingam, and were visible to Baésava, who fell on the ground before them. 
They raised him, and led him to the sanctuary, and all three disappeared in the presence 
of the disciples, and they praised their master, and flowers fell from the sky, and then the 
disciples spread themselves abroad, and made known the absorption of Bdsava into the 


emblem of Stva.”—Machenzie Collection, Vol. 2nd. Halakanara MSS. 


E ] 


902 SKETCH OF THE 


The date of the events here recorded is not particularised, but from 
various authorities, they may be placed with confidence in the early 


part of the eleventh century*. 


The Mackenzie Collection, from which the above is taken, contains 
a number of works} of a similar description, in the ancient Kanara dialect. 
There are also several works of the same nature in Telugu, as the Basaves- 
wara Purana, Panditdradhya Cheritra, and others. Although the lan- 
guage of these compositions may now have become obscure or obsolete, it 
is not invariably so, and at any rate was once familiar. This circumstance, 
and the marvellous character of the legends they relate, specimens of which 
have been given in the above account of the founder of the sect, adapted 
them to the comprehension and taste of the people at large, and no doubt 
therefore exercised a proportionate influence. Accordingly, Wiwks, 
Bucnanan, and Dusotis, represent the Lingawants as very numerous in 
the Dekhin, especially in Mysore, or those countries constituting ancient 
Kanara, and they are also common in Telingana. In Upper India there 
are no popular works current, and the only authority is a learned 
Bhashya, or Comment, by NinKkantua, on the Séitras of Vydsa, a work not 


often met with, and, being in Sanscrit, unintelligible to the multitude. { 


* Colonel Wixxs gives the same date, (Mysore 1, 506,) but terms the founder Chen Bas 
Ishwar, intending clearly Chenna, (little) Bdsava, the nephew of Bdsava, or Basaveswara. 
BucHanan has the name Béswana, (Mysore 1, 240,) but agrees nearly in the date, placing him 


about seven hundred years ago. 


+ As the Bdswana Purana, Chenna Bésava Puréna, Prabhulinga Lilé, Saran Lilém- 
rita, Viraktaru Kévyam, and others, containing legends of a vast number of Jangama Saints and 
Teachers.— Mackenzie Collection, vol, 2. 


+ Besides the Jangama priests of Keddrnath, an opulent establishment of them exists at 
Benares; its wealth arises from a number of houses, occupying a considerable space, called the 
Jangam Pari: the title to the property is said to be a grant to the Jangamas, regularly executed 
by Man Sinu, and preserved on a copper plate: the story with which the vulgar are deluded is, 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 203 


PARAMAHANSA. 


According to the introduction to the Dwddasa Mahéivakya, by a Dandi 
author, VarkunTHA Puri, the Sanydsi is of four kinds, the Kutichara, Bahu- 
daka, Hansa, and Paramahansa: the difference between whom, however, 
is only the graduated intensity of their self-mortification and profound 
abstraction. The Paramahansa* is the most eminent of these gradations, 
and is the ascetic who is solely occupied with the investigation of Bran- 
MA, or spirit, and who is equally indifferent to pleasure or pain, insensible 


of heat or cold, and incapable of satiety or want. 


Agreeably to this definition, individuals are sometimes met with who 
pretend to have attained such a degree of perfection: in proof of it they go 
naked in all weathers, never speak, and never indicate any natural want : 
what is brought to them as alms or food, by any person, is received by 
the attendants, whom their supposed sanctity, or a confederation of inter- 
est attaches to them, and by these attendants they are fed and served on 


all occasions, as if they were as helpless as infants. It may be supposed 


that it was granted by one of the Emperors of Hindustan, in consequence of a miracle performed by 
a Jangama devotee. In proof of the veracity of his doctrine, he proposed to fly: the Emperor 
promised to give him as much ground as he could traverse in that manner: not quite satisfied of 
the impossibility of the feat, he had a check string tied to the ascetic’s legs, and held by one of the 
attendants: the Jangama mounted, and when he reached the limits of the present Jangama Bari, 
the Emperor thinking that extent of ground sufficiently liberal, had him constrained to fly back 
again. 


* Moor, in his Hindu Pantheon, (page 352) asserts, upon, as he says, authentic information, 


that the Paramahansas eat human flesh, and that individuals of this sect are not very unusually seen 


about Benares, floating down the river, and feeding upon a corpse: it is scarcely necessary to add 
that he is wholly wrong: the passage he cites from the Researches is quite correct, when it describes 
the Paramanhansa as an ascetic of the orthodox sects, in the last stage of exaltation; and the 
practice he describes, although far from usual, is sometimes heard of as a filthy exhibition, dis- 
played for profit by individuals of a very different sect, those who occupy the ensuing portion of 
the present text—the Aghoris. 


204 SKETCH OF THE 


that, not unfrequently, there is much knavery in this helplessness, but 
there are many Hindus whose simple enthusiasm induces them honestly 
to practice such self-denial, and there is little risk in the attempt, as the 
credulity of their countrymen, or rather countrywomen, will, in most places, 
take care that their wants are amply supplied: these devotees are usually 
included amongst the Saiva ascetics ; but it may be doubted whether the 


classification is correct. 


AGHORIS. 


The pretended insensibility of the Paramahansa being of a passive 
nature, is, at least, inoffensive, and even where it is mere pretence, the 
retired nature of the practice renders the deception little conspicuous or 
revolting. The same profession of worldly indifference characterises the 
Aghori, or Aghorapanthi; but he seeks occasions for its display, and de- 
mands alms as a reward for its exhibition. 


The original Aghort worship seems to have been that of Devi in 
some of her terrific forms, and to have required even human victims for 
its performance.* In imitation of the formidable aspect under which the 
goddess was worshipped, the appearance of her votary was rendered 
as hideous as possible, and his wand and water-pot were a staff set with 
bones and the upper half of a skull: the practices were of a similar 
nature, and flesh and spirituous liquors constituted, at will, the diet of 
the adept. | 


* It may be credulity or calumny, but the Phils, and other hill tribes, are constantly accused 
by Sanscrit writers of the eleventh and twelfth centuries, as addicted to this sanguinary worship. 
The Vrihat Katha is full of stories to this effect, the scene of which is chiefly inthe Vindhyé 
range. Its covert existence in cities is inferable from the very dramatic situation in Bhavabhuti's 
Drama, Mélati and Médhava, where Mddhava rescues his mistress from the Aghora Ghanta, who 
is about to sacrifice Mdlati at the shrine of Chamundd. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 205 


The regular worship of this sect has long since been suppressed, and 
the only traces of it now left are presented by a few disgusting wretches, 
who, whilst they profess to have adopted its tenets, make them a mere 
plea for extorting alms. In proof of their indifference to worldly ob- 
jects, they eat and drink whatever is given to them, even ordure and 
carrion. They smear their bodies also with excrement, and carry it 
about with them in a wooden cup, or skull, either to swallow it, if by so 
doing they can get a few pice; or to throw it upon the persons, or into 
the houses of those who refuse to comply with their demands. They 
also, for the same purpose, inflict gashes on their limbs, that the crime of 
blood may rest upon the head of the recusant ; and they have a variety of 
similar disgusting devices to extort money from the timid and. credulous 
Hindu. They are, fortunately, not numerous, and are universally detested 
and feared. 


URDDHABAHUS, AKAS MUKHIS, AND NAKHIS. 


Personal privation and torture being of great efficacy in the creed of 
the Hindus, various individuals, some influenced by credulity, and some 
by knavery, have adopted modes of distorting their limbs, and forcing 
them out of their natural position, until they can no longer resume their 


ordinary direction. 


The Urddhabéhus* extend one or both arms above their heads, till 
they remain of themselves thus elevated. They also close the fist, and 
the nails being necessarily suffered to grow, make their way between the 
metacarpal bones, and completely perforate the hand. The Urddhabahus 


are solitary mendicants, as are all of this description, and never have any 


* Orddha, above, and Bahu, the arm. 


rl 


206 SKETCH OF THE 


eo] 


fixed abode: they subsist upon alms; many of them go naked, but some 
wear a wrapper stained with ochre; they usually assume the Sava marks, 
and twist their hair so as to project from the forehead, in imitation of the 


Jaia of Siva. 


The Akdsmukhis* hold up their faces to the sky, till the muscles of the 
back of the neck become contracted, and retain it in that position: they 
wear the Ja/d, and allow the beard and whiskers to grow, smearing the 


body with ashes: some wear coloured garments: they subsist upon alms. 


The Nakhis are of a similar description with the two preceding, but 
their personal characteristic is of a less extravagant nature, being con- 
fined to the length of their finger nails, which they never cut: they also 


live by begging, and wear the Saiva marks. 
GUDARAS. 


The Gudaras are so named froma pan of metal which they carry. 
about with them, and in which they have a small fire, for the purpose of 
burning scented woods at the houses of the persons from whom they re- 
ceive alms. These alms they do not solicit further than by repeating 
the word Alakh,{} expressive of the indescribable nature of the deity. 
They have a peculiar garb, wearing a large round cap, and a long frock or 
coat, stained with ochery clay. Some also wear ear-rings, like the Kan- 
phata Jogis, or a cylinder of wood passed through the lobe of the ear, 
which they term the Khechart Mudra, the seal or symbol of the deity, of 


him who moves in the heavens. 


* Akas, the sky, and Mukha, the face. 


+ A, the negative prefix, and Lakshma, a mark, a distinction. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 207 


RUKHARAS, SUKHARAS, AND UKHARAS. 


The Stikharas are Sativa mendicants, distinguished by carrying a 
stick three spans in length: they dress in a cap and sort of petticoat 
stained with ochery earth, smear their bodies with ashes, and wear ear- 
rings of the Rudréksha seed. They also wear over the left shoulder a 


narrow piece of cloth dyed with ochre, and twisted, in place of the Zenar. 


The Rekharas are of similar habits and appearance, but they do not 
carry the stick, nor wear the Rudraksha ear-rings, but in their place 
metallic ones: these two classes agree with the preceding in the watch- 
word, exclaiming Alakh, as they pass along; the term is, however, used 


by other classes of mendicants. 


The Ukharas are said to be members of either of the preceding 
classes, who drink spirituous liquors, and eat meat: they appear to be 
the refuse of the three preceding mendicant classes, who, in general, are 


said to be of mild and inoffensive manners. 
KARA LINGIS. 


These are vagabonds of little credit, except sometimes amongst the 
most ignorant portions of the community: they are not often met with: 
they go naked, and to mark their triumph over sensual desires, affix an 


iron ring and chain on the male organ :* they are professedly worshippers 
of Siva. 


* These ascetics were the persons who attracted the notice of the earlier travellers, espe- 
cially Bernier and Tavernier. They were more numerous then, probably, than they are at present, 
and this appears to be the case with most of the mendicants who practised on the superstitious 
admiration of the vulgar. 


208 SKETCH OF THE 


SANYASIS, BRAHMACHARIS, AND AVADHUTAS. 


Although the terms Sanydst and Vairagi are, in a great measure, 
restricted amongst the Vaishnavas to peculiar classes, the same limit can 
scarcely be adopted with regard to the Saivas. All the sects, except the 
Sanyogt Alits, are so far Sanydst, or excluded from the world, as not to 
admit of married teachers, a circumstance far from uncommon, as we 
have seen amongst the more refined followers of Visunv. Most of the Saiva 


sects, indeed, are of a very inferior description to those of the Vaishnavas. 


Besides the individuals who adopt the Dania Grahana, and are un- 
connected with the Dasndmis, there is a set of devotees who remain, 
through life, members of the condition of the Bramachéri, or student :* 
_ these are also regarded as Sanydsis, and where the term is used in a definite 
‘sense, these twelve kinds, the Dandis, Brahmacharis, and ten Dasname 
orders areimplied. In general, however, the term, as well as Avadhita, or 
Avdhauta, and Alakhnadmi, express all the Satva classes of mendicants, 
except, perhaps, the Jogzs. 


NAGAS, 


The Sava Sanyasts who go naked, are distinguished by this term. 
They smear their bodies with ashes, allow their hair, beards, and whiskers 
to grow, and wear the projecting braid of hair, called the Jaté; like the 
Vawagt Nagas, they carry arms, and wander about in troops, soliciting 


alms, or levying contributions. The Saiva Ndgas are chiefly the refuse 


* The Dirghakala Brahmacharyam, or protracted period of studentship is, however, amongst 


the acts enumerated in various authorities of indisputable character, as those which are prohibited 
in the Kali age. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 209 


of the Dandi and: Aiié orders, or men who have no inclination for a life 
of study or business: when weary of the vagrant and violent habits of 
the Naga, they re-enter the better disposed classes, which they had first 
quitted. The Saiva Nagas are very numerous in many parts of India, 
though less so in the Company’s provinces than in any other: they were 
formerly in great numbers in Bundelkand,* and Himmer Banapar 
was a pupil of one of their Mahants, Risenpra Gir, one of the 
lapsed Dasnimi ascetics. These Nagas are the particular opponents of 
the Vairagi Nagas, and were, no doubt, the leading actors in the bloody 
fray at Haridwar,} which had excluded the Vaishnavas from the great 
fair there, from 1760, till the British acquired the country. The leader 
of the Saiva party was called Duokat Gir, and he, as well as the spiritual 
guide of Himmer Banapar, was, consequently, of the Dasndmi order, which 
would thus seem to be addicted to violent and war-like habits. With res- 
pect to the sanguinary affray at Haridwar, in which we are told eighteen 
thousand Bairdgis were left dead on the field, there is a different legend. 
current of the origin of the conflict, from that given in the Researches, 
but neither of them is satisfactory, nor indeed is any particular cause 


necessary, as the opposite objects of worship, and the pride of strength and 


* A party of them attacked Colonel GoppArv'’s troops in their march between Dorawal and 
Herapur, the assailants were no more than four or five hundred, but about two thousand hovered. 
about the rear of the army; they are called Pandarums in the narrative, but were evidently Sativa 
Négas. Pennant’s Hindustan, 2, 192. The Vindicator of the Hindus, speaking of them, observes, 
that they often engage in the rival contests of the Indian Chiefs, and, on a critical occasion some 
years ago, six thousand of them joined the forces of the Mahratta Chief Srnprau, and enabled him, 
with an equal number of his own troops, to discomfit an army of thirty thousand men, headed by 
one of his rebellious subjects. 


+ A. R. 11. 455. It may be observed, that a very accurate account is given in the same place 
of the general appearance and habits of the Saiva Sanydsis and Jogis, the Vaishnava Vairdgis, and 
Udasis of Nanckshah. The term Gosain, as correlative to Sanyasi, is agreeable to common usage, 
but, as has been elsewhere observed, is more strictly applicable to very different characters. 


G 1 


210 SKETCH OF THE 


numbers, and consequent struggle for pre-eminence, are quite sufficient » 


to account for the dispute.* 
SAKTAS. 


The worshippers of the Saxri, the power or energy of the divine 
nature in action, are exceedingly numerous amongst all classes of Hindus.+ 
This active energy is, agreeably to the spirit of the mythological system, 
personified, and the form with which it is invested considered as the 
especial object of veneration, depends upon the bias entertained by the 
individuals towards the adoration of Visunu or Siva. In the formercase, 
the personified Sakti is termed Laxsumi, or Maui Laxsumi, and in the 
latter, Parvati, Buavant, or DurGs, Even Saraswati enjoys some por- 
tion of homage, much more than her lord, Braum4, whilst a vast variety 


of inferior beings of malevolent character, and formidable aspect, receive 


—— 


* The irregular practices of these and other mendicants, have attracted the lash of Kasir, in 
the following Remaini: 
REMAINI 69. 


Sot Hit a Sal UTE | 
aa fae fa AMATE, Ke. 


“Tnever beheld such a Jogi, oh brother! forgetting his doctrine, he roves about in negli- 
gence. He follows, professedly, the faith of ManApeva, and calls himself an eminent teacher ; the 
scene of his abstraction is the fair or market. MAvyA is the mistress of the false saint. When did 
Darratreya demolish a dwelling ; when did S6KADEVA Collect an armed host; when did NARADA 
mount a matchlock; when did VyAsapEva blow a trumpet. In making war, the creed is violated. 
Is he an Adit, who is armed with a quiver? Is he a Virakéa, who is filled with covetousness? His 
garb is put to shame by his gold ornaments; he has assembled horses and mares; is possessed of 
villages; is called aman of wealth; a beautiful woman was not amongst the embellishments of 
Sanaka, and his brethren ; he who carries with him a vessel of ink, cannot avoid soiling his raiment. 


+ It has been computed, that of the Hindus of Bengal, at least three-fourths are of this sect : 
of the remaining fourth, three parts are Vaishnavas, and one Saivas, &c. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 211 


the worship of the multitude. The bride of Siva, however, in one or other 
of her many and varied forms, is by far the most popular emblem in 


Bengal, and along the Ganges. 


The worship of the female principle, as distinct from the divinity, 
appears to have originated in the literal interpretation of the metaphori- 
cal language of the Vedas, in which the will or purpose to create the uni 
verse, is represented as originating from the creator, and co-existent with 
him as his bride, and part of himself. Thus in the Rig Veda, it is said 
“ That divine spirit breathed without afflation single, with (Swadha) her 
who is sustained within him; other than him nothing existed. First de- 
sire was formed in his mind, and that became the original productive 
seed,* and the Sama Veda, speaking of the divine cause of creation, says, 
“ He felt not delight, being alone. He wished another, and instantly 
became such. He caused his ownself to fall in twain, and thus became 
husband and wife. He approached her, and thus were human beings 
produced.”| In these passages it is not unlikely that reference is made 
to the primitive tradition of the origin of mankind, but there is also a 
figurative representation of the first indication of wish or will in the 
Supreme Being. Being devoid of all qualities whatever, he was alone, 
until he permitted the wish to be multiplied, to be generated within him- 
self. This wish being put into action, it is said, became united with its 
parent, and then created beings were produced. Thus this first manifes- 
tation of divine power is termed Ichchhdripad, personified desire, and 


the creator is designated as Swechchamaya,} united with his own will, 


SS eel 


* Asiatic Researches, VIII. 393. 
+ Asiatic Researches, VIII. 426. 


$ Thus, in the Brahma Vaivertte Puréna, which has a whole section dedicated to the mani- 
festations of the female principle, or a Prakriti Khanda. 


912 a SKETCH OF THE 


whilst in the Vedanta philosophy, and the popular sects, such as that of 
Kasir, and others, in which all created things are held to be illusory, the 
Sakti, or active will of the deity, is always designated and spoken of as 


Maya or Mahamay4, original deceit or illusion.* 


Another set of notions of some antiquity which contributed to form 
the character of the Sakti, whether general or particular, were derived from 
the Sénkhya philosophy. In this system, nature, Prakriti, or Mila Prakri- 
tt, is defined to be of eternal existence and independant origin, distinct 
from the supreme spirit, productive though no production, and the plastic 


origin of all things, including even the gods. Hence Prakriti has come 


to be regarded as the mother of gods and men, whilst as one with matter, 


the source of error, it is again identified with Mdyd, or delusion, and as 
co-existent with the supreme as his Sakti, his personified energy, or his 
bride.t 


ud wu fugnale a Uae | 

fefara quer aie wales cate I 
HAY AAA Ver CRAG TSlAaAy 
AVA ALAA eeaqgraa: TH: | 


The Lord was alone invested with the Supreme form, and belield the whole world, with the sky 
and regions of space, a void. Having contemplated all things in his mind, he, without any assistant, 
began with the will, to create all things. He, the Lord, endowed with the wish for creation. 


* §o also in the authority last quoted. 
AT AVTAEA Aratiragr Aaa | 

She (Prakriti,) one with, Brahma, is Mayd, eternal, everlasting ; and in the Kalika Purdna 
afaat vata a at ra aateta 

Prakriti is termed Inherent Mayé, because she beguiles all beings. 

t+ Inthe Gita, Prakriti is identified with all the elementary predicates of matter. 
afactenangy Gaara tay| 
WAT Kala AsaraaAtacs ae lt 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 213 


These mythological fancies have been principally disseminated by 
the Puranas, in all which Prakriti, or Mayd, bears a prominent part. The 
ageregate of the whole is given in the Brahma Vaivartta Purdna, one 
section of which, the Prakriti Khanda, is devoted to the subject, and in 
which the legends relating to the principal modifications of the female 


principle are narrated. 


According to this authority, Brauma, or the supreme being, having 
determined to create the universe by his super-human power, became two- 
fold, the right half becoming a male, the left half a female, which was 
Prakriti. She was of one nature with Branma. She was illusion, eternal 
and without end: as is the soul, so is its active energy ; as the faculty of 
burning is in fire.* In another passage it is said, that Krisuna, who is 


in this work identified with the Supreme, being alone invested with the 


This, my Prakriti, is inherently eight-fold, or earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intellect, indivi- 
duality.” 


So also the Kéirma Purdna (Chapter 12). 


aw Fa ata: Kiana fa Fara 
Aes AMAR ATATat TARA ATA: | 
= 
amarante: Taal TATA | 
frye atuy Baar VATA II 
His Energy, being the universal form of all the world, is called Méyd, for so does the Lord the 


best of males and endowed will illusion cause it to revolve. That Sakti, of which the essence is 
illusion, is omniform and eternal, and constantly displays the universal shape of Mahésa. 


* Sritavant efe feat feat vase: 
Tay <PaAaalHt atataT Tala: Wat | 


He, by the power of Yoca, became himself in the act of creation two-fold, the right half was 
the male, the left was called Prakriti, 


H 1 


214 SKETCH OF THE 


divine nature, beheld all one universal blank, and contemplating creation 
with his mental vision, he began to create all things by his own will, being 
united with his will, which became manifest as Miia Praxkriti.* The 
original Praxriti first assumed tive forms {—Durai the bride, Sakéi, and 
May4d, of Siva, Laxsumnf the bride, Sakti and Maya of Visunv, Saraswatt 
the same of Brana, or in the Brahma Vaivartta Purdna, of Hart, 
whilst the next, SAvirri is the bride of Braumaé. The fifth division of 
the original Prakriti, was RApui, the favourite of the youthful Krisuna, 


and unquestionably a modern intruder into the Hindu Pantheon. 


Besides these more important manifestations of the female principle, 
the whole body of goddesses and nymphs of every order, are said to have 
sprung from the same source, and indeed every creature, whether human 
or brutal, of the female sex, is referred to the same principle, whilst the 
origin of males is ascribed to the primitive Purusha, or male. In every 
creation of the universe, it is said the M6uia Praxriri assumes the differ- 


ent gradations of Ansaripini, Kaldrupini, and Kaldénsartipini, { or mani- 


* Caw Vay atawafaeaat | 
alfasuraTal aaa factast tl 


From the wish which was the creative impulse of S7i Krishna, endowed with his will, she, 
Mila Prakriti, the Supreme, became manifest. 


| qataat vataut afe awmfaaaa: | 


And she (the Mala Prakriti,) became in the act of creation five-fold by the will of the Supreme. 


{ SWSU AATEUI RAW TAA | 
aaa: sfafqay cay feqatiaa tt 


In every creation of the universe the Devi, through divine Yoga, assumes different forms, and 
becomes Ansaripé, Kaléripd, and Kaldnsaripa, or Ansdnsaripa. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 215 


fests herself in portions, parts, and portions of parts, and further sub- 
divisions. The chief Ansas are, besides the five already enumerated, 
Ganochk, Tuuasi, Manasd, Sasutui, or Dievasenk, ManoaLAcHANDIKA, 
and Kf; the principal Kalds are Swiui, Swapui, Daxsuini, 
Swastt, Pusutr, Tusnti, and others, most of which are allegorical 
personifications, as Dhritli, Fortitude, Pratishthé, Fame, and Adharma, 
Wickedness, the bride of Mrityu, or Death. Aviri, the mother of the 
Gods, and Dirt, the mother of the Demons, are also Kalds of Prakrirtt. 
The list includes all the secondary goddesses. The Kaldnsas and 
Ansdnsas, or sub-divisions of the more important manifestations, are 
all womankind, who are distinguished as good, middling, or bad, ac- 
cording as they derive their being, from the parts of their great ori- 
ginal in which the Satya, Rajas, and Tama Guna, or property of 
goodness, passion, and vice predominates. At the same time as 
manifestations of the great cause of all they are entitled to res- 
pect, and even to veneration: whoever, says the Brahma Vaivartta 
Purdna, offends or insults a female, incurs the wrath of PRraxrirt, 
whilst he who propitiates a female, particularly the youthful daugh- 
ter of a Brahman, with clothes, ornaments and perfumes, offers wor- 
ship to Praxriti herself... It is in the spirit of this last doctrine 
that one of the principal rites of the Séktas, is the actual worship 
of the daughter or wife of a Brahman, and leads with one branch 
of the sect at least to the introduction of gross impurities. But be- 
sides this derivation of Prakriti, or SAKtr, from the Supreme, and 
the secondary origin of all female nature from her, those who adopt 
her as their especial divinity, employ the language invariably addressed 
towards the preferential object of worship in every sect, and contem- 
plate her as comprising all existence in her essence. Thus she is not 
only declared to be one with the male deity, of whose energy some 


one of her manifestations is the type, as Devi with Siva, and Lax- 


216 - SKETCH OF THE 


( 


sHMI with VisHonu; but it is said, that she is equally in all things, and 


that all things are in her, and that besides her, there is nothing.* 


Although the adoration of Prakriti or Sakti is, to a certain extent, 
authorised by the Purdnas, particularly the Brahma Vaivartia, the Skanda, 
and the K4élikd, yet the principal rites and formule are derived from an 
independant series of works, known by the collective term of Yantras. 
These are infinitely numerous, and in some instances of great extent ; 
they always assume the form of a dialogue between Siva and his bride, in 
one of her many forms, but mostly as UmA and PArvatt, in which the 
goddess questions the god as to the mode of performing various ceremo- 
nies, and the prayers and incantations to be used in them. These he 
explains at length, and under solemn cautions that they involve a great 


mystery, on no account whatever to be divulged to the profane. 


The followers of the Qantras profess to consider them as a fifth 


Veda, and attribute to them equal antiquity, and superior authority.} The 


* Thus in the Adst Khanda— 


aaaAaAa Zips at call \ 
aaa WaIA MATT UN 
aT calcd afaaa’ antaa | 
aqERA as aa aa Tout 
qa asia fateanctataa 
Thou art predicated in every prayer —Brahma and the rest are all born from thee. Thou art 
one with the four objects of life, and from thee they come to fruit. From thee this whole universe 


proceeds, and in thee, asylum of the world, all is, whether visible or invisible, gross or subtle in its 
nature : what is, thou art in the Saké form, and except thee nothing has ever been. 


+ Thus, in the Siva Tantra, Siva is made to say— 


HAVAAGHT SUA ATE | 
qa ufaaeta afqugracaea uN 
DAI, vee ara vathiar t 
AAA THA: AWS Alar AAAT Ul 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 917 


observances they prescribe have, indeed, in Bengal, almost superceded the 
original ritual. The question of their date is involved in considerable 
obscurity. From the practices described in some of the Purdnas, parti- 
cularly that of the Diksha or rite of initiation, in the Agni Purana, from 
the specification of formule, comprising the mystical monosyllables of 
the Yantras in that and other similar compilations, and from the citation 
of some of them by name in different Paurdnic works,* we must conclude 
that some of the Tantras are prior to those authorities. But the date of 
the Puranas themselves is far from determined, and whilst some parts of 
them may be of considerable antiquity, other portions of most, if not of 
all, are undoubtedly subsequent to the tenth century of the Christian era. 
It is not unlikely, however, that several of the Tantras are of earlier com- 
position, especially as we find the system they inculcate, included by 
ANANDAGIRI, in his life of SankarAcHArya, amongst the heterodoxies 
which that Legislator succeeded in confuting. On the other hand, there 


appears no indication of Vantrika notions in the Mahdbhérat, and the 


“« The five Scriptures issued from my five mouths, and were the east, west, south, north, and 
upper. ‘These five are known as the paths to final liberation. There are many Scriptures, but none 
are equal to the Upper Scripture.” Kullika Bhatta, commenting on the first verse of the second 
chapter of Menu, says, the Sruéi is two-fold— Vaidika and Tanirika ; 


ataa fatrat afeat ataat a 


* Asin the Kirma Purdna, the Kapdla, Bhairava, Vima and Yémala, and the Panchardtra 
in the Vardha : we have also a number mentioned in the Sankara Vijayas, of both Anandagirt and 
Médhava, as the Siva Gité, Siva Sanhité, Ridra Vémala, and Siva Rahasya. It is also said in 
Anandagiri’s work, that the Brahmanas were cursed by Géyatri, to become Tantrikas in the 
Kali age. 


aera anidtary MPARTATT AAT! 
ae ae aaeas fafa ASL Ut 


“ She being angry said to them, in the Kali age, after abandoning the Veda ritual, become 
followers of the Zéntrika observances. 


11 


218 SKETCH OF THE 


) 


name of Tantra, in the sense of areligious text book, does not occur in 
the vocabulary of Amera Sinua. It may therefore be inferred, that the 
system originated at some period in the early centuries of Christianity, 
being founded on the previous worship of the female principle, and the 
practices of the Yoga with the Mantras, or mystical formule of the Vedas. 
It is equally certain that the observances of the Tantras have been car- 
ried to more exceptionable extremes in comparatively modern times, and 
that many of the works themselves are of recent composition. They ap- 
pear also to have been written chiefly in Bengal and the Eastern districts, 
many of them being unknown in the West and South of India, and the 
rites they teach having there failed to set aside the ceremonies of the 
Vedas, although they are not without an important influence upon the 


belief and the practices of the people. 


The Tantras are too numerous to admit in this place of their spe- 
cification, but the principal are the Syama Rahasya, Ridra Yéamala, 
Mantra Mahodadhi, Sareda Tileka, and Kalika Tantra, whilst the Kula- 
churamani, Kuldrnava, and similar works, are the chief authorities of one 
portion of the Séktas, the sect being divided into two leading branches, 
the Dakshinécharis and Vamdacharis, or followers of the right hand and 
left hand ritual. 


DAKSHINAS, OR BHAKTAS. 


When the worship of any goddess is performed in a public manner, 
and agreeably to the Vaidik or Paurdntk ritual,* it does not comprehend 


* The peculiarities of this sect are described in the Dakshindchara Tantra Raja, a modern 
summary of the system by Kasindth : according to this authority— 


AUIS Wala AAAI sieaT| 


The ritual declared in the Yantras of the Dakshinéchéras, is pure, and conformable to the 
Vedas.” 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 919 


the impure practices which are attributed toa different division of the 
adorers of Sakti, and which are particularly prescribed to the followers 
of this system. In this form it is termed the Dakshina, or right hand 
form of worship.* The only observance that can be supposed -to form 
an exception to the general character of this mode is the Bali, an offer- 
ing of blood, in which rite a number of helpless animals, usually kids, are 
annually decapitated. In some cases, life is offered without shedding 
blood, when the more barbarous practice is adopted of pummelling with 
the fists the poor animal to death: at other times, blood only is offered 
without injury to life. These practices, however, are not considered as 
orthodox, and approach rather to the ritual of the Vdmdcharis,{} the 


more pure Balt, consisting of edible grain, with milk and sugar. Animal 


* STHITAL Acad a WaT: faa | 
aaa ATTA Sra ' faasaa UI 
aay AAW A ai HATA | 
Kad area ae a AU RATA tl 


The Vama ritual, although declared by me, was intended for Svdras only. A Brahman, from 
receiving spirituous liquor, forfeits his Brahmanical character—let it not be done—let it not ever 
be done. Goddess, it is brutality, never let it be practised. 


t fetawafacraren srs: STAT ae: \ 
TTHAT atatara qaagq aaa Il 

Ha WIa WIw ALLA alfa: | 

wre fqang: ataa aieareta it 


‘The Bali is of two kinds, Rajasa and Sdiwika; the first consists of meat, and includes the 
three kinds of flesh ; the second of pulse and rice-milk, with the three sweet articles, (ghee, honey, 
and sugar,) let the Brahman, always pure, offer only the Sdtwika Bali. 


The Brahmavaivartta also observes—“ The animal sacrifices, it is true, gratify DurGA ; but 
they, at the same time, subject the sacrificer to the sin which attaches to the destroyer of animal 
life. It is declared by the Vedas, that he who slays an animal, is hereafter slain by the slain. 
“ Brahma Vaivartta Purana.” 


920 SKETCH OF THE 


victims are also offered to Devi, in her terrific forms only, as KAtxf or 
Durch. The worship is almost confined to a few districts ; and, perhaps, 


is carried to no great extent. 


Although any of the goddesses may be objects of the Sakta worship, 
and the term Sakti comprehends them all, yet the homage of the Sdktas 
is almost restricted to the wife of Siva, and to Siva himself, as identified 
with his consort.* The sect is, in fact, a ramiltication from the common 
Saiva stock, and is referred to Stva himself as its institutor. In the 
Tantras, as has been noticed, he appears as its professor, expounding to 
P&rvarr the mantras, tenets, and observances of the Sékéa worship, vic 


ther of the right or left hand description. 


The worship of Devi, thus naturally resulting from the works on 
which the Séktia doctrines are founded, is one of considerable antiquity 


and popularity. Laying aside all uncertain and fabulous testimony, the 


se * e EN 
* faanfan ater aaa ATHATAH: | 
=X : aN ~ 
Tease LTT FUAGA | 
HUT Maat ataat cafasaea | 
The joint form of Srva and Saxrr is to be worshipped by the virtuous. Whoever adores Sax, 
and offers not adoration to Siva, that Mdntrika is diseased: he is a sinner, and hell will be his 


portion.” For it appears that some of the Sdhéas elevate the Saxri above the Sakr1MA\N, or deity : 
thus the Vamis, in the Sankara Vijaya, say : 


afe: fray aaafcat cafes saqaa faamaaaata ae wines 
fxzy ALT | 


“ ‘SaxTt gives strength to Siva, without her he could not stir a straw. She is, therefore, the 
cause of SIVA. ; 


faqueidiay wactiad 


And again; of the two objects which are eternal, the greater is the Saxri. 


i 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 991 


adoration of Vindhya Vasint, near Mirzapur,* has existed for more than 
seven centuries, and that of Jwdlamukhi, at Nagarkot, very early attracted 
Mohammedan persecution. + These places still retain their reputation, 
and are the objects of pilgrimage to devout Hindus. On the eighth of 
the dark fortnight of Chattra and Kartik in particular, a numerous assem- 


blage of pilgrims takes place at them. 


‘The adoration of KAxf, or Dura4, is, however, particularly prevalent 
in Bengal, and is cultivated with practices scarcely known in most other 
provinces. Her great festival, the Dasahara, is, in the West of India, 
marked by no particular honors, whilst its celebration in Bengal occu- 
pies ten days of prodigal expenditure. This festival, the Durga Puja, 
is now well known to Europeans, as is the extensive and popular estab- 
lishment near Calcutta, the temple of KAxf, at Kali Ghat. The rites 
observed in that place, and at the Durga Pijé, however, almost place the 
Bengali Siktas amongst the Vdmdcharis, notwithstanding the rank 
assigned them in the Dakshinachart Tantraraja, which classes the Gauras 
with the Keralas and Kashmirtans, as the three principal divisions of the 
purer worshippers of SAxrt. 


VAMIS, OR VAMACHARIS. 


The Vdmis-mean the left hand worshippers, or those who adopt a 


ritual contrary to that which is usual, and to what indeed they dare 


* It is frequently mentioned in the Vrihat Katha, the age of which work is ascertained to be 
about seven centuries. Magarkot was taken by Frroz the 3d, in 1360, (Dow 2.55,) at which time 
the goddess Jwaldmukhi was then worshipped there. 


+ For a full account of both, the work of Mr. Warp may be advantageously consulted—II. 89 
to 96, and 125 to 131. 


Ku 


229 SKETCH OF THE 


publicly avow.* They worship Devi, the Sakti of Siva, but all the god- 
desses, as Laxsunf, Saraswarf, the Matris, the Ndayikas, the Yoginis, and 
even the fiend-like Dékinis and Sdkints, are admitted to a share of 
homage. With them, as well as with the preceding sect, Siva is also an 
object of veneration, especially in the form of Buarrava, with which 


modification of the deity it is the object of the worshipper to identify 
himself. 


The worship of the Vdamdcharis is derived from a portion of the 
Tantras: it resolves itself into various subjects, apparently into different 
sects, of which that of the Kaula, or Kulina, is declared to be pre-eminent. { 


= — 


* The following verse is from the Sydma Rahasya— 


ra ord 
BAMA Tear GArai saat: AAU | 
EN ~ 
MUMSAILE ara fracta aeiaa ll 


“Inwardly Sdkéas, outwardly Saivas, or in society nominally Vaishnavas, the Kaulas assum- 


ing various forms, traverse the earth.” 


} dzare fataarat ca Ste quriaa: | 
claataeg Failte: qari warGTa Nl 
Iam Bhairava, I am the omniscient, endowed with qualities. Having thus meditated, let the 
devotee proceed to the Kuda worship.—Syéma Rahasya. 
y iS ~ ~ AAR A : 
{ GaqyAIATAaal Fart FMATT | 
PMMTTARs Ware fawyas Il 
qiawMiqua ala Tatas Aaa | 
faaiaiqua ate Armas ats Il 
“ The Vedas are pre-eminent over all works, the Vaishnava sect excels the Vedas, the Sativa 
sect is preferable to that of Visunu, and the right hand SAxra to that of Srva—the left hand is 
better than the right hand division, and the Siddhdnta is better still—the Kauia is better than the 
Siddhdnta, and there is none better than it.”—Kuldérnava. The words Kaula and Kulina are both 
derivatives from Kuda, family ; and the latter is especially applied to imply of good, or high family : 
these terms have ‘been adopted to signify, that those who follow this doctrine are not only of one, 
but of an exalted race. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 225 


> 


The object of the worship is, by the reverence of Devi or Saxri, who is 
one with Siva, to obtain supernatural powers in this life, and to be identifi- 


ed after death with Srva and SaxtT1. 


According to the immediate object of the worshipper, is the parti- 
cular form of worship ; but all the forms require the use of some or all of 
the five Makdras,* Mansa, Matsya, Madya, Maithuna, and Mudré, flesh, 
fish, wine, women, and certain mystical gesticulations. Suitable Mantras 
are also indispensable, according to the end proposed, consisting of 
various unmeaning monosyllable combinations of letters of great imagi- 


nary eflicacy.{ 


* They are thus enumerated in the Sydma Rahasya: 


ndniag AUS TATA Aa 
AAT UYAVA ACUAAT ALAA It 


Wine, flesh, fish, Mudrdé, and Maithuna, are the five-fold Makara, which takes away all sin. 


+ Many specimens might be given, but one will be here sufficient. It is the combination 
H and S as @, and is one of the very few to which any meaning is attempted to be given: it is 
called the Prdsadda Mantra, and its virtues and import are thus described in the Kuldrnava. 


PATA AAAS FT ialea | 
BMaaytaranre sataafrag"_ tt 
frarfe fafauarad aifwar ore awa | 
fPUTaT Ia SAW Bala aaaa ii 


“ He who knows the excellent Praséda Mantra, that was promulgated by the fifth Veda, (the 
Tantras ) and which is the supreme form of us both, he is himself Siva : this Mantra is present in all 
beings that breathe from Srva, to a worm, and exists in states of expiration and inspiration.” The 
letter HZ is the expirated, and S the inspirated letter, and as these two acts constitute life, the 
Mantra they express is the same with life: the animated world would not have been formed without 
it, and exists but as long as it exists, and it is an integral part of the universe, without being distinct 
from it, as the fragrance of flowers, and sweetness of sugar, oil of Sesamum seed, and Saxri of Srva. 
‘He who knows it needs no other knowledge—he who repeats it need practice no other act of adora- 
tion. The authority quoted contains a great deal more to. the same purpose. 


294 SKETCH OF THE 


Where the object of the ceremony is to acquire an’ interview with 
and controul over impure spirits, a dead body is necessary. The adept 
is also to be alone, at midnight, in a cemetery or place where bodies are 
burnt or buried, or ‘criminals executed: Seated on the corpse, he is to 
perform the usual offerings, and if he does so without fear, the Bhitas, 


the Yoginis, and other male or female goblins, become his slaves. 


In this, and many of the observances practiced, solitude is enjoined ; 
but all the principal ceremonies comprehend the worship of Saxrt, and 
require for that purpose the presence of a female, as the living represen- 
tative and the type of the goddess. This worship is mostly celebrated 
in a,mixed society, the men of which represent Bhairavas or Viras, and 
the women Bhairavis and Nayikas. The Saxrt is personated by a naked 
female, to whom meat and wine are offered, and then distributed amongst 
the assistants, the recitation of various Mantras and texts, and the per- 
formance of the Mudré, or gesticulations with the fingers, accompanying 
the different stages of the ceremony, and it is terminated with the most 
scandalous orgies amongst the votaries.* The ceremony is entitled the 
Sri Chakra, or Ptrndbhisheka, the Ring, or Full Initiation. 


* It might have been sufficient to have given this general statement, or even to have referred 
to the similar but fuller account of Mr. Warp: his information was, however, merely oral, and may 
therefore be regarded as unsatisfactory ; and as it seems to be necessary to show that the charge is 
not altogether unfounded, I shall subjoin the Jeading rites of the Sakéi Sodhana, or Sri Chakra, as 
they are prescribed in the Devi Rahasya, a section of the Rudra Ydmala. 


SAKTI SODHANA. 


The object of the ceremony should be either— 


aiaqifanasarcamalqanyzar | 
ATYUNIS FU GAA MATA TA tt 
aaa Teale TARA IAAMATAT: | 
uaraatfaerayraqar faa: 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 225 


The occurrence of these impurities is certainly countenanced by the 
. texts, which the sects regard as authorities, and by a very general belief 
of their occurrence. The members of the sect are enjoined secrecy, which, 
indeed, it might be supposed they would observe on their own account, 
and, consequently, will not acknowledge their participation in such scenes. 
They will not, indeed, confess that they are of the Sékta sect, although 
their reserve in this respect is said, latterly, to be much relaxed. It is 
contrary, however, to all knowledge of the human character, to admit the 
possibility of these transactions in their fullest extent; and, although 
the worship of the Saxri, according to the above outline, may be some- 
times performed, yet there can be little doubt of its being practised but 
seldom, and then in solitude and secrecy. In truth, few of the ceremonies, 


there is reason to believe, are ever observed ; and, although the Chakra 


“ A dancing girl, a female devotee, a harlot, a washerworan, or barber’s wife, a female of the 
Brahmanical or Sudra tribe, a flower girl, or a milk maid.” It is to be performed at midnight, with 
a party of eight, nine, or eleven couple, as the Bhairavas and Bhazravis. 


ALfAal gq AMNAAARB AA TATA | 
EN > Pw ~ 

URTUAM ATH ART fIAAT | 

Raa aaa Tsay Thera TA: 


Appropriate Mantras are to be used, according to the description of the person selected for the 
Sakti, who is then to be worshipped, according to prescribed form: she is placed disrobed, but richly 
ornamented—on the left of a circle ( Chakra) described for the purpose, with various Mantras and 
gesticulations, and is to be rendered pure by the repetition of different formulas. 


aga aa e ara AaT Aa 
PPRAITASAAATACATAAT i 
HARM Naas Ga ATTY TAT \ 
AAA A STATA AAA ELT ll 
WYMAN Ga aU Agra a: | 


Being finally sprinkled over with wine, the act being sanctified by the peculiar Mantra. 


AAU AIS a UAT AaT yaa, 
Ll 


226 SKETCH OF THE 


is said to be not uncommon, and by some of the zealous Séktas, it is scarcel y 
concealed, it is usually nothing more than a convivial party, consisting 
of the members of a single family, or at which men only are assembled, 


and the company are glad to eat flesh and drink spirits,* under the. 


The Sakti is now purified, but if not previously initiated, she is to be further made an adept by 
the communication of the radical Manéra, whispered thrice in her ear, when the object of the cere- 
mony is complete. 


ua & WIAA A Vaan: PRAT | 
SAT AT RATA Aaa ACATAST tl 
wquzaaty aaaTfaes ld 
avifaatfarstas faaaHaaet il 
alfaat ifuaatiaiasrafesa | 


The finale is what might be anticipated, but accompanied throughout with Mantras and fue 
of meditation, BUBEEStE notions very foreign to the scene. 


sascafaat araat NC: Brags 
CaaaU aTaM aT WalS Il 
WsqIWads aaa Urs Ha-alT | 
SS RAC MEL WSA AAT Il 
sqAU awaaqawsa aerat 
QV BA AV AHAIAS aay ll 
aufayadan arafafgaarsara 
CAaTaAas qaqa asarataeya | i 
ACTA AC AA OCHA FIT 
ait HAMAR EGTA ATTA ANS AT \ 
BAT ATVAMGETE aq TSIAVRNE a" 
QE AAT TA aU WHareraurata tl 
swaeagag aaa: fafguaraara 
UR MA a CAUC SAAT tl 

a 
BUT BT aA MANTA. fausiee 


* The zeal that is prescribed might suit some more civilized associations 


Waray: Rararayqys ayaa | 
Varay TA AAT TAS afaga 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 207 


pretence of a religious observance. In justice to the doctrines of the sect, 
it is to be observed, that these practices, if instituted merely for sensual 
gratification, are held to be asvillicit and reprehensible, as in any other 


branch of the Hindu faith.* 


Let him pledge the wine cup again and again, 
Till he measures his length on the ground. 

Let him rise and once more the goblet drain, 
And with freedom for aye, from a life of pain, 
Shall the glorious feat be crowned. 


* The Kuldérnava has the following and many similar passages: they occur constantly in 
other Zantras. 


qaaleara farsa eae 
BAG AAIM A qreaeataatsy ar: | 
FAUNA AAT Tatetaty waflaaa 
Aqquatar aay ‘arfaqaalteai Wt 
Hraaaraaaic qanfawaa 
arattartea: wale) Tea aateatar tl 
wlaaraazatrate a aia aataaal 
wa aaa sears BAe aataata i 
quaragare aanarta’ aH a | 
ararcefearaaafearaaaae tl 
RAFAT Mas AT IAAT AAT: | 
agyPuarare yaaa aaa 


« Many false pretenders to knowledge, and who have not been duly initiated, pretend to practise 
the Kazla rites ; but if perfection be obtained by drinking wine, independantly of my commands, then 
every drunkard is a saint: if virtue consist in eating flesh, then every carnivorous animal in 
the world is virtuous : if eternal happiness be derived from sexual intercourse, then all beings will be 
entitled to it: a follower of the Aula doctrine is blameless in my sight, if he reproves those of other 
creeds who quit their established observances—those of other sects who use the articles of the Kaula 
—In fact, 


” 


worship, shall be condemned to repeated generations as numerous as the hairs of the body. 
the texts of Menu are taken as authorities for the penance to be performed for the crimes of touching, 
smelling, looking at, or tasting the forbidden articles, except upon religious occasions, and when they 


are consecrated by the appropriate texts. 


It is only to be added, that if the promulgators of these doctrines were sincere, which is far from 
impossible, they must have been filled with a strange phrenzy, and have been strangely ignorant of 
human nature, 


238 SKETCH OF THE 


ea 


The followers are considered as very numerous, especially amongst the 
Brahmanical tribe: all classes are however admissible, and are equal and 
alike at the ceremonies of the sect. In the world* they resume their 
characteristic distinctions, and wear the sectarial marks, and usually 
. adopt the outward worship of any other division, whether orthodoxical or 
heretical. When they assume particular insignia, they are a semi-circular 
line or lines on the forehead, of red saunders or vermillion, or a red streak 
up the middle of the forehead, with a circular spot of red at the root of the 
nose. They use a rosary of Rudraksha seeds, or of coral beads, but of 
no greater length than may be concealed in the hand, or they keep it in 
a small purse, or a bag of red cloth. In worshipping, they wear a piece 
of red silk round the loins, and decorate themselves with garlands of 


crimson flowers. 
KANCHELIYAS. 


This is a sect of which the existence may be questioned, notwith- 
standing the assertion that it is not uncommon in the South of India, the 
worship is that of Saxtt, and the practices are similar to those of the 
Kaulas, or Vamacharis. It is said to be distinguished by one peculiar rite, 
the object of which is to confound all the ties of female alliance, and to 
enforce not only a community of women amongst the votaries, but disre- 


gard even to natural restraints. On occasions of worship, the female 


< * ygaNchaa ease earaaw: | 
ca NY ~n oO Ly 
fTAACAAaasAUT:, VARVTTM 


“ Whilst the Bhairavi Tantra is proceeding, all casts are Brahmans—when it is concluded, 
they are again distinct.” Sydma Rahasya. According to Warp, such of them as avow their creed, 
leading at the same time a mendicant life, are termed Vyaktévadhutas, or they who are openly free 
from restraints: those who conceal their creed and observe its practices in privacy, are termed 
Guptdvadhitas, the liberated in secret. II. 296. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 929 


votaries are said to deposit their upper vests in a box in charge of the 
Guru. At the close of the usual rites, the male worshippers take each a 
vest from the box, and the female to whom the garment appertains, be 
she ever so nearly of kin to him, is the partner for the time of his licen- 


tious pleasures.* 
KERARI. 


The Kerdri is the worshipper of Devi, in her terrific forms, and 
is the representative of the Aghora Ghanta and Kadpdalika,t who, as 
lately only as seven or eight centuries ago, there is reason to suppose 
sacrificed human victims to Kixf, Coamunpd, CHHINNAMASTAKA, and 
other hideous personifications of the Sakti of Siva. The attempt to offer 


human beings in the present day, is not only contrary to every known 


* This sect appears in the Sankara Vijaya, as the Uchchishtha Ganapati, or Hairamba sect, 
who declare that all men and all women are of one caste, and that their intercourse is free'from fault. 


qearar aaafaaraan sifaate area: Muara araraasrla 
afeaat Ba | aagaasaa ars srarara: | 


The same sort of story is told, but apparently with great injustice of the Mohammedan 
Byabahéris or Borahs, and of aless known Mohammedan sect, the Cheraghkesh: something of the 
same kind was imputed to the early Christians by their adversaries. 


+ The following description of the Képalika, is from the Sankara Vijaya of Anandagiri. 


fafaarmyeatac : ACH AAA ATT: WISI TA AHIUTE: TRA 
Suchanzrax: araxmcrad afeaa Raa: RATA UA GAATART : aeas 
AWA faUAT: Wat VTA RS raTATS A ae AE ava 


His body is smeared with ashes from a funeral pile, around his neck hangs a string of human 
skulls, his forehead is streaked with a black line, his hair is wove into the matted braid, his loins are 
clothed with a tiger’s skin, a hollow skull is in his left hand, (for a cup) andin his right he carries a 
bell, which he rings incessantly, exclaiming aloud, Ho, Sambhu, Bhairava—ho lord of Kali. 

mM 1 


BIQ OTE SKETCH OF THE 


ritual, but it would be attended with too much peril to be practised, and, 
consequently, it cannot be believed that this sect is in existence: the only 
votaries, if any there be, consisting of the miscreants who, more for pay 
than devotion, inflict upon themselves bodily tortures, and pierce their 
flesh with hooks or spits, run sharp pointed instruments through their 
tongues and cheeks, recline upon beds of spikes, or gash themselves with 
knives, all which practices are occasionally met with throughout India, 
and have become familiar to Europeans from the excess to which they are 
carried in Bengal at the Charak Pia, a festival which, as a public reli- 
gious observance, is unknown any where else, and which is not directed 
nor countenanced by any of the authorities of the Hindus, not even by 
the Tantras. 


MISCELLANEOUS SECTS. 


The sects that have been described are those of the regular system, 
and particularly of what may be called Brahmanical Hinduism, emanat- 
ing, more or less directly, from the doctrines of the original creed. Besides 
these, there are a number which it is not so easy to class, although they 
are mostly referable toa common source, and partake, in many respects, 
of the same notions, especially of those of a Vaishnava and Vedanta ten- 
dency. They exist in various degrees of popularity, and date from various 
periods, and in most instances, owe their institution to enthusiastic or 
contemplative individuals, whose biography is yet preserved consistently 
enough by tradition. 


This is not the case, however, with the first two on the list—the Sau- 
rapdtas and Ganapatas : these are usually, indeed, ranked with the preced- 
ing divisions, and make, with the Vaishnavas, Saivas, and Sdktas, the five 


orthodox divisions of the Hindus: they are of limited extent and total 
insignificance. : 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 231 


SAURAPATAS, OR SAURAS. 


The Saurapatas are those who worship Suryapati, the Sun-god 
‘only ; there are a few of them, but very few, and they scarcely differ from 
the rest of the Hindus in their general observances. The Vilaka, or 
frontal mark, is made in a particular manner, with red sandal, and the 
necklace should be of crystal: these are their chief peculiarities: besides 
which they eat one meal without salt on every Sunday, and each 
Sankranti, or the sun’s entrance into a sign of the Zodiac : they cannot 
eat either until they have beheld the sun, so that it is fortunate that 


they inhabit his native regions. 
GANAPATYAS. 


These are worshippers of Ganesa, or GANAPATI, and can scarcely be 
considered as a distinct sect: all the Hindus, in fact, worship this deity, 
as the obviator of difficulties and impediments, and never commence any 
work, or set off on a journey, without invoking his protection. Some, 
however, pay him more particular devotion than the rest, and these are 
the only persons to whom the classification may be considered applicable. 
Ganesa, however, it is believed, is never exclusively venerated, and the 
‘worship, when it is paid, is addressed to some of his forms, particularly 
those of Baktratunda and Dhundhird). 


NANAK SHAHIS. 


A sect of much greater importance is that which originated with Nanak 
Sau, and which, from bearing at first only a religious character, came, in 
time, to be a political and national distinction, through the influence of 


Mohammedan persecution and individual ambition. The enterprising 


232 - SKETCH OF THE 


policy of Govinp Sinu, and the bigotry of AURANGZEB, converted the 
peaceful tenets of NAnaxk into a military code, and his speculative disciples 
into the warlike nation of the Sikhs. It is not, however, in their politi- 
cal capacity that we are now to consider them, but as the professors of a 
peculiar form of faith, which branches into various sub-divisions, and is by 
no means restricted to the Punjab. At the same time it is unnecessary 
to detail the tenets and practices of the Sikhs, as that has been already 


performed in a full and satisfactory manner. 


The Sikhs, or Nanak Shahis, are classed under seven distinctions, all 
recognising Ndnak as their primitive instructor, and all professing to 
follow his doctrines, but separated from each other by variations of 
practice, or by a distinct and peculiar teacher. Of these the first is the 


sect of the Udasis. 
UDASIS. 


These may be regarded as the genuine disciples of Nanak, professing, 
as the name denotes, indifference to wordly vicissitudes. They are pure- 
ly religious characters, devoting themselves to prayer and meditation, 
and usually collected in Sangats, colleges or convents ; they also travel 
about to places of pilgrimage, generally in parties of some strength. In- 
dividuals of them are to be met with in most of the chief cities of Hin- 
dustan, living under the patronage of some man of rank or property ;_ but 
in all situations they profess poverty, although they never solicit alms; 
and although ascetics, they place no merit in wearing mean garments or 
dispensing altogether with clothes. On the contrary, they are, in general, 
well dressed, and, allowing the whiskers and beard to grow, are not unfre- 
quently of a venerable and imposing appearance. ‘Though usually prac- 
tising celibacy, it does not appear to be a necessary condition amongst the 


Sikhs to be found in the Gangetic provinces : they are usually the ministrant 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. : 233 


priests ; but their office consists chiefly in reading and expounding 
the writings of Nanak and Govinp Sinu, as collected in the Adi Granth 
and Das Padshah ki granth. The perusal is enlivened by the chaunting, 
occasionally, of Hindi Padas and Rekhtas, the compositions of Kasir, 
Mira Buat, Sur Das, and others. With that fondness for sensible objects 
of reverence which characterises the natives of India, the Book is also 
worshipped, and Rupees, flowers, and fruits, are presented by the votaries, 
which become, of course, the property of the officiating Udasit. In return, 
the Uddsit not uncommonly adopts the presentation of the Prdsdda, and 
at the close of the ceremony, sweetmeats are distributed amongst the con- 
gregation. In some of the establishments at Benares, the service is 
held in the evening after sunset, and the singing and feasting continue 
through a great part of the night. Many of the Uddsis are well read 
in Sanscrit, and are able expounders of the Vedanta philosophy, on which 
the tenets of NANnak are mainly founded. é 

The Udési sect was established by Daarmacuanp, the grandson of 
N&nak, through whom the line of the Sage was continued, and his des- 
cendants, Known by the name of Ndnak Putras, are still found in the 
Punjab, where they are treated by the Sikhs with especial venera- 


tion. 


The doctrine taught by Nanak, appears to have differed but little 
from that of Kasfr, and to have deviated, but inconsiderably, from the 
Ffindu faith in general. The whole body of poetical and mythological 
fiction was retained, whilst the liberation of the spirit from the delusive 
deceits of Méayd, and its purification by acts of benevolence and self- 
denial, so as to make it identical even in life with its divine source, were 
the great objects of the devotee. Associated with these notions, was great 
chariness of animal life, whilst with NANAx, as well as with Kasir, uni- 
‘versal tolerance was a dogma of vital importance, and both laboured to 


N l 


234 SKETCH OF THE 


persuade Hindus and Mohammedans that the only essential parts of their 
respective creeds, were common to both, and that they should discard the 
varieties of practical detail, or the corruptions of their teachers for the 
worship of one only Supreme, whether he was termed Allah or Hart. 
How far these doctrines are still professed by the Nanak Shahis, may be 
inferred from the translations in the eleventh volume of the Researches, 
to which the following may be added as part of the service solemnized at 


the Sikh Sangat, at Benares. 
HYMN. 


Thou art the Lord—to thee be praise. 

All life is with thee. 

Thou art my parents. I am thy child— 

All happiness is derived from thy clemency. 

No one knows thy end. 

Highest Lord amongst the highest— 

Of all that exists, Thou art the regulator. 

And all that is from thee obeys thy will. 

Thy movements—thy pleasure—thou only knowest. 

Nanak, thy slave, is a free-will offering unto thee. 
The Priest then says— 

Meditate on the Saheb of the Book, and exclaim Wah Guru. 
The People accordingly repeat— 

Wah Guru—Wah Guru ki fateh. 
The Priest. 

Meditating on Ramachandra, exclaim Wah Guru. 
The People. 

Wah Guru—Wah Guru ki fateh. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 


HYMN. 


Love, and fix thy whole heart upon Him— 
The world is bound to thee by prosperity— 
No one is another’s. 
Whilst prosperity endures many will come, 
And sit with thee and surround thee ; 
But in adversity they will fly, 
And not one will be near thee. 
The woman of the house who loves thee, 
And is ever in thy bosom ; 
When the spirit quits the body, 
Will fly with alarm from the dead. 
Such is the way of the world, 
With all on which we place affection ; 
Do thou, Nanak, at thy last hour, 
Rely alone upon Harz. 

. Priest et before. 
Meditating on the Saheb of the Book, &c. 

__ People as before. 

Wah Guru, &c. 


HYMN. 


My holy teacher is he who teaches clemency— 

The heart is awake within: who seeks may find. 

Wonderful is that rosary, every bead of which is the breath. 
Lying apart in‘its arbour, it knows what cometh to pass— 
The Sage is he who is merciful ;—the merciless is a butcher. 
Thou wieldest the knife and regardlessly exclaimest— 

What is a goat, what is a cow, what are animals ? 

But the Saheb declares that the blood of all is the same. 
Saints, Prophets, and Seers, have all passed in death. 


Nénak, destroy not life for the preservation of the body. 


235 


236 SKETCH OF THE 


That desire of life which is in the heart, do thou, brother, repress. 
Nénak, calling aloud, says—take refuge with Hari. 
Priest as before. 
Meditating on the Saheb, &c. 
People as before. 
Wah Guru—Wah Guru ki fateh. 


GANJ BAKHSHIS. 


Of this division of the Stkhs, no particulars, except the name, have 
been ascertained. This is said to have been derived from that of the 


founder. They are not numerous nor of any note. 
RAMRAYIS. 


These derive their appellation from that of RAma Riya, the son or 
grandson of Hari RAya, and their distinction from the other Sikhs is 
more of a political than religious complexion. Rima Riya disputed the 
succession to the Pontificate with Hari Krisuna, the son of Hari Riya, 
and was unsuccessful. His followers, however, maintain the superiority 
of his pretensions, and record many miracles wrought by him in proof of 
his sanctity. He flourished about A. D. 1660. The Rdamrayis are not 


common in Hindustan. 
SUTHREH SHAHIS. 


These are more often met with than either of the two preceding, and 
the priests are recognisable by distinguishing marks. They make a 
perpendicular black streak down the forehead, and carry two small black 
sticks about half a yard in length, which they clash together when 
they solicit alms. They lead a vagabond life, begging and singing songs 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 237 


in the Punjabi and other dialects, mostly of a moral or mystic tendency. 
They are held in great disrepute, however, and are not unfrequently 
gamblers, drunkards, and thieves. They look up to Tecu Banaper, the 


father of Guru GovinD, as their founder. 
GOVIND SINHIS. 


These form the most important division of the Sikh community, 
being, in fact, the political association to which the name is applied, or to 
the Sikh nation generally.* Although professing to derive their national 
faith from Nanak, and holding his memory in veneration, the faith they 
follow is widely different from the quietism of that reformer, and is wholly 
of a worldly.and warlike spirit. Guru Govinp devoted his followers to 
steel, and hence the worship of the sword, as well as its employment 
against both Mohammedans and Hindus. He also ordered his adherents 
to allow their hair and beards to grow, and to wear blue garments : he per- 
mitted them to eat all kinds of flesh, except that of kine, and he threw 
open his faith and cause to all casts, to whomsoever chose to abandon 
the institutes of Hinduism, or belief in the mission of Mohammed, for a 
fraternity of arms and life of predatory daring. It was then only that 
the Sikhs became a people, and were separated from their Indian country- 
men in political constitution, as well as religious tenets—at the same time 
the Stkhs are still, to a certain extent, Hindus: they worship the deities of 


the Hindus, and celebrate all their festivals : they derive their legends and 


* Described by Sir Joun MAtcorm, in theeleventh volume of the Asiatic Researches. The 
Sikh priest to whom he alludes (page 198) as one of his authorities, was afterwards well known to me, 
and was an individual every way worthy of confidence. His name was Atmad Ram, and although 
advanced in years, he was full of energy and intelligence, combining with them extreme simplicity 
and kindliness of disposition, The old man was a most favourable and interesting specimen of the 
Punjabi nation and disciples of Nanak, He died a few years ago in Calcutta. 


ol 


238 SKETCH OF THE 


literature from the same sources, and pay great veneration to the Brah- 
manas. ‘The impress of their origin is still, therefore, strongly retained, 
notwithstanding their rejection of caste, and their substituting the Das 
Padshah ki granth,* the compilation of Guru Govinp, for the Vedas, and 


Puranas. 
NIRMALAS. 


These differ but little from the Udésis, and are, perhaps, still closer 
adherents to the doctrines of the founder, as the name imports: they 
profess to be free from all worldly soil or stain, and, consequently, lead a 
wholly religious life. They observe celibacy, and disregard their per- 
sonal appearance, often going nearly naked. They are not like the 
Udasis, assembled in colleges, nor do they hold any particular form of 
divine service, but confine their devotion to speculative meditation on the 
perusal of the writings of NAnax, Kisrr, and other unitarian teachers. 
They are always solitary, supported by their disciples or opulent indivi- 
duals, and are often known as able expounders of the Vedanta philo- 
sophy, in which Brahmans do not disdain to become their scholars. They 


are not very numerous; but a few are almost always to be found at 


* From the succession of Chiefs; Govinp was tenth teacher in succession from (Vdnak, who 
flourished at the close of the 17th and beginning of the 18th century. 


The other standard authority of the Sikhs, the Adi Granth is a compilation chiefiy of the 
works of Nanak, and his immediate successors, made by Avjunmal, a Sikh teacher, in the end of the 
16th century. As it is usually met with, however, it comprehends the writings of many other indivi- 
duals, many of whom are Vaishnavas. Ata Sikh Sangat, or Chapel, in Benares, the Book, a large 
folio, there denominated the Sambhu Granth, was said to contain the contributions of the following 


writers :— 


Ninak, Ném Deo, Kabir, Sheikh Feridaddin, Dhana, Réménand, Pipa, Sena, Jayadeva, 
Phandak, Sudéma, Prahléd, Dhuru, Raidas, Vibhishana, Mira Bai, Kerma Bai. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 239 


the principal seats of Hindu wealth and learning, and particularly at 


Benares.* 


NAGAS. 


The naked mendicants of the Stkhs are said to differ from those of 
the Vaishnava and Saiva sects, by abstaining from the use of arms, and 
following a retired and religious life. Except in going without clothes, 


they are not distinguishable from the Nirmadlas. 


4 


JAINS. 


A satisfactory account of the religion of the Jains would require.a 
distinct dissertation, and cannot be comprised within the limits necessa- 
rily assigned to this general sketch of the Hindu sects. The subject is 
of considerable interest, as affecting a very large proportion of the popu- 
lation of India, and involving many important considerations connected 
with the history of the Hindu faith: an extended inquiry must, however, 
be left to some further opportunity; and in the meantime our attention 
will be confined to a few observations on the peculiar tenets and practices 


of the Jain religion, its past history, and actual condition. 


_* An interesting account of the religious service of the Sikhs, in their college at Patna, was 
published by Mr, Wirxrns, in the first volume of the Asiatic Researches. I witnessed a similar cere- 
mony at a Sikh establishment at Benares, and partook of the Prasdda, or sweetmeats, distributed 
to the assistants. Both Mr. Witkrins and Sir Joun Matcor notice this eating in common, as if 
it were peculiar to the Sikh faith ; but this, as elsewhere observed, is not the case. It prevails with 
most.of the Vaishnava sects ; but it should be remembered that it is always restricted to articles 
which have been previously consecrated by presentation to the object of worship, to the Idol, the 
sarcophagus, the sculptured foot-marks, or the book. 


240 SKETCH OF THE 


Previously, however, to entering upon these subjects, it may be 
advisable to advert briefly to what has been already done towards their 
elucidation, and to the materials which exist in the original languages for 
a complete view. ‘The latter are of the most extensive description, whilst 
the labours of European writers are by no means wanting to an accurate 
estimate of the leading doctrines of the Jain faith, or to an appreciation 


of the state in which it exists in various parts of Hindustan. 


The first authentic notices of the Jains occur in the ninth volume of the 
Asiatic Researches, from the pens of the late Colonel Mackenzie, Dr. 
Bucuanan, and Mr. Cotesrooke. The two first described the Jains from 
personal acquaintance, and from their accounts, it appeared, that they 
existed, in considerable numbers and respectability, in Southern India, 
particularly in Mysore, and on the Canara Coast; that they laid claim to 
high antiquity, and enumerated a long series of religious teachers, and 
that they differed in many of their tenets and practices from the orthodox 
Hindus, by whom they were regarded with aversion and contempt. A 
further illustration of their doctrines, and a particular account of their 
deified teachers, was derived by Mr. Cotesrooxe from some of their 


standard authorities, then first made known to Europeans. 


Little more was published on the subject of the Jains until very 
lately, with exception of numerous but brief and scattered notices of the 
sect in the Peninsula, in BucHANAn’s Travels in Mysore. Some account 
of them also occurs in Colonel Wiuks’ Historical Sketch of the South of 
India, and in the work of the Abbé Du Bois. Mr. Warp has an article 
dedicated to the Jains, in his account of the Hindus; and Mr. Erskine 
has briefly adverted to some of their peculiarities in his Observations on 
the Cave of Elephanta, and the remains of the Bauddhas in India, in 


the Proceedings of the Bombay Literary Society. It is, however, to the 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 241 


fed 


Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society that we are indebted for the 
latest and most detailed accounts, and the papers of Mr. CoLusrooke, 
Major De.amaine, Dr. Hamivrton, Colonel Franxiuin and Major 
Top,* furnish many interesting particulars relative to the doctrines and 
past or present condition of the Jams. Some valuable illustration of the 
latter subject is to be found in the Calcutta Quarterly Magazine: + some 
historical notices obtained from the inscriptions at Abu, occur in the last 
volume of our Researches, whilst a novel and rather comprehensive view 
of Jain literature is contained in the Catalogue of Manuscripts collected 


by the late Colonel Macxernztr. { 


From this latter authority, we learn that the literature peculiar to 
Jainas, comprises a number of works peculiar to the sect, the composition 
of their own writers, and on a variety of subjects.{ They have a series 
of works called Purdnas, as the Adi and Uttara Purdnas, Chamunda Raya 


* On the Philosophy of the Hindus, part IV. by Mr. Cotesrooxg, vol. 1. On the Srdwaks, 
or Jains, by Major DeLamarn, vol. 1, 418. On Inscriptions in Jain Temples, in Behar, by Mr. 
CotEBrooks, Dr. Hamitton, and Colonel FRANKLIN, vol. 1, 520. On the Srdéwaks, or Jains, by 
Dr. HAmMItTon, vol. 1, 531. On the Religious Establishments in Mewar, by Major Top, vol. 2. 


+ Particularly in the Journal of a Native Traveller, from Calcutta, and back again through 
Behar. The traveller was a learned Jain, in the service of ‘Colonel Macxenziz. There is also an 
interesting account of a visit to the temple of PARswANATH, at Samet Sikhar. 


t Vol. 1, page 144, &c. 


§ The List comprises 44 Works— 


IPUNANAS ee somes esate s ete 
Cheritras and Legends, ... 10 
Ritual, Prayers, &c.......... 18 
Medicines es secee tess ceseees ek 
Grammars ies ace, costesuces 2 
PArithmeticny-s, .uwes. aenecsecs 2 
Miscellaneous, -..ccccccaccocrs 4 


P 1 


242 SKETCH OF THE 

Puréna, and Chaturvinsatt Purana ;* but these are not to be confounded 
with the Puranas of the Hindus; as, although they occasionally. insert 
legends borrowed from the latter, their especial object.is the legendary 
history of the Tirthakaras, or deified teachers, peculiar to the sect. The 
chief Purdnas are attributed to Jina Sena AcHArya, whom some accounts 
make contemporary with VikramApitya; but the greater number, and most 
consistent of the traditions of the South, describe him as the spiritual 
preceptor of AMOGHAVERSHA, king of Kanchi, at the end of the ninth cen- 
tury of the Christian era. Analogous to the Jain Purdnas, are works deno- 
minated Cheritras, their subject being, in general, the marvellous history 
of some Tirthankara, or some holy personage, after whom they are deno- 
minated; as the Jinadatta Raya Cheritra, Pijyyapada Cherttra, and. others. 
They have a number of works explanatory of their philosophical notions 
and religious tenets of the sect, as well as rituals of practice, and a gram- 
matical system founded on the rules of SAxaTAyana, is illustrated by glosses 
and commentaries. The Jains have also their own writers on astronomy 
and astrology, on medicine, or the mathematical sciences, and the form 


and disposition of the universe. 


This general view of Jain literature is afforded by the Mackenzie 
Collection, but the list there given is very far from including the whole of 
Jain literature, or even a considerable proportion. The works there alluded 


to, are, in fact, confined to Southern India, and are written in Sanscrit, or the 


* HAmILton says, the Digambaras have twenty-four Puranas, twenty-three giving an account 
of each Tirthankara, and the twenty-fourth, of the whole ; but this seems to be erroneous. The actions 
of the twenty-four Zirthankaras are described in a single Purana, but the section devoted to each is 
called after him, severally as the Purdéna of each, as Rishabha Deva Purdna, one section of the 
Chamunda Raya Purdna. Inthe Adi and Uttara Purdnas, forming, in fact, but one work ; the Adz, 
or first part, is appropriated to the first 7irthankara, whilst the Uttara, or last portion, contains the 
accounts ofall the other deified Sages. There are several collections, comprehending what may be 
termed twenty-four Purdnas ; but it does not appear that there are twenty-four distinct works so 
denominated. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 243 


dialects of the Peninsula; but every province of Hindustan can produce Jain 
compositions, either in Sanscrit or its vernacular idiom, whilst many of 
the books, and especially those which may be regarded as their scriptural 
authorities, are written in the Prékrit or Magadhi, a dialect which, with 
the Jains, as well as the Bauddhas, is considered to be the appropriate 


vehicle of their sacred literature. 


The course of time, and the multiplication of writings, have probably 
rendered it almost impossible to reduce what may be considered as the 
sacred literature of the Jains to a regular system. They are said to 
have a number of works entitled Stddhantas and Agamas,* which are to 
them what the Vedas are to the Brahmanical Hindus, and this appears 
to be the case, although the enumeration which is sometimes made of 
them is of a loose and popular character, and scarcely reconcileable with 


that to be derived from written authority.y 


* HAMILTON enumerates eight works, as the Agamas of the Digambara sect, the Trailohya 
Sara, the Gomatisara, Pungjiraj, Trailokya Dipika, Kshepandsara, Tribhangisara, and Shatpawar, 
attributed to the pupils of Mahavira. He states algo, that the Swetambaras have forty-five, or as 
some allege, eighty-four Siddhantas, amongst which he specifies the Thandngi. Sutra. Gnydnanti 
Sutra, Sugorangi Sutra, Upasakadesa, Mahapandanna, Nandi Sitra, Rayapseni, Jirabhigam, 
Jambudwipapannati, Surapannatti, Chandrasagarapannatti, Kalpa Sitra, Katantraoibhrama Sutra, 
Shakti Stitra, and Sangrahani Sttra. Some of these are incorrectly named, and others inaccurate- 
ly classed, as will be seen from what follows in the text. 


+ The following Works are either in my possession or in the library of the Sanscrit College of 
Calcutta: —Compositions descriptive of the tenets or practices of the Jain religion. Bhagavatyangam. 
This is one of the eleven primary works, and is entitled also in Prakrit Vivdha Pannatti, in Sanserit 
Vivaha, or Vivadha Préjnapti, Instruction in the various sources of worldly pain, or in the paths 
of virtue. tt consists of lessons given to GAUTAMA by Man Avira, and is in Prakrit. Tt contains 
36,000 stanzas. Bhagavtyanga Vritti, a Sanscrit Commentary on the preceding (defective.) Thd- 
ninga Suétra,—also one of the eleven Angas, Kalpa Sutra, the precepts of the Jain faith— 
these are originally 1250; but they are interspersed with legends of the Tirthdnkaras, and especially 
of MawAvira, at the pleasure of the writer, and the several copies of the work therefore differ. 
Prahrit. 


DAA , SKETCH OF THE 


The author of the Abhidhana Chintémani, a useful vocabulary, Hema- 
CHANDRA, is well known as a zealous and able propagator of the Jain doc- 
trines in the twelfth century. He was no doubt well versed in the peculiarity 


of the system which he taught, and may be regarded as a safe guide. 


Kalpa Sitra Balabedha, a sort of abridgement 
of the preceding. Prékrit. 
Kalpa Sittra Siddhanta, the essence of the 
Kalpa Sutra. Prakrit. 
Dasavathalika Sttra. Prékrit. 
Ditto. Tika. 
Rayaprasna Sitra Siddhénta. 
Prakrit. 
Préakrit. 
Laghu Sangrahini Sétra. 
Nava Tatwa Sitra. Prékrit. 
Nava Tatwa Prakarana. Prékrit. 
Nava Tatwa Bdélabodha. Prékrit. 
Karma Grantha. 
Jiva Vichara. 


Tika. 
Gautamaprashtha. 


Sangrahini Sutra. 


Sanscrit. 
Jiva Vinaya. 

Smarana Sitra. Prékrit. 
Vriddhatichdra. Prdakrit. 
Sindiraprakara Tika. 
Ekavinsati Sthana. 
Dasakshapanavratavidhi. 
Upadesa Méla. Prékrit. 
Pratikramana Vidhi. Prakrit. 
Pratikramana Satra. Bhashd. 
Bhasha. 


Sanscrit. 
Bhasha. 
Bhashé. 


Chaturdasa Gunasthana. 
Chaturdasa Gunandmani. 
Pakshi Sitra. Bhashd. 
Shattrinsat Kermakathé. Bhasha. 
Dhermabuddhi Chatushpadi. Bhasha. 
Balavibodha. Bhéshé. 
Upadhénavidhi. Prakrit. 
Ashtéhnikamahotsava. Prékrit. 
Ashtahnikavydkhajana. 

Mahamuni Swadhydya. 

Pragnasikta Muktévali. 

Ariadhana Prakara, 


Parswandtha Gita. 

Uttaradhyayana Gita. 

Sadhusamachari, 

Sravakaradhana. 

Jnyanapija. 

Dikshémahotsava. 

Barah Vrata. 

Saptavinsati Sadhu Lakshana. 

Riiribhojana Nishedha. 

Sdadhwapashéna Vidhi. 

Dwisashti Vakya. 

Kshetrasamasa Sitra. 

Samyaktwadhydayana. 

Prishnottara Retnamdla. 

Navakaranta Balabodha, 

Asahyana Vidhi. 

Santaraka Vidhi. 

Atmdnusdsana. Bhashd. 

Panchdstikdya, according to the Digambara 
faith. 

Jinapratima Sthépana Vidhi. 

Jalakshalana Vidhi. 

Sudopakéra Muktavali. 

Moksha Marga. 

Nitisangraha. 

Vichéramanjaré. 

Pérswanétha Dasabhavavisaha. 

Satavisabhava. 

Anandasrdvaka Sandhi. 

Rohinitapa. 

Siddhachala Piya. 

Pijépaddhati. Bhasha. 

Silopadesa Mala. 

Snana Vidhi. 

Navapattatapa Vidhi. 

Amritashtamitapa. 


~ 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 245 


In his vocabulary he specifies what appear to be the Jaina scriptures, at 


least in the estimation of the Swetdmbara sect, to which he belong- 


ed, and in a valuable Commentary on his own work he has further parti= 


cularised the works named in his text. 


From this it appears that the 


Dévapija. 

Baranbhavanasandhi.. Bhasha. 

Panegyrics of the Jain teachers, &c. which are 
not unfrequently repeated in the temples. 

Santi Jina Stava. Bhdshd. 

Vrihat Santi Stava. Sanscrit. 

Mahavira Stava. Bhéshé. 

Laghu Santi Stava. 

Rishabha Stava. 

Parswanath Stava. 

Parswanath Stuti. Préakrit. 

Neminath Stara. 


Ashanta Stava. Prékrit. 
Ajitasanti Stava. 
Bhaktamaya Stotra. 
Kalyana Mandira Stotra. Sanserit. 
Chaturvinsati dandakastava. 
Sddhubandana. 
Satrunjaya Stava. 
Parswanath Namaskara. 
Champaka Stavana. 
Upasergahara Stotra. 
Guru Stava. 

Karmma Stava. 


LEGENDARY TALES AND HISTORIES. 


Padma Purdna. Bhashd. ; 

Mahdvira Cheritra, which is called by others 
-a portion of the Zrisashti Saldtha Purusha 
Cheritra, or Legend of the sixty-three per- 
sonages, most eminent in Jain Tradition. 
Sanscrit. 

Nemirajarshi Cheritra. 

Sdlabhadra Cheritra. Bhéshé. 

Chitrasena Cheritra. Préhrit. 

Gajasukuméra Cheritra. Bhashd. 

Chandraréja Cheritra. Bhasha. 

Bhaktimara. 

Sripila Cheritra. Bhashd. 


Kalikacharya Katha. 
Samyaktwa Kaumudi. 
Vastradana Katha. 
Meghaditapada Samasya. 
Avantisakuméra Cheritra. 
Retnachiropakhydana. 
Mrigdvati Cheritra. 
Retnachira Muni; Chaupai. Bhashd. 
Mrigavati Chaupat. Bhasha. 
Sadhu Charitra. 

Satrunjaya Mahétmya. 

Gajasinha Charitra. 
Dasadrishtanta Katha. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 
Vriddhayavana, Astronomy. Sanscrit. Namavali. 
Chaturdasaswapanavichara. Patavali. 


Trailokya Dipiha. 
Setunjoddhar. 


Pathanérambhapithika. 


Hastarekhavivarana. Préhrit. 


Many of these are of smal] extent, but others are 
exceedingly voluminous, as the Bhagavaty- 
anga, Padma Purana, Satruyjaya Mahdtmy2, 
and others. 


DAG SKETCH OF THE 


principal authorities of a sacred character were termed Angas, and were 
eleven in number, or with a supplementary division, twelve. They are 
thus enumerated and described; Achardnga, a book teaching sacred 
observances after the practice of Vasishtha and other saints. Sttrakri- 
tangam, a work on acts imposed by positive precepts. Sthdnangam— 
On the organs in which life abides, or the ten acts essential to purity. 
Samavayéngam—On the hundred Paddrthas or categories. Bhagava- 
tyangam—On the ritual, or rules for worship. Jnydtadhermakatha—An 
account of the acquisition of knowledge by holy personages. Updsa- 
kadasd—Rules for the conduct of Srawakas, or secular Jains, apparently 
in ten lectures. Antakriddasa—On the actions of the Tvrihakaras, in ten 
lectures. Anuttaropapatikadara—On the principal or final births of the 
Tirthakaras, in ten lectures. Prasnavyakaranam—Grammar of questions, 
probably on the Code of the Jains.  Vipakasrutam—QOn the fruits or 


consequences of actions. 


With these are connected inferior Angas or Updangas, the names of 
which are not specified—whilst the Drishtabida, the twelfth Anga, which 
seems to be a supplementary authority, is divided into five portions, 
entitled ; Partkermma—-On moral acts, Siéira—Precepts for conduct and 
life; Pérvénuyoga—On the doctrines and practice of the Virthakaras 
before attaining perfection; Prrvagata—On the same after perfection ! 


Chilikéd—On doctrines and practice not comprised in the two preceding. 


These different works profess to be derived from the oral instruc- 
tions of ManAvira himself to his disciples, especially to Gautama; but 
besides these a class of works is enumerated by Hemacuanpra, entitled. 


Pirvas, because they were drawn up by the Ganadharas before the Angas.* 


* ahatfanaye cy Janaaz 
qaIragyia Naas aes ) Mahé Cher. Section 5. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. Z47 


There are fourteen of them treating of the chief tenets of the sect, appa- 
rently sometimes controversially, as the Astipravdda, the doctrine of exist- 
ence and non-existence. Jnydnapravada, the doctrine of holy knowledge 
—WSatyapravada, discussion of truth—Atmapravdda, investigation of spirit— 
Préanavaya, nature of corporeal life—Kriydavisdla, consequences of acts, and 
others.* They are held to be the works of Mauaviras Ganas, or of that 
Tirthakdara and his predecessors, or to have emanated from them originally, 
although committed to writing by other hands. Some of them still exist, 
it appears, { although in general their places have been assumed by a list 


of more recent compositions. 


From this brief statement it will be evident that there is no want 
of original authorities with regard to the belief, the practices, or the 
legends of the Jaina sect. There is indeed more than a sufliciency, and 
the vast extent of the materials is rather prejudicial to the enquiry, it 
being impossible to consult any extensive proportion of what has been 
written, and it being equally impossible without so doing to know that 
the best guides have been selected. For such accounts as are here 
given, the Vocabulary of Hemacuanpra, with'his own Commentary, the 
Mahavira Cheritra of the same author, the Kalpa Sutra, the Avasyaka- 
vrihad Vritta, the Bhagavatyanga Vritia, Nava Tatwabodha, and Jiva 


Vichara have chiefly been consulted. 


The leading tenets of the Jains, and those which chiefly distinguish 


them from the rest of the Hindus, are well known—they are, first, the 


* A similar enumeration of these Works occurs in the Mahavira Cheritra. 


+ Thus the Théndngisttra and Upasakadesa, of Hamiuton, are no doubt the Sthananga 
and Upasahadasa, of Hemachandra’s text, and the Bhagavatyanga isin the Sanserit College 
Library. 


248 SKETCH OF THE 


denial of the divine origin and infallible authority of the Vedas; secondly, 
the reverence of certain holy mortals who acquired, by practices of self- 
denial and mortification, a station superior to that of the gods; and 


thirdly, extreme and even ludicrous tenderness for animal life. 


The disregard of the authority of the Vedas is common to the Jains 
and the Bauddhas, and involves a neglect of the rites which they prescribe : 
in fact, it isin a great degree from those rites that an inference unfavour- 
able to the sanctity of the Vedas is drawn, and not to speak of the 
sacrifices of animals which the Vedas occasionally enjoin ; the Homa, or 


burnt offering, which forms a part of every ceremonial in those works, 


3B? 
is an abomination ; as insects crawling amongst the fuel, bred by the 
fermented butter, or falling into the flame, cannot fail to be destroyed 
by every oblation. As far however as the doctrines they teach are conform- 


able to Jain tenets, the Vedas are admitted and quoted as authority. 


The veneration and worship of mortals is also common to the 
Jains and Bauddhas, but the former have expanded and methodised 
the notions of the latter. The Bauddhas, although they admit an 
endless number of earthly Buddhas to have existed, and specify more 
than a century of names,* confine their reverence to a comparatively 
small number—to seven. The Jainas extend this number to twenty- 
four for a given period, and enumerate, by name, the twenty-four of 
their past age, or Avasarpini, the twenty-four of the present, and the 
twenty-four of theage to come. The statues of these, either all or in 
part, are assembled in their temples, sometimes of colossal dimensions, 
and usually of black or white marble. The objects held in highest esteem 


in Hindustan are Parswaniru and Manfvira, the twenty-third and 


* Asiatic Researches, vol. XVI. pages 446 to 449. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 249 


twenty-fourth Jinas of the present era, who seem to have superseded all 


their predecessors. 


The generic names of a Jatna saint express the ideas entertained of 
his character by his votaries. He is Jagatprabhu, lord of the world; 
Kshinakermma, free from bodily or ceremonial acts ; Sarvajna, omniscient ; 
Adhiswara, supreme lord ; Devadideva, god of gods ; and similar epithets 
of obvious purport ; whilst others are of a more specific character, as 
Tirthakdra, or Tirthankara, Kevali, Arhat, and Jina. The first implies 
one who has crossed over, (Tiryate anena,) that is, the world, compared to 
the ocean: Kevalt, is the possessor of Kevala, or spiritual nature, free from 
its investing sources of error: Arhat is one entitled to the homage of gods 


and men, and Jina is the victor over all human passions and infirmities.* 


Besides these epithets, founded on attributes of a generic character, 
there are other characteristics common to all the Jinas of a more specific 
nature. These are termed Altsayas, or super-human attributes, and are 
altogether thirty-six ; four of them, or rather four classes, regard the per- 
son of a Jina, such as the beauty of his form, the fragrance of his body, 
the white colour of his blood, the curling of his hair, its non-increase, 
and that of the beard and nails, his exemption from all natural impuri- 
ties, from hunger and thirst, from infirmity and decay: these proper- 
ties are considered to be born with him. He.can collect around him 
millions of beings, gods, men, and animals, in a comparatively small 
space, his voice is audible to a great distance, and his language, 
which is Arddha Magadhi, is intelligible to animals, men and gods, the 


back of his head is surrounded with a halo of light, brighter than the 


* Vaid aragg saad ametadants waaracufaaayaaaeur 
UTA Rae az etlaaalar gt ele qa yITA Cae TAAATT AS TAT aT afer: |! 


These Etymologies are from Hemachandra’s Commentary. 


Bi 1 


250 SKETCH OF THE 


disk of the sun, and for an immense interval around him, wherever he 
moves, there is neither sickness nor enmity, storm nor dearth, neither 
plague portents, nor war. Eleven Aféisayas of this kind are ascribed to 
him. The remaining nineteen are of celestial origin, as the raining of 
flowers and perfumes, the sound of heavenly drums, and the menial of- 
fices rendered by Indra and the gods. 


Notwithstanding the sameness of the general character and identity 
of generic attributes, the twenty-four Jinas are distinguished from each 
other in colour, stature, and longevity. ‘Two of them are red, two white, 
two blue, two black, the rest are of a golden hue, or a yellowish brown. 
The other two peculiarities are regulated with very systematic precision, 
and observe a series of decrement from Rishabha, the first Jina, who was 
five hundred poles in stature, and lived 8,400,000 great years to Mahd- 
vira the 24th, who had degenerated to the size of man, and was not more 
than forty years on earth. These peculiarities have been detailed by Mr. 
CoLeBrookeE, in the ninth volume of the Researches, and he draws a pro- 
_bable inference from the return to reason in the stature and years of the 
two last Jinas, that they alone are to be considered as historical per- 
sonages. The rest are the creatures of fiction. The notion of decreasing 
longevity, like that of the existence of human beings, superior to the 


gods, is common to the Bauddhas.* 


* A comparison of the Jain and Bauddha series suggests strong confirmation of the opinion 
that the Jain legends are only Bauddha notions exaggerated. The ages of the seven Buddhas 


run thus— 
Vipaswt,* vivveccccccstoserescossces 80,000 Years. 
SiRhG, oh Reavegeligesbaswoostesessos (yx4 0,000) ditto, 
Viswabniss waccicacs een nectoaseansees 60,000 ditto. 
Krakuchchanda, ..sccccorecrsecees 40,000 ditto. 
TANGA son Geaseate tet sase es eeesles 30,000 ditto. 
I ASY OPA, wabnadelnas tee dencomaasiusin 20,000 ditto. 
SGRYA, Wreisindis sssiassieswecncseensnet 100 ditto. 


A. R. vol. XVI. p. 453. The last Jina but one, or Parswanath, lived like Sdékya, 100 years. 


? 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 951 


There is also great similarity in the general tenor of the legends 
related of each of the Jinas. They are all born a number of times, and in 
a variety of characters, before they arrive at the state of a Tirthankara: 
after which, as their attainment of divine knowledge is the work of self- 
denial and ascetic meditation, we need not expect much varied incident 
in their adventures, a sketch of the life of Manivira, from the Mahavira 
Cheritra, will convey some notion of their ordinary history, whilst further 
illustration may be derived from an abstract of the Pdrswanath Cherttra, 


or life of ParswanAru, in the Royal Asiatic Society’s Transactions. 


/ ] 
LIFE OF MAHAVIRA. 


The twenty-fourth Virthankara Manivira’s first birth, which occurred. 
at a period indefinitely remote, was as Nayasfra, head man of a village, 
in the country of Vijaya, subject to SatrumEerRDDANA. His piety and 
humanity elevated him next to the heaven called Saudherma, where he 
enjoyed happiness for some oceans of years. He was next born as 
Maricut, the grandson of the first Tirthankara Risuasna, then transferred 
to the Grahmaloka, whence he returned to earth as a worldly-minded and 
sensual Brahman, the consequence of which was his repeated births in the 
same caste, each birth being separated by an interval passed in one of the 
Jain heavens, and each period of life extending to many lakhs of years. 
He then became Viswasutra, prince of Rajagriha, and next a Vasudeva, 
named TriprisuTHa, from having three back bones: his uncle and foe in 
a former life, Visabhanandi, was born as his Protagonist, or Prativasudeva, 
named AswaGriva or HAyaGriva, and was, in the course of events, des- 
troyed by the Vasudeva, a palpable adaptation of the Pauranic legend of 
Visunu and Hayacriva. TriertsuTna having put his Chamberlain cruelly 
to death, was condemned to hell, and again born as a lion: he migrated 
through various forms, until he became the Chakravertti PRryaAmitTra, in the 


division of the world, Mahavideha. After a victorious reign of eighty-four 


252 SKETCH OF THE 


lakhs of years, he became an ascetic for a further period of a hundred 
lakhs, and was then translated to one of the higher heavens. Thence 
he returned to earth in the Bharata division, as Nanpawma, the son of 
JiTasatru, who adopted a life of devotion and diligently adored the Jinas. 
After an existence of twenty-five lakhs of years, he was raised to the 
dignity of king of the gods in the Pushpottara heaven, in which capacity 
he preserved his ancient faith, offering flowers to, and bathing daily the 
one hundred and eight images of the Arhats. Such exalted piety was 
“now to meet with its reward, and the pains of existence to be terminated 


in the person of the Virthankara, MAuAvira, or VERDDHAMANA. 


On the return of the spirit of Nanpana to earth, it first animated 
the womb of the wife of a Brahman, but Mauenpra disapproving of the 
receptacle as of low caste, transferred it to the womb of Trisad, wife of 
SippvHArrtua, of the family of Zkshwaku, and prince of Pavana, in Bhara- 
takshetra. Man&vira was born on the thirteenth of the light fortnight 
of Chaitra: the fifty-six nymphs of the universe assisted at his birth, and 
his consecration was performed by Saxra, and the other sixty-three Indras. 
The name given by his father was VerppDHAMANA, as causing increase of 
riches and prosperity, but SAkra gave him also the appellation of Mani- 


VIRA, as significant of his power and supremacy over men and gods. 


When arrived at maturity, ManAvira was prevailed upon by his pa- 
rents to marry Yasop4, daughter of the prince Samaravfra. By her he 
had adaughter, PriyaApERSANA, who was married to JAMALI, a prince, one 
of the Saint’s pupils, and founder of a schism. SippHArrua and his wife 
died when their son was twenty-eight years old, on which Mauivira 
adopted an ascetic life, the government devolving on his elder brother Nan- 
DIVERDDHANA. After two years of abstinence and self-denial, at home, 
he commenced an erratic life, and the attainment of the degree of a 


Jina. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 253 


During the first six years of his peregrination, Manivira observed 
frequent fasts of several months duration, during each of which he kept his 
eyes fixed upon the tip of his nose, and maintained perpetual silence. He 
was invisibly attended by a Yaksha, named SIDDHARTHA, who, at the com- 
mand of InprRa, watched over his personal security, and where speech was 
necessary acted as spokesman. At Ndlaida, a village near Rajagriha, Ma- 
HAvira acquired a follower named Gos4xa, so called from his birth in a cow- 
house, a man of low caste and vulgar propensities, and who acts as a sort 
of buffoon.* He is involved in repeated difficulties and not unfrequently 
receives a beating, but when free from fault, the Yakshas, who attend on 
SIDDHARTHA, come to his aid, and destroy with fire the houses and property 
of his assailants. Amongst other enemies he provokes the followers of 
VERDDHANA Start, the disciple of CHANDRA-ACHARYA, a teacher of the Jain 
faith, according to the doctrines of PArswanAru. In the course of the 
dispute it appears that the followers of PArswanitu wore clothes, whilst 
Mauivira was indifferent to vesture, and the latter consequently belonged 
to the division of the Jains called Digambaras, or those who go naked, 


whilst PArswanAtu’s disciples were Swetdmbaras, dressed in garments. { 


* Some curious and unintelligible things are related of this individual, which suggest a suspi- 
cion that the author had in view some of the oriental legends relating to Mani or Manes. The 
birth of GosAva, ina cow-house, may or may not refer to Christianity ; but it is also observed that his 
father and mother carried about a Chitra pattcka, a painted cloth or picture, which GosALa stole from 
them, and that when he adopted the service of ManAvfra, he abandoned the heresy of the picture, 


faa ara fees 
+ They reply to GosALa’s enquiry: faazrr: arafaann: ay ‘‘ We are the pupils of 
PArswaA, free from restraint”—to which he rejoins RUA a aa amicagufey: | mnad 


aiaateat fre qrowaaar! qarie eacheat facaaragata | Haart. 
QTE layer ate at: ae ). “ How can you be free from restraint ehcuiibered with clothes 
and the like, these heretical practices are adopted merely for a livelihood : wholly unfettered by 
clothes and such things, and disregarding the body, the followers of such a teacher as mine is, are 
the only persons exempt from restraint. ’Further confirmation of ManAvira and his followers being 
Digambaras, occurs in various places, especially in a passage where GosAa gets beaten, and almost 
killed by the women of a village in Magadha, because he is a naked Sramana, or mendicant. 
sl 


254 SKETCH OF THE 


During the six years expended in this manner, MauAvira visits a number 
of places, most of which appear to be in Behar and the adjacent provinces, 
as Rajagriha, Sravasti near Oude, Vaisdli, which is identified with the 


capital of Behar, and others. 


Proceeding on his peregrinations, ManAvira voluntarily exposed him- 
self to be maltreated by the Mlechha tribes of Vajrabhiimi, Suddhibhimi, 
and Lat, or Lar, the countries apparently of the Gonds, who abused and. 
beat him, and shot at him with arrows, and baited him with dogs, to all 
which he offered no resistance, and indeed rejoiced in his sufferings, for 
however necessary to personal purification, it is not the duty of a Jan 
ascetic to inflict tortures upon himself—his course of penance is one of 
self-denial, fasting and silence, and pain however meritorious its endurance, 
must be inflicted by others, not himself. At the end of the ninth year, 
Manfvira relinquished his silence in answer to a question put by Gosixa, 
but continued engaged in the practice of mortification and in an erratic 
life. His squire having acquired from him the possession of the Téjalesya, 
or power of ejecting flame, and having learned from certain of the disciples 
of Parswanirn, what is technically termed the Mahdnimilta of the eight 
Angas, intending probably their scriptural doctrines, set up for himself 


as a Jina, and quitted his master. 


Inpra having declared that Manivira’s meditations could not be 
disturbed by men or gods, one of the inferior spirits of heaven, indignant 
at the assertion, assailed the Sage with a variety of horrors and tempta- 
tions, but in vain. Mauivira’s pious abstraction was unbroken. He then 
wandered about and visited Kausambi, the capital of Satanika, where he 
was received with great veneration, and where his period of self-denial 
ended in perfect exemption from human infirmities. The whole of the 
time expended by him in these’ preparatory exercises was twelve years 


and six months, and of this he had fastednearly eleven years. His various 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 255 


fasts are particularised with great minuteness, as one of six months, 
nine of four months each, twelve of one month, and seventy-two of half 
a month each, making altogether ten years and three hundred and forty- 


nine days. 


The bonds of action were snapped like an old rope, and the Kevala, or 
only knowledge attained by Manivéira on the north bank of the Rijupalika, 
under a Sal tree, on the tenth of the light fortnight of Vaisdkha, in the 
fourth watch of the day, whilst the moon was in the asterism Hasta. 
Inpra instantly hastened to the spot, attended by thousands of deities, 
who all did homage to the Saint, and attended him on his progress to 
Apapdpurt, in Behar, where he commenced his instructions on a stage 
erected for the purpose by the deities, a model of which is not uncom- 
monly represented in Jain temples. The following is the introductory 


lecture ascribed to ManAvira by his biographer. 


_“ The world is without bounds, like a formidable ocean; its cause is 
action (Karma,) which is as the seed of the tree. The being (Jzva) 
invested with body, but devoid of judgment, goes like a well-sinker, 
ever downwards, by the acts it performs, whilst the embodied being 
which has attained purity, goes ever upwards, by its own acts, like the 
builder of a palace. Let not any one injure life, whilst bound in the 
bonds of action ; but be as assiduous in cherishing the life of another as 
his own. Never let any one speak falsehood, but always speak the 
truth. Let every one who has a bodily form avoid giving pain to others 
as much as to himself. Let no one take property not given to him, for 
wealth is like the external life of men, and he who takes away such wealth 
commits as it. were murder. Associate not with women, for it is the 
destruction of life: let the wise observe continence, which binds them to 
the Supreme. Be not incumbered with a family, for by the anxiety it 


involves, the person separated from it falls like dn ox too heavily laden. 


256 SKETCH OF THE 


If it be not in their power to shun these more subtle destroyers of life, let 
those who desire so to do, avoid at least the commission of all gross 


offences.” 


When ManAvira’s fame began to be widely diffused, it attracted the 
notice of the Brahmans of Magadha, and several of their most eminent 
teachers undertook to refute his doctrines. Instead of effecting their 
purpose, however, they became converts, and constituted his Ganadharas, 
heads of schools, the disciples of ManAvira and teachers of his doctrines, 
both orally and scripturally. It is of some interest to notice them in 
detail, as the epithets given to them are liable to be misunderstood, and 


to lead to erroneous notions respecting their character and history. 


This is particularly the case with the first INDRABHGTI, or GAUTAMA, 
who has been considered as the same with the Gautama of the Bauddhas, 
the son of MAvApevr, and author of the Indian metaphysics.* That any 
connexion exists between the Jain and the Brahmana Sage is, at least, 
very doubtful ; but the Gaurama of the Bauddhas, the son of SuDHODANA 
and Miy4, wasa Kshetriya,a prince of the royal or warrior caste. All the 
Jain traditions make their Gaurama a Brahman, originally of the Gotra, 
or tribe of Gorama Rishi, a division of the Brahmans well known, and 
still existing in the South of India. These two persons therefore cannot 


be identified, whether they be historical or fictitious personages. 


INDRABHOTI, AGNIBHOTI, and VAYUBHOTI, are described as the sons of 
Vasuspntrti, a Brahman of the Gotama tribe, residing at Govara, a village 
in Magadha: from their race, Hemacuanpra, in the Commentary on 


the Vocabulary, observes, they are all called Gauramas. Vyaxra and 


* R. A. S. Transactions, vol. I. p. 538. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 257 


SupDHERMA were the sons of DHANAMITRA and DuAammMILLUA, two Brahmans 
of Kollaka, the former of the Bharadwaja, and the latter of the Agnivaisya 
tribe. Manprra and Maurya purra were half-brothers, the sons of 
VisavapbeEvi by Duana Deva and Maurya, two Brahmans of the Vasishtha 
and Kdsyapa races, but cousins by the mother’s side, and consequently, 
according to the custom of the country, it is stated, the one took the 
other’s widow to wife upon his decease. AKAmpitra was the son of a 
Mathth Brahman, of the Gautama tribe. ACHALABHRATA, of a Brahman 
of Oude, of the Harita family. Metrarya was a Brahman of Vatsa, of 
the Kaundilya tribe ; and Prasyisa, a Brahman of the same race, but a 
native of Rajagrika in Behar. These are the eleven Ganadharas, or 
Ganddhipas, holders or masters of Jain schools, although, before their 
conversion, learned in the four Vedas, and teaching the doctrines con- 
tained in them. 

These converts to Jain principles are mostly made in the same man- 
ner: each comes to the Saint, prepared to overwhelm him with shame- 
when he salutes them mildly by name, tells them the subject that excites 
their unuttered doubts and solves the difficulty, not always very satisfac- 
torily or distinctly it must be admitted; but the whole is an epitome of 
the Jain notions on those subjects which chiefly engage the attention of 


the Hindu philosophers. 


Inprasutri doubts whether there be life (Jiva) or not—Manivira 
says there is, and that it is the vessel of virtue and vice, or where would 


be the use of acts of virtue or piety. 


AGNibnHGrI questions if there be acts (Kerma) or not, to which ManA- 
virA replies in the affirmative, and that from them proceed all bodily 
pleasure and pain, and the various migrations of the living principle 
through different forms. 


Ag | 


258 SKETCH OF THE 


Vivyusneri doubts if life be not body, which the Sage denies, as the 
objects of the senses may be remembered after the senses cease to act, 


even after death, that is, in a succeeding state of existence occasionally. 


VyAKkTA questions the reality of elementary matter, referring it with 
the Vedéanitis to illusion ; the Sage replies that the doctrine of vacuity is 
false, illustrating his position rather obscurely, by asking if there are no 


other worlds than the Gandharba, cities of dreams, or castles in the air. 


SuDHERMA imagines that the same kind of bodies which are worn in 
one life will be assumed in another, or that a human being must be born 
again amongst mankind; for as the tree is always of the same nature as 
the seed, so must the consequences of acts, in a peculiar capacity, lead to 
results adapted to a similar condition. This MAnAvfra contradicts, and 
says that causes and effects are not necessarily of the same nature as 
horn, and similar materials are convertible into arrow barbs, and the 
like. 


Manoira has not made up his mind on the subjects of bondage and 
liberation, (Bandha and Moksha); the Jina explains the former to be 
connexion with and dependance on worldly acts, whilst the latter is total 


detachment from them, and independence of them effected by knowledge. 


Mauryapurra doubts of the existence of gods, to which Manivira 
opposes the fact of the presence of Inpra, and the rest around his throne. 
They cannot bear the odour of mere mortality, he adds; but they never fail 


to attend at the birth, inauguration, and other passages of the life of a Jina. 


_AKampirTa is disposed to disbelieve the existence of the spirits of hell, 
because he cannot see them; but the Sage says that they are visible to 


those possessing certain knowledge, of whom he is one. 


| 
tl 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 259 


ACHALABHRATA is sceptical as to the distinction between vice and 
virtue, for which Manivira rebukes him, anddesires him to judge of them 
by their fruits: length of days, honorable birth, health, beauty and pros- 
perity, being the rewards in this life of virtue; and the reverse of these 


the punishments of vice. 


MerArya questions a future existence, because life having no certain 
form must depend on elementary form, and consequently perish with it ; 
but MawAvira replies, that life is severally present in various elementary 
ageregates to give them consciousness, and existing independent of them, 
may go elsewhere often they are dissolved. He adds, in confirmation of 
the doctrine, that the Srutis and Simritis, that is, the scriptural writings of 


the Brahmanas, assert the existence of other worlds. 


The last of the list is PRaBH&sa, who doubts if there be such a thing 


as Nirvan, that state of non-entity which it is the object of a Jaina saint 


to attain. The solution is not very explicit. Nirvan is declared to be the 


same with Moksha, liberation, and Kermakshaya, abrogation of acts, and 
that this is real is proved by the authority of the Veda, and is visibly 


manifested in those who acquire true knowledge. 


According to this view of the Jain system, therefore, we find the vital 
principle recognised as a real existence, animating in distinct portions 
distinct bodies, and condemned to suffer the consequences of its actions 
by migrations through various forms. The reality of elementary mat- 
ter is also asserted, as well as of gods, demons, heaven, and hell. The 
final state of the vital and sentient principle is left rather obscure, but as 
its actual and visible exemption from human acts is taught, it follows 
that it is exempt from their consequences or repeated births in various 
shapes, and therefore ceases to be in any sensible or suffering form. It 
is unnecessary to dwell longer on the subject here, as we shall have occa- 


sion to recur to it. 


260 SKETCH OF THE 


After the conversion of these Brahmans and their disciples, Mawivfra 
instructed them further in his doctrines, and they again taught them to 
others, becoming the heads ‘of separate schools. Axkamprra and AcHata- 
BHRATA, however, and Merirya and Prasyisa taught in common, so that 


the eleven Ganddhipas established but nine Ganas or classes. 


Having thus attained the object of his penance and silence, ManAvfra, 
attended by his disciples, wandered about to different places, disseminat- 
ing the Jain belief, and making numerous converts. The scene of his 
labours is mostly along the Ganges, in the modern districts of Behar and 
Allahabad, and principally at the cities of Kausdmbi and Rdjagriha, un- 
der the kings Saranfka and Srenfxa, both of whom are Jains. The occur- 
rences described relate more to the disciples of the Saint than to himself, 
and there are some curious matters of an apparently historical character. 
There is also a prophetic account of Hemacuanpra himself, and his patron 
Koumira PAta of Guzerat, put into the mouth of Manivira; but these are 
foreign to our present purpose, which is confined to the progress of the 
Jam sage. 

ManAvira having completed the period of his earthly career, returned 
to Apdpapuri, whither he was attended by a numerous concourse of fol- 
lowers of various designations. However fanciful the enumeration, the 
list is not uninstructive, as it displays the use of various terms to signify 
different orders of one sect, and not, as has been sometimes erroneously 
supposed, the sect itself. Sramanas, Sadhs and Sravaks, may be Jains, but 
they are not necessarily so, nor do they singly designate all the indivi- 
duals of that persuasion. Virda’s train consists of Sddhus, holy men, fourteen 
thousand ; Sadhwi’s holy women, thirty-six thousand ; Sramanas, or ascetics, 
versed in the fourteen Purvas, three hundred ; Avadhijninis, those knowing 
the limits or laws, one thousand and three hundred ; Kevalis, or detached from 


acts, seven hundred; Muanovits, possessors of intellectual wisdom, five 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 261 


dred; Bdadis, controversialists, four hundred ; Srévakas, the male laity, one 
lack and fifty-nine thousand ; and Srdvikas, female hearers of the word, 
double that number, or three lacks and eighteen thousand. The only 
Ganadharas present, were GAUTAMA and SupHERMaA, the other nine having 


attained felicity, or having died before their master. 


The period of his liberation having arrived, Manivira resigned his 
breath, and his body was burned by Saxra and other deities, who divided 
amongst them such parts as were not destroyed by the flames, as the 
teeth and bones, which they preserved as reliques ; the ashes of the pile 
were distributed amongst the assistants: the gods erected a splendid. 
monument on the spot, and then returned to their respective heavens. 
These events occurred on the day of new moon, inthe month Kdritk, when 
ManAvira was seventy-two years of age, thirty of which were spent in 
social duties, and the rest in religious avocations, and he died two hun- 
dred and fifty years after the preceding Jina, PArswaniru: no other date 
is given, but in the passage in the prophetic strain above alluded to, it is 
mentioned that KumAra PAua will found Anahilla Patan, and become the 
disciple of Hremacwanpra, one thousand six hundred and sixty-nine 


years after the death of MAHAvirRa. 


The conversion of KumAra PAta occurred about A. D. 1174, and 
consequently the last Jina expired about five hundred years before the 
Christian era. According to other authorities, the date assigned to this 
event, is commonly about a century and a half earlier, or before Christ 


six hundred and sixty-three,* but Hemacuanpra is a preferable guide, 


* Colonel Mackenzie, onthe information of the Belligolu Jains, says Verddhamana at- 
tained beatitude 2464 years before the year 1801, which is 663 years before Christ. Mr. Core- 
BROOKE observes, that the Jains of Bengal reckon Verddhamdna to have lived 580 years before 
Vikramaditya, which is A. C. 636. 


262 SKETCH OF THE 


although, in point of actual chronology, his date is probably not more 


to be depended upon than those derived from other sources. 


The doctrines of the Jazns, which constitute the philosophy of their sys- 
tem, it is not part of the present plan to discuss: but a few of the leading 
tenets, as derived from original authorities, may be here briefly adverted 
to. It is the more necessary to dwell on the subject as the chief opinions 
of the sect of Jina, as described elsewhere, have, for the most part, been 
taken from verbal communication, or the controversial writings of the 


Brahmans. 


An eternal and presiding first cause forms no part of the Jain creed, 
nor do the Jams admit of soul or spirit as distinct from the living prin- 
ciple. All existence is divisible into two heads—Life (Jiva) or the living 
and sentient principle; and Inertia or Ajiva, the various modifications of 
inanimate matter. Both these are uncreated and imperishable. Their 
forms and conditions may change, but they are never destroyed ; and with 
the exception of the unusual cases in which a peculiar living principle 
ceases to be subject to bodily acts, both life and matter proceed in a 
certain course, and at stated periods the same forms, the same characters, 


and the same events, are repeated. 


To proceed, however, according to the original authorities, all objects, 
sensible or abstract, are arranged under nine categories, termed Tatwas, 


truths or existences, which we shall proceed to notice in some detail. 


I. Jiva, Life, or the living and sentient principle, as existing in 
various forms, but especially reducible to two classes, those with and those 


without mobility. The first comprises animals, men, demons, and gods— 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 263 


the second, all combinations of the four elements, earth, water, fire, air, 
as minerals, vapours, meteors, and tempests—and all the products of the 
vegetable kingdom. They are again arranged in five classes, according 
to their possession of as many Jndriyas, or sensible properties, The 
wholly unconscious bodies to ordinary apprehension, but which have a 
subtle vitality perceptible to saintly and super-human beings, have the 
property of form: such are minerals, and the like. Snails, worms, and 
insects, in general, have two properties—form and face. Lice, fleas, and 
the like, have three properties, or form, face, and the organ of smell. 
Bees, gnats, and the rest have, in addition to these, vision; whilst 


animals, men, demons, and gods, have form, vision, hearing, smell, and 


taste. To these five predicates of vital beings, two others are sometimes 


added, and they are said to be Sanjnina and Asanjnina, or, born by pro- 
creation, or spontaneously generated. Again, these seven orders are dis- 
tinguished as complete or incomplete, making altogether fourteen classes 
of living things. According to the acts done or suffered in each condi- 
tion, the vital principle migrates to an inferior or superior grade, until 
it is emancipated from bodily acts altogether. It is a peculiarity of the 
Jain notions of life, that it is always adapted to the body it animates, and 
diminishes with the gnat, and expands to the elephant, a notion that is 
treated with just ridicule by the Brahmans. Generically, it is defined to be 
without beginning or end, endowed with attributes of its own agent and 
enjoyer, conscious, subtle, proportionate to the body it animates ; through 
sin, it passes into animals, or goes to hell; through virtue and vice com- 
bined, it passes into men, and through virtue alone, ascends to heaven ; 


through the annihilation of both vice and virtue, it obtains emancipation. 


If. Ajiva, the second predicate of existence, comprises objects or 
properties devoid of consciousness and life. These seem to be vaguely 


and variously classed, and to be in general incapable of interpretation ; 


264. SKETCH OF THE 


but the enumeration is commonly fourteen, like the modification of vital- 
ity. They are Dhermdstikaya, Adhermastikaya, and Akdsdstikaya, each 
comprehending three varieties. Kdla, or time, is the tenth; and Pud- 


gala, or elementary matter, in four modifications, completes the series. 


It is not very easy to understand these technicalities, for the etymo- 
logy of the words is of little avail. Astikaya indicates the existence of 
body, ‘‘ Body is;” whilst Dherma signifies virtue, and Adherma, vice; but 
Dherma means also peculiar function or office, in which sense it seems to 
Dhermastikaya is defined to be that which facili- 


be here intended, thus 
tates the motion of animate or inanimate bodies, as water for fish. Adher- 
mastikaya is that which impedes or stops their motion. Akésdstikaya is 
the principle of repulsion, that which keeps bodies separate, or space: 
the varieties of these are only in degree, of little, more, and complete. 
Time is sufficiently intelligible, but the Jans indulge in modifications 
of it infinitely more extravagant than those for which the Hindus are 
reproached ; thus after enumerating days, weeks, months, and years, 
we have the Palya, or Palyopama, a period measured by the time 
in which a vast well, one hundred Yojans every way, filled with minute 
hairs. so closely packed that a river might be hurried over them without 
penetrating the interstices, could be emptied at the rate of one hair in a 
century. A Sagaropama is one hundred million millions of Palyas, and an 
Avasarpini and Utserpini, which make up a great age, consist each of one 
hundred million millions of Sagaras. Pudgala is atomic matter, distin- 
guished like the first three categories, by being combined in three 
degrees—little, much, and most, whilst it adds a fourth state, or that of 


Paramanu, primitive, subtle, indivisible, and uncombined. 


III. The third Fatwa is Punya, Good, or whatever is the cause of 
happiness to living beings: the sub-divisions of this category are forty- 


two, it will be sufficient here to enumerate a few of the principal. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 265 


1. Ucchairgotra, high birth, rank, or the respect of mankind. 


2. Manushyagati, the state of man, either as obtained from some 


other form of being or continuance in it. 
3. Suragati, the state of divinity, Godhead. 


4. Panchendriya, the state of superior vitality, or possession of five 
organs of sense. 


5. Panchadeha, the possession of body, or form of one of five kinds. 


Audarika, elementary—that arising from the aggregation of elements, 
as the bodies of men and beasts. 


Vaikriya, transmigrated—that assumed in consequence of acts, as the 
forms of spirits and gods. 


1 , e,e 
Aharakam, adventitious, one assumed, such as that of the Purvadharas, 
of one cubit in stature, when they went to see the Tirthankaras in Maha- 
videhakshetra. 


Tayasa, the form obtained by suppressing mortal wants, in which 
State fire can be ejected from the body. 


Karmanam, the form which is the necessary consequence of acts. 
These two last are necessarily connected from all time, and can only be 
disunited by final liberation, or Moksha. 


Other varieties of ‘ Good, are colour, odour, flavour, touch, warmth, 
coolness, and the like. 


wil 


266 SKETCH OF THE 


IV. Papa, or ‘ Fl, in contradistinction to the preceding, and imply- 
ing that which is the cause of unhappiness to mankind : there are eighty- 


two kinds ; 


As the five Avaranas, or difficulties in acquiring as many gradations 
of holy or divine wisdom. Five Antardyas, disappointments, or impedi- 
ments, as not obtaining what is about to be presented, not being able to 
enjoy an object of fruition when in possession of it, and want of vigour 
though in bodily health. Four Dersanavasdnas, obstruction, or impediment 
to information derivable from the senses, or the understanding ; or to the 
acquirement of divine knowledge. Five states of sleep, inferior birth, 
pain, as acondition of existence, as when condemned to purgatory, belief 
in false gods, defect of size or shape, and all the human passions and 
infirmities—as anger, pride, covetousness, &c., including, amongst the 


ills of life, laughter and love. 


V. Asrava is that source from which the evil acts of living beings 
proceed. The varieties are the five Indriyas, or organs of sense ; the four 
Kashdyas, or passions, as wrath, pride, covetousness, and deceit; the five 
Avratas, non-observance of positive commands, as lying, stealing, &c. and 
three Yogas, addiction or attachment of the mind, speech, and body to any 
act ; Krazyas, or acts, of which twenty-six varieties are specified as those 
performed with any part of the body, or with the instrumentality ofa 
weapon, or the like—those prompted by feelings of hate or wrath—those 
which are inceptive, progressive, or conclusive—those performed by one- 
self, or through another creature—those which are suggested by impiety, 


or unbelief in the doctrine of the Trithankaras. 


VI. The sixth Tatwa is termed Samvara, and is that by which acts 
are collected or impeded. There are fifty-seven varieties classed 


under six heads. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 267 


1. Samiti, keeping the attention properly alive, so as to see imme- 
diately if an insect is in the way, to refrain from uttering what should 
not be said, to distinguish any of the forty-two defects in food given as 
alms, taking or relinquishing any thing indifferently, and avoiding or 


abandoning unfit things. 


2. Gupti, secrecy, or reserve of three kinds, or in mind, speech 
and person. 


3. Parishaha, endurance or patience, as when a person has taken 
a vow of abstemiousness he must bear hunger and thirst; so he must 
endure heat and cold, when he practices the immoveable posture of Jain 
abstraction ; if he is disappointed in what he has laboured or begged for, 
he must not murmur; and if he is reviled or even beaten, he must 


patiently submit. 


A, Yatidherma, the duties of an ascetic, these are ten in number, 
patience, gentleness, integrity, and disinterestedness, abstraction, morti- 


fication, truth, purity, poverty, and continence. 


5: Bhdvand, conviction or conclusion, such as that worldly existences 
are not eternal, that there is no refuge after death, that life is perpetually 
migrating through the eighty-four lakhs of living forms, that life is one 
or many: it also includes perception of the source whence evil acts pro- 
ceed, and the like. 


The sixth division of this class is Cheritra, practice or observance, 
of five sorts. Sdmayika, conventional, or the practice and avoidance of 
such actions as are permitted or prescribed. Chhedopasthapaniya, preven- 
tion of evil, as of the destruction of animal life. Parthdravisuddhi, puri- 


fication by such mortification and penance as are enjoined by the exam- 


268 SKETCH OF THE 


ple of ancient saints and sages. Sulkshmasampardya, the practises of 
those pious men who have attained a certain degree of eminence; and 
Yathakhydtam, the same after all the impediments and impurities of human 


nature are overcome or destroyed. 


VII. Noayardé, the seventh Fatwa, is the religious practice that des- 
troys mortal impurities, or, in other words, penance: it is of two kinds, 
external and internal ; the first comprehends fasting, continence, silence, 
and bodily suffering ; the second, repentance, piety, protection of the vir- 
tuous, study, meditation, and disregard, or rejection of both virtue and 


vice. 


VII. Bandha is the integral association of life with acts, as of milk 
with water, fire with a red hot iron ball: it is of four kinds—Prakriti, the 
natural disposition or nature of a thing—Sthetz, duration, or measure of 
time, through which life continues— Anubhaga, feeling, or sensible quality 
—Pradesa, atomic individuality. The characters of this principle are 
illustrated by a confection. 1. According to its natural properties it cures 
phlegm, bile, &c.; 2, it remains efficient but for a given period; 3, it is 
sweet, bitter, sour, &c.; and 4, it is divisible into large or small pro- 


portions, retaining each the properties of the whole mass. 


IX. The last of the nine principles is Moksha, or liberation of the 


vital spirit from the bonds of action : it is of nine sorts. 


Satpadapraripana. The determination of the real nature of things, 
the consequence of a finite course of progress through different stages of 
being and purification. It is attainable only by living creatures of the 
highest order, or those having the five organs of sense; by those possessed 
of the Trasakdya, or abody endowed with consciousness and mobility ; by 


those beings which are engendered, not self-produced ; by those which 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 269 


have reached the fifth Charitra, or exemption from human infirmity; by 
those which are in the Kshayika Samyaktwa, or that state of perfection 
in which elementary or material existence is destroyed; by those no 
longer requiring material existence; by those who have acquired the 


_Kevalajnana, the only knowledge, and the Kevala Dersana, or ouly vision. 


2. Dravyapraména, as regulated by the fitness of the things or 


persons to be emancipated. 


3. Kshetrapramdna, depending on the essentiality of certain holy 


places at which only it can be obtained. 


4. Spersana, contact, or identity of the individuated living principle 


with that of the universe, or any part of it. 


5. Kéla, the times or ages at which emancipation is attainable; 


or the periods spent in various transmigrations. 
6. Antaram, the difference of temperaments or dispositions. 


7. Bhéga, the existence of the imperishable part of all living bodies 


in which the purified essences or Siddhas reside. 


8. Bhdva, the nature or property of that pure existence which has 


attained the Kevalajnana, and other perfections essential to final liberation. 


9. Alpabuhutwa, the degree or ratio in which different classes of 


beings obtain emancipation.” 


* Although termed ATBVAST: in the original authorities, these varieties are rather in the 


requisite conditions for attaining Moksha, than in the kind or sort of emancipation attained. 


x 1 


270 SKETCH OF THE 


From the details of these nine Vatwas the sum of the whole Jain 
system may be collected, but they form only the text on which further 
subtilties are founded, and they leave the end and scope of all the doc- 


trine or the attainment of ultimate liberation singularly indistinct. 


The Moksha of the Jains is exemption from the incidents of life, and 
above all from the necessity of being born again; but in what state the 
living principle subsists after it is so exempted, does not very satisfac- 
torily appear. In one state indeed the bodily individuality remains, or 
that of Jivanmukti, liberation during life, whilst from most of the subdi- 
visions of Moksha, it follows that the Siddhas, the pure existences, corres- 
pond with our notions of spiritual beings, having an impassive and 
inappreciable form, variable at will, capable of infinite contraction or 
dilation, and wholly void of feeling or passion. This is not incompatible 
with their enjoyment of Nervdn, another term for Moksha, and which, as 
Mr. Cotesroxe observes, meaning literally, extinct or gone out as a 
fire, set, as a heavenly luminary, defunct as a saint who has passed away, 
implies profound calm. “It is not annihilation,” he concludes, ‘“ but 
unceasing apathy which they, ‘the Jains and Buddhas, understand to 
be the extinction of their saints, and which they esteem to be supreme 
felicity worthy to be sought by practice of mortification as well as by 
acquisition of knowledge.” 


Besides the notions exhibited in the detail of the nine Vatwas, the 
Jains are known in controversial writings by the title Saptabddis, or Sapta- 
bhangis, the disputers or refuters of seven positions : more correctly speak- 
ing, they are reconcilers, or could be so of seven contradictory assertions, 
evincing a sceptical character which justifies another epithet which they 
acknowledge, of Syddbddis, or assertors of possibilities: the seven positions 
are the following : 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 271 


1, athing is: 2—It is not: 3—It is and it is not: 4—It is not defin- 
able: 5—It zs, but is not definable: 6—It is not, neither is it definable: 
7—It is and it is not, and is not detinable—Now these positions imply 
the doctrines of the different schools, the Sankhya, Vedanta, and others, 
with regard to the world, to life, and to spirit, and are met in every case 
by the Jains with the reply, Syddba, It may be so sometimes: that is, what- 
ever of these dogmas is advanced will be true in some respects, and not 
in others; correct under some circumstances, and not under others; and 
they are therefore not entitled to implicit trust, nor are they irrecon- 
cileable. There is one inference to be drawn from this attempt to recon- 
cile the leading doctrines of the principal schools, of some importance to 
the history of the Jain doctrines, and it renders it probable that they were 
posterior to all the rest. As this reasoning however has been opposed. 


by RimAnvsa, it dates earlier than the twelfth century. 


Liberation during life, and as a necessary consequence, exemption 
after it from future birth, implies the abandonment of eight classes 
of Karmas, or acts, four of which are noxious and four innoxious—they 
are all included under the Vatwa, Papa, Iu, as above noticed, but are 
also more especially detailed. To the first order belong the follow- 


ing : 

Jyandvarani, disregard of the various stages of knowledge, from 
simple comprehension to the only true wisdom, as so many steps to final 
liberation. 


Dersanévarani, disbelief in the doctrines of the Jain Saints. 


Mohani, hesitation in obeying the injunctions of the Jain code, or 


doubt as to their importance and the consequences of their neglect. 


279 SKETCH OF THE 


Antaraya, impeding or vexing those engaged in seeking liberation. 
The second class comprises— 
Vedaniya, self-consciousness or sufficiency. 


Nama, pride of name—Gotra, pride of birth—and Ayushka, attach- 


ment to bodily existence. 


These essential principles of the faith are common to all classes of 
Jains, but some differences occur in their Duties as they are divided 
into religious or lay orders, Yatis and Srdvakas. Implicit belief in the 
doctrines and actions of the Tirthankaras is, of course, obligatory 
on both; but the former are expected to follow a life of abstinence, 
taciturnity, and continence, whilst the latter add to their moral and 
religious code, the practical worship of the Virthankaras, and profound 
reverence for their more pious brethren. The moral code of the Jains is 
expressed in five Mahdvratas, or great duties—Refraining from injury to 
life, truth, honesty, chastity, and freedom from worldly desires. There 
are four Dhermas, or merits—liberality, gentleness, piety, and penance ; 
and three sorts of restraint—government of the mind, the tongue, and 
the person. To these are superadded a number of minor instructions or 
prohibitions, sometimes of a beneficial and sometimes of a trivial, or 
even ludicrous tendency, such as to abstain, at certain seasons, from 
salt, flowers, green fruit, and roots, honey, grapes, and tobacco; to drink 
water thrice strained ; never to leave a liquid uncovered, lest an insect 
should be drowned in it; not to deal in soap, natron, indigo, and iron; 
and never to eat in the dark lest a fly should be swallowed. Religious 
characters wear a piece of cloth over their mouths to prevent insects from 


flying into them, and carry a brush under their arms to sweep the place 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 273 


a 


on which they are about to sit, to remove any ants or other living creatures 
out of the way of danger. Upon the whole, the doctrine of the Jainas 
is a system of quietism, calculated to render those who follow it perfectly 
innoxious, but to inspire them with apathetic indifference towards both 


this world and the next. 


The ritual of the Jains is as simple as their moral code. The Yati, 
or devotee, dispenses with acts of worship at his pleasure, and the lay 
votary is only bound to visit daily a temple where some of the images 
of the Tirthankaras are erected, walk round it three times, make an 
obeisance to the images, with an offering of some trifle, usually fruit or 
flowers, and pronounce some such Mantra, or prayer, as the following— 
< Namo Arihanténan, Namo Siddhénam, Namo “Aryandém, Namo Updajy- 
anim, Namo Loe Sabba Sahinam—Salutation to the Arhats, to the Pure 
Existences, to the Sages, to the Teachers, to all the Devout in the world.” 
A morning prayer is also repeated—Ichchhamt khama Samano bandiyon, 
jo man jaye nisidye; mathena bandami—\ beg forgiveness, oh Lord, for 
your slave, for whatever evil thoughts the night may have produced—I 
bow with my head.” The worshipper then perhaps remains to hear 
read, part of the Kalpasitra or Bhaktamara, or some narrative of one or 
other of the Tirihankars, and the devotion of their followers, and proceeds 


to his daily occupations. 


The reader in a Jain temple isa Yaz, or religious character; but the 
ministrant priest, the attendant on the images, the receiver of offerings, 
and conductor of all usual ceremonies, is a Brahman. It is a curious 
peculiarity in the Jain system, that they should have no priests of their 
own, but it is the natural consequence of the doctrine and example of the 
Tirthankars, who performed no rites, either vicariously or for themselves, 
and gave no instruction as to their observance. It shews also the true 

y | 


274 SKETCH OF THE 


character of this form of faith, that it was a departure from established 
practices, the observance of which was held by the Jain teachers to be 
matter of indifference, and which none of any credit would consent to 
regulate: the laity were, therefore, left to their former priesthood, as far 


as outward ceremonies were concerned. 


The objects of worship are properly only the Tirthankaras, but the 
Jains do not deny the existence of the Hindu gods, and admit such of 
them as they have chosen to connect with the adventures of their saints, 
according to aclassification of their own, to a share in the worship offered 


to their human superiors. 


According to the Mythology which they have adopted and modified, 
the Jains reckon four classes of divine beings, whom they name Bhuvana- 
patis, Vyantaras, Jyotishkas, and Vaimdnikas: the first comprises ten 
orders: the progeny of the Asuras, Serpents, Garura, Dikpdlas, Fire, Air, 
the Ocean, Thunder and Lightning,—who are supposed to reside in the 
several hells or regions below the Earth. The second has eight orders, 
the Pisdchas, Bhiitas, Kinnaras, Gaudherbas, and other monstrous or 
terrestrial divinities, inhabiting mountains, woods, and forests, as well as 
the lower regions, or air. The third has five orders—the Sun, Moon, Planets, 
Asterisms, and other heavenly bodies. The fourth, includes the Gods of 
present and past Kalpas. Of the first kind are those born in the Heavens, 
Saudherma, Isana, Mahendra, Brahma, Sanatkumara, Sukra, and others to 
the number of twelve, or in the Kalpas, when SupHERMA and the rest were 
severally presiding Deities. The last class reside in two divisions of five 
and of nine heavens—the five termed Vijaya, Vaijayanti, &c.; the second 
termed Anittara, because there are none beyond them, as they crown 
the triple construction of the universe. In the sovereignty of the hosts 


of heaven, a great number of Indras are recognised, but of these two are 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 275 


always specified as the chief, Sukra and Isina, one regent of the north, 
the other of the south heaven: the former alone has eighty-four thousand 


fellow gods, each of whom has myriads of associates and attendants. 


Above all these rank in dignity, and as objects of worship, the twenty- 
four Tirthankaras, or with those of the past and of the future periods, 
Seventy-two. Allusion is made by Hemacuanpra in his life of ManAvfra, 
to a hundred and one, and the same work specifies four Sdswat or eternal 
Jinss, RISHABHANANA, CHANDRANANA, VARISENA, and VERDDHAMANA—what 


is meant by them isnot explained, and they are not recognised by all Jazns. 


The presence of Brahman ministrants, or the lapse of time and the 
tendency of the native mind to multiply objects of veneration, seems to 
have introduced different innovations into the worship of the Jaznas in 
different parts of Hindustan; and in upper India the ritual in use is often 
intermixed with formule derived from the Vantras, and belonging more 
properly to the Sava and Sdakta worship. Images of the Bhairavas and 
Bhairavis, the fierce attendants on Siva and Kitt, take their place in 
Jain temples, and at suitable seasons the Jains equally with the Hindus 


address their adoration to Saraswati and Dev1.* 


In the South of India, from the account given by Colonel Mackenzie, 


it appears that the Jazns observe all the Brahminical Sanskdras, or essential 


* Thus, ina Pijapaddhati, procured at Mainpuri, where a Jain temple of considerable size 
stands, the Zirthankaras, as they are severally presented with offerings, are addressed ; Om Srv 
Rishabhaya Swasti—Om Hrim hum: and Om Hrim Sri Sudhermdachirya, Adigurubhyo Nama— 
Om Hrim Hram, Samajinachaityalayebhyo Sri Jinendrabhyo nama. There are also observances for 
regular Hindu festivals, as the Sripanchami, Akshayatritiydé, &c., when Saraswati and other god- 
desses are invoked. Rules are given for the Ghata Sthépana, when Saxtt or Devr is supposed to 
be present in a water jar, erected as her receptacle and emblem, and the Sorasa Karana Puja ends 
with a Lakshmi Stotra, or Hymn, addressed to the Goddess of Prosperity. 


276 - SKETCH OF THE 


ceremonies. This is not the case in Upper India, and the only rites fol- 
lowed are the Initiation of the infant, twelve days after birth by repeating 
a Mantra over it, and making a circular mark with the sandal and perfumes 
on the top of the head: Marriage and Cremation, which are much the 
same as those of the Brahmans, omitting the Mantras of the Vedas. 
Srdddhas, obsequial ceremonies at stated periods, are not performed by 


the Jams in Upper Hindustan. 


The festivals of the Jains are peculiar to themselves, and occur 
especially on days consecrated by the birth or death of some of the principal 
Tirthankaras, especially the two last Pdrswandth and Verddhaména: 
the places where these events occurred are also objects of pilgrimage, 
and very numerous assemblages of devout pilgrims occur at them at 
different seasons—thus in Behar, a very celebrated place of resort is the 
scene of Pdrswandath’s liberation ; the mountain Samet Sikhara, or Paras- 
nath, near Pachete;* and another of equal sanctity, the scene of 
Verddhamana’s departure from earth, is at Pédpapuri, + in the same 
province. Pilgrims come from all parts of India to these places at all 
seasons, but the principal Melas are held at the former in Magh, and in 
Kartika, at the latter. On the western side of India, the mountains of 
Abu,{ and Girinar, are the great scenes of pilgrimage, being covered 
with Jain temples and remains. Rissasya Deva and NEmINATH seem to 


be the favourite divinities in that quarter. 


* Described very fully, as previously noticed in the Quarterly Magazine for December, 1827. 


+ It is also written Apdpapurit and Pavapuri, under which latter name, it and other celebrated 
Jaina shrines in Behar, are described by a Native traveller, a Jain, in the service of Colonel 


Mackenzie, in the Calcutta Magazine for June, (1823. 


+ See Asiatic Researches, vol. XVI. Jain Inscriptions at Abu. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 277 


Besides these particular festivals, the Jazus observe several that are 
common to the Hindus, as the Vasantaydtra, or spring festival, the 
Sripanchami, and others ; they also hold in veneration certain of the Lunar 
days, as the 2d, 5th, 8th, 11th and 12th; on these no new work should be 
undertaken, no journey commenced, and fasting, or abstinence at least, 


and continence should be observed. 


The origin of the Jain faith is immersed in the obscurity which 
invests all remote history amongst the Hindus. That it is the most 
recent of all the systems pursued in Hindustan is rendered highly 
probable by the extravagances in which it deals, by the doctrines it 
opposes to those of all other schools, and by the comparatively recent date 
of many Jain authors of celebrity and of numerous monumental reliques ; 
but at what period it actually took its rise it is not easy to determine. * 
Mr. Cotresrooxke has suggested the probability of the Jai religion 
being the work of PArswanitu, in the account of whom there is a nearer 
approach to sober history and credible chronology than in the narratives 


of his predecessors—this would throw back the origin of the Jain faith to 


* Major DELAMAINE observes, “ the usual idea of the Jains being a modern sect may not be 
erroneous: the doctrines originating with Fishabha, and continued by Arhanta, dividing at periods of 
schism into more distinct classes, of which the Jains or Srawacs, as now established from one, and 
the modern Buddhas, as in Burma, Siam, Ceylon, Tibet, &c. another.—Major Delamaine, T. R. A. S. 
1.427. “ Were I disposed to speculate on the origin of the Jains, from the striking coincidences of 
doctrine and religious usages between them and the Bouddhists, I should be led to conjecture that 
they were originally a set of Bouddhists.’”—Mr. Erskine, Bombay Trans. 3.502. “ It is certainly 
probable, as remarked by Dr. Hamitron and Major Devamatns, that the Gautama of the Jainas 
and of the Bauddhas, is the same personage, and this leads to the further surmise that both these 
sects are branches of one stock.—Both have adopted the Hindu Pantheon, or assemblage of 
subordinate deities—both disclaim the authority of the Vedas, and both elevate their pre-eminent 
saints to divine supremacy—Mr, Colebrooke, Trans. R. A. S. 1. 521. 


Zz 1 


278 SKETCH OF THE 


the ninth century before the Christian era, admitting the Jai chronology 
of VERDDHAMANA’Ss existence, but it is difficult to concur in the accuracy 
of so remote a date, and whatever indirect evidence on the subject is 


procurable, is opposed to such a belief. 


It has been supposed that we have notices of the Jaina sect as far 
back as the time of the Macedonian invasion of India, or at least at the 
period at which MEGASTHENEs was sent ambassador to SANDRACOPTUs, and 
that these notices are recorded by Srraso and Arrian—the nature of the 
expressions which those and other writers have employed has been canvas- 
sed by Mr. Cotesrooxe, andshewn satisfactorily to establish the existence 
at that time of the regular Brahmans, as well as of other sects : what those 
sects were, however, it was no part of his object to enquire, and he has 
left it still to be ascertained how far it can be concluded that the Jainas 


were intended. 


Much perplexity in the Greek accounts of the Brahmans and Gym- 
nosophists has, no doubt, occurred from their not having been acquainted 
with the subdivision of the priestly cast into the four orders of student, 
householder, hermit, and mendicant, and therefore they describe the 
Brahman sometimes as living in towns, sometimes in woods, sometimes 
observing celibacy, and sometimes married, sometimes as wearing clothes, 
and sometimes as going naked; contradictions which, though apparently 
irreconcileable if the same individuals, or classes be meant, were 
appreciated by the shrewdness of Baye more justly than he was himself 


aware of, * and are all explained by the Acsédaras, or institutes of the 


* « Tt may be that they ‘ the Brachmanes did not follow the same institute in all ages, and 
that with a distinction of time one might reconcile some of the variations of the authors who have 
spoken of them.’”— Articie Brachmans, Note C. Harris, (1. 454) also has rightly estimated the real cha- 
racter of the Germanes, and concluded that they were nothing but Gioghis, from Pietro della Valle’s 
description of the latter. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 279 


Hindus, as affecting the various periods of life and corresponding practices 


of Brahmanical devotion. 


As far, therefore, as the customs or observances of the Gymnosophists 
are described, we have no reason to conclude that any but the followers 
of the Vedas are intended, and the only part of the account applicable to 
any other sect is the term Germanes, or Sermanes, or Samancans, applied to 
one division of the Sophists or Sages. This name, as Mr. CoteBrooKke 
observes, seems to bear some affinity to the Sramanas, or asceticks of the 
Jains or Bauddhas, but we can derive no positive conclusion from a resem- 
blance, which may possibly be rather imaginary than real, and the 
object of which, after all, is far from being the individual property of any 
sect, but is equally applicable to the ascetic of every religious system. 
As distinct from the Brahmans, the Sarmanes will be equally distinct 
from the Jains ; for the Brahmans, it is said by Porpuyry, are of one race ; 
and the Samaneans are selected from all the tribes, and consist of persons 
choosing to prosecute divine studies, precisely the independent Sanydsz 
or Gosain, of modern times, few persons of which description belong to 
the order of the Brahmans, or are united with the rest by any commu- 


nity of origin or peculiarity of faith. 


Again, another word has been adduced in corroboration of the exist- 
ence of the Jains, and it may be admitted, that this is a better proof 
than the preceding, as the Pramne are declared to be the opposers of the 
Brahmans, which is no where mentioned of the Sarmanes. This expres- 
sion is said to designate the Jains, but this is far from certain: . the 
term is probably derived from Pramdna, proof, evidence, and is especially 
the right of the followers of the logical school, who are usually termed 
Préimanikas: it is applicable, however, to any sect which advocates 
positive or occular proof in opposition to written dogmas, or belief in 


scriptural authority, and is in that sense more correctly an epithet of the 


280 SKETCH OF THE 


Bauddha sectaries than of the Jains, who admit the legends and worship 
the deities of the Purdnas, and who hold it the heighth of impiety to 
question the written doctrines of their own teachers. The proofs from 
classical writers, therefore, are wholly inadequate to the decision of the 
antiquity of the Jains, and we are still entirely left to sources of a less 


satisfactory description. 


All writers on the Jains, entitled to our attention, agree in admitting an 
intimate connexion between them and the Bauddhas; the chief analogies 
have been above adverted to, and the inference of later origin is justly found- 
ed on the extravagant exaggerations of the system adopted by the Jains. 
Their identity of origin rests chiefly upon the name of Gaurama, which 
appears as that of VerppHAmANa’s chief pupil, and as the legislator of the 
Bauddha nations in the east. The dates also assigned to both are not far 
removed ; the apotheosis of the Buddha, Gautama, occurring five hundred 
and forty-three years before Christ, and the death of Manivira, the pre- 
ceptor of the Jain Gautama, about the sametime. That there is some 
connexion may be conceded, but for reasons already assigned, it is not 
likely that the persons are the same ; the Jains have not improbably deriv- 


ed their Gaurama from that of their predecessors. 


No argument for the antiquity of the Jains is derivable from the 
account given of RisnasyHa inthe Bhdégavat Puréna. He was not a 
seceder from the true faith, although the mistaken imitation of his 
practices is said to have led others into errors, evidently intending the 
Jain heresy. He is scarcely identifiable, in consequence, with the Jain 
Risuasna, the first of the Tirthankaras; but even if that were the case, 
no confidence could be placed in the authority, as the work is a modern 
compilation, not exceeding, at the most, twelve centuries of antiquity. 
The refutation of Jain doctrines in the Brahma Sitras, is a less ques- 


tionable testimony of their early existence ; but the date of that work is to 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 281 


be yet ascertained. Sankara ACHARYA, the commentator on the texts of 
Vyisa, affords a more definite approximation ; but he will not carry us 
back above ten centuries. Itis also to be observed, that the objects of 
the attacks of the Sttras and of SanKara are philosophical and specula- 
tive tenets, and these may have been current long before they formed part 
of a distinct practical system of faith, as promulgated by a class of 


Bauddhas, the germ of the Jains. 


However, we may admit from these authorities the existence of the 
Jains as a distinct sect, above ten or twelve centuries ago ; we have reason 
to question their being of any note or importance much earlier. The 
Bauddhas, we know from Curmens of Alexandria, existed in India in the 
second century of the Christian era, and we find them not only the principal 
objects of Hindu confutation and anathema, but they are mentioned in 
works of lighter literature, referable to that period, in which the Jains are 
not noticed, nor alluded to: the omission is the more worthy of notice, 
because, since the Bauddhas disappeared from India, and the Jains only 
have been known, it will be found that the Hindu writers, whenever they 
speak of Bauddhas, shew, by the phraseology and practices ascribed to 
them, that they really mean Jains: the older writers do not make the same 
mistake, and the usages and expressions which they give to Bauddha 
personages are not Jain, but Bauddha; with the one they were familiar, 


the other were yet unknown. 


The literature of the Jains themselves is unfavourable to the notion 
of high antiquity. Hemacuanpra, one of their greatest writers, flourished 
in the end of the twelfth century, and the compiler of the Jain Purdnas of 
the Dekhin, is said to have written at the end of the ninth. The Kalpa 
Siitra professes to have been composed nine hundred and eighty years 
after the death of Manivéfra, or fifteen centuries ago; but from internal 


a, 2 


282 SKETCH OF THE 


evidence, it could not have been composed earlier than the twelfth or 
thirteenth century. Various eminent Jain authors were cotemporary also 
with Munsa and Buosa, princes of Dhar, in the ninth and tenth century, 
and a number of works seem to have been compiled in the sixteenth 


century, during the tolerant reign of AKBER. 


Of the progress of the Jazn faith in the Gangetic provinces of Upper 
India, we have no very satisfactory traces. It may be doubted if they 
ever extended themselves in Bengal. Behar, according to their own 
traditions, was the birth place of VerppHamAna, and Benares of Pirswa-. 
NATH; and temples and monuments of their teachers are common in both ; 
particularly the former; but all those now existing are of very recent 
dates,* and there are no vestiges referable to an intermediate period 
between the last Virthankara, and the eighteenth century. At Benares, 
its princes professed the faith of Bauddha as late as the eleventh century, 
whilst during the same period, as is proved by inscriptions and the 
historical work of CHANDRAKAVI, the sovereigns of Kanoj and Delhi were 
of the orthodox persuasion. It is very doubtful, therefore, if the Jains 
ever formed a leading sect in this part of Hindustan. They were more 


‘successful in the west and south. 


In Western Marwar, and the whole of the territory subject to the 
Chaulukya princes of Guzerat, the Jain faith became that of the ruling 
dynasty ; but this occurred at no very remote period. ‘The Mohammedan 
Geographer, Eprisi, states that the king of Nehrwala, the capital 


of Guzerat, worshipped Buppua; and we know from the writings of 


* As late even as the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries.—These dates are sometimes said to 
indicate the periods at which the temples were repaired, but the intelligent author of the ‘ Visit to 
Mount Parswanath’ observes, “ only in one instance is there reason to suspect thai the buildings are 
much older than the inscriptions announce. The most ancient Mundir at that place, is reckoned 
to be but fifty years old.—Caleutta Magazine, December, 1827. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. ) 283 


HemacnHanpra, that he was the apostle of the Jain faith in that kingdom— 
converting KumAra Pata, the monarch of Guzerat, to his creed. This 
is also an occurrence of the twelfth century, or about 1174. The conse- 
quences of this conversion are still apparent in the abundant reliques of 
- the Jain faith, and the numbers by whom it is professed in Marwar, 


Guzerat, and the upper part of the Malabar Coast. 


On the Coromandel side of the Peninsula, the Jains were introduced 
upon the downfall of the Bauddhas, in the reign of AMoGHAVERSHA, king 
of Tonda Mandalam, in the ninth century, or according to some traditions, 
in the eighth. Farther south, in Madura, the date of their introduction 
is not known, but they were in power in the eleventh century under Kuna 
Panpya. In this, and in the twelfth, they seem to have reached their 
highest prosperity, and from that period to have declined. Kuna P&inpya 
became a Saiva—VisHnu VerppHANA, Raja of Mysore, was converted. 
from the Jain to the Vaishnava faith in the twelfth century, and about the 
same time the Lingavant Saivas deposed and murdered Visaua, the Jan 
king of Kalyan. The sect, however, continued to meet with partial 
countenance from the kings of Vijayanagar, until a comparatively modern 
date. 


The conclusions founded on traditionary or historical records are 
fully supported by the testimony of monuments and inscriptions—the 
latter of which are exceedingly numerous in the south and west of India. 
Most of these are very modern—none are earlier than the ninth century. 
An exception is said to exist in an inscription on a rock at Belligola, 
recording a grant of land by Chamunda Raya to the shrine of GomaTiswara, 
in the year 600 of the Kali age, meaning the Kali of the Jains, which 
began three years after the death of VerppHaMANaA. This inscription, 
therefore, if it exists, was written about fifty or sixty years before the 


Christian «ra—but it is not clear that any such record is in existence, 


984 SKETCH OF THE 


the fact resting on the oral testimony of the head Pontiff at Belli- 
gola: even, if it be legible on the face of the rock, it is of questionable 
authenticity, as it is perfectly solitary, and no other document of like 


antiquity has been met with. 


_ The Mackenzie Collection contains many hundred Jain inscriptions. 
Of these, the oldest record grants made by the princes of Homecehi, a pet- 
ty state in JMysur. None of them are older than the end of the ninth 
century. Similar grants, extending through the eleventh and twelfth 
centuries by the VeLata sovereigns of Mysur, are also numerous, whilst 
they continue with equal frequency to the sixteenth and seventeenth, cen- 
turies, during the existence of the sovereignty of V ijayanagar. Again, at 
Abu, under the patronage of the Guzerat princes, we have a number of Jain 
inscriptions, but the oldest of them bears date Samvat 1245, (A. D.1189) ;* 
they multiply in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, and are found 
as late as the middle of the eighteenth—and, finally, in Magadha, the 
scene of VERDDHAMANA’s birth and apotheosis, the oldest inscriptions 
found, date no further back than the beginning of the sixteenth cen- 
tury.{ 

From all credible testimony, therefore, it is impossible to avoid the 
inference that the Jains are a sect of comparatively recent institution, who 
first came into power and patronage about the eighth and ninth century: 
they probably existed before that date as a division of the Bauddhas, and 


owed their elevation to the suppression of that form of faith to which 


* Asiatic Researches, Vol. XVI. Page 317. 


+ Dr. Hamitton’s Description of Jain Temples in Behar.—Jrans. R. A. S. 1.525. To 
these may be added the inscriptions at Parswanath, and a number of inscriptions at Gwalior, 
copies of which were sent to Mr. FRAsER, and which are all dated in the middle of the 15th 
century. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 285 


they contributed. This is positively asserted by the traditions of the 
south in several instances: the Bauddhas of Kanchi were confuted by 
AKALANKA, a Jain priest, and thereupon expelled the country. Vara 


Panpya, of Madura, on becoming a Jain, is said to have persecuted the 


- Bauddhas, subjecting them to personal tortures, and banishing them 


from the country. In Guzerat, Bauddha princes were succeeded by the 
Jains. There is every reason to be satisfied, therefore, that the total 
disappearance of the Bauddhas in India proper is connected with the 
influence of the Jains, which may have commenced in the sixth or seventh 


centuries, and continued till the twelfth. 


The inveteracy prevalent between kindred schisms is a sufficient rea- 
son for any enmity felt by the Jains towards the Bauddhas, rather 
than towards the Brahmanical Hindus. There is, indeed, a political 
leaning to the latter, observable in their recognition of the orthodox 
Pantheon, in the deference paid to the Vedas, and to the rites de- 
rivable from them, to the institution of castes, and to the employ- 
ment of Brahmans as ministrant priests. They appear also to have 
adapted themselves to the prevailing form of Hinduism in different 
places: thus at Abu, several Jain inscriptions commence with invo- 
cations of Siva,* and in the Dekhin, an edict promulgated by 
Buxka Riya, of Vijayanagar, declares there is no ‘real difference be- 
tween the Jains and Vaishnavas.t In some places the same temples are 
resorted to by Jains and Ramdnujiya Vaishnavas, and as observed by Mr. 
CoLEBRooke, a Jain on renouncing the heretical doctrines of his sect, 
takes his place amongst the orthodox Hindus as a Kshetriya or Vaisya, 


which would not be the case with a convert, who has not already caste as 


* Major DeLamatne notices that the mountain Girndr, is equally sacred to Hindus as to 
Jains, and that an ancient temple of Mananpeva is erected there. 


+ Asiatic Researches, Vol. IX. Page 270. 
B 2 


286 SKETCH OF THE 


a Hindu.* In the South of India, indeed, the Jams preserve the distinc- 
tion of castes: in Upper India, they profess to be of one caste, or Vaisyas. 
It is very clear, however, that admission to the /aim communion was 
originally independent of caste,{ and the partial adoption of it or preten- 
sion to it, is either a spontaneous or politic conformity to the strong 


feeling on the subject which prevails amongst all Hindus. 


These are the great outlines of the rise and progress of the sect, as 
derivable from sources entitled to credit; but the Jains have amongst them- 
selves records of sectarial value, detailing the succession of different teach- 
ers, and the origin of various heresies. Some extracts from one of these 


attached to a copy of the Kalpa Stiitra, may be acceptable. 


The succession of teachers is always deduced from Manivira, 
through his disciple Supuerma. Of. the rest, all but Gaurama died 
before their Master, as has been observed above, and GauTAMA survived 
him but a month, which he spent in penance and fasting. SupHERMA, 
therefore, was the only one who remained competent to impart instruc- 
tion. His pupil was Jamsuswimf, the last of the Kévalis, or possessors of 
true wisdom: six teachers follow, termed Sruta Kévaiis, or hearers of the 
first masters, and then seven others, Dasapurvis, from having been taught 


the works so named.{ These are common to all the lists when correct. 


* Transactions Royal Asiatic Society, I. 549. 


+ MaunAvira himself was the son of a king, and should therefore be a Kshetriya. His chief 
disciples, InpRABuUTI, and the rest, were Brahmans. His especial attendant, GosALA, was an out- 
caste, and his followers, of both sexes, were of every caste. 


{ The following are the names of the individuals alluded to in the text : 


SRUTAKEVALS. Dasar6érvis. 
Prabhava Swami. Arya Mahdagiri Sivi. 
Sayyambhadra Siri. Arya Suhasti Siri. 
Yasobhadra Siri. Arya Susthita Suri. 
Sambhuta Vijaya Sari. Indradinna Suri. 
Bhadrabéhu Siri. Dinna Suvi. 
Sthilabhadra Suri. Sinhagiri Suri. 


Vajraswami Suvi. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 287 


In the Belligola list they are omitted, and the successor of JamBuswAmi 
is there named Verasina, who may have been, as Mr. CoLesrooKxe 
remarks, a hundred degrees removed. The lists, subsequently, vary 


according to the particular line of descent, to which they belong. 


Of these persons, the second Srutakevali is reputed to be the author 
of the Dasavatkalikd, one of the standard works of the sect. Sunastt, the 
second Dasapurvi, was the preceptor of Samprati Rasa, and the fourth 
Susrurra, founded the Kole gachcha, or tribe. VasraswAmf the last, 


established a particular division called the Vdajra Sakhd. 


Of the succeeding teachers, or Sviris, the title borne by the spiritual 
preceptors of the Jains, CHanprasbrti the second, is the founder of the 
family of that name, eight hundred and nine years, it is said, after the 
emancipation of ManAvira. In his time, it is stated, the Digambaras 
arose; but we have seen that they were at least cotemporary with Mauni- 


VIRA. 


The 38th on the list, from Manivira inclusive, Upyorana Sori first 
classed the Jains under eighty-nine Gachchas. The 40th Jineswari who 
lived A. D. 1024, founded the Khertara family.* With the 44th; JInapATTA 
originated the Oswal family, and the Madhyakhertara branch; he was a 
teacher of great celebrity, and impressions of his feet in plaster or on stone 
are preserved in Some temples, as at Bhelupur in Benares ; he lived in 1148. 
Other divisions, either of a religious or civil nature, are attributed to 


various teachers, as the Chitrabala Gachcha to Jinavati Stiri, in A. D. 1149; 


* Major Top gives a somewhat different account of the origin of this tribe. Aharéra, he says 
means true, an epithet of distinction which was bestowed by that great supporter of the Buddhists 
or Jains, SipRAS, King of Anhulwara Paten, on one of the branches Gacheha, ina grand religious 
disputation at the capital, inthe eleventh century. The accounts are by no means incompatible, and 
my authority represents Jineswari victorious in a controversy. 


288 SKETCH OF THE 


the Anchalika doctrine to Jinrswara in 1160; the Laghu Kheriara family 
to JINACHANDRA in 1265; another JINACHANDRA, the 61st in the list, was 
cotemporary with Axper. The list closes with the 70th Jina, HersHa 
Sérr, with whom, or his pupils, several works originated in the end of 


the seventeenth century.* 


Admitting this record to have been carefully preserved, we have 
seventy-one persons from ManAvfra, to whom a period of less than four- 
teen centuries can scarcely be assigned, and whose series would, therefore, 
have begun in the third century. It is not at all unlikely that such was 
the case, but no positive conclusion can be drawn from a single document 
of this nature: a comparison with other lists is necessary, to determine 


the weight to be attached to it as an authority. 


The Jains are divided into two principal divisions, Digambaras and 
Swetambaras ; the former of which appears to have the best pretensions to 
antiquity, and to have been most widely diffused.| The discriminating 
difference is implied in these terms, the former meaning the Skyclad, that 
is, naked, and the latter the white robed, the teachers being so dressed. 
In the present day, however, the Digambara ascetics do not go naked, 
but wear coloured garments; they confine the disuse of clothes to the 
period of their meals, throwing aside their wrapper when they receive the 
food given them by their disciples: the points of difference between the 


* HeMAcHANDRA, at the endof the Mahdvira Cheritra, after stating that VasrAsw Ami founded 
the VasrasAKHA, which was established in the Chandra Gachcha, gives the teachers of that family 
down to himself, YasopHADRA, PrapyumNna, ViswasenA, DevACHANDRA, and HEMACHANDRA. 


+ All the Dekhini Jains appear to belong to the Digambara division. So it is said do the 
majority of the Jains in Western India. In the early philosophical writings of the Hindus, the 
Jains are usually termed Digambaras, or Nagnas, naked. The term Jain rarely occurs, and Swetane- 
bara still more rarely if ever, as observed in the text; also VERDHAMANA, practically at least, 


was a Digambara. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 289 


two sects are far from restricted to that of dress, and comprehend a list 
of no fewer than seven hundred, of which eighty-four are regarded as of 


infinite importance: a few of these may be here noticed. 


The Swetambaras decorate the images of the Virthankaras with ear- 
rings, necklaces, armlets, and tiaras of gold and jewels: the Digambaras 


leave their images without the foreign aid of ornament. 


The Swetdmbaras assert that there are twelve heavens, and sixty- 
four Indras : the Digambaras maintain that there are sixteen heavens, and 


one hundred Olympian monarchs. 


The Swet4mbaras permit their Gurus to eat out of vessels : the Digam- 


baras receive the food in their open hands from their disciples. 


The Swetdmbaras consider the accompaniments of the brush, water- 
pot, &c., as essential to the character of an ascetic : the Digambaras deny 


their importance. 


The Swetambaras assert that the Angas, or scriptures, are the work 
of the immediate disciples of the Tirthankaras: the Digambaras, with 
more reason, maintain that the leading authorities of the Jain religion are 


°,? Ld ‘ lA 
the composition of subsequent teachers or Achdryas. 


The advantage gained by the Digambaras, in the last debateable 
matter, they lose, it is to be apprehended, in the next, when they 
assert that no woman can obtain Nirvdn, in opposition to the more gallant 


doctrine of their rivals, which admits the fair sex to the enjoyment of 
final annihilation. 


990 SKETCH OF THE 


These will be sufficient specimens of the causes of disagreement 
that divide the Jainas into two leading branches, whose mutual animosity 
is, as usual, of an intensity, very disproportionate to the sources from 


whence it springs. 


Besides these two great divisions, several minor sects are particula- 
rised as existing amongst the Jains. They appear, however, to be of no 
importance, as it has been found impossible to obtain any satisfactory 
account of the heresies they have adopted, or of their origin and present 
condition. Schism was contemporary even with Manfvfra, and his son-in- 
law, JAmAu1, founded a dissentient order. His follower, GosALa, was also 
the institutor of a sect, and an impostor into the bargain, pretending to be 
the twenty-fourth Tirthankara. Basrananna, the pupil of a very celebrat- 
ed Digambara teacher, Kunpa Kunp Acnirya, founded the Drévir sect, 
according to some in the fifth, and to the others, in the seventh century. 
VasRASWAnf instituted the Mahdnisitha sect, and JINENDRA S6ri founded 
the Lampaka sect, by which images were discarded. The sects now most 
often heard of, although little known, are the Mila Sanghis, who use 
brushes of peacock’s feathers, wear red garments, and receive alms in 
their hands: the Késhta Sanghis, who make their images of wood and 
employ brushes of the tail of the Yak: the Tera Panthis and Bis Panthis, 
or followers of ten and of twenty, said sometimes to refer to the number 
of objects which are most essential to salvation, and at others, explained 
by a legend of the foundation of the heresy by a number of persons, such 
as the denomination implies. Both these are said to deny the supremacy 
of a Guru, to dispense with the ministration of a Brahman, and to present 


no perfumes, flowers, nor fruits to the images of the Tirthankaras.* The 


* The Bis Panthis are said to be, in fact, the orthodox Digambaras, of whom the Zera Panthis 
are a dissenting branch. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 291 


Bhishana Panthis carry their aversion to external emblems still farther, 
and discard the use of images altogether. The Dundiyas and Samvégis 
are religious orders: the former affect rigorous adherence to the moral 
code, but disregard all set forms of prayer or praise, and all modes of 
external worship: the Samvégis follow the usual practices, but subsist 


upon alms, accepting no more than is indispensable for present wants. 


The whole of the Jains are again distinguished into clerical and lay, or 
into Yatis and Srdvakas: the former lead a religious life, subsisting upon 
the alms supplied by the latter. According to the greater or less degree 
of sanctity to which they pretend, are their seeming purity and outward 
precision, shewn especially in their care of animal life: they carry a 
brush to sweep the ground before they tread upon it; never eat nor 
drink in the dark, lest they should inadvertently swallow an insect, 
and sometimes wear a thin cloth over their mouths lest their breath 
should demolish some of the atomic ephemera that frolic in the sun- 
beams ; they wear their hair cut short, strictly they should pluck it out 
by the roots; they profess continence and poverty, and pretend to 
observe frequent fasts and exercise profound abstraction. Some of them 
may be simple enthusiasts ; many of them, however, are knaves, and 
the reputation which they enjoy all over India, as skilful magicians, 
is not very favourable to their general character: they are, in fact, not 
unfrequently Charlatans, pretending to skillin palmistry and necromancy, 
dealing in emperical therapeutics, and dabbling in chemical, or rather 
alchemical manipulations. Some of them are less disreputably engaged 
in traffic, and they are often the proprietors of Maths and temples, 
and derive a very comfortable support from the offerings presented by 
the secular votaries of Jina. The Yatts, as above remarked, never 
officiate as priests in the temples, the ceremonies being conducted by a 
member of the orthodox priesthood, a Brahman, duly trained for the 


purpose. The Yatis are sometimes collected in Maths, called by them 


9299 SKETCH OF THE 


Posdlas, and even when abroad in the world, they acknowledge a sort of 
obedience to the head of the Posdla of which they were once mem- 


bers. 


The secular members of the Jaina religion, or Srdvakas, follow the 
usual practices of the other Hindus, but give alms only to the Yatis, 
and present offerings and pay homage only to the Qirthankaras; the 
present worship, indeed, is almost restricted to the two last of these 
personages, to PAirswanatu, as commonly named Parisnath, the twenty- 
third, and to VerppHAaMANA or Manvfra Swamt, the twenty-fourth 
Tirthankara of the present age. The temples of these divinities are, in 
general, much handsomer buildings than those of the orthodox Hindus: 
they consist of a square or oblong room, large enough to admit a tolerably 
numerous assemblage, surrounded by an open portico: on one side is a 
sort of altar-piece of several stages ; on the centre of the upper tier sits 
the chief deity of the temple, supported by two other Arhats, whilst 
the rest, or a portion of them, are ranged upon the inferior tiers: the 
steeple is also distinguishable from that of other temples, being formed 
of departments, which are intended, apparently, to represent leaves, and 
surmounted by a pole resembling a flag staff, terminating in a gilt knob: 
there are several of these temples in the chief cities along the Ganges, 
and no fewer than a dozen in Murshedabad, to which the circumstance of 
the Set family, being of the Jaina persuasion, attracted a number of fellow 
worshippers. In Calcutta there are four temples, two belonging to each 
sect. In Behar are the temples of PArisnaitu and the Pddukas, or feet of 
VerDDHAMANA, and Visuptsya. Benares possesses several temples, one 
of which, in the suburb, called Belupura, is honoured as the birth place of 
Pirswanitu. The shrine comprises two temples, one belonging to the 
Swetambaras, and one to the Digambaras. A temple of some size and cele- 
brity occurs at Mainpurt, in the Doab, and most of the towns in that di- 


rection present Jain spires. The chief temples, however, are to the 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 293 


westward, and especially at Jaypur. The whole of Mewar and Mérwar 


is strewed with remains of the sacred edifices of this sect. 


The Jains of the South of India, as has been observed, are divided 
into castes : this is not the case in Upper Hindustan, where they are all of 
one caste, or, which is the same thing, of none. They are nevertheless 
equally tenacious of similar distinctions, and not only refuse to mix with 
other classes, but recognise a number of orders amongst themselves, 
between which no intermarriages can take place, and many of whom 
cannot eat together. This classification is the Gachcha or Got, the family 
or race, which has been substituted for the Verna, the Jati, or caste. Of 


these Gachchas, or family divisions, they admit eighty-four,* and these 


* The following are the appellations of the eighty-four Gachchas : 


Khandewal. Natila. Dhaktha. Bikriya. 
Porwéal. Mothiya. Vaisya. Bidyabya. 
Agarwal. Tattora. Nagdhar. Bersari. 
Jaiswal. Bagerwal. Por. Astaki. 
Barihiya. Harsola. Surendra. Ashtadhar. 
Goldl. Sriguru. Kadaya. Pawarabhi. 
Gajapurbi. Jolura. Kéhari. Dhakkachala. 
Srimal. Gahakhanduja. Soniya. Bogosri. 
Banswal, or Oswal. Chordiya. Sorathiya. Naraya. 
Porwér. Bhungeriwal. Rajiya. Korghériya. 
Palliwal. Brahmata. Maya. Bamiriya. 
Danderwél. Beduja. Kammeha. Séhsantanya. 
Himmargujerati. Bahariya. Bhangela. Andndi. 
Baramora. Goguwal. Gangarda. Nagora. 
Kharawa. Andaluja. Marhkeya. Tattora. 
Labechu. Gogayya. Motwal. Pékhastya. 
Ihandoya. Mandaluja. Swetwal. Sacchora. 
Kathnora. Pancham. Chakkichap. Jannora. 
Kabliya. Somabansibogar. Khandarya. Nemiléra. 
Kapola. Chatirtha. Narischya. Gandoriya. 
Nadila. Hardar. Bimongai. Dhawaljoti. 


Some of these are well known, but many of the others are never met with. The list was fur- 
nished by a respectable Yaéi—but how far it is throughout genuine, I cannot pretend to say. It 
omits several Gachchas of celebrity, particularly the Chandra and Khertara. 

D2 


294 SKETCH OF THE 


again appear to comprehend a variety of subdivisions: some of the 
Gachchas comprehend a portion of Sri Vaishnavas, between which sect and 


the Jains in Upper India, a singular alliance seems sometimes to prevail. 


The condition of Jaina worship may be inferred from the above 
notices of its temples. Its professors are to be found in every province 
of Hindustan, collected chiefly in towns, where, as merchants and bank- 
ers, they usually form a very opulent portion of the community. In 
Calcutta there are said to be five hundred families ; but they are much 
more numerous at Murshedabad. In Behar they have been estimated 
at between three and four hundred families. ‘They are in some numbers 
in Benares, but become more numerous ascending the Doab. It is, 
however, to the westward that they abound: the provinces of Mewar and 
Marwar being apparently the cradle of the sect.* They are also nu- 
merous in Guzerat, in the upper part of the Malabar coast, and are 
scattered throughout the Peninsula. They form, in fact, a very large, 
and from their wealth and influence, a most important division of the 
population of India. 


BABA LALIS. 


The followers of Bisa Lit are sometimes included amongst the 
Vaishnava sects, and the classification is warranted by the outward seem- 
ing of these sectaries, who streak the forehead with Gopichandana, and 
profess a veneration for RAma: in reality, however, they adore but one 
God, dispensing with all forms of worship, and directing their devotion 


by rules and objects derived from a medly of Vedanta and Sufi tenets. 


* According to Major Top, the Pontiff of the Khartra Gachcha has eleven thousand clerical 
disciples scattered over India, and the single community of Oswal numbers one hundred thousand 
families. In the West of India, the officers of the state and revenue, the bankers, the civil magis- 
rates, and the heads of corporations, are mostly Jains.— Trans. R, As. Soe. vol, II. p. 1 263. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 295 


Bisa Lit was a Khetriya, born in Malwa, about the reign of JEHAn- 
cir: heearly adopted a religious life under the tuition of CHeTANA Swi mi, 
whose fitness as a teacher had been miraculously proved. This person 
soliciting alms of BAsa LAt, received some raw grain, and wood to dress 
it with: lighting the wood, he confined the fire between his feet, and sup- 
ported the vessel in which he boiled the grain upon his insteps, Bisa 
Lit immediately prostrated himself before him as his Guru, and receiv- 
ing from him a grain of the boiled rice to eat, the system of the universe 
became immediately unfolded to his comprehension. He followed CuEerana 
to Lahore, whence being dispatched to Dwarakda by his Guru, to procure 
some of the earth, called Gopichandana, he effected his mission in less 
than an hour: this miraculous rapidity, the distance being some hundred 
miles, attesting his proficiency, he was dismissed by his Guru, in order to 
become a teacher. He settled at Dehanpur, near Serhind, where he erect- 
ed a Math, comprehending a handsome temple, and where he initiated a 


number of persons in the articles of his faith. 


Amongst the individuals attracted by the doctrines of BAsa Liu, was 
the liberal minded and unfortunate Dara SHexou: he summoned the sage 
to his presence to be instructed in his tenets, and the result of seven in- 
terviews was committed to writing, in the form of a dialogue between the 
Prince and the Pir, by two literary Hindus, attached to the Prince’s train, 
one Yapu Dis, a Khettriya, and the other Rarcuanp Brahman, the latter 
the Mirmunshi; the interview took place in the garden of Jarrer KHAN 
SaDUvUH, in the 21st year of SHan JeHAn’s reign, or 1649: the work is 
entitled Nadir unnikdt, and is written, as the name implies, in the Per- 
sian language. Some miscellaneous extracts from it may not be unaccepta- 
ble, as they may not only explain the tenets of Bisa Liz, and something of 
the Vedanta and Sufi doctrines, but may illustrate better than any description 
the notions generally prevailing of the duties of a religious and mendicant 


life. The interrogator is the Prince, BXsa Lit himself the respondent. 


296 SKETCH OF THE 


What is the passion of a Fakir ?>—Knowledge of God. 

What is the power of an Ascetic ?—Impotence. 

What is Wisdom ?—Devotion of the heart to the Heart’s Lord. 

How are the hands of a Fakir employed ?—To cover his ears. 

Where are his feet >—Hidden, but not hampered by his garments. 

What best becomes him ?—Vigilance, night and day. 

In what should he be unapt ?—Immoderate diet. 

In what should he repose ?—In a corner; seclusion from mankind, and meditation 
on the only True. 

What is his dwelling ?—God’s creatures. 

His Kingdom ?—God. 

‘What are the lights of his mansion ?—The Sun and Moon. 

What is his couch ?—The Earth. | 

What is his indispensable observance ?—Praise and glorification of the Cherisher of 
all things, and the needer of none. 

What is suitable for a Fakir ?—Zd, none; as La Allah, &c. there is no God but God. 

How passes the existence of a Fakir ?—Without desire, without restraint, without 
property. 

What are the duties of a Fakir ?—Poverty and faith. 

Which is the best religion ?—Verse, “‘ The Creed of the lover differs from other 
Creeds. God is the faith and creed of those who love him, but to do good is best for the 


follower of every faith.” Again, as Hariz says— 


The object of all religions is alike, 

All men seek their beloved, 

What is the difference between prudent and wild, 
All the world is love’s dwelling, 


Why talk of a Mosque or a Church. 


With whom should the Fakir cultivate intimacy ?—With the Lord of loveliness. 

To whom should he be a stranger ?—To covetousness, anger, envy, falsehood, and 
malice. 

Should he wear garments or go naked ?—The loins should be covered by those who 
are in their senses—nudity is excusable in those who are insane. The love of God does 


not depend upon a cap or a coat. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 297 


How should a Fakir conduct himself?—He should perform what he promises, and 


not promise what he cannot perform. 


Should evil be done to evil doers ?—The Fakir is to do evil to none, he is to consi- 
der good and ill alike, so Hariz says—‘‘ The repose of the two worlds depends upon 


two rules, kindness to friends and gentleness to foes.” 


What is the nature of the Takza (the pillow or abbacy ?)—-To commence with a seat 
upon it is improper, and at all times an erratic life is preferable; when the body is weaken- 
ed by age or sickness, the Fukir may then repose upon his pillow: so situated, he should 


welcome every Fakir as his guest, and consider nothing but God to be his own. 


Is it necessary for a Fakir, to withdraw from the world ?—It is prudent but not neces- 
sary: the man in society who fixes his heart on God is a Fakir, and the Fakir who takes 
an interest in the concerns of men isa man of the world, so Mauiana Rum _ observes— 


‘* What is the world ? forgetfulness of God, not clothes, nor wealth, nor wife, nor offspring.” 


What is the difference between nature and created things ?—Some compare them to 
the seed and the tree. The seed and the tree are equivalent though related; although the 
same in substance, they are not necessarily co-existent nor co-relative. They may be also 
compared to the waves and the sea; the first cannot be without the second, but the sea 
may be without waves, wind is necessary to their product: so, although nature and created 
things are of one essence, yet the evolution of the latter from the former requires the 


interference of an evolving cause, or the interposition of a Creator. 


Are the soul, life, and body merely shadows ?—The soul is of the same nature as God, 
and one of the many properties of universal life; like the sea, and a drop of water; when 


the latter joins the former, it also is sea. 


How do the Paramdtma (supreme soul) and Jivdtmd (living soul) differ?—They do 
not differ, and pleasure and pain ascribable to the latter, arises from its imprisonment in the 
body—the water of the Ganges is the same whether it run in the riyer’s bed or be shut up 


in a decanter. 


298 SKETCH OF THE 


What difference should that occasion ?—Great—a drop of wine added to the water in 
the decanter will impart its flavor to the whole, but it would be lost in the river. The 
Paramiatma, therefore, is beyond accident, but the Jévdtmd is afflicted by sense and passion. 
Water cast loosely on a fire will extinguish the fire; put that water over the fire in a 
boiler, and the fire will evaporise the water, so the body being the confining caldron, and 
passion the fire, the soul, which is compared to the water, is dispersed abroad ;—the one 
great supreme soul is incapable of these properties, and happiness is therefore only obtained 
in re-union with it, when the dispersed and individualized portions combine again with it, 
as the drops of water with the parent stream; hence, although God needs not the service 
of his slave, yet the slave should remember that he is separated from God by the body 
alone, and may exclaim perpetually, Blessed be the moment when I shall lift the veil from 


off that face. ‘The veil of the face of my beloved is the dust of my body. 


What are the feelings of the perfect Fakir ?—They have not been, they are not to be, 
described, as it is said—~a person asked me what are the sensations of a lover? I replied, 


when you are a lover, you will know. 
PRAN NATHIS. 


These are also called Dhémis: they owe their origin to Prin Nirtu, 
a Khetriya, who being versed in Mohammedan learning, as well as 
in his own, attempted to reconcile the two religions : with this view, he 
composed a work called the Mahitariyal, in which texts from the Koran, 
and the Vedas are brought together, and shewn not to be essentially 
different. Prin NAru fiourished about the latter part of AuRUNGZEB’s 
reign, and is said to have acquired great influence with CHarrrasit, Raja 
of Bundelkand, by effecting the discovery of a diamond mine. Bundel- 
kand is the chief seat of his followers, and in Punna is a building conse- 
crated to the use of the sect, in one apartment of which, on a table 


covered with gold cloth, lies the volume of the founder. 


As a test of the disciple’s consent to the real identity of the essence 


of the Hindu and Mohammedan creeds, the ceremony of initiation, 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 299 


consists of eating in the society of members of both communions: with 
this exception, and the admission of the general principle, it does not 
appear that the two classes confound their civil or even religious distinc- 
tions: they continue to observe the practices and ritual of their fore- 
fathers, whether Musselman ‘or Hindu, and the union, beyond that of 
community of eating, is no more than any rational individual of either 
sect is fully prepared for, or the admission, that the God of both, and of 


all religions, is one and the same. 
SADHS. 


A full account of this sect of Hindu Unitarians, by the Reverend Mr. 
Fisuer, was published in the Missionary Intelligencer some years ago, 
and some further notice of them is inserted in the Transactions of the 
Royal Asiatic Society, by Mr. Tranr. They are distinguished from other 
Hindus, by professing the adoration of one Creator, and by personal 
and moral observances which entitle them, in their own estimation, to 


the appellation of Sddhs, Sddhus, Pure or Puritans. 


The Sddhs are found chiefly in the upper part of the Doab, from 
Farakhabad to beyond Delhi. In the former, they occupy a suburb called 
Sddhwdra, and are more numerous there than in any other town, their 
numbers are estimated at two thousand. There are said to be some at 
Mirzapore, and a few more to the South; their numbers, however, are 


limited, and they are chiefly from the lower classes. 


The sect originated in the year of VixramAnpitya, 1714, (A. D. 1658) 
according to Mr. Tran, witha person named Birsuin, who received a 
miraculous communication from one Upaya D&is, and in consequence 


taught the Sadh doctrines. Mr. Fisner calls Birpuin the disciple of 


300 SKETCH OF THE 


Joc1 Das, who commanding a body of troops in the service of the Raja of 
Dholpur, was left as slain on the field of battle, but restored to life by a 
stranger in the guise of a mendicant, who carried him to a mountain, 
taught him the tenets of the faith, and having bestowed upon him the 
power of working miracles, sent him to dissé¢minate his doctrines. These 
circumstances are rather obscurely alluded to in the original authorities 
consulted on the present occasion, but they agree with the above in 
considering BirBxan an inhabitant of Brijhasir, near Narnoul, in the 
province of Delhi, as the founder of the sect, at the date above mentioned. 
BireuAn received his knowledge from the Sar Guru, the pure teacher, also 
called Udaka Das, theservant of the one God, and particularly described as 


the Malek ka Hukem, the order of the Creator, the personified word of God. 


The doctrines taught by the super-human instructor of BrrBHAN were 
communicated in Sabdas and Sikhis, detached Hindi stanzas like those 
of Kasir. They are collected into manuals, and read at the religious 
meetings of the Sddhs: their substance is collected into a tract entitled 
Adi Upadés, first precepts, in which the whole code is arranged under 


the following twelve Hukems, or Commandments. 


1. Acknowledge but one God who made and can destroy you, to whom there is 
none superior, and to whom alone therefore is worship due, not to earth, nor stone, nor 
metal, nor wood, nor trees, nor any created thing. There is but one Lord, and the word 
of the Lord. He who meditates on falsehoods, practices falsehood, and commits sin, and 


he who commits sin falls into Hell. 


2. Be modest and humble, set not your affections on the world, adhere faithfully to 


your creed, and avoid intercourse with all not of the same faith, eat not of a stranger’s bread. 


3. Never lie nor speak ill at any time to, or of any thing, of earth or water, of trees or 


animals. Let the tongue be employed in the praise of God. Never steal, nor wealth, nor 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 301 


land, nor beasts, nor pasture : distinguish your own from another’s property, and be content 
with what you possess. Never imagine evil. Let not your eyes rest on improper objects, nor 


men, nor women, nor dances, nor shows. 


4, Listen not to evil discourse, nor to any thing but the praises of the Creator, nor to 
tales, nor gossip, nor calumny, nor music, nor singing, except hymns; but then the only 


musical accompaniment must be in the mind. 


5. Never covet any thing, either of body or wealth: take not of another. God is the 


giver of all things, as your trust is in him so shall you receive. 


6. When asked what you are, declare yourself a Sidh, speak not of caste, engage not 


in controversy, hold firm your faith, put not your hope in men. 


7. Wear white garments, use no pigments, nor collyrium, nor dentifrice, nor Mehndz, 


nor mark your person, nor your forehead with sectarial distinctions, nor wear chaplets, or 


rosaries, or jewels. 


8. Never eat nor drink intoxicating substances, nor chew pan, nor smell perfumes, nor 
smoke tobacco, nor chew nor smell opium, hold not up your hands, bow not down your 


head in the presence of idols or of men. 


9. ‘Take no life away, nor offer personal violence, nor give damnatory evidence, nor 


seize any thing by force. 


10. Let a man wed one wife and a woman one husband, let not a man eat of a woman’s 


leavings, but a woman may of a man’s, as may be the custom. Let the woman be obedient 


to the man. 


11. Assume not the garb of a mendicant, nor solicit alms, nor accept gifts. Have 
no dread of necromancy, neither have recourse to it. Know before you confide. The 


meetings of the Pious are the only places of pilgrimage, but understand who are the Pious 


before you so salute them. 


302 SKETCH OF THE 


12. Let not a Sadh be superstitious -as to days, or to lunations, or to months, or the 


cries or appearances of birds or animals; let him seek only the will of the Lord. 


These injunctions are repeated in a variety of forms, but the purport 
is the same, and they comprise the essence of the Sad doctrine which 
is evidently derived from the unitarianism of Kasfr, NAnax, and similar 
writers, with a slight graft from the principles of Christianity. In their 
notions of the constitution of the universe, in the real, although temporary 
existence of inferior deities and their incarnations, and in the ultimate 


object of all devotion, liberation from life on earth, or Mukti, the Sadhs 


do not differ from other Hindus. 


The Sddhs have no temples, but assemble at stated periods in houses, 
or courts adjoining set apart for this purpose. According to Mr. FisHer, 
their meetings are held every full moon, when men and women collect at 
an early hour, all bringing such food as they are able, the day is spent in 
miscellaneous conversation, or in the discussion of matters of common 
interest. In the evening, they eat and drink together, and the night is 
passed in the recitation of the stanzas attributed to BirBuAn, or his pre- 


ceptor, and the poems of Diapvu, Nanak, or Kanir. 


From the term they apply to the deity, Sarnim, the true name, the 
Sadhs are also called Satndmis ; but this appellation more especially indi- 


cates a different, although kindred sect. 
SATNAMIS. 


These profess to adore the true name alone, the one God, the cause 


and creator of all things, Nirgun, or void of sensible qualities, without 


beginning or end. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 303 


They borrow, however, their notions of creation from the Vedanta phi- 
losophy, or rather from the modified form in which it is adapted to vulgar 
apprehension. Worldly existence is illusion, or the work of MA4yA, the 
primitive character of Buavinf, the wife of Stva. They recognise accord- 
ingly the whole Hindu Pantheon—and, although they profess to worship 
but one God, pay reverence to what they consider manifestations of his 


nature visible in the Avatars, particularly Rama and KrisuHna. 


Unlike the Sadhs also, they use distinctive marks, and wear a double 
string of silk bound round the right wrist. Frontal lines are not invari- 
ably employed, but some make a perpendicular streak with ashes of a 


burnt offering made to Hanuman. 


Their moral code is something like that of all Hindu quietists, 
and enjoins indifference to the world, its pleasures or its pains, implicit 
devotion to the spiritual guide, clemency and gentleness, rigid adherence 
to truth, the discharge of all ordinary, social, or religious obligations, 


and the hope of final absorption into the one spirit which pervades all 
things. 


There is little or no difference therefore in essentials between the 
Saindmi’s and some of the Vaishnava unitarians, but they regard them- 
selves as a separate body, and have their own founder Jacsivan Dis. He 
was a Kshetriya by birth, and continued in the state of Grihastha, or 
house-holder, through life: he was a native of Oude, and his Samddh, or 
shrine, is shewn at Katwa, a place between Lucknow and Ajudhya. He 
wrote seyeral tracts, as the Jnyan Prakds, Mahapralaya, and Prathama 
Grantha: they are in Hindi couplets ; the first is dated in Sambat 1817, or 
A. D. 1761, the last is in the form of a dialogue between Siva and PArvari. 


The following is from the Mahdpralaya. 


304 SKETCH OF THE 


«« The pure man lives amidst all, but away from all: his affections are 
engaged by nothing: what he may know he knows, but he makes no en- 
quiry: he neither goes nor comes, neither learns nor teaches, neither cries 
nor sighs, but discusses himself with himself. There is neither pleasure 
nor pain, neither clemency nor wrath, neither fool nor sage to him. Jac- 
JIVANDAS asks, does any one know a man so exempt from infirmity who 


lives apart from mankind and indulges not in idle speech.” 
SIVA NARAYANAIS. 


This is another sect professing the worship of one God, of whom no 
attributes are predicated. Their unitarianism is more unqualified than 
that of either of the preceding, as they offer no worship, pay no regard 
whatever to any of the objects of Hindu or Mohammedan veneration. 
They also differ from all in admitting proselytes alike from Hindus or 
Mohammedans, and the sect comprises even professed Christians from 


the lower classes of the mixed population. 


Admission into the sect is not a matter of much ceremony,. anda 
Guru, or spiritual guide, is not requisite ; a few Siva Ndrdayanis assemble 
at the requisition of a novice, place one of their text books in the midst 
of them, on which betel and sweetmeats have previously been arranged. 
After awhile these are distributed amongst the party, a few passages 


are read from the book, and the sect has acquired a new member. 


Truth, temperance, and mercy are the cardinal virtues of this sect, as 
well as of the Sddhs ; polygamy is prohibited, and sectarial marks are not 
used : conformity to the external observances of the Hindu or Mohamme- 
dans, independantly of religious rites, is recommended, but latitude of 
practice is not unfrequent; and the Siva Ndrdyanis, of the lower orders, 


are occasionally addicted to strong potations. 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 305 


The sect derives its appellation from that of its founder SIVANARAYAN, 
a Rajput, of the Nerivdna tribe, a native of Chandawan, a village near 
Ghazipur : he flourished in the reign of MoHAMMED Suau, and one of his 
works is dated Sambat, 1791, or A. D. 1735. He was a voluminous writer 
in the inculcation of his doctrines, and eleven books, in Hindi verse, are 
ascribed to him. They are entitled: Lao or Lava Granth, Santvilds, 
Wajan Granth, Santsundara, Guru Nydas, Sant Achari, Sant Opadesa, 


Sabdavali, Santparwana, Sant Mahima, Sant Sagar. 


There is also a twelfth, the Seal of the whole, but it has not yet been 
divulged, remaining in the exclusive charge of the head of the sect. 
This person resides at Balsande, in the Ghazipur district, where there is 


a college and establishment. 


The Stvandrdyanis are mostly Rajputs, and many are Sipahis: many 
of the Up-county Bearers also belong to the sect. The members are 
said to be numerous about Ghazipur, and some are to be met with in 
Calcutta. 


SUNYABADIS. 


The last sect which it has been proposed to notice is one of which 
the doctrines are atheistical. There is no novelty in this creed, as it was 
that of the Charvakas and Ndstikas, and is, to a great extent, that of the 
Bauddhas and Jains; but an attempt has been recently made to give it a 
more comprehensive and universal character, and to bring it within the 


reach of popular attraction. 


A distinguished Patron of the Suinyabadis was Divarim, the Raja 
of Hatras, when that fortress was destroyed by the Marquis of Hast1nes. 
Under his encouragement, a work in Hindi verse was composed by 

G 2 


306 SKETCH OF THE 


BakurTiwar, a religious mendicant, entitled the Sunisdr, the essence of 
emptiness, the purport of which is to shew that all notions of man and 
God are fallacies, and that nothing, is: a few passages from this book will 


convey an idea of the tenets of the sect. 


““ Whatever I behold is Vacuity. Theism and Atheism—M/Aya and 
Braum—all is false, all is error—the globe itself, and the egg of Braums, 
the seven Dwipas and nine Khandas, heaven and earth, the sun and moon, 
Braumi, Visunu and Siva, K6rma and Sess, the Guru and his pupil, 
the individual and the species, the temple and the god, the observance of. 
ceremonial rites, and the muttering of prayers, all is emptiness. Speech, 


hearing and discussion are emptiness, and substance itself is no more.” 


“« Let every one meditate upon himself, nor make known his self- 
communion to another—let him be the worshipper and the worship, nor 
talk of a difference between this and that—look into yourself and not into 
another, for in yourself that other will be found—there is no other but 
myself, and I talk of another from ignorance. In the same way as I see 
my face in a glass, I see myself in others, but it is error to think 
that what I see is not my face, but that of another—whatever you see 
is but yourself, and father and mother are non-entities ; you are the 
infant and the old man, the wise man and the fool, the male and the 
female : it is you who are drowned in the stream, you who pass over, you 
are the killer, and the slain, the slayer and the eater, you are the king and 
the subject. You seize yourself and let go, you sleep, and you wake, 
you dance for yourself, you play and sing for yourself. You are the 
sensualist and the ascetic, the sick man and the strong—in short, what- 


ever you see, that is you, as bubbles, surf, and billows are all but water.” 


‘* When we are visited in sleep by visions, we think in our sleep that 


those visions are realities—we wake, and find them falsehoods, and they 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 307 


leave not a wreck behind. One man in his sleep receives some informa- 
tion, and he goes and tells it to his neighbour—from such idle narrations 
what benefit is obtained—what will be left to us when we have been 


winnowing chaff.” 


“I meditate upon the Suni Doctrine alone, and know neither virtue 
nor vice—many have been the princes of the earth, and nothing did they 
bring and nothing took they away—the good name of the liberal survived 
him, and disrepute covered the niggard with its shadow. So let men 
speak good words, that none may speak ill of them afterwards. Take 
during the few days of your life what the world offers you. Enjoy your own 
share, and give some of it to others: without liberality, who shall acquire 
reputation? Give ever after your means, such is the established rule. To 
some give money, to some respect, to some kind words, and to some 
delight. Do good to all the world, that all the world may speak good of 
you. Praise the name of the liberal when you rise in the morning, and 
throw dust upon the name of the niggard. Evil and good are attributes of 
the body—you have the choice of two sweetmeats in your hands. Karna 
was a giver of gold, and Janaxka as liberal as wise. Siv1, HariscHanpra, 
Davufcua, and many others, have acquired by their bounty fame through- 
out the world.” 


“Many now are, many have been, and many will be—the world is 
never empty; like leaves upon the trees, new ones blossom as the old 
decay. Fix not your heart upon a withered leaf, but seek the shade of 
the green foliage—a horse of a thousand rupees is good for nothing when 
dead, but a living tattoo will carry you along the road. Have no hope 
in the man that is dead, trust but in him that is living. He that is dead 
will be alive no more : a truth that all men do not know: of all those that 
have died, has any business brought any one back again, or has any one 


brought back tidings of the rest. A rent garment cannot be spun 
to} feo) DS 


308 SKETCH OF THE 


anew, a broken pot cannot be pieced again A living man has nothing 
to do with heaven and hell, but when the body has become dust, what is 


the difference between a Jackass and a dead Saint.” 


‘“« Earth, water, fire, and wind, blended together, constitute the body 
—of these four elements the world is composed, and there is nothing else. 
This is Brau, this is a pismire, all consists of these elements, and pro- 


ceeds from them through separate receptacles.” 
“« Beings are born from the womb, the egg, the germ, and vapour.” 


“ Hindus and Musselmans are of the same nature, two leaves of one tree 
—these call their teachers Mudlas, those term them Pandits ; two pitchers 
of one clay : one performs Numaz, the other offers Puja: where is the disfer- 
ence? I know of no dissimilarity—they are both followers of the doctrine 
of Duality—they have the same bone, the same flesh, the same blood, and 
the same marrow. One cuts off the foreskin, the other puts on a sacrifi- 
cial thread. Ask of them the difference, enquire the importance of these 
distinctions, and they will quarrel with you: dispute not, but know them 
to be the same—avoid all idle wrangling and strife, and adhere to the 


truth, the doctrine of DAvarim. 


‘« | fear not to declare the truth—I know no difference between a sub- 
ject and a king—T want neither homage nor respect, and hold no commu- 
nion with any but the good: what I can obtain with facility that will 
I desire, but a palace or a thicket are to me the same—the error of mine 
and thine have I cast away, and know nothing of loss or gain. When a 
man can meet with a preceptor to teach him these truths, he will destroy 
the errors of a million of births, such a teacher is now in the world, and 


such a oneis DiyarRAnm.” 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 309 


The survey that has thus been taken of the actual state of the Hindu 
religion will shew, that its internal constitution has not been exempt from 
those varieties, to which all human systems of belief are subject, and 
that it has undergone great and frequent modifications, until it presents 
an appearance which there is great reason to suppose is very different 


from that which it originally wore. 


The precise character of the primitive Hindu system will only be 
justly appreciated, when a considerable portion of the ritual of the Vedas 
shall have been translated, but some notion of their contents and purport 
may be formed from Mr. CoLesrooxe’s account of them,* as well as from 
his description of the religious ceremonies of the Hindus.{ It is also 
probable that the Institutes of Mrnu, in a great measure, harmonise with 
the Vaidik Code. 


From these sources then it would seem, that some of the original 
rites are still preserved in the Homa, or fire offerings, and in such of the 
Sanskdras, or purificatory ceremonies, as are observed at the periods of 
birth, tonsure, investiture, marriage and cremation. Even in these 
ceremonies, however, formule, borrowed from the Yantras, assume the 
place of the genuine texts, whilst on many occasions the observances of the 
Vedas are wholly neglected. Nor is this inconsistent with the original 
system, which was devised for certain recognised classes into which 
the Hindu community was then divided, and of which three out of four 
parts no longer exist—the Hindus being now distinguished into Brahmans 


and mixed castes alone—and the former having almost universally deviated 


* Asiatic Researches vol. VIIT. 


+ Asiatic Researches yol, VII. 


Ht? 


310 SKETCH OF THE 


from the duties and habits to which they were originally devoted. Nei- 
ther of these classes, therefore, can with propriety make use of the Vaidik 
ritual, and their manual of devotion must be taken from some other 


Source. 


How far the preference of any individual Divinity, as an especial 
object of veneration, is authorised by the Vedas, remains yet to be deter- 
mined ; but there is no reason to doubt that most of the forms to which 
homage is now paid are of modern canonization. At any rate such is the 
highest antiquity of the most celebrated Teachers and Founders of the 
popular sects; and Basava inthe Dekhin, VaLLaBnHa Swimi in Hindustan, 
and Cuairanya in Bengal, claim no earlier a date than the eleventh and 


sixteenth centuries. 


Consistent with the introduction of new objects of devotion, is the 
elevation of new races of individuals to the respect or reverence of the 
populace as their ministers and representatives. The Brahmans retain, it 
is true, a traditional sanctity ; and when they cultivate pursuits suited to 
their character, as the Law and Literature of their sacred language, they 
receive occasional marks of attention, and periodical donations from the 
most opulent of their countrymen. But avery mistaken notion prevails 
generally amongst Europeans of the position of the Brahmans in Hindu 
society, founded on the terms in which they are spoken of by Menu, 
and the application of the expression ‘ Priesthood,’ to the Brahmanical 
Order, by Sir Witu1Am Jones. In the strict sense of the phrase it never 
was applicable to the Brahmans, for although some amongst them acted 
in ancient times as family priests, and conducted the fixed or occasional 
ceremonials of household worship, yet even Menu holds the Brahman, 
who ministers to an idol, infamous during life, and condemned to the 
infernal regions after death, and the Sanscrit language abounds with 


synonimes for the priest of a temple, significant of his degraded condition 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 311 


both in this world and the next. Ministrant Priests in temples, there- 
fore, the Brahmans, collectively speaking, never were —and although 
many amongst them act in that capacity, it is no more their appropriate 
province than any other lucrative occupation. In the present day, how- 
ever, they have ceased to be in a great measure the ghostly advisers 
of the people, either individually or in their households. This office is now 
filled by various persons, who pretend to superior sanctity, as Gosains, 
Vairagis, and Sanydsis. Many of these are Brahmans, but they are not 
necessarily so, and it is not as Brahmans that they receive the veneration 
of their lay followers. They derive it as we have seen from individual 
repute, or more frequently from their descent from the founder of some 
particular division, as is the case with the Gokulastha Gosains and the 
Goswdmis of Bengal. The Brahmans as a caste exercise little real influ- 
ence on the minds of the Hindus beyond what they obtain from their 
numbers, affluence and rank. As a hierarchy they are null, and as a lite- 
rary body they are few, and meet with but slender countenance from their 
countrymen or their foreign rulers. That they are still of great import- 
ance in the social system of British India, is unquestionable; but it is 
not as a priesthood. They bear a very large proportion to all the 
other tribes,—they are of more respectable birth, and in general of 
better education—a prescriptive reverence for the order improves these 
advantages, and Brahmans are accordingly numerous amongst the most 
affluent and distinguished members of every Hindu state. It is only, 
however, as far as they are identified with the Gurus of the popular 


sects, that they can be said to hold any other than secular consideration. 


Aware apparently of the inequality upon which those Gurus con- 
tended with the long established claims of the Brahmanical tribe, the new 
teachers of the people took care to invest themselves with still higher 
pretensions. The Acharya or Guru of the three first classes, is no doubt 


described by Menv, as entitled to the most profound respect from his pupil 


312 SKETCH OF THE 


during pupilage, but the Guru of the present day exacts implicit devotion 
from his disciples during life. It is unnecessary here to repeat what 
there has been previous occasion to notice with respect to the extravagant 
obedience to be paid by some sectarians to the Guru, whose favour is 


declared to be of much more importance than that of the god whom he 


represents. 


Another peculiarity in the modern systems which has been adverted to 
in the preceding pages, is the paramount value of Bhakti—faith—implicit 
reliance on the favour of the Deity worshipped. This is asubstitute for all 
religious or moral acts, and an expiation for every crime. Now, in the 
Vedas, two branches are distinctly marked, the practical and speculative. 
The former consists of prayers and rules for oblations to any or all of the 
gods—but especially to Inpra and Aant, the ruler of the firmament and 
of fire, for positive worldly goods, health, posterity and affluence. The lat- 
ter is the investigation of matter and spirit, leading to detachment from 
worldly feelings and interests, and final liberation from bodily existence. 
The first is intended for the bulk of mankind, the second for philosophers 
and ascetics. There is not a word of faith, of implicit belief or passionate 
devotion in all this, and they seem to have been as little essential to the 
primitive Hindu worship as they were to the religious systems of Greece 
and Rome. Bhakti is an invention, and apparently a modern one, of the 
Institutors of the existing sects, intended like that of the mystical holiness 
of the Guru, to extend their own authority. It has no doubt exercised a 


most mischievous influence upon the moral principles of the Hindus. 


Notwithstanding the provisions with which the sectarian Gurus 
fortified themselves, it is clear that they were never able to enlist the whole 
of Hinduism under their banners, or to suppress all doubt and disbelief. 
it has been shewn in the introductory pages of this essay, that great 
latitude of speculation has always been allowed amongst the Brahmans 


RELIGIOUS SECTS OF THE HINDUS. 313 


themselves, and it will have been seen from the notices of different sects, 
that scepticism is not unfrequent amongst the less privileged orders. The 
tendency of many widely diffused divisions is decidedly monotheistical, 
and we have seen that both in ancient and modern times, attempts have 
been made to inculcate the doctrines of utter unbelief. It is not likely 
that these will ever extensively spread, but there can be little doubt that 
with the diffusion of education, independant enquiry into the merits of the 
prevailing systems and their professors, will become more universal, and be 
better directed. The germ is native to the soil: it has been kept alive for 
ages under the most unfavourable circumstances, and has been apparently 
more vigorous than ever during the last century. It only now requires 
prudent and patient fostering to grow into a stately tree, and yield goodly 


fruit. 


314 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


MEMOTR 


OF A 


SURVEY or ASAM anv tur NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES, 
EXECUTED IN 1825-6-7-8. 


By LIEUTENANT R. WILCOX. 


In the following Memoir I propose to give a detailed account of. the 
progress of our Geographical Discoveries on the N. E. Frontier from the 
time when our armies advancing in that direction opened to us countries of 


which we had till then a very imperfect knowledge. 


Narratives of some of the journies have been already published, and — 
much of the new information has been included in a paper in the 16th 
Vol. of the Asiatic Researches: but the former are scattered in the News- 
papers or Periodicals without connection to enable the enquirer to collect 
the scattered gleams of information into one common focus, while the 
latter, including only the results obtained by one of the individuals engag- 
ed in that quarter, and applying also to statistic enquiries; gives neces- 
sarily an inadequate idea of our acquisitions in Geographical information 
properly so called, as it also stops short of the date at which our enquiries 


terminated. This appears to have been felt by the Society, who have 


32 — 


24i 


Niensna koen 5 


=< Leng hankiiii 7 
ie Sy 


, 


ASAM tsa reduction from (he Maps on alarger. cole recently constriicled ut lhe 
Surveyor Genes als office by Lik Wilcox fron hisows Siuveys ad from Chose of Gagyt 
Bedpord awd Jones, and LE Be ddingpld 

The Dislricl of Sylhet 1116 lading as faras Agu ou the Read lo Manipur from Lt 
hushers lale Surveys. Munwpur and us Pribulirves from Livemnberton, and lhe 
hyanduayn belween Nal yr and us moulh from 1M! Mowtnierency SSULUCYS, and 
belsvecn Monfu and Thumanhe, frovea hap by LE Bedding pull on OY OT 774 lion 


goer by Burrmase Vraders. The Frawadé lo tin HEP Af A pro 1 Wocds Mays, 


and le Lhaaino from Maps Por eviously constructed i LD)? Buchannarns dala . 
The whole of the catermediate Countries belween Assan and Chita, cneluding 
lace heads of lhe Brahmaputra, lrawmads and kya duagn ft wn Cnfor ration 
codecled by Lt Widcox whileal Sadiya or on the course of hes VAILOUS fou rites. 

The positions wndependantly assured wn Longilude from astronamecal ob- 
Servalons Are VN ELPaplUra from observations of Bis dalelliles vornpared 
wh corr eupon ding observations at Madras Saiyan from cbsrervalions of 
kclopses of he 1 Satellite compared woth corresponding ences iade al Catcutta 
and Fullehgurh by Litol Hodgson Surveyor General. Ma nypas alse from 
vernilar observations, wra Bushenalh front a dong SELES Of CINNICOUS Of 
he 1 Salcllile. 


Scale 32bRritish Miles Coan treh. 


70 5 0 40 20 30 AC jv or Io Br we 100¢ 


SSS 2 eS a eee I I i { I 1] 
| 
| 


Ne 
MY (ccc 


ry om 


23 


ine eS 


; . < 
Minha 
Comprising, 
~ ASAM «vo MANIPUR 
Uehilly Dutrakesfithe StwarnasppatofSuaw andl fhe Chines Prowinces yf 
N and THIBET 


YUN- 


Kedaced from a tye of the 
1 Wilet tories Inche.t7 he LuPregae tn 
Caleulin 130. 


ne Me oY J Falegas hoy “lw 
ewind the Sources of the 

rawadi river 

(be astern brunchey of lbe 


"35 


inal May by LER Wileox: on 
ennviels Ofece 


4 


Leama end amery wery placed fy lahing there 
Et am Frome Shapalee as res ap 
Sa er aa 


2 ouketanopss 


~ fonepurTehamta 


\rrsley ap 


Ret SME LENE ee. many he 


yy 


rowy Mans” £2 
Sean fim Cte 


7 Mesiniaine wererdasg tothe singsohs 


Will Territory 
fhe haya 
TILAK 


Julep dant ia 


hs 


Snetamnee 


~: ra 
mala 
pL ke 


7 
wv 
a’ 
i 
= 


Ce 


he 


{ 


aaa 


we 
aa ead 
Mei) 


5 


SUE me tip encore 


AAD iene fom th ape agyr an relly marci me 
Dever Wedel eit By TEI i fs Basome Seg sek th Fg 
BeSfird ad lotes woik U Medd ing ke 

Tha alr ef Sebel i ding ie frat agit win the Raasd fe Maniomr im 
Hehe tite Sicriye Misr snd ie Tried i04 fev ED bern crmh the 
ptiay deci Nak tee sre rid fren Lt Mon beara ewe ind 
Kieron Meafis ae May by OE Being bd on efor sin 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 315 


expressed a wish in a note attached to that paper by their Secretary, that 
some task similar to the one I propose to myself should be undertaken. 
The interest too excited by the question of the identity of the Sanpo and 
Brahmaputra, evidenced by the notice taken of the subject in Europe, 
seems to call for the execution of such a task: and I have therefore 


been induced to draw up the following Memoir. 


I should have been well pleased to have seen the task fall into other © 
hands, and I have delayed undertaking it in the hope of some one better 
prepared anticipating me, yet I would not be understood to disqualify 
myself more than necessary. Having been on the spot from the begin- 
ning, at first an interested observer, and latterly employed in exploring 
myself much of the Terra incognita of that quarter, I consider that I 
ought to be able to give a connected view of the progressive steps made, 
as well as to supply many particulars necessary to the full comprehension 


of the subject, not yet generally adverted to. 


In October 1824, several of the Officers employed in Revenue Sur- 
veys were taken from those duties, and placed (to continue during the 
war) under the superintendance of Major Scuatcu, in order that accompa- 
nying the several divisions of the army and receiving his instructions, 
they might derive advantage to the utmost practicable extent of the 
opportunities so suddenly and unexpectedly opened of pushing our inves- 
tigations beyond those barriers which the well or ill-founded jealousy of 
our Eastern neighbours had hitherto opposed to us, and which we had 


till then no immediate hope of surmounting. 


In the distribution I was appointed to act with Captain Beprorp as 
his Assistant, and our province was Asam. Besides the instructions given 
generally to his corps by Major Scuacu, (as conveyed in a circular letter) 


Captain Breprorp was verbally directed to consider the Brahmaputra 


316 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


as the chief object to which his attention should be directed. He was 
to endeavour to unravel the mystery in which was enveloped each notice 
or tradition respecting its fountain head by proceeding up its streams 
as far as the influence of the neighbouring force, or the safeguard of a 


detached escort might permit. 


We arrived at Goalpara, on the frontier of Asam, in the latter end 
of January, 1825, immediately after the capitulation of the Burma force 
at Rangpur, and we were then eager to join the Head-Quarters in full 
expectation of an attempt being made to advance towards Amarapura. 
We were already making anxious enquiries respecting the source of the 
Brahmaputra, and we were given to understand that the Asamese per- 
sisted in acommon declaration that it rises in the East beyond their terri- 
tories. We were told of a cataract, which imagination perhaps, rather 
than report, founded on respectable information, long continued to 
magnify into a splendid fall of the whole river from the bordering ridge 


of mountains. 


Mr. Scorr,* indefatigable and ardent in the cause of scientific 
research, had in the meantime, on arriving at Rangpur, caused Lieutenant 
Buruton to be detached, to survey the river beyond as far as practicable ; 
but there no longer existed such extreme doubt about the direction and dis- 
tance of the navigable part of its course. The Natives knew well that 
the boats of Bengal could not pass more than one day’s journey beyond 
Sadiya; (in Lat. 27° 48’ Long. 95° 40’) they spoke confidently (and their 
information could no longer be doubted) of the Brahmakund, the origin 


of the river, being situated in the East; and, indeed, they had presented 


* Ensign (now Colonel) Wood’s Survey reached no further than Rangpur, and he leaves the 
space beyond a perfect blank. He accounts for the paucity of his Geographical information beyond 
the mere line of the river, by the difficulties he laboured under in holding intercourse with the 


Natives. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. $17 


a Map drawn in their own incorrect style, shewing the situation of the 
notable villages or districts, and exhibiting the various nalas feeding the 
Brahmaputra within their limits. It was afterwards remarked that in this 
production, the Dihong and the Dibong were not distinguished from other 


tributary streams. 


The commission with which Lieutenant Buriron was charged was 
executed by him in a highly creditable manner. With a surveying com- - 
pass only, and unfurnished with any instrument for measuring distances, 
he surveyed the river to Sadiya and a short distance beyond, and subse- 


quent measurement has detected but little error in the Map he made. 


In the Government Gazette of 9th May, 1825, appeared an extract 
from Lieutenant Buriton’s letter, giving an account of this expedition, it 
is dated ‘On the river Burrampooter, N. Lat. 27° 54’ E. Long. 95° 24’ 
March 31st, 1825."* He reports that he had that day got as high up the 
river, as it was navigable: its bed, he says, was a complete mass of rocks,t 
with only a depth of three or four feet waterin the deepest part, the rapidity 
of the current was also so great, that no boat could track against it, put- 
ting the danger of striking on the rocks out of the question. He = consi- 
ders it as about the size of the Kullong river, (one hundred and fifty yards 
across) and the extreme banks as being not more than six hundred yards 
apart. Lieutenant Buriron regrets that hecould not proceed further either 
by land or water. It was represented to be at least ten days’ journey to the 


Brahmakund, and he had but a few days provisions left—what he had 


learnt respecting the course of the river above, was “ that it runs easterly 


* The true place was about Lat. 27° 49’ and Long, 95° 52’. 


+ Not rocks in situ, but rounded stones and pebbles brought down from the mountains in 
the rainy season. R. W. 


K 2 


318 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


till it reaches the lowest range of mountains,* (Lieutenant Buriron 
could see the range, and supposed it to be about fifty miles distant,) 
where it falls from a perpendicular height of about one hundred and 
twenty feet, and forms a large bottomless bay, which is called the Brahma 
Kund.” Above the low range are some high mountains, which are 
covered with snow, and from the narrowness of the water he imagined, 
that the source of the Brahmaputra must be there, as it seemed very 
improbable such a small body of water could run the distance it is repre- 


sented or supposed to do. 


From what the Natives said respecting the Siri Sirhit,{ or Irawadi, 
Lieutenant BurLron was inclined to think that that river rises at the 


same place. 


The impression made by the foregoing account is apparent in the 
remarks made upon it by the Editor of the Government Gazette. Dis- 
cussing RENNELL’s inference of the connexion of the Sanpu and Brahma- 
putra rivers, he says, ‘The Sanpu where left by the Chinese is called. 
a very large river, and the name itself Sanpu, is said to imply the river par 
excellence. How happens it then upon entering Asam to have lost all 
claim to such a character, and to be little more than a hill torrent, with only 
three or four feet water in its greatest depth.” Had Lieutenant Burtron 
added an account of the discharge of the river, according to the sections 
he took below the Biri Dihong mouth, and near Sadiya, this idea of the 
character of the river could never have been formed. For the quantity of 


water discharged per second in the former place, was found to be 86,727 


* It is hardly necessary to observe, that Lieut. Buritron means from the East, or from the 
lowest range of mountains westerly. 

+ It was so printed, but Lieut. Burtton must have printed and probably wrote the Seeree 
Lohit, or Sri Lohit. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 319 


cubic feet per second, and of the sacred Brahmaputra, or eastern branch 
passing Sadiya, 32,413 feet in the same time. It is however to be 
observed, that there had been a considerable rise before the latter 
measurement was made, and that divided as the river is in that 
part of its stream near Rangpur into many channels, it is probable 
that the former did not embrace the whole river, or that some of the minor 


channels had been omitted, being inaccessible. 


The next notice that appeared is in the Government Gazette, 9th June, 
and it is important to notice it, if merely to show that attention was 
not yet directed to the navigation of the Drhong, though it is men- 
tioned in these terms: ‘“ The river (i. e. Brahmaputra) washes Siléni 
Mikh or Mir, so called from the numerous stones and fragments of 
rock washed down from the hills by the Dihong and Dibong rivers, 
which soon after empty themselves into the Loft; these rise and 
flow from perceptible openings in the high chain of hills to the north- 
ward, and considerably contribute to the mass of the river, which after 
passing above their mouths, diminishes materially in bulk and im- 
portance.” The writer further says, “ But the object of greatest interest 
to topographical science is a clear and distinct opening in the lower lofty 
ranges bearing due east, behind which is pointed out by all ranks and 
classes, the Brahma Kund, or reservoir, whence flows the Brahmapuira, 
and distant from hence not more than forty or fifty miles—six days’ jour- 
ney. The stream is described as taking its rise from a circular basin or 
well in the side of the mountain beneath the snowy region, while behind 


and above it are stupendous ranges of impracticable transit.” 


In the mean time Captain Beprorp and myself had reached Bisha- 
nath, where directions were received in a letter from Colonel RicHarps, 


commanding the force, to survey the Bwit Lohit, or old channel of the 


320 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


river, to the head of the Majhol island, and as both Officers might be 
profitably employed, we were directed to separate, one of the two 


re-surveying in progress to Rangpur, the Dihing, or southern branch. 


I may here endeavour to elucidate a point which I observe has caused 
considerable difficulty—I have it on the authority of the present Bar 
Gohayn of Asam, corroborated by the evidence of other well-informed 
Asamese whom I had questioned, that before the remarkable flood from 
the Dihong altered entirely the state of its channels, and the direction - 
of the principal body of the river, the Dihing did not disembogue itself 
where it does now into the Brahmaputra, but turning to the south-east 
received the Disang, and Dikho, the Jazi, and Disai river, and was dis- 
charged into the great river near Mahura. A peninsula, or rather long 
neck of land then existed, and the channel of the Dihing was then in the 
bed of that branch still retaining the name. The great river from near 
Silant Mir to Sis2, flowed ina bed which still continues to fill in the 
rains, though it is of diminished size to the north of the present channel, 
It is called the Biot Suti, or Sati Lohit. The Birt Lohit, since this 
singular division of its former supply of water has become of so little 
consequence that above the junction of the Subanshira, it is barely naviga- 
ble in the dry season. The division of the waters of the Dehing is an 
event of much later date. It is said that the passage through the low 
land in the direction of Sadiya, was aided by some rivulet draining the 
jungles, that an accumulation of stones in the vicinity of the Kusan hills, 
was the immediate cause, and thatthe opening now called the new Dehing, 
was very gradually enlarged by the influence of successive rains, causing 
an equivalent diminution to the ancient Dihing, the old communication 
with which has no water in the cold season, and indeed, the name of 
Biwi Dihing might fairly be dropped in favor of the Namrup, from 
which it derives its present supply. Whether there existed a channel of 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 321 


communication between the Dihing and Lohit near the spot where the 


Biri Dihing now meets the latter, I never could satisfactorily learn. 


But to return from this digression, Captain Brprorp chose the 
Biri Lohit, as it presented novelty, and left me to retrace Ensign 
Woon’s steps towards Rangpur: he completed his survey; but I met with 
an unfortunate accident in the progress of mine: about half way from 
Bishanéth, my map and field book, with the greatest part of my pro- 
perty, were lost by the sinking of my boat. Captain Breprorp after- 
wards continued his route towards Sadiya, making a more accurate survey 
than Lieutenant Bururon had the means of doing; and before the expira- 
tion of the month of June, he had surveyed not only the whole distance 
on the great river from Beshanath to Tenga Pani, but having accompa- 
nied Captain NeurviLve on the expedition against the Singfo Chiefs, 


he also added a hasty survey of the Noa Dihing. 


- Soon after my arrival at Dikho Miukh in April, Colonel Ricuarps 
permitted me to accompany a party of the 46th Regiment, which was to 
proceed up the Disang river to Borhath, to protect the Asamese of the 
intermediate district in advance of Rangpur, from incursions of the. 
Stngfos, who had lately, in considerable strength, made a very daring and 


successful incursion close in the neighbourhood of the force. 


After passing Bel Bari on the Disang, | found the banks of the river 
clothed with an impenetrable tree forest, and the distances I was com- 
pelled to estimate in time, guided by the experience I had of the progress of 
my boat at those places where it was practicable to use my perambulator. 
About five miles by the river below Borhath, we first encountered the 
shallow rapids formed by the accumulation of the pebbles brought down 
by the stream, and further progress in Bengali boats was impossible ; 
but one of the Asam guides offered to conduct me to Borhath; and after 


Thy We 


322 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


a most laborious march through jungle, where no trace of a path was to 


be found, I reached the place. 


Near to Borhdth, are several salt springs, whence a considerable 
quantity of salt used formerly to be obtained. Those at present worked 
were too far removed within the Naga hills, for me to visit them; the 
evaporation is carried on in green bamboos, and the salt presented was 
generally of a grey colour, extremely hard and compact, having the form 
of the bamboo in which it had been boiled, and possessing the radiated 
structure in perfection.* 


After passing eighteen rapids in an attempt to survey the river 
beyond Borhdth I desisted ; the hills which I had then an opportunity of 
examining, for they were generally covered with soil to some depth, were 
either of grey or yellow sandstone : the former of a close hard texture and 
the latter coarse, and when exposed to the action of the waters converted 


speedily into clay ; coal is found at no great distance. 


I was told that the produce of the Ndga hills is limited to ginger, 


black pepper, a few vegetables, iron and salt. 


With the aid of an elephant anda party of coolies, I attempted to 
drag a canoe across to the old fort of Jypur, but on my arrival there I 
found my boat so much injured by rough usage in the way through the 
close forest that it was no longer serviceable. An Asamese captive had 
fortunately made his escape that day from the hands of the Singfos, 
and having robbed them of a canoe, in addition to such trifles as he could 


conveniently seize and carry off in it, he presented himself to our notice, 


* May not these salt springs belong to the new red sandstone formation ? 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 323 


singing most lustily and merrily the song of liberty, and he readily yielded 
his prize tome. In his canoe I dropped down the Buri Dihing to its 
mouth, taking the bearings of its numerous reaches, and noting the time. 
I mention this incident as a note of the mode in which the survey was 
performed. The Biri Dihing wanders through a forest as dense as that 
of the parrellel river Disang, and the country between the two at that 
time was said to be an inhospitable tract of rank jungle, without a vestige 
of inhabitants. 


The fort of Jypur L found so much overgrown with high grass jungle, 
that I must have passed it unawares, had not my guide pointed it out. It 
is a square of three hundred and fifty yards, with a dry ditch of six feet 


deep, the earth from which is thrown up in the form of a wall or bank six 
feet high. 


My next employment was a survey of the river Dikho, which was 
made under more favorable circumstances for arriving at accuracy, as the 
distance by the bund road both to Kowarpara and to Ghergong was survey- 
ed, and hills determined in position from this base served to correct the 
remaining portion, but here as in the Diéisang, after arriving within a 
certain distance of the hills, I found it impossible to proceed : it is similar 


in character to the before named rivers. 


As my object is to give a connected view of the several steps of our 
discoveries, | must not omit to mention Lieutenant Jones’s Journal of his 
March from Rangpur with the detachment, which I found at Borhdih on 


my arrival there. 


The Journal was noticed in the Government Gazette of 23d of June, 
and its contents though interesting, scarcely require repetition, as they 


chiefly describe the embarrassments of a party moving on bad roads 


324 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


through a jungly and swampy tract intersected by swollen rivers. For 
the first fourteen miles, they encountered swamps, jheels, and tree jungle ; 
then, after coming on a good broad road, and proceeding one mile along 
it, they found a fine stone bridge, of three arches, in good repair, over the 
Tezakhana nullah. The broad road continued (occasionally broken) 
through a more open country with the Naga hills on the right at no great 
distance. The Chipera river was crossed by the help of a party of Nagas, 
who are very expert in felling timber, and a raft was constructed for pass- 


ing the baggage over the T’sokak, which could not be forded by elephants. 


On the 20th of June, appeared some further information, derived 
from Lieutenant Nevurvitye, who, by means of some Khang lis, (Khamiis ) 
originally from the Bor Khangti country, had been enabled to add to his 
former account, that ‘“ The Bor Khangti country, before remarked, lies 
in a direction from this spot a little to the south of east on the other side 
of the high snowy hills of the Brahmakund. These ranges he now finds 
extend back to a far greater depth than he had at first supposed, and he 
is assured toa far higher altitude than any of those now visible.* The 
Burrampooter or Lohit, accessible only as far as the reservoir of the Brah- 
makund, (unless perhaps to the hill Meeshmees) takes its original rise very 
considerably to the eastward, issuing from the snow at one of the loftiest 
of the ranges, thence it falls a mere mountain rivulet to the brim of the 
Brahmakund, which receives also the tribute of three streams from the 


Meesmee hills, called Juhjung, Tisseek and Digaroo.t. From the opposite 


* To the north east of Sudiya, there are higher mountains than those visible from the station— 
but directly towards the sources of the Brakmaputra, it does not appear that there are any higher. 


+ The only stream falling into the Awnd or near it, is the Deopani, a mountain rill. The 
Digaré falls into the Brahmaputra miles west of the Kand, on the north bank the Mitee is 
the nearest, falling in from the south about half mile beyond. The Tisseeck and Julyung, I do 


not recognise. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 325 


side of the same mountain, which gives the primeval rise to the Bur- 
rampooter, the Khangtis state (as they had before stated to Lieutenant 
Burtrton,) ‘that the Irawaddy takes its source running south, intersect- 
ing their country and flowing to the Ava empire. This theory of the sources 
of the streams is thought by far the most probable; and it agrees more 
with the general accounts and the geographical features of the country.” 
A little to the northward of east the opening of the Brahmakund is 
another less defined dip in the lofty line of the Meeshmee hills, through 
which Lieutenant Neurvit.e has received a route, accessible to the moun- 


taineers, of twenty days to the country of the Lama.* 


It would be unjust to omit in these details notice of a service 
rendered to geography by Lieutenant BepineFirtp, when communi- 
cation was opened with the Burmas after the fall of Rangpur; from 
several compared accounts he compiled a map of the Kenduen river, 
from the latitude of Amarapura to its sources, which is no doubt 
very nearly correct in its general features and also in many particu. 
lars. Subsequent accounts derived from Singfos, have enabled us to 
improve on the central part and add more topographical detail respect- 
ing the time of route of the Burmas, nor ought I to omit an account 
of a journey into Bhutan, performed by a Persian, under Mr. Scort’s 
orders, and from which we learn principally that a route from Gohaiz 
to Miursing gaon, in anortherly direction, ora little inclining to east, crosses 


the Bhirul river, which falls into the Brahmaputra, opposite Kaliabar. 


* Given in the 16th vol. of Researches: the number of days I suppose nearly correct, but I can- 
not recognise more than one of the names of the stages, i. e. Tidong for Tiding river, ‘* which might 
be reached in one day from the Kund by an active Meesmee,” but the first cane bridge across the 
river is, I think, above the confluence of the Tiding, and in that case the Tiding would not require 
to be crossed in proceeding eastward. The route to the Zama country generally used is on the 
banks of the river. 


M 2 


326 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


Mirsing gaon is situated on the left bank of the Bhirul. The information 
collected by him from respectable Towang people, places that town three 
days farther north on the Bonash river, which joins the Bra/maputra at 


Goalpara. 


The possession of the whole of Asam, by giving us access to so many 
points for enquiry on the north bank of the Brahmaputra, appearing now 
so much in favour of an attempt to solve the geographical problem of the 
connexion which this river has with the Sanpo, I was detached from 
the Asam force, by Colonel Biacker, and instructed to act under the 
guidance and support of Mr. Scorr, in the prosecution of this most 
interesting inquiry, and for the purpose of consulting with that gentleman, 


was directed to proceed to Goalpara. 


I received Colonel Buacker’s instruction at Goalpara. Mr. Scorer 
had, in the meantime, neglected no opportunity of gathering information, 
but the Asamese proved fully as incurious as our subjects of Hindustan, 
and we found that even in directing our attention to the points best fitted 
for our first attempt, we should receive scarcely any aid from the best 
informed amongst them. As a specimenof the style of the few traditions on 
the subject which they were found possessed of, I shall give an extract from 
one of their books furnished by Boca Damra PHOoKEND,* who, we were 


told, is rich in the possession of such lore. 


Judging from this wild story as a specimen, it might be inferred, that 
the Asamese account of the singular rise of the Dihong in 1735 (? ) is not 
well authenticated. Not only, however, have we the evidence of their his- 


tories for this fact, but sufficient proof exists in the great alterations in the 


* Boca Damra, white calf, a jocular name given here by the common people : his real name 


I do not recollect. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 327 


state of the rivers which then occurred, as I have before noticed. The 
Abors and Mirts ought to be in possession of all the facts relative to 
this occurrence, as they were the first observers of it, and the latter tribe 
having their villages on the east bank of the Dihong in the plains desolat- 
ed by it: but they deny all knowledge of these remarkable circumstances ; 
and indeed the Adors, when questioned about the elephant trappings, (or 
shackles for binding elephants) as I believe the statement in history gives 
it, immediately accounted for the appearance (of the latter) by the resem- 
blance to some of their own implements.* ‘The Abors gave a reason for 
the rise of the Dihong ; but they did not speak confidently ; they thought 
it was occasioned, by the river having suddenly penetrated, at a sharp 
turning, the earthy barrier opposed to it, or overturned a ledge of rocks. 
That this enormous body of water having so large a fall in that part of its 
course southward through the Ador mountains, must exert an extraordi- 


nary force, cannot be doubted. 


' After some deliberation as to the route I should attempt, Mr. Scorr 
recommended that I should try the Sibanshiri before proceeding further 
eastward, and I started with a liberal supply of red cloth, beads, and such 
other articles as were likely to please the mountaineers. Having arrived 
at its mouth on the 28th November, I commenced my survey on the follow- 
ing day ; but I was disappointed to find my further progress impeded on 
the sixth day by rapids, occasioned by the accumulation of round stones 
brought down from the hills, where, from its mouth, I had got but twenty- 


two miles latitude to the north. 


Some of the Chiefs of an Abdor tribe had arrived at this time, to make 


their annual collections from the district north of the Buri Lohit. They 


* The Writer in the 16th vol. Asiatic Researches, appears to consider this tradition as of some 
authority. 


328 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


claim the whole of those plains as their domain, but whether this claim is 
the origin of their exactions, or whether the imbecile government of 
Asam had allowed to grow into a confirmed custom, an evil which they 
could not counteract, does not appear; however, from the Bhirili to 
the banks of the Dihong, the whole of the hill tribes pretend to similar 
rights, and have never been interfered with, when, at the accustomed 
season, they have descended from their strong holds and peaceably taken 


their dues from each separate dwelling. 


I had an interview with Tatine Gam, the most powerful of these 
Abor Miris, and my presents of rum and cloth wrought so well with 
him, that I entertained hopes of starting for his village in his company, 
and had arranged to move off in canoes, to have the advantage of water 
conveyance for my provisions the remaining navigable portion of the 


river, which is said to be but three days. 


My enquiries had not elicited any information to warrant the expec- 
tation of a successful result from this trip, as it appeared that the few 
articles of Tibetan manufacture, found amongst this people, were acquired 
by traffic with tribes more to the eastward : they would not acknowledge 
any acquaintance with the countries to the north, but described them as 
an uninhabited wild tract of hill and jungle. To their N. W., however, 
they place the Onka Miris, whose country, they say, is a level table land, 
and they are of opinion that these come in contact with the Bhotiyas—I 
thought that by gaining a footing in the first villages in the hills, I might 
either induce the people to throw off this reserve, if my suspicions of their 
concealing their knowledge were correct, or perhaps advance sufficiently 
far towards the north to make more effectual enquiries. I was disappointed 
through the interference of the Asamese of the Sonari villages, who 
anticipated some unknown evil from our communication with their hill 


neighbours, and this friendly Chieftain positively refused to accompany 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 329 


me, or to let any of his people guide me till he should have returned and 


consulted his people. 


Of the Stidanshiri, they could only tell me that itis divided above into 
three branches. It is called by them Kamla, and the principal branch 
rises in the N. or N. W. Snow, which I had seen lying on the mountain 
in a northerly direction, they told me was fifteen days’ journey from their 
villages, and added that in the north east, they could perceive it hanging 
on the mountains, in great quantity, throughout the year. The Miris 
bring down to exchange with the lowlanders, ginger, pepper, manjit, 
(madder) and wax. The Abors of Sueng Meng and Dohar Doowars, more 


eastward, have also copper vessels, straight swords and elephants’ teeth. 


The Stibanshiri river is scarcely inferior to the Ganges at Allahabad 
in December. I found the discharge at its mouth 16,000 cubic feet 
per second, and up to the hills its tributary streams are few and of little 
consequence. I think there is no doubt of its being the Omchu of Du Hatpr 
and RenNeELL. Its low banks are covered with tree jungle and are subject to 
inundation; there are very few villages visible from the river, but inland, 
on both sides, the country is better cultivated and more populous than 


other parts of upper Asam, with the exception of Jurhath and Char Dwar. 


It had been agreed with Mr. Scorr that in the event of my meeting 
with no success here, I should go on to the Dihong and Dibong, and if 
Captain Beprorp had not already explored those rivers as far as practi- 


cable, that | should make my attempt there. 


My own belief, founded on the reports of the Miris, now on. the 
Stibanshiri, who had emigrated from the banks of those rivers, was that 
neither would be found navigable, and I was prepared to move overland 
wherever I could find admittance. The Miris did not pretend to any 


N 2 


a 


330 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


certain knowledge of the origin of the Dihong, and they seemed to think 
that the notions current amongst their tribe and the Asamese, as little 
worthy my attention. They informed me that a tradition prevails with 
the Abors of the Svbanshiri, that their hunters once, travelling in quest of 
game, went much further towards the north than usual, and that they 
arrived at the banks of a noble and rapid river separating their wild hills 
from cultivated spreading plains, whence the lowing of oxen was distinctly 
audible. Another singular account they mentioned of the Dihong Abors, 
that the Dihong is an anastomosing branch of a river of great magnitude, 
called $72 Lohit, which also throws off the Brahmaputra, and passes into 
unknown regions to the eastward. The Adors are supposed to see this Svi 
Lohit, and on the opposite bank numbers of people, of a strange tribe, are 
perceived coming down to the ghaut to bathe, but it is too rapid and too broad 
to becrossed. Another taleis, that the Sondris not finding the sand equally 
productive as usual in their old washing haunts, continued their way in a 
small canoe up the river, renewing their search for gold continually, but 
in vain, but that they suddenly arrived in a populous country, the man- 
ners and appearance of the inhabitants of which were strange to them; 
that on mentioning what had brought them so far from their houses, 
they were instantly rewarded for their toil by a large gift of the precious 
ore, and sent back delighted. 


The Asamese are of opinion that the families of a Bor Gohayn, who 
had been sent for under suspicious circumstances by the reigning Raja, 
took refuge in the Kaléa country ; but they seem to want authority for 
the opinion, and at all events it is extremely doubtful, whether any inter- 
course was kept up afterwards. I hesitate to express this opinion, 
because an opposite statement has been made. My grounds for it are 
that, when perusing the Asamese history, I did not meet with a satisfac- 
tory account of what became of them. My recollection is, that ‘the 


sons and family of the Gohayn fled up the Dihong,”’ and the present 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 331 


very respectable Bor Gohayn of Asam could not give me better authority 
than mere tradition for the additional circumstances of their finding 
refuge in the Kalita country, and after intercourse with their friends in 


Asam. 


On my arrival at Sadiya, I found that Captain Beprorp had already 
proceeded up both the Dihong and Dibong, as far as he was permitted by 
the mountaineers, and I had great reason to fear that the same obstacles 
which he had experienced, would also interfere with my progress ; but 
being provided with abundance of cloth, salt, and various articles in 
request amongst them, besides having the means of taking with mea 
sufficient guard to insure personal safety, an advantage which Captain 
Beprorp wanted; moreover, having letters addressed in the Asamese 
language to the Abors, given me by the Junior Commissioner, and Miri 
Interpreters, who were accustomed to intercourse with them, I did not 


hesitate to make the trial. 


As Captain Beprorp’s journey of this river was anterior to mine, 
so his account, extracts of which were published in the Government 
Gazette of 2d February, deserves a preference, I shall therefore endeavour, 
from these extracts, to convey the best idea I can of this most interesting 


river. 


18th November.—On the first day after leaving the Brahmaputra, 
Captain Beprorp was struck with the placid and mild character of the 
river, expecting as he did from all accounts of the utter impossibility 
of navigating it, to find it abounding in rocks and with a violent current. 
Sands were as frequent as in the Brahmaputra, and the jungle similar, 
that is, grass covers the islands and grounds formed by alluvial deposits, 
while the forests clothe the banks of older date: deer were numerous in 


the grass jungles. 


332 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


19th November.—The second day no material obstacle was encountered, 
however stone beds were found to be taking place of sands, and several 
rapids were passed. The hills appeared near at hand, and in them a 
remarkable break, which was afterwards found to be, as conjectured, the 


channel of the river. 


20th November.—The third day the rapids were more numerous, 
and more troublesome, but on the fourth, (21st of November,) they 
obstructed progress materially. Wherever encountered, the people were 
obliged to get out of the canoes, both to lighten them and to assist with 
their strength in pushing them against the currents. The direction of 
the river hitherto, nearly N. and S., is suddenly from the N. W. Deer 
and buffaloes were seen in numbers, as well as the large water fowl, called 
Keewaree. Musk beetles were very annoying from the intolerable odour 
communicated by contact with them; the hills were now so near, that 
trees and the colors of the foliage were plainly distinguishable on the 
nearer ranges, as well as the patches cleared for cultivation, but no habi- 


tation was yet seen. 


22d November.—After tolerable progress, Captain Beprorp arrived in 
the evening near Pasval, an Abor village, which is halfa day’s journey inland 
from the river, on the right bank. This was the limit of his excursion, 
as, on various pretences, the Abors of that place opposed his further pro- 
gress. One plea urged was, that any one, having met them on friendly 
terms, would, no doubt, be very ill received by the Adors higher up, with 
whom they were at enmity. It was, therefore, necessary to return, after 
a stay of two days, and with such information as was to be obtained from 
the Natives, who, though obstinate on the score of a further advance, 
and troublesome, from their rude habits and childish curiosity, were, on 


the whole, amicable and communicative. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 333 


The hills on the right bank belong to the Pasial and Mayong Abors, 
and those on the left to the Padoo, Siboo and Meeboo, and Goliwar Abors. 


The Pasial Abors were armed respectably enough; every man had a 
bow and quiver of arrows, part of the latter of which were poisoned.* 
They also carry light spears, or the sharp heavy sword (Da) of the Sing- 
fos. The Abors are not particular in their diet, and eat the flesh of the 
elephant, rhinoceros, hog, buffaloe, kid, and deer, as well as ducks and 
fowls, but they expressed an abhorrence of feeders on beef. They exhi- 
bited also a marked predilection for brandy, although some of them 
pretended to give a preference to a fermented liquor prepared by them- 


selves. Salt, cloth, and tobacco were in great request amongst them. 


The dress of the Adors consists principally of a choonga (Asamese 
name for dhoti) made of the bark of the Uddal tree. It answers the dou- 
ble purpose of a carpet to sit upon, and of a covering. It is tied round the 
loins, and hangs down behind in loose strips, about fifteen inches long, like 
a white bushy beard. It serves also as a pillow at night. The rest of their 
dress is, apparently, matter of individual taste; beads round the neck are 
not uncommon; some wore plain basket caps: some had the cane caps 
partly covered with skins, and others wore them ornamented with stained 
hair, like our helmets, and resembling the head dresses of the Sing fos.} 
Almost every man had some article of woollen dress, varying from a rudely- 


made blanket waistcoat to a comfortable and tolerably well shaped cloak. 


* They kill buffaloes with poisoned arrows ; they track the beast which they have successfully 
wounded, knowing that he will not move far before the fatal effects of their deadly poison will 
become sensible ; within half an hour the noble beast staggers and falls. 


+ The beak of the Buceros (Nepalensis) is a favorite and striking ornament of their caps ; this, 
on the top in front, and the red chowry tail flowing down behind, gives very much the appearance 
of a helmet. 


Oo 2 


334 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


One of these, of a figured pattern, was made with sleeves ; it was said to 
come from the country of the Bor Abors; the texture was good, though 


coarse, as was that of a red cloak worn by the Chief of the village. 


The Abors seem to have been in the habit of levying contributions on 
their low-land and less martial neighbours of Asam, and to have resented 
any irregularity in their payment, by predatory incursions, carrying off 
the people prisoners; several Asamese captives were found amongst the 
Abors of Pasial; some of whom had been so long amongst them, as to 


have become completely reconciled to their condition. 


Captain Beprorp’s account of his voyage up the Dibong, which fol- 
lowed, is the only one we have of that river, and as it was also the next 
excursion, in order of time, I continue the extracts from it, as published 


in the Appendix to Witson’s History of the Burmese War. 


“On the 4th of December, Captain Beprorp entered the mouth of the 
Dibong ; the water was beautifully clear, running in a bottom of sand and 
stones. On the 5th, a shallow, or bar, was crossed, above which the stream 
was much obstructed by the trunks of trees brought down by the current. 
The river continued deep, and although several rapids were encountered, 
they were passed without much trouble; numerous traces of buffaloes, 
deer, and leopards were observed, and also of elephants, which last had not 
been seen along the Dihong,, nor on one of its feeders, the Lalee. Amongst 
the trees on the banks, were several, of which the wood is serviceable 
in the construction of houses and boats, as the Saiz and Soleana. The 


Demurt yields a bark which is eaten by the Asamese with pawn. 


On the 6th, at 11 a. m., the most formidable rapid that had been 
met with, was passed with much difficulty; and on the following day a 


shallow, extending across the river, over which the boats were forced. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 335 


On the 8th, the part of the river reached was wide, and separated 
into many narrow and rapid streams ; in the forenoon, the mouth of the 
Bhanga Nadi was passed, so named by the fishermen, from an idea that 
it is a branch of the Dibong, which forces its way through the forest ; 
but, according to other information, it is a distinct stream, flowing from 
the hills. It was not navigable even for canoes, but the mouth was one 
hundred and fifty yards broad, and, if it rises from a distinct source in 
the mountains, it must bring down a considerable body of water in the 


rainy season. 


The progress of the Survey was suspended, for the greater part of 
the 9th, by an accident to one of the canoes, which was split from stem 
to stern. It was repaired, however, by the fishermen, in a singular 
manner. Having collected some of the fresh bark of the Simul tree, 
about half an inch thick, and tolerably strong, they fastened this to the 
bottom of the dingee with bamboo pins, about an inch and a quarter 
long, and filled up the crevices with cloth, so as to keep out the water, 
and this slight apparatus succeeded in rendering the dingee almost as 


serviceable as before. 


On the 10th, the river, although much intersected with forest, conti- 
nued still to widen. It appears rather extraordinary, that astream, the 
mouth of which is scarcely navigable, should have thus continued to im- 
prove in practicability, and that it should have presented more than 
one branch larger than the undivided river at its debouche. The difficulty 
is to conceive what becomes of the surplus water, unless it be absorbed 
partly in the sandy soil over which it flows, or stagnates in the hollows 
of the deepest portions of the bed. It seems not improbable, however, 
that in the rains, at least, it communicates, in the upper part of its 
course, with the Dihong, and that part of its water is carried off by that 


channel. On Captain Beprorp’s voyage up that river, he noticed, eight 


336 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


miles from its mouth, a wide opening in the forest on the left bank, 
through which a stream, in the rainy season, probably comes either from 
the hills or from the Dibong. Along this day’s route a number of otters 
were observed; buffaloes, and deer, and wild ducks were numerous; the 
cry of the hoolloo, or small black long-armed ape, was constantly heard 
—and the print of a tiger’s footsteps were noticed. Some of the people 


declared having seen the animal. 


On the following days, the division of the river into numerous chan- 
nels, and the occurrence of many shallows and rapids, rendered the 
advance very inconsiderable. On the afternoon of the 12th, the river 
presented three branches, two of which were found impracticable. In 
order to enter the third, which appeared to be the main stream, it was 
necessary to clear away a number of large blocks of stone, and employ 
all hands to force each boat singly over the rapids, by which means an 
advance of about half a mile was effected in about two hours. In the 
course of this day’s navigation, the action of mountain torrents on the forests 
skirting the banks was strikingly illustrated. Besides the numerous water 
courses tracked through the jungle, small clumps of trees were observ- 
able, growing upon isolated masses of rock, which had been detached by 
the passage of a torrent from the circumjacent surface. The sub-division 
of ariver near the hills, and consequent destruction of the forest, seems 
the natural effect of the accumulation of the mountain debris, which, 
choaking the beds of the torrents, forces them to seek new channels, and 


spreads them annually in fresh directions through the woods. 


The progress of the 13th, was equally tedious and laborious, and two 
miles and a half only were made with the greatest exertions. About 
noon, direct advance was stopped by an impassible rapid, and the course 
diverged through a channel to the left, which led again to the stream 


above the fall, the banks of the river began here to contract, and the hills 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 337 


were no great distance. Foot tracks of men and animals were seen, and 
smoke observed amongst the forests, but hitherto no human dwelling had 
been seen, and none but a few stragglers occasionally encountered. On 
the 14th, the width of the river was reduced to between twenty and thirty 
yards, and as it was not above knee deep, it appeared not unlikely to be 
near the head of this branch, but an advance, for the purpose of ascer- 
taining the fact, was disappointed by the appearanee of the Meeshmees, 
who showing themselves unfriendly to the further prosecution of the 
Survey, Captain Beprorp thought it expedient to return. There are five 
villages of these people under the first range of hills, extending nearly 
south-west towards Pastal on the Dihong. Zillee and Anundeea con- 
taining from thirty to forty families, Maboom containing ten, Alonga 
twenty, and Chunda twelve, making a total of eighty families, or about 
five hundred persons of all ages. They are at variance with the Adors on 
the Dihong, and also with the Meeshmees on the left bank of the Dibong. 
A party of these people made their apperance on the evening of the 14th, 
occupying the high bank which commanded the passage of the river, and 
upon opening a communication with them, it appeared that they were the 
precursors of the Gaum, or head man of Zillee, for whose arrival, as well 
as that of other Chiefs, it was found necessary to halt. The people 
evinced more apprehension than hostility, and suffered the land operations 


of the Survey to proceed without interruption. 


The people collected on this occasion were variously attired; some 
of them, like the Abors, were dressed in skins, but the most common 
dress was a coarse cotton cloth ; no woollen garments were seen ; many 
wore rings below the knee. Their ears were pierced with pieces of metal 
or wood, and some of them wore semi-circular caps, ribbed with cane. 
They were armed with diaos, and bows and arrows, the latter are poisoned 
with the extract of some root. The Meeshmees and Abors eat together, and 
acknowledge a common origin. They profess to worship at a different 


Pe 


338 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


shrine, which, the former assert, is at a considerable distance. The 
Dibong is said to be divided, on its issue from the hills, into four branches, 
but above them is a deep and even stream, occasionally intersected by 
rocks. The source is described to be remote, but none of the villagers 
could give any account of it, nor of the general course of the stream, from 
personal observation, as they seldom leave the immediate vicinage of their 
native villages. The nearest village to the river was Zillee, about nine 
hours’ march, from which Maboom was half a day’s journey distance. 
The undivided course of the stream, above a small hill, a short way above 
the spot where Captain Beprorp had moored, and round which the Dibong 


winds into the low country, was ascertained by actual observation. 


In reply to Captain Beprorp’s expressed wish to proceed, the Meesh- 
mees, who gradually increased in numbers, coming in from the different 
villages, insisted on his waiting the arrival of the Gaum, or Chief of Alonga, 
to whom, the interpreter pretended, the others looked as their head: while 
thus delayed, bees’ wax, honey, rice and ginger were brought for barter ; 
but it did not appear that the Meeshmees were sportsmen, like the Adors, and 
no game was procurable: according to their own assertions, the Meeshmees 
of the left bank are much addicted to the chase, especially those of Buhba- 
jeea; Whom they describe also as a fierce race of cannibals. The Zullee 
Meeshmees sometimes kill elephants with poisoned arrows, and after cut- 


ting out the wounded part, eat the flesh of the animal. 


On the afternoon of the 17th, the Gauwm of ~Anundeea made his 
appearance, by far the most respectable looking of his tribe ; those of 
Zillee and a village called Atooma, had previously arrived. In the confer- 
ence that ensued, the Chiefs endeavoured to dissuade a further advance, 
chiefly on the plea of danger from the rapids, and the unfriendly disposi- 
tion of other tribes ; but they promised to offer no obstruction. On the 


following day, accordingly, the route was resumed, when a messenger 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 339 


announced the arrival of the Gawms of Maboom and Alonga, for whom it 
was necessary to halt. In the interview with them, fresh difficulties were 
started, and as there appeared to be some serious intention of detaining 
Captain Beprorp where he was, as a hostage for some of the people 
carried off prisoners by the Suddeea Gohayn, he thought it expedient to 
retrace his steps, and accordingly set out on his return on the evening of 
the 18th. The course down the stream was rapid and disastrous—some 
of the boats being wrecked in the falls. On the morning of the 19th, a 
small stream was passed, called the Sttang Nadi, which appears to be a 
diverging branch of the Bhanga Nadi, and the last point where that joins 
the Dibong. On the afternoon, the mouth of the Dikrong was reached, 
and a Survey of the lower part of its course commenced. It is a very 
winding stream, about fifty yards wide near its junction with the Didbong, 
which is about eight miles above the mouth of the latter. It flows through 


a dense forest, and its water is thick and muddy. 


On the 20th, the voyage was prosecuted up the Dikrong, or Garmura, 
as it is termed by the Khamtis, above Kamjan, on the left bank, half a 
day’s journey overland to Suddeya. The water was much more clear, and 
ran in a sandy bottom. The current and depth of water in these tribu- 
tary streams are much affected by the contents of the main stream, the 
Burrampooter, and when that has received any considerable accession to 
its level, the banks of the smaller feeders are overflowed. The name 
Garmira is more properly applied to a small stream that falls into the 
Dikrong from a jheel near Suddeya ; above this, the river is divided into 
two small branches by an island, near which are the remains of a village 


and bridge, and a pathway, opposite to the latter, leads to Buhbajeea. 


After passing the island on the 21st, the Dikrong became too shallow 
for boats of any burthen, and much obstructed with dead trees ; the direc- 


tion was northerly, and glimpses of the hills were occasionally gained. 


340 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


A few inconsiderable falls occurred, and the current of the river was rather 
stronger than it had previously been found. The voyage was continued 
up the river till the afternoon of the 22d, when it became too shallow for the 
canoes to proceed. Some further distance was explored in a slight fisher- 
man’s boat, but the progress was inconsiderable, the water not being ankle 
deep, Captain Beprorp therefore returned tothe Dibong. The Dikrong 
contains several kind of fish of good quality, and in the forests, along its 
borders, are found yams, superior to most of those cultivated, and several 
other esculent roots. The orange also grows wild, the fruit is acid, but 
not disagreeable, and the pulp is of a pale yellow, like that of the lime. 
Amongst the trees of the forest, is one called Laroo-bunda, of which the 
bark is used to dye cloth and nets of a brownish red tinge, the wood is 
also used for making canoes. The Dikrong was supposed to be connected. 
with the Koondil, which is not the case: gold dust has been also, it is said, 
found in the sand, which does not seem to have been the case in this 


voyage. 


The 24th and 25th of December were spent in examining the eastern 
‘branches of the Dibong, as far as practicable, and early on the morning 


of the 26th the Survey was terminated at the mouth of that river.” 


To Captain Beprorp’s account of the Dihong I can add little, but as 
the mode of travelling has not been clearly explained I should endeavour 
to describe it. I took with me ten Gorkhas of the Champaran Light 
Infantry Corps, and embarked with fifteen days provisions, and my stock 
of presents in several canoes, each made of a single tree, and the largest 
capable of carrying ten men in smooth water. The more convenient size 
for easy management inthe rapids is a canoe fit to carry six, which is 
perhaps a safer boat also than a larger. I did not adopt Captain Beprorp’s 
plan of making two fast together asa raft, and consequently, though 


through the awkwardness of the Stpahis, aboat was occasionally overturned. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 341 


I did not experience any very inconvenient losses. All those who could 
not aid effectually in managing the boats were made to keep the shore, but 
even then their help was called for when engagedin a rapid, as the exer- 
tions of the boatmen were hardly sufficient to overcome the resistance of 
the stream. On these occasions, the smallest canoes, manned by two 
expert fishermen, are pushed through with very little delay, the larger 
boats drawn up into still water, and forces are joined for extricating one 
ata time. Ata rapid, the form of the bottom is always avery gentle slope 
on one side, deepening gradually towards the other, where it would be 
impossible to stop the force of the current. The canoe is run aground on 
the shallow side, and is dragged up sometimes supported by the water, 


and sometimes its weight wholly resting on the boulders orrounded stones. 


I recollect but one exception where, for the space of four hundred or 
five hundred yards, the depth appears equal in the whole width, and here 
the major part of the river, collected in one stream, descends the declivity 


at the rate of at least ten miles an hour. 


It isin coming down the rapids that skill, on the part of the conductor, 
is requisite: his object is generally to bring his boat to that point suffici- 
ently remote from the shallower side, to secure a sufficient depth of water 
to avoid touching; but he is almost equally afraid of the violence of the 


current and of its agitated state on the other. 


It is a moment of intense interest, when silence prevailing in the 
boat, no exertion is made, but by the steersman and his principal coad- 
jutor at the head. They too sit almost motionless, yet forming their 
judgment while they have a perfect command over her, in the calm smooth 
stream above, they carefully guide her to the shooting place. The water 
is clear as crystal, and the large round blocks at the bottom, above which 
she glides with the velocity of lightning, seemed removed but an inch or 


20 


342 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


two from the surface threatening our frail bark with instant destruction. 
In the case of any accident happening, good swimming would avail but 


(oo) Menton) 
little. 


My shelter at night was such a small paul tent as could be stowed in 
the canoe, and the men either slept without or collected sufficient grass 


and reeds to build themselves a slight protection from the dew or rain. 


I did not note anything very remarkable in my passage up, unless it 
be the state of the left bank. About six miles below, where the river 
emerges from the hills, its direction is suddenly changed from E. to SS. 
W., and from that corner the forest marking the ancient bank recedes 
from the edge; whence, lower down, it is seen at a considerable distance. 
It returns again to the bank of the river, ten miles below the bend. 
Within the extent thus marked by a semi-circle of trees, the ground 
is high—higher by several feet than the river now rises in the highest 
floods, but it is evidently an alluvial deposit, being almost entirely sand. 
Within it there is one insulated patch of tree forest. The Jiris declare 
that the great flood left it in this state; their villages, which were utterly 
destroyed, were situated within this same space, and certainly the appear- 
ance I have described is highly corroborative of their assertion. I halted 


at Shigdru Ghat, opposite to Captain Beprorp’s old mooring place. 


The Menba people had notice of my arrival, and I soon saw two or 
three of their Chiefs, accompanied by another, who was said to have rank 
among the Bor Abors.* They seemed to be averse to it, yet gave their 


consent to guide me to their villages, and I felt confident of being able to 


* Abor is an Asamese word; they call themselves Padam. A signifies privation, and bor the 
contraction for a verb, signifying to submit to, or become tributary. Thus there are Wagas and 
Abor Nagas—1. e. independent Nagas. Bor is bara, great. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 3438 


start with them, when the Pasw Abors made their appearance from the 
opposite bank, renewed the business ef haranguing, and, after a long 
debate, turned the tables against me. My Menbu and Bor Abor friends 
now insisted that till we restored the Miris to their former places, at the 
mouth of the Dibong, they could not, and would not venture to introduce 
us among their tribes. I was thoroughly convinced of the truth of my 
accounts of the impossibility of navigating the river more than one or two 
day’s journey within the hills, and thought it would be folly even to 
attempt this, with the small guard I had, against the wishes of the Adors; 


it might be the means of defeating all future attempts. 


I was now some time inactive at Sadiya, doubtful whether it were not 
better to return to Svbunshiri, even with the poor prospect I had of success 


there. 


In the S. E. quarter, Captain Beprorp was present, with the Rang- 
pur Light Infantry, to pursue his researches wherever practicable. I had 
communicated with him, and found that he considered me as interfering 
in some degree with his researches, and as he expected to return imme- 
diately, I thought I was obliged to accede to his request that I would leave 
the eastern branch of the Lodi, the Brahmaputra, and the far-famed 


Kund for his investigation. 


Amongst other visitors who were attracted to Sadiya by the good reports 
which began to be spread of the English character, was the Lurz Gohayn, 
brother of the Sadiya Chief. He had taken alarm on Lieutenant Burt- 
TON’S first visit, and fled from his flourishing villages, in the neighbourhood 
of Sadiya, to take refuge in the wild jungles below the eastern hills, from 
the anticipated ill treatment of the Europeans. I found this man more 
communicative and better informed than the natives with whom I had 


had intercourse, and I soon arranged a plan with him for visiting his 


344 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


village, with a view of learning from the neighbouring Mishmis something 
more definitive about the Lama country, or, in short, to extend the field 
of our knowledge, and turn to account any new opportunity that might 


offer. 


In this excursion I was accompanied by Lieutenant Buriron. He 
had, on a former trip, reached Sonpura, about twelve miles east of Sadiya, 
where he had found an effectual bar to his further progress in large boats 


in the shallows and rapids. 


In the following passage, which appeared in an extract published in 
the Government Gazette of 21st September, 1826, from Captain Breprorp’s 
Journal of a Voyage up the Brahmaputra, the Editor, and perhaps the 
Public, seem to have formed notions of this river not altogether correct. 
“The Brahmaputra, although of considerable breadth and depth in some 
places, is hence constantly broken by rocks, separated into different 
small branches by islands of various extent, and traversed by abrupt 
and numerous falls.” The nearest hills to Sadiya, by the course of the 
river, are upwards of forty miles distant, whether those near the Kund or 
those on the Digaru, a principal tributary on the north bank, and in this 
extent the river does not intersect any rocky strata, but to the distance of 
thirty to thirty-five miles from the first ranges, the torrents of the rainy 
season bring down an immense and yearly accumulating collection of 
boulders and round pebbles of every size, which, blocking up the river, 
are the causes of its remarkable feature of separation into numerous and 
diverging channels, and of the difficulties of navigating it. Many of the 
stone beds have been so long permanent, that they are not only covered 
with grass jungle, but have a few trees growing on them. The extreme 
banks, both of the north and south, are clothed with a dense tree jungle, 
which is rendered almost impervious by rank underwood. The general 
direction of the stream is from E.N.E. to W.S.W. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 345 


The rapids are very numerous; they are invariably situated where a 
large deposit of stones encroaches on the river. The most formidable one 
encountered by us was that at the mouth of the Sihatté, a branch which 
separates from the main river eight miles below the Kund, forming an 
island of about fourteen miles in length. The fall at any single rapid 
seldom equals five feet, which is carried off in a distance of from fifty to 
two hundred yards; the violence of the current at the principal channel of 
the Suhati Mukh was such that we could not attempt the direct passage, 
but passed by a circuitous route across the main river, with the sacrifice 


of much time, to a small channel on the eastern side. 


The Karam, up which our course lay, falls into the Suhatu nearly 
four miles above its mouth. Here though very much disinclined to part 
with our boats, we were convinced of the necessity of leaving some of them, 
and even with such of the smaller as we retained it proved difficult to 
advance up the minor stream. It was often found necessary to open a 
passage up a shallow by removing stones from the bottom. Our route, 
while the boats remained with us, was generally through the jungles on 
the bank ; but such a survey as, under these circumstances, I could make, 
I did; estimating the distance according to time, and taking what bearings 
the closeness of the jungles permitted. A Perambulator would be battered 
to pieces, and the objection to a chain would be the necessity of wading 
across every two or three hundred yards, and the want of open ground 
which frequently occurs. The only sign of population that we saw on our 
journey were parties of priests (Khamti) moving from one village in the 
jungles to another. We were obliged to relinquish our boats entirely where 
the Karam, being formed of two branches, has scarce any water in the dry 
season at places where it is choked by a collection of stones. We found 
the Livi Gohain’s village, of ten or twelve houses only, and their culti- 
vation scarcely equalling their need; it was at the base of a low hill, which 


R 2 


346 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


is attached to others rising in height. | Those on the opposite bank of the 
river appeared not more than ten miles distant, and on the angle a little 
E. of N. we were assured that the Kund was situated. All that we had 
added to our stock of knowledge, was the certainty of the Brahmaputra 
leaving the hills, where its exit had been pointed out from a distance, 
and by passing in an easterly direction, south of the great line of snowy 
peaks, we had ascertained that there is no material break in them; but 
the weather would not permit the contemplation of the splendid scene 


which is opened in the cloudless skies of the winter months. 


We learned that the Lama country, on the banks of the Brahmaputra, 
was but fifteen days distant, and the upper part of the Jrdawadi (whence 
the Khamtis emigrated to this side,) about the same, but our provisions 


were nearly exhausted, and we saw that we were not likely to procure any 


supply here. 


We saw several Mishmis, wild-looking but inoffensive (rather dirty) 
people. The dress of the labouring men being as scanty as that occasionally 
used by Bengalee boat-men, and perhaps not quite so decent, scarcely 
deserves that name. The richer have coats of Thibetan coarse woollens, 
generally stained of a deep red, and sometimes ornamented with white 
spots, which are preserved from the action of the dye by tying. The 
most remarkable article of their equipment is the ear-ring, which is nearly 
an inch in diameter, made of thin silver plate, the lobes of the ears 
having been gradually stretched and enlarged from the age of childhood 
to receive this singular ornament. <A pipe, either rudely made of bambu 
or furnished with a brass bowl, imported from China, through the inter- 
vention of the Lamas, is never out of their mouths, and women, and 
children of four or five years of age, are equal partakers of this luxury. 


The men are generally armed with a spear or straight sword. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 347 


On our return to Sadiya, I found Captain Breprorp ready to depart 
on his visit to the Kund. Affairs with the Abors were precisely in statu 
quo, and the enmity between the Khamtis and northern Mishmis rendered 
the Dibong unsafe. I resolved therefore to return to the Liuri Gohain’s 
village, and thence endeavour to push on towards the E. and S. and. visit 
the Irawadt. 


On my second visit, and proposition, actually to set out in an adven- 
ture to the Bor Khamti country, which had been talked of before, when 
we were at a loss for provisions, as perfectly feasible, the Luri Gohain 
and his people informed me of various obstacles which had not yet been 
alluded to. The snow on the high range of mountains to be surmounted 
in the route, could not be passed before the month of April or May, (and 
there was truth in this objection,) the country was not prepared for such 
a trip—very great risk would be run by venturing amongst the Singfos, 
who were removed from the sphere of our influence, or rather from that 


proximity to our force which should incline them to dread us. 


Tain Mishmis, from two days journey beyond the Kund, had arrived, 
and I considered my trouble as partly rewarded by the information deriv- 
ed from them. Primson and Guauum, the two Chiefs, who afterwards 
accompanied mein my excursion up the river, communicated freely what 
they knew, and the former enabled me to lay down the course of the river 
as far as the Lama country. I also undertook an excursion to the village 
of the latter. 


On setting out, we continued through the same heavy tree jungle as 
we had passed through from the Karam, and skirting the base of the 
low hill in aN. Ely. direction, we crossed the Lath under the foot of a 


higher range. A path can be traced, but is evidently little frequented. 


4a 


348 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


Turning more east, we ascended a considerable height up a very steep 
and rugged path, and arriving at a small patch of cleared ground, where 
the trees had been felled, and the underwood burnt preparatory to 
cultivation, we turned round on the most splendid view I had ever beheld. 
The Brahmapuira was visible at no great distance on the right, emerging 
from along narrow chasm in the hills. On its northern banks, the low 
hills, the tops of which had been visible from Chala, were seen running 
along its edge, thence stretching away to the right, and varying in size 
and character from the mere wooded ridge to the towering naked peak, 
resplendent in its clothing of snow, and glittering in the sun-beams, until 


they gave place to spreading plains. 


Our host for the night was the Chief of Thethong, of which village we 
saw but two huts, and imagination can scarce picture a situation more wild 
than they were placed in. The slope of the hill where they were built was 
full thirty degrees; the huts were of great length, and about twelve feet 
broad—the beams of the floor resting on one side on the hill’s face, and 
on the other upon stakes driven into the ground below. The roof is of 
the lightest materials, in order that the smoke may have free egress, and 
it hangs down, projecting on each side to near the floor, to give protection 
against the wind. Within, on one side, rows of bamboos extend horizon- 
tally, the entire length laden with the blackened skulls of all the animals 
on which the owner had, in the course of his life, feasted his friends; 
cross fences of bamboo mat, divide it into small apartments, in each 
of which are one or more hearths glowing with burning faggots. Both 
house and inmates were black with dirt and smoke. Outside the door, it 
is but necessary to turn the back on the hut to suppose that we are far 
removed from the habitation of men, in the depths of some wild forest— 
so little does the immediate vicinity of the dwelling display any sort of 


care. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 349 


In the evening a storm of wind and rain came on, and the thunder 
rolled in awful peals, echoed by the surrounding walls of mountain. On 
the morrow heavy and continued showers forbad exit from the house, 
and on the third day we were, in the same way, involuntary prisoners. 
I was assured that it would be necessary to wait some time after the 
cessation of these heavy rains before the rivulets between us and the 
Tain hills could possibly be crossed, and I was also reminded that if 
they should continue, we should very soon find the Lah so swollen as not 
to admit of our fording it on our return, and as to procuring provisions, 
however hospitable our host seemed, I found that he watched his very 
slender store with great and jealous vigilance. The poor fellow, indeed, 
could have ill afforded to feed my people for one day. Under these circum- 
stances, I felt well pleased that some intermission of the weather permitted 
me to regain my more comfortable habitation at Chali on the fourth day. 


Here again I was detained by the state of the Karam, which could not be 
forded. 


I shall hereafter have occasion to allude to the opportunities I have 
had of acquiring a knowledge of the rivers between Asam and China. I 
will therefore, in this place, merely mention that one of the higher class 
of Khamtis present, had been a resident at Yunan for a period of eight or 
nine years. He gave me an account of the stages, rivers, and cities, 
agreeing closely with the account given to Dr. Bucuanan by the Bhammo 
Governor. He did not go to Santafou—but leaving Bhammo he went in 
three days to Mingwan on the east bank of the Namiun; thence in five 
days he reached a larger town called Mungti, and thence, between that 


place and Mangmen,* he crossed the Namkho, which he describes as equal 


* Mang, in the Sham, or Khamti, means country or town. 


Su 


350 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


in size to the frawadi river. The Namkho, he says, divides a Sham 


province from China proper. 


These are most probably the same places with BucnHanan’s Mowun, 
Maintu, and Momicen ; however, either the Doctor’s informant was mistaken 
in the Chinese names, or my friend had forgotten the positions of the towns 
relatively to the river (Namkho ). I would not venture to hint the possibility 
of the former (which, by the bye, may have occurred in copying), had not 
a Chinese from Yunan, who was some time with me, called Mungti, Feng ye 
chou, which would make my friend the Sham perfectly correct. I must 
add, that till IT came down to Calcutta I never had any opportunity of 
seeing anything of Dr. BucHanan’s information. The Namkho, it is 
scarcely necessary to add, is evidently the Nou Kyang. I cannot quit the 
subject without expressing my admiration of Mr. Kiaproru’s boldness in 
turning all the water of the Sampo into the Bhammo river, concerning 
which we can so easily here consult sufficient authority. Muneyan, my 
Burman attendant, instantly answered to my question about its size, 


that it is equal to the Dikho, one of the rivulets of Asam. 


My return by water was very rapid ; the first day I reached the 
Suhatu ; the second, starting after breakfast, and halting some time to 
take bearings at three places on the way, I reached Sadiya in the after- 
noon, having performed upwards of thirty miles that day. The only 
incident I have to mention, and that only interesting as conveying a further 
idea of the nature of the rapid, is my descent of that at Suhatu Mukh, 
where there are three separate channels. As the river had risen consi- 
derably, I expected to find the declivity in the principal channel, which 
is not interrupted by any shallow, less than when I passed up, and my 
boatmen readily consented to shoot it. Its agitated appearance, however, 


when we arrived near the brink, induced them to change their course for 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 351 


the middle channel, which is interrupted and crooked. The first time we 
struck, I perceived a crack in the bottom, under my feet, at least a cubit 
long, and this visibly opened every shock we received, and indeed the 
whole descent was a succession of such shocks, so that with the water 
received by the leak, and that by the waves washing over, we were obliged 


to stop some time to bail out and lighten our canoe. 


Captain Beprorp’s account of his voyage was noticed in the Govern- 
ment Gazette of September 21, 1826, and the extract then given has 
been reprinted in Wruson’s “ Documents illustrative of the Burmese 
War,” to which I refer for a very interesting narrative. I propose to give 


here an abstract of the Geographical results. 


‘On the 10th March, the course pursued left the main stream, and 
proceeded up the Suhatu, a detached branch on the “deft” bank of the 
Brahmaputra, and, like that, intersected by rapids, and endlessly subdi- 
vided by islets ‘‘ formed of accumulations of boulders.” No signs of life 
were observable in this part of the journey, and although the banks were 
covered with thick forests, few birds or beasts disturbed their solitude. 
The Suhatu forms, with the Brahmaputra or Bor Lohit, av extensive island, 
the greater part of which is impenetrable forest ; but there is one village 
in it of some extent, named Chata, inhabited by Mishmis, who are of more 
peaceable habits than the mountain tribe (on the Dibong) of the same 
appellation. After a tedious voyage of eighteen days, during which nearly 
forty rapids were passed, the course returned, on the 28th of March, to 
the Bor Lohit or Brahmaputra. The Suhatu opens above a rapid in the 
main stream, which is pronounced by the Natives impracticable, and 
it has every appearance of being so. And at this point, the river, now 
coniined to a single branch, takes a northerly direction and passes under 


the first range of hills. It runs in one part close below a perpendicular 


302 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


cliff of this range from sixty to eighty yards high, and covered from base 
to summit with soil and forest. The current at this point is strong, and 
its volume considerable; large rocks (stones) project, from four to six 
feet above the current, which have evidently been rolled down from a 
distance, as the hills near at hand, from two hundred and fifty to four 
hundred feet high, are composed of earth and small stones. The banks 
are every where clothed with forest, in which the Dhak or Kinsuka 
(Butea Frondosa,) is conspicuous. The left bank of the river, below 
where it issues from the hills, is composed of loose granite blocks, occa- 
sionally resting on a partially decomposed rock; the strata are in some 
places horizontal, but in others they are much broken, as if undermined 
and fallen into the stream. Ina dry stone bed was observed a large 
detached block, twenty-five feet long, eighteen high, and nearly the 
same breadth. It is difficult to conceive by what means so ponderous a 
body could have been precipitated into its present position. There are 
several other large rocks immediately below where the Lohit issues from 
the hills, by which it is separated into several small channels; but at 
(above) the point where these unite, its general breadth is two hundred 
feet, and it flows with great force and volume; the course of the river 
behind the first range is concealed from view by a projecting rock jutting 
into the river, beneath which it rushes, as from a fall, with much foam 
and noise. Behind this, the river is said to be free from rapids, and to 
flow more quietly : the river is also said to change its course behind the 
first range, and to flow from the south-east under some small hills, behind 


which a higher range appears with the snowy mountains in the distance.” 


«« After some ineffectual attempts to open a passage to the supposed 
head of the river, the Deo Pani, or Brahma Kund, the divine water, or 
well of Brahma, which it was known was not remote, and after some 


unsuccessful efforts to reach the villages, the smoke of which was 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 353 


perceptible on the neighbouring hills, a communication was at last effected 
with the Mishmis of Dilli,* a village of about a day’s journey from the left 
bank, as well as with the Gam, or chief of the village near the Brahma 
Kund, in whose company a visit was paid to the reservoir on the 4th of 
April. This celebrated reservoir is on the left bank of the river; it is 
formed by a projecting rock, which runs up the river nearly parallel to 
the bank, and forms a good sized pool, that receives two or three small 
rills from the hills immediately above it. When seen from the land side, 
by which it is approached, the rock has much the appearance of an old 
gothic ruin, and a chasm about half way up, which resembles a carved 
window, assists the similitude. At the foot of the rock is a rude stone 
seat : the ascent is narrow, and choked with jungle ; half way up is another 
kind of seat, in a niche or fissure, where offerings are made; still higher 
up, from a tabular ledge of the rock, a fine view is obtained of the Kund, 
the river, and the neighbouring hills ; access to the summit,} which resem- 
bles gothic pinnacles and spires, is utterly impracticable ; the summit is 
called the Deo Bari, or dwelling of the Deity. From the rock the descent 
leads across a kind of glen, in the bottom of which is the large reservoir, 
to the opposite main land, in the ascent of which is a small reservoir, 
about three feet in diameter, which is fed by a rill of beautifully clear 
water, and then pours its surplus into its more extensive neighbour below. 
The large Kund is about seventy feet long by thirty wide. Besides 
Brahma Kund and Deopani, the place is also termed Prabhu Kuthar, in 


* 


* Dilling, or Dilong, is the only name resembling Dillé among the neighbouring villages, but 
it is a hard day’s journey from the und, and when I enquired there they did not know of the visit 
of Captain B.’s people. They thought it might be Zhethong. Captain Beprorp places Dilli, 
however, near my Dilling. 


+ Though inaccessible from below, a path above crosses the Deo Pani, which I have twice 
passed; it might be very difficult to clamber down ; but upwards, from where I crossed it, it 
appeared easy to get up the mountain, even to the head of the rill. 


mm 2, 


304 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


allusion to the legend of Parasurima having opened a passage for the 


Brahmaputra through the hills, with a blow of his kuthar, or axe. 


Want of supplies prevented a stay at this point, and rendered a 
prompt return to Sadiya indispensable, which was effected by the 11th of 
April.” 


The Asamese distinguish the Prabhu Kuthdr (the Kund now visited) 
from the holy Kund, in which the river has its origin; but they have no 
clear idea of the situation of the latter, and they universally declare it to 


be utterly inaccessible to man. 


It is much to be wished that some one adequate to the task would 
follow up Colonel WiLrorp’s enquiry, now that we are possessed of much 
more accurate information. At present there appear so many discrepan- 
cies between the Hindu legends, and facts, that we are quite at a loss: 
however, Colonel Witrorp also recognises the famous chasm or pass of 
Prabhu Kuthar as totally different from the Kunda. The pass, he informs 
us, is, according to the Kshetra Samdsa, sixteen yojans or sixty-four kos 
to the eastward of Godagram, or Gorganh, (it is, in fact, about one hun- 
dred and fifty miles distant,) and from the pass to the Kunda is a journey 
of eight days. The continuation of Colonel W.’s discussion contains a 
singular mixture of what closely resembles the truth, with other matter 


which we cannot reconcile with what we know to be fact. 


* The Asamese have no notion that a pilgrimage was ever made beyond 
the Prabhu Kuthar; but if it ever were, I know, from the difficulties of 


* Asiatic Researches, XIV. p. 424. ‘“ From the pass to the Cunda, the journey is always per- 
formed in eight days, because travellers must keep together, on account of the inhabitants, who are 
savages, great thieves, and very cruel, There are fixed and regular stages, with several huts of the 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 355 


the way, that it would be absolutely impossible to march nine or ten kos 
a day, or indeed more than one-fourth of that distance, through those rugged 
hills. The account of the entire distance to the river’s fountain head, 
however, may not differ materially from the truth, and the Mishmis are 
not ill described. Tigers, however, are not to be found in their hills, and 
it is highly improbable that troops were ever sent into so difficult a country 


to chastise people who, in their own haunts, have so great an advantage. 


Correct as his information proves of the situations of the Prabhu 
Kuthara and Kunda, Colonel Witrorp quite surprises us further on by 
telling us that (p. 455) the Kunda of Brauma is acknowledged to be the 
lake Mansarovara. Again, considering the state of our Geographical 
knowledge when he wrote, the description of the lesser and greater Lolita, 
the former being known asthe Bonash or Manasa, and the latter also called. 
Sama, evidently to be recognised in the Dihong, inclines us to believe that 
reliance may be placed on the authorities quoted by him, although wecannot 
overcome the difhculty of making the Prabhu Kuthdr pass subservient to 


the passage of the Brahmaputra into Asam from the Mansarovara lake. 


On my return to SadiyaI found, amongst the numerous visitors there, all 
the Stagfo Gams, acknowledging our sovereignty, and likewise Ambassa- 
dors from the tract beyond the Jrawadi, in latitude twenty-five to twenty- 
six; Burmans and Shams were present—the latter from Mungkhang, west 
of the Irawadi, in latitude twenty-five—the former from various parts of 
their own empire, and from the source of the Irawadi we had many Khamtis 


among the population of the place. From Yanan we had two Chinese, who 


natives. The Kings of Asam are sometimes obliged to chastise them, but in general they contrive 
to secure the friendship and protection of their Chiefs, by trifling presents. The country is covered 
with extensive forests, with a few spots cleared up, with very little industry and skill. Tigers are 
very numerous, and very bold,” 


396 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


were taken prisoners with the Burmans at Rangpur, but they were not 
present with the Ambassadors, having been detained by some accident on 


the river.* 


It may be supposed that I did not neglect to take advantage of these 
opportunities to investigate as fully as I was able the probability of any 
connexion of the Irawadi with the Sanpo, but though the existence of a 
large eastern branch of the former river, hitherto unknown, was proved, 
there appeared every reason to conclude, both from the information of 
these various tribes, and from the want of magnitude of any of the branches 
of the Zrawadi, that the Sanpo could not possibly have its exit to the 


ocean by this channel. 


The Bisa Gam, with the Singfos from Miking, constructed several 
maps for me of that valley, and the route to it from Sadiya; and some 
of them who had travelled to the sources of the Dihing, confirmed the 
accounts previously received from the Liurt Gohain, of the route to the 


Khamti settlement on the Jrawad:. 


The season was too far advanced now for an expedition to the Mish- 
mi hills to the eastward, as the frequent rains made the state of the rivu- 
lets so uncertain. My scheme of crossing to the Irawadi was considered 
too hazardous in the present state of our relations with the Singfos. It 
remained then only to wait patiently at Sadiya, for the return of the cold 
season, and in the mean time to undertake what little was practicable in 
the way of survey in the neighbourhood. But the rivers could afford the 


only means of seeing the interior of the country, the dense jungles being 


* Amongst the Ambassadors were Shams, wearing the Chinese dress, who were in the 
habit of passing the frontier, were acquainted with the language, and dwelt within the boundaries 


of Yunan, as they are exhibited in our maps. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 357 


impassable, and of the rivers, the Jenga alone claimed interest ; a survey 
of the Diburi, sufficient for practical purposes, having been recently 
made by a Native surveyor of Mr. Scort’s, from whose field books I 


protracted a map. 


The Tenga Pani, likeall the rivers in this quarter, winds through a 
dense tree jungle: its breadth at the entrance is one hundred yards, dimi- 
nishing soon after to eighty, the first three and a half miles the water is 
perfectly smooth and the current moderate ; beyond this the rapids are 
numerous, and it is no longer possible to proceed in any other boats but 


canoes. 


Latao, a Singfo village, of six or eight houses, is the only inhabited 
spot we saw: it stands at the angle of a deep bend, and may be seen from 
the distance of half a mile: it was surprised by Captain Nreurviuur’s party 
in 1825, and now, deprived of his slaves, I found the Chief, (a fine old 
man, of a very communicative disposition,) reduced to the necessity of 
guiding the plough with his own hands. Many of the Singfo villages 
had suffered equally with this, and but for the trifling supplies which we 
were able to afford from our stores at Sadcya, a great number of the 
scanty population would probably have been compelled to emigrate to 
Hukiing. 


Fish abound in the rapids of the Jenga; and river turtle, of a very 
large size, ‘are occasionally found and eaten by the Singfos, with great 
relish. I witnessed the capture of one of these creatures of the largest 
size—it was seen entering a little creek formed by a fallen tree, and a 
canoe manned by three Sing fos, was instantly planted across the opening. 
One of them watching his opportunity, suddenly leaped on the back of 
the animal which had descended to the bottom of the pool, and a knife 


(UF 4 


398 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


being handed to him, he dipped his head and arms under water, and cut 
two large notches in its hinder part and made fast to ita green pliant 
cane, with which it was easily pulled on shore ; but cased in a coat of mail 
and armed with sharp teeth, at least half an inch long, the turtle was not 
yet mastered, and advantage was taken of its attempts at self-defence to 
secure its mouth by presenting a large bamboo, which it constantly 
snapped at. A man sitting onit, next bored the paws, which being bound 
on the back with cane, reduced the poor turtle to a helpless condition, 


and he was put on board the boat. 


The early settlements of the Khamtis, when fifty or sixty years ago 
they first crossed the mountainous barrier at the head of the Dihing, 
and procured the permission of the -Asamese Raja to reside within his 
territories, were here upon the Fenga Pani; but there now remains 
no vestige of the former populous state of its banks: an uninterrupted 
tree jungle continued as far as I could explore it. We passed the 
Bereng, which is a narrow rivulet, branching off from the Karam: 
the Marbar we also passed, on which are one or two small villages 
of the Khamti Chiefs, who, having been concerned with the Sing fos in a 
plundering incursion, fled from Sadiya on the approach of our force, and 
latterly, we found the river so much reduced in breadth, and so choaked 


with fallen trees, that further progress, even in the smallest canoe, was 


impracticable. 


Bearings on the survey peaks to the north afforded means, together 
with latitudes, for correcting this survey, in which, from the nature of the 


banks, no measurement could possibly be attempted. 


I have omitted in the proper order of time to notice Lieutenant JonEs’s 


survey from Rangpur to Bisa, where the troops received orders to 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 359 


advance towards the frontier. Lieutenant Jones was placed in charge of 
the cattle, with directions to march to Borhath, and thence either through 
the Bengmora district to Sadiya, or along the Bort Dihing to Bisa, 
whichever should be found practicable, and, though harrassed by the 


nature of his charge, he surveyed the route very successfully. 


I have now come to the close of the proceedings of this season. In 
the rains, preparation was made for what appeared to be the most feasible 
proposition for the next, which was to penetrate to the Lama country on 
the heads of the Brahmaputra, where, from the Lamas, we might at least 
learn something definite respecting the course of the Sanpo, whether | 
eastward of MLhassa it bends to the south, or whether it continues 
eastward, and passes round the sources of the Brahmaputra and 


Trawadi. 


Maps: were prepared from the information received from various 
sources. One, of the route to the Lama country and to the sources of the 
frawadi; and the other, of the Hiking valley and route of the Burmans 
from Mingkhing to Asam; the former has been found as correct as a 
document compiled from similar data could be expected ; and since I had 
greater facilities in preparing the other, in being able to compare the 
accounts of so many people, I feel confidence in its general accuracy also. 
I shall now pause awhile before proceeding with an account of my 
adventures of this season, and endeavour to give such a description of the 
tract about Sadiya, as will enable those who have not the opportunity of 
referring to my large Map, to form some idea of the peculiar features of 


the country and its scenery. 


The termination of the valley of Asam is a spacious level plain, of a 
quadrangular form, in the midst of which is the town or village of Sadzya, 


situated on the AKwndil nullah, two miles iniand from the Brahmaputra, 


360 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


and thirteen miles east from the point of confluence of this stream with 


the great Dihong. 


The plain is intersected by many rivers, the principal of which are 
the Brahmaputra, issuing from the pass of the Prabhu Kuthar, which is 
about forty-two miles distant in a direction a little north of east: the 
Noa Dihing, which emerges from the hills at Kasan, about forty miles 
distant in a south-easterly direction, and joins the Brahmaputra about 
seven miles beyond Sadiya: the Dibong intersecting the higher angle of 
the quadrangle, which immediately north of Sadiya, reaches the latitude of 
28° 15’, and the Dihong pouring its copious supplies from a conspicuous 
break in the range which skirts the plain running from the same angle 
to the south-west. The Kharam and Tenga Pani, with numerous other 
petty rivulets, have their rise in the mountains south of the Prabhu Kuthar 
and they run nearly parallel with and near the Brahmaputra, the former 
falling into the Suhaiu, nearly opposite to where. the Digaru, from the 
northern mountains, descends in a torrent to the northern branch, and 
the latter having its mouth near that of the Noa Dihing. South of the 
plain, the Bort Dihing separates it from the Naga hills, running nearly 
westward. The quantity of cultivation within this space is very small. 
The villages of Sadiya do not extend more than six miles between the post 
andthe Dikrang river. Beyond Sadiya, on the north side of the river, the 
tract is an uninterrupted jungle to the foot of the hills, and on its south 
side the little village of Latao, that on the Suhatu island, of the Tao 
Gohan, anda Khaku village near the Dihing, form mere specks in the 


widely spread wilderness. 


The mountain scenery of Sadiya would form a noble subject for a 
panorama, though the distance of the hills is rather too great for the 
larger features required in a detached picture. To the south, the high 
Naga hills bordering Asam, beyond the Bort Dihing, lift their heads 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 361 


above the tree jungle of the opposite bank of the Brahmapuira; to 


‘ the W. and S.W. the ranges are too distant to be visible ; but in 


the N.W. they rise to a considerable height where the mountain 
Reging of the Abors towers above the Pasi village; thence there is a 
sudden fall, and in the opening of the Dihong the hills diminish to a 
comparatively small size—over which, however, a cluster of remarkable 
peaks, clothed in heavy snow, are occasionally to be seen in the very clear 
weather of the winter months, bearing about 310°, or nearly north-west ; 
they are evidently south of the Dihong, in its course from W. to E., and 
are very distant. On the opposite side of the bank rises a conical moun-. 
tain (which at the mouth of the Dihong, and in that river, forms a most 
conspicuous object): the Abors call it Regam, and declare that it is the 
residence of a sylvandeity. The range continues round to the north over- 
topped near Regam by a high-peaked ridge of six or seven thousand feet 
high, retaining its snowy covering only during the colder months. Nearly 
north, the tops are sometimes to be distinguished of a range at a consi- 
derable distance, which, from more favorable points of view, is seen to be 
a continued line of heavy snow ; the opening of the Dibong is marked by 
a corresponding fall of the hills immediately to the north. Turning to 
the N. E., a more interesting group presents itself; the first and highest in 
the horizon is the turret-form, to which we have given the name of Sadiya 
Peak; its base extends to the Dibong on the left, and to the right it 
covers a considerable extent, allowing a more distant class of mountains 
to peep above its sloping sides. The next is the huge three-peaked 
mountain called Thigritheya by the Mishmis, a magnificent object from the 
singular outline; it is succeeded by a wall always streaked with the pure 
white of its beautiful mantle, after one or two minor yet interesting peaks. 
Thathutheya, a high round-backed ridge, rises high above the ranges 
near the Kund, or Prabhu Kuthar; there is then a fall, but the gap is 
filled with mountains low in appearance, because they are distant, and 
the channel of the river is not there as has been supposed, though that 


2w 


362 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


is the place of its issue to the plains, but in fact winds round the groupe 
situated in this gap and running first to the N. W. till it washes the base 
to Thathutheya: it then traverses back to the southward. Immediately to 
the east, the ranges at the distance of forty-five miles are high, and snow 
is seen on some of them throughout the cold season, but the last peak in 
that direction is the loftiest to be seen (of those whose heights have been 
ascertained,) and so remarkable and magnificent a tower it is, that it has 
been ever known amongst us by the name of Beacon, and it has been 
seen* at the distance of one hundred and thirty miles. Z'urret Peak is 
also remarkable near to Thathutheya in the horizon, but distant, that it 
ought not to be forgotten. Beyond Beacon, or Dapha Bhim, as it is 
called by the Sing fos, the lofty mountains suddenly retrograde to a consi- 
derable distance, and form a deep basin, the southern and eastern sides 
of which are alone visible; through the centre of this basin, the Dihing 


winds, having its sources in the most distant point. 


On the 8th of October, the river had fallen considerably, and fair 
weather had apparently set in when I started. I took with me ten young 
Khamtis from Sadiya, armed with muskets, and fifteen to carry my provi- 
sions, my sextant, and a few clothes, and, to save the labor of building a 
shed for protection from the heavy evening dews, I took as far as the 
Luri Gohain’s village, a small tent. Lieutenant Buriron had been 
appointed to join me, but I was not informed of this till I had advanced five 
or six days’ journey, and he was still at Bishenath. TFven so small an 
accession of strength to our party as his company would have given me, 
might have given my labors a successful termination: for with one staunch 
friend who knew how to use a double-barrelled gun, I should have been 


very ill inclined to suffer myself to be bullied by the barbarian Mishmis : 


* By Lieutenant BepinGreLp. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 363 


as it was, I felt confidence only in one point, which was, that in a case 
of emergency, I should stand the best chance of being deserted by my 


Khamti followers. 


I took one Hindustani to prepare my food, and one Burman to supply 
his place in case of his inability to proceed with me. One of the Chinese, 
whom I have before mentioned as taken prisoner at Rangpur, was readily 
induced to accompany me, by the prospect of reaching Yunan from that 
part of Thzbet which we expected to enter, where, as I had already ascer- 


tained, some of his countrymen are always to be found. 


The Liri Gohain had left his village, at: the foot of the hills, to the 
care of some of his people, and had resided with us at Sadiya, from the 
commencement of the rainy season. He now accompanied me, and to his 
arrangement and good management I looked for success, as he had more 
communication with the Mishmis, and possessed more influence with them 
than any of his brethren. A fine young Asamese noble had often 
expressed his wish to take advantage of my escort to pay a visit to the 
holy Brahmakund, and he had induced the good old Bor Gohain to con- 
sent also to join us. They, with their Brahmun,* who was to officiate at 
the puja, for the proper performance of which the Puranas had been 
consulted, and with their followers considerably augmented my party, and 
afforded much entertainment by the difficulties into which they were 
thrown on the journey, (particularly when they encountered leeches in the 
jungles,) and the wonder they exhibited at the novelties of the rapids. 
The scenery improved greatly as we advanced eastward, and received the 


happiest effect from the delightful clearness of the atmosphere, and the 


* I strongly suspect that Captain Beprorp was mistaken in supposing that the Mishmi Chiefs 
near the und, have anything more to say or do with the ceremony, than taking possession of the 
offerings. 


364 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


brightness of an unclouded sky. Proceeding a few miles beyond Sadiya, 

it is soon perceived that the Sadiya peak is not a single tower rising high 

into the skies, but has that appearance from its being the end of a wall- 
like ridge running eastward, and indeed, when seen from the Suhatu Mukh, 
its lofty peak is no longer to be distinguished with certainty in the long 
wall, which reaches nearly to three-peaked Thigritheya. That mountain is 
now finely developed, and the ruggedness of its outline, seen from this near 
point of view, increases its improving effect. From hence, too, the heavy 
snows before alluded to, north of Sadiya, which are scarce seen from the 
station, overtopping the nearer ranges, are beheld stretching far to the east 
and west, filling up the low gap near the issue of the Dibong to the plains, 
and the direction from the opening of the Dihong affording an uninter- 
rupted view up it to the N.W. affordsa fine prospect of its faint and distant 
groupe of snow-clad peaks. But the proximity of the northern mass of 
mountains does not permit us to form any accurate idea of the disposition 
of the further ranges, or of the nature of the country between us and 
Vhibet. 


When we reached the Kharam, we found that the floods of the rainy 
season had re-opened a channel which had been long dry, and known as 
the Mori, or dead river, by which expression they designate those 
branches which, by the constant changes going on in these violent moun- 
tain streams, have either dried up or lost their consequence. When within 
the Kharam, the changes in the grouping of the peaks brings forward a 
noble sugar-loaf peak, and those ranges near the Kund, now grown so 
much nearer, look more wild and bold. A small telescope enabled me, at 
Challa, to distinguish clearly a solitary pine here and there, stretching its 


black area forth in the midst of the white field. 


The bark of the great deer, and the shrill cry of the fishing eagle alone 


disturb the silence of these wilds. And a.large insect, their inhabitant, 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 365 


makes a reiterated whizzing like the sound of some vast fly-wheel buffet- 


ting the air at every revolution. Tigers are numerous. 


The further preparations necessary at Challa, were to give intimation 
of our intended visit to the friendly Tain tribe beyond the Kund, to prepare 
baskets for carrying within the hills, and to get ready for-the journey 
the Gam of the Mishmis of the village, and two or three of his people, who 
were to go with us as interpreters—I had observations for latitude which 
gaye for my house, in the centre of the village, 27° 48’. 

/ 

From the TYains we received an answer, expressing their pleasure 
at our approach, and by the 19th October, we were ready to set out, hav- 
ing completed for each man a small basket, made flat to fit the back, with 
a small supporter of wood for the shoulders, and we had a stock of twelve 
days’ provisions. The only instruments that I carried were, a sextant and 
false horizon, a good compass, a Woollaston’s thermometric barometer, 
and.a barometer of the common kind; the former of these two I found 
had its thread divided, by inverting it in carriage, and consequently it 
would not give the difference of height from Sadiya, and, though I after- 
wards enjoined the utmost care to the man whose business it was to 
carry it, invariably found on my arrival at a new station, that some 
unlucky inversion, in the course of the journey, had similarly deranged 
it, nor can this be wondered at, seeing that all a man’s care was employed 
in preserving his own limbs frominjury by a fall from the rugged precipices 
we occasionally clambered over. The tube of the other barometer lasted 


a very few days. 


The first night we halted in the bed of the Lait rivulet, of little 


breadth, yet violent enough to bring down stones of enormous bulk. 


366 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


The next morning, when we passed the Kund on the side of the hill 
above it, we were entering on novel ground. The Bor Gohain’s party 
had returned previously. I had sufficient curiosity to wish to accompany 
them, but was unwilling to tire myself and party by an unnecessary 
expedition. 


Such was the nature of our slippery and rugged path, that, although 
we passed the holy pool about nine o'clock, it was twelve when we arrived 
at the mouth of the Miéee rivulet, one thousand yards beyond it: the next 
reach was in the direction N. 22 E., but after a debate on our ability 
to proceed by the dangerous path of the river side, it was resolved that 
we should avoid it, and cross the hills instead ; a little Mzshmi boy led the 
way clambering up the face of a perpendicular rock, assisted by a hanging 
cane, made fast for the convenience of passengers to some tree above : 
all that I could surmise of our direction was, that we were travelling 
towards the east, but whether north-east or south-east it was impossi- 
ble to say, and owing to the sharpness of the ascent, the distance got 
over was equally uncertain: in the evening, the Thathutheya moun- 
tain defined the limit of our movement towards the east by the 
help of a bearing on it, but instead of having a ridge-like form, it 
was now a high sugar-loafed peak, and the name only enabled me to 
recognise it. We had crossed one ridge, and to our north, at the base of the 
hill, could hear the Brahmaputra rolling along. The view was limited 
to the extremities of two sharp bends of the river, the hills, clothed in black 
forest, rose above us on each side, and Vhathutheya above overlooked 
them.* Although we had advanced but a few miles beyond the Kund, 


yet it was nearly dark before we halted, not a bit of level ground, large 


* N.B. There is something appropriate in the term chasm or pass, by which Colonel 
Witrorp distinguishes the Prabhu Kuthar. 


rn a A 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 367 


enough to spread a blanket, could be found, and with great labor and 
perseverance my people scraped away a part of the hill’s face, where the 
trunk of a large tree, acting as a support to the ground behind it, favored 
the operation, and over my bed-place, as the sky looked theatening, I 


had a few branches placed as a shelter. 


A new scene opened on us when we surmounted the next ridge. We 
gained a much more extensive view, but much of its grandeur was lost on 
the hill side by the clouds enveloping the mountains, depriving us of a 
sight of their summits. On our east we were glad to see low green hills, 
with patches of cultivation, and here and there an assembly of three or 
four houses: beyond a deep wide dell sunk, of which the bottom was 
hidden, but on its opposite side a large mountain rose from an extended 
base and hid its head in the canopy of dense vapours. The chasm of the 
Brahmaputra could be seen extending to the north-east, but its crooked- 


ness limited the view and closed it abruptly. 


On the side of Asam, the jbird’s-eye view was extremely beautiful. 
The mountains beyond the Dihong were distinctly visible, yet distant as 
they were, the undefined horizon rose far above their level, intersecting the 
plain—the silver river here and there exhibited its bright white light, and 
on the right the bases of the high northern mass were seen one beyond 
another projecting out into the level surface of the wide plain: hovering 
between us and the depth below, were white curled clouds in innumerable 


little patches. 


While standing on the ridge, the clouds which had looked threatening 
began to annoy us with a shower, which soon encreased to a heavy fall of 
rain ; and anxious as we were to move on, or at least obtain good shelter, 


we were compelled to take refuge in a small field hut, built for the accom- 


368 - MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


modation of labourers, who come some distance from their homes to culti- 
vate the more favored spots. The thermometer in the middle of the day, 
in the plains, had latterly stood at 83° or 84° ; at twelve o'clock to-day, it was 
at 61°, and we found it excessively cold. The effect of a sudden change 
of temperature to the amount of 20° is felt much more than would be 


imagined, or has often been noticed by travellers. 


The rain continued and confined us to our hut, but we were visit- 
ed by a party of women who had been out with their long conical 
baskets on their backs to bring in a store of grain and roots from a distant 
field, and they promised us assistance from the village in the few trifles 
we required. In the coldest weather, they are very scantily clothed—a 
coarse thick petticoat of blue cotton, wove by themselves, is their common 
dress ; it reaches to the knee, and has merely a slit in it to admit the 
head through. They are excessively dirty, and at all times and seasons 


have a short pipe in their mouths. 


We could perceive one or two large houses at the distance of but 
half a mile on the face of the next hill, and were informed by our visitors 
that we might there shelter our whole party as they were empty. The 
next day, the rain still continued to fall heavily; but we took advantage 
of a slight intermission to go round the hollow to the opposite side, and 
were well pleased to make the exchange for a large house well sheltered 
from the boisterous wind. At intervals of a few feet, the Mishmis cut a 
square hole in their bamboo floors, and form a hearth there of earth, 
supported by cross beams below. These, to the number of eight or ten, 
were quickly covered with burning faggots by my shivering people, and 
the smoke having no exit through the wetted roof, soon became an almost 
unbearable nuisance. I have remarked that a great number of the Mishmis 


have their brows habitually contracted, from the custom of half shutting 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 369 


their eyes against the penetrating gas arising from their wood fires. The 
house we were in had been deserted on account of two or three deaths of 


members of the Gam’s family having happened in it. 


The Gam of Dilling, with his daughter, a young damsel, the calf of 
whose leg would have measured more in circumference than both mine, 
came to see the white man: though dignified with rank, their appearance 
was no better than that of commoners. The lady was highly pleased 
with a string of red glass beads, and not only gave me a fowl in return, 
but by informing her acquaintance of the beauty of my wares, procured 


me other offers of barter. 


Three days we remained confined to this hovel, and on the fourth, the 
25th October, were well pleased at the prospect of a change; heavy 
masses of white clouds rolled along the dells below and rising up the hills’ 
face, enabled us to see that on the peaks to the north, snow had fallen in | 
considerable quantity. The sun’s influence helped to dissipate the mists, 
and discovered to us our situation. On the west, we had a narrow glimpse 
of Asam; to the north, we saw the Brahmaputra deep in its narrow 
chasm and white with foam—the majestic peak VWhathutheya closed the 
view in that direction, and on the east, we were separated only by the 
deep ravine of the Disdé rivulet from the large mountain Thematheya. 
Snow gathers on the summits of both these in the colder months, but on 
Thematheya it does not remain long. We descended to the bed of the Disi, 
by a very rugged path, admitting but of slow progress, and traversing 
the base of Thematheya, we approached the Brahmaputra in a northerly 
direction—several water-falls were passed, and amongst them, one of 
singular beauty, though the stream is small: it first shoots clear over the 
brink of a high rock, which is nearly perpendicular and quite smooth, 
and then dividing into mist, almost disappears from sight till caught 
again near the bottom. 


370 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


Our path was generally through the jungle, with now and then an 
intermission of grass in spots which had formerly been cleared for culti- 
vation with vast labour. We came out suddenly on the Brahmaputra, and 
saw it foaming at the foot of the precipice below us, and shortly afterwards 
we descended to the bed, and halted on a small patch of sand. The rocks 
in the bed are of such enormous size that it is difficult to believe the river 
can bring them down, even in the rainy season; but they are evidently 
not in situ, such a variety of species are found. Syenitic granite— 
garnet rock, in which the garnets are found seven-tenths of an inch in 
diameter—serpentine, of a flinty hardness, and primitive limestone, are in 
larger quantity. The base of Thematheya, on our right, is of the same 
grey carbonate of lime, and perhaps the whole mountain. We had hitherto 


passed only granite gneis and mica slate. 


The river is here-but forty to sixty yards wide. I got meridian alti- 
tudes of two stars, which gave the latitude 27° 54’ 52, 4”. Diulling, the 
point of departure, is fixed by a bearing on the bend of the river below 
the Kund, and others on Thama and Thathutheyas; and the observations 
for latitude, both excellent, limit the distance made in our day’s journey, 


which deviates little in direction from north to south, but a few miles. 


The commencement of our march, the following day, was over a sin- 
gularly difficult place, where theriver rushes, with great violence, under the 
face of a perpendicular cliff. There is no path, and it is a perfect clamber, 
in which safety would be completely endangered by any other mode of 
carriage than that adopted, which leaves the hands free. We continued 
along the left bank of the river, to the mouth of the Ling, where we 
found Gua.ém, who had parted from us six days before to have a bridge 
built; and for this mark of attention we were heartily obliged, when we 
saw stretched between two opposite trees the cane suspension bridge, by 
which we must otherwise have crossed. The direction of our route was 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 371 


still north, and we left the river where it bends from the north-west, 
round the ‘base of a hill we were to ascend—that surmounted, we 
again enjoyed the sight of our resting-place, which had been visible 
from Dilling ; but though Guattm’s house was now near, in horizontal 
distance, a most fatiguing part of the journey remained to be performed 
in descending down the body of the Oo river, and ascending the opposite 
height. It was five o’clock in the evening when, at last, our fatigues of 
the day ceased. While at Guattm’s, I had three good observations for 
latitude, two of northern stars, and one of the sun, which gave 27° 56/ 
33,2. Of the direction from Dilling, 1 could now be quiet sure, as I not 
only had bearings from thence on Guattém’s house, but could now recognise 
a low peak very near our halting-place at Dilling. Making every allow- 
ance for the difficulties of the path, it would appear scarcely credible, 
without this best of evidence, that we had been employed the entire day 
in advancing less than two miles. After leaving the Brahmaputra, we 
passed several of the open spots formerly cultivated, and also through 
some fields belonging to Tharen, a village on our left. The scenery was 
more confined, the view being limited to the hills immediately bordering 


on the river, which do not rise here to a great height. 


We were most heartily welcomed by our rude friends, particularly 
by old Guattm, who seemed delighted with our visit, and we were (or 
rather I was) surrounded by the inmates of his house, and a few of the 
neighbours, the whole evening, all anxious to satisfy their innocent curi- 
osity, excited by the odd fashion of my apparel, and the magic art of the 
invisible musician of my snuff box. 


The next day at day light, there was a great bustle without, with 
much noise, which I found was caused by the pursuit of one of their hill 
cattle called Mithun, which was to be slain for a feast in honor of our 


arrival. Company began to arrive at an early hour from the neighbouring 


372 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


villages, and when the feast was ready, we had a very numerous assembly. 
A large quantity of the meat was minced and mixed with flour of the 
Marua, then made up into cylinders of leaves into which it was press- 
ed and cooked: these were handed about in trays of plaited bamboos, 
with plenty of madh, or fermented liquor, prepared also from the Marua; 
but they presented me with an entire hind leg, to cook after my own 
fashion, and to the better Khamtis of my party, they also presented 
separate portions. The Lire Gohain alone forbore to eat of it, think- 
ing that it too nearly resembled beef, which not from the maxims of his 
own religion, but from a wish to cultivate the good opinion of Hindus, 
he had long discontinued to taste of. I was constantly thronged, and 
made to exhibit my curiosities, as my gun, pistols and musical snuff box, 


which last was kept in constant requisition. 


The lower classes of tne Mishmis are as rude looking as can well be 
imagined. Their ordinary clothing consists of a single~ strip of cloth, 
which is as narrow as its purpose possibly permits, and they wear, on occa- | 
sions of ceremony, the jacket which I have already described as fashioned 
with so little art—it comes half-way down the thigh, and is made ofa 
straight piece of blue and red striped cloth, doubled in the middle, the two 
sides sewn together like a sack, leaving space for the exit of the arms at 
the top, and a slit in the middle, formed in the weaving, admits in like 
manner the passage of the head. The hair is turned up and tied in a 
small knot on the crown, and this custom serves to distinguish them from 
the Dibong Mishmis, whom they always designate “ crop haired”—a nar- 
row belt of skin over the right shoulder sustains a large heavy knife with 
its sheath. The knife serves for all purposes of agriculture and domestic 
economy, it is applied in the same way with the Singfo Da, to opena 
passage through jungle; the other apparatus appertaining to dress, con- 
sists of a broader belt, worn across the left shoulder, carrying both before 


and behind plates of brass, which may be termed back and breast-plates— 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 373 


they are of four or five inches diameter, and beaten into a carved or spheri- 
cal form, but they appear to be rather ornamental than useful; a pouch 
of monkey’s skin at the girdle is also suspended to a belt containing 
tobacco, the small pipe, and the case for flint and tinder, armed on one side 
with astrong steel. Both this and the pipe are commonly of Chinese manu- 
facture, and are frequently engraved with letters. The Chinese of Yunan, 
readily interpreted the characters upon one, to signify “‘ made at the shop 
of ’ —— “should it prove bad please to bring it back to the maker, who 
will exchange it.” A spear is constantly carried in the hand, the head of 
which is manufactured by themselves, of soft iron, procured from the 
Singfos, the shaft is of a porous and brittle wood, and it has little 
resemblance of a weapon fitted for war. Their swords are Chinese made, 
very long and perfectly straight, and of equal breadth, ornamented 


sometimes with a kind of red hair. They have excellent cross bows. 


The Chiefs are seen wrapped in long cloaks of Thibetan woollens, or 
in handsome jackets of the same, generally dyed red or striped with many 
colours. The head dress is not remarkable: in the fields, it is merely a 
hemispherically-shaped cap of split cane, and in their homes they prefer to 
wear a red strip of muslin, encircling the head as a turban: their ear-rings 
differ according to their wealth ; those most esteemed (and when the lobe of 
the ears has been sufficiently extended) are formed of a cylinder of thin 
plate silver, tapering in diameter to the center : the latter being often one 


inch, and the former one inch and a half. 


The wives of the Chiefs are habited in petticoats, brought from the 
plains; they wear a profusion of beads, frequently a dozen strings, and 
when they are of a sort of white porcelain, their equipment must 
weigh at least ten pounds; other necklaces are of colorless glass, mixed 
with oblong pieces of coarse cornelian, and all of Zhibetan or Chinese 
manufacture. The ornament for the head is a plate of silver, as thin as 


Tie 


374 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


paper, gore-shaped, and long enough to cross over the forehead ; one sort of 
ear-ring hada remarkable appearance : it is a brass-wire ring, three or four 
inches in diameter, put through the top of the ear, and having suspended 
to it a triangular plate of silver, which remains in the direction of the 


shoulders. 


Polygamy is allowed—the limit is only the inability or disinclination 
of the Chief to exchange more hill cattle for new wives. My host, 
Guatim, had then ten, two or three in the house; and the remain- 
der, to avoid domestic quarrels, have separate houses assigned them at 
some little distance, or live with their relations. As has already appeared, 
they suffer no sort of restraint, but young and old mix with the men in 


the performance of every kind of labor, except hunting. 


GuA.é6m’s riches were evident in the embellishments of one wall of the 
interior of his dwelling; there, on bamboos, extending the whole length, 
were rows of the blackened skulls of Mtthiins, Thibet cows, and those of 
the plains, some hogs, and a few bears, deers, and monkeys. The estima- 
tion of wealth is to be guided by the number of the skulls of the Mithuns 
and cattle of the Lamas, which are of the greatest value. I was, in the 
course of my journey, in the house of one man who is accused of the 
shabby trick of retaining on his walls the skulls of his father’s time, 
thereby imposing on all but those of the neighbourhood. I understood 
that they were generally piled within a little palisade, which marks the 
spot where the Chief lies buried. Of their religion, I only learned that 
they sacrifice fowls or pigs to their sylvan deities, whenever illness or 
misfortune of any kind visits them, and on these occasions a sprig of a 
plant is placed at the door to inform strangers that the house is under a 
ban for the time, that it must not be enterred. GHaxttm’s house is about 
one hundred and thirty feet long and eleven wide, raised on posts sufli- 


ciently high to give plenty of room below to the hogs. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 375 


The morning after the feast, a number of visitors still remained, 
curious to see what I should produce as presents, and anxious themselves 
to share, though without pretensions. It had been at first intended that we 
should depend on Krisona, the elder brother of the three Tain Chiefs, 
for arrangements in furtheranee of my scheme. He is esteemed as being 
the more martial and decided character, and his influence in his own tribe, 
and with the Mizhus also, is consequently greater; but he was absent with 
a party of men, to assist the Cuisone Gam against an incursion of the 
Dibong Mishmis, at the village of the former, distant two days journey in 
a northerly direction. Had thisman been present, and had he entered into 
our views, success would. have been more probable, from the operation of 
fear with the Mizhis. 


In his absence, it only remained to engage the services of his brothers, 
Guattm and Kuosna. I presented them with jackets of scarlet broad 
cloth, large silver ear-rings, and red handkerchiefs, with a few other tri- 
fles, and did not omit to send to Krfsone’s house a similar present, 
though of less value. Immediately after the distribution, I observed a 
number of the visitors quit the house with a rather discontented air. 
Those who had received gifts were long busy in admiring them, and while 
discussing their merits, I perceived great deference was paid to the judg- 
ment of Rupinc, a Chief of the Mizhi tribe, whose intercourse with 
the Lamas is frequent, and who laid down the law on this occasion with all 
the dignity and authority becoming so experienced and enlightened a 


traveller. 


The Mishmis differ with the other hill tribes in their habit of traffick- 
ing—every man among them is a petty merchant. They did not seem to 
comprehend why I should be unwilling to part with any of my stores for 
an equivalent, and I was amused at their exhibition of cunning in attempt- 


ing to draw me into making a bargain. 


376 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


In the mean time, a good deal of discussion had taken place between 
the Lirit Gohain and Mishmi Chiefs about our journey, in which Rép1ne 
had joined, and he soon became very anxious to have the sole merit of 
guiding me, laying great stress on his rank amongst the Mizhi tribe, and 
his great influence with the Lamas. I had observed him pretty closely, 
and felt inclined to hold no very favorable opinion of him. His house is 
so far removed from the side of Asam that he would not have much to 
apprehend from our anger, and the only hold upon him resulted from his 
connexion with the Jains, by marriage with a daughter of Kuosua. But 
he was very urgent in representing that the presence of any of the Tams 


with me would not be at all advantageous. 


Guam was very willing to set out with me, but was unluckily lame 
from some slight hurt; and Kuosua was engaged in the momentous occupa- 
tion of building anew house, and would not, on any account, desist from 


his personal superintendance. 


My detention here for four days had caused an awkward diminution of 
my stock of provisions, and this was an additional reason to move onward, 
more especially as Guatt had not the means of supplying me: it was 
therefore resolved to remove to Kuosuas, whose fields had yielded him a 
more plentiful crop. On the 31st October, we set out and retraced our 
steps down the descent to the Zz, and up the opposite ridge, from thence we 
turned to the east, and passed the summit of a hill, and then moved through 
ultimate cultivation and grass jungle on the face of the hill, in an easterly 
direction, to Kuosua’s, and found it an easy march. The direction of 
our route was afterwards more accurately ascertained by ascending 
a neighbouring hill, whence Guattm’s was plainly distinguished, and 
also the two mountains, to one of which, Thematheya, we had now 
approached very closely; again two altitudes were observed here for 


latitude. A view in another direction was now opened to us, but was 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 377 


not extensive enough to be very interesting; we overlooked the Luri 
river in its south-easterly bend behind Thamatheya, and in the same direc- 
tion could perceive a little snow laying on the peaks north of the 
Dihing. 

As we seemed now, though contrary to my wish, to remain dependant 
upon Répinc, I had a conference with him, and admonished him of the 
degree of responsibility in the office he was about to undertake ; on the 
other hand, I warned the Tuins also against assuring me too lightly of 
their belief of Répr1ne’s good faith. The next day Kuosua made good 
his promise in a manner more handsome than I expected, and, for a few 
seers of salt, procured me six days’ provisions, with which I instantly set 
forward, with Kosa and his son in company ; the latter was to proceed 
with us. Our march was in an easterly direction, on the southern face of 
some high hills ; first through some cultivation, and then down a very 
steep descent through tree jungle, to the dell of the J»dal rivulet. The 
ascent, on the opposite bank, was very steep and difficult, and after nearly 
three hours fatiguing march, we were still in sight of Kuosna’s house, 
bearings on which with Thamatheya give the distance and direction of the 
day’s journey. We halted with a Chief named Nargra, who, according 
to the custom of these hospitable people, killed us a hog. I gave him in 
return a pair of large silver ear-rings. His house is a ruinous hovel, and 
his consequence can be but small ; but he was very officious in offering his 
services for my journey, and asserted that he and Réprne could ensure 
me against all difficulties with the Mizhu tribe. The rock appeared to be 


the same white talc slate, and lower down in the hollow, mica slate. 


In the morning Kmosna returned, and took his son with him, promis- 
ing, however, to follow me to RépinG’s, should GHaLtm remain unable 
to proceed. He went early, without informing me of his intentions. Thus 
defeated in my purpose of having the security of the presence of a Chief 


INS: 


378 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


of his tribe, I agreed with the Gohain, that further delay was to be prefer- 


red, if we could contrive some more certain arrangement. 


I left our provisions under the care of a few men, and returned to 
Kuosua’s, who now seemed really concerned, and promised that if Gua- 
LtUm’s lameness should continue to disable him, he would himself go with 
us in his place. We found that Guaxtm had actually set out, and had 
proceeded to join us by way of the Lari. There now appeared a pros- 
pect of starting in earnest, and on the 4th I was delighted to advance in 
the field of discovery. The party was divided, first returning by Rép- 
ING’s, to bring on the things left there, and the other with me proceeding 
by a much better path down to the Lii’s banks, where we awaited the 
arrival of the others. It was now evident that our going to Narsra’s 
had been contrived only to give him an opportunity of begging, under the 


pretext of presenting his hog. 


On the banks of the Lui, we marched at a good pace through 
bamboo jungle on a narrow level strip of ground. The Mishmis informed 
us that, advantageous as the level was for rice cultivation, they were obliged 
to relinquish it from suffering in health in the low grounds. We halted 
in the bed of the Li on astone bed, and posted the sentries as if an 
attack had been expected. The next day we continued to advance up the 
Lvirt, sometimes over the large boulders on its banks, and sometimes 
through fields and grass jungle, a little elevated above the river on the 
hill’s side. From the mouth of the Thame, where it joins the Liri from 
the north, we commenced the ascent of a hill by a very difficult path almost 
blocked up with tree jungle, we afterward passed through several fields, 
and observed that the crests of the hills opposite were spotted with culti- 
vation. We halted at the house of a Mizhi Chief named Mosua, who, a 
few months before, had led an expedition to plunder the Livi Gohain’s 


village, but he failed in his attempt, the accidental firing of a gun in the 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 379 


course of the evening giving rise to the supposition that an alarm had 
been given. The party had been lying in wait for the approach of night, 
and their cowardice is apparent from the circumstance of their actually 
leaving on the ground some of their weapons, when first struck with the 
idea that the village was alarmed, they commenced a hasty flight. Their 
use of poisoned arrows is in character with their treacherous and dastardly 


mode of warfare. 


The boulders in the Livrt are generally of sienitic granite—on the 


ascent of the mountain we found gneiss passing to mica slate. 


Mosna, as usual, killed a hog, and was rewarded in return witha 
suitable present: he expressed his readiness to accompany me if I were 
pleased, and of course he was invited, as I considered it advantageous to 
throw some responsibility on a Mizhu, residing near the Tains. The 
ereat length of his house, and the number of skulls ornamenting it, 


bespeak him a rich man. 


We were joined, very much to my satisfaction, by Guattm and my 
Burman, who had been Jame and obliged to halt, by marching over so 


much rock. 


We started early the next morning, understanding that we had a most 
laborious march before us to the next place, where water could be found— 
our course was still east, but we had left the Livi, which is from the 
south-eastern mountains. The ascent of the next mountain we found very 
difficult and fatiguing for some hours, very steep through, having forest; 
latterly, it was more in steppes where a sudden ascent is followed by 
a long gentle slope or nearly even ridge; at the summit of our high ridge, 
I got avery good observation of the sun’s meridian altitude, and once or 


twice in the way up, we enjoyed partial views of the tract behind us. 


330 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


Our approach to the summit was marked by greater steepness and 
difficulty, and at last by the absence of all larger trees, which gave place 
to those of very stunted growth or to low bushes, indicating by their 
appearance, what was asserted by our guides, that snow remains here. It 
may be supposed what interest was excited as each new gain on the 
mountain’s steep face brought me nearer to that height whence I expected 
to overlook the unknown regions through which the Brahmaputra has its 
hidden course, but I suffered disappointment. Another mountain rose 
close to this one on its east, and where the capricious clouds permitted, 
through their casual openings, a passing glimpse. of the rugged country 
beyond, all I could perceive was fir-clad mountain or a patch of snow. 
To the south-east the Liiri was again perceived, and the snowy peaks 
were partially visible, where it has its source—it was evident that the 
extreme of that valley or glen was not far distant. To the north this 
peak is connected with others of greater altitude, and I was sorry to find 


that heavy clouds, in that direction, completely obstructed the view. 


We had been refreshed, while halting on the top, with numerous berries 
of a peculiar kind, growing in luxurious branches like currants. They are 
without stones and juicy: when unripe, they are of a pure or greenish white, 
and when ripened, of a beautiful azure blue. We had not descended very 
far before we found water trickling down the rock, our path then led along 
the little rill, which, having frequent contributions in its progress towards 
the base, had become, near our halting place, a considerable stream. It 
was a wild spot, a complete chasm between two high mountains, where we 
built our little huts for the night, of such poor materials as the more 
leafy branches of fir trees. 


We resumed our descent early the next day, and continued on the 
left bank of the glen, first winding to the east, and gradually more to the 


north, inthe worst of paths; the only support to which is often the root of 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 381 


some large tree, and in some places this even cannot be found, but the 
passage in front of some projecting rock is aided by trees bound together 
with cane, and their extremities either buried in the soil or fastened to the 


trunks of other trees. 


About one o'clock we found the chasm widening, and soon after we 
came upon fields. The entire mountain crossed is of granite, in which the 
mica is not abundant. At the field I found that a green stone and sienite had 
taken the place of the former granite, and saw several masses of pure horn- 
blend rock. From the fields we descended to the So, the source of which 
we had seen in the trickling water near the summit of the mountain—it was 
now a large rivulet, and no longer fordable. We next climbed up a very 
steep rock, which could not be surmounted but by the help of the canes 
which are left tied there, and about three o’clock we once more found 
ourselves near the Brahmaputra, and we overlooked its course from the 


east to the distance of ten or twelve miles. 


The scene has now an entirely new character: the river washes’ the 
bases of the mountains, which on both banks rise so high as to have their 
tops clothed in snow: they are very steep, but near their bottoms the 
declivity is easy, and has the appearance, when viewed from a height, of 
an undulating plain. This, the Brahmaputra intersects, running at the 
bottom of a deep channel or chasm, which has much the appearance of 
having been gradually deepened by the action of the water. The outline 
of the hills is varied and beautiful, and they have no longer the inhospita- 
ble look given by the uniform black jungles on those left behind, but 
are covered with alternate patches of grass and forest, with extensive 
intermixture of cultivated fields reaching to near theirsummits. A longer 
mountain immediately over the river appears to be of granite—on this bank 
the great number of large black blocks of hornblend rock and greenstone 
indicate that these constitute the strata. 

BS 


382 - MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


In its onward course the river stretches to the N. W. between steep 
mountains, and is soon lost to the view. On our march, we had occa- 
sionally perceived through the clouds very heavy snow lying on the 
peaks to the north, one of which I conjectured, from its shape, to be the 
turret peak of Sadiya. Descending from the rock we reached extensive 
fields belonging to Rép1ne’s village, and travelling some distance through 
them, with the river two or three hundred yards off, on our right, we passed 
several houses built singly, but all ornamented with a small grove of plain- 


tain trees, and about four o’clock we, at last, arrived at R6ép1NG’s. 


Much of this man’s asperity of manner wore off, now that we had 
become his guests, and he was active in doing whatever he could for our 
comfort: a pig was killed as a matter of course. We found waiting our 
arrival, my old acquaintance Primsonc, who had supplied us with the 


earliest intelligence relative to the route to the Lama’s territory. 


Next day, when Ltalked of moving on without loss of time, difficulties 
were started, and the Mishmis declared that we must not think of proceed- 
ing till proper notice should have been given to the Chiefs of the next vil- 
lage, particularly to one Dinesua, whom they regarded as the person of 
greatest influence on our route—for this purpose they proposed that 
Primsone and Guattm’s nephew should advance, and receive their report 


on the road. 


IT remarked that our arrival here did not cause the like commotion and 
assemblage of people, that it did at GHaLtm’s. We made our purchases 
of rice at a dear rate, and were materially assisted in this by the Lurt 
Gohain and other Khamti Chiefs, who are all skilful workmen in silver, 
and who readily employed themselves in fashioning ear-rings at RépING’s 
forge, for the purpose of barter—the workmanship giving a double value 
to the silver. A couple of hammers and a few punches are all the tools 


requisite, which they carry with them in their travelling bag.. The silver 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 383 


is melted and poured out in the hollow of a bit of bamboo, then beaten, 
with great patience and perseverance, and repeated heating, into plates 
almost as thin as paper: by management of the hammer, they make it 
spread in the required direction till long enough to bend into a cylinder, the 
edges are then cut even with a sort of scissors, and the parts to be soldered 
are notched in a castellated form, the alternate projections inserted, and 
a little borax, with a very thin bit of plate laid over the joint, which the 
application of a little heat readily unites ; a curve is then given to the sides 
of the cylinder, when the top is only required to finish it. The top is, of course, 
a circle, and when beat thin enough it is laid on a bed of lac softened by 
heat, and with blunt punches, an embossed pattern is then given, both the 
silver and the lac being repeatedly heated, to prevent the former from 
becoming brittle, and to soften the latter sufficiently to cause it to assume 
readily the indentations of the punch: in this way, with the aid of sharper 
punches, and some of small size, a very pretty pattern is given, butit is not 
pierced. All the Mishmis Chiefs have a forge, at which they make their 


own spear heads, and mend the implements used in tilling. 


I was very anxious to proceed the next morning, butwas foiled again 
by the lazy Mishmis; they wished to wait for the return of our emissaries, 
or at least to allow them one whole day for a parley with the Chiefs: 
with rice to eat and a house to sleep in, they could not conceive that any 


motive need occasion haste. 


In the course of the day we learned that we are threatened by one 
Chief, who declares that if we come near his passes, he will roll down stones 
onus. I begged that he might be invited to see me, but they seemed too 


certain of his hostility to make the attempt. 


Répine began to talk of his present, and to hint that when he under- 


took to conduct us, he expected to be well paid, and he wished to know 


384 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


what I would offer him. I doubted his power to give any material assistance, 
and wished to bargain with him conditionally on his success, but of this 
he would not hear, and in return proposed to give back my present if 
unsuccessful, but in the meantime he must receive in pledge whatever he 
was to have, and I found that his demands would nearly exhaust my 
store. The obvious inference to be drawn from his uncompromising and 
unreasonable demands was, that conscious of his inability, he was endea- 
vouring to rob me of all he could, and I was very little inclined to yield. 
However, early the next morning, I selected a larger present than J had 
yet given to any Chief, and exhibiting it to him, desired that he would 
decide at once whether or not to receive it, and give us the benefit of his 
services. I reminded him, that if I should fail in attempting to go with- 
out him, and return in consequence, he would not benefit at all by my visit. 
But he had a stronger hold upon me than I then imagined. It alarmed 
the Tains and all the Mishmis of my party, who were very unwilling to 


move without the security of his safe guidance. 


On his declining to receive my present, I ordered a march and started, 
intending to see the Chiefs to whom my messengers had been sent, when 
I should know better with whom it was necessary to treat ; but we had not 
proceeded a mile when Guattm informed me, that he and his friends 
could not go on without a better understanding with the Mizhus, or the 
presence of Rép1NnG; they, in fact, seemed very much alarmed. GuaLtm, 
at his own request, sent back to offer the coat given to him in addition to 
my present, and after keeping us a considerable time waiting, Rtp1NG 
at last rejoined us, and consented to follow us on the morrow, upon the 
conditions offered. : 


We crossed the So by a rude wooden bridge, and traversed the hill’s 
face a few hundred feet above the Brahmaputra, by a very bad path. The 


direction of the march was towards the south-east, the irregularities were 


~ 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 385 


only in the unevenness and rockiness of the path: the deviations from a 
right line were not considerable, neither the ascents or descents, and we 
made good way over the ground. Several cane suspension bridges were 
passed, and we had an opportunity, for the first time to-day, of seeing the 
passage made by one of them where we sat to rest, while several men 
passed to and fro. Accustomed as these men are from their infancy to this 
mode of crossing rivers, and confident as they must be of the stability of 
their safety, I observed that each man took every possible precaution before 
submitting himself to the awful situation of ‘“‘dangling midway between 
heaven and earth,” suspended on three light canes high above a rapid 


river eighty yards broad. 


A stage is erected at a considerable height above the water on either 
bank, and well secured with large stones and canes made fast to the neigh- 
bouring trees, the three canes composing the suspending rope pass over 
well secured supports on the stages at either end, and are separately 
fastened to trees, so that were one of them to prove not trustworthy, two still 
remain. Before the stages, anumber of loops hang ready for use—they are 
made of a long cane coiled like a roll of wire. The passenger inserts his 
hands and shoulders through two or three of these and brings them under the 
small of his back ; he then, or some one for him, secures the loop with great 
care to a kumurbund contrived for the purpose on the instant, and generally 
the spear put through the knot helps the security of the fastening, then 
throwing his heels over the cane, he launches forth on his adventurous pas- 
sage. The weight of the body altering the natural curve which so large a 
cane must necessarily have, however well stretched, causes him to descend 
at first with some rapidity, in which the hands are rather used to arrest the 
progress ; towards the middle he is master of his pace, and when hanging 
there the cane is considerably bent from the horizontal line; now the 
hands are used to drag the body gradually up the inclined rope ; progress 
grows slower as he advances, and when near the goal he appears so 

c 3 


! 


386 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


fatigued, that between each tug he makes a long pause ; accidents are sel- 
dom known, and I understand that they take care to renew the canes at 


least every three years. 


Latterly, we descended to the edge of the river, and passed along its 
enormous boulders, rather by leaps than steps. The great mountain from 
opposite Rtvine’s, still continued with us, on the opposite banks ; but 
from our halting place it receded where the Hali river separates it from 
a new succession of hills of a different character, and the part of the great 
mountain we saw was completely clothed, towards the top, in firs. The 
green grass-covered hills now succeeding, have many firs growing singly 
even near the level of the water, and they are striped sometimes, from the 
summit to the base, with fir forest. On the rather wide stony sand bed 
where we halted, we found drafted pines, and enjoyed the fine odour of 
the fresh turpentine. The river, for one or two hundred yards above the 
ffali, is so calm, that I was induced to bathe in it, and the consequence 
was, that my teeth chattered for two hours, in spite of the bright blazing 
fires of our fine pine faggots. The rock was almost inclined enough forward 
from the perpendicular, to save the necessity of building, and our huts were, 
consequently, very soon erected. In the evening, immediately after cooking, 
all the Khamtis were most busily employed in piling up conical heaps of 
sand for altars, round each of which a little trench was made. The Lari 
Gohain acting as high priest, advanced before the highest, and muttered a 
long prayer for our success on the journey, and concluded by placing a bunch 
of flowers in the apex of the cone, and strewing the trench with offerings 
from his ready-cooked meal. There was not the appearance of a village 
on either side of us. We seemed to be quite solitary, but during the 
evening several labourers passed us, who told us their houses were near 
on the cliffs above. All the rock on our route was hornblend and 


greenstone. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 387 


The direction the next day was still the same, or a little more south, 
and we passed over more level ground: several open spots were met with, 
which admitted of our travelling at a brisk pace. At the deepest part of 
this bend, to the south, we came on thesteep mountain’s face again, and here 
the path was bad in the extreme. About one o’clock we left the Brahma- 
putra to proceed in an easterly direction over the hills, round which the 
river winds. They were here rather low and spreading out into a more 
even yet undulating surface ; the extent of the open tract was from eight 
hundred yards to near a mile, and a great part of it was cultivated : in seve- 
ral directions houses were seen, some of them close to our path. As we 
advanced over this new ground, an evident improvement was observed, 
the houses were built on more commodious spots, each had its grove of 
plaintains. Mithuns and chowr-tailed cows were grazing in numbers, and 
the men who appeared lazily standing near our path to view the strangers, 
were wrapped in long warm cloaks with sleeves : there were even rude walls, 
built of stones without cement, to keep the cattle out. At one house, GHaLtm 
was recognized and invited in: he promised to hear the news and not 
detain us a minute, but his favorite Madh being offered him, he was easily 
detained, and repeatedly I sent in vain to remind him that we were waiting 
his leisure in the rain. I wished to enter the house, but was given to 
understand that I should be a most unwelcome visitor. Presently we 
met Primsone and our messengers, who begged, in JIncsHa’s name, 
that we would halt for the night where we were, or in a spot to be 
pointed out, and that arrangements would be made for our better recep- 
tion on the morrow, he being unable to invite us to his house on 
account of a sacrifice having been offered for his sick brother. We 
were accordingly led to the hill’s side near the village of one G6NsHONG, 
who appeared and stared at us, with many more Chiefs, but none of them 
appeared at all inclined to shew the ordinary hospitality, but rather they 
looked at and examined us to keep aloof from further intercourse. The 


spot pointed out for our halting-place was closely surrounded with jungle, 


388 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


‘ 


and little to my liking, as a surprise, if any mischief were intended us, could 
scarcely have been guarded against. I found it necessary however to halt 


here, as the people would not show us another place. 


i ordered the people next morning to prepare for marching, and when 
ready, | was informed that Jinesua would not be ready to receive us till 
the morrow, and that he particularly requested we would remain that day 
also where we were. I sent to say that I intended to move nearer to him, 
and intimated my wish, that if he had not yet finished the house which was 
said tobe building for us, he would order a place to be pointed out where we 
might halt, in the vicinity of his dwelling. We set out and crossed the deep 
ravine of the Dank rivulet, and passed more of the open ground already 
described, but were soon met by JincsHa’s people, who came in haste to 
warn us not to approach nearer to the house, and shortly after we encoun- 
tered other messengers, who told us authoritatively to halt at once, or to 
return. I selected a convenient open spot on the top of a round hill where 
the jungle was twenty to thirty yards distant on every side, and there, in 
accordance with their wishes, caused our huts to be built. We were now 
told that the Chiefs of the next village could not consent to our advancing 
till some of the influential men of the neighbourhood should be assembled, 
to debate on so momentous an affair as admitting strangers to pass 
through their country, but they hoped that all would concur in a favorable 
opinion. This appeared reasonable, and though very anxious to proceed, 
I thought it better to allow time for a meeting of all the principal 
men, when I could meet them, and clearly understand with whom I had 
to treat. Amongst other arrivals at the village, that of Lamar THao was 

announced from a distance of two days journey, in a south-easterly direc- 
tion. This Chief is in the habit of trading with the Khaméi country on the 
frawadi, and being perfectly acquainted with the Sham or Khamtz language, 
I hoped much from the advantage of communicating so readily with him 


through the Lur1 Gouain; but as my people were afraid to go across to 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 389 


the village, I had no means of sending to him, but through Ropine, whose 
interested motives perhaps prevented him from delivering my message: 


however this was, I only got for answer that Lamar TuHao would not come. 


The Khamtis shuddered at the idea of his being so near us, for some years 


ago, he treacherously murdered several families who attempted to cross 
the mountains to visit the Lama country. It is said that he received the 
travellers into his house with demonstrations of hospitality and friend- 
ship, and supplied them with intoxicating liquor, so that they fell at night 
an easy prey tohis band of remorselessassassims. When I heard this tale, 
I expressed my wonder that his visits should be still tolerated by the 
Khamtis, and that they had not retaliated ; but was informed that a present 
of the whole of the muskets of the murdered party had restored him to 
favor with the Khamti Rajah. 


At twelve o'clock, I got a good observation of the sun, which gave the 
latitude 27° 53’ 00”; this large difference from Rtép1Ne’s, with the facility of 
taking bearings along the open river, now afforded the means of proving 
my scale of rates of progress, without which proof I should have been very 


ill satisfied with my data for a map. 


Opposite, on the hill on the north bank, is the village of Samleh, the 


eighth stage on Primsone’s route given me in march. Snow was seen on 


_ several peaks a little removed from the river to our north. On the south, 


the tops of the nearest mountains were all partially covered with snow, 
forming a strong contrast with the black fir forests on them. In the 
south-east, was the hollow of the La Thi, and nearly east, the wide 
opening of the Ghalim Thi, between which two rivers the mountains 
rose high enough to have their more remote peaks capped with snow. 
North of the Ghalim, successive snowy peaks were seen stretching 
away to the east, and forming a high ridge. The view was not very 
extensive in any direction. We were then in the deepest part of the bend 
D3 


390 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


of the river. To the south, about four miles from us, just before it receives 
the above named rivers, it winds round the base of Samleh hill. I made 
Primsone and others point out the direction of its course from the Lama 
country, and was informed by them that it runs from north-east to south- 
west without any material bend, and that the course of the Talika, through 
the Lama country, is in the same direction. We could see that the gap to 
the north-east extends uninterruptedly a considerable distance. The 
mountains are covered with grass, and have on them large patches of fir 


forest, extending sometimes in ravines from summit to base, 


The day passed away without our seeing any thing of the Chiefs, 
and we had not the usual concourse of curious visitors: my people 
also seeking trifles at some houses at no great distance, found them 
empty, as if the inhabitants were under alarm. This strange beha- 
viour of the Mishmis, so different to what I have hitherto experien- 
ced, convinced me that a hostile feeling existed; but I still fully 
expected to see the Chiefs, who were said to be assembled and assem- 
bling, and I did not doubt my ability to talk them into perfect good 
humour. The next morning, however, seeing that another day was 
wearing away without bringing any signs of their approach, I dispatched 
Primsone to them, to request that they would pay me a visit, and under- 
stand from myself what my purpose was. I instructed him to inform 
them, that I had no wish to pass through their country without their con- 
currence, butI particularly begged that they would come and confer openly 
with me on the subject, and freely state their objections if they had any. 
Primsone returned in great alarm at the rough reception he had met with: 
though personally known to, and on previous good terms with them all, they 
threatened him as the cause of our introduction. He reported, that there 
were about two hundred men assembled at JinasHa’s, all furnished with 
arms, and holding a stormy debate, and he feared that the question 


was already decided against us. Neither he nor any other of the party 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 391 


would venture again, and it appeared necessary that I should make the 
attempt myself; however, the difficulty of the want of an interpreter, and 
the admonition of my friends as to the risk I should run, deterred me. 
I have since regretted that I did not go amongst them, either alone or with 
my whole party, as I think I might have been successful. R6p1nG was 
often to and fro; he told us that a great number were hostile to us, but that 
he could, and would do every thing if he received his present. In the 
evening he cameagain, making aloud clamour, like a vexed school boy, for 
his present. ‘My present! he said, in reply to all questions. My Mishmis 
were anxious that I should give it to him, convinced by his assertions 
that he had the power yet to produce a revolution in our favor. I, at 
last, consented to put the present, precisely the same as had been selected 
for him in the morning, 


were not successful he should return it. Rép1NG was now highly delight- 


into their hands to give conditionally, that if he 


ed and moved off, informing me that all would be right immediately ;_ but 
he took care previously to come over and examine each article of my gifts: 
when parting, he called his brother-in-law aside (KuosHasson) and told 
him he would act wisely in returning to his home without delay. 
Naxrsra and Mosua, the two Mizhu Chiefs resident near the Tain 
villages, who had received my presents, seized an opportunity of passing 
through our camp, and told us that they had not been admitted to the 
council, because they were not thought trustworthy, but that they strongly 
suspected, from what they had observed, that treachery was intended, and 
they advised us strongly neither to accept a proffered invitation, nor ven- 
ture to sleep that night—this much they hastily told us, and then hurried 
away. RvpiNne returned immediately with an invitation to JiIncsHa: he 
proclaimed that all was well, a hog had been slain for us, and we were 
to take up our quarters in the house that night, and in the morning pro- 
ceed to houses. I excused myself from moving at that late hour, and 
RvinG did not press the invitation. He again called his brother-in-law 


to the edge of the jungle, and threw out some dark hints. He wound up, 


392 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


however, with telling him, that it would be madness in him to remain there 
after his warnings. Guattém, and the rest, were now so decidedly alarmed, 
that they insisted on immediate flight ; but Ishould mention that they had 
observed many suspicious circumstances which have not been stated. I 
considered that I ought to be guided by the intimate knowledge which they 
must necessarily have of the habits of their neighbours, and as. they were 
convinced of the inutility of our remaining, unless we were prepared to 
proceed in hostile form, I consented to take advantage of the night for 
a retrograde movement. I proposed to start after midnight, when the 
moon would serve to guide us over the good ground to the banks of the 
river, when we should have daylight for the difficult path over the rocks. 
The people all cooked, in order that they might not be delayed in their 


flight on the morrow. 


I lay down to rest early after posting my sentries, but I was not per- 
mitted to enjoy quiet long, the fears of Guattm and the other Mishmis 
being so great, that they earnestly begged I would not delay our flight. 
At half-past ten the party was arranged in marching order, and enjoined 
to be very careful in avoiding noise when passing the house which 
lay close to our path. The Chinese prepared, in admirable style, a 
train of wood to goon burning through the night in the midst of our 
encamping ground, and then, after seeing the guides and coolees take the 
lead, I bid adieu, with a heavy heart, to the opening mountain scenery 
which, three days before, I had hailed as the road to new and most interest- 
ing discovery. I found that my people, though generally so awkward, needed 
no hints in managing a retreat: we passed all the houses unobserved and 
. without noise, excepting that which could not possibly be subdued arising 
from the heavy tread of somany men. We arrived at the rocks on the 
Brahmaputra, with no other accident than the fall of a poor coolie, who 
missed his hold while clambering down the perpendicular precipice of a 


ravine, whose hands and feet were required with careful use of both. He 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 393 


fell full ten feet, but he alighted on some bushes, and escaped unhurt. On 
the bad path we found the want of fall light, and indeed, after proceeding 
some time with imminent hazard of broken legs, and finding little progress 
could be made, (the moon was hidden from us by the hill above) we threw 
ourselves on the ground and were all quite enough fatigued to enjoy sound 
sleep. At day-light we resumed our retreat, and at an early hour arrived 
at our former halting place opposite the Hali: here the men rested to 


eat their ready-cooked meal. 


About twelve o’clock there was an alarm from the rear, of a pursuit, 
and the musketeers were assembled together. On our arrival at one of 
the difficult precipices, the alarm was seconded by the appearance of large 
heaps of stones, ready at the top, for rolling down on unfortunate assail- 
ants, but it was agreed at the time that the heaps had been recently 
made. I believe that they had been prepared long before our coming. When 
we came out on an open spot in the fields, I called a halt, that we might 
know what sort of enemy we had to deal with, for they must inevitably 
come up with us sooner or later, and there came one solitary man. He 
was R6pinG’s son: the information he gave us was, that an hour or two 
before day-light in the morning, the assembled warriors had invested our 
position, and concealing themselves in the jungle while advancing from all 
sides, they at last rushed upon our huts, and to their infinite disappoint- 
ment, found them empty. I do not vouch for the truth of this story, nor 
even my belief in it, for I found that R6ép1NG’s game was now to demand 
a reward for his interference to preserve our party from utter destruction. 
We could not collect more on the subject, than that it had been the 
intention to attempt a surprise by night, if we had accepted JinGsHA’s 
invitation to his house, or had that failed, to wait the opportunity of the 
division of our party, at the crossing place of the great river. We heard 
also, that the multitude were inclined to retaliate on Rtpine when 
enraged at the discovery of our departure, and we now found that even 


. 


394 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


before our arrival at Rép1ne’s, these hostile preparations were making, 
and that this was the reason of our finding his village so thinly inhabited. 


We took possession of his house for the night. 


Principally to avoid the tedious ascent of the great mountain, crossed 
in marching from KuosuHa’s, we adhered, on our return, to the banks of the 
river, and the remaining part of my journey was onlyi nteresting as it 
discovered the intermediate line of direction of the river to Thathoutheya 


mountain, and to the Kund. 


I was very anxious to retrace my steps up the Brahmaputra, with a 
sufficient force, to overawe the Mizhus from attempting any similar 
treachery to that they had prepared for us. I proposed to take twenty 
musketeers, and then, with the acquisition of Lieutenant BurLTon to our 


party, I did not anticipate any further shew of opposition. 


Though reasoning on the advantage of doing that which has been 
left undone, may be something foreign to the purpose of this memoir, 
I think it due to myself to mention the objections and difficulties which 
have prevented my labors coming to a successful termination, as an 
answer, a priori, to those who might suppose the facilities of pursuing 


this investigation greater than they really were or are. 


Captain Nevurvitye, whom I found returned to Sadiya, in a political 
capacity, had brought up with him, by Mr. Scorr’s direction, a large party 
of the Mishmis, with their Chief, whose emigration from the mouth of the 
Dihong and from Stléni Mor, had caused such great dissatisfaction to 
the Abors. It was proposed to endeavour to re-settle these men at their 
old haunts, which measure the Abdors had assured us would produce a 
complete revolution in their feeling towards us. The Mishmis were, of 


course, to be protected against any retaliatory practices of the Adors. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 395 


My opinion was, that merely to shew the Mishmis, and to promise to 
the Abors that they should stay, would not satisfy these shrewd people, 
who would have required some better proof of the intention of the former 
to remain. I had completed preparations for my return towards the 
sources of the Brahmaputra, and it was with great regret®* that I deferred the 
completion of my plans in that quarter, but I yielded partly to the opinion 
of Captain Nrvurvitte, the Political Agent, and what also greatly influen- 
ced me in my determination to attempt again to advance from the Dihong 
side, was the belief that as the Abors were aware of the presence of the 
Mishmis at Sadiya, they might now be better inclined towards us, and that 
at least so good an opportunity might not occur again for some years. I 
was to be assisted also by having to present to the Adors a similar present 
to what, it is said, was occasionally given by the Asamese Government in 
former times. Another reason for a greater probability of success now 
than before was, that I had received an invitation from the Adors of 
Membi, to pay them a visit. During the rains I had dispatched to them 
my active Agent, the Lori Gouatn, to talk on the subject of their conduct 
towards Captain Beprorp and myself, and to explain our motives for so 
anxiously renewing enquiries respecting the course of their river, in a 
favorable light: they, in reply, sent me a round stone as an emblem of 
the stability of their friendly inclination towards me: “ until,” they said, 
“that stone crumbles into dust, shall our friendship last, and firm as. its 


texture, so firm is our present resolution.” 


Having had some experience, however, of their uncouth manners, 
and of their susceptibility of being suddenly influenced by the strange 


harangues of their native orators, I requested to have with me asmall party 


* TI have regretted it ever since, as of all my plans it appeared the best calculated to ensure 
success : certain knowledge would at least have been obtained from the Zamas, whether the Sampo 
continues beyond the source of the Brahmaputra. 


396 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


of regular troops ,who might keep the villagers in some awe, while guarding 
our boats and effects at the Ghat; I had also fifteen musketeers of the 


Khamtis, to accompany us if we should be able to advance. £ 


We arrived (Lieutenant Burtron was now with me) at Singart 
Ghat, without any remarkable occurrence on the way, and immediately 
sent Acaxone (a Mishmi Chief, resident on the Dihong) to the Membi 
village, to show the before-mentioned stone, and remind them of their 
invitation. He brought back one of the two influential men of the 
place, with information that we were expected atthe village, and 
that they should be happy to see us. In the mean time, people had been 
with us from Padi village, to express the wishes of the Gam and com- 
monalty of that place, that we would remain on the sand-bank where we 
were, and there receive their visits, and hold a grand conference, which 
the Adors seemed to understand as the only reasonable purpose of our 
coming, or, at any rate, as the only admissable mode of communicating 


our intentions. 


We held to our first resolution, but before we could set out the next 
day, more messengers arrived from Memb to inform us, that they were 
aware of the endeavour made by the Padé people to detain us, and 
begging that we would pay no attentionto them. This manceuvring exhi- 
bits the difficulty of treating with people who do not acknowledge one 
common head; but, on the contrary, are all jealous of one another, and 


united only in cases of general application to the common welfare. 


We started, and marched two hours through a dense tree jungle by 
a path admitting, as usual, but one man at a time: we then came out 
upon a fine patch of cultivation, extending four or five miles, and passing 
through a part of it, we entered a path eight or ten feet wide, and per-, 


fectly even, which continues in a direction nearly north to the Shiki. | 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 397 


Near this rivulet, we found a slight rise in the ground which terminated 
on the river’s bank in a perpendicular conglomerate. We were quite 
astonished at the skill and labor shown in the construction of the cane 
and suspension bridge thrown over at this point ; it was such, as would do 
no discredit to the department for similar works in Calcutta. Groups of 
trees, at either end, are so conveniently situated for making fast the canes, 
that the idea occurs of their having been planted for the purpose—the canes 
are passed over pegs in the supporting posts, and separately stretched 
and fastened to the different trees. There are two good main suspenders, 
and on these hang elliptical coils of cane at intervals of a few yards, 
supporting at the bottoms of them the footway, which is not more than 
twelve or fourteen inches wide: the elliptics are further connected by canes, 
running along the sides, protecting the passenger from the fear of falling ; 
but, though considerable stability is thus given to the whole structure by 
connecting its several parts, there is still a very unpleasant swinging and 
waving during the passage. The span between the points of suspension 


is full one hundred and twenty feet. 


The road from the bridge to Membu village ascends a low hill, and is 
stony. In one place, where the natural form of the rock with some artiticial 
defences narrow the path, we found a door-way recently built of green 
boughs, intended, as we understood, to keep out those evil spirits who 


might chance to travel in our company. 


On both banks of the Shiki are cliffs of conglomerate, the faces 
fresh from recent slips, caused, perhaps, by the undermining of the river 
in the rains (as the quantity of rubbish at the base is trifling.) The 
peaks of this conglomerate ridge are remarkable for their sharpness. 
Approaching the village, we first passed a great number of granaries, 
built apart for security against fire. The village may consist of one hun- 
dred houses, built near each other in the midst of a stony slope of easy 


9 
2 


F 


398 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


ascent. In the middle is the “ Morang,” a large building which serves 
as a hall of audience and debate, as a place of reception for strangers, and 
as a house for the bachelors of the village generally, who, by their laws, 
are not entitled to the aid of the community for the construction of a 
separate dwelling. It was intended that we should lodge here, but the 
effect upon our olfactory nerves of certain appendages of convenience, 
was so appalling, that we made. good a very hasty retreat from it, and we 
had luckily received hints from the Lér1 Gounarn on this subject, which 


had induced us to bring our small tent. 


The houses are not of that great length which I have described as a 
peculiarity in those of the Mishmi country. The first evening there was 
no great crowd, and we observed the women and the people returning at 
alate hour from their occupation in the fields, but there were enough. 
present to give us no little annoyance from their unceremonious manners 
of satisfying their curiosity, which, however, we endured patiently. One 
fellow sat down suddenly and proceeded to pluck off my shoe, the stocking 
excited his astonishment, but finding it not so easy to get that off, he satisfi- 
ed himself by touch that it was absolutely the fact, and then proclaimed to 
the wondering crowd that I had positively five toes shut up in the narrow 
space of my shoe. At night, we were surrounded and much plagued by men, 
women and children, whom we only got rid of by promising them that, the 
next day, they should indulge their curiosity to the full; indeed the next day 
appeared, when it came,* to be an allotted holiday for this special purpose, 
and our situation was worse than that of unfortunate wild beasts at a fair, 
in as much as that we had not the advantage of cages and bars to keep 
our annoyers at arm’s length; our people were all suffering and complain- 


ing, for they could not command that slight portion of respect which was 


* The village boys, at the first dawn of day, are made to go the round of the place, warning 
sleepy folks, that it is time for labors to commence. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 399 


paid to us, and but for their extreme good nature and forbearance, blows 
must have ensued from the impertinence of these uncivilized vagabonds. 
Though I had nothing to communicate, and did not expect to be much 
edified by what I should hear, I acceded to their request, and went into the 
‘© Morang,” where the Chiefs had assembled, together with those of Silk 
also, (a neighbouring village). They seem wonderfully fond of holding 
these palavers, at which their orators are heard with the utmost patience, 
and with the most decorous avoidance of interference. Three or four 
pronounced very loud and vehement orations, pressing for the return of 
the Sadiya Mishmis, whom they were assured we retained for the sake of 
profiting in revenue. I could only return general answers, and refer them to 
Captain Neurvitxe, the Political Agent. On other subjects, as the motives 
of our wish to go through their country, they said less than I expected. 
They speak in a remarkably emphatic style, dwelling upon each word and 
syllable, in the midst of their political discussions, to which I thought there 
would beno end. One old Chief, when it came to his turn, uttered a long 
emphatic speech, with great gravity, and made me fearsome new dilemma 
from an unanswerable question—but it was interpreted in very few words, 
to be a simple query, how we came from our own country, and what sort of 
a country that is? Linformed them that I was the bearer of presents, to be 
divided, according to their own custom, amongst the Adbor, villages, and I 
requested that they would take charge of them, and give notice to the Bor 
Abors, that the concurrence of that more powerful tribe might be had for 
an equitable division. They declined the office, and in return begged that 
I would make my own division. I had been given to understand, that 
the influential men would not dare to accept any thing for themselves 
in public, but I felt the difficulty of satisfying each in private, not 
only from the numbers, but from my ignorance of the relative claims 
of each to consideration; it was therefore by open dealing, and by 
the magnitude of the present offered to the whole, that I hoped to 


succeed. 


400 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


It suffices now to say, that our visit was not attended with any 
advantageous result ; they would not consent to our proceeding further by 
land, and they assured us of the utter impossibility of our going on by 


water. 


I seized a moment during the conference, when all appeared in 
perfect good humour, to put questions about the course of the Dihong, 
and could only learn that it comes from the west or north-west, but 
the Abors of this place are evidently unacquainted with it beyond a very 
short distance, since their country, or rather that of the Adors, which 
they visit, lies away from the banks of the river in a northerly direc- 
tion. Beyond the Bor Adors, on the opposite bank of the Yamuni river, 
are the Stmong tribe, from whom the former receive the Lama goods. 
The Reiga tribe are on the western side of the great river, beyond the 
Past and Mizong tribes. Some of those present were of opinion, from 
what they had understood, that both Regas and Simongs have but a short 
distance to go to reach the Lana country. All agreed in affirming, that 
the Dihong is not navigable, and that it would be absolutely impossible 


to proceed along the banks. 


The Membé people promised to inform the Bor Abors of our arrival. 
A hog was voted us by the council, and also a supply of rice, but 
neither was given with that hospitable feeling, which marks the friendly 
tribes of the Mishmis. It seemed as if they voted their gifts in the 
necessary observance of a custom, and afterwards gave them with great 
reluctance. These singular people acknowledge no other authority but 
that of the ‘““ Raj,”* or people generally, who make laws at the councils, 


assembled in the morning, where every one has an equal vote—but 


* The similarity of this word to Rajah, renders it very liable to be mistaken. Captain BEprorD 
mentions their Rajah. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 401 


though not acknowledged by them, it is evident that some few, either 
through their superior wealth, hereditary esteem, or real ability, exert a 
very strong influence on the rest, and can readily sway them to any measure. 
It would be supposed that this would greatly facilitate the gaining of any 
point at issue with the Adors, but the extreme jealousyof the “ Raj,” and 
vigilant watchfulness to preserve their democratical rights, render it a 
matter very difficult to manage to bribe these influential men, and my want 
of success amongst them I attribute entirely to my insufficient knowledge 
of their habits, and, consequently, of the proper mode of intriguing with 
them. It is singular to observe in them such different shades of extreme 
rudeness and civilized observance of laws, enacted and allowed by them 
to be necessary for the good of the community. The purpose of the 
primary article of their clothing (which consists of a triangular piece of 
coarse cloth, six inches long and four or five broad at the end, by which it 
is suspended to a string tied round the loins) is vitiated every time they 
sit down, but of this they seem perfectly careless, indeed, as we discovered 
in the evening, when prompted by curiosity to enter the Morang again, the 
bachelors are in the habit of basking by the side of their wood fires 
without any covering at all, and during the day, I had remarked that in 
the midst of a crowd of both sides the men did, indeed, avoid wetting their 
next neighbour’s leg, but observed no other of the ordinary precautions 
of decency. However, while many others of the mountain tribes seem 
superior to them in some points, I have not elsewhere seen them equally 
ready for a labor like that of constructing the cane suspension bridge. 
There is more order than usual also, in the regular mode of building their 
granaries. They have equitable laws to make public burthens (such as 
the presentation of a hog voted us that day, or erecting a new house for 
any member, when assistance is required,) fall equally on all. Of their 
religion, I learned no more than that, like the Mishmis, they occasionally 
sacrifice to a deity supposed to reside in the woods and mountains. The 
conical mountain, called Regam, they believe to be the abode of a rather 


G3 


402 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


malignant demon: for they assert that any one who should attempt to 
pry into the secrets of his dwelling on the summit, would surely die, 


as they know from experience. 


It was not a little remarkable, that though the Adors are said to be the 
source whence the strange tribes of the Sra Lofit are derived, we heard 
nothing about it from them; on the contrary, their geographical ideas are 
reasonable enough ; they declare the Dihong to come from a very great 
distance, and that it can no where be crossed but by boats or rafts, being 
always too wide for a cane bridge. The Lama country, with which they 
have intercourse, is situated on the right bank of the river, evidently, 
because after crossing it from E. to N. to reach the Reega tribe, they 


entirely lose sight of it in their progress to the N.W. 


While on the subject, it may be as well to allude at once to informa- 
tion derived from other sources, particularly from another tribe more to 
the westward. It is said that one route to the Lama country is by the 
Kadlapani (or black river), which falls in beyond Meyong; it is followed up 
to its source, and then some snowy mountains are crossed to the inhabited 
country. Chokis are there placed, and they cannot visit the interior ; 
but the town where they exchange commodities, is situated on the south 
bank of a very large piece of water, which, as they speak of a feature 
in it so very remarkable to them, of its “(having no current,” must be a 
lake. The Governor of the town is named Genpu, and he wears a shirt 
of mail, and rides a horse—so they say. They insist that the Duiuhong 
has nothing to do with the lake, and they conclude it to be distant from it. 


Here we have, apparently, the origin of the strange reports current in 
Asam, to which allusion has been made, of the large and magnificent 
river ; or what is quite as likely in my estimation 1s, that we derive our 


story from those tribes who are in contact with the Bhotiyas on the west, 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 403 


and that the Bhotiyas allude to the veritable Sampo passing their country 
to the north. All the more wealthy Adors have cloaks of Thibetan wool- 
lens ; indeed, scarce a man is seen amongst them without some article of 


the manufacture of Thibet. They wear large necklaces of blue beads, which 


they esteem very highly, and they profess that they are not procurable 


now ; they look exactly like turquoises, and have the.same hue of greenish 
blue—but a close examination discovers in them minute bubbles, marking © 
the agency of fire; they are extremely hard, but the only one I could get 
possession of, I broke with a hammer, and it had exactly the fracture of fine 


Chinese porcelain. 


The very rude tribes, of the existence of which the Asamese have an 
idea, and mention by the names of Bibors and Barkans, and mentioned 
by the Suibanshiri Abors, under the latter name, as residing to their north, 
may, perhaps, be the Sho-ptra of Father Groreits,* whose account of it 
need any concurrent testimony, is completely corroborated by a singular - 
note in Persian on a map from Nepal, which I have recently seen; they 


were to the south of Takpo, where the Capuchins had an establishment. 


After our return to our station at Shigaru Ghat, we resolved to try 
how far we could get up the banks of the Dihong, and ascertain the truth 
or falsehood of the Abor reports. The first evening we halted at the month 
of the Shiko, in latitude 28° 05’, at the end of a long easterly reach of 
the river, beyond the Past villages, and within sight of Padi, which is 
to the north, upon around hill. The next day we found that the Past 
people had taken the alarm, and we had moved but a few hundred yards 


* Quod populi bhi Meridionales Jabia gerant incissa Sho-kaha-ptra vocantur. Sho enim Meri- 
diem, Kha os, and ptra incissum designant. In cissionibus infundunt colores varios, rubrum, fla- 
vum, ceeruleum, alios-que. Pingunt ita Parentes indelebili varietate noatarum tenellula labia infan- 
tium, ut cum adoleverint ore semper picti, ac variegati appareant, 


4.04 ~ MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


\ 


when we were met by one of their Chiefs, who came to enquire our pur- 
pose. Our conference with him ended by our resolving to visit his village, 
in hopes that we might thence advance to Bor Meyong, and which indeed 
he led us to expect we might do. We found the Pasi village a consider- 
able distance inland, in a south-easterly direction, situated on the top of 
a small hill, and defended partially by closing up the narrow pass leading 
toit. Itis notso large as Membi, but there are about it similar proofs that 
the people unite for the common good. Very fine clumps of bamboos are 
seen carefully railed round, for their protection and preservation, for the 
purposes of building—there is no river of sufficient magnitude to require a 


costly bridge, but there is a very substantial one of trunks of trees thrown 
over the Shiko. 


Our conference with the men of Past produced little good. We 
found them willing enough to promise, provided it were but prospectively, 
but they would do nothing, not even dispatch messengers to the Meyong 
tribe, though their reason for refusing to guide us in their direction was, 
that they could not possibly do so without permission. They gave an 
admirable answer to our threat of proceeding without their assistance, by 
leading Lieutenant BurLTon and myself to the top of a more commanding 
hill, and asking us how we liked the look of the country which we pro- 
posed to march through without guides—we saw that they were right. 
They behaved towards us here with much greater respect than at Membi, 
insisting that we must gratify the Commoners by becoming lions for an 


hour or two, but restraining these in their familiarities. 


We returned to prosecute our discoveries on the banks of the Dihong, 
but were accompanied by two or three of the Chiefs, who seemed very 
anxious to watch our proceedings. We soon experienced a marked 
instance of their jealousy, for arriving at the end of that reach of the 


river which is nearly north of Past, and doubling back towards the 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 405 


east, (after getting round the base of the low hill intervening,) we found 
that the north face of that hill is a perpendicular rock, rising from 
the water’s edge, and a smile might be observed on the countenances of 
our friends, as they watched the effect upon us of the sight of this im- 
pediment, for they had no intention of showing us the commodious path 
which we afterwards discovered on our return! Determined not to be 
deterred so early in ourcareer, I led the way through the brambles up the 
rock, and in spite of the opposition of dense underwood, we continued to 
advance, and we got over the difficulty—but a difficulty it really was, and 
our people came up very late. In the mean time we missed our friends 
of Pasi. We encamped on a small sand bank, which is to the west of 
the Padu village, on the opposite bank—small hills filled the space to the 
river left by the direct continuation of the high Reging range. There is 
generally a small bed of stones under the base of the hills, found alternate- 
ly on either bank, which would add one hundred to two hundred yards 
to the breadth when the river is full. At present the breadth of water 
was two hundred yards. 


The opening of the hills now showed the direction of the river from a 
considerable distance to be from W.N.W. I went forward to have a 
better view of the next reach, and a little in advance I found a well- 


beaten path continuing along the edge. 


At dusk, we were surprised by a rather numerous body of armed men 
suddenly filing down from the hill to our east. We took no notice of 
them, and they drew up and seated themselves in a circle at forty or 
fifty yards distance from us, and found that not only the Chiefs but several 
of the Commoners of Past were here mixed with the Padu people—whom 
it seems the former had alarmed with the views of our advance. They 
remained perfectly quiet, and built their huts for the evening. Finding 
them not likely to open the communication, I sent to know the intention 

H 3 


A406 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


of their coming “ in such a questionable shape,” and received for answer 
simply, that they were there to oppose our progress towards the Bor 
Abor villages—the vengeance of the tribe would fall on them, they said, if 


they dared to permit our advance. 


I do not suppose that they intended to fight; the alarm of the first 
musket shot would, at all events, have been sufficient to clear the field— 
however, it would not do to provoke actual partiality. I therefore inform- 
ed them that we would not advance to the country of the Bor Abors 
without having previously conferred with that tribe, and that our 
intention was only to proceed along the banks. of the river as far as 
we should find it practicable, and without interfering with any one, or 
deviating from our path to seek their villages; that if the information 
which they had given us, with so many protestations of its truth, should 
be found correct by us, they had nothing to fear, as we must necessarily 
turn back, when we should find it impracticable to advance, but we begged 
for guides to answer such questions as we should put about names and 
hills or rivers. They thought this reasonable, and putting confidence in 
our promises, they withdrew in the morning, leaving two guides according 


to our request. 


We continued to advance from an early hour, to near one olock, 
along the left bank, interrupted only by the unevenness of the path, 


when it passed over enormous blocks of stone on the very base of the hill. 


The river was generally calm, and gliding with an easy current. The 
solitude of the heavy woods was only disturbed by the loud solemn tones 
of the bell-bird, which we now heard for the first time, and not being 
acquainted with its note, were almost assured that some solitary being, 
perched on the summit of one of the wild cliffs above us, was either em- 


ployed in chiming his matins to the Sylvan Deities, or perhaps, spreading 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 407 


the alarm of our approach; so exactly does the note resemble that of a 


deep-toned bell. 


We passed the mouth of a small rivulet named Shibot, and observed 
that the beaten path there leaves the great river : our guides soon after 
informed us, that we had arrived at the conclusion of our journey, and we 
found, in fact, that the steepness of the mountains much increased since 
we had left behind us those lower hills nearer the issue of the river to the 
plains, was now grown very great, and a smooth perpendicular rock soon 
presented itself to notice, fairly obstructing further progress. There was 
not the slightest appearance of more favourable ground in advance, and if 
we did move on by land, it must be by cutting our way through the 
thickest cane jungles and underwood, in a place infinitely the more difficult 


from its situation, or the steep acclivity of the face of the mountain. 


The breadth of the river was reduced at this point to one hundred 
yards, and it was still mild and tranquil,* but the form of the hills gives 


rise to the expectation of immense depth. 


We had brought with us a small canoe, thinking it might enable us 
to get past any very difficult place, and now we got on board and set out 
to see whether the difficulties by water were equal to those presented by 
the land. The river partook of the same kind of features as we proceeded, 


the water’s edge was bounded by smooth perpendicular rock, under which 


* The question immediately occurs now why we did not take a section of the river: we had 
not the means, and the utility of providing them was not so obvious éhen. But we had taken Note 
of every petty rivulet joining the Dihkong from its mouth, a few rods, and were perfectly aware 
that none of them contributed very sensibly to the quantity of water. Whatever the discharge of 
the Dihong at its mouth, we had here the same quantity nearly—the entire river—a very simple 
calculation shows us that—for the undiminished discharge of fifty thousand cubic feet per second, 
and a supposed velocity of only three miles, the depth required is only thirty-seven feet. Mr. 
Kiarrotn’s objection to the size of the river, appears then not well founded. 


* 408 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


we advanced by poling against the small projections and crevices, but 
after getting over a distance of two or three miles, the foam of a rapid 
became visible as we turned a corner, and here we soon found our labors 
were at an end. A stone bed projected from the east bank, few of the 
rounded blocks of which were less than two or three feet in diameter, and 
many were of much larger size. The rapid could never be passed on the 
descent, even were it possible to get the boat up it, and as to carrying the 
canoe, that was impracticable over blocks of stone of such size. We 
advanced as far as it was possible on the stone bed, and from its further end 
climbed up the rock to overlook the river. The next reach was from the 
west, and the water quite smooth to a considerable distance, the hills 


high, and equally steep to the water's edge. 


We had the curiosity to examine the path leading inwards from the 
Shibol’s mouth, and after entering the jungle on the hill up which it wound, 


found it narrow, but still well beaten. 


After our return to Shigaru Ghat, we halted to allow time for the 
arrival of the Bor Abors. From the neighbouring villages we had con- 


stantly visitors, who come to exchange their yams or fowls for salt. 


The Diki Chief had been down during our absence, and he now 
made his appearance again, a fine looking well-dressed fellow, with very 
good manners, and a number of followers. When he stopped in front of 
our tent, he saluted us with a shrill whoop, more like the crowing of .a 
cock than any other sound I can think of, and without appearing to take 
notice of us, he continued a long speech, during which he exalted his 
voice, as if calling to people at a distance, and never ceased beating his 
right foot on the ground, but every now and then the extraordinary 
whoop was renewed. When this was over, he good-naturedly informed 


us that he had given us a specimen of the ceremony of meeting at 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 409 


councils amongst the Ador tribes. We were very much pleased with this 
man, but could not get any thing from him either in the way of informa- 
tion or assistance in our project. He refused to take us to his village, 
on the plea that his authority would prove insufficient to protect ts from 
the unpleasant familiarities of his people. He presented some rock salt 
from Thibet, in the shape of large crystals. I think that their possessing 
this article at so short a distance from our side, is a collateral proof 


that they cannot have to travel very far for it. 


We had little more success with the Bor Abors when they arrived, 
though they seemed equally well inclined towards us with the Duka 
party. They assured us that they could not venture to take us to their 
villages without having prepared the people for our reception, as a very 
hostile feeling existed, owing to our supposed detention of the Miris. 
They promised, however, to exert their influence, and did not doubt but 
they should be able shortly to send us down an invitation. They appear- 
ed to me to be sincere in professing their inability to answer our inquiries 
about the Dibong—they remarked that they were no travellers, and had 
little curiosity about remote countries. Whereas we, on the contrary, 
seemed very inquisitive in such matters—and it would therefore be infi- 
nitely better that we should travel and gain, from actual observation, the 
information we sought, as it could be but imperfectly acquired from those 
who did not understand our purposes. They could only hold out hopes 
of our being able to visit their own villages: they assured us that they 
had no influence with the next tribes, and that we should certainly expe- 
rience much difficulty in treating with them, and should we gain a foot- 
ing amongst the Stmongs or Regas, it would be but one step of moving 


towards the accomplishment of our wishes. 


While the Bor Abors remained, we had a specimen of their skill in 
shooting with the bow, which was not particularly creditable to them ; 
I'd 


410 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


the object was a trunk of a tree, at the distance of one hundred yards, 
which they always shot very near to without hitting. Lieutenant Burtron 
then indulged and astonished them by firing at a mark, placed at the 


extreme distance to which their arrows would range. 


From that time to the present, we have had no communication of 
importance with the Adors. Tass6r, a Chief of a tribe, removed a few 
miles- more west, gave some hopes of preparing the way for us to a 
certain distance, but he himself was of opinion that we should not 
succeed in penetrating far enough for our purpose. However, had I been 


able to remain at Sadiya, I should not have failed to make the attempt. 


I have always thought that, in the absence of ocular demonstration, 
the most valuable information respecting the ultimate course of the 
Sanpo, or rather the knowledge of the exact spot where it leaves T'hibet, 
whether about the ninety-fifth meridian of longitude, or beyond the 
sources of the Brahmaputra, in the ninety-eighth degree, was most easily 
to be obtained from the Lamas inhabiting the narrow valley, on the 
banks of the latter river, who must know, beyond all doubt, whether 
their territory is or is not separated from Thabet by a large river, and 
must also be informed of the route of the Lassa Officers, who come down 


to them yearly to receive a tribute. 


I have now to present the information derived from the Lamas by 
Mou1, a Mishmi Chief of the Dibong, with whom I had long been acquainted 
by name, as the most influential man of the Dibong mountains. He says, 
Mesuip6 Lama told him that the Lamas call the Dihong, Lassa Chombo. 
(Tsongbo, he also pronounced it) There are two branches, one from or 
passing Lassa, and the other, the smaller of the two, rising near the heads 


of the Brahmaputra. Below Lassa is a town called Kongbong,* and the 


* Cone-pou-y of the Map accompanying Du HaLpE? 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. Ail 


river also goes by that name. The Kuana Desa’s country is at the 
source of the above-mentioned eastern branch. The Lassa people, in their 
way to the Lama valley, go up the lesser Dihong, and cross over snowy 
mountains from its sources to those of the Brahmaputra. 'They occupy 
one month from Lassa. They do not mention any other large river nearer 


than three months’ journey. 


Between the Dibong and the lesser Dihong is a high range of snowy 
mountains, which prevents the Mishmis from knowing of the existence of 
the lesser Dihong, excepting from reports. I must add, that this infor- 


mation was not given in answer to leading questions. 


This gives a clue which was wanting to the story of an old Asamese, 
now resident at Svs¢, who was sold by the Mishmis as a slave to the Lamas 
when young, and had contrived to make his escape by the route of the 
Brahmaputra, hiding in the jungles by day and travelling by night. As 
evidence of the truth of his general statement, we have the notoriety of 
his captivity which led to his being brought to Mr. Scorrt, his acquaint- 
ance with the Thibetan, shown by his knowledge of words which we 


drew from a vocabulary, and his offer to accompany me as interpreter. 


I twice saw this old man at an interval of eight or ten months, and 
having preserved in writing the names of all the places mentioned by him, 
had a satisfactory proof of his sincerity, by comparing the last with his 
former statement. His recollection, however, was not sufficiently clear 


to enable me to lay down any new positions. 


He says, he resided with a Lama* and his wife, at the village Aprawa, 


at the sources of the Brahmaputra, in the east, beyond the Mishmi country. 


* In the Asamese sense—a man of the Lama country, not a priest. 


412 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


He had repeatedly been on trading excursions to the Kuana Desa’s 
country, distant ten days’ journey over snowy mountains the whole way, 
there, he says, on descending from the height, the sources of two rivers 
are found, one running to the west, which he was informed is the Dihong, 


and the other to the south. The Kuana Desa’s village is called Powa. 


The old man always persisted that he travelled eastwards over the 
snowy mountains ; if, however, he were mistaken—and that, in fact, he 
went nearly north, there would remain no difficulty in reconciling this with 


the former statement. 


I now prepared to accomplish my long projected expedition to the 
Khaméi country, on the Lrawadi, and looked with anxiety at the snow 
on'the mountains whenever a fair day permitted a view of them, waiting 
till the quantity should be so far reduced that they might be pronounced 
practicable. It must be recollected that the time of rapid thaw is not 
that for crossing in safety, and that the scanty clothing and naked feet 
of the natives of the plains, make them very unfit people to encounter the 
hardships of a passage through very heavy or extensive snows ; both these 
reasons probably influenced my Khamti and Sing fo acquaintances to urge 


my putting off the trip to the proper season. 


I had left it to the Lért Gouain to make such arrangements as 
appeared to him necessary to insure success, and he considering it only 
proper to have with us some Khéku (Singfo,) Chiefs of responsibility, 
who might become our guarantees in case we should move through 
any part of the independent territory of that tribe, fixed on the son of 
the Gam of Latora, and a relation of the same family, named Tansan- 
TONG, as both well fitted for it, and willing to undertake the office. These 
two, with their followers, were to add about fourteen to our number: the 


Tao Gonayn, and one or two more Khamtis of rank from Sadiya, with 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 413 


their followers, numbered as many more, and for a guard we had ten 
fusileers of the Khamti militia. But strong as was our party with this 
accession, Lieutenant Buritron and myself derived little advantage from 
it in our personal comfort. We had but sixteen coolies to carry both 
our own light equipment of necessaries, and several bundles of presents, 


besides the few instruments I took. 


We embarked our stock of rice and our own followers on the 15th 
April, in canoes covered over with a thin bamboo mat: the temperature 
at this time varied from sixty-nine degrees at sun-rise, to eighty-seven 
degrees at four o’clock, and in the sun it was as high occasionally as one 
hundred and seventeen degrees. The navigation of the Dihing, which 
we entered on the second day, proved very tedious: we were subjected 
both to delay and inconvenience by the frequent occurrence of storms. 
Some mention has already been made of the Dihing, (Noa Dihing), 
and an account given of the gradual formation of this river by the 
natural enlargement of previously existing streamlets, in consequence 
of the ancient channel having become choked with stones. It is nar- 
row, being seldom more than one hundred yards broad, and its course 
is tortuous, as might be expected from the equal level of the plains 
which it intersects. Above Seyong, where the rapids commence, its 
character resembles that of the Brahmaputra, beyond Sadiya, in simi- 
lar sub-divisions into small channels. The entire difference of level 
from Sadiya to Kasan, (which may be said to be at the extreme limit of 
the navigable part of its course) is four hundred and nineteen feet, 
of which upwards of four hundred feet are due to the twenty miles between 
Kasan and Seyong, and of this again, the last eight miles below Kasan 
must.claim a large proportion: without the aid of a party of Singfos 
from.this place, we could scarcely have dragged the canoes up the vio- 
lent rapids, immediately below it where the river, just before throwing 


off the Bort Dihing branch, washes the base of a perpendicular cliff, 
K 3 


414 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


and is cooped in width. The latitude of Kasan, at our halting place, 
where the Pen rivulet falls into the Dihing, is 27° 30’ 25.” Between 
Kasan and Lugo, which was our first stage of land route—the Dihing 
winds in several channels in a stony plain, occasionally meeting the 
base of the low hills on either side. On the north bank two or three 
rivulets fall in, the principal of which is the Pakan. The hills on that 
side are low near the rivers, and are spotted with patches of cleared 
grounds; on the south side they are at first two hundred feet, and gra- 
dually rise till opposite Lugo they are five or six hundred feet high, and 
are all clothed in heavy tree jungle. We passed the river twice by fording, 
though with difficulty, and opposite the little village of Gakhen we had 
to cross from the south to the north bank in acanoe, and there being but 

one, we were much delayed. We next ascended to the top of a cliff over- . 
hanging the river, and passed through a few fields and much jungle to 
Lugo, a village of five or six houses, and thence we descended from the 
cliff to the mouth of the Tungon Topon rivulet. At this point the plain 
terminates, and the river is seen to issue from a narrow opening in the 


north-east. 


From Lugo there are two routes, one over the Insong hill, directly 
east, which, by disuse, is said to have become nearly impassable ; and ano- 
ther which was recommended to us, though not so direct, leading over a 
lower part of the hills, a little more north. The banks of the Dihing 
are said to be impracticable. We went up the Zungon, which is one 
continued rapid, and after proceeding some distance northward, turned 
to the east, where the hill is nearly flat, and covered with heavy bamboo | 
jungle. To the north we saw a very high wall of hill connected with 
Dapha Bhiin. 


We passed close to the village of Pishi, and were inclined to halt there 


where some sort of hut might he had for shelter, but a jealous feeling 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. A415 


prompting the Stngfos of the place to deny that we could get water 
near at hand, we were obliged to follow their advice and move on to the 
Toonghoot rivulet, where the jungle was so thick that it was necessary to 
clear a space for our encamping ground. We found by the barometer, 
that we had ascended considerably during the day, as we were now one 
thousand and seventy-one feet above Kasan, (one thousand nine-hundred 


and eleven feet above the sea.) 


The path led through much jungle as before, and the ascents and 
descents were inconsiderable, till we arrived at the brow of the ridge 
overlooking the Dapha. The height commands an extensive view, but 
heavy clouds hung low in the atmosphere and hid the summits of the 
hills. There was a very steep descent, followed by steppes of narrow 
plains, where the fields are of the Dapha villages. We halted at Kiimki, 
a village of eight or ten large houses, one of which we were permitted 
to occupy. The hills crossed appeared to be sandstone. We passed 
during the day, one of those beds of white mud of which there are 
several of frequent occurrence in this neighbourhood, resorted to by 
cattle and wild beasts of all kinds, which eagerly devour it. The most 
remarkable one is at Svipkong, on the Bort Dihing, where there is a bed 
of coal in the middle of the river, and the jungles are full of an odor of petro- 
leum. I went to see it. There were two beds, one at a little higher level 
than the other, but both on the plains, filled with liquid mud of various 
degrees of consistence. One was twenty or thirty feet across, and the 
other larger. In the middle, where bubbles of air are seen constantly 
rising to the surface, the mud is nearly white, and is there in a more liquid 
state—on the edges green petroleum is seen floating, but it is not put 


to any use by the Sinyfos—neither is the coal. 


Heavy rain compelled us to halt the next day, and we received 


a supply of rice, amounting to twenty or thirty seers, which the 


416 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


Gams of the neighbouring villages said was all that could possibly be 


collected. 


It now appeared that we were in an awkward dilemma, for the L6r1 
Gounatn and his friends, who were to have been instrumental in 
procuring supplies for us, now depended on me to be furnished with 
a sufficiency for the journey. I offered triple payment, in kind, at Sadiya, 
or a large price in money, but they seemed really unable to supply me, for 
their poverty would have inclined them to accept my offer, though amongst 
the Singfos, it would be considered barbarous inhospitality to suffer a 


traveller to pay for his food. 


In the mean time the Dapha was beginning to rise, and we were 
advised that it would soon become unfordable (as it actually did), but we 
had dispatched a large party of the Khamis to a distance to seek for rice, 
and while uncertain of the result of their search, we could not venture to 


cross. 


The barometer gave the altitude of Kiémké, above the level of the 
sea, one thousand five hundred and twenty-three feet, the fall of the river 
between this and Kusan is, therefore, six hundred and eighty-three feet. 
It rained again on the morrow, but the glad tidings having reached us that 


the Khamtis had met with unhoped-for success, we set out forthwith. 


The bed of the Dapha, from the base of the high group of mountains, 
to the junction of the river with the Dihing, has some very remarkable 
features. It varies in width from half a mile at the mountains, to one and 
a half mile where it terminates ; the bank of the valley, on the east side, is 
a range of conglomerate hills rising in steppes, of which the lower one (of 
sandstone), two or three hundred feet high, runs nearly straight and pa- 


rallel with the river, with generally a perpendicular face. On the west 


Pry 1 


| 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 417 


side there are also steppes, but the rise is gentle and the direction is 
not so straight. The extent of this valley appeared to be six miles in 
length, but as the river winds round a hill from the eastward, I did 
not see the nature of the bed beyond this distance. The whole of 
it is a stony inclined plain, not very uneven; and vegetation has 
made but little progress in covering the nakedness of the large round 
boulders of which it is composed. The immense force of the current has 
worn for the river rather a deep bed, and it is reported, that the suspen- 
sion bridge, which is nearly equi-distant (half a mile) from each bank, is 
not liable to be carried away by the floods of the rains, yet it would 
appear, that in its various changes in the course of time, the river must 
have alternately washed the base of the perpendicular cliffs on its east, 
and traversed over to the foot of the easy slopes on the west—how, other- 
wise, is the existence of so large a stone bed to be accounted for. The 
idea on first beholding it is, that it must have been caused by some extra- 
ordinary convulsion, and the destructive and overwhelming rush of a 
torrent of waters. The Digarié falling into the Brahmaputra, opposite 
Sthatu Mikh, presents another instance of similar remarkable feature, 
excepting that the wide part of its bed is not through hills. The extent 
of its open stone bed is represented in Captain Beprorp’s Map. as twelve 
miles long, and it has a breadth of nearly one mile, the sides nearly 
Straight, as if the current in its rush from the mountains admitted of no 
impediment or delay. Indeed, I was informed by the natives, that both 


these rivers are notable for their sudden and violent floods. 


I may be excused dwelling on this subject a little longer to mention 
a singular occurrence: while the fleet, under Captain NrurviLie, was 
moored opposite to the mouth of the Noa Dihing in 1825, the party 
mention that they were startled one evening by a gust of cold wind from 
the eastward, which was immediately followed by a violent commotion in 


the water and sudden swell. Its effects were not severely felt, excepting 
L 3 


418 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


in the very last boat of the fleet, which happened to be a Saugor row- 
boat, mounted with a carronade, which was whirled round and sunk 
instantaneously, while an immense portion of the bank was as suddenly 
cut away. This appeared to be a flood from the Noa Dihing, the im- 
mense force of which was not exhausted in crossing through the volume of 
water of the Brahmaputra, upwards of one mile, at an angle of forty-five 


degrees, with the current of the latter. The gun-boat was never recovered. 


The common bridge for foot passengers, which is re-built yearly, 
had been broken up in the night by the rise of water, and, though 
with some difficulty the elephant forded at a favourable place, the current 
was found too strong for our ponies, which we had brought thus far. 
The suspension bridge, or Saku, consists ef two strong canes, stretched 
between stages of bamboo, which are secured in piles of the largest 
portable stones heaped up around them. Whenever the passengers were 
few, and acheap bridge were needed, this would answer admirably. A 
cradle, or long basket, in which a man may sit or lie, is hung on the canes 
by two loops, and the exertions of two or three men easily pull it across 


? 


when loaded. The “rushing” of the “arrowy” river below, with its loud 
roar, cause not perhaps the most pleasing sensations to the novice—but it 
is perfectly safe. The distance between the points of suspension is eighty 
yards. The view from the bridge is fine: its features are grand,the moun- 
tains are very lofty and bold—their summits were all hidden in dense clouds, 
but we could see some of the snow, and with the telescope the little 
threads of bright water trickling down from it in the ravines and chasms. 
There is a large gap, where the Inké falls in from the north between 
mountains, which we distinguished by the names of ‘needle peak,’ and 
‘brown lull. The gap is filled in the rear by a snow-capped ridge. We 
had gone some distance up the river to the bridge. We now returned to 
within half'a mile of the Dihing, and ascended the sand-stone hills to the 


village of Pasila, on one of the steppes. It is anew village, of six or 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 419 


eight houses. There is excellent ground for rice cultivation on the per- 
fect flats of the steppes, and for grain requiring a drier soil, they have clear- 
ed a part of the hill where the slope is full thirty degrees. A very good 


observation gave the latitude of Pasila twenty-seven degrees. 


We continued our march the next day, proceeding over the hill east- 
ward, with the Dihing on our right. We descended in the same direction 
and came again upon the banks of that river, where the little Inké falls in. 
Here, on the north bank, a narrow strip of plain stretches along under the 
low hills to Lujong village. We halted a while to beg for a supply 
of rice, which was given, and then entered the jungle where the 
river winds at the bottom of contiguous hills, and does not admit 
of passage along its edge. Opposite to the Phokong rivulet, we found 
a perpendicular cliff of sandstone, and were obliged to: cross on rafts of 
bamboo. On the south bank we passed Imbong Kusar, situated in the 
midst of a fine little cultivated plain, and proceeded to Tumong Tikrang, 


where a miserable hut was pointed out for us remote from the village. 


We found that a certain degree of enmity existing between the 
Khamtis and Singfos, made the latter a little shy, but having made good 
our entrance into the Gam’s house, we experienced afterwards a very 
kind reception and much attention. He promised a sufficient supply of 
rice to enable us to goon, and he fulfilled his promise the next morning, 


most handsomely giving us asmall surplus, and men to carry it two stages. 


We were now to take leave of the inhabited district, and enter a wild 
region, where no paths exist, but those made by the constant passage 


through the jungles, of elephants, rhinoceroses, and buffalos. 


For the last two years none had traversed the wilderness, excepting 


the two Mishmis, who were now our guides, and their only means of finding 


420 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


their way through it was to hunt forthe notches left on the trees by them- 
selves last, and by occasional travellers of old before them. Our coolies 
had each of them to carry twelve seers of rice for their own use, besides 
their shallow cooking pot and clothing: what they could carry in addition 
for us, was a mere trifle each man. The elephant was sent back as no 
longer useful. The perambulator had been left at the Dapha with the 
Burman who wheeled it, who had already fallen ill. IL had offered in 
vain a handsome reward to any one who would undertake to convey it on, 


and afterwards found that it could not possibly have been used. 


The next march was entirely along the banks of the Dihing, the 
plains terminating a short distance beyond the village, where a boat con- 
veyed the party across to the north bank. In the plains, the river is 
occasionally fordable, but never so up here. We kept upon the edge, 
making very slow progress over large blocks of rolled rock. Lieutenant 
BurLTON discovered a sycamore tree amongst the jungle, and we observed 
thin strata of coal alternating with blue clay in the sandstone rock. 
About half way to our journey’s end, we encountered every now and then 
a perpendicular cliff, which we were obliged to clamber over with much loss 


of time. The rapids here frequently deserve the name of cataract. 


We halted on a small stone bed. The thermometer stood low for that 
season of the year, (3d May) much lower than at Sadiya at the same time. 
At sunrise it was sixty-two and a half, and seventy-four and a half 
at five in the evening, when the state of the barometer was noted. 
We were: then one thousand seven hundred and fifty-nine feet above the 


level of the sea, and two hundred and thirty-six feet above Kéimku. 


A midge, called Dam Dim, common to the hills, began now to trou- 
ble us. It flies on a noiseless wing, and has no hum like the muskito to 


announce its treacherous attack, neither is the bite immediately felt, 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 421 


but alittle blister is soon after seen, filled with extravasated blood, and 
the itching becomes so intolerable that it defies the utmost exertion of 
patience. Our friends, with the ‘bottomless breeks,” were infinitely 
worse off than we were, whose hands and feet only were exposed, and 
indeed those of the plains were, in a few days, almost disabled, by the 
inveterate sores caused by these abominable pests. I had seen them before 
in the Mishmi hills, but it was then cold weather, and the annoyance was 


not to be compared with what we now found it. 


On the 4th May we left the Dihing entirely, ascending the hill 
immediately on starting. Our guides trusting too much to themselves, on 
first entering the jungle, soon betrayed signs of doubt, and informed us 
that they had missed the way and must search back for their notches. 
In this search they were occupied two good hours, and a most unpleasant 
anticipation it gave us of what we might expect when fairly advanced 
into the wilderness, but our guides received the occurrence as a lesson, 
and invariably afterwards proceeded with the utmost caution. We had 
either tree or bamboo jungle the whole way, in which the leeches are 
innumerable, every ten minutes a cluster of eight or ten might be knocked 
off from each ancle. The direction was nearly north-east, and we were 
proceeding obliquely across spurs of a high range, the summit of which 
lay to our north: we were for ever ascending or descending, and at our 
halting place the barometer indicated an elevation gained in the course 
of the day, above the level of the Dihing, of two thousand eight hundred 
and twenty-one feet. 


The temperature, at sunrise the next morning, was much lower, 
being only fifty-seven degrees. The men lent us from Twnong Tikrang to 
carry rice, now took their leave. We could not induce them by any offer 
to proceed further into the hills: two of Lieutenant Buriron’s men 


were attacked with fevers, and we very anxiously endeavored to 
M 3 


422 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


persuade them to leave us and return to Sadiya, but they would not. 
They were probably afraid of being seized as slaves by the Singfos. 
We first had to descend considerably by a steep and winding path 
to the Moha Pani, which comes through a cleft from the north-east, 
and immediately commenced a most laborious ascent at the opposite 
mountain. The rock appeared to be gneiss and mica slate. About ten 
o'clock our guides sat down by a little pool of muddy water, which they 
warned us might be all we should see that day; they laughed, and we did 
not understand them quite so literally as they meant it. Again we set out 
on the ascent, and surmounted one height after another, each of which in 
succession appeared to be the summit of the mountain. We had left the 
bamboo jungles, and were amongst dwarf moss grown trees, which spread 
their crooked branches in wild irregularity, when showers passed us 
every few minutes and made it very cold. Our guides darted on at an 
increased pace, and though our eagerness to arrive at the end of our toil, 
made Lieutenant Buritron and myself outstrip the rest of our party, we 
were much behind our guides. One large peak at last long deceived us 
with the expectation that it must be the last. Snow is said to remain on 
itto alate season. Butthe top of this, when reached with many a weary 
and slow step, gave us only a commanding view of the next still higher 
ridge. At four o'clock, after being often in danger of losing our way, we 
came up with our merry guides, who were sitting, cooking their rice under 
the hollow of a large fallen tree. We asked eagerly for water to quench 
the thirst now become painful, and were answered by taps on the tree 
above them, and a nod of intelligence. In fact, this ‘‘ Diamond” of the 
mountain—this old hollow trunk, contained all the water that we could 
expect to meet with that day. It is torn from its roots,-and it did not 
appear how water could collect in it, except from drippings from over- 
hanging branches ; however, our guides asserted, that it gradually fills 
again within a few hours after being emptied. We had already learned 


to cook for ourselves, as the only means of securing a dinner, and we 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 428 


had that day one fowl left, on which to display our talents, which were 
ever after degradingly employed, in merely boiling our pot of rice. The 
people were much fatigued, and arrived late, and it was with difficulty 
that we got a miserable hut built to shelter us from the rain, which 
continued all the evening. The thermometer stood at sixty-five, at 
five o'clock, and the barometer informed us that in addition to the 
height of our last halting place, above the Moha, we had climbed up 
three thousand eight hundred and forty-nine feet, and were eight thousand 
four hundred and twenty-nine feet above the level of the sea. 


At day light on the 6th, the thermometer was at forty-six. The 
water of the ‘“‘ Diamond” had been fairly expended the night before, and 
I had placed a sentry to secure a proper distribution in the morning, but 
it was nearly empty, and what little had collected was too dirty to use, 
we therefore marched before breakfast, contrary to our usual custom. 
After climbing one more peak still higher, we did at last perceive the 
summit of Wangléo Bhim, but as it isa large cone, the path led round it 
as less laborious than clambering over, and after two hours march we 
found a small rill of water, trickling down one of its ravines, which barely 
sufficed for our morning’s meal. We noticed a new description of bamboo, 
a little below the summit on the north face of the mountain; not growing, 
as usual, in clumps, but singly, and having a coronet of sharp thorns 
round each joint. They follow the moss covered trees of stunted growth, 


and prevail to a considerable distance on the descent, where heavy forests 
and thick underwood again occur. 


It is now time to convey a better idea of our situation according to 
the knowledge we had then acquired. We were then crossing that 
ridge of mountains which separates the nearly parallel streams of the 
Dihing and Dapha, the commencement of which I have already men- 


tioned as the conglomerate and sandstone cliffs of Pusila. The highest 


424 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


part of its crest connected with Wangléo, by a succession of peaks, was 
still further east on our right hand. Beyond the Dapha, at no great 
distance on the north, the Beacon now bore three hundred and _ thirty 
N. thirty W., and a high wall of mountains, capped with snow, followed, 
stretching eastwards to some distance, and then turning south, giving rise 


to the Dapha and Dihing on this side, and to several rivers flowing into 


the Jradwadi, on the other. 


We passed nothing extraordinary on the descent, but a beech and fig 
tree, the latter producing very large fruit; and some sweet scented violets. 
At the bottom, we emerged from the jungle on a beautiful little plain, 
covered with short grass and fern hills, abruptly rising on either side to a 
majestic height, and some deeply clothed in snow closing the distance. 
We halted on the banks of the Dapha, at a spot frequented by hundreds 
of deer, elephants, and monkies. The former were too wild to allow us to 


shoot one. 


We were still five thousand four hundred and thirty-one feet above 
the sea. Some idea may be formed of the rapid and tumultuous current 
of the Dapha, from the circumstance of its falling three thousand 
nine hundred and eight feet, in twenty miles of its course from 
hence to Kumku, where I have already stated the altitude as one 
thousand five hundred and fifty-three feet above the sea. We saw a new 
fruit of the plumb kind, with a very thin skin and good flavor; and some 


wild lichis. A good observation gave the latitude 27° 31’ 20”. 


The next march was, for some distance, nearly east along the boul- 
ders of the edge, or in the track of wild elephants in the jungle; then 
turning more south, after the separations of the Dapha into two branches, 
we crossed the left branch by wading, where it is fifteen yards broad, and 
commenced our ascent up the great pass. We halted at two o’clock in 


/-ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 425 


cold and heavy rain, but our people who were now suffering very severely 
from fevers and swollen legs, were many of them not up till late. It 
was our constant employment on halting, as soon as we could get a hut 
built, to make a fire in front and hang up our clothes to dry; had we 
not luckily been provided with a piece of wax cloth, which was of 
great assistance in keeping out the rain at night, we must also have 
sunk under this unaccustomed exposure to severe weather. ‘The total 
ascent above our last halting place was two thousand four hundred and 
nine feet—total elevation, seven thousand eight hundred and forty feet. 
When we resumed our march at the ascent, early on the morrow, 
we were, in the space of an hour, on a level with snow, distant two or 
three miles, on the opposite mountains to our right and left. We could 
plainly trace the waters from their sources, and in the melting snow, which 
still lay in considerable quantity in the ravines. The whole scene 
possessed, in a high degree, the features of wild and romantic grandeur. 
We were ascending the ridge which separates the two branches of the 
Dapha, and were fast approaching to the altitude where they have their 
origin : we were near the end of a long but large dell or chasm of which the 
Wangléo, and the higher mountains succeeding it, form the one bank, and 
the Beacon with its high wall, of which it forms a splendid pinnacle, the 
other. In advance, the pass to be surmounted, formed the connecting 


ridge between the two sides. 


The trees were now growing in all directions, seldom perpendicularly, 
and all covered with coarse moss, excepting the smooth barked rhodo- 
7 dendron, which was then in fine flower. Lieutenant Burtron detected 
both beech and ash in the course of the day, and at a great altitude we 
found abundance of the plant—the yellow bitter roots of which constitute 
so principal an article of Mishmi traffic with the Lamas. On our side 
there were no firs, though they abounded on the northern mountain, even 
at a much lower level. Towards the summit, there were some large bare 

N 3 


A426 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


blocks of clay slate. About ten o’clock we reached the snow, which does 
not cover the whole apex of the mountain, neither does it always lie in the 
deeper or more shadowed spots, but in patches, which we were frequently 
obliged to cross: the ground was sodden with wet, and unpleasant in the 
extreme to walk over. We plainly perceived that our difficulties would 


have proved much greater, had we made the attempt earlier in the year. 


A violent storm of hail, thunder, and lightning saluted us as we 
reached the top, and prevented our distinguishing more than that the 
heavy snows on our right extended a considerable distance. I shall say 
no more of the storm than that, at such a place, a more unplea- 
sant and disheartening occurrence could not well be imagined. Our 
guides appeared much frightened, and they went scampering down the 
most villanous ground we ever saw, while we followed sinking to the 
ankles in a sodden mass of rotten leaves and moss, and pushing our way 
with difficulty through the thick fern. The lightning set fire to one of the 
fir trees on the opposite height, and we could long distinguish it burn- 
ing Inthe pass, we found asad proof of the truth of the statements 
respecting loss of life, which has generally befallen a party making 
the passage. I picked up a skull said to be that of a Singfo. Very 
much to our annoyance we learned, from some of the party joined from the 
rear, that two of Lieutenant Buriton’s men had lain down and refused to 
move on. They were brothers, and one of them, though not himself com- 
plaining, had determined to remain by the other, who was overcome by mere 
fatigue ; to assist them was impossible; carry them we could not, even 
had we'rice sufficient to enable the people to bring them on at a slow rate. 
We haltedon the Phingan river, near the course of which we had descend- 
ed from its sources, but it was of considerable size when we first saw it. 
It continued to rain very heavily the next morning, and we marched much 
later than usual. We were anxious to halt altogether for the day, to let 


the unfortunate men come up, and to recruit the strength and spirits of 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 427 


the whole party, who greatly needed rest. Several had severe fevers, and 
nearly all had swollen ankles and dreadful sores from the bites of the 
noxious démdiéms and leeches. Our stock of rice, however, would not 
admit of a halt; we therefore continued on our descent down the Phingan 
pass. The ground was sodden as yesterday, but not so bad. Leeches 
and ddmdtms scarcely bearable: we once took the trouble to count the 
collection of about half an hour, and tore thirty-five leeches from one leg. 
We went through thick jungles of tree and prickly jointed bamboos, and 
occasionally came out upon the Phingan, but the steepness of the hills 
allowed us to see nothing beyond the deep ravine which we were moving 
down, and the closeness of the trees made it extremely difficult to me to 
note any bearings of the directien we were travelling in. We crossed 
five or six rivulets which join the Phiingan, having their origin in the 
snows on the right bank. We halted sooner than we ought, considering 
our supply of rice. Another of Lieutenant BuritTon’s men, a very fine 
young lad, had complained at starting of his weak state, but promised to 


come on slowly ; however, he did not rejoin us. 


The next morning we made such arrangements as we could, to learn 
the state of the three now missing. We left two men at the halting place, 
and sent back two more, with the promise of a reward, if they should suc- 
ceed in bringing on the unfortunate loiterers. - We felt less anxiety about 
the first two who lingered behind us, as they had but five days’ journey 
to return to the last Singfo village, and if they preferred coming on, our 
track was now well marked by the passage of'so large a party. Our path was 
better to day than that of yesterday, but the march was equally uninter- 
esting, confined in a narrow ravine between two high mountains: the only 
object we ever got a glimpse of beyond it was some towering snowy 
peak. The direction of our journey was not easily guessed. We crossed 
the Phiingan, to the north bank, half way by wading, and the remaining 


half by a bridge, which was speedily erected by the Singfos. We then 


428 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


left the banks of the Phingan, and alee’ early on a little rivulet 
falling into it. We should have gone farther, but we were told that 
we should find no water until we had crossed the next hill. We picked 
up a walnut in the jungle, but could not find the tree. When the people 
rejoined us whom we had left behind, they stated that they had found the 
last lingerer, but that as he was unable to come on with them, they had 
given him a fiint and steel, which he was in want of, and he promised to 


follow us slowly. 


We set out again early in the morning, and were employed till twelve 
o'clock in a most fatiguing march over a hill. At the bottom, on the 
opposite side, we met with a small rivulet, and it was earnestly debated 
whether we should halt or not. The Mishmi guides were the only people 
of the party who pressed for making an attempt to reach the next place 
where water could be obtained—and their argument being a very cogent 
one, with the small stock of rice remaining, we went on, and, after ascending 
and descending two more hills, we halted at four o’clock with the guides 
and some of the Singfos, who appear to have more stamina than the 
Khantis. The remainder of our people did not arrive till late at night, 
and some not till the next morning. Our own pots and rice not having 
been brought up, we got a Singfo to lend from his store, and our hands 
supplied the place of spoons, while the pot lid served for a drinking-cup, 
out of which we could yet enjoy our gin and water. Heavy rain all the 
evening ; but since crossing the Phingan, we have always been fortunate 
in halting where wild plantain leaves could be procured for building our 


huts. The hill crossed is of sienite. 


We started in heavy rain again the next morning, and descended to 
the Namsai river, which appears to rise also in the Phingan Bhim, near 
the pass, and runs parallel with the Phingan. I did not understand 


whether the cause of our leaving the banks of the latter was the difficulty 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 429 


of the path there, or that this is the less circuitous route. Both rivers 
flow into the Namlang, and the distance of their mouths is less than a mile. 
This was a most uninteresting day’s journey, for we were surrounded 
by heavy fogs and mists, which prevented our seeing thirty yards. We 
went through the usual description of bamboo and tree jungle—on the side 
of the hill, above the Namsali, the mud was ankle-deep, and the leeches 
innumerable—fine tall nettles too, growing in the most abundant luxuri- 
ance, added to the number of our annoyances. Near the end of our march, 
the utmost exertion of the strength of our guides was necessary to force 


their way through the entangled jungle; no traces of a path existing. 


We halted at the deserted Mishmi village of Aleth, to which our guides 
had belonged, situated at the point of junction of the Namsall with the 
Namlang, the people have been chiefly removed to the Tungon rivulet, 
under the influence of the Sing fos. We found around the ruined houses 


a great quantity of wild raspberries of a large size and sweet flavor. 


At starting from Aleth, our guides were literally obliged to cut their way 
to the Namlang, which we soon came out upon; it was a very pretty little 
river, thirty or forty yards broad, and running with a slow smooth current, 
excepting when a rapid here and there occurred. Low hills formed its banks 
on both sides. We proceeded along the edge, sometimes on the boulders 
and sometimes knee-deep in the water, to some perpendicular cliffs, and 
then through the jungles above, which are more abundant in leeches than 
any place hitherto seen. Every six or eight hundred paces, a fresh 
collection of thirty or forty might be plucked off the ankles; but the profuse 
bleeding which they cause is not sufficient to reduce the swollen feet of our 
followers, who are suffering so much that it is only wonderful that they 
can get on as well as they do. Lieutenant Buritron was among the rest 
seized with a paroxysm of fever on the march: several of the Sing fos were 
also sick. I have omitted to mention, that I had again sent people back with 


03 


430 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


the hope of bringing on the poor Asamese. They rejoined us this evening, 
and to our great surprise, were accompanied by one of the two men who 
stopped on the Phingan pass. He informed us that he had remained 
until his brother expired, and that he had been four whole days without 
food or fire. The other poor lad was found very near the place where we 
left him, and was brought across the river, which he could not possibly 
have forded alone, but he crept into the huts of our halting place, and 
there laid himself down to die. We were surprised about ten at night. 
by a very sudden rise of the river, equal to three or four feet, accom- 
panied by a rushing and loud noise: it came so unexpectedly, that the 
people who had built their huts near the water had not time to remove all 


their things : it subsided almost as rapidly as it rose. 


The next day, the path led chiefly along the edge of the water and 
over steep and slippery rocks. Still an unvaried aspect of dark jungle. 
The direction, since leaving Aleth, nearly due north. We crossed while 
the river was one hundred yards broad, by wading, but with great difficul- 
ty, for many, from weakness, were unable to stand against the current 
without help. Lieutenant Buritron had his fever again at the time. 
Shortly after, we re-crossed by the help of Sakos, which, from the rise of 
the river, were nearly under water ; but here the sight of some new faces 
gave us fresh alacrity, and we hailed our approach to a civilised country 
with that joy, which those only could feel and estimate who had suffered 


from fatigue and privation as we had. 


The Miliks and Khamntis who met us were extremely civil, and 
welcomed us with every demonstration of good will. Beyond the first 
crossing place, the country opens out into a narrow valley, which leaves 
a small plain at each alternate bend of the river; none of these, however, 
yet presented signs of habitation ; but leaving the right bank and passing 


through a narrow belt of jungle, we entered on a cultivated plain of a 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 431 


mile. or more in width, (to us an Eden!) and were delighted with the 


appearance at the further end of a nest of comfortable houses. 


We were now met by two Khaméis of rank, who informed us that 
they came from the Raja with instructions to receive us; this could not 
be true, as the capital is a good day’s journey distant; however, they, 
with great politeness, procured us every thing that could be wished, and 
professed anxiety to be made acquainted with our wants, in order to gratify 
them. We were recommended by our kind friends to move the next day to 
another village, at a small distance, where we could be furnished with a 
better house; but on account of Lieutenant Bururon’s ague fit, which was 
_ very severe, and also on account of the fatigue of the whole party, we 
were obliged to halt. Rain had annoyed us on the march yesterday, and 
continued again all this day. The village is of twenty or thirty houses, 
built of bamboo and mats on Machdns, and, contrary to the practice of 
Asam, they are assembled near together, with only streets between them ; 
the buffaloes, pigs, and poultry take shelter in the lower part. The Mialiks 
are a distinct tribe, and their language has no aflinity with that 
of any other neighbouring tribe. This appears very remarkable, as 
their number is only reckoned at five hundred houses: in former times 
they were an independent people, inhabiting the plains of Hupong, on 
the Dihing river, south of the Phingan pass. They declare that they 
were plundered and dispersed by the Singfos, and that one-half were 
carried off and made dependent on these marauders, while the other half 
fled towards the Irawadi, and placed themselves under the protection of 
the Khamtis. Their only produce is rice, marka, mustard plant (used as 
a vegetable), and a bad species of onion. Their dress is the same as that 


of the Khamtis, excepting that it is of ruder fashion, and of inferior cloth. 


We removed in the morning to Ndmbak, another Malik village, at 


no great distance, situated on the Nambak rivulet, and fortified with a 


432 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY -OF 


strong palisade. The intermediate plain was all cultivated, with a good 
path through it, improved by putting down boards at all the broken places. 
We passed a third village on the road. A very respectable house was given 
us to remain in, built to serve the purpose of a town hall, furnished all 
round with a boarded seat, and raised high on strong posts. The fame of 
our white faces and musical boxes attracted to us an immense crowd 
the moment of our entry, who disposed themselves, as many as they 
could, in the hall above, and many more under the Machdn, or mounted 
on the bamboo walls—but they were perfectly well behaved. In the 
evening, the Raja’s two nephews and brother arrived in some state, 
accompanied by a few musketeers, and little Chinese gongs, to announce 
their arrival; they were equally polite with our former conductors, 
handsomely dressed, and fine looking men. They wished us to proceed 
another very short stage on the 18th, to the Palanseng Gohain’s village, 
that we might, after our fatiguing march, suffer as little as possible 
in the remaining portion of our journey. They appeared to feel great 
anxiety in the question whether we should be induced to take part 
in their wars with their neighbours of Ming Khamtt. We made them 
presents of scarlet cloth and muslin turbans, with which they were much 


gratified. 


We remained the next day, according to their request, and had the 
same sort of employment in entertaining the great men with sights of our 
apparatus, .of which our guns and pistols most excited their attention. 
Our people were still complaining of their sores and swollen legs; indeed, 
several had been left at the first village, who were actually unable to come 
on, and it had become my turn also to fall sick. The mode of providing 
our party with food was, to quarter them two together in a family, who 
announced the hour of meals. Tothe N.W. we could perceive the snowy 
mountains at the source of the Namlang, but this was the only direction 
in which the view was not limited by high hills. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 433 


On the 18th we continued our journey a short distance to the Palan- 
seng’s village, beyond the Namlang, which we crossed by a rude bamboo 
bridge, the river below running at the rate of full ten miles an hour. 
On the opposite bank, we passed over some high ground, and then 
entered another small plain, surrounded by low hills, some of which are 


also cultivated. We heard the Cuckoo near us. The village called 


_ Kumtong, is situated-in the middle of the plain on the Namkiémtong. 


We here received a visit from another relation of the Raja, who came 
with his eight or ten followers, armed with muskets of all sorts and dates— 
there was one marked G. R., and some fuzees of 1780, marked U. E. I. C. 


We were detained another day at Kumtong, by very heavy rains. 


On the 20th, it continued to rain heavily; but as this was to be the 
last day’s journey eastwards, and we were inclined to enjoy all the rest we 
could without interruption, we set out. After wading through the Kimtong, 
we shortly began the ascent of the hills, separating the Namlang river 
from the plains of the Jrawadi. The path being well beaten, was infi- 
nitely better than any we had traversed, but it was slippery from the 
rain, and the same sort of jungle, with which we had been so long 
acquainted, covers the hills. From the second, we at last, about two 
o'clock, beheld at a distance the object of our deepest interest ; the 
Trawadi winding in a large plain, spotted with light green patches of 
cultivation, and low grass jungle: better eyes than mine could distinguish 
Manchi, the capital. To the pass succeeds a long narrow dell, gradually 
expanding towards the plains; but we saw no farther signs of the residence 
of men till four in the afternoon, when we entered acultivated tract. Soon 
after, we passed the tomb of some great man, built of clay, whitened over, 
with a vase-shaped gilt top, and surrounded with many tall poles, which 
are ornamented in the Chinese taste, and have long flowing pendants of 
wove silk; these poles had not a less tasteful appearance from being 
inclined from the perpendicular. We were met at last by the Raja’s 

Pp 3 


434 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


son, with two ponies for our use, and our approach towards the villages 
was noised by incessant beating on two little gongs. We passed two 
or three temples, all built of bamboo and grass, but of Chinese design, 
and on our left, the strongly stockaded village Choktep. Near the 
great village or town, we saw two much finer tombs, built of pucka, 
and having griffins and various other non-descript animals at the cor- 
ners and about them. The town is closely built, but large, and forti- 
fied with a high palisade, having pointed bamboos ingeniously worked. 
The first appearance of the houses strikes with great surprise those who 
are not accustomed to the style of building, as the floor on which the 
family live is completely hidden under the low projecting eaves, and all 
that appears to view is the open and dirty ground floor, crowded with 
buffaloes and pigs. The Raja’s house is in the centre of the town, 
enclosed within an interior palisade. We passed it about six in the even- 
ing, and were led to the Town Hall, which is contiguous to it. As scarcely 
any of our people had arrived, we begged the young Prince, who had been 
in attendance om us, to give us a dinner, after their own fashion, which 
he readily did, and it proved a far more sumptuous repast than we anti- 
cipated : it was served up in the lacquered Burman boxes, which had 
several compartments, and trays to hold rice, nicely laid on fresh plantain 
leaves, and a number of small China basins, containing eggs and meats, 
variously cooked ; and, at least, so far superior to our own culinary produc- 
tions, that we hinted our inclination to have a breakfast in the same style. 
They most obligingly continued to provide us while we stayed, and we 
generally had presents from other families also, at the known time of our 
taking our meals. They also gave us a spirituous liquor, very much like 
whiskey, though inferior in strength, which was the more acceptable, as 


our own small stock was nearly exhausted. 


At noon, the next day, the Raja, as he was called, paid us a visit 


in state. He was preceded by four or five small gongs, about five and 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 435 


twenty musketeers, several sword and shield-bearers, and a gilt chatta, 
the last given him by the Burmans. The shields are of substantial 
buffalo hide, well formed and varnished black, with gilt devices 
on them. The swords were all Burman. He maintained so much 
reserve, that our conversation was not very interesting. After avoid- 
ing to give an answer to several questions of a trivial nature, on such 
topics as I considered required neither privacy nor previous consideration, 
he hinted that he could be more communicative in the absence of the 
crowd. Amongst other questions, I asked whether they had historical 
records similar to those kept in Asam, but at this time I got no direct 
reply, and afterwards, during our stay, could never get the Chiefs to allow 
that they had them, though informed by the Liirt Gohain, that it is a 
custom in each village to treasure up a record of all remarkable events. 
He spoke of the system of warfare and mutual ageression, which has 
endured for the last fifty years, without either side having gained a 
material advantage over the other: he lamented it, but saw no prospect 
of its termination. Our friends had, but a few months before our arrival, 
suffered the loss of the larger village Ming Khamti, which had long 
been their capital, and they informed us that they were now debating 
measures for surprising and recovering it, in their turn. All our presents 
were very much admired, particularly a handsome cut glass bowl, but 


our guns and pistols excited by far the greatest interest. 


After his departure, the visit of another Raja was announced! and 
though introduced with much less state and ceremony, I discovered that 
a mistake had been made in attributing to the former, the chief share of 
authority. When the matter was afterwards cleared up, it appeared that 
the aged gentleman now with us, is the Legislator; while his nephew, as a 
man of action, holds the executive power, in the capacity of War Minister 
and General. The manners of the old man, the Biéira Raja, were 


remarkably mild and pleasing ; he expressed great curiosity about us, and 


436 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


regretted much the want of a ready communication, which alone prevent- 
ed his putting the numerous questions which he would be glad to ask. 
He said that the only drawback to the pleasure he experienced in seeing 
us, was the fear he had of the Lurmans putting misconstruction on our visit, 
and of their taking advantage of it to oppress him and the country anew. 
We represented the friendly state of the two powers, and endeavoured, 
by such arguments as occurred, to lessen his fears ; however, if there be any 
danger, it is yet remote, for along period has elapsed since a Burman 
party has visited the country. Finding him less of the wary politician, 
and of a more frank and communicative disposition than his nephew, I, in 
my turn, made some geographical inquiries of him, but I found his infor- 
mation very limited. The Khamings inhabit the lower mountains, 
beyond the Jrawadi, visible at the distance of twenty or thirty miles to 
the eastward, and a poorer and more savage race, the higher ranges. The 
former supply the Khamizs with salt, and have the art of forging the Daos, 
or swords, so much in request ; the latter are scarcely known by name, and 
are said to be naked and barbarous; their habitations are not supposed to 
extend to the other side of a high range, which is in winter snow-capped. 
The Lukyang, or other Chinese rivers, are not known. With the Lama 
country, there is no immediate intercourse whatever, traffic is carried on, 
as in Asam, through the intervention of the Mishmis, who cross from the 
La Thi (falling into the Brahmaputra,) to the Namseya, the principal 
branch of the Namlang. No road exists by the sources of the Srawadt. 
Majestic peaks, covered with perpetual snow, are seen from hence, in 


which the Zrawadz and one branch of the Brahmaputra have their rise. 


I was lame from an unpleasant sore in the foot, contracted on the 
march, and Lieutenant Buriron was not at all in order for moving about. 
On the third day of our stay, however, I strolled owt to the temple, and 
saw the chief priest, a fine old fellow, who was completely delighted with 


the wonders he saw: he and his attendants subjected me and my dress to 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 437 


a very close examination, laughing heartily: the only question they put 
was whether our clergy take to themselves wives or not, and on being answer- 
ed in the affirmative, they raised a roar of laughter, and the Chief assured 
me he was quite shocked. The thatch-roofed temple is neither so large nor 
so elegant, as some of those seen on the way ; noris there any thing remark- 
able about the giltimages of Gopama, or the ornamental work within. 
A gift of a few rupees delighted the whole of them, though the only 
use they have for money is to enrich their temple with new ornaments, or 
to purchase some triflingluxury. Their customs appear precisely the same 
as those of Ava. Early every morning, we saw three or four of them 
hurrying through the streets of the town, preceded by a boy with a little 
bell, each holding a lacquered box, in which he collects the offerings of the 
people, presented generally by the women, who stand waiting at their 


doors with a portion of their ready-cooked meal. 


We took advantage one evening of a requisition for our musical boxes, 
to introduce ourselves into the interior of the Bara Raja’s house. We 
found it spacious, the south end terminating in an open machdn, or terrace 
of bamboo work, and a second enclosure within, divided the private apart- 
ments from those which, at all hours, appeared open to the populace. To 
give space in breadth, two houses are erected contiguously, and a trough 
of wood closes the aperture between the thatches, and serves to carry 
off the water, which would otherwise descend into the house. The 
women, few of them, boasted much beauty, and they were plainly 
though neatly dressed ; they behaved with great decorum, and sat together 
along one side of the room. The men turn up their hair, and form a large 
knot with it on the centre of the head; but the women, either from the 
natural profusion of their tresses, or from their taking more care of them, 
far excel the men in the height of their top-knots, which they wear nearly 
in the same fashion, but divide it with silver ornaments and small glass 

Q 3 


438 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


beads. Their petticoats accord better with our notions of female delicacy 


than the odd dress of Burman ladies. 


According to previous engagement, we paid a visit to the warrior 
Raja, who resides at Phankai, nearly three miles from Manché. The 
road was over a perfect plain, partially cultivated, and prettily studded 
with clumps of trees and bamboos. The country is not unlike Rewa, 
excepting that it is not varied with similar undulations. It is intersected 
by a number of little rivulets. Phankai is also strongly stockaded, and 
an interior palisade surrounds the Aaja’s house. A separate dwelling 
had been prepared for our reception, but either through ignorance or 
want of politeness, the Raja kept us waiting full half an hour ; and when 
he did come upon a hint that we were growing tired, he seemed to consider 
himself quite at home, wearing a very shabby dress, and observing 
none of that ceremony which had been remarkable in his visit to us. No 
conversation passed of either moment or interest, for he exhibited uneasi- 
ness with us, when questions were put, even of the most simple nature. 
We were anxious to make arrangements for a visit to the Srawadz, 
which we could not well contrive at Manché on account of the enemy’s 
strong hold— Mung Khamti being in the way. They met our proposition as 
usual, with a long list of difficulties and dangers, and would by no means 
consent that Lieutenant Burtron and I should mount their ponies, and 
trust to our own good management for encountering the enemy without 
hostilites resulting. 'They objected to every thing, but going in posse by 
the nearest route, with drums beating and colors flying, and indeed they 
played their part very well, to get our aid in a brawl with the opposite party. 
When however they found us fixed to have a sight of the Zrawadi, and to 
avoid fighting where we had no quarrel, they consented to furnish ponies 
and a guide that we might see the river higher up at a point sufficiently 


removed from danger. A dinner of inferior cookery to that we had been 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 439 


used to, was presented, and we were much pressed to remain a few 
days—however we liked our former quarters much better. In the evening, 
the women all assembled on a large mat extended on the turf, to hear our 
musical box. Neither they nor their men were in holiday suits, but they 
looked very clean and behaved well. Their high head-dress is very 
singular, and not altogether inelegant. In the morning, we went off at 
an early hour, accompanied by a guide mounted on a third horse, and in 


two hours we crossed the plains obliquely to the river’s edge. 


The Irawadi, we were surprised to find but a small river, smaller 
even than we anticipated, though aware of the proximity of its sources. 
It was not more than eighty yards broad, and still fordable, though con- 
siderably swollen by the melting snows, the bed was of rounded stones, 
and both above and below where we stood we could see numerous shallow 


rapids similar to those in the Dihing. 


As to the origin of the Jrawadi, | felt perfectly satisfied from the 
moment I made inquiries at Sadiya; but since further evidence, founded on 
the report of the natives, might not have satisfied those who had adopted 
Mr. Kuaprornu’s opinion, that the waters of the Sampo find an outlet 
through the channel of the Irawadi, I had resolved, if possible, to have 
occular and incontrovertible demonstration ; and I could not help exulting, 
when standing on the edge of the clear stream, at the successful result of 
our toils and fatigues. Before us, to the north, rose a towering wall, 
Stretching from W. to E. offering an awkward impediment to the passage 
of a river in a cross direction, and we agreed on the spot that, if Mr. 
Kuaprornu proved determined to make his Sampo pass by Ava, he must 


find a river for his purpose considerably removed towards or into China. 


The scenery was of the finest order, and its effect was heightened by 


the thin mists hovering on the bases of the blue mountains. One majestic 


440 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


peak to the north, peeping from a mantle of light clouds, was very con- 
spicuous from its superior height, and from its deep covering of pure white 
snow, and the long ridge leading away from it to the westward was simi- 
larly clothed, but streaked with shadows of delicate blue. On the E. 
and W. were peaks heaped on one another in the utmost irregularity of 
height and form, and at all distances. Our guide pointed out the direc- 
tions of the two larger branches uniting to form the river, the Namkiu, by 
which name the Khamizis distinguish the Lrawadi throughout its course to 
the sea, and the Namyen, the western branch. The mountain, at the source 
of the latter, bearing 315°, and the former 345°. We could also perceive the 
snow to the westward, some continuing as far round to the S. W. as 240°. 
The plain we rode over is covered with low grass and crossed in seve- 
ral directions by narrow belts of tree jungle, which mark some water 
courses filledin the rains. A great part of this plain is said to have been 
cultivated before the disturbances and dissensions introduced by the 
Burmans; and there were many Khaphok villages on it. South of where 
we stood, the river takes a bend inward towards the west, round the base of 


a low ridge, which projects from the hills on that side. 


The climate appears very similar to that of Sadzya, at the same. 
period. After rain, the thermometer fell five or six degrees, and the air 
was delightfully clear, while the sky was partially covered with thin 
clouds; but within three or four days, the atmosphere thickened, the 
thermometer regained its highest range, and it became excessively close 
till another. storm relieved us. In the morning, at sun rise, the range 
was from 72° to 78° in the shade, and at. the hottest time of the day, 
from 84° to 94°. The nights were comparatively cool and pleasant. 
The duration of the rainy weather is about the same as in Asam. 
Three or four months in the year, or from the 15th October to February, 
| may be calculated on as clear and dry, and the remainder is perfectly 
uncertain—however, the heavy rains set in about the 15th June, and 


continue to the 15th September. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 44] 


The elevation above the sea, marked by the barometer, is one thousand 
eight hundred and fifty-five feet. If Bhammo be five hundred feet above 
the sea, which would be equivalent to a fall of the river of eight inches 
each mile, there remain one thousand and three hundred feet of fall in 
the three hundred and fifty miles between this place and Bhammo, which 
sufficiently accounts for the greater part of that distance being unnaviga- 


ble, excepting for small canoes. 


Several observations during our stay, gave the latitute of Manché 
27° 29” 16:5, and that of Phankai, the Raja’s place, 27° 26” 13:6. 


Confined to the house by lameness, and unable to go abroad to 
make researches, we were generally employed in entertaining a crowd 
of visitors, who, without ceremony, and at all hours, mounted the steps 
and sat themselves down in the hall, which was common to ourselves 
and followers. 


I have already mentioned, that I received very unsatisfactory answers 
to my questions concerning their history. I was induced to defer making 
any notes*on the subject at the suggestion of the Luri Gonain, who 
reminded me that at Sadiya, | should meet with men equally capable of 
giving the information, who would exercise no reserve in their communica- 
tions. -At Sadiya, however, my unfortunate illness prevented my prose- 
cuting enquiry either on this or on many other points, which I had reserved 
for greater leisure. With respect to their history, I can only notice here, 
that the Khamtis are supposed to have been in possession of the country 
from about the same time that Asam was conquered by another party of 
their nation. They are Shams, and came from that part bordering on 
Yunan and Siam. Whether or not they are, as Mr. Kuaprors supposes, 
of Tartar origin, 1 cannot pretend to decide; but if they be, the period 


of their migration into the Shan provinces must be very remote, since 
rR 3 


442, MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


all traces of their original language have been lost. Here they are 
insulated as a people: a very extensive district, inhabited by Sing fo 
tribes, intervening between them and the nearest place where the Sham* 
language is known. They informed me that, according to their traditions, 
the country, at the time of their arrival, was occupied by Lamas, and the 
Khaphok tribe; however, I could discover no similarity between the 
languages of any of the tribes of the immediate neighbourhood and that 
of the Thibetians; and it is difficult to imagine that, if intercourse ever 
existed with Vhibet, it should have been entirely dropped, or that the 
barbarian Mishmis should ever have been suffered to become the only 


channel of communication with the parent country. 


The Miliks have already been mentioned as having a peculiar 
language. The mass of the labouring population is of the Khaphok tribe, 
whose dialect is closely allied to the Singfo, yet sufficiently different 
to cause embarrassment to both parties in holding converse. In the 
language of the Khantng, who inhabit the mountains to the N. E. and E., 
a few words are found resembling the Singfo, but it may be pronounced 
a distinct language. That of the Khalang tribe, whose villages on the 
Namlang, subject to Manché, will be spoken of hereafter, resembles the 
Singfo more nearly, as also does that of the Nogmin tribe, who are on 
Nam Disang. But none of these dialects are at all allied to the Sham or 
Khamti. This small tract, perhaps, affords an unparalleled instance of 
seven dialects being spoken at villages remote from each other, only one 
day’s journey, which differ so much that the inhabitant of one would not 
be understood at the other. The difficulty which would arise, is got over 


by their all acquiring a sufficient knowledge of the Khamiz. 


* It may be proper to observe, that according to the Lurr Gonarn, the Khamtis speak 
precisely the same language ( Shams) with the Shams of Mungkhing, or those from beyond the 
frawadi. It has not yet been ascertained, whether the Siamese language differs in any respect from 
theirs, or is materially the same. | 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 443 


The only important Geographical information obtained, was relative 
to the course of the Jrawadi to Bhammo, and the large eastern branch 
falling in at about two days’ journey above where the road turns off 
to Mingkhing. This river had hitherto been a stumbling block in 
reconciling the accounts of the Singfos and Burmans. 'The latter appear 
generally to be unacquainted with it, which is to be accounted for simply 
by their turning off towards Mognon, having the Irawadi at some distance 
on their right; the Simgfos, on the contrary, know nothing of the river 
below them, and their route towards Asam enters the Hiking valley from 


the eastward. 


Of the existence of the Suhmai Kha, Pongmai, or Sinmai Kha, 
(for by all these names it is known) there could be no doubt after 
the distinct reports of the Sinmgfo Ambassadors, mentioned in an early 
part of this Memoir: the difficulty was to ascertain where it joins the 
Lrawadi. 'The required information was now most satisfactorily obtained 
from Cuow Nan, the son of the last ruling Khamti Prince, and it was 
fully corroborated by a Khaku Singfo of my party, who had resided 
many years in that quarter, and some in Yunan. Cuow Nan had been 
twice by the route of the river to Amerapura, where he had remained 
several months in the character of Envoy, or perhaps of hostage. They 
gave me a skeleton map, showing the principal streams falling into the 
Trawadi, on the east bank, and the number of days’ journey between 
each from Manché to Bhammo. They are of opinion, that the Shima 
Kha rises in the northern mountains, at no great distance eastward from 
the heads of the Irawadi, but had no positive information. It is to be 
remarked, however, that the Lou Kyang, bordering Yunan on the W., 
makes it impossible, according to the maps of the Jesuits, that the Shémaiz 
can come from China. And the objections to assigning it a very distant 
source are, first, its want of magnitude, for it is not described as larger 


than the Khamti branch; the direction of the high range which would 


444 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


require it to break through the most elevated ground in that quarter, and, 


in fact, the want of room. 


Curiosity led us to be present at one of the weekly markets, which 
are regularly held on the plain outside the gate of the Stockade, and we 
were much pleased at the orderly manner in which the business was con- 
ducted, without any of the haggling and din of a bazar in Hindustan. We 
found two hundred or three hundred buyers and sellers assembled in a 
crowd, but separated into groups, for the sale of each particular article, 
so that a buyer could readily take his choice from all of the kind exposed. 
The currency of the country is the thin iron da, manufactured by the 
Khanungs: for some of these each comer exchanges his uncoined silver, 
weighing it carefully in little scales which he brings with him, and the 
das he again exchanges for the articles required. We observed for sale, 
dried fish, salt, fowls, eggs, pigs, ginger, oniuns, tobacco, lead, das manu- 
factured from the former kind for use, and some few things more. The 
salt was of good quality, but excessively dear—about half a seer for a 


rupee’s weight of silver. 


On the 25th May, I paid a visit to the Bura Raja, to talk of our 
return, and was instantly promised a supply of rice and whatever else 
they could furnish for our journey. He smiled at my offer of payment, 
and answered, that he should be heartily ashamed to accept an equivalent 
for such trifies. His good will did not lead him to oblige so readily in 
another affair which we had to discuss with him. We had been given to 
understand, principally by our young friend, Cuow Nan, that the upper 
road to the P/ungan pass would be far preferable for us on the return, as 
it would save at least two days’ journey, by avoiding the deep bend of the 


Namlang to the south, and present no more difficulty than the one we 


came, excepting that the trouble would have to be incurred again of — 


opening a path through the jungles of the low ground, but that would be 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 445 


fully compensated for by our ascending sooner out of the region of rank 
jungles and close underwood. The old man, when this was mentioned to 
him, allowed without hesitation, that the upper route is by far the best, and 
said he could not oppose our going that way if we were determined to do so, 
but he very earnestly requested that we would not, as he was anxious to 
prevent the Sing fos from becoming acquainted with it, and indeed our own 
followers also, who might become competent guides to their more mischiev- 
ously inclined neighbours. He said he both feared and hated the Sing fos ; 
and those of our party, were they not under our protection, should not 
return through any part of his country. To Singfos, he already owed the 
loss of the Aleth people on the Namlang, and it was because his Khalang 
villages are so near the foot of the pass-on the upper route, that he felt so 
much anxiety at the present moment to keep that shut up, and if there 
were to be any intercourse with Asam, to make the high road the way we 
came. Wehad to state what appeared a satisfactory answer to his objec- 
tions. That our own guides (and many more) were well acquainted with 
the forbidden path, and consequently that our travelling in it would 
scarcely affect the question. We had a sort of horror in recollecting the 
leeches, the damdims, and the mud and jungles of the Phiingan; but 
we promised to respect the wishes of the good old Raja, if he continued 


to hold the same opinion. 


It is a singular custom amongst the Khaméis, that the principal 
amusement of their Chiefs is working in metals, in which practice renders 
them infinitely more skilful than the lower classes, who, perhaps, cannot 
spare much time from their labors in the field. Amongst the specimens 
Shown us of their art, we saw a well-fashioned musket lock. Another, 
was a massive pipe-bow] of brass, which had eriffins for supporters, very 
boldly designed. Both of these were executed by the Bura Raja's 
brother. Their ordinary silver pipes are of very neat workmanship. 
They were very curious about any little mechanical apparatus that 


s 3 


446 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


we had with us, and astonishingly apt in understanding it. At their 
desire, I opened the lock of my sextant box, and drew for them figures of 
its various parts, from which they assured me they should be able to 
imitate it. I also opened and explained to them the uses and connexion of 
the separate pieces of a musical snuff box, which I intended for a present 
to the Raja. They were highly delighted with it, but they expressed 
their fear that they scarcely understood it well enough, upon so hasty an 
explanation and inspection, to enable them, in my absence, to detect the 
cause of derangement, should it get out of order. I also gave a pair of 
Magnetic bars, which had excited their attention; not more by their 
property of giving direction to needles, than that of assisting in the 
detection of iron ores, which I exhibited to them by driving off the sulphur 
from some pyrites, the nature of which they had been ignorant of till then. 
They expressed great delight when I showed them that sulphur, for 
which they paid a very high price to petty Sing fo traders, could be readily 
obtained, at small cost, in their own country. They immediately brought 
me the Galena, from which the Khanings, by a process which they kept 
secret from them, procure the silver, and they asked me for an explanation 
of this enigma, but 1t was too late to get cupels made, and I failed, from 
exhaustion, in attempting to oxidate it with nitre; before the blowpipe, 
however, I gave them such instruction as I could. They promised to 
manufacture a still, after my projected improvements, and as they are fond 
of their whisky, I dare say they will. It is rather singular, that their 
still resembles very closely the one described by Turner, as common in 
Bhotan ; it consists of a boiler, cut out of the soap stone, with a cylinder of 
the same material closely fitting on, and having iron bars at its bottom 
to sustain a small China bason. The top of the cylinder is closed by 
a concave dish of brass or copper, which is kept filled with cool water, 
that the ascending vapour being condensed upon it may trickle down 
towards the centre, and drop into the bason, which is placed there to 


receive it. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. _ 447 


After the departure of Lieutenant Buriton to Kumtang, whither 
he had removed to avoid the heat and inconvenience of the crowd, 
which aggravated his fever, I received a message from the Bura Raja 
to entreat me to comply with the wishes of the Minglang people, who 
had arrived from their villages at Namlang Miukh, and were pressing 
him to use his interest with me to persuade me to visit them. Not 
understanding the cause of his anxiety, I went over, and learned that 
they had threatened him with complaints to the Burmans, and not he 
alone, but all those assembled, prayed me to avert the evil which might 
ensue, by gratifying these people. I in vain urged the length of journey 
we had to perform, and necessity of not delaying our departure, but 
thinking their motive might be a more interested one than that of giving 
their people an opportunity of seeing me, and themselves enjoying the 
pleasure of paying me attention, I tried the experiment of making a 
present, and found their eagerness immediately lessened. The Raja 
hinted his wish, that I would give them all I could spare. They soon 
after took their departure, and then instantly I saw some tablets produc- 
ed, and the old gentleman and his council, with better recollection than I 
should have expected, made a list of my present, including every item. 
This, it was explained to me, was intended as a record to enable them, in 
ease of the Chiefs of Minglang accusing them to the Burmans, to shew 
that they also had been equal sharers in whatever had been given by us. 
The Aaja afterwards candidly confessed, that he was anxious for 
our departure, and that it was at first his wish to furnish us with rice, 
and request us to return from the Miélék villages, which he would have 
done, but for consideration for his relatives, the Sadiya and Laong 
Gohains, whom he might have subjected to our displeasure by such an 
act. He was under great apprehension that the Burmans, when inform- 
ed of our visit, would suspect him of having invited us over, in order to 
arrange for the removal of the Khaméts into our own territories. I was 
happy to find that he no longer objected to our returning by the upper 


route. 


448 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


' According to promise, a specimen of the tea-tree was brought to me 
from one of the neighbouring low hills, it was a full grown one, that is, about 
five feet high ; the leaves were coarse and large, and not numerous. Their 
mode of preserving it is to drive the leaves when fresh, by strong pressure, 
into a bamboo, and some salt, I think, was added. Several presents were 
offered me of things which would have been deemed curious, but I could 
not accept them, as I had not sufficient means of carrying even those 
things which were absolutely required. 


On taking leave, all our friends accompanied me to some distance 
from the village, and the Raja’s brother, called the Palanseng Gohain, 


was deputed to see us properly provided, at the Moolook villages, with a 
store of rice. 


I observed on the return, that the hills between the Ivawad: and 
Namlang, at least those on the road, are of mica slate: at the base, near 
the Khokhao rivulet, I Saw some of the blocks of soapstone, which they 
employ for culinary vessels ; it appeared to be Nacrite, it is extremely 


sectile, and is said to bear the strongest heat uninjured. 


At Nambak, onthe 31st May, we, for the first time, had an opportuni- 
ty of observing some lunar distances, which, however, were not very satis- 
factory, as clouds interrupted us frequently at the moment, and prevented 
our getting corresponding altitudes in the afternoon for time, also the lati- 
tude of Nambak, was obliged to be inferred from that of Khalang. Plains, 
partially cultivated, extend to the Khalang villages, and about them there 
is an extended patch of fine rice-fields. There are two villages, each of 
about twenty houses. The people are short muscular men, dressed ina 
very inferior style to the Khamtis. We were persuaded to halt one day, 
while a party went forward to cut the path. Of Lieutenant Buriton’s 


men, who had been left at the first Mulluk village, that they might 


” ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 449 


enjoy as long a rest as possible to cure their sores and swellings, three 
were still in such a state, that their proceeding with us was out of the 
question, and one of mine had absconded, so that we were at a consider- 
able difficulty in arranging for the carriage of our small baggage, dimi- 
nished as it was by the numerous presents given to the Khamtis, and 
were obliged, after a close inspection, to discard the smallest superfluity. 
As this was the period requiring most attention to their cultivation, we 
could not induce the Raja to give us men on any terms. The ulcers 
on our own hands and ankles, proceeding from the damdiém and leech 
bites, would not get well. The former troublesome insect abounds to 
such a degree at Khalang, that it is wonderful the people can endure to live 
there. There is a very pretty temple situated a few hundred yards from 
the village, surrounded by a square court yard, which is neatly kept, and 
is planted with plum, peach, and other fruit trees. The latitude of Kha- 
lang, by a good observation of S. Urs. Maj. was 27° 32’ 23”, 


On the 2d June, at an early hour, we were fairly on our way to return, 
anxious enough to see our neat built house at Sadiya, with such comforts 
as it afforded, but by no means careless about the dismal journey which 
was to bring us there. The pretty little valley of the Ndamlang soon 
closed, and where two equal streams, the Namseya and Phingytn, meet, 
and form the first-named river, we entered once more into a ravine of the 
mountains, where the eye rests on nought but inhospitable jungles, or the 
foaming torrent. At the point of confluence there is a bridge for the 
convenience, apparently of the Mishmz* visitors, whose only route is by the 
Namseya. Thebridge is a curiosity for its lightness and seeming insta- 
bility. Its length is full eighty yards, and it is built of very few canes. 


The principal strength lies in the bunch of supporters above, on which 


* The Mishmé route from the Lathi on the Brahmaputra to Khalang. 
cr 3 


450 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


are threaded the elliptical rings which sustain the road-way, but this is 


of two canes only, and there are two only on each side to hold by. 


The PaLansene Gounain and his people, in the morning of the next 
day, informed us that we were actually upon the base of the Phdéngan 
mountain, and here they left us, warning us that it was very uncertain 
whether we should find water that day unless we could reach the 
snow. I followed the example of some others in filling the joint 
of a bamboo, and suspending it by a cane to my shoulders, and 
we provided for our dinner, by wrapping up some ready-boiled rice 
in a plantain leaf. We plodded on up the steep ascent till we were. 
heartily weary, resting but little, and guided in our exertion by our 
anxiety to reach the spot, where our guides had, ona former occasion, 
found a small pool,—careless of the advance of our people whom 
we soon left far behind. In our turn we needed, and found encourage- 
ment from the Singfos, whose hardiness enabled them to be always 
in the van, and who very little liked the idea of sleeping supper- 
less. An apple was found on the ascent, of a delightful scent, but 
astringent to that degree, that it was impossible to bite twice at it. We 
saw no other novelty. From eight till past three, we continued our toil, and 
rejoiced to find the pool—it was muddy and filthy, but no matter—it was 
not dry. But this, with a pot of rice, for which we were indebted to the 
Sing fos, and which we knew how to discuss without the aid of spoons, 
were our only luxuries—fatigue taught us to forget that we had no beds. 
The elevation of our halting place was eight thousand six hundred and 


eighty-six feet above the sea. 


Many of the people had not arrived when we started again in the 
morning. We soon left behind us both underwood and forest trees—the 
only remaining plants were the rhododendron, and a bushy ever-green, 


growing about eighteen inches high, which it was very laborious to push 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. © 451 


our way through: we mounted several peaks connected by ridges 
with the parent height, but from the commanding points, whence we 
ought to have had an extended view, we looked down on nought but 
masses of white mist and clouds. Mists also driving like rain, almost 
always obscured the view of the snows above us. The first snow we 
passed, was lying in small unconnected patches, but about two o’clock 
we came to the foot of a sheet which covered the whole apex of the moun- 
tain, and found that, since the naked-limbed guides and Sing:fos 
could not endure sinking up to the knee in it, we had to make a cir- 
cuit to avoid the deepest bed. The very few trees towards the 
summit were junipers, but those upon the flat table, which forms the apex, 
were miserable things of four or five feet in height. According to report, 
from this elevated peak* the view includes not only the valley of the Ira- 
wadi, with the plains of Hukung and Miingkhing at an immense dis- 
tance, but also the Lama country to the N.E.; however, far from enjoying 
these beauties, we only saw the dense mist, which, driven along by a strong 
wind, wet us tothe skin. The guides being deprived of a sight of sur- 
rounding objects, became doubtful of the way, and we were detained for 
an hour trying the descent on all sides, till they agreed that the direction 
we had first taken must be the right one, and in that we soon found 
ourselves moving rapidly down towards the south, in a ravine filled with 
snow, below the crust of which the roaring of the head of the Phingan 
rivulet was loudly audible. At half-past four, we had cleared the great 
sheet, and the snow remained only in patches ; but our guides giving us 
no hopes of reaching a halting place having more advantages, we agreed 


to stay, where there was not a leaf but that of the fir, or rhododendron, to 


build our huts of—nor wood for fires, but that which was sodden and wet. . 


We had luckily a quilt each and a rug. The rugs we stretched to branches 


* The Barometer was set at three or four hundred feet below the summit ; it gave the altitude 
above the sea 12,474 feet. 


hy 


452 MEMOIR OF A SURVEY OF 


of the rhododendron, as some shelter from the penetrating mists. The cold, 
and novelty of their situation, deprived our people of allenergy, and with 
our best exertions of encouragement and threats, we, with difficulty, got a fire 
lighted. One of our good-natured and willing guides agreed in the morning 
to go back, lest the traces left should prove insufficient to direct those in the 
rear, who were yet more numerous than those arrived. One poor fellow was 
found to have passed the night alone, on the very top—and for the remain- 
der, the precautionary measure of sending back guides seemed to have been 
fortunate, for they were discovered wandering about the spot where our 
devious tracks showed that we ourselves had missed the road. At one 
o'clock there remained in the rear only four men, who were so much 
fatigued, that there was no chance of their conquering the mountain that 
day, or of their keeping up with us if they had; and, since the Lurr 
Gouain was behind us, having halted another day at Nambak, we consi- 
dered that there was nothing to apprehend in leaving them to follow at 
their convenience. The whole day was excessively cold and unpleasant, 
the heavy mists and drifting rain continuing without intermission. We 
would have removed to better quarters, but were informed that no such 


were within some hours’ march. 


Leaving the Piiingan on the morrow, we mounted the wall on its 
right bank, and there, while descending the ridge which divides the waters 
of the Irawadi from those of the Brahmaputra, a transient clearness gave 
us a view of our old halting place on the Dapha, which we could not per- 
ceive without great delight. A short march brought us back into our old 
path at the crest of the Phingan pass ; it ought not to have been fatiguing, 
as it was generally on the descent, but it became so from the kind of 
jungle we had to make our way through, or over—for often the boughs of 
the rhododendron were so closely interwoven, that we stepped from one to 


another, four and five feet elevated above the ground. 


ASAM AND THE NEIGHBOURING COUNTRIES. 458 


The ‘Diamond’ of the Wangleo afforded us, as before, water for one 
meal ; we reached it with difficulty in one day from the Dapha. 'Thence 
also to the Dihing, our anxiety to return to a place of rest made us per- 
form the journey (mostly down hill) in one day; but the effects upon us of 
descending so rapidly from a region of cold to the scorching heats of the 
low country was so severely felt, that we passed a miserable night on the 
banks of the Dihing without sleep, and Lieutenant Buriron has preserved 
a note, that the pulse of one beat one hundred and forty-six, and of the 
other one hundred and thirty-five, in the minute, while we were in that 


restless condition. 


We crossed the Dapha, as before, by the suspension bridge, and there 
we were informed, to our great satisfaction, that the Bisa Gam had letters 
anda parcel for us. I mention this to introduce an instance of Singfo 
duplicity. At Kasan we halted an entire day, to send a messenger to 
EBfsa for our letters, and we rewarded him when, in the evening, he 
returned with the answer, that, at an appointed place on the Dihing, the 
Bisa Gam would attend in person to deliver them. There we stopped, 
and were disappointed ; but we afterwards learned that our most worthy 
messenger had done what many fire-side travellers take the liberty of 
doing. He was contented with performing the journey while smoking a 


pipe in his own hut. 


The river was pretty full, and the rapids consequently very boisterous ; 
but after descending the first and worst of them, with the precaution of 
lowering our boats gently down the smoother side, we shot the rest with 


immense rapidity, and in one day and a half from Kasanwe landed at Sadiya. 


Of those who set out with us on the return, all arrived safe; and of 
those of Lieutenant BurLron’s men who remained, one also found his way 
back with another party. I am not aware whether they have all returned 


to their own country. 


APPENDIX. 


No. 1—ROUTE FROM GOHATI TO MURSING GAON :—See p. 325. 


Ist day. From Darang to Chatgari occupies two pahars, and the direction is 


nearly north. 


2d. 'To Kariyapar, direction north, two nullahs are crossed, and the road passes 


through much jungle ; this is considered a full day’s journey. 


3d. Ina north-westerly direction to Gwmgaon, the road through jungles abounding 


with wild elephants. 


Ath. Amarathal, within the hills, is reached in two pahars with difficulty ; the road 
is through hills on the banks of a nullah, which is repeatedly to be crossed by a bridge of 
one plank. Amarathal is rebuilt every year. The violence of the rains destroys the 
houses, and renders the roads impassable, and the force of the mountain torrents sweeps 


away the bridges. Direction north. 


5th and 6th. Bagahgaon is considered one day’s journey, but it was found impossi- 
ble to reach it on the fifth day, on account of the steepness of a mountain in the road. In 
this hill there is a cave, in which fifty or sixty men can find room, and here our travellers 
rested. The remaining part of the distance occupied but a short time the next day. The 
village is on a hill north of the road, but travellers rest in two or three houses situated 
below. They build here of stone, and roof with mats. They eat wheat flower, which is 
prepared by heating and mixing it with water, rice, either boiled or heated with a kind of 


oil which sells very dear, and kampa gondi, the seed of which, a little larger than that of 


APPENDIX. 455 


the poppy, is yellow (the pod black); this is made into a paste with water. Goat’s flesh 


is eaten—but neither that of fowls, hogs, or bullocks. Direction north. 


6th and 7th. Narégaon was also reached in two stages, though it might be made in 
one with great difficulty. The halting place is a cavern in the hill. Thus far the road is on 
the banks of a river, sometimes on the bed of it, sometimes on the hill’s side; at Narigaon 
it is left to the south. The village is on a high hill; the direction, during the first day, is 


north, and, on the second, north-east. 


8th and 9th. Thence in a north-easterly direction, to the bend of the nullah above 
mentioned, the | road passes between two mountains, and the dangers and difficulties are 
many; it is scarcely three feet wide, and is ankle deep in mud in many places ; it is made 
with wood. ‘The stage is not a long one; but owing to the bad state of the road, it is not 


possible to advance more than two or three kos a day. 


The direction, on the second day, is first east, and then due north to Mirsinggaon, 
which is situated on the north bank of the Bhiruli river. Many villages are seen to the 
south ; their food is the same here as above stated, but the rice they use, being brought 


from Asam, is very dear; there is very little cultivation. 


10th. Hence two kos, a little north of east, is Diumkigaon, on a nullah ; and two 
kos again beyond that, the DrB RAsA was found encamped ina garden, on the water’s 
edge. Here and there snow was seen on the mountain, and water flowing from it. 

Tawang is three days’ journey from the DrB’s encampment, and respectable Tawang 
people said that Sunea-hath is three days further ; thence there are two roads, one towards 
Nepal, the other north to Lhassa, under the KuLita Rasa, whichis fifteen days’ journey. 
From L’hassa, in fifteen days, a province of China is reached, either by water or by a 
land route. The boats used are of leather, on account of the number of rocks met with. 
At the end of a stage the leather boat is hauled up and dried. By land, it is requisite 
to carry provisions for the fifteen days, as the hills are not inhabited. ‘There are on the 


road elephants, rhinoceroses, tigers, and many other animals. 


Tawang is said to be in the upper part of the Bonash. 


456 APPENDIX. 


No. If—BOGA DAMRA’S ACCOUNT OF THE FLOOD OF THE 
DIHONG:—p. 326. 


“ Tn 1657, (A. D. 1735) two rivers flowed into our country. ‘There were formerly 
two Cachdéré villages at the mouth of the Senglaé river, near the Dihong Dipang. 
Belonging to these villages were two bils, (lakes) the names of which were Diha Darwa 
and Dibangiya: the Senga Senglat flowing from the DuRiyA GOHAIN’s country into 
these two bils, takes the name of Dihong Dipang. 'The Senglaé river flowing from the 
Kulita country joins the Dibong. Boats cannot navigate the Dihong to the mouth of the 
Senglat on account of the numerous rocks, but by going forty days up the stream of the 
Dibong it may be reached, and thence to Kulita is twelve days’ journey. The Senglat 


is not navigable. 


From Sadiya to Kulita is a journey of forty-two days and six hours, in the middle 
of the way the route lies through hills, where the dense jungles make it very difficult to 


proceed. 


From the Abors, a distance of nine days, are the Bibors ; from the Bibors, a distance 
of three days are the Jiobars. From the Jiobars, distant seven days, are the Barkanas,— 
in the ole the distance occupies, as above, forty-two anda half days to Kulita, which is 
three days’ journey beyond the Barkanas. ‘There are, on the whole, twenty-four hills and 
eleven large torrents, besides innumerable small ones ; but the passage by the hills is 
impracticable on account of the hostile disposition of the Barkanas:* the products of 
Kulita are elephants’ teeth, “ biérisar,” copper vessels, bor bis and sengumuré bis, 


(two kinds of poison) “ Gathiyan’, silk, musk and chowree tails. 


North-westward from Kulita, distant nine days’ journey, is the country of the K1BoNG 
GouayN. The Duriya country is distant from Kibong five days’ journey. The Dihong 


Dipang flows from betwixt the countries of Kibong and Duriya.” 


* Barkanas, large-eared—the Asamese are as confident of the existence of this tribe as of that of the fabulous 
Sri Lohit and its three branches, (Brahmaputra, Dihong, and Irawadi.) Those who are not remarkably credu- 
lous, represent the ear as merely hanging down to the waist, while others are positively informed, that at night 
the left ear serves as an ample bed to sleep on, with sufficient to spare to wrap the body upin. Lieut. W. 

It is curious that this notion should be still in existence, being now as old as the days of Megasthenes: it 
proves also, that he did not invent the fiction, but honestly repeated what he had heard in India.—H. H. W. 


APPENDIX. 457 


No. III1.—NOTE ON M. KLAPROTH’S THEORY OF THE COURSE OF 
THE SANPO. 


Since my labors have not terminated so successfully as to furnish absolute proof of 
the identity or non-identity of the Sampo and Brahmaputra,* I might leave it to others 
to form their own opinion upon the data furnished them in the foregoing part of my 
Memoir ; for I do not suppose that many willincline to follow M. KLAPROTH, in claiming 
infallibility for the Chinese authorities quoted by him. However, while stating the few 
facts which I have yet to mention, I shall embrace the opportunity of pointing out, at the 
same time, what circumstances have materially contributed to strengthen M. KLAPROTH’S 
arguments ; and on the other hand, I shall endeavor to collect the evidence, (in my opinion 
very strong,) which, at all events, deserves to be weighed against the assertions of the 


Chinese Geographers. 


With respect to the weight to be attached to their opinions, M. KLAPrRorH himself 
says, “ceux d’ entre eux qui ecrivent sur la geographie donnent constamment des 
détails si minutieux qu’on ne peut donter qu’ ils ne connoissent pas le plus grand fleuve de 
leur empire.” But since his Mémoire} cannot be had access to by many, it appears in 
every way advantageous to extract from it here the quotations by which he supports his 
arguments. He says :—‘ voici un extrait de la grande géographie imperiale de la Chine 
qui fera voir que le cours inférior du Yarou-dzang-bo-tchou du Tubet, ou de l’ Traouaddy 
de Ava étoit depuis long-temps connu des Chinois, et qu’ ils l’appelloient Ta-kin-cha- 
kiang. La géographie de la dynastie des Thang ’exprime ainsi :”’—il porte aussi le nom de 
Tsang (ou Dzang); les habitans du pays du Tian (le Yunnan) l’appellent Ta-kin-cha-kiang. 
Il vient de la partie la plus occidentale du Tubet. Selon la géograqhie du Yunnan, le 
grand Kin-cha-kiang vient du Tubet, entre dans le pays de Miantian ou Ava, a cing li de 


largeur et va se jeter dans la mer. Houang-tchu-yuou, ancien anteur Chinois dit.t 


“f On dit que les sources du grand Kin-cha-kiang ne sont pas tres eloignées du pays 


de Ta-wan (La Bactriane). Depuis les monts Lima et Tebha-chan jusqua l’extréme 


“ The name Lohita, might perhaps be substituted with advantage when referring to the ‘ Brahmaputra of 
Geographers,” since it does not appear that it is properly applied to the Sacred or Eastern Stream, 
t “ Sur les Sources du Brahmaputra et de I’ Iraoaddy. 


¢ I extract what relates to this river only. 


ws 


458 APPENDIX. 


frontiere septentrionale de Meng-yang (dans le Yunnan*), ou ne connoit pas bien son 
cours: il passe par le pays d’une tribu des sauvages nommés les Cheveux roux (Tchhy-fa) ; 
ses bords y sont si escarpés qu’ on ne peut pas y grimper. La grande géographie de la 
Chine, qui cite ce passage, ajonte: Parmi les riviéres qui passent par la partie du pays des 
Meng-yang (I) hérisseé de montagnes et presque inaccessibles, il y en adeux trés-grandes 
qui viennent du nord-ouest, lune s’appelle Ta-kin-kiang on Ta-khin-kiang, et l’autre 
Pin-lang-kiang. Elles se réunissent, et portent aussi le nom de Ta-i-kiang: de nos jours les 
habitans du district de Theng-yue donnent généralement a toutes les grandes riviéres le 
nom de Ta-i-kiang. Les gens du pays appellent ce fleuve Kin-cha-kiang (a sable d’or). 
On trouve dans son lit le Yu ou jade oriental, de couleur verte, de lor en grains et en 
paillettes, la pierre précieuse appeleé tsing-chy, du noir, du cristal de roche et quelque 
fois aussis du Yu blanc. Aux pieds des montagnes qu’ il traverse, on recueille aussi 
de Pambre jaune. Les habitans du Tian (Yun-nan) appellent ce fleuve Ta (grand) 
Kin-cha-kiang ; le Siao (petit) Kin-cha-kiang, an contraire, est celui qui passe a Li-Kiang, 
&c. En sortant du pays de Meng-yang, ce fleuve coule au sud, passe devant Houang- 
meng, Ma-than, Mo-tsy et Meng-tchung, ou il recoit une riviére qui vient de I’ ouest: il 
baigne Pho-pha, Tsimeng et Momang, villes anciennes, coupe la frontiére (de ce temps), 
et va 4 Man mo.—I] n’y a aucun doute que ce fleuve ne soit le Yarou-dzang bou du Tubet 


ajontent les éditeurs de la grande géographie impériale.” 


The quotation from Houang-tchin-yuau ancien auteur Chinois is an on dit,—but 
what does it assert more than that between two distant points, one situated in Thibet, the 
other on the borders of Yunnan—the course of certain rivers is unknown. ‘The onus 
probandi still lies with Houng-tchin-yuan, to show that the river lost sight of in Thibet, 


is found again near Yunnan}. 


La Geographie de Yunnan cited proves no more, nor does the first quotation, as they 


seem all to rest upon the same grounds, and I need scarcely remark that the addition of 


* A note is given by M. Kliaproth (1) and it does not appear whether (“‘ dans le Yunnan’) is his addition or 
not ‘ (1) Ce pays étoit situé en dehors de la frontiére la plus occidentale au Yunnan actuale. 

+ The Chinese geographers seem to have been in precisely the same predicament with ourselves in respect to 
this river. They lose sight of the Sampo, so do we; they find a large river near their ‘own borders, we find a 
larger; and we each declare that we have found that which was lost. The case is very similar also tothe dispute 
between Mr. McQueen and the Quarterly Review, on the question of the Niger. One finds a proper and 
reasonable outlet for it, which would give it an allowable length of course ; the others are not (or were not) so 
easily satisfied, but conveyed their river circuitously about, coutrary to all reason. 


APPENDIX. 459 


the Editéurs de la Grande Geographie, ‘ I] n’ya aucun donte,’ induces a very great deal of 
doubt, as it appears that they draw their conclusion from the scanty evidence they place 
before us. ‘The account, however, of the Ta-kin and Pin-lang, is of a very different 
stamp, and in it we recognise an accurate description of the Irawadi, as it really exists. 
To this day, there is a considerable trade carried on by the Chinese of Yunan, chiefly for 
the sake of the articles enumerated above, as found in these rivers. The amber mines of the 
Kaynduayn haye been long famed for the quantities of amber produced. The green stone 
(yu) is found in most of the branches of the Irawadi—(I brought a specimen from Man- 
ché, which was found in the Phungan )—and_ the Und produces a stone, the nature of 
which we could not exactly ascertain from the Shams, for which the Chinese pay a large 
price*. It is to be remarked, that hitherto it has not been asserted that the river of 
Thibet enters Yunan; but to prove this, M. KLAPROTH cites ‘‘ une ordonnance de 


Khang-hi,” published in 1721. TI give the extract relating to this river at large. 


<< Tl y a encore une autre riviere qui passe par l’extreme frontiére du Yun-nan, c’est 
le Pin-lang-kiang (fleuve de l’Arec). Sa source est dans le Nyari province du Tubet, a 
Pest du mont Gangdis sur le mont Dumdjouk-kabal, c’est a dire bouche de cheval. Ce 
fleave recoit plus bas le nom de Yarou-dzangbo; il coule généralement vers Vest, en 
déviant un peu au sud; passe par le pays de Dzangghe et la ville de Jikar gounggar ; 
recoit le Guldjao-mouren; plus loin, se dirige au sud, traverse une contrée habitée par 
des hordes non soumises, et entre dans le Yunnan, pres de l’ancienne ville de Young- 
tcheou ; il y porte le non de Pin-lang-kiang. II quitte cette province au fort de Thie-py- 


kouan et entre dans le royaume de Mian-tian.” 


I have already mentioned that this ordonnance was published in 1721; however, the 


Jesuits were employed in Yunan, in constructing their map of the province in 1714 and 


1715, and they have neither introduced the Sampo into Yunan, nor had their inquiries 


elicited any satisfactory information concerning its course after leaving Thibet. P. REGIS 
himself says, (he probably wrote after the year 1721,) +‘ Mais, ou va se decharger 


le grande fleave Tsanpou? C’est sur quoi on n’a riea de certain. Il est vraisemblable 


* One species of stone they require to be sawnin two, when they immediately decide to reject it as worth- 
less, or to pay a large sum for it. 


+ Description de l’Empire de la Chine.—p, 585. 


460 APPENDIX. 


qu'il coule vers le golphe de Bangale car du moins on scait surement que des limites du 
Thibet il va Sud—ouest a la mer, et que par consequent il coule vers Aracan, ou 


pres de ’embouchure du Gange dans le Mogul.” 


That the Jesuits visited the extreme frontier, we have evidence in their table of 
observed latitudes, in which we find Loughan-kouan, which is in the extreme S.W., << Lat. 
23° 41’ 40",” « Long. 18° 32’ 00",” (west of Pekin). San-ta-fou is not included in 
this table; but we may infer, from their informing us that its position is the result of seve- 
ral triangles, that they were within sight of it, if not at the place ; still, however, between 
San-ta-fou and Teng-ye-chew, distant from each other about forty-two miles only, and of 
which the position of the last was observed (both latitude and longitude*), does M. 
KLAPROTH venture to introduce this immense stream, which, in the words of le P. 
““GAUBIL, is beaucoup plus considerable que le Houaug-ho et le grand Kiang’— 


“* Cest la plus grande riviere que les Chinois connoissent.” 


It is the more unfavourable to M. KLAPROTH’S theory and argument, that he has 
adopted the Bhanmo river as the channel for the Pin-lang-Kiang, for we have such easily 
accessible proof that it is but a rivulet. Perhaps M. KLApRorH had not seen Dr. 
HAMILTON’S interesting accounts of the maps procured by him at Amerapura: he would 
have observed} that the ( Burmans) Mranmas distinguish the Banmo river as a Khiaun, 
or small river, in contradiction to Myeet, which is their term for a large one. The Chinese 
word Aho, (which is applied by them to the Banmo rivulet,) has the same signification, 
according to Dr. HAmMILTON.{ Ihave long been aware, from the accounts of Mranmas, 
Shams, and also of the Chinese from Yunnan, mentioned in p. 350 of this Memoir, that the 
Banmo river is one of very small size. But I can venture to assert roundly what is more 
to the purpose. I rest upon the same authorities, and I have examined, at various times, 
at least a dozen men of the nations, mentioned, besides Singfos, who are in the habit of 
visiting the western part of Yunnan ; that below the mouth of the Minkhung river, which 


I place in latitude 24° 52’, the Irawadi§ does not either enter or proceed from Yunnan. 


* They therefore remained at Teng-ye-chew some time. 
+ ‘ Account of a Map of the Route between Tartary and Amarapura.”—Edinburgh Phil. Journal, p, 35. 
} Ditto—page 36. 


§ The Irawadi of Geographers—i, e. the principal stream. 


APPENDIX. 461 


“Though perfectly satisfied on this point from having been so long and so often engaged 


in the inquiry, I have recently questioned a Burman attendant, who has been with me 
since the capture of Rangpur, and who came from Amerapura, his native city, by the 
route of the Irawadi, striking off where the Mogaun, or Mingkhung rivulet joins the 
great river. This man,* in answer to my simple question as to the size of the Bhanmo 
river, immediately replied—as large as the Dikho, (the little stream running past Gher- 
gong, and Rangpur in Asam,) and he positively denies that any river joins the Irawadi, 


as far up as he has seen it. 


‘“¢ T was assured by the Officer who gave me the account of the Map here published, 
and who, as belonging to Panmo, on the frontier of China, must have been perfectly well 
informed, thatthe Irawadi+ or Kiang nga never enters the province of Yunnan, but keeps 
far to the west of it, the whole principality of Panmo being interposed.” (HAMILTON, 
p. 36 of his Account.) 


In answer to this, M. KLAPRoTH could not again remind us that though this may 
be true of the Irawadi of the Mranmas, it may not be so of the “ Irawadi of Geogra- 
phers ;’” he would be well aware that the latter was understood and intended by Dr. 
HAMILTON, who perfectly well recollected the story of the four Chinese of the Universal 
History. Ido not think it worth while to enter ona discussion of their travels. {| HAmIL- 
TON has said enough on the subject; but indeed it appears to me that citing such authority, 
or the ‘‘renseignemens authentiques” of our great Geographer RENNELL, is wilfully 
recurring for information to a period when much of what is now perfectly understood was 


the subject of mere conjecture. 


I was assured by a party of Shams from Yunnan, that there is no river to compare 
with the Sadiya Brahmaputra, within thirteen days’ journey of Banmo. ‘The river allud- 
ed to by them at that distance, appears to be the Lan-tsan, or Kianlong-kiang. The 


Nou-kyang is, as we are told by HamiILToNn, much inferior to the Irawadi at Bhanmo, 


* He has often shown considerable intelligence in geographical matters. 


+ It must not be forgotten, that while Dr. HamILTon was pursuing these inquiries at Amerapura, there were 
there some Chinese Ambassadors from Yunnan, who also gave him information. 


$ They might have embarked on the Bhanmo river. 


Xie 


462 APPENDIX. 


which is described to me as larger than the Sadiya Brahmaputra, but inferior to the great 


united stream of the Lohit. 


If it were incumbent on me to mention every statement with which M. KLAPRoTH 
has thought to strengthen his arguments, I should have to quote P. GAUBIL’s (mere) opi- 
nion, that M. D’ANVILLE was right in placing Ava on the great Yarou Ssanpou—(he 
does not say a word about its entering Yunnan )—and the evidence of the maps published 
during the reign of KuIAN-LONG, on which it is written in Manchou* characters, 
opposite to where the Dzangbo-tchow or Yarou Dzang-bou-tchon leaves Thibet, that 
this river passes through the country of Lokabadja (or H’Lokba), and enters Yunnan ; 
but, as I have proved satisfactorily, [ hope, that so important an error has been com- 
mitted on this point, surely that whole mass of evidence will no longer be thought trust- 


worthy. 


However, in justice to M. Kiaprotu, I must draw attention to the large eastern 
branch of the [rawadi, called in my map by its Singfo name, Shimai kha+—I ask, had 
M. KLAPROTE been aware of the existence of this considerable river, should we ever 
have heard of the Pin-lang-kiang in Yunnan ? or seen the petty Banmo rivulet magnified 
into a mighty stream? I think not; and those who inspect my map will agree with me. 
With regard to the origin of the Shumat kha, 1 have no positive statements to offer ; 
the Singfos are generally of opinion that it is something larger than the western branch, 
though not materially, and it seems not at all improbable that it is the river mentioned by 
the old man who was captive amongst the Lamas, as rising in the snowy mountains of 
the Khana Deba’s country, and flowing to the south near where he saw the source’ of the 


eastern branch of the Dihong turning to the N. W.{ 


If the opinion of Mandchous and Chinese be deserving of confidence, is not that of 


the Thibetians resident upon the Sanpo equally so? 


f 


* These maps have led M. Kiaproruinto an error, acknowledged by himself—for he corrects it in his second 
map. It is written similarly in Mandchou, opposite the ‘‘ Moun-tchou,” that it unites with the Yaron Dzangbo in 
Lokabadja. M. KLaproru now considers it to be our Dihong. 


+ The Liphat Singfos ; it is also called Sinmat-kha. 
$ Vide p. 411 of this Memoir. 


APPENDIX. 463 


A party of Bhotiya and L’hassa merchants, one of whom had travelled from Lassa 
to Pekin, assured Mr. Scorr at Darang, in Asam, (in 1826), that the Brahmaputra, 
on the banks of which they then stood, is the Tsanpo, or large river of Thibet. From 
Nipal, we understand, that the Thibetians always assert the same thing, and referring to 
TURNER for the opinions he derived from them at Teshoo Lomboo, we find a degree of 


accuracy in their idea of the river, which was not to be expected. 


‘It passes Lassa, and penetrates the frontier mountains that divide Thibet from, 
Asam. In this latter region it receives a copious supply from the sacred fountains of 


the Brahmakoond,* before it rushes to the notice of Europeans below Rungamutty.” 


The evidence derived indirectly from the Thibetans at the sources of the Brahma- 
putra, has already been recorded, p. 410 of this Memoir, and this, as I have there observed, 
deserves consideration more particularly, since those people must be perfectly aware whe- 
ther or not they are divided from the rest of Thibet by a large river. However, they not 
only deny the existence of such river, but inform us positively that the DPhassa river is 


the same as the Dihong. 


I shall proceed to examine how far M. KLAPROTH derives advantage by supporting 
his view with arguments from Physical Geography. 
i 
He concludes that the great periodical rise of the Irawadi, and its rapidity of current, 


can only be accounted for by assigning it a distant source in the snows of Thibet.+ 


* We had not at that time any notice of the Kund. 


+ He refers us to ‘‘ Two years in Ava, p. 233.” The Author of that clever little work hazards the opinion that 
the sudden ‘ risings of the river are attributable to the melting of the snow, in the mountains of Thibeé: for 
although the Irawadi derives a vast supply of water from the numerous streams which flow from the Yomadoung and 
other mountains, yet it is impossible they could be so rapidly swollen by the rain as to create this sudden increase 
of water.” Surely a sudden increase is more likely to proceed from rain than from the gradual melting of snow. 
This Author further inform us, that the periodical risings are generally three in number in one season, and that 
the last is the forerunner of the viver’s ebbing to its lowest state. BUCHANAN says, that it began to fall on the 
17th September. Thenthe last sudden rise occurs ata period when we know that the snows suffer very little 
further diminution. After the rapid thaws of May and June, there remains no great portion of the mass of snow 
which is situated within reach of the sun’s influence. 


AGA APPENDIX. 


I shall show, on the other hand, that analogy furnishes us with the conclusion that with- 
in the limits prescibed by my researches to the sources of the Irawadi, there is sufficient 
space for the formation of a river of great magnitude, and the question will then appear to 


hinge upon this point. What is the magnitude of this river compared with others.* 


We have certainly been told that, in the rainy season, it would be impossible to make 
way against its impetuous current, were it not for the strong southerly breezes which then 
prevail; but to those who are acquainted with the Ganges and Brahmaputra,} this is saying 
no more than that it resembles those rivers in the periodical difficulties of its navigation: 
and when we further recollect that the Irawadi is, in one place, contracted in breadth by 
its high banks to four hundred yards { (of which we have no similar instance in the others §) 
we cannot consent to allow that the difficulty of stemming its current is a convincing 


argument of its superior importance. 


“ During the dry months of January, February, March, and April, the waters of the 
Trawadi subside into a stream that is barely navigable: frequent shoals and banks of 
sand retard boats of burthen.”|| “I see here,” says Dr. BUCHANAN in his Journal, 
“some boats poled along in the very middle of the river, where there does not appear to 
be more than six or eight feet water: It is deeper, however, towards the steep bank.” 
Dr. HAMILTON says of it generally, that it is equal to the Ganges or Brahmaputra, 
and I am not aware that any.one has rated it higher, but Officers, whom I have questioned 
on the subject, who had sufficient opportunity of forming a judgment during their long 


sojourn on its banks, in the course of the late war, compare the Ivawadi, above its junction 


* Itis to be regretted that those who had the opportunity did not give usa section of the Irawadi, and the 
velocity of its current. 

+ The latter particularly. 

} Two years in Avz. 

§ Immediately below Gohati, hills confine the Brahkmaputra to the breadth of one thousand two hundred 
yards, the narrowest in its course through Asam ; there, in the rainy season, boats are necessitated to be moored 
till a westerly breeze springs up of force sufficient to carry them through the narrow strait: but there is often great 
difficulty even where the river flows in an open bed. When coming down the river in the latter end of October 
1825, I saw a fleet of Commissariat boats (at that time very much required with their supplies for the army) which 
had been twenty-five days between Goalpara and Naghurbera hill, a distance of thirty miles, and there was no 
remarkable wind to impede their progress. 

|| Symes’ Embassy, p. 24, ed. of 1800. 

{ Vol. 3, Edinburgh Philosophical Journal, p. 37. 


APPENDIX. 465 


with the Kenduayn to the Ganges opposite Puttehghur, and consider it generally as very 
inferior to the Ganges, where having received its vast supplies from the Goggra and the 


Soan, it spreads its great breadth over the plains like some great inland sea.* 


But I am not anxious to deny high rank to the Irawadi. Yam only jealous of its 


taking precedence, without authority, of its noble compeers. 


I may assume, [ believe, that the magnitude} of the rivers of similar countries 
bears always some proportion to the space{ drained, so that knowing the extent of 
country, an estimate might always be formed of the comparative magnitude of its rivers : 
provided, however, that the similarity of the districts compared, extend to the climate as 


well as other physical features. 


For comparison with the district drained by the Irawadi, particularly on the upper 
part of its course, no country could be more happily selected than Asam, similar to it, as 
far as we are informed, in every particular. The elevation not materially differing, the 
rains commencing at the same season and equally abundant, the same large proportion of 
hill tract to plain country, and high mountain ranges, supplying in each the distant sources 


of their larger streams. 


Asam, with its bordering districts, including from the meridian 90° 30’ of longitude 


on the west, to the heads of the sacred Brahmaputra on the east, and from the crest of 


* This evidence would carry greater weight were I at liberty to name my authority. I would not rest 
much, however, on what must necessarily be so vague as any person’s opinion of the comparative magnitude of 
rivers when formed without sufficient data. 


+ Limiting the sense of magnitude to the more legitimate one as applied to rivers, 


¢ It does not appear of much importance whether tlie extent drained be considered, or the actual lengths 
of the courses of the rivers, as it willbe found that these bear a near proportion to each other; forinstance, the 
Ganges, down to Allahabad, drains 7-9 square degrees ; the Jumna to the same point, drains 27-1 square degrees ; 
the proportion is 1 to 3:43. The sum of the lengths of the rivers forming the Ganges to Allahabad, is two thousand 
three hundred and fifty miles, and of the Jumna, ten thousand and seventy, which give the proportion 1 to 4:28, 
It is not pretended that these measures are accurate. They were made ov Cary’s large map, and another 
on a larger scale, would exhibit more water-courses. For the number of rivers introduced in a map, much must 
depend on the mode of survey, whether detailed or not; in this, probably, the central districts watered by the 
contributors to the Jumna have the advantage. 


o 


AG6 APPENDIX. 


? 


the Himalaya ranges,* (which generally deviate between the 28° and 29° parallels of 
latitude,) on the north to the line, (which can be traced without the hazard of much error) 
separating on the south the sources of the rivers contributing to the Brahmaputra within 
these limits, from those flowing in the opposite direction, is an extent of about 15:3 


square degrees. 


The Irawadi, according to my map, drains up to the City of Amerapura, 13°9 square 
degrees, excluding, of course, in this estimation, the whole tract whence the Kaynduayn 


draws its supplies. 


Then, were the Sanpo supposed to contribute to neither of these rivers, it would be 
fair to compare the Brahmaputra at Goalpara, with the Irawadi at Amerapura :—but 
who will venture to do this? Add, in imagination, the Sanpo to the Irawadi, and then 
by how large a quantity} ought the Irawadi at Amerapura, to exceed the Brahmaputra 
at Goalpara—but who of those who have seen the two rivers, shall we find willing to 
grant the possibility of such excess, or who will not indeed assert the reverse as the 


fact. 


We can easily estimate the quantity of water drawn by the Brahmaputra from the 
tract within the limits mentioned, since we know the entire discharge at Goalpara, and 
also the discharge of the Dihong, the Dibong, and the Brahmaputra, separately in the 
neighbourhood of Sadiya. 

In January 1828, the quantity of water discharged by the Brahmaputra 


at Goalpara, including the Bonash, was, per second, ...... ...»-Cubic feet, 1,46,188.+ 


* Thibet and the Sanpo altogether excluded. 


+ The quantity to be added is not so great as might without consideration be anticipated. It must be recol- 
lected how small a quantity of rain fallsin the elevated region of Thibet. We are informed that in parts of that 
country, neither rain nor snow are known to fall, and that some mountains, of the great elevation of thirteen 
thousand feet (seventeen thousand ?) are never covered with snow. : 


¢ An account has been given of the manner of taking this Section, and of computing the discharge. 


APPENDIX. 467 


Brought forward, asclehe 1,46,188. 
Captain BEDFORD gives the discharge of the Dihong, at the same season 
ofthe year, fifty-six thousand five hundred and sixty-four feet, but the small 
rivulet,-called the: Lalz; is hereincluded, say's: 6.3 .ci2s. Seis ale sade ol elelslas 56,000 


REMAIN coe ne Stes ale cele a's Cubic feet, 90,188 


Here then is proof, in an instance of the fact, that in a country (and climate) similar to 
Asam,* of the extent of 15°3\ square degrees, a river of such importance as one discharg- 


ing, when at the lowest ebb, ninety thousand cubic feet per second, may have its origin. 


RENNELL has stated the entire discharge of the Ganges, in the dry season, at eighty 
thousand cubic feet ; but he has perhaps overrated it since the quantity of water flowing 
past the City of Benares in April last, was found to be no more than sixteen thousand} or 


seventeen thousand feet per second. 


But the whole extent drained by the Irawadi, including its several contributors down 
to the head of the Delta, or to the point where it remains an undivided stream, is thirty- 
three square degrees: it follows that, without claiming a larger space for the origin of the 
Trawadi than what appears due to it from the result of my researches, the probability is 
in favor of its discharging in the vicinity of Prome, in the dry season, upwards of one lack 
and eighty thousand cubic feet per second, or that it is there larger by one-fourth than the 


Brahmaputra at Goalpara. 


T regret that I want data for continuing the comparison through the rainy season. 
The only fact that I can state, connected with a rise in the Brahmaputra, is, that on the 
2d May, 1825, when a considerable extent of its sands yet remained uncovered, it discharged 
three lacks and seventy-five thousand cubic feet per second, above the mouth of the Dtkho 
river, to which must be added (say) forty thousand feet, for the Bort Lohit, which sepa- 


rates from the main stream a few miles up the river. 


The objection has been made that the Sanpo, where itis lost in Thibet, is necessarily 


a very large river, and on the other hand, that the Dihong, where [last saw it within the 


* And the contiguous territories. 
+ For this information, I am indebted to the kindness of J. PRinsEp, Esq. 


A638 APPENDIX. 


mountains, is too small to be the channel of such a stream. The first part of this objec- 
tion has been answered in a foregoing note, but much more might be adduced to prove that 
a river having its rise in and flowing through that arid and elevated tract, must be very 
inferior in comparison with one draining a country with a moist climate ; but, indeed, the 
Sanpo, up to the ninety-seventh degree of longitude, drains a smaller space than the Ganges 
to Benares, the former being 33°8 degrees* and the latter 37-0 degrees, yet it is consider- 
ably larger. The second objection has also been met ina note toa former part of this paper. 
True, the Dihong was but one hundred yards} wide, yet the steep slope of the mountain’s 
sides induced an impression that the bed must possess immense depth: but pursue the 
question to calculation, and all appearance of difficulty vanishes. Suppose the discharge 
still fifty thousand feet per second, and the mean velocity of the current at that spot three 
miles per hour, the mean depth required to give that discharge is but thirty-seven feet— 
the mean depth inthe dry season at Goalpara, where the breadth is twelve hundred 
yards, is twenty-one feet, and the depth of the principal channel there thirty-three 
feet. And supposing the discharge the same, and the velocity no more than two miles 
an hour, the mean depth required is but fifty-five feet: also, I conceive, far within the 


bounds of possibility. 


It must not be forgotten, that to connect the Sanpo with the Irawadi, according to 
M. KLAPROTH’S view, not less than four hundred and fifty miles (by the most direct 
possible route) must be added to the course of the Sanpo, over and above what is 
necessary to connect it with the Dihong. This is not his only difficulty: in addition to 
those I have already stated; his second map still requires considerable alterations in 
longitude to bring in my Surveys, cramping still more the crowded streams, which, with 
most unnatural parallelism, crawl in nearer contiguity than is known in any other part of 


the world, through his map, between the sources of the Brahmaputra and China. 


Notice has already been taken, in an excellent article { on the subject, in the Oriental 


Quarterly Magazine, that M. KLAPROTH was entirely mistaken in supposing that TURNER 


“* Including from the highest ridge of the Himalaya to the thirty-first degree of latitude, sometimes a little 
more, M. Kiaprotit’s map would give it less space. 


+ The breadth is said to be greater further within the hills. I have seen a cane bridge, of eighty yards length, 
over the Brahmaputra. The Abors declare that the Dihong is always too wide to admit of a bridge being thrown over. 


t Memoir on the Course of the Great River of Thibcé. 


APPENDIX. 469 


did not take any astronomical observations for the position of Shigatze or Teshu Lombu, 
and of the consequent error which he has probably committed in altering the latitude of 
Lassa one degree*. The whole of the lower part of the Sanpo, from Lassa eastward, suffers 
a Bale alteration in his map, which has given room (in space) for the formation of a con- 
siderable river, called by M. KLAprRotH, Mon Chu, evidently the Om Chu of RENNELL, 
and our Subanshiri, though M. KLAPROTH now considers it to be our Dihong. This 
river has not, however, so much as six square degrees allotted to it; but if the course of 
the Sanpo be restored to its former parallel of latitude, and the Subanshiri introduced— 
no insignificant river, since it discharges, in the dry season, sixteen thousand feet per 
second—the space for the growth of the Dihong will be, in M. KLAPROTH’s map, most 


sadly curtailed—reduced, indeed, to nothing. 


I think that I have hinted at the probable cause of all the discussion which we have 
had on this subject in the early part of this Memoir. The Brahmaputra was described to 
us as a diminished stream, “little more than a hill torrent,” and it ‘“‘ seemed very improba- 
ble, that such a small body of water could run the distance it is represented or supposed 
to do.” The Dihong, in which alone we could look for a continuation of the Sanpo,+ was 
totally lost sight of,{ and long remained forgotten. 'Time was given to originate Theories,§ 
and to search for Geographical anecdotes amongst antiquated Chinese documents, and 
the delay which occurred in furnishing information from hence, (from the spot) allowed 


conjecture to grow into certainty. 


* The Lamas who were sent to survey Thibet, were mathematicians, instructed for the purpose: It is hardly 


~ possible that they can have erred one degree of latitude in their survey of the short distance between Lassa and 


Teshu Lombu, (about one hundred and fifty miles) and their position of the latter agrees closely with that given 
by Turner, from observation. I would not contend for their extreme accuracy, or even for an approximation to 
accuracy, excepting in the position of places actually in their route. They seem to have possessed very little 
judgment. 


+ This would have appeared from the first, had Lieutenant Buriron’s account of the discharge of the rivers 
been published. * 


+ It was never adverted to as a river of great importance, till a letter of mine to the Editor, appeared in the 
Government Gazette, about January 1826, 


§ Captain McLacnian’s “ Theory” appeared in the Edinburgh Philosophical Journal. 


470 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 
Wr 


CENSUS 


OF THE 


POPULATION OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 
By JAMES PRINSEP, Esa, Fr. zs, 


In the year 1800, a Census of the Population of this City was taken by 
ZULFICAR Aut, Kotwal, under the orders of the Resident, Mr. Drang, 
which was published as an Appendix in Lord Vauenria’s Travels in 
India. 


Benares was there stated to contain about thirty thousand houses and 
six hundred thousand inhabitants; but very little examination of the data 
upon which the latter assumption was made, would have been sufficient to 
prove its total inaccuracy. The houses were classed according to their 


height, and an assumed rate of population was assigned to each, thus— 


Brick Houses of 1 story were supposed to contain 15 persons. 


Ditto Ol ZV GICO eee a ee neg aes ee 20 
Ditto? /)40of Bditto 200), tL ee ae 25 
Ditto 2227: OL V4, CRtEO Owe tie ee ener dea 40 
Ditton 2a 20. of or dittor. eee OP ons SS IR 100 
Ditto eens Of GHAIECOT YO ye rere eae ae 150 


and the whole statement was of the same extravagant character. 


OF THE CITY OF BENARKES. 47) 


The Kotwal, doubtless, was interested in swelling the list of towns- 
people, whom it was his duty to keep in subordination; and Sfrau Sinu, 
Mr. Deane’s Minshi, who drew up the account, may have thought it: 
complimentary to his master to magnify the importance of the place 
under his rule; but it is difficult to forbear smiling at the ultra display of 
their zeal and diligence in the classification of ‘suspected persons’ in the 
town: Thus, after a catalogue of the trades and sects, we find inserted 


the following curious item : 


‘“¢ Badmash—Those who are ready to commit forgery, .... 40 houses. 


Ditto torgive:falsereyidence,) 0%) 2i)..0. ./sslae's 400 ditto. 

Dittoitoccommitstheft, ho iss aeru.dl di cuekd wes 200 ditto. 
Thangi, or those who employ thieves, ......... ail? .\,niseeoowoOnditto: 
Gamblers, axons aio. ciciaiy’ AONE) GEOG). ROR ES bmorten: 40 ditto. 
Persons who have been taken up for theft, .............. 150 
Persons who have been engaged in brawls, &c. .......... 100 
Persons who have a pugnacious disposition, .............. 400 


Persons without any profession, and therefore strongly i 
SINS DEEL ED, cao csuorcne len olshiolt 


When engaged in making a Map of the Town in 1822, I could hard- 
ly fail to entertain suspicions of Zuuricar’s vague estimate, and I would 
have attempted a more accurate enumeration had not apprehensions 
existed among the Civil Authorities that an enquiry of such a nature 
would be likely to lead to disturbance and dissatisfaction among the 
people. This opinion was grounded on the occurrences of more than 
one period, when an unpopular measure, on the part of the English 
Government, had given rise to disaffection, and even to open resistance in 
the Town ; and, indeed, as long as such erroneous ideas of the magnitude 
of the place prevailed, there was room for alarm at the slightest symptom 


of turbulence on the part of the populace. 


472 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


During the operations of the Committee of Improvement, founded by 
Governor General ApAm in 1823, a more constant intercourse with the 
Natives soon convinced me that there could be no difficulty whatever in 
obtaining the desired information, provided the real motives were declared, 
and any incipient alarms at once quieted by unreserved explanations. 
The classification of the mehalas and streets for the assessment of the 
Behri, a small mehala tax levied for the purpose of cleaning and 
repairing the street drains, afforded a convenient pretext for the com 
mencement of the Register, as the more direct prosecution of the object 
was interdicted, but all precautions of this nature were, in fact, unnecessa 
ry, and only tended to impede the progress and injure the arrangement 
of the matter, which it thus occupied two years to bring to completion. 
On other grounds, the City of Benares prevented facilities for the prose- 
cution of statistical enquiries, from its division into numerous mehalas or 
wards, under the protection of a police on the phdtekbandi system, so 
called from the phdteks or gates of each mehala, which were, in former 
days, regularly closed at night. The watchmen are well acquainted 
with every house within their beat, and can generally tell the names 
and circumstances of their various inmates: with the assistance of these 
men, who also pointed out the limits of the mehala, my enquiries were 
continued from house to house, either addressed to the householders 
themselves, or to servants and neighbours. The chwnars of the mehala 
having daily admittance to each house to remove dust and rubbish, 
were found to be useful auxiliaries in checking the estimates of population 


derived from other sources. 


In some mehalas, chiefly where the richer classes resided, more dif- 
ficulty was experienced in obtaining accurate returns than in others; but 
in general the results are worthy of confidence. I have frequently ques- 
tioned native visitors as to the number of inmates in their houses, and 


have been surprised at its close accordance with the Register. To 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 473 


ascertain however the degree to which it might be trusted, a few mehalas, 
in different parts of the town, were selected for a careful re-examination 
by myself, and the opportunity was taken to insert separate returns of 
the males and females of each family, and further to distinguish the lodg- 
ers from the proprietors. Into these points the Ldlas had not been per- 
mitted to enquire, on account of the delicacy of the natives, particularly 
the Muselmans, on the former subject. No reluctance, however, was 
shewn in affording to myself such additional information, except among 
Muselmans of rank, who sent me the details of their household in closed 


letters rather than declare them viva voce in the street. 


In the re-examination I found the houses in almost every case faith- 
fully described: the householders’ names were also correct, unless where 
death or sale had induced changes in the course of two years: the num- 
ber of inmates fluctuated a good deal, but not more than could be explain- 
ed from the continual change of guests and lodgers. To render the work 
complete, a Census of the Civil Station and the Cantonment of Secrole was 
afterwards added, as well as of sixteen villages in the vicinity which may be 


considered as immediately dependent upon the European establishment. 


The Register is in the Ndgart character, and has been deposited in 
the office of the Governor General’s Agent at Benares: a copy in the 
Devandégari character, is lodged in the Society’s Library. The materials 


are arranged in nine columns, in the following order : 


1. Number of the House. 

2. Name of Proprietor. 

3 and 4. Caste and profession of ditto. 

5, 6 and 7. Number and structure of Chouks. 
8. Height of the House in stories. 


9. Number of Inhabitants. 
AA 


474 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION | 


At the close of each mehala is given a summary or goshwara. As the 
mehalas are not arranged according to any system, a double index has 
been appended, for alphabetical reference and for the distinction of the 
Town divisions. A general abstract of the whole, in English, forms the 


record now submitted to the Society. 
I will now beg leave to recapitulate some of the results of the Census. 


1. The number of houses nearly corresponds with Zutricar Att’s 
statement, being nearly thirty thousand; but there must have been a 
considerable increase of buildings towards the south and west of the town 
since 1800; as has been observable within the last few years on the side 
of Secrole: we can hardly, therefore, allow that the dimensions of the 
town have remained stationary during the last thirty years, although 


seemingly borne out by the above coincidence. 


2. The gross population of the City may be stated at one hundred 
and eighty thousand souls; while Secrole and the vicinity contain 
twenty thousand, making a total of two lakhs; much beneath the for- 
mer estimate, but still amply sufficient to justify the title of a populous 
city; for Benares exceeds in population either Edinburgh or Bristol, and 


is twice as large as Rotterdam or Brussels. 


3. The average number of inmates to a house rather exceeds six ; being 
one-twelfth greater than the average rate for the Burdwan Zillah, according 
to the statistical report of Mr. (late the Hon’ble) W. B. Bayiey. It might 
have been expected, indeed, that the loftier houses of the City would affect 
the average more considerably, but there are circumstances which coun- 
teract such a tendency. In the first place, the term Chouk employed in the 
Register, does not express precisely a house, but rather a ‘‘ Court” or 


‘“‘ Quadrangle,” of a tenement capable of being separately occupied or 


OF THE CITY OF BENARKS. 475 


rented. Wherever space will allow it, Indian houses are built with an 
open court in the centre, towards which the apartments front on all sides. 
A house of any magnitude comprehends several such compartments, and 
is assessed according to the number of these, as separate houses, in the 
levy of the Behri, the Phdtekbandi, or any similar tax: the average 
inmates of a large house therefore, will be, properly speaking, some 
multiple of seven, the mean rate per chouk. Again, the lower stories of 
such houses are divided off into small shops, facing the street, which are 
tenanted, during the day only, by artisans and tradesmen : and further, the 
domestic servants of the upper classes, with very few exceptions, sleep at 
their own houses in the suburbs, and are included in the Register of those 
quarters, so that it often happens that the largest mansions are the most 
thinly peopled. This explanation is deemed necessary on account of the 
great discrepancy between the Kotwal’s estimate of the number of inmates 


in the larger class of houses and my own results. 


4. Ifthe seventeen mehalas of the second examination may be 
taken as a fair average for the whole town, the number of lodgers rather 
exceeds that of householders ; among the latter are included also those 
who hold parjoti tenures, paying ground rent to the Zemindar without 
any specific term of lease ; a system which is generally prevalent in the 


suburbs or kacha mehalas, such as Piri, Alipara, Assi, &c. 


5. The proportion of males and females appears to be very nearly 
on an equality both in the City and in Secrole: there is, however, a defi- 
ciency in the amount of female children, which is also observable in the 
Burdwan Tables. This may be partly owing to the system of early 
marriage, which causes the removal of girls from their parents’ houses at 
a tender age, and partly to the frequent inclusion of girls with boys 
in the general term “ larké,’ when they are spoken of by their rela- 


tions. 


A476 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


6. The proportion of children to adults, as might be expected, is 
much smaller in the City than in the villages around Secrole ; where the 
ratio of one to two and a quarter, is closely in accordance with Mr. Bayiey’s 
statements. 


The Register is capable of affording other information which I 
have not yet found leisure to extract. One of principal curiosity would 
be the relative number of Hindéi and Mohammedan inhabitants. The omis- 
sion, however, is of less consequence, because another distinct method of 
obtaining this branch of information was adopted, which, though not capa- 
ble of the same degree of accuracy, may be assumed as tolerably correct in 


relative numbers, while it forms a collateral check upon the Census itself. 


The Hindis are divided by the circumstances of their castes, and 
of such trades and professions as are of a similar exclusive character, 
into a number of distinct corporations, united among themselves under a 
headman, who is variously entitled, as Choudri, Kotwal, Mahant, Jatti, 
Dulpati, &c. Many of the Muselman trades are similarly constituted. 
Upon many occasions of festivity, the whole of a community is assembled 
together; at other times apportionate presents are obliged to be distribut- 
ed to every adult member of the clan. Lists of theirclansmen, therefore, 
are commonly to be met with among the choudris, to which access is 
easily obtainable. Of the different sects of Brahmans, who hold so 
conspicuous a place in the population of the Holy City, accurate catalogues 
are procurable from the Ddnddhyaksh, or almoners of native princes, or 
from the pundits and priests. Thus, a list of eighty-four different sects of 
Gijrati Brahmans was obtained from Ratanst Panpa, a respectable 
native, who had several times been employed in distributing largess for 
opulent visitors on their pilgrimage to Kasi. The number of individual 


members in these was afterwards ascertained from the leading man of 
each sect. 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. ATT 


Where there were no Choudris, as with the Kaeths, or Bhiihars, 
&e., I was obliged to have recourse to actual investigation throughout 
the mehalas in which they were known chiefly to reside. With the 
Jiulahas, or weavers, I took advantage of one or two large feasts given by 
principal weavers on the marriage of their children. 'The number entered 
for these and a few other classes, must be held only as approximations ; 
while on the contrary many of the items in the catalogue, where the autho- 
rity is given, are precise and accurate enumerations. I have, on this 
account, inserted the names of my informants, or the authority whereon 


each return is quoted. 


The population of Benares, according to this mode of reckoning, 
falls considerably short of the number given by the regular Census. By 
increasing each item about one-sixth, to cover omissions of children in the 
Choudris’ estimates,and unavoidable oversights in the list itself, it might have 
been easily made to coincide in amount, but it is more satisfactory in its 
present form, as pointing out the limits of error. The descriptive nomen- 
clature of the principal persons, Miselman, Hindi, Mehéjan, Pandit, and 
Fakir, which accompanied the map of Benares presented to the Society 
in 1822, will be found of use in explanation of the present list. In the 
catalogue of Hindus, it may be remarked, there is no separate entry for 
“ Gentlemen” as with the Miselmans. The reason of this is that every 
Hindi, of whatever rank he be, belongs to a particular caste. Thus the 
Rajah of Benares is included in the Bhiihdr caste, and the tables of 
Brahmans, Kshetris, Vatsyas and Sanyasi Fakirs (or Gosains) comprise 


persons of all trades and professions. 


The Miselmans apparently form but one-fifth of the population, 
and are not more numerous than the Brahmans alone; very few of 
them reside within the City, properly so called, which is almost exclusively 
Hindi. 

B 4 


478 . CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


On occasions of eclipses, religious festivals and Mélas, Benares is 
well known to be crowded with an influx of pilgrims, not only from the 
neighbourhood, but from every part of India. I once endeavoured to 
make an estimate of their numbers, and as the subject is connected with 
my present enquiry, I here introduce the substance of a memorandum 
on the subject, inserted in the proceedings of the Committee of Improve- 


ments at the time. 


‘“‘ For three days and nights previous to the Eclipse of the 21st May 
1826, Chaprasis and Bearers were stationed, in pairs, at the five principal 
approaches to the City, for the purpose of counting the passengers by 
means of small pebbles, which they threw into a bag as the people 
passed. The Ferry people had also directions to supply returns, but 
it is feared that they may have purposely underrated the number of per- 


sons crossing from the south of the river. The results were as follows : 


19th May. 20th May. 2ist May. Total. 
At Nadesvar or Lakhipir bridge, .. 336 1,250 11,800 13,386 
Béni Ram Pandit’s garden, .... 715 1,250 9,695 11,660 
Well north of Jagaiganj, ...... 151 457 4,550 ~—5, 158 
Ousan Ganj, near the Thaneh, .. 75 675 2,971 3,721 
Hlanumdén Phatek, ...... Te EB EON 450 3,244 3,905 


Total, without counting people of the town and vicinity, 37,830 


Ferry at Raj Ghat during three days, me ane 
ting common passengers, wee ae 


Ditto Rajmandil and Gai Ghat, ....  -..... 400 
Ditto Kyli Ghat, 20th May, .......0 ...+.. 69 
Ditto at Médnmandil, Sivila, Ram Tiong ina 

SECs SAV. Hey acs toca ete cha ne: whic Cie : 

2,475 

Add for all the other approaches to the Town, say, ...... 15,000 


Total strangers at the Eclipse, 21st May, 1826, about .. 55,000 


OF THE CITY OF BENARKES. — 479 


It should be remarked that the concourse at this eclipse was very 
small, and by no means to be compared with that of November 1825, 


when forty or fifty lives were lost in the press of the bathers on the Ghats.” 


Hence it is not unreasonable to conclude, that the accession to the 
population on such occasions sometimes even surpasses a hundred thousand 


persons. 


The gross amount of the principal articles of food consumed, 
affords a tolerable method of computing or checking the comparative 
magnitude of places inhabited by similar races of men; and if these data 
could be ascertained with sufficient accuracy, the absolute population 


might even be calculated therefrom. 


Grain would appear to be the best test to employ in such an estimate, 
being the most bulky, as it is the most universal article of food ; but since 
it is not subject toa Town Duty at Benares, the quantity annually im- 


ported cannot be easily ascertained. 


Salt is nearly of equally general consumption, although on a com- 
paratively minute scale. As far as my own enquiries furnish data,” one- 
ninth of a maund per man per annum, is a fair average consumption ; 
and this rate, upon a population of one lac and eighty thousand, would 
yield an annual total of twenty thousand maunds; now this is in close 
accordance with the Custom House Returns, allowing a fraction for salt 


smuggled into the Town out of the regular channels. 


Upon other articles, such as ghi, tobacco, &c. less reliance can be 


placed, because they must be esteemed luxuries rather than necessaries. 


* Among the labouring classes, I found the rate per man, three seers; which is, according to 
themselves, a minimum. Sipahis, and servants consume from four to six seers: Mahajans gave 
me an average of nine or ten seers; with the richer classes it may be double or treble this amount 
from wastage, and some allowance must be made for cattle and other sources of consumption. I 
have assumed four and a half seers as the mean. 


480 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


I have, however, appended a table of several, obtained from the Custom 
House, which may prove useful in making comparisons with other Towns. 
IT am indebted to Mr. R. N. Hamitron, Magistrate of Benares, also, 
for a further table of the price of different varieties of grain for a period of 


twenty-one years inclusive. 


One of the chief utilities of a correct Census is, that it introduces a 
right understanding as to what should be the produce of any tax levied 
upon the food, the houses, or the inhabitants of a Town. I remember once 
hearing a public functionary upbraided for laxity of diligence, because 
the consumption of ¢ft in the City of Benares fell so far short of what 


might have been expected upon a population of six hundred thousand souls ! 


The following is a Summary of the results furnished by the present 


Census: 
In the City. In Secrole and the vicinity. 
11876 in Native Houses. 
Number of Inhabitants, .............. 181482 ; 7092 § in European ditto, 
~. including Cantonments. 
Number of Houses or Chouks, ......++. 30205 ; aa Enelih Benen a 
Mehalas as divided in the Census, .... 369 21 
Paka Houses (of Brick and Stone), .... 11825 73 
Kacha Houses (of Mud), ..........0005 16552 2639 
Kacha-Paka Houses (mixed), .......- 2328 88 
Houses of One Story in height, ........ 12590 2444 
Two Stories ditto, OR a ace 11838 282 
Three Aitto, ii. . 2996 2 
Four GUGEO ie aie alse 1019 7) 
Five ditto? st.G..63 200 0 
Six Gittos saves. . 7 t) 
ou ' Seven ittos els yy sep 1 t) 
uins of Houses, or spaces marked out P 
for building, ... ......5.. : EAT OhE: dears ee Gd 
Gardens, TRGLOS, GCs. 5p yee RTs tee ticle 174 
Sivalas, or HindooTemples, ........+. 1000 vA 
Mesjids, or Muselman Mosques, ...... 333 5 
Proportion of original census to re- 8932 to 8814 
EXAmMiNnation so wLj Rs Se a oe deve: a Siecsie 5 
Proportion of Proprietors to Lodgers in - 
seventeen Mehalas, and in the Reeds eet Me 778 10.1684 
Proportion of Males and Females. 
Men, ..... 3 3424 3354 
Women, .. 3564 3151 
Boys; 02's) 1085 1698 
Girls}. .a% TAL 1234 
Proportion of Adults to Children. 
Adults, .... 6988 ° 6505) "= 
Children, .. 1726§ 2 2982 3 f 
Average ratio of Inhabitants in each 6 6 a 
Chouk*asaboved? 22. 82702 BOLO, S288, i 
Ditto for the Paka Houses, srederveldieieiere q 
Ditto for the Macha Houses, .......00% 43 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 


TABLE I. 


481 


Alphabetical List of Mehalas in the City of Benares, with the Number of Houses, 


Inhabitants, &c. taken from the Devanagari Register, to which reference is given. 


ari 


Cu] 


, 


Page of Devan 
Register 


—————————— eS 


Name of the Mehala, Sarak, Gali, 
Katra, Serai, Bazar, Ghat, or 
other Division in the Census. 


Abkari hata, 
Adivisveswar, : ae 
Adampura, a ae 
Agaganj mehala, 
sarak, 
Agast kind, the 
Ahila Bai brahmpuri, 
Ajaib Sinh ka bagh,.. 
Alipura, ote 
Alemputra, 
Ambiya mandei, 
Ami Chand gali, 
Ama Mihr gall, 
Anaj ki mundei, iW 
Arhai Kangura Mesjid, 
As-bhyro, ve 
Atmabireswar, 
Arab ki Mesjid, 
Auriptra, 
Aurangabad mehala, 
serai,.. 
sarak,.. 
Ausdnganj bazar, .- 
Ausanganj Siunarain’s house ,-- 
Awedh, : 
Azizan mundei, 


B. 


Babarseid mehala, 
Badshah ganj, she 
Bahilia tola, Hs 
Bakharabad, 
Balte-bir, 65 
Balta, a, 
Balam Das bagh, 
Bandholal pura, 
Bandht, é 
Bara dev, of, ite 
Baryar Sinh ki bagh, .. 
sarak,.. 
Bengali tola, 
Bibi hatia, —.. 
Behara Mal katra, 
Bhat mehala, 
Bhélipur, ae 
Bhikhar) Das, 


Number of Inha- 
bitants. 


Chouks, or 


HeicutT. 


Houses. 

Sl S 
ane | 2h 
o -| oO =] WD 
Mya ez, | oO, e 
30 0} 31 d 1 
4} 43; 15] 62] 11) 36 
60; 16] 11] 87} 40) 34 

162] 1| 3] 166] 85) 77 
72| 7] 6} 85) 55) 88 
59/234] 1) 294) 51] 95 
2} 22) 1) 25) 1) 8 
77| 3] 8] 88) 46] 39 
161| 4] 3] 168) 97) 45 
81] 14] 31} 126] 34) 78 
116] 19} 22] 157] 58} 75 
oO} 5; Oo} 65) OF 1 
8} 121 3}- 23) 11{ 11 
Sil 5) 1) 57) 89) 13 
2} 8| 14] G64) 21] 37 
OQ} 81) 1, 82) 5} 27 
(| 39} Of 89) 2) 7 
LO} 42} oa 13l yOt 22 
59) 3, 5) 67) 22) 41 
108] 40) 3} 151) 75) 68 
36] 45] 0} 81) 64] 12 
180] 80} 9} 269)/123/127 
86] 21] 81] 188/172) 11 
1] 21} 47] 69) 69) 0 
297] 48) 25] 370)150]205 
a : 5} 109) 75} 29 
1] 25 i 26/ 1) 6 
366! 54| 21] 448/210/209 
45) 1 i 46] 27) 11 
21 21 8! 72) 41) 27 
144] 12] 19} 175] 68) 88 
9} 1) 1] 11} 9! 2 
15] 5} 2} 22) 19) 2 
33! 0} 0] 33) 32) 0 
130] 4] 6] 140] 26! 10 
131] 4; 6) 141] 73! 58 
29) 2)" 2) 738//26))) 17 
92; 1] 1| 94] 70) 23 
8]157; 0} 165] 3] 57 
0; 25} 0} 25) 0) 4 
13] 37] 8; 581 8} 35 
2} 47] 0) 49) 1) 10 
117] 11] 0) 128/109) 11 
4| 59] 0} 63 Ol 2 


Eas 
[S) — 
o| 
Ble 
Be; & 
0 | 
10 ] 
il 0 
oO; O 
ol 0 
97: 27 
15, 2 
0] 0 
i] 0 
Ol O 
3( 0 
4) 0 
0; O 
Ol Oo 
1 0 
29] 16 
ol 5 
ol 0 
ol o 
2] 0 
oO] oO 
6] 0 
o| 5 
O| oO 
4} 0 
ol o 


—_ 


= 2 


_ _ 
wonmnocontoocoocooooccocon 


to 


| Five Ditto. 


Saree! 


ooocecsecorocoooseososoounscoococoso 


eS 


GKorporoooocooece|\coow 


| Six Ditto. 


ooooece|ecsecece|cocococseceosoocos 


qoeocoeocecooceoecosoese 


oo —_— 


— 


— 
Seocoowowrownnnres 


| Ruins. 


NONE REP WORDS = 


ROW DOK KCOSCKK OMNNDAS 


| Tanks and Gardens. 


Scowowoonsocoocso 


wWooorcorococor 


esoeocecececooo=-nwnouno 


_S TT —crr rr 


| Shiwalas. 
| Mesjids: 


— 
Sor ooowoerSehDO 


_ 
SCreoorwooocoeounnen 


ooono 


eoworccocreroococs 


ee 


eRe ———— 


el il ea SO OR 


SOON SCKFSCSOOROOCCWONW= 


A892 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 
iS “ a 
S 3 Houses. HEIGHT 2 
§ c g 
a4 Name or MEHALA. Se 31 6| £] 8] ¢ ¢ Sly 
oa mS eh eee fe = We hie alo 
52 S° 1 sf Sls] 1 8) 3] el 5] S13] al el els 
op I oye a! Sy el o| Sis) ot Cl Se em 
is] 5 cS CF ses) lo} = EE) co) | AS = C—| o 
ai Z MPea;ela | CO, ae, e) &| & al elaeinl S 
131 | Bhulotan, ; a 706 | .58] 121 6 76, 47] 25} O; Oo! Of OF 2, 0, 2; O 
17 | Bhatahi Imli bouli, $8 S18 |/| 2] 10,3) Sts aaol*.2 0| o| Of] 1]. 1; Of} 0 
190 | Bhadahun, .- | 698 | 99] 16] 12) 127] 85] 28) 0] 0, 0} O} 6 0| 1] 12 
157 | Bhadyni,_ .. .. | 8885 [610 64) 97] 7711244)480; 14 07 Of O; 16) 4) 12; 1 
48 | Bhandari gali, ate 274. 3} 29} oO] 321 5] 20; 71. o;} OF O| oO} Of OO} O 
21 | Bhandariya gali, be 60 | 2] 6 Oo 8} O}; 4} 2] oF Of; OF 2) Of; O| O 
128 | Bharat Duaji khas, .. | 3886 | 48} 9] 15; 72] 37] 25} 3) Oo} OF O| 6] oO} 1] O 
189 .. | 204 | 16) 11] 6] 33] 13} 15; 1] of Of O} -4} oF O] oO 
.. | 263 | 38] 17] 13] 68] 23) 27; 2! of} O| O} 14) Of 1p 1 
24 | Bhyronath khas, .. | 897 | 1! 83) oO} 84 3] 39] 29) 4! 1; OF of of 8| oO 
23 .. | 315! 1) 48]. O} 49] 0} 27] 19} of O} O} Of oO} O] 1 
26 sy (ou883s| 1Ol063)-10), 68) 2], 2) 25) 20 Ul sO)” OO hernia 
22 | Bindraban Jani, .. | 215 | 4] 30) Of] 34] 0} Oo} 20] 10) Of O} 4) of oO} O 
39 | Birju Sah gali, «. y 1841 (0). OF JOh-. 9] OO} Of 4). 2}, 2 Al Of Ok Olao 
108 | Buchai tola, se [ud 475! 18! 36) 417 46h 4! Lol 17) ath Oly OlicSlautlh EO 
40 | Bula nala, .. | 1429 | 54/110] 23} 187] 45] 56} 39] 10] 4] 0} 29] oO} 2) 2 
169 | Bridhkal kta khas, uA .. | 272 | 50] 5) 5) Go} 25} 26) of oO} Oo} OF] 4] 2) OF 3 
sarak, ae 229 | 21) 20) 15! 56} 16! 31]; Of OF of Of 2] 1) 5) 1 
115 | Brahmnil, .. | 815 | 6/139; 1] 146] 10] 48) 61] 4) of ©} 2) 0; 211 0 
C 
31 | Champa Said, i 31.| (Oh AOL. 7h ell 4] (B.- O} 10) Oly OhwOlanolnet 
38 | Chandinai gali, 56al JO) tal Oheen7 || Olmisn, Bien 0 0} of 0} O| 0 
39 khas, . |. 415 | 1] 47, of. 48] 0| 12] 17/14) 1! 0} 2] oO} 21.0 
95 | Chandipura .. | 191 | 47} 10] 8] 65} 22/ 31] of of of 0, 8| 0, Of 8 
44 | Chaparia katra, 28 | 1{ 24] 6} 25] 20] 1) 3] If of 0; of Oo}: Oo} Oo 
162 | Chatishasti ghat, 215 | 2) 39! of 41] 2] 8} 13] Of of O} of Oo} 18] oO 
19 | Chaukhambha, 312 | 9 50} o} 50] 1 8| 13] 23] 4{ O] o| Oo} 1] 0 
151 | Chét ganj gola, 264 | 58] 15} 9] 82] 41| 40, oO] of of oO}. of 1) of Oo 
148 sarak, 164 | 42) 1] o| 4sl 32! 10] of of oF Of 1) O} O| 0 
57 | Chitanpura khas, §20 ;153) 29) 20) 202] 51/128} 3, Ol o} of 12] 2) 0 6 
89 sarak, 188 | 29} 4) 8! 41] 11] 30) Of of of oO} of Oo} 0} 4 
11 | Chohra (Ausang ganj), 291 | 97! 2 3] 63] 36; 22] 1] Of Oo] O} 3] 0} O| O 
32 | Chouk (53 Sirkari shops), 187 | 9 85] Oo} 85} 0} 6 23} Of of OF of O| O| 8 
215 | Chamroti (Secrole), .. 1159 }282] 0} 3} 235/205} 22] 0] 0] oO} Oo; 7} Of Oo] 1 
222 | Cantonments, : 1 3195 | 17] 111 6} 34! OF of Of OF} of Of of} Of 0} 0 
D 
22 | Dad& chouk, 219} 1) 30] oO} 31] 3] 17) 8} 21 of of 1] Of O| o 
52 | Dal ki mandei, 749 | 9! g6} 6] 102] 16] 46] 39) 1] of oj; Oo] Of O| Oo 
144 Dalépean, 85, 2] 2} 2} 6 2 4} of of of} of of Of Of Oo 
144 | Dandi (Hanuman ) Ghat, 268 | 18) 34] 13] 65] 29] 31] 1! oF 0} oO} 2f Of 2] 0 
134 | Dasa4swamedh khas, 294 | 9 35) 2) 46] 11] 27] 2] Of of Oo} Of OF 6 oO 
122 sarak, 358 | 20) 41] 15} 76] 241 35! 10] oO} of of} of Of 7] Oo 
3 | Daranagar khas, 884 | 69) 58/ 42] 169] 61] 78] 5] 22} of o| oOo] OF Oo] 38 
4 sarak, 634 | 68) 29) 291 119] 60] 41) 4| 0] of Oj 11] Of 3} 0 
171 | Dénanath gola, 380 | 241 64] 31] 119] 37] 72) 2) 2) o; oO; Gl Oo] oO} o 
195 | Deonathpura bara, . | 465 | 13} 59} 4] 76] 16] 33] 15} 1] Oo] of. Oo] Of 10} 1 
195 chhota, .. | 144 | 101 10}, 1] 21) 2] 16] 1] oO} Oo]. of 2] Of. Of Oo 
200 gali, .. | 202 | 23) 6f oO} 29) 71 18! 4/ oO] oOo} oO} O} Of O} Oo 
98 | Dhanipira, * 315 | 73} 4! O} 77] 57] 35 OF 0} OF O} 8 °| 0} 2 
167 | Dhanésra, : 93.) 141. 2) Of. 18] 11[ & 0! 0! Oly, Ol s3hi201 40] ¢O 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 483 


& yy we 
3 Q at 
= E Houses. HEIGHT. 2 
Ps o 
s 2 eg TUS Pecaliveal ie 0 
As Name or MEHALA. o5 ep] S| = Si Sih he 
Co ae) : of SI mill seli'se a, S| 4 
Sie 2 a] .| s| = | al Al of Fla] sl] s| el/ es! 
g S/ s| co] @ CH Chi So 2) Sy BL ce 
a 5 | sla] s] 8] 2! S| S| 2] x] 5) &| 2| s 
Ay Zz Mia) Sle l}olal al alk! al el e| nls 
116 | Dharmkip, \ 121 2} 25] 0 27; oO} G! 10] O | oO; 2) 0). 9) 0 
102 | Digia, RE 120 | 18} 1] 3] 22] 10; 8] O} oO} oF OF}. 2) 2) OF O 
116 | Dir Mal gali, Je 177,| 0} 25] 1) 26] 1) 11) 11} 2} of Of} OF OF 1) O 
96 | Dosiptra, Rie i 383 | 79] 17] 2] 98] 28] 52] Of; oO} oO} O| 4 7 OF 7 
84 | Douriabir, : 780 '187| 9] 1] 197/157] 17} 1] Oo} Oo} Oo} 16) 1; 5) O 
25 | Digdh Binaik, Ms cee hoe, (edeser ly wi 22l2| OP L2S}) 04) |B SOs 48ii)/'7/ ON MNNOL? | The %0 
167 | Duli garha, Had .. | 174 | 26] 5} 9) 40) 7} 32 o| of o| of 1] Oo} Of oO 
138 Darga kand, ue .. | 898 | 94] 34] 3] 131] 72] 22! 0} OF Of Oo} 10) 19) 7 1 
212 | Déthara (Secrole,) Le .. | 219 | 48] 1) 4] 53] 41] 7/ Of oO} of oO} 4) Of OF 1 
E 
123 | Ehia Ber (Ramapura, ) 748 | 17| 92} 8] 117) 7} 39] 43] 9} of 1] 3} 2) 14) 1 
162 | Ehia Ber ( Dasdswamédh, ) 161 | 0} 26) 1 2 1] 6] 10) 4| oO} OF OF OF 6 O 
F 
AOMMBCridiSelds yi" | eile ese 228 | 65} 1) 0} 66) 50] 11] O} OF O}| OF 4) OF OF 1 
: 
TOO Gai phate}. Js..! A 925 | 86] 94] 26) 206] 60]103) 18! 1] Oo; 0; 17] JT] 3] 3 
142 | Gambhir Sinh Bara, 504 )120| 6] 5| 131] 73) 39! Oo} 6] Oo} Of. 19] O} OF O 
23 | Ganésh chameria, , 344 1] go} Of 81} Oo; 6) 56] 16} 1} Of; 1) OF} 1) 0 
21 | Ganésh gali, nes 44 Oo; 8} O 8} 1] 6) 1) O} OF O| O} OF 3) O 
199 | Ganésh mehala, We? 1231 | 26] 34] 7] 167| 19} 97) 29} Of oO} O; 4| O} 17) 1 
26 | Ganésh diksit, be 351 | 0} 54] Ol 54| Oo} 1) 25) 271 11 Of; Of O] OF O 
161 | Ganga mehal, _.......... .. | 163 | 19] 17] 4] 40} 2] 26) 5, O}| O} OF 3} O| 4) 0 
SonlpGarwasi tolas | | 2.50.2 .. | 1857 | 114183] 3] 197] 10] 79) 71] 17} oO; O| 4] OO} 16; 1 
24) \"Ghasitolas )) i005 02 .. | 423] 1) 47] of 48] of} 1] 18] 24, 4) Of; 1) OF O| O 
192 | Ghasiara tola, ...... 384 | 731 7] 10| 90] 58] 17] 1) Of Oo} of 12] Oo} oF 2 
137 | Ditto (Ramaptra, ) ; 342 |106} 0! 6} 106) 84) 1) O} O; O} O} 19! 2! O} O 
20 | Ghats (Assi to Berna,) 887 | 58)455}_ 1! 514] 69} 42} 18] 2} oO! ol 12] 0/370) 1 
176 | Ghihata,  -...... 1144 {140| 32] 18] 190/119! 61| 4) 0} oO] Oo} 3} 3) Oo} O 
olviGogharana, | 9) Jol... 147 4| 11} 0} 15) 7) S| 38) OF} OF 60]. 6OY .O; OY 0 
123 | Gobindpiara (bara,) 795 | 24] 76] 1] 101] 20] 69} 8] O} O} Of 3} OF OF 1 
30 ch,hota, .... 247 | 3] 59} ©] 62] 8} 25) 22] 1] oO} Of 1] OF 3] O 
31 Sarak se 332°] 1) 57|- oO} 58) 23) 24! zl Oo} Oo} of 2) Ola 
29 | Gobind Das katra, . 272 | 18] 32| 31 53/ 19] 29| of o}| 0, oF 4! 1] Oo} Oo 
25 | Gobind Naik mehala, 691 | 0} GI] Of 61; 1, 2! 17) 29) 12) OF OF OF OF O 
118 | Gobardhen serai, 2199 1313] 17) 54] 384/184/171) 4) O| O} O; 22) 2) J) O 
152 sarak, 289 | 48] 12} 9] 69] 33] 29] 4] 0} 0] OF 2] J] O| O 
S/O Golajealt’). Hf) i.) f2 649 | 0] 48] oO] 48] oO} 2] 19] 25} 2} Of; OF O}] O| O 
37 | Gopal Das Sah, 281 | ©! 44! o| 44| 1] 3] 13; 19] 7], 1). 0] OF OF O 
102; Gopal pura, _........ 171 | 30| 5! 5| 40] 27] 10} oO} O| oO; OF 63] OF} O} O 
85 | Gouri ganj, Seas 822 |192| 1| 4] 197/126] 45) oO] oO] 0} Oo} 24) Oo} 2] 0 
3 | Gouri Ganesh, ‘ i | 1026 | 92) 31) 23] 146) 72] 63] 2] O}] O| oO] 6) O} 3} O 
27 | Gual Das Sah, By .. | 1052 | 3/148] 1] 152) 2] 28) 45] 50] 20; 2] 4| Oo} 11 0 
106 | Gular talé, 4: .. | 372 | 43] 32! 16] 91] 29) 51) 6] 0) 0} Of 10) 0} oO} 1 
125 | Gulzar Mehal, qo iM 159 | 19) 16) 3! 388} 8] 25; 1) Of OF OL 3} O} OF} Ff 
58 | Gyan Bapi, Ac 89 HEU. DR 20)) 2) 6-7 Ol LO MOl* 0} °O} Shree 
207 | Ganga Dher Pura, (Secrole,) NG 232 | 44) O| 3] 47) 41) 5} O}; OF} OF} OF; 1] O} O} OO 
213 | Grant Bazar, Hab ie 434 | 91) O| 3] 94] 77| 14) O| OF O| OF 3 OF OF] O 


484 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


dgari 


r 


Name oF MEHALA. 


Page of Devan 
Register. 


| 


H 


77 | Haji Das mehala, 
150 | Habibpura khas, 


150 sarak, 
180 | Hankar tola, 

54.) Hakak tola, © ...... 
113 ; Hanuman ganj west, 
113 § east, 
114 sarak, 


114 | Hanuman phatek, 
135 | Hanuman pura, 


167 | Hanstirath khas, ae ie 
sarak, 

130 | Har,ha khas, 

129 sarak, 


189 | Hara bagh, 
143 | Hat,hi khaneh, (Princes, ) 
107 | Himet Behadur gali, 
143 | Hingua, 
154 Hoseinpura, 

50 | Houz katora khés, 

49 J sarak, 

Hyder ganj, 

101 | Hyder Ali hata, 

10 | Hynstalé, 


208 | Hugal ganj (Secrole), be 


I 


219 | Impur, : 
104 | Iswargangi khas, 
103 sarak, 


104 | Jagéswar, 
119 | Jagjéwanpura, 
66 | Jagat ganj, 


Jelalipura, ee eee 


15 | Jelalud-dinpura, 


198 | Jangam bari, ale ae 


11 | Jynpura, 
68 | Jytpura, 
20 | Jytanber, 


K 


191 | Kasim Ali Khan pate os 


’ 57 | Kazi ki mandei, 
126 | Kazi ka darwaza, 
66 Kazi ki gali, 
172 Kazipura, (Shékh Salim ) 


fan 


Number of Inhabi- 
tants 


HOoUusEs. 

a 

_ 
. . 2 
Sl tet 1S e 
Tol a4] x e 
CS clo = 
Mm) a) = ° 


51]. 43 
57| 39 
30 i 
57| 21 


—— 


— 


ANS=—-hWad 
& 
ee 
= 


0} 14; O; 14) 0 


20) 114] 40 
18} 114) 49 
6; 39) 10 
13] 91} 57 


HeIcut. 
s| =| € 
Sl colo 
co] S| 5s 
er] ° 
Sle] & 
| 

8} 4). 1 
Stil al 0 
25} o| 0 
78| g| O 
35, 5! 0 
9} of; O 
271 o| 0 
3} oO; O 
13] o| © 
6} o| O 
HH vaca eee) 
291. 510 
s9| 2} 0 
42] J0} 9 
133] 5] 0 
144 ol OG 
5}. 3] 20 
44| go] 0 
50| o| 0 
89} 15} 3 
37) 23) 2 
11} 0! O 
6] Oo] 0 
26 oO] Oo 
5} oO] 0 
0] o| oO 
34] O| oO 
26] o| oO 
23] O| oO 
52} ol Oo 
43! 71 0 
22; oO! O 
32] o| 0 
61} 6) oO 
24; Gl O 
91 oO] Oo 
39] 33] 2 
9} 5) 0 
64; 9] 0 
38 li; 0 
24 1 0 
31| 2] 0 


! Five ditto. 
| Six ditto. 


eocoocoecoocsoeoocococeccocece sco 


—K——) 


ee eee eee 


woocececse 


oocoo-s6 


eooccececoce|cocece|ce|ecece|cse 
iS) 


ARRwWeeheH 


ooo 
aw > 


Qernanenco 


eoeoocooocoeces 


eoeco 
— 


| Tanks and Gardens 


eonmococo-woccocoocoroooeeseoqooe=S& 


oro 


— 


Cwrown 


once 


| Shiwalas. 


oo-ooe 


| Mesjids. 


ecogcgownwno-oo-onmnmowoooocoor-ocses 


ea 


=—OoO 


Oooonscooo~ 


ae 


KHwRPOeFK NK oCoonwooooooorROCOcoeS 


—K-SWonvrH nue oso 


oor eoo 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 485 
SS 3 Houses. Heicut 3 |, 
3 | ue) 
53 < § 
& < Ge & 5 o 
Sect Name oF MEHALA. oe cele SMa nf Stes | 
we © mS I Ss] Sls} 8) S18 a} S! wi 
© pa 3 & :| 3c aes | D S o oc s = wn nm 3S aS) 
Sp rol aim Seivol o| 21 5| ©| 21-2] a) 2) im 
a =| Sees on fen Balls | oy 2 a Sg | cay © 
Qy Z Mat ele |} Ola] el a] | a] eM) a wo] | 
16 | Kazipura, ( Alipura ) | 400 {114! 5) OF 119) 71! 32] OF OF Ot OF 6] 8& OF 2 
173 | Kazipura, ierone fs 465 | 33) 561 2) 91} 34) 46} 8} oF O] OF 1) OF OF 2 
219 | Kazipura, hehe of 135 | 37) O; O} 37) 37] OF OF} OF OF; OF OF OF 60} 60 
Kileh kohna, (vide Purani kot) | 
181 ; Kali mehal, do ais 167 | 31} 2]; 1] 34} 23) 10) Of; OF O} O} 1] OO}; O; O 
117 | Kalika gali, | 162 QO} 54) O] 54) 2) 25] 19] 2] 0, Of; 2 OF 4) O 
61 | Kameswar, 215 | 25, 8) 6; 389! 9, 25] O OF O} OF S| OF OF O 
134 | Kashmiri ganj, 5 748 |168] 0; 0} 168/136] 26| 0} Of Oo] Oo} 5} 1) OF Oo 
54 | Kasipura, AyD Ve ae 522 | 18] 56] 7) 81} 29] 48) 3) OF} OF OF; OF OF OF 21 
200 | Kasiram Patak, .... cee | 100 Oo} 11) of; 11} 8} 3] Of} 60} 6OF 60} 60} d OF OF OO 
162 | Kéwalgiria, Sotd'o 0 148 0} 32) of 32} O; 5} 24; 1] OF O| oO}; OF 2 O 
14 | Khajapura, niet 255 | 74, 5) 4) 83} 45] 26] O} O} OF O] 10f O| OF 2 
163 | Khalispura, ira S98 | 1}|116} 3) 120) 2] 47] 61] 5] Oo; OF oF OF 3) 2 
107 | Khirki derwazeh, .... 165 | 12) 33; 2) 47; 6] 18] 13} 2| OF O} Z| Oo} 1} O 
87 | Khoéjwa serai, As ots 736 1164) 7} 2} 173/129} 38} O} O}| Of; O; 3) 1} 2) O 
38 | Khadéru mal, svete -. | 136 | 0) 13) o| 18) Of; OF 2} 10} 1] OF Of O| OF O 
107 | Koila bazar, Uta wi 191 } 18] 20) 72) 50} 9} 33) 5} Of} O} OF 3) O| O} O 
55 | Kundigar tola, : -- | 285]; O! 55} of 55) 8! 35! 10) Tt oO; Of of 0, OF 2 
39 | Kunj galikhas, ..... ae 61 0} 22! of] 22) 2] 5} 1l} 3) OF OF Oo} Of; Of Oo 
32 phatekbaher aie 36 O} 51} of} Sl] 27] 29) 3) 2) Of; OF oF} OF} Of} O 
33 chakla, ole 47 0} 7] Oo 7| 4} 3} 0; OF Of OF of OF} Of O 
58 | Kutbar Seid, sievels eo | 149 | 24) 3) 5) 382] 17] 13) 0} OF OF OF Oo} Of} oO}. 2 
169 | Kutwa, tiekehs te 335 | 63) 91 17) 82] 17] 16} 0; O}; OF of} 12) O| Of 4 
48 | Kotwalpura, vials 6 whe 692 | 15, 77} 1) 93} 23) 46; 22; 0; O;| OF oO} OF 2) O 
8 | Kachi bagh, mieieds +» | 646 |150} 2; QO} 152! 56! 88} OF OF O; Oo} 7 0 0 L 
44 | Kachouri gali, .... by 112 | J) 12) of] 13] 1). 2} 5} 5} OF OF oF OF} OF O 
70 | Kabir Choura khas, A 916 |117| 9) 1p] 187] 69) 64) O} OF OF; OF; 4] of] Of o 
69 sarak, o. 372 | 388] 6} 14) 58} 25} 32) OF OF; OF OF; of Oo] oO} 2 
82 | Kamaksha, Sout -» | 1023 |147) 32] 5! 184/147) 23) 4! O; OF Of 1) O} 9! O 
97 | Kamalpura, dose -- | 255 | 52) 5} 6} 63) 20) 38; 0} 0) OF oO} 3) J] Of 1 
11 | Kaman garha, sorts 140 | 34) 2] 7] 43) 13) 18} O; O} oO; oO} 3)- 1) of 8 
12 sarak, sievehe le 225 7M Ol OB H:71) 58}. Sh SO] O} Oyevol’ 7) Ol) OF ee1 
42 | Kanhya Lal bazar, «- | 350] 3l) 7 4) 42) 26) 11) 2] OF oO} Oo} 3] 0] Of] O 
68 | Karni bazar, 5.06 fe 250 | 22) 11] 8} 41] 15} 22) O; O} oF oO; of; O| 1] 3 
29 | Kern ghanta, doo 327 | 27| 411 2; 70} 23] 351 4 O| Of oF 7] Oo} OF 1 
| 64 } Ketwapura sarak,.... 337 | 45} 23] 16} 84! 19} 50] 2) O| Oo} Oo] 7] Of oO| 6 
91 khas, 1334 |220} 50} 62) 332)141]/155} 5) Of 0} Of} 27] Of 2) 2 
213 | Khajaree (Secrole), 984 {228} 11] 3] 242/214) 16] 0} Oo} oO} Oo; 10]. OF 1 21 
L. | 
77 | Lalisur, Bychche 179 | 4} 37, O} 41; 1) 10) 24 2] oO; oO] 4; O}| O} O 
12 | Lalanptra khas, 94 | 18} 1] oO; 19} 12) 7 O} OF OF Oo; Of OF Of O 
12 sarak, .... 45 | 25) O; O; 25] 16} 3) (0) oF OF oO} 3] 2] Qa] 2 
43 ; Lahori tola, 617 5/125} ©] 1380) 2] 40) 51} 9} Of O} SF oO} 23] O 
108 | Lala Sand gali, : 175 | 2) 22) 3! 27] 1) 14) 10! 1] Of; OF 1) 6O] (Of oO 
69 | Lal Khan mehala, .... 579 | 80) 58} 13] 151} 52) 66; 5} Of OO; O; 23) 1] 1] 3 
62 chouhata, 228 | 35) 41) 12] 88] 380] 46] 2) oO} O; O; 8} OF O| 3 
220 | Lachipura, S55 t 435 | 87| 0} O}| 87] 83) 1] O! of Oo; O; 3) Oo! o| oO 
76 | Lachmi Josi gali, 41 3) 6} O 9} O| 2) 2 2 OF oO; 8] OF} O} oO 
97 | Ladhenptra, wefe 452 | 93} 3] 1} 97] 26} 59} O; O; O! Oo; 9} O} O| 8 
181 | Lahanptira khas, .... 256 | 34| 6] 2) 42] 20] 18] Oo} o| oO} of 1) Of of 2 
Isl sarak,.... 496 | 60] 14) 4] 78] 28} 48) J] O| O; O} 1} OF Of O 
39 | Lakhi chabtitré, .... 219 | O} 20} O}| 20] O} 2] 6 7] S| Of Of Of] Ol Oo 


486 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 
S ec HousgEs. HEIGHT 

ss ge: 
Re Name or MERALA. 35 st 6|-3}-s 
nS =| =| 3) 
Soe Si palit) Syst aie 
So eI Olea! S4|)o| ope! 
« iad Sy) Sl] tt oO os] Bl] | o 
Ay Zz Mm) ay al & =| Be) | & 
79°) Lakasar, (00 ceo ue --; 201 | 30) 3] O, 33) 24 5 OF} 0 
177 | Lakhsmi kind, ...... me 777 + | 52) 45| 3} 100) 57) 23] 12) 1 
46 | Lalita Ghat, ...... aie 112 O} 13} O} 13) oO; 12} I} O 
22} Latukagali...... 0 141 lj 21] O;| 22) o; 1) 12) 8 
184 Lillapura. Aaterd . sus 986 1183] 10} 0} 1931166) 12} 1| 0 

M. 
18 | Madhoray Mehala, 6 656 | O} 80; Of; 80} oO} 3] 45) 16 
26 | Madho Das Samia gali, ' 51 Oo} 9| O 9} O} Of 3] 5 
71 | Madho Das ki bagh, a2 354 | 23) 10) 16} 49] 17) 29) 1] O 
104 sarak, ‘ 425 | 48] 24, Zl 791 32! ss} OO] O 
29 } Machharhata, ...... G 402 3] '79| O} 82) 7| 59) 8) 3 
58 | Madar tola,  ...... ‘ 136 | 29} 6} 38] 38) 9} 20] O}. 0 
5 Madhméswar, HoaOS c she 840 }122] 22] 25] 169) 73) 56} 1) O 
193 | Madenptra,_....... -- | 1851 | 71/189] 28) 288) 38)172] 51} 1 
21 | Maden Mohen gali, ke 91 0} 14, OF 147 oO; 4) 9! 1 
52 | Mahima inara, ..... fs we 658 | 19) 531 0; 79; 25) 51! 3] 0 
189 | Malaitola, ...... si 546 | 80] 19) 8] 107) 54) 34] 5] O 
39 | Manirudouleh, ..... 4 An 142 O} 11; O| 11) O| 2 7 2 
110 | Manhari pipal, ...... : 90 1} 13) 1} 15; Oo} 14] OF O 
22 | Mansardm gali,..... ; ; 55 Oo} 5} O S| O| 2 2) 4 
121 | Manyar Sinh houli, : 1165 |245| 15] 23] 283 138,119} 3) 0 
33 |MaAmadeo, _....... we 489 | 19|.78]  O} 97) 16) 24) 34] 11 
46 | Man Mandil,_...... Bis 738 | 77| 27) 4! 108] 25} 76} 45} oO 
127 | Man Ray gali, ...... nn [UL SZ 4 Algo) QI 251) ie) ral 4h 0 
99 | Manpura, _......... as 414 {102} 1] 5} 108} 56} 45) O} O 
200 ; Mansarwar, __......... -» | 1503 | 27] 6! 4! 91] 16} 49) 7] O 
47 | Markandi Sookul brp. Ne 157 | O; 10; O} 10} Of} 8} 2) O 
61 | Matha tola, ...... A 155 4) 21; 5} 30) 2| 25] 2) Oo 
115 | Mir Ghat khas, ...... he 602 | 58] 61] 4! 123] 20) 61] 19} 5 
45 sarak, ae 318 1} 57) . 0} 58) 1) 16] 34) 3 
178 | Mir Jan ke bagh, Rivets 7 VA) 12) AE Olos 13 i 4| Or 0 
31 | Mirza Iméami chata, ae. 34 Oo}. 5; O SU dhe DE BO 
185 | Misr pokhra, ..... ° - | 1125 | 63] 82} 9! 154! 69! 491 18) 6 
126 | Mokim ganj,_...... : 335 |-85} 7] 15] 107| 59} 37) 0} O 
147 | Molnitola,; (4; .s...4 6 682 {113! 4] 7} 124) 83) 41] O}| 0 
22 | Monika gali,_ ...... H 31 oO; 4), O 4| oO; O| 2] 2 
166 Mohamed Seid, shelesievele ue 285 | 63} 2] 2} 67| 16] 44] oO}; O 
63 | Malvi bazar, ...... ne 99 | 21!) 2) 1 21) 144 9} O| O 
164 | Munshi gali p,hatek, 94 Oo} 12) O; 12; OF 2! 8s! O 
170 | Murgia tola, tafeiets 161 | 52} I] 9} 62) 19) 26) OF; O 
58 Murli paltyy i) 3 bee 78 1] 11] Of} 12) 2] 5} 6 O 
21 Mesjid cali, (Jytanber ) 397 | 10] 43] 13] 66] 17] 37; 7| O 
108 Matsyodari khas (subdivided) 
108 | Ditto chamrauti, .... J 24/12; O; OF 12} 12) 1) Oo; O 
N. | | 

127 | Nachni Kia, ...... ' 625 | 97} 48] 21] 166} 51] 86! 3] O 
221 ; Nadéswar, ~~... -- | 1389 |234] 12) O] 246,184) 48] 2] 0 
105.1) Nakhas.o. 4! fas elk she 413 | 88] 8] 17) 118) 48} 51] 3) O 
171 | Ditto, ( Ausanganj ) -- | 268 | 53] 16}. 8 48) 19| 1) 0 
17 | Naik ka bazar. . 6.05. 0 821 | 51] 56) 24) 181! 50) 49] 5) O 


—— 


———$——— 


| Five ditto. 


oocood 


— eS ee arr Sereaeo_m™—@=mm"" 


i=) eceoooocoeooocoooooooeoocoooooseroce cece|cscesceooeooern 


eoooco 


| Six ditto. 


Ro ee. Ruins: 


ooooeo 


= ivy) 


—_ 


i 


— 
i=) PRONSOHWOOSOHUNSCSCOOCOH OFM OH SCOEOCOROCHSOSORAUNWOANSES 


—) ecoscoooeocoeooosooseoooooosoooeocosesoosce|ceceseose 


oe 


ROSS | Tanks and Gardens. 


cecoeomooooocoroocoro coe 


i=) eoncowncocorocoecsece 


re SS 


PWwWonwsd 


| Shiwalas. 
| Mesjids. 


woows 


_ 


Se ocoocoorocomoonwnooor 


—_ 


i=) oorwoococooncor wmoowmoonw 


DW om 


woooose 


Fonoconeoocwnooocoooooorooeosoooonoowonoocoer 


o 


Se Now 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 487 
Sey aw a 
= 3 Houses. Heient. s 
3 ee é 
or ey 2 - 5 
aya] Name or Menata. St Sa) fstlitgey iS |S ht. s| y 
ae sill sl els] s/ = e) S| 4 
© pe 2 SMS ee tall eo) et Sf ST cel, oll ol oh 
2 g Se eal oh ol el si cor 21 8 | Alley 
of = SPs |e CS ay EN eS ey Pe sip gy ee | sO 
04 Zz mp Ape] eS | OF; a! ey} & jm) 2 Mle] mn) |S 
99 | Nag Kua, siete a 325 | 741 2] OF ‘76; 45] 26) OF OO] OF OF 5 1) OF 1 
44 | Nandi Farya Gali, . told , 126 | 5} 15) OF 20; G6} 10] 4) O; OF OF of oF OF O 
35 | Nanden Sah m. ited aie 724 2} 87) O| 89} 1] 7] 28) 35) 15} 1] af oo; OO] O 
72 | Narharpira, me 775 1143; 3] 14) 160} 95) 60; Of O; OF Of 4) oO; OF 2 
163 ; Nant Sah brahmpuri, . ae Ae 177 QO} 17] Of} 17) +O} 3] 12] 1] Of OF 1] Oo} OF O 
22 | Narain Diksitm. ... us 444 | 0] 65) GO| 65) 7| 34] 18} 4) OF OF} af] O} 1] O 
79 | Nawab ganj, (Mizrpokhr a) ..| 379 | 60) 16) 2) 78} 65) 9| 2 OF OF OF oO] Of 2) O 
136 | Nawab ganj, ee -- | 1015 [307] 0} 0) 307/246) 39] GC} OF} Of 6] 21; 1) O} O 
113 | Negaptra, : 59 | 26| Ol O} 26/25) of Of; O| OF OF 1] Oo} OF O 
48 | Nichi brahmpuri, .... 339 | 4| 44) O} 48] 3) 23] 22) O} Of OF of OF OF O 
43 | Nipali Khapra, fe Va ile 195. i e2[27|| Ole so]. 3 1a a4licLl tO]. 0l coho} | oll 0 
41 | Nya Ghat, an 118 O91) 0 9}, O|} oO}; 3) S| 1) OF of OF Of; O 
2 | Nyaptra, (Austing ganj) .. | 693 | 67] 28] 29] 124] 52] s6| 4} 1) of of si al of 1 
90 | Ditto, (Kazi mandei) . Ai 250 | 38} 8] S| 51] 5] 38} 1] O| OF oO} 6 oO}; Of 1 
80 | Nyi Basti, ( Ramapur 7) os 639 |101! Of Of; 101] 71!) 29, OF OF O! O| 1] OF] OF O 
69 | Ditto, (Gourig iganj) . -- | 576 | 79] 2) OF 81} 69] 12) O; OF OF O} OF OF OF O 
103 | Ditto, Ce ly -. | 3805; 49) 1] 2] St} 35) 11] 0; OF GF OF 2} 2 1, 0 
98 | Ditto. 3 ekele Ain 122 | 33} 2} O! 35) 27] 6] O| O; OF OF 2 OF OF O 
O. 
211 | Orderly bazar (Secrole). -- | 1076 [273] 12) 7] 292/192) 93) 0; O} O} O| 5} oO} 1 1 
Be 
162 | Panri Ghat, ‘ ate 259 3] 28} 5] 36} 1] 14 15} O}| O} OF 2) of] 4 O 
107 | Pata Derwazeh, , Se 112 9| 16; 3) 28) 4; 13) 5) Ty O; OF 4) Of 1] O 
74 | Piri bari, a lerats -. | 2601 1326] 34] 25) 385/291]}110] 2} 9} O} Of 16) O; IL 5 
132 chhoti, hte) ae -- | 1117 {L120} 31] 8] 159]109] 34] 2] O} O} Of} 13! O| 1) 0 
132 sarak, C o. 783 | 73] 22] 10] 105] 62] sé] 1) O} O} Of 3] of} 2] 1 
20 | Phil bari brahmpuri,, ie 2 134 1} 16; O}| 17] OF; O| 9F 4 3) O| 1} Of oO} 0 
113 | Phalwaria, 2B Bi LO. }HQ2h6 Ul 2 25) 7! 16! Ol 0} Ol sO} eo} | of, 2 
183 | Pitr kund mehala, 5 .. | 1538 |275| 23) 10} 308/234] 52) 1; O} O; O] 13) 1] 2] 5 
118 sarak, coe ete 883 )154} 28! 10} 192/106) 59} 0} Of OF O _8| 10) 9 9 
144 | Pitambarpura, 3 Ae a 339 | 77 13! 31 93! 57} 31} O} Of Oo! OF 3! of 2! oO 
53 | Parani Adalat, atwiete ae 904 | 17] 86} 1) 104} 21) 54) 26; OF Of O; OF; OF OF 8 
187 | Pardni Két, ate ae 29 }121} 8] 16} 145) 95} 40; 1) OF} OF Of 6] Of; O] 83 
21 | Pouti gali, iene Mas 62 oO; 9 O 9 OF 3; 3! 3! Of OF; O} OF} OF 0 
39 | Prannath gali, Revalt es 157 | Of; 15) O} 15} Of} 2] 10; 3} OF Of oO} Of OF] O 
124 | Prehlad Ghat, te 478 | 39] 90, 21] 150} 27] 97; 9) O7 OO} O; 10) OF; 6 1 
76 | Pathar gali, ( Bhyr ontth) 208 | O} 36} 0; 36, O| 12] 13) 8| 38} OF O! OF Oo] O 
50 | Pathar gali, (Howe laten a) 272 | 6 17) 4| 27] 4) 19) 1) OF O} OF 3) O} O] O 
41 | Patni tola, Shiels 497 0} 48} O; 48] 2] 41 30) 6 oO]; Oo} 1] .0] 5) O 
106 | Pythani tola, 260 | 74) 11] 10} 95] 37) 40) 0; OF OF O} 11) O| O} 7 
220 ! Piaria pokhri, (Seerole) 185 | 36) O} O} 386) 36; oO} OF; OF; O; OF; OF OF OF] O 
206 | Paharpur (Secrole). . 1115 {245} 1} 0} 246/209) 29) 0) OF O| O;| 7 OF 1) O 
R. | | 
187 | Raj Ghat ; 341 |)82]).4]! 6], 921) 73] 15! 0; O] Of. -0] ..2}..-0} of 2 
189 | Rj Ghat bazar, fe .. | 269 | 14] 16] 6] 36! 10] 19] 1] O} Of Oo} 4! o} of 2 
44 | Raj Gir tola, Rete -. | 528 | 80} 87| 5} 122} 17] 62) 24, 0) Of} 0, 2! Oj 15] 2 
110 | Raj Mandil Mehala, . Sacte . | 650 | 52] 83] 45} 180] 18}110) 26} 1) Oo o 10 0| 15| 0 
110 pushta, .... we ATS STAN Die BO We V8. 21 Of ON Ole ONO! Sle 0 


485 


dgari 


NAME OF MEHALA. 


of Devan 
Register. 


| Page 


Rajmandil bazar, 
Rajapura mehala, 

sarak, 

Raja Ram gali, 

Raja Derwazeh, 
Rajrajéswari ghat, 
Ramapura khas BOC 
sarak, : 
chota, tata 1 
Rana mehal, : 
Rana Bhuwani br ahmpuri, 
Rangil Das mehala, .... 
Rasulpura, meatal 
Ratan phatek, 

Reori talao, 

Resham katra, 


S. 


Sadanand bazar, 

Sadar mehala, 

Salimpura, 
28 | Sapt Sagar, 

Sarétabad, 

Sakshi Binaik, 

Salarpura mehala, 
sarak, mieere 

Séndpura, Ricans 
sarak, aisles 
Sésman bazar, , 
Shahzadeh’s rests Ke. 
Shama gali, A 
Shékh Salim phatek,. 
Shukul gali, Borie 
Shakarkund gali, 
Sidhéswari, 
Sidhmata gali, 
Siva Choudri gali, 
Siw Ram Bhat gali, .... 
Sohga Garhi, 
Sonarpura, é 
Sukhlal Sah mehala,. . : 
Sundar Das bagh, 
sarak, 
gali, 
Sundya, ae 
Suraj kand, aaa 
Sat tola, salels 
Secrole or Sikror, 
Seopur khas, eeels 

pichli, : 

218 pancho pandava, 
216 | Station, Civil ayareis 
209 | Sadar bazar. Bete 


@ (0a 16>- 6) 6 


iy Phas Oat eee ace On (O eine OG OE LOR RO re) 0s a ker ne negate ectel De) ..0, 62) Ouse, 8, 0) 0 @ G2 sie castes) abe fs: Ja epi et enter 6) ote jes 6 
Sup elle mcenvts Hel > 8 ey eee - 6, ele te) dell erie 6 (6: \i/ene es ob Semt en. 6, ie: sey ees), iene e* 0, seteveny « Sv etn al tov ara: get siete e/a atmne Sule Wate Soe pore 
ng a a A 


CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


' 
Ca HouwssEs. HEIGHT 
= eA 
we e 
avn plist elsyens 
3” | al af $| 2] =| 3) =] 2 
S = : ~ n S o . aes 
s | | Sl 2/2] s] s} 2) Zl el 
4 Mie) Ssle | ol aele| sl &] w 
233 | 3] 40| 1; 44] 31 15, 19! 5 oO! o 
877 |112] 9| 41] 162} 52|102} of of of o 
437 | 22} 6| 15] 43] 18] 22] Oo] Oo] of o 
5S) Estes Ol! TO}. a] The 2h ale abito 
329 | 2] 50] oO} 52] 25} Oo} 19] oO} O| Oo 
1577 | 01142! o} 142! 5! 11] 59] 45] 151 Oo 
1661 |188] 66] 15} 269)150] 92) 11] O| 0) oO 
565 | 32] 20} 8] 60} 30] 27] o| of 2] 0 
158 | 7| 23; 1) 31] 4] 16] 5| Of} o| o 
151 | 0] 33} 1| 34] of 15] 10] 7] Oo] o 
296 | 0| 24, o| 24; of 1! 3] 15! 5] Oo 
715 |151| 11] 13] 175] 64] 84[ oO] O| Oo] Oo 
179 | 5| 27| o| 32] 1| 3] 15} 7 al o 
71 | 23; 1] Oo} 24] 22! a] of Of Oo] o 
2771 4/38] o| 42] 4] 141 19] 2 / 0 
572 114] 22) 10 146] 89] 49} oO] O| o| O 
191 | 48] 10) 7| 65] 36} 22} O}| OF O| O 
429 | 77| 131 7 97| 34] 56] 1] O] Oo] Oo 
656 | 60| 70) 2) 132! 51] 55} 6} Il OF O 
589 |118| 12} 8, 138/113] 13} of Of oO} Oo 
483 | 4| 59} 3, 66] 10] 26} 9] 5| O] oO 
486 |107| 10} 3 120] 49] 58} 1] O} O| oO 
246 | 66] 10/ 1| 77] 41] 35} of Of O| Oo 
963 |130] 1) 9| 140/106] 30; Oo} O} O} Oo 
504 | 84) 2! 11 87} 69, 15| oF OF OF} Oo 
150 | 6| 14) 11| 31] 7} 20) 1] 0} O| o 
247 | 26] 12} 20] 58} 12] 46] Oo] O| O| o 
91} 2} 7| 1a! io} 1] 6} 2] 1) Of o 
665 |103| 31] 6| 40] 60] 75} O| O] O} oO 
75 | o;| 8| o| 8} of of 6! 2) OF Oo 
336 | 1) 40) 3] 441 6] 17! 12) 6 21 Oo 
1396 | 6/135] 1] 142 (| 9| 55} 48] 10] 1 
255 | 3! 30! 3} 36] -5| 13] 15| 1| Ol o 
109 | 3/ 13) of 16} 4] 7 3] oO] oO} Oo 
S41 Orie olf atl. .0l) Sol Sp ao 
218 | 59! 6| 4| 69! 46| 18] 0, O| oO} Oo 
1050 | g9}101| 24} 224] 61/112; 23] 24) 0} oO 
932 | 6|109} 2] 117] 3} 39} 27] 29] 5) oO 
433 | of 55| 2] 57] 2] 17] 19] 14, 5, Oo 
134 | 22} 5| 1) 28! 17] 6] 1] O} OF O 
By Lol ez). OL. Fs 20) Olahast): Sve 
741 | 18; 66! 6| 90; 13! 43] 17} 8] O}| O 
783 | 59} 43| 3] 105 os] 38} 0] O| Ol o 
1762 | 2/147] 0} 149] Of 11] 78] 48} 9} 1 
933 1185} O| Ol 185|173| 7} oO! 0} OF Oo 
138 | 45| 2| o| 47] 47} of of oO} Of oO 
695 [158| 10] o} 168/163] 2) oO} O| Oo} OF 
930 | 22) 9) 1| 232/224) of of oO} oO] 0o 
957 | 0 | 57| 60] 59] 1] 0 0 o| 0 
g9g l231! of 1! 232/196! 32! o! of of oO 


DRoWWeESoHoouNwonoe Bana Hondo COW CORPBRDODWO | Ruins. 


SSK SCSCnwnnwnwonorwnseagd 


SSDBWeournavoonwnonoronnw 


| Tanks and Gardens. 


ooowocoe ooocorcose 


SeeosseouneownesoooosoescoosooosoHrowoorscoo 


Shiwalas. 


—_ — | 
Sroosooocosooonawoon Cer oone HNANSSON | 
| Mesjids. 


Soscrscecowseoeso 


Sowrnro 


ceoonmnooco coonwnooocse 


SSSSSSSSOSSSSOSOHHSSSOCOONRCORH OR OE YUNYNYNO 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 489 
S & g 
> 4 Houses. Hricut. 2 
s ne ic haa 
= 5 wf Bly: 2) 
Qu Name or MEHWALA. os lash Eile Steele Sti \. 
sb oe |. 5/3) 5|5/ 8/38 e| S) 3 
oe 2 a} s| ol -. | S] Ss] of Fl] Si] ss] aj] al sl Ss 
& 5 1) Si aehiotehi®| S| ©] | S| Sele 
Be e alles (iS | st El 2) ol 2) Al 3) a] cS] 2 
am Mia Sle | O; ay By ey ey A] | a] mw] S&S 
| F 
124 ; Télia nala, sleteie ae 306 |; 49] 27! 2) 78, 23! 46, 3] oO; GO| O, 4, OF OF 2 
67 | Télia bagh, 6 sis 659 1128} O} 4} 132/113} 14] Of O;| OF O| 5) OF OF O 
95 | Terhi Nim, suctele sie 714 | 61} 49] 6] 116} 29! 62} 10} 7] O; OF 5) 2 3} O 
38 | Thatbéri bazar, stele Di 873 | 2) 82] of 84] 1] 15) 32] 25) 7) O; 2} OF 2) 1 
60 | Trilochan khas, ayohale ON 304. 9} 53} 9}, 71} 15) 42) 9) 1) OF OF 1) O 3] O 
61 sarak, ite 3 441 | 59} 29] 15] 103] 47) 34) 10] 1] O; OF; 4) OF 1] 6 
94 | Tripur bhyravi, sialete .. | 420 | 24) 61; 5} 90] 18) 43! 8! 3, O, OF O; OF 18) O 
Vv 
45 ve gali, sus -. [| 114 0} 27 29 : 3] 11} 1]; O} O}; 0} OF 9} O 
U 
55 | Unkareswar, rood se 495 |125} -9| 16] 150| 86; 53} O} O| O}| OL 4) O, 21 5 
171 | Udbopura, dbo 36 387 | 47] 24) 13] 80] 16] 48° O, O; OF OF 10; I} OF 5 
146 | Umrao Sinh bagh, Bi 337 | 50} 1) 4] &5| 44) 11] OF; OF; OF OF OF OF; OF O 
sarak, 551 | 73] O}| 7| SO} 64) 16} O; O} OF; OF OF OF OF 90 
76 | Unchi gali, 68 ol 12] Of; 12] 41 5} 3; Of O| Of Of Of] Of O 
TABLE II. 


Re-examination of several Mehalas personally, in the year 1829, with a view to ascertain the 
accuracy of the first Census, and to distinguish the Males, Females, &c. 


? 
i 


ence to Hind 


Register. 


| Refer 


21 


NAME oF MEHALA. 


Ganésh  Chameria 
WI aga 

Bhyronath, 

Bhatki gali, 

Madho Das Swami 
gali, 

Raja Ram gali, 

Siva Choudri gali, . 

Ram ghat, 

Nipali Khapra, 

Visvéswar gali, 

Kachouri gali, —. 

Bari Piri mehala, .. 

Shékh Salim phatek, 

Bengali tola, 

Alipura, 

Gulzdr mehal, 

Télia Nala, (in part) 

Stnderdas ki Bagh 
(ditto,) .. *)< 


INHABITANTS, 
Europ 
in in 
1827-8} 1829 
344 672 
397 440 
387 290 
51 68 
53 78 
109 90 
1577 | 128 
195 204 
114 93 
112 71 
2601 | 2646 
655 445 
1113 | 1165 
670 692 
169 164. 
147 160 
248 249 
8982 | 8814 


I 


EANS. 


1 4A 


PROPRIETORS, 


[E@inls: 


ww 
ON 


Or 
anaes <2) 


io.2) 
Or Or = st 


LODGERS. 


| Men. 
| Women. 


54 
15 


19; 13 
15 
8l{ 5 
460|366/331 
87} 50} 47 
70) 11] 7 
28] 26] 12 
1054 
278 
474 


52] 60 
250/353 


619/642 )2 


482 
131 
83 


73| 86 
11! 13) 
23] 31 


| Boys. 


mt 
WRWHH WH 


Girts. 


172/136] 49) 36 
58] 19} 17 


130! 1 


2| 33 


39 
25 


43 
592 
167 


490 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 
= 
AS 
x INHABITANTS, PROPRIETORS. LoDGERS 
=) co 
oy NAME OF MEHALA. EUROPEANS. 
Oo o . 
E ce in in SB Sliees B Pal rate esa 
o 1827-8] 1829 J) Seat fs wl al 
& CP SWE) Bice | 81) Seas 
Ra S|Fla| Sle | S| F\ 4] 5/4 
Se — |__| | Tat ma ——— | 
Secrole § the Vicinity. 
439 | Lachipura,(only once 
COUNT) Ty cee ladlcsies ¢ 435 129)131] 71) 61) 392} 17] 21) 3) 2) 48 
440 | Périapokhriy) Foe. 185 49, 61; 36, 28] 174] 3, 4 3 1] J 
AAD | Nadéswar, 2 si? fs) taste 6 1389 290/296|161]110} 857|288]142| 58) 44) 582 
445 | Orderly Bazar, ..]...... 1076 207/225] 96] 78] 606|218|158} 55] 39] 470 
426 | Dethiri, Banh a Ae 219 48] 61) 55] 24) 168] 16] 18} 9} 8] 51 
431 | Chamroutt, ie f .. 4 ics. 1159 269|328/166]153] 916) 87] 74] 52] 30) 243 
427 | Grant Bazar,.. |. |... -| 438 144/137] 77] 63] 421] 6} 5| 4{| 2} 17 
420 | Sikror, (or Secrole) ae ce 933 296}296|183]132] 907| 8] 8) 8! 21 26 
418 Peharpura, Se Heer 1115 368]249/214]18711068) 14) 19) 8) 6] 47 
429 | Khajri, | cae | 984 343/326|172]113] 954| 12} 11; 4] 3) 30 
418 Gangadherkapura, .. wallet 232 75| 77| 51) 29) 232] 0] 9] O|- O}-- 0 
419) | Hugal’ganjy7 07 . ike. 274 105}116] 67] 44) 332] 19} 13] 7) 3) 42 
422 | Sadar Bazar in the 
Lines, ered lie: keteers 898 281|217[133] 95] 726] 62| 58| 25] 27; 172 
9337 tt | S| R21 QA o| = 
Siwpur, (males and f So le Sp Sh S753) 3S |S aS. 
females not speci- Eilts er Ross ea pee 
fied) a oxathsxoys 2051 lV calcd ses rma aa mance lameecae’ hance Oa tae toa IS 
Inpur, ditto oo .4).. 60 488 | §| S| ts| $ 
2/2) Ole 
11876 |—-|—-|—-|-—- 
Bangalos and houses Native Servants 
of Europeans and 
Eurasians, includ- 
ing Military Staff, |...,..}...... 54| 41) 51) 146/1636]653] 54) 0:23438 
Regimental Banga- 
lows, Moteey oxcifi Meyeiscepeyall Be ctor: 60) 20} 46} 126 oO} O} O} O} 738 
Troops in Canton- 
ments, (with fol- 
lowers) <li iste exeu <i [see eters Oo} O; OF 125 0} O} O} 0/2880 
Native Jail, + ites atomeotlichn Siaeks O} O}|. O} OO} 570} 37; 7| O} 614 
Hunatic Asylum) .. .1}\.é sis. [cs sete 2} O| OF} 2) 98} 18; OF} OF 118 
7092 399 6693 
Total inhabitants of 
Secrolesiyjieee Mae 18968 | 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 491 


TABLE III. 


CATALOGUE of the principal Castrs and TRADES of the City of BENARES, as ascertained from 
the Choudris, or principal men of each Caste, or where such source was not available, from 


actual investigation. 


HInDus. 
Brahmans. Number.| On whose authority. Profession or occupation. 
PANCH DRAVIR. 
Maharashtr, Dravir, 300 | Ch,hanuji, > 
Tylang, 500 ditto, 
Chitpaur, 3300 | Bal Dikshit, 
Yujurbédi, . 5000 | Ragunath Pant, f 
Raghurbédi,.. 755 | Mor Bhat Kotwal, Pandits—Recluses, or Kashi- 
Sanwai, 25 | Appaji, + bashi—and a few are Mer- 
Kan no, 471 No Bhat, chants. 
Prabhu, 20 | Trimbak Rao, 
Kanharé, 400 | Ch,hanuji, 
Karharé, 475 ditto, 
Abhir, . 65 | Ratanji and enquiry, | J 
us 
Nagar, Bishan Nagari, 250 | Natho Ram, ! 
Barnagari, .. 500 ditto, Capitalists, lending money and 
Ahmedabadi, 315 ditto, jewels on interest. 
Sathodara, 20 | Ganésh Ram, : 
Sipahi, 70 | Késwar Ram, Servants. 
Prishnora, 51 | Ratanji, 
Chitrora, 25 ditto, 
231 
Mor, Bhar Bedi, . 71 =| Ratanji, > 
Chatur bedi,. 175 | Badri Shanka, Pata Ran He ty ‘il 
Agyarakshana, 17 | Ratanji and enquiry, A SOL eer con 
Dhinouja a 61 ditto Le i Mabsaetc ah 
Chach b li Dhi ? daily at temples, on stipend, 
Shs, ahh htt ; | for individuals. 
nouja, .. 33 ditto, 
. Talujina, 13 ditto, J 
Raychandrjina, 17 ditto, 
Bachan bedi,. ae ae howe few Pandits, and Khy- 
ele e are wing xe 
Gulsichva: 100 ices § rati, or living on charity. 
Lorha Bhanthna, 16 ditto, 
567 
Udich, Sahsr, odie 700 Beauty, 
Tolakia, .... 125 =| Baluji Rugunatbji, 
Bagria, 80 | Ratanji, 
Kham Bhacti, 72 ditto, 
Anter bedi, 100 ditto, From the Doab. 
Mathabi, .... 23 ditto, 
Surati, 8} ditto, 
Modaru Surati, 23 ditto, 


492, CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


Brahmans. Number.| On whose authority. Profession or occupation. 
Mewara, Bhat, seers os 176 | Ratanji, 7 
Marosi, : 7 ditto, | 
Triwari, .... Ns 7 ditto, Lege Bes e 
Dungurptra Bhat, .. 80 ditto, > Risaatt Nou et 
Sarvari, .... te 3 ditto, oe 
Maluvi Brahmans, .. 75 ditto, 
Barédara, oe Br 23 ditto, J 
430 
WKheérewall, « se.icieiaeieoeres . -- | 1000 | Surajnath Dubé, The greater part are Merchants— 
Kharanja, .. oie 100 | Ratanji and enquiry,| some live on charity, &c. 
Balmnik, es fe i ditto, 
Pushkarnia,. . is 90 | Moti Lal, 
Disawal, .. Pe 55 | Ratanji and enquiry, 
Sri Mali, .. ste 250 ditto, 
Jambi, an te 19 ditto, 
Narmdeo, .. AG 16 ditto, 
Raikwal Hy Ae 19 ditto, 
Choubisa, .. a 27 ditto, 
Palliwal, .. “ 83 ditto, 
1670 
Puch,hna, Srimali, .... te Vd ditto, 
Bishen nagari, 87 ditto, 
Jharula, .... 77 ditto, 
Nandora, a8cc ee 45 | Ratanji, 
Karsora, arte 27 ditto, 
Udambwar, meres nee fe 21 ditto, 
Kharachata, .... arsine a 27 ditto, 
Bhargava, Ane 70 ditto, 
Kamloja, Siecs ; 81 | Ratanji and enquiry, 
Rorwalu, caus $ 35 ditto, 
Parbhaskar, és 
Raithélu, oe steiers 
Samora, sietets Gpnid 
Gugala, eee stews 
Motalu, 2 hi RIAL ; 
Tapodhan Bharati, elets A 
Nardik, Hose Riise : 17 ditto, 
Sanawar Gopali,.. aiacele “te 57 ditto, 
Medipurna, .... eietele 26 ditto, 
Likna phutkal, .. sent 16 ditto, cae 
Bhoiak 12 ditt Parohits and Pujéris of the 
Ojart, eas pehand Jynreligion and of the Oswals. 
Bansi ASAS sheeye 87 ditto, 
Jharula, ater ehh 70 ditto, 


PANCH GAUR. 


Kan-kubj Brahmans, 1500 | Bidhya Dhar, Of various professions ; 
Sarwaria, 4500 | Ganésh Datt, none very rich. 
Sanouria, 575 | Chakan, 
Jijautia, 27 


37 ditto, 

A} 45 ditto, 
oh 55 ditto, 
<b 18 ditto, 
: 57 ditto, 
; 12 ditto, 


6602 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 493 


Brahmans. Number.| On whose authority. Profession or occupation. 
Gaur, Sri Gaur, .... Le 20 | Ganésh Datt, Employed as cooks by the Vai- 
Adi Gaur,.... A 1500 | Sita Ram, shyas and Brahmans: some 
Sri Gaur Marwart,. 35 | Ratanji, few Gomashtas or Merchants. 
Gaur, Be Ag 150 ditto, i 
Hirania, .... ot 75 ditto, 
Kirtnia, .... aS 36 ditto, 
Biréswar wala, .. 39 ditto, 
Silujana, .... AY 57 ditto, 
Girnaria, .... on 7 ditto. 
1919 
Athbansi Séraswat, Howe iB 200 ditto, Parohits of Kshetris. 
SUNY i Inherit the effects of all Hindus 
Maha brahmans, Bays 250 | Debipersdd Chaubé, ; except Oswals. 
Ganga putrs, arn .. | 1000 | Enquiry, Attend bathers, &c. 
Bengali brahmans, ayers 3000 | Antnarain Bhattacharj,| Kashibash. 
Shakal Dwipi, ae oh 300 | Ratanji, Various. 
Panchnadea, sialsts 200 ditto, Ghat-waiters. 
Kashmiri, i 200 ditto, Writers. 
i : § Reside in Rajmandil—chiefly 
Ch,henath, base) 900 | Lachman Joshi, 2 servants. 
Soni, Sods ote 11 | Enquiry, Goldsmiths. 
Parbati, sree Bi 125 | Kashinath, Various. 
Mathuria Choubé, apafels te 26 | Gobind Chand, Khyrati. 
Khandua, evcicte Bi 31 | Ratanji, 
6243 
KSHETRIS. 
Rajputs, states -- | 6160 | Shiwsahay Sinh, Service—wire-drawers, &c. 
. : call themselves Brahmans— 
Bhuihars, matey -- | 5000 | Enquiry, ; Culneetee: 
Oswal, sts 3 294 | Gopi Chand, 
Khatri, ahora” es 1400 | Bakhtaur Lal, ) 
Purabi, oo.% 648 | Ch,hota Lal, | 
Bavanjai, .... 400 | Enquiry, vere cry Cloth Merchants, and 
Panchjoti,.... 200 ditto, Servants. 
j Barehjati, .... 150 ditto, 1 
Sisoudia, Rajputs, .... 40 ditto, J 
14292 
VAESYA. 
Agarwala, MD .. | 2000 | Ratan Chand, Merchants. 
Kasrwaini, jd00 sie 2100 | Babu Lal, Tradesmen. 
Mahéswari, Jod0 ole 150 | Ramnarain, ditto. 
Bisanagar Bania, Loe 60 160 | Makhan Lal, 7 
Dasanagar Bania, etaets aR 100 ditto, 
Disaval DasaBania, .... 56 750 =| Gokul Das, 
Disaval Bisa Bania, Bites 4a 80 ditto, > Gomashtas or mercantile agents 
Mor Dasa Bania, S006 fe 185 | Bangati Das, 
Lanr Dasa Bania, 9000 56 75 | Enquiry, | 
Patél Gujarati, eaters le 425 Chunu, 
Srimali Soni, da00 ike 200 | Manu Lal, Goldsmiths. 
Bhatia, Sarre 36 214 | Sewpersad, Brokers to ditto. 
Parval, eeee Bi 50 | Enquiry, ditto. 


r 4 


494 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 


Brahmans. Number.| On whose authority. Profession or occupation. 
Rora, Brood aieleie ete 700 | Enquiry, Shop-keepers. 
Aumar, ag ctore ciatets at 155 | Bhola Chaudri, ditto. 
Kasaundhan, .... siege De 90 | Jagan, Utr distillers. 
Bengali, aie eito\s BP 200 | Chandnarain Bh: 
Jharula, Seis chats it: 76 | Enquiry, 
Sunri, Sega asians is 16 | Debi Dyal Chaudri, 
Bandrwar, S000 arses “fe 14 | Badlu Chaudri, 
Rastoki, Sherer areveie ate 40 | Damudar Das, 
Bhat, eects 508 f 800 | Ch,hakan Lal, Khyrati. 
Gujarati Bhat,. Bete aut 22 | Enquiry. | 

8300 
SUDRAS. 

Bengali, Baéd, BBE 200 | Ojan, Physicians. 
Kaeth, Shribastab, 5000 | Siw Gholam, > 

Ashthana, .... 250 | Enquiry, | 

Gour, <teldte 72 | Lala Murli Dhar, 

Saksena, .... 40 | Ganpati Lal, > Writers, &e. 

Bhat Nagar, 55 | Lala Murli Dhar, 

Matharg isi08, 13 ditto, | 

nee: 1500 Chandrnarain, J 
Sathia, . ae 150 | Enquiry, Surgeons and Oculists. 
Darzi Sribastab, : +: 900 | Sahay, Tailors. 
Dhobi, ABUL Bo0G se s00 | Naka Jag, W ashermen. 
Ahir, eiciete siecare ; 5250 | Bhai Ram Goordial, Cowherds. 
Jat, aieien atice 54 | Enquiry, 
Kaséra, Late uerexe 1300 | Sita Ram, Braziers. 
Koeri, tite egotcte AS 8351 Fakir Sanoki Chaudri,| Gardeners—Farmers. 
Ditto, allahabadi, ale 100 | Enquiry, 
Kahar, def yced ihe i 5000 | Sewpersad Chaudri, Bearers, 
Kunbi, 600 | Murli Dhar, Servants. 
Mallah, Price att .- | 1500 | Mehga, Boatmen. 
Kalwar, eee Sete Ae 6600 | Ganésh Choudri, Distillers. 
Teli, eves 2500 | Mohan Choudri, Oilmen. 
Teli, diliwal, 5 8 1200 | Lachman Phé, 
Tell, bengali, .... ae 100 |} Chundnarain, 
Tamoli, Pee efsiate f 1200 | Baboo Lal Choudri, Sellers of Pawn. 
Halwai, Seis Rae fs 1500 | Khaderu, Confectioners. 
Khatik, eine fot a 400 | Ganpat and Persad, Fruiterers. 
Sonar, purabia, .... -- | 1100 | Dulam, Goldsmiths. 
Tara Gaur, soni, scheks AG 30 | Enquiry, 
Mera Soni, jypuri, .... os 50 | Khushial, 
Karta, sonar, weet Be 60 | Enquiry, 
Lohar, kanouji, .... Aa 1800 | Mol Chand, Smiths. 

parabia, .... OE 100 | Harak Chand, 
Barhi, : sare Ag 900. | Hichha, Carpenters. 
Kharadi, 194 | Sital, Turners. 
‘Lahera, 300 | Enquiry, Workers in Lac. 
Lahera churi wala, Sisters ae 60 | Badlu, Lac Bracelet-makers. 
Patwa, anee a 400 | Enquiry, Threaders of Beads, &c. 
Tanti pitambar baph, 260 | Sitaram Chaudtri, Silk Weavers. 
Khatri Gota baph, 75 ditto, Lace Embroiderers. 
Sarki wala, 3 14 | Enquiry, Ear-ring Makers. 
Mochi, 500 | Bisesvar, Shoemakers. 
Hiratarash bundalikhandi, | 95 | Khaho, Diamond Cutters. 
Nau sribastab, : 4 850 | Ram Baksh, Barbers. 
Nau pachian, aisyeas A 12 | Bisesvar, 
Nau gujarati, .... piceets 30 | Enquiry. 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 495 


SUDRAS. Number.| On whose authority. Profession or occupation. 
Kasbi khangi, or Ramjani, sb 1500 | Enquiry, Courtezans. 
Ditto, Mee ae 264 | Sankat Ram, Nach girls. 
Kathak, a0 eietere Sic 118 | Siw Sahay, Music and Dancing Masters. 
Bhunja Kanoujia, Ms 556 | Ramjiawan, Sellers of parched grains. 
Kandu, srelcte 6 as 1200 | Ghinhu, Ditto. 
Gadaria, bodG gous ae 350 | Gajjan, Shepherds. 
Bharéria, Sood Seki As 395 | Ganpat, Brahman beggars. 
Kumhar, adoe a 700 | Enquiry, Potters. 
Ditto Gadha wala, sean wid 37 | Kishun, Brick-makers. 
Lonia, Botte ete 400 | Gulu, ; eres Builders of mud 
Bénu Bansi, ° ae 125 ! Enquiry, Cane workers. 
Ch, hipi, Bosc adr a0 160 | Anant Ram, Chintz printers. 
Sirki Walé...... Goon sty 35 | Kishun, Thatchers. 
Bari, eis ouas + 415 | Lachman and Sankar, | Link boys. 
Chumar, D646 isyeke -- | 1850 | Khadéru, Leather workers. 
Kutta Chumar, spars 5% 180 | Krishna, Silk-dyers. 
Thuwai, oe Sage b 30 | Ganésh Das, Silk-workers. 
Laru Marhatta, | dddo ate 4 | Panru, Shoe-makers, ; 
Corpse-dressers, eaters of dead 
Dom, ein ere Sobor |. -onguniBabeniall oe aire ag Se 
Tari wala pasi, ado so 96 | Jéwan Chaudri. Toddy sellers. 
Mochi Dekhani, tiers ie 50 | Rama Curriers. 
Dabgar, cose sijets 56 76 +| Bakshu Chaudri, Leather vessel makers. 
Kanjar, Sele Br 33 | Enquiry, Rope-makers. 
Dharkar narsinha wale, ae 50 | Ram sarak, Cane-workers. 
60302 


HINDU FAKIRS. 


Dandi, ayers wheter 


700 Enquiry, | Live on charity. 
Jatti, sfeiere odoc gio 22 ditto, Jyns. 
Kanphata, Jour 6o08 a0 38 ditto, Attend at Bhyronath temple. 
Kabirpanthi, .... Boca S10 40 ditto, Have land in Goruckpoor. 
Naniksahi, S006 C500 1000 ditto, Sikhs. 
Ramanandi, .... steers ays 2500 ditto, 
Sanyasi, dou Be ni -» | 2600 | Motigir Kotwal, Mostly Gosain merchants. 
Dravir Sanyasi, .. aleicie ae 50 | Kumar Swami, 
Lingia, 4900 Sehcys 54 106 | Enquiry, Take all offerings to Mahadeo, 
Jangam, pea sistets x 16 | Jangambari Mahant, {| Go about with cows and bells. 
Aghori, Saab FOO BS 200 | Enquiry, Naked outcasts. 
7171 
MUSELMANS. 
Professions. Number.| On whose authority. 


Rais, Shékh, Seid,Moghel, Patan, 


re nf 10000 | By estimation, Persons of independent fortune. 
> eve 
Wali Sah Moham- 
Julaha, slater HOOF -- | 10000 ed, confirmed by - | Weavers. 
enquiry, 
Ghalla wala Trilochani, .. | 1000 | Muradan, Grain Merchants of Trilochan. 
Mali, KO00 5006 ae 62 Kinga, Gardeners. 
Kunjra, alarere Sa50 se 325 | Ramzani Chaudri, Green grocers. 
Darzi, secre 900K | 700 | Sahay, Tailors. 


496 CENSUS OF THE POPULATION 
Professions. Number.| On whose authority. 

Dhobi, dilewal, .... 80 | Imam Baksh, Pirbaksh,| Washermen. 

benaresi, 100 | Budhu Choudri, 
Kasbi, khangi, .... 1212 | Enquiry, Courtezans. 

ghungruband, 500 ditto, Dancing girls. 
Jarrah, stereie d : 225 ditto, Surgeons. 
Dafali, odie : a 200 | Bakhshu, Musicians. 
Hijra, cee es at 50 | Enquiry, Eunuchs—take fees on births. 
Atashbaz, aes ‘ wih 200 ) Babu Khan & Séra Ch:) Fire-work makers. 
Rangréz, Ae, ae ne 475 | Bakshan Choudri, Dyers. 
Halal Khor, ‘ Aes ae 900 ditto, Scavengers. 
Hakak, a Seok at 112 | Karman, Gem polishers. 
Moharkhand, .... svete wi 25 | Rajab, Engravers. 
Sikligar, a atsate ws 71 | Imambaksh, Metal polishers. 
Kundigar, ape Lae ‘ 75 | Miran, Wire flatteners. 
Kalabatun walé, ans : 28 | Enquiry, Gold and silver lace makers. 
Lohar, AAS mises a 50 | Rajab Ali Mukarband,} Blacksmiths. 
Kheradi, sand be 50 ditto, Turners. 
Chari walé, .... a 300 | Zia Ullah, Cutlers. 
Mochi, jindaz, Ne ue 105 | Madar Baksh Choudri,| Saddlers. 

jutiwala, .... an 212 | Behadur Choudri, Shoe makers. 
Kasai, bara, He i 354 | Mihter Bhangar, Butchers. 

ch, hota, 65 ue 250 | Titu and Benaresi, ditto. 
Nan Bai, are cis aA He 130 | Pir Mohamed Choudri,| Bakers. 
Sabon walé, .... 7 Ae 41 | Subhani Choudri, Soap sellers. 
Satrinji walé, .... avant $4 63 , Ramzani, Makers of Setrinjees. 
Bhatteara, Baas one. ae 381 Khanu and Jumani, Servants in Serais. 
Galicha walé, .... 5S 62 | Bechan Choudri, Carpet makers. 
Bihisti, 0 180 | Ch,hedi Choudri, Water carriers. 
Intpaz, Ae 173 | Gausi and Madari, Brick-makers. 
Nycha band, me 62 | Nur Mohamed, Hookah-snake makers. 
Dbunia, ue 100 | Enquiry. Cotton spinners. 
Madari, os 20 ditto, Snake catchers. 
Rafugar, a 933 | Mir Fazl Ali, Shawl menders. 
Tarke ch hata walé, a is | Phénku Badkash, Umbrella makers. 
Chylodar, ue, 9 Pardsahi, 
Niaria, a 125 | Karm Khan, Refiners. 
Chabuk Sawar, | ie 200 | Enquiry, Grooms. 
Raj, sted 300 ditto, Bricklayers. 
Kahar, 200 ditto, Bearers. 
a are 20 Fakirs and 7 500 | Enquiry at each takia, 
Chandal, Had 700 | Madari Choudri, Outcasts. 

31248 { 


Abstract of the Castes and Sects in the foregoing Catalogue. 


HINDUS. Number. 

Brahmans,” Maharashtr 0 ooo mae 11 denominations.} 11311 
Ngai 20 eR OMto Oi I Lod mesa to. 7 ditto, 1231 

AD lh yeh abhor oie RR aan geal 1l ditto, 567 

Wich: eli i Kite a aie tack vu acage ent, « 8 ditto, 1146 

Me wart Urn Ves ENE aa 7 ditto, 430 

BGT wal pe cas) mechs re ats yah eee 20 ditto, 2068 

Kan Kubye ee celcaitia ee | ee 4 ditto, 6602 

Gaur, abeveisleiek cliche g AMuore a saare 10 ditto, 1000 


OF THE CITY OF BENARES. 497 


HINDUS. Number. 
Brahmans, Bengali, seicels SA Sie .. | 1 denomination. 3600 
Gangaputr, ais ie Yala Wierd UC EGR Roy ey ira 1000 
Twenty-seven less important sects, ...... aie eerearatcreistelcnsie ve 3026 
——-—| 32381 
Kshétris, Rajputs, ee ais Eo shagsis .. | 2 ditto, ...... 6200 
Bhuihar, satelite sstetnele ie Meditto, sare 5600 
Khetri, Aare! Searels 4 A RG) Gittoy 2... 68 3092 
— 14292 
Baesyas, or Bunyas, . = see ielieatae B22 GILL, .datsisislete 8300 
Sudras, including sixty-nine professions, Binet ay eh sion oiahete «ie sialcte 60302 
Hindu Fakirs, BU isabn sate WN AE POG, aiee eps 7171 
——| 75773 
MUSELMANS. 
Gentry, or Rais, ARs 10000 
Forty-four professions and trades, Ah epee ey) Be Oe Pe al caters 20048 
Fakirs and Chandals, BB Ga Bon | Mel iiubetn RRO RNa 3p sttharelete Prien sted state(s 1200 
Hindu population, ...... eeneutere 122365 
Muselman ditto, Seovensi see 30248 
Add for children not estimated by the Chaudris, ‘and for visit- i) nega 26387 
ors and unavoidable omissions, apraene § ara Reis ANC OL RES 
Population of the City, as by the Mehala Census, a WP tej el-oleieter olen Uilliels rai har oh ae 180000 


TABLE IV. 


Annual consumption of several Articles of Food, upon which Town duties are levied in the City 
of Benares, extracted from the Custom-house returns. 


1824. 1825-6. 1826-7. Average. 


—"~ 


tupees. 


Rupees. I Rs. farmed, 


Gross amount of Town duties collected, 52000 53000 


ducting the expence of collection, 40000 


ARTICLES. 

Maunds. Maunds. Maunds. Maunds. 

Ghi, 66.06 Heae Be 16500 — 17400 15100 15700 
Tobacco, 0000 este ae 13900 12600 15100 13800 
Beetlenut, aciels Dou ve 1500 1200 2500 1700 
Turmeric, Nees ANeie Ne 1900 2200 2400 2200 
Sugar, dry, tele Ao Bo . 4700 5000 3300 4300 
Sugar, wet, : 3600 2200 3300 3000 
Jagri, 12300 2400 9400 8000 
Molasses, 12800 6700 16400 11900 
Oil, 1900 1100 1800 1600 
Oil Seeds, 15400 8700 4400 9500 
Salt, Lahori, aise doing 33 | 349 229 200 
Saémer, Neleve 58105 10736 9738 13336 12270 
Balamba, é 5606 5266 5636 7354. | 6080 
Sdlamba, : 1980 915 1312 1400 
Soehar, 115 195 134. 150 
Bobcha, Ate 6 12 25 15 
Khari, he - 2 147 4 50 
Total of Salt, 18000 17000 22500 19200 

) 


CENSUS OF BENARES. 


493 


-samusgr ausvbopT ‘NOLIINVET “OD ‘N “YT 


tole olf oe olf olfe o] ‘up 


I110/6 O0]/0LO|]¢ olf9 0/16 Of to 


91 0 | GO| 6L 0] 91 O| & 0 | G O | “aseE 


0€ 1] 0G 1} GE LT] OL LT | 08 LT} So T | ‘earoW 


Olt |oO L|Geolceo]o TL] 0 1 }qealeg 


SL 1 | O11} 98 0]¢ T /€ee 1 [fer T I “remog 


02/0 LIE LIOLrtlo @] 0 @ I ‘opoy 


TAL I eee O [EL 1 [fe 1 [FOL 1 |fet 1 |" “wer 
100g 


Si:t | 0 TELE T | OE] © L | 0% 1-/Appeg 


Or 


L{ St Co L|OLL|OLT|O 1 S4t 1 | St t | sopieg 


Ne) 
oD 
o 
in 
N 


0 I |tze 0 | 82 0| ST O \f9T 0 I /fze 0 | ce O Kize 0 | 93 0} 930} S10] 820/10 Tt [fe 0 [ze 0 | OF 0 | Zz O [ze 0 | cz 0 | eu 


Ge 0 | GE 0 | 0€ 0 | GL 0 | 41 0 eee 0] OL LT] ¢ 1 [ze 0] Ge 0 | 0g 0 | 62 0! 920 zg 0 | 9e0/¢ I feeo!¢.1]eeol¢e¢ tlo 1 eo Ad, 
ES (PUl)*.O8 *PUl|" LS “PULLS “PUl| AS “PUL/ LS *PUll*4S “PU ks “PUl LS “PUL) LS “PML] "68 “PUl| LS *PUll*LS “PULl As PUEslLs ‘pul*as ‘PUL "LS “PU-48 PU; 4s PUel cs PuUl-Ls “pul 


GCCL | SGGL | LECT | OSL | SECT | PEGI | EST | SZST | IZZL | OBI | GIGI | SISTL | AISI | OLSTL | SITL | FISVSL | SISL | SISTL | LISL | OLSL | GOST 
“1V9 


“‘YSYT BCBL 97 GOST Lvak ayy wosf ‘sasnuag Jo jy 247 wra§ “Urns Jo NALIN 2M 


“A HTEViL 


VI. 


JOURNEY 


ACROSS THE 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL. 


By H. WALTERS, Ese. 


Lerr Dacca on the night of the 19th October 1828, and passed through 
an uninteresting inundated country, with scattered villages stuck on little 
islands, which barely sufficed to keep the people’s heads above water. At 
day light, onthe 26th, arrived at Chatak, and breakfasted with Mr. INGLIs, 
a respectable lime merchant. The dbangalo is situated ona pretty little hill, 
close to the river Stirma. This place is about a day’s journey from Svlhet. 
Started at eleven, and crossed the Hauras to Pandua. The Hauras are 
extensive 7hils or lakes covered with reed and rose jungle, having open 
expanses of water, many of them a mile across—while in other places the 
jungle is so thick it is with difficulty a boat can be impelled through it. 
The depth of water is, in many places, ten or twelve feet. They extend 
for many miles along the foot of the hills. In the dry season, the 
water runs off, and leaves an extensive waste, to be occupied by buffalos 


and tigers, and the Barasinga, or large Stlhet stag, having six distinct 


300 JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


branches or projections from eachhorn. Reached Pandua at sunset. It 
is situated immediately under the hills, and is in fact the frontier village. 
Here is a small fort, and a company of Sepoys to keep the hill people in 
check. From hence the Casitas obtain their rice, cloth, salt, and in fact 
all the necessaries of life, in exchange for honey, wax, oranges, cinna- 


mon, betelnut, &c., the produce of their hills. 


27th. After some trouble succeeded in making a start at about 
eight a.mM., my baggage and tent carried by about twenty Casas, 
and myself mounted on a pony. At nine reached Ramsing’s house— 
where a tent was pitched. Observed a forest tree, covered with a 
very large description of green caterpillar; a native with a bow and 
arrow, was keeping watch, and driving off the birds, to prevent the 
destruction of the insects. These caterpillars produce a coarse kind of 
yellow silk, called “ Manga,” from which cloth is made by the Cdsvas. 
When they have devoured the foliage of one tree, (as they had nearly 
done of this) they are carefully removed to another. From hence the 
ground begins to rise. Passed along a tolerable path, through a grove of 
orange and areca trees,—crossed the bed of the Pandua Nala three or 
four times, over sand and round stones—now began to ascend in earnest. 
Proceeded through groves of orange and citron trees, loaded with fruit, 
interspersed among the broad-leaved plaintain and stately betel, with an 
underwood of flowering shrubs, and the prickly pine-apple obtruding its 
fruit across the path. Nothing can be more beautiful than these cool and 
shady groves, soothed by the murmurs of distant torrents, and refreshed 
by numerous crystal streams. A group of Cdsia women passed by, 
bearing at their backs conical baskets, suspended from their foreheads by 
bands of matting, and heavily laden with lumps of smelted iron ore. 
My baggage was carried in the same manner. The women are the best 


porters, and young boys and girls also hear their appropriate loads. 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL. 501 


The Casias are a stout athletic race; fair, as compared with the 
inhabitants of the plains, and with muscular limbs. They are devoted to 
chewing paun and betel, very fond of spirituous liquor, and eat and drink 
whatever comes in their way. In religion they follow some of the Hindu 
customs. They have no written character, and their language is different 
from that of the Garos and other surrounding tribes; though they all 
appear to be but different dialects of the same original language. 
Theft is unknown among them, and they are true to their word. 
In moral character, they tower, like their mountains, over the natives 
of the plains. They always go armed either with bows and arrows, 
or long naked iron swords. Their houses are raised on posts about four 
feet from the ground, with a flooring of bamboos, and are well boarded, 
and secured all round from the rain and cold. The men, women, and 
children live above, and the pigs, fowls, and the rest of the family, 
inhabit the lower apartment, and take care that nothing is wasted. Their 
houses are surrounded by yards fenced with neat stone walls; and the 
villages are usually erected on the side of a hill, the houses rising one 
above another. Property descends to the nephew of the occupier, by his 
sister. They are governed by numerous petty Rajas, who exercise but 
little control over them. On all occasions of importance, the Queen 
Mother, and the elders of the tribe, are consulted, and nothing can be 
done without their consent. Their pigs are a small handsome race, like 
the Chinese; their cattle large and sleek, and in good condition, the 


pasturage on the hills being excellent. 


Ascending by a stone causeway : at ten reached the first stone bridge, 
over a mountain torrent, in a beautiful secluded spot. A single stone 
slab, of large size, at least twelve feet long, forms the bridge, having four 
upright stones at the corners. The torrent rushing over the rocks 
immediately under it, is received in a rude bason full of large fish. The 

H 4 


502 JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


rocks are of limestone. Beautiful flowers and creeping plants, ferns and | 


mosses, invite attention at every step. 


Here a very steep ascent commences, and continues till a landing 
place is reached, shaded with trees, whence branches off the road to the 
village of Supar-Punji. This road descends into and crosses the valley. 
Passed over three or four stone bridges of small size, and one of bambu— 
the scenery secluded and beautiful. Ascended a very bad road, and avery 
steep fall, at an angle of forty-five in some places. Succeeded in reach- 
ing the village at half-past eleven a.m. The village is stockaded and 
defended by a “cheval de frize” of sharp-pointed bambus. Obliged to pitch 
my tent on a level space inside, under the shade of some beautiful trees, 
commanding a superb view of the mountain glen, the overhanging 
precipices, and the plain below. Under these trees are some two or three 
hundred monuments, large and small, all formed of circular solid stone 
slabs, supported by upright stones set an end, which enclose the space 
below. They vary from two to six and eight feet in diameter, and are 
disposed on the side of the hill all close together, producing a singular 
effect. On these the villagers sit on occasions of state, each on his own 
stool, large or small, according to his rank in the commonwealth. These 
are, in fact, however, tombs. The dead bodies of the Casitas are burned 
on a spot set aside for the purpose, a little higher up the hill, and their 
ashes are collected and put into earthen pots, which are deposited under 
the stones. I saw several of these pots by looking through the inter- 
stices of the stones. As it happened, a dead child was brought out of 
the stockade by its mother and female relations, who made a dreadful 
howling. They placed it in a sort of wooden cradle ee in the 
place of concremation, and after fire was placed under it, retired. to the 
village. A Priest then mumbled some prayers, while the dogs and pigs 
fought for the plantains, oranges, and green betelnut, which had 


been offered on the occasion, and would doubtless have fought for 


As, Res. Vol. XVII. 


Stone Seals alba hasya Village. 
4 bo 6 fTiam. = 


pa 
ri 


; fous HIN Dm 


i | a 


ot li y : 


Bellows uscd tn Smelling Tron 


Section of lhe Pandua Fills 


B 

A 1 
A. Plain of Asam..........120 above lielevel of the Sea foals Billy covered wilh Tungle 
B. ANGTUGL,. veecen ees 4090 FPelen decomposed Grae, 
C. MGRUKA............... 4746. 2. Open & hilly with fer trees ~ Grande 
D. Bed of Furypani K... 2320. 3. Fir; Larch and apple lrees 
BE NAAR. es Kis ee GOODE ee rani boulders. 
F Langbré Rin TEL ee dou4 6 4. — Trees stunted) disappear allogether 
G. Mogelang. ea 3942. lowards the fouth. red micacecus Slate, 
H. Baga pane gE: ar 4877 3 — Blue slale ne (ees, excep 
L Saruram abot lhe Baga pane. 
K. Cherra Pane 6.— Sandstone - flat and fen bare 
L, Plain of Uelhel 7._ Coal, 

TP del, Bigs. - JAB. Tassin Lilh 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL 503 


the roasted child also, were he not too hot for them. The people 
looked on with the most perfect indifference—the father, a stupid looking 
brute, stood chewing his pawn. In the evening, in strolling through the 
village, to the west end, I had a fine view of the great waterfall which 
runs over the table ledge of the mountain, and forms an upper and lower 
fall of altogether not less than one thousand five hundred feet. By 
going up a very.steep ascent, and winding through the upper Pwyi or 
village, the bottom of the fall was approached, so that I got wet with the 
spray. Across this torrent, they told me, is the road to Cherra-Punji ; 
but it is evident that it is impossible loaded coolies can cross it; indeed 
it would be difficult for any one to do so. It is a noble fall, and well 
worth coming out of the way to see. I learnt moreover, that further on 
ravines are crossed by monkey bridges, formed of two or three bambus 
tied together; so that in fact I had come the wrong road, and had to retrace 
my steps to the landing place before mentioned, notwithstanding what 
the Casias said to the contrary. Information was brought me in the 
evening, which led me to think the Supar-Punji people had some design 
in bringing me to their village instead of taking me the usual road, and 
I thought it possible, as I was completely in their power, inside their 
stockades, that I might have some trouble in making my escape. 

28th. Rose by moonlight this morning, and without disturbing the 
people, quitted the village. Accompanied by two servants, I soon found 
my way to the bottom of the valley, and ascending the hill on the opposite 
side, reached the landing place before mentioned, in time to see the sun 
rise in all its majesty. At seven A. m. reached the great stone, or rather 
rock, at the foot of the “ Mahadeo ki Cherti,’ which commands a 
glorious view of the valley and plain below. After resting, proceeded 
to climb the ascent, almost perpendicular, and at eight reached the first 
stone door-at the top of the hill, the great stone door at twenty minutes 


to nine, and the village of Masmae at nine a. mM. The scenery from 


304 JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


the crest of the mountain is beautiful, and very extensive—but the view 
from the table rock overhanging the glen, and the village of Supar-Punji, is 
magnificent. The mountain forms a horse-shoe, the top perfectly flat, and 
the sides quite perpendicular, like a wall, so that I actually sat with my 
legs hanging over it, and admired the water tumbling over the rock in 
the centre of the horse-shoe. Had I fallen, I must have gone through a 
space of at least one thousand feet, before a friendly tree would have 
stopped my progress. The uprights and stone doors are monuments to 
the memory of departed Rajas and Chiefs, some of them are wonderful 
works, resembling those of ‘“‘ Stone henge” in construetion, and vying 
with them in magnitude. The gate mentioned above is about twelve feet 


high, and is formed of very large single slabs of stone—one slab that I 


afterwards saw, a circular stone, measured twelve feet in diameter by. 


about two feet thick, and was raised four feet from the ground, some of 
them must weigh thirty tons at least, and are often brought from a 
distance. These monuments are found near all the villages on the hills. 
I observed some upright slabs of granite that stood at least twenty feet 
high from the ground. They are detached from the rock by means of 
fire; and four or five hundred men combine to convey and set them up 
on the death of any famous Chief. They mark and immortalize the family 
as well as the individual, and are held in great reverence by all the people. 
When a descendant dies, a feast is made of two, three, or four bullocks, ac- 
cording to the man’s means, and the bullocks’ heads are tied to the top of 
the stone, as a memento of the importance of the individual. I observed 
several tied up in this way. From Masmae to Cherra-Punji, the road is 
pretty level, till the latter village is approached, when a considerable hill 
must be ascended. Found a tent and two good huts at Cherra. It is 
proposed to establish a Sanitarium at this place, for English soldiers and 
sick people, from Calcutta, &c. The elevation is about five thousand feet 
above the level of the sea. The air is cool, light, and refreshing; and 


although the sun is hot, it is innoxious. The hill is free from jungle, 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL. 505 


covered with fine pasture and flowers, but rock y—and the ravines filled with 
trees and shrubs—I can almost fancy myself on the top of Bannerdown! 
The range of hills runs east and west. The view over the plain is most 
extensive. I should think the eye, at one glance, must take in a semicircle 
of fifty miles at least—Chatak and Sclhet are visible, and the course of the 


Surma to a great distance. 


Thursday 20th.—Started at half-past five, and at half-past eight 
reached Surarim, the first village—passed over a coal region, the coal 
cropping out of the ground—road tolerable so far. Here iron-smelters 
reside—entered one of the forges, the bellows are curious, and are worked 
by women, who stand on the top, and move them with their feet; 
the furnace is made of clay, hooped with iron: the ore is broken 
into small pieces, and put into the furnace with charcoal—the iron 
melts and runs out at the bottom, it is then taken up and cut into 
large lumps for exportation to the plains. It is very good, and is used 
for all purposes in this part of India. The country is bare and open, and 
the rocks of sandstone. The iron ore is collected in the streams below. 
Proceeded along the edge of a mountain, the path not two feet broad, anda 
tremendous precipice yawning beneath. The view of the valley and distant 
glens and mountains is most sublime—descended through a beautiful glen 
amidst tall strait trees, with numerous flowers and shrubs, and soon reach- 
ed the first stream—crossed on stones—a beautiful spot. Ascended to 
the top of the opposite hill; the road very rugged and steep; the valley 
altogether is the most picturesque and beautiful I ever saw,—large masses 
of rock, the strata, perfectly horizontal, stand out from amidst the foliage, 
while hurled beneath are huge fragments having the strata perpendicular. 
Reached the top of the hill about eleven ; from hence the road is tolerable. 


Reached the top of the “‘ Zeber Pahar,” and looked down on the Kédla and 


. Safed rivers—a glorious view—on the right a beautiful water fall, the 


source of the former river. Crossed the Kala Pani. Reached the Safed 
14 


506 , JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


or Boga Pani. The road lay over broken fragments, or rather huge 
masses of rock, along the bank: Crossed over a bridge made of a few 
sticks tied together, the water dashing among the rocks beneath; ‘the 
river at present is about a hundred feet wide, but after rain it swells pro- 
digiously ; the bed of this river is four thousand eight hundred and seventy- 
seven feet above the level of the sea, by barometer. The water is quite 
white, as if mixed with fine white sand, though when taken up it appears 
perfectly clear. "The water of the other river, at the same time, appears 
quite: black, from‘its rocky bed. Ascended a long, steep, difficult and 
fatiguing ‘hill by regular stone steps, some of them loose, and at half- 
past two arrived at Mozplong, after a very hard day’s march—distance 
about fourteen miles. Mozplong is five thousand nine hundred and forty- 
two feet high, and is the highest range in the journey. “The rock is 
a blue ‘slate; there are no trees, except about the Boga or Safed Pani, 
where I observed the first firs, small and stunted. The ground is 
covered with flowers ‘and ‘shrubs, strawberries, raspberries, dandelions, 
thistles, &c. 


« Friday 31st.—At day-break, thermometer 50. Started at five a. m.— 
road, hill and dale, with one steep descent, and little streams here and 
there, ‘the vallies stiff and white with hoar frost! the first I have seen since 
leaving England fifteen years ago. There is always a difference of at least 
ten degrees between the plains and the tops of the hills. In November 1827, 
the thermometer stood at twenty-one, in one of these vallies. Crossed a 
goodsized plain with cultivation, and then a steep ascent brought me to the 
summit of the hill; which overlooks the plain Siang. Passed several beds 
of quartz; and collected some specimens; no trees to be seen, but fine pas- 
ture; and numerous flowers—fine plains and high round hills, some conical. 
Left the village of Stang on the right, on the top of a ravine, with trees, at 
about a quarter after eight: Thisis not a friendly village. Tolerable road 


with’ soft black ‘soil, and occasional bogs. Arrived at a stream, and 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL. 507 


observed the first firs disposed in clumps—crossed on stepping stones, 
passed over several hills, and arrived at Lombray in two hours and a half 
from Stang. This is about half-way between Moiplong and Nanklow. 
Left the village of Lombray on the right amidst trees. The country begins 
to open, and to be better covered with timber, firs especially. This village 
has also a bad name. Lombray stands at an elevation of 5914 feet. 
The trees are stunted; the rock is a red micaceous slate. Passed over 
moderate hills and an extensive plain, with some scattered cultivation 
and a hut here and there, and at twelve o’clock reached the village of 
Mairang—this village is also left on the top of the hill to the right, 
the road here winding round the bottom of a hill to the left. Proceeded 
to some shady firs, commanding a view of a beautiful little stream 
with a small fall, the hillocks clothed with firs rising in picturesque 
forms around, and behind it.. We were now in a granite country, the 
firs indicating the transition. As we advanced, the firs grew larger, 
and the country opened into a beautiful undulated park—the scenery is 
extremely beautiful. Saw several very large upright stones and stone 
gates. Passed a regular mow of grain in the straw, perfectly English: 
observed apple, pear, and plum trees, with brambles and black briars, 
strawberries, &c. ; even daisies are said to carpet the sod! but unfortunately 
they were not in blossom. Birch trees also flourish. Large granite 
boulders stand out at intervals, and crown the tops of the hills. This 
country, growing more beautiful at every step, continues for seven miles 
from Liat hdt to Nanklow, which we reached at four p.m. Nanklow is 


4,550 feet above the level of the sea. 


Saturday, Ist November.—My eyes opened this morning on a beau- 
tifully clear view of the snow-clad mountains of Thebet, elevating their 
giant peaks above the Bhotiya range. These latter, about fourteen thou- 
sand feet high, also shewed peaks covered partially with snow; but the 


former, which attain an elevation of twenty-two thousand feet, are clothed 


508 JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


in perpetual white. They reflect a pinkish tinge, and are thus easily 
distinguished from the clouds below them. The valley of Asam, covered 


with clouds, looked like a vast white sea. 


2d.—Accompanied Capt. Jones to the bottom of the Nanklow hill, a 
distance of four miles, one continued descent, through most beautiful groves 
of fir and hill bambu, with the most exquisite views of the hills and rocks 
above and below, from the different elevations, that can be imagined—crossed 
a brook, and, after a further descent, in an hour and a half’s walking and 
riding, arrived at the Boga river. Here is a fall of about sixty feet, the 
river rushing and breaking with fury over rocks, some of them almost 
perpendicular—immediately over the fall is a bridge formed of deal spars, 
built by Mr. Scorr—it is upwards of one hundred feet long—some of the 
trees, on which it is supported, were carried away last rains. The fall is 
received in a large bason, thirty feet deep in the middle and sixty yards 
in diameter. This bason, with the bridge and the over-hanging rocks 
and trees, and surrounding scenery, is one of the most beautiful spots I 
ever visited. The rock, which is extremely hard, is of serpentine. In 
places, it has been completely honeycombed by the action of the water— 
large lumps of pure quartz and granite boulders, with other rocks, in 
detached pieces, abound here, and beautiful flowers and creeping plants 


complete the scene. 


3d.—Rode to Prospect Rock, properly so called—the view it com- 
mands of the Garo hills, the plain of Asam with the Brakmaputra 
river—the Bhoteah and Thibet mountains, is most grand, extensive, and 
diversified, and I imagine, can be equalled by few in the world.—The 
Kasia monuments are numerous, and of large size, about Nanklow. 'The 
circular and square stones, supported by stones placed on end, are 
extremely similar to the ‘“‘Cromlechs” found in Cornwall and Wales— 


doubtless those ancient monuments were appropriated to the same 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL 509 


purpose—the reception of the ashes of deceased Chiefs, enclosed in 
urns. If this was the case, how singular it is that the customs of nations, 
in the same stage of society indeed, but situated at such an immeasurable 
distance from each other, should be found so exactly to coincide! If any 
doubt exists as to the purpose for which the monuments in Britain were 
erected, is it not dissipated by observation, as to the actual use of similar 
monuments in this country at the present day? I did not observe that 
any of the upright stones were placed in circles, like those of Stene Henge, 
but generally in lines. Some of them are ornamented by & carved stone, 
placed like a crown on the top of the centre one. # have not heard that 
monuments of a similar character have been found in other parts of India. 


I believe they are peculiar to this range, or rather to the Kaséas. 


4th.—Started at six a. m. on the return to Cherra. We made good 
our journey in two days, without accident. We carried the snowy Thibet 
peaks with us, halfthe firstday’s journey, the atmosphere being remarkably 


clear—indeed the snowy mountains looked better than from Nanklow. 


We spent the 6th at Cherra, and found some beautiful flowers and 
plants, the roots and seeds of some of which I collected. The cinnamon 
tree grows here wild—the leaves and young branches are exported to 
the plains for sale. Also aspecies of holly is found; in fact, here is an 
ample unexplored field for a Botanist—also for a Mineralogist. I pro- 


cured some specimens of the coal, and of other rocks. 


On the 9th we started at day-light, in opposite directions. I got down 
the hill, and reached my budgerow at two p.m. and by three p. mu. next 
day, had commenced the Sessions at Sylhet. This is a very pretty station 
—some of the houses are on small hills—and altogether in soil, plants, and 
appearance, it is very like Chittagong. The rides and drives are very 
pretty. The place is full of Manipuris,—they are clean looking people, 

K 4 


o10 JOURNEY ACROSS THE 


and very industrious—numbers have returned to their own country since 
the Burmese have been driven out—but thousands still remain. They form 


the great body of an Irregular Corps here, and make good soldiers. 
Trip to the Cave of Bhiwan, in the Kasia Hills, December 8th, 1828. 


Started from Sylhet at sun-rise, and crossed the country to Company 
Gunj on horse back. Crossed the Chingerkhal on the way, and found 
the road dry and good, but here and there some swamp—arrived at the 
Gunj, on the bank of a river, at half-past eleven; and having overtaken 
the coolies, breakfasted here, under a tree.—Waited till the people came 
up, and started again at two p.m., reached Pandua at half-past three, and 
the tent, at the foot of the hills, at sun-set. , 


Tuesday 9th.—Breakfasted, and started on foot for the Cave at ten 
A. M., passed over three ranges of sandstone hills—about five hundred feet 
high, covered with timber and brushwood—the road lay for some time 
along the bed of a mountain torrent—over which we were carried two or 
three times—arrived at a spot which appears a natural barrier to further 
progress—perpendicular rocks, with high trees, surround a bason, into 
which flows a torrent through the only opening in the rocks. The spot 
is most beautiful and secluded—and the long roots of creepers hanging 
down like ropes, together with the boldness and height of the rocks, and 
beauty of the foliage, give the spot a peculiar character. We were 
carried through the water, and clambered up the bed of the torrent. One 
of the hills is particularly steep, actually subtending an angle of forty-six 
degrees—this is called the ‘‘ Devil’s ladder.” Ata quarter past eleven 
reached the mouth of the Cave, on the side of the great range of limestone 
mountains—it faces the S. W. The entrance hardly attracts notice, and 
certainly few would imagine that the small hole which presents itself was 


the portal to such magnificent chambers. It looks as if the mountains 


PANDUA HILLS, NEAR SILHET, IN BENGAL. 511 


thad been hurled together by an earthquake, or by the influence of 
a volcano—Between two pieces of the detached rock, one person only 
can enter at a time. One of the low ranges was covered, I observed, 
with iron scoria, like the refuse of an iron foundery. On entering the 
Cave, we descended about thirty yards over large broken pieces of 
rock, some of them difficult to climb over, and reached alevel. After 
preparing our torches, and getting every thing in order, we followed 
our Kasia guide, and, leaving a large cavern unexplored on the left, took 
a passage on the right—the roof formed a perfect natural arch on one side, 
more perpendicular than the other—and the whole was incrusted with 
stalactites. We proceeded on ina W. and N. W. direction. Sometimes 
the passage was narrow and the roof low, then swelled into superb cham- 
bers, the roof forty feet high—in some places, we walked along perfectly 
smooth rock—in others over soft mud—and in others again, climbed over 
broken, but huge fragments of rock—here and there, we came upon 
waterin rocky basons—and in many parts the rock was honey-combed by 
the action of the dropping water. The variety and beauty of the shapes; 
into which the stalactite has formed itself, exceed description. In one 
place was a remarkable specimen like a pine tree, about twelve feet high, 
b yoneand a half thick—except here and there, however, it did not sparkle 
to the light as I had expected, being covered with a brown dirty coating— 
though in particular spots it was very beautiful. After wandering through 
numerous narrow passages and various splendid halls—sometimes des- 
cending fifty feet, and sometimes ascending toa greater height, we were 
at last stopped by a deep bason of water. Here, as it was getting late, 
we turned, and by following another passage, found ourselves in our former 
track again. We had tied a string to a rock at the mouth of the Cave ; 
and let it run off a reel as we advanced, and three balls had been already 
expended—here we joined the two strings; and some of us remained, 
while others retracing their steps to meet some of the people with oil pots, 


who could not descend a precipice—rejoined us again at the same spot. 


512 JOURNEY ACROSS THE PANDUA HILLS, &c. 


Numerous passages were left to the right and left—and several singular 
fissures were apparent in the rock at different elevations. The mountain 
appears to be perforated, in all directions, like a honey-comb. In one place, 
day-light is visible through the roof at a great height. We now retraced 
our steps to the mouth of the Cave, which we reached at three o'clock. 
The thermometer outside the Cave stood at sixty-eight degrees, under 
the shade of the trees with which the entrance is surrounded—inside, it 
rose to seventy-four degrees—the air, however, was not close, or disagreea- 
ble, indeed a free circulation evidently takes place. I was, on the whole, 
much pleased and gratified by the excursion—the Cave is certainly a 
wonderful natural curiosity, and much resembles the drawings of the 
famous Cave of Antiparos, in the Levant. Its full extent has not yet been 
ascertained—tradition says, it joins the subterranean passages of the 
Seraglio of Pekin! We paced the distance, and took bearings, and found 
we had gone nearly a mile before we turned. An abrupt and deep preci- 
pice obstructs the road a little beyond where we turned, and further than 
this has not yet been explored. It would be curious to follow it up, and 
trace out all its ramifications—an opening might very probably be found 
on the opposite face of the mountain. Also to ascertain the existence, or 


otherwise, of organic remains in the muddy soil. 


Latitude of Nanklow, 0.3... . cc aes oso wocetvcs « 25° 40’ 307 N. 


Longitudé,.... 2.5. AA RAS A RRR NA: Sea parce Ol oor Ole 
Range of the Thermometer at Nanklow. 


From 23d to 31st May, thermometer varied from 67° 4! to 75° 7’. 
From ist to 14th June, = ie 68° 6’ to 72° 5’. 


As. Res. Vol. XVII. 


200 


100 


of Paces. 


8 

S| 
Se i 
| 

Si 

8 
| 

Cr Af OOF 


als pease sap L|p\ o% mal 
| 
oo 09 W/}/ H 
iW 
oT 
{ 
dS. ‘GEM | 
d v be NS peal dra | 
S y SS a3 g Sn ybry, of OF POY og M 
; Ss ee SN 3 ay ot OF PU2?220T op PPO pd 06 
Q 4 SI SoS ks 2 Ee) 
SEBS S \ 
SQ) Gary 
a iN ae 
i (US 
> Ve gf OF 
ss Sor pu2289p» \ Ng PURISD 
IN 
bry for foou 
CMs ie \\ ce M98 
( lees 
| 
wD 
ty) ) MAYO mor 
@ / ID] D 
ALoxp UY 270M 
YOY PS of JOO 
oe AA ye ae 
iG cs ae Ieyooe hla 
LoUojye obay 


‘opty YI 
P?2PUMMLPUMO tht 
Or od By 
ABPOAS hunny. 


OG MOY 


Yerie og 
7p, RASS 


yy. 
UD 
La 


tf, 


GE 


~ og. 
\ -ybry foou pw 
“) \ | z) YDPOOY 
00:00 0% \b\ , P ; @: 
imo \\ ce Fog 


| 


\ 


\ 
\pa god SPID OG 


Pry poor 09 4) \\9% P28 RB04 | 
PAS OF format ces \|| ening pedi | 
rea fl SRN | 
HEAL YE \ | f\\ it\ 
woltads fooy vr / If \\ } 
: MY \\) |) ess san) nfyMvog | 


nat 


SHELCH 


WOD2Y) JO PUOLUT 


g UNE 
\ 
MIMS & 
x . D Z 7 
ES S 2h8802DJO ISWOLUS OF NYA LG he 
S y > GEM IN G&A 
S x eet ihe Ce a 
RS} 8 ab DSDHA DIO CSUBMU GN 
‘Ss S JEMS/ G 
S Sf bros9vd0/0 IULIUT yp 5 
N S 3 An SP OEM OMN 
Yea NSS 2 AMM 
SSN S gnpnc pa STANX. 
ilo ea = 
Sh g XS = 
Roe ex XS vy S 
8S & S Sy 
me st L 
NY NS g 
Saws 2 3 
8 N 
“ QW 
S WY 
N SS 
S N 
& es R 
S R a 
‘gen Ww OF OFAN AL 
a ° 
S|, 
N | 
| 
de 
a 
Ws 
CRS] | 
S| | 
S | 
$ 
s 
SANOM'O 


pes.rowrdts ebosspd oy) 
WQS Of, 07,0! S? Th 0 
DOVELOA DIO IIUDLIU 


OF AAPM, 


go CL FROYD JO QU22PL UY YIHs 
Lipps Jd BDL 

PLoIEY a 

SOUSUL OF PNOYD QUOFS, MSO oe ie NM 
S pybmy wv, °f 7 0% words 
Parry PULL UD EU PUD COVOUIZID hd IO BOY 


OY AGN OF 


S 
= 
ye =X 
+ 2 
40. 409 
ne 


OLN 9 AL Lp 


O99 TO § 


oem BF . 
ENTS 


SOM IMS TE 


“ >? SZ CIMISS 
abvssvd DUS D0) UDIpU A y 


Y 
| 
x 
Sa & | 
SF ESS 
Re as . LOM PMN A 2s 
¥ = 
SN sis — \ 
BN EN RY OY ALNN BT ONY JOU O 
SONS A 
NSN = 8 | 
BS os 
SN 
VN L$ sy SS 
YS 8S8 
se SSS 8 | 
Sg Ass 
gree WN SSN | 
SASS SINS 
|) SEAS oe TEM OMS hor 
| ~ SNS OOTNN Of Qu | 
|@F INN ~ Ze = O 
eae AG ee repon Lop ORMN 
A a s) =~ . rar LIFMUMION LTS 
vhosyodn\g” WS rg YA us 
pilppag | ees? 4 ot a OT RATA 
OFA LE \ CS tN 6b > 
: Ee 
£9 FO a Cy saa re 9 is N 
a a Ses : 
wg Sar AN el 
S NYSE gS sy 
SNARES NN Ss 
Ss VWs. was > 
EEINININ IS NN Nis 
S&S NN SX 
XX SSsss NN Sy 
S WN Yeh SS 
NNN AG) <8 
~ VSYNHS Sis SN 
Sh SISAIS 


| 
| 
| 
t 


TB TassiwvsLih Press 99 Purriuntollar . 


Caleutla. 


VIL 


ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, 


“IN NEPAL, 
TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER, 


With some occasional allusions to the Manners and Customs of the Bhotiahs, 
by Amir, a Cashmiro-Bhotiah by birth, and by vocation an Interpreter 
to the Traders on the Route described. 


Communicatep sy B. H. HODGSON, Esa. 


Srace Ist—to Sénkhoo: three cos to the east. Sdnkhé is within the ereat 
valley of Nepal, and is inhabited by Newdrs. It is about a cos in circuit, 
and is chiefly built of three-storied pukka brick houses, and stands on 
the banks of the Manharna river, which is about six yards broad, rapid 


but shallow. 


2d Stage to Chandéla: three cos eastward. From Sdnkii, about a 
cos, you come to the foot of the mountain Chandéla, of which mountain the 
ascent to the crest is two cos. The ascent is tolerably well-peopled, and 


at the top is a Bauddha convent, where travellers halt for the day. 


3d Stage to Paniji-dinga: two and a half cos. The descent of the 
mountain Chandéla is two cos, and peopled like the ascent. From the 
L 4 


514 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


mountain’s base you travel over a stony flat of half a cos, and then reach 
the river Achda-tiga. The width of this river is about forty feet, and its 
depth about seven feet, and its course from north towards the east. 
Its bed is stony and its current violent. The passage is effected in a 
large canoe managed by four men, who are placed there by the Nepal 
government. The traveller’s resting place is a thatched house, which was 
erected by Panisu Natx, a Newdr, who is agent for the Nepalese com- 


merce, and resides at Lahassa, the capital of Bhot. 


4th Stage to Pardbasi: seven cos. From Paniji-dingd you move 
along the shoulders of mountains and through thick forests, for four cos, 


299 


to the “ Kshatriya’s Dharmasala,’ where you halt awhile and take some- 
thing to eat, and then proceed three cos further over such a road as that 
you have just passed, reaching the village of Pardbasi late at night 
Pardbasi is full of Brahmans. There are also many workers in iron at 
Parabasi, the village being a chief foundery of cannon-balls for the 
Gorkha state. The whole of this stage is sprinkled with population and 


cultivation. 


5th Stage, of three cos, to Chirku. The whole road lies along the 
shoulders of mountains. At Chirku is a stone-faced tank, ten paces 
broad, and as many long, and in depth up to a man’s chest. The water 
is extremely hot, and emits a most offensive sulphureous odour; but to 
the taste it is salt. It is esteemed highly effective in curing the cutane- 
ous and venereal diseases of such as bathe in it—and washing the eyes 
with it is a sure remedy for inflammation. Drinking it is no less effica- 
cious in removing internal complaints. The Bhotiyas, when suffering from 
indigestion and other slight illnesses, come to the tank of Chirki, with 
flesh of buffaloes, sheep and goats, which they fling into the water, where 
it is soon boiled, (such is the heat of the water) and then eat it. Chirki 


means, in the Bhotiya language, hot-water. On the side of this tank is 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER, 515 


the traveller’s resting place, in a good brick-building. This stage here 


and there exhibits signs of cultivation and population. 


6th Stage, of three cos, to Chanshing. ‘Twenty paces in advance of 
Chirkui are three brick houses of two-stories and thatched, built by the 
Nepal government, for the double purpose of protecting travellers and 
levying customs. Several grain merchants reside in these houses, and 
also one Subadar, two Jemadars, and sixty soldiers, whose duty is to pro- 
tect trade and levy tolls. Each merchant pays five rupees Mahendra malli, 
(name of Nepal rupee, which is worth thirteen annas). The whole of 
this stage is along the shoulders of mountains, with here and there a vil- 
lage and some cultivation. Chanshing, the name of the halting place, is 
derived from two Bhotiya words, meaning wood and spirituous liquors— 
whereby hangs the following tale :—A wealthy resident of the spot took 
it into his head to have a huge vase constructed, the top of which he 
closed with wood, and made a hole on the side of it. This vessel he kept 
filled with liquor, and whenever a traveller passed by, he uncorked the 
vent on the side of the vase, and caused the traveller to drink his fill 


gratis. Such is the tale. 


7th Stage, of two cos, to Kangla. The road is one unbroken ascent, 
terminated by a village called Kanglad. Here, by the road side, is a large 
stone fixed, which it is the custom for the traveller to strike heavily with 
another stone, as a notice to the villagers of his arrival. The villagers, 
upon notice thus obtained, immediately come forth to serve and entertain 


the traveller. 


8th Stage, of ten cos, to Déim—a toilsome repetition of ascents and 
descents. After a descent of three cos, you come to a river, which is 
crossed by a huge plank thrown over the stream. This river is the 


boundary of the Nepal territory towards Bhote. On the Nepal side of 


516 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


the river is erected a stone pillar, upon which is inscribed, in Nagri, “ This 
is the end of the Nepaé territory ;’ and upon the Bhote side of the stream 
is a similar erection bearing the intimation, in Bhotiah, “‘ Here begins 
the territory of Bhote.” From this river to Dim is seven cos, consisting 
of continual ascents and descents as before. Dum is a village, contain- 
ing about one hundred and fifty straw-built huts, tenanted by Bhotiahs. 
At Dum, you can procure several sorts of woollen cloths, “ punkhi,” &c. 
and yak-tails, and the wood called Zabiah, which is beautifully veined, 
and used for making the little round cups out of which the people of 


Bhote drink tea. 


9th Stage, of three cos, to Chockshing, half acos from Dum. Travel- 
ling along the shoulder of a mountain you come to a fearful spot, where 
a passage of forty paces is effected by planks, only half a foot wide, laid 
upon iron spikes, which are driven horizontally into the rock of a sheer 
precipice—and which precipice is thus passed. This passage is called 
‘‘ the Lama's iron road.” Thence proceeding a cos, you come to a village 
called Sttang and Kamshi. It consists of about twenty houses, tenanted 
by Bhotiahs and a few Newdrs. At this place it rains more or less almost 
constantly, (besides the periodical rains,) for which the following reason 
is assigned. A Lama, called Kingla Tuiba-ki, had attained to such wis- 
dom and moral excellence, that whatever he wished was instantly accom- 
plished. Coming once to Sttdang, he could procure no water there, when he 
betook himself to prayer—upon which a fount of water immediately sprang 
upon the dry rock. There is now a tank at the spot, full of fish. At the 
Lama’s intercession, it also began to rain—nor from that time to this has 
the efficacy of the Lama’s prayer failed to afford the place a perennial sup- 


ply of rain and spring water. From Sitdng to Chiksham is another cos. 


10th Stage, of two cos, to Kuétz. From Chiksham, the road is level 
all the way till you come to a small round mountain, which looks over 


TO TAZEDO, CN THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 517 


4 


Kitii—and which having surmounted, you reach that place. Kiélicis a 
considerable town, where all things needful are to be had in abundance. 
The mass of people are Bhotias—but many Cashmirians and Newars, 
and some Chinese, reside there for trafic. All the inhabitants wear woollen, 
and speak the Bhotia language. Kutt is (inclusively) the boundary of 
Bhot, considered with reference to physical geography, and to the speech 
of the majority of the people. Five hundred soldiers, (musketeers and 
archers) several officers, and four pieces of ordnance, are stationed at 
Kuttt by the ruler of Lahassa, and travellers going from Nepal produce 
their passports to the chief authority at Kztti, who keeps them in his 
own office, and if satisfied with the views and conduct of those who pro- 
duce them, gives to them new passports under his own hand to the governor 
of Tingri. 


11th Stage, of nine cos, to Yir-lib. A level road of seven and a half cos 
brings you to the town of Phingya-ling, which is a monastery of several 
hundred Lamas. Here, on the fourth day of the new year, is celebrated 
an annual festival, which festival the Bhotias call Tupchi-shin. Upon 
this occasion, all the Lamas assemble in the temple of the monastery, and 
with drums, gongs, and trumpets made of men’s thigh-bones, make music, 
to which they dance before the gold and silver images of the gods. 
Afterwards the Ldmas eat, drink, andare merry. The Latics, who have 
any petitions to offer to heaven, come on this occasion to the monastery— 
and first making five prostrations before the images, put a white silk 
scarf on the neck of some chosen one: next, take a handful of grain, and 
raising it first to their foreheads, sprinkle it on the image. All the Lémas 
of Phingya-ling rigidly practise abstinence from women—nor is a female 
ever suffered to approach their monastery, save at the annual festival just 
mentioned. From Phingya-ling, one and a half cos, brings the traveller 
to Yer-iub, his halting place, which is a hamlet of six or eight houses of 


Bhotias. 


M 4 


518 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


12th Stage, of ten anda halfcos, to Yelum-thungla. Ualfacos in 
advance of Yur-lb, you arrive at the base of a huge mountain called 
Yelum-thungla, the ascent of which is five cos, and the descent as much. 
The snow never melts on this mountain, and the wind is so violent that the 
Bhotias are wont to say, that ‘ he who never wept for his father would 
weep here.’ Yaks, and mules, and sheep, alone can pass this mountain, 
and they only by having the snow strewn with ashes to prevent their 
slipping. ‘To pass the mountain costs a long day’s march, and you reach 


the base of it late at night, and there halt. 


13th Stage, of five cos, to Teingri. From Yelum-thungla forwards, a 
fine verdant plain, enamelled with beautiful flowers, extends for the length 
of two cos. Over the above noted plain scour vast numbers of fleet ani- 
mals resembling the mule, and called by the Bhotias, King. At the 
extremity of the plain lies the village Langur, tenanted by Bhotias, and 
consisting of seven or eight houses. Without the village is a river with 
depth of water up to a man’s chest, and about twenty paces wide. It 
flows from the direction of Zdng-shehur, which is towards the east, and 


then taking a northern direction to Kerang, at length reaches Digarchi. 


The traveller’s passports are examined at Langir. Passing out of the 
village across the river, the country is equally level and verdant, as on the 
hither side of it—and like it is well peopled and cultivated —a character 
which the road maintains to the end of the stage at Twort. Dingriis a 
respectable town of Bhotias—and in the centre of it is an elevated and 
detached spot, wherein dwell a considerable number of Chinese. At 
Tingri commences a line of post, maintained by horses, and stretching via 


Digarchit and Lahassa to China. The winter is intensely cold at Tingri. 


The periodical rains extend there, and are sometimes unusually severe, so 


that it rains incessantly for a week. The common food of the people is a 


mixture composed of Satu of barley, and butter, and tea. It is eaten ina 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 519 


solid state, made up into balls, four times a day—and with it tea is drank. 
The night meal or dinner, consists of curry and rice, and bread. For 
riding, mules and ponies are used by the traveller from Kuti to this place 
—and the same animals are the ordinary means of transport for goods 
and baggage within those limits. The animals brought from Kutt? must 
be changed at Zingri, and there you may hire other ponies and mules, 
and likewise camels, for the conveyance of yourself and goods from Tungrz 


forwards. 


14th Stage, of eight cos to Shégar. A cos from Tingri occurs a 
river of about thirty paces wide, and about five feet deep. Beyond this 
river, at the distance of acos, is a village named Mémin. Six more cos 
of plain bring you to Shégar. Shégar is a town of about nine thousand 
houses— Bhotias are the sole inhabitants. The Lamas are very numerous, 
and there is a famous place of worship called Chamdzhee. Shégar is built 
in tiers, running from the base to the summit of a small hill. The hill of 
Shégar is esteemed holy ground, and in its bowels a rich mine of gold is 
said to be contained. The mouth of the mine is closed by a door of gold, 
over which many Lamas constantly watch. It is said that the mountain 
will, on some future great occasion, give up its treasure, which, meanwhile, 
is to be strictly guarded. The key of the golden door of the gold mine is at 
present in the hands of the Lama of Lahassa, the local guardians having once 
attempted a theft upon the sacred deposit. Such is the tale of the place. 


A thousand soldiers are stationed at Shégar, by the Ruler of Lahassa. 


15th Stage, of eight cos, to Lu-lu. The whole way isa plain. The 
pastures are abundant, and the butter (which is procured from cows only, 
and never from buffaloes—there being none of the latter in Bhot) re- 
nowned for its excellence. u-lu is but a small village, but there is a 
small party of soldiers stationed there, and also two horses belonging to 


the public post. 


520 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


16th Stage, of ten cos, to Chang-Larché. Five cos from Lu-lu you 
reach the village of Chazinkha, of seven or eight houses. A Sirdar of the 
Lahassa ruler abides there, who protects trade and travellers, and punishes 
theft and murder committed on them. The village and the judicial 
authority are of very recent growth, being established about seven years 
ago, owing to the occurrence of a foul murder at the spot. The murderers 
were apprehended, and their remains are even yet visible, nailed on the 
cross upon which they were executed. Five cos more of level ground, 
thickly sprinkled with population and cultivation, bring you to Chang- 
Larché, which is a large walled city. Here, the customary means of con- 
veyance for man and goods are mules, and camels, and yaks. The yaks 
of that place have no horns, and are called Nadlu. Women are never 
concealed there. East of the city passes.a river, which, flowing north- 


wards, falls into the river of Digarchi. 


17th Stage, of seven cos, to Phinju-Ling. From Larché, at the 
distance of three and a half cos, is a village where resides a wealthy Sirdar 
on the part of the Court of Lahassa, having three hundred Bhotia 
soldiers under him. His duty is that of a Collector and Judge. This 
man’s father was a famous warrior, and perished on the field of battle, 
and after death his body was embalmed and placed within the temple of 
Fingya Ling, at Lahassa. From the village abovementioned, three and a 
half more cos of level road, bring the traveller to Phinju-Ling —the 
country around well cultivated. Here also is a station of the public post, 


with two horses attached to it. 


18th Stage, of seven cos, to Mopcehd. Proceeding from Phinjui Ling, 
three cos, you arrive at the village of Tangsu-Chambu, in which there are 
many workers in iron. By the village flows a river called Di-chi, pro- 
ceeding from south to north. This river has a great breadth and violent 


current, and is crossed by the traveller at a ferry close to the village, 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 521 


upon which ply two ferry-men. From the river to Mopchd, is a plain of 
four cos. The neighbourhood of Mopchda is well stocked with game, 
such as deer, kings, (wild asses,) and naras, (wild sheep;) the niara is 
in size equal toa small cow; hoofs like horses; tail similar to the yak’s ; 
bearded like a goat—on the head, horns three feet long, and more than 
half a foot broad at the base. Owing to the enormous size and peculiar 
shape of its horns, this animal frequently cannot eat without throwing 
itself sideways on the ground. The niara’s horns are much used for 


vessels to contain liquor. 


19th Stage, seven cos, to Dungd-setu. The whole way is over a 
level and tolerably fertile country, bounded on either hand, at no great 
distance by mountains—which, indeed, similarly confine the road all the 
way from Tingri to Digarchi. Diungd-selu is a hamlet of five or six 


houses of Bhotia cultivators. 


20th Stage, of four cos, to Sékya. 'To Saékya is four cos. It lies a 
little out of the direct line of route to the right, but being a great city, full 
of wonders, it was visited. It stands at the base of a mountain, but is, 
nevertheless, exposed to an inconceivably violent current of wind—the 
houses are flat-roofed, and the roofs of such excellent quality as never to 
admit one drop of rain. They are made thus: first, rafters or beams of 
wood—then planks of wood—then a deep layer of raw clay, which is 
exceedingly well-beaten and amalgamated—lastly, and over all, a coat- 
ing composed of a soft yellow stone, pounded and mixed with water like 
limestone. The doors are like those of Indian houses: the walls within 
plastered; without, washed with powdered charcoal, whereby all the 
houses of Sdkya exhibit a perfectly black exterior. The people wear 
woollen, like all Bhotias—but dyed black, which is a distinction proper 
to themselves. The women ornament their heads with strings of couries: 
the men wear ear-rings of turquoises. Satué and tea, and flesh, and spirit 

N 4 


522, ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


extracted from barley, are the food of allclasses. The Rulers of S¢kya are 
two Lamas, whose lineage is traced to the same source with that of the 
present imperial family of China. These Lamas are esteemed divine— 
a character which they support by total seclusion from the world, and 
the practise of the severest self-denial and constant mental abstraction. 
Day and night, winter and summer, their clothes consist of merely a pair 
of black trowsers, and a narrow band of red cloth circling diagonally 
round the body, and passing over the right shoulder and under the left 
arm. These Lamas never sleep with their limbs extended at ease, like 
ordinary mortals, but in the same erect cross-legged attitude which they 
maintain throughout the day. The better to enable them to keep the 
erect attitude at the times when they are involuntarily overcome by sleep, 
they pass the diagonal body-band under their feet at night. The names 
of these Lamas are Saxya Gumsa RamsBorcut and Kunpa KusuHo, and 
they are brothers. Their conventual residence is of vast size—and in one 
of the apartments are placed two leather bags filled with sand, and having 
a couple of eyes painted on the outside of each of them. The name of 
the bags is Upké, and it is said, whenever any of the followers of these 
Lamas is about to die, some one of the lesser Lamas, attendant on the 
great Ldmas, takes one of these bags to the abode of the dying 
man, and, emptying it of the sand, places the mouth of it over the 
mouth of the man, so as to receive his last breath—which being thus 
secured in the bag, is carried away to a mansion called Ukin, or “ the 
house of breath,” for such is the meaning of the word. Ukdn is an 
immense structure, whence issues at night a horrible din of ghosts and 
demons, so that no man hath courage enough to approach it. Oncea 
year, a Sirdar from Lahassa, comes to Sakya—whenthe Lama called Sékya 
Gamba Ramborchi, shews the interior of Ukdan to the Sirdar, when the 
number of the dead deposited therein, during the past twelve months, is 
Seen written, by the hands of angels, on the walls: the Lama Ramborchi 


copies this inscription, and sends the copy to Lahassa, by the Sirdar—within 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 523 


the Ukdan are alarge knife and an axe, and a block anda rope. The axe 
and the block are covered with blood: and such is the stench of the place, 
that no one can endure it when it is annually opened as before related— 


a period at which it is cleansed, and again closed for twelve more months. 


The Ecclesiastical Ruler of Lahassa, on receiving the melancholy des- 
patch sent by the Lama of Sakya, causes proclamation to be made, that 
upon a certain day the scriptures called Bum and Séyé, be read for the de- 
livery of the souls of the dead, and spiritual welfare of the living, and that 
offerings be made at the temple for the same ends. The call tocontribute 
money for this purpose is universally attended to, and large sums collect- 
ed from all parts and sent to Lahassa.. When the whole is received there, 
a grand festival is held, which lasts from 1st December to the last day of 
that month. Presents are likewise sent from the Lama of Lahassa to the 
Lamas of Sakya, who distribute a large portion of them to the poor of 


Sakya Sheher. 


Lamas are of two kinds—one practising celibacy ; the other, not; the 
former, called Kéondiimbé, and the latter, Témzdn. The great Lamas of 
Sdkya, are Tamzans. They go once a year to visit Lahassa, which is twelve 
days’ journey from Sdkya; but the distance is said to be travelled by the 


Lamas in two days—such is their preter-human power. 


The Lamas, on this occasion, pay a visit to the Civil Ruler of Lahassa, 
who receives them surrounded by his subordinates in office. These latter 
bow down their heads to the Lamas, who give them their blessing by 
laying their hands on their heads—while the chief governor rising up 
meets the Lamas, when the two parties join their foreheads together by 
a mutual stoop, and the Chief then conducts the Lamas to seats on his 
immediate right and left. The visit lasts about an hour. At evening- 


tide, the Lamas go round the City of Lahassa, curing the sick, casting out 


524 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


devils, and doing other good works. On the following morn, they prepare 
to return home, but before going make up five amulets for the Chief 
Ruler of Lahassa, and his four subordinates, nextin rank to himself— 
which charms being despatched, the Lamas set out, and reach Sakya again 


on the fifth day from their departure. 


21st Stage, of ten cos, to Charing. As before noted, you deviate 
from the high road to go to Sdkya. A retrograde movement to the left, 
of four cos, as far as Dinga Sétu, brings you into the right road again. 
Thence is a journey of six cos to Charing, the halting place. Charting is 
a large village, or rather small town, to the east of which are nine tanks, 
parallel to each other, and having their chief extent running north and 
south. Between each tank is a small house for bathers to dress and 
undress in. Each of the nine tanks has a different medicinal virtue and 
colour, so that invalids coming to bathe, use that tank which is prescribed 
for the particular case of each. For liberty to bathe, you pay about four 
annas to the man having local charge, who is an officer of the Lahassa 
Court. Hundreds of sick people annually resort to these tanks, and most 
of them with the best results. The qualities of each tank are inscribed 
on the face of it in stone. The horses of Charing are famous for their 


spirit, and docility and strength of constitution. 


22d Stage, eight cos, to Natan. ‘Two cos in advance of Charing you 
come to ariver having a depth of water up to the chest, and a width of 
about forty paces. On either bank of this river are several water-mills, 
(Panchaki.) Beyond the river you pass through a level and cultivated 
plain, six cos to Ndé@u—which is a large city, containing, it is said, three 
hundred thousand souls, who are chiefly of the Lama caste. The city is 
walled and has two gates, one to the east, called in Bhotia, Nhoku, and 


the other to the west, styled Charku. 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 525 


23d Stage, of two cos, to Digarcht. One cos from Natdn is Teshi 
Lhambu, the especial residence of the Great Lama presiding over this part 
of Bhot. Teshti-Lhambu embraces hundreds of Gumbas, or convents, and 
some houses of Cashmiris, and Newars, and Chinese. There is a good 
bazar, which is open from day light till noon, when it is closed at the sig- 
nal of a bell tolling. Another cos brings you to the City of Digarchi, 
which is of great size, extending chiefly from north to south. Here begins 
a new language, (dialect?) which is called Changi. The houses of Digar- 
chi are mostly built of pukka bricks, overlaid with pukka plaster. Three 
thousand Bhotia and two thousand Khatat soldiers are stationed at 
Digarchi. In Digarchi is a fine menagerie, containing, among other 
animals, a royal tiger, which was sent from the Nepal Raja as a present 
to the Ruler of Digarchi, — tigers not being natives of Bhot. The 
animals which you hired to carry yourself and goods to Digarchi, are 
there relinquished—and new ponies, and camels, and mules, and yaks, 


hired to take you on. 


24th Stage, of nine cos, to Pind. About two or three hundred paces 
without Digarchi, towards the east, is a river named Chirr-Erku. Its 
course is there from north to south—its width about three hundred paces, 
and its depth great. The bathing of women, and the washing of clothes 
in this river, are prohibited. The river is passed by an iron bridge of 
eighteen arches, or passages, built by some former Lama, and now called 
Samba-Shir, or the eastern bridge. Fromthe river to Pind, the road runs 
through a cultivated plain, till you reach another river, which having 
passed by a bridge, you at once enter the town of Pind. Pind is situated. 
at the base of a small hill, the top of which is tenanted by several Bhotia 


Sirdars, commanding a small detachment of Bhotia and Chinese soldiers. 


25th Stage, of ten cos, to Kydngzhé. The whole way is through a 
finely cultivated country, producing barley, and pease, and wheat. You 
o 4 


526 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


reach Kydngzhé by night. A market is held in the middle of this town of 
Kydngzhé every day, from morning till noon, where and when the whole 
buying and selling of the place is transacted, it not being the custom 
to expose any thing for sale in shops. Several sorts of woollen. cloth 
(called Tharma, and Punki, and Nambu) are woven here—and the dyers 
are very expert, so that they can give the cloth a roseate hue equal to the 
colour of the rose itself. Lach year, in September, is a great congress of 
people at Kydngzhé, partly religious, partly mercantile—when all the 
Lamas suspend sacred pictures in all the streets and houses of the 
town. The pictures represent the future rewards of virtue and vice— 
and a Lama seated beneath each picture, enforces the lesson taught by it 
to the people. This lasts for three days—the fourth day is consumed in 
entertainments to friends and relatives. Then follow four days of pro- 
miscuous assembly, with music, song, and feasting. On the evening of 
the eighth day, all the Laics and clergy go in a body to the Chief of the 
town, each carrying, for presentation, an arrow covered with a white silk 
scarf, called Khadar, and having inscribed on it the donor’s name. The 
Sirdar forwards all these arrows to Lahassa, with a letter, intimating to 
the Ruler of that place, that all the persons whose names are inscribed on 
the arrows forwarded, assembled at Kydngzhé, under your auspices, send 
you their united blessings. The Ruler of Lahassa acknowledges this 
salutation, by sending a handsome sum of money to the Lamas of Kydng- 
zhé, which they distribute among themselves. Eight days after the des- 
patch of the arrows to Lahassa, and on the sixteenth day of the festival, 
there are horse-races, and matches at marksmanship with arrows and 


guns—which last to the end of the month, when the festival terminates. 


26th Stage, eight and a half cos, to Rilhing. Twocos beyond Kydng- 
zhé, a rill of very salt and bitter water issues violently from a rock on the 
side of the road. It is so fully impregnated with salt, that if you dip 


your hand in it and then let your hand dry in the sun, it will be covered 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 527 


with small crystals of salt. Throughout the whole of this Stage, fresh 
water is very scarce. MRvlling is a small hamlet of three or four houses, and 
is a station of the royal post. It is enclosed on either side by silicious 
mountains, out of the rock of which numbers of gun flints are made. 


There is a well of fresh water at Relling. 


27th Stage, of eight cos, to Lagadnché. Four cos in advance of Ril- 
ling you come to a village called Zarrah, consisting of three or four houses. 
This also is a Dak station. Here travellers halt at noon awhile, and 
refresh themselves and their cattle with Saté and water: and then proceed 
four cos more to Lagdnché. The whole of this stage is over a plain 
bounded on either hand, at the distance of about a cos, by mountains. 
Lagdnché is a village of about two hundred houses of Bhotias, with a few 
Chinese. South of the village is a vast lake, in truth, an ocean, called 
Yamzti. There are three rocky isles in the lake, where herdsmen dwell 
and feed the large herds of the Yak. Many fishermen also tenant these 
isles, whose fishing boats are made of leather: for the water is full of fish. 


The water is extremely salt and bitter. 


28th Stage, of eight cos, to Paité. Beyond Laganché you pass over 
a plain extending all the way to Pazté. The plain is uncultivated, but 
abounds with deer, kings, and other wild animals, which the Bhotias of 
those parts constantly hunt for the sake of their flesh. The great lake of 
Yamzu% accompanies the traveller to Padé, which is but a tiny hamlet, 
affording however a market of bread, and fish, and dressed meat, adequate 
to the traveller's wants. There is a Police Officer at Paité, who examines 


the traveller's baggage and passports. 


29th Stage, of twelve and a half cos, to Kambha. Eight cos in advance 
of Paité you journey over a plain, and then reach the base of a mountain 


called Kambhal, the ascent of which is one anda half cos. On the top is a 


528 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


spring of excellent water. The descent of the mountain is three cos, and 
at the bottom of it lies the village of Kambha, of about one hundred 
houses, tenanted by Bhotias, and two Chinese. The latter are soldiers, and 


superintend the royal Dak. 


30th Stage, of four cos, to Chushér. Proceeding one cos, you come 
toa ‘“ Nullah,” four or five paces wide, and crossed by a wooden bridge. 
One cos beyond the bridge you come to a mountain called Chakshamehu- 
Ari. On the hither ascent of the mountain, is a convent of regular Lamas— 
and on the thither side of it another convent of secular or married Lamas. 
Beneath the mountain flows a river called Yék6-Changé. Its waves are 
very large—and its course from the east to the west. Overit is an 
iron bridge, and also a ferry by boat. The river’s width is nearly a cos. 
From the river an advance of two miles brings you to the village of 
Chishér, containing about three hundred houses. In Chushér you may 
buy walnuts, and large apples, and plums, and several sorts of Sattz. 


The price of acock is one sozan; of a hen two sozans. 


31st Stage, of four cos, to Chabna. The whole way lies through a well 


cultivated country. Chabnd is a village of about three hundred houses. 


32d Stage, of five cos, to Changé. Four cos beyond Changé is the 
City of Chang, south of which flows the river Yéké-Changé before men- 
tioned. Large pieces of ice were here seen floating down with its waters. 
The ferry is by a leathern boat for men, and by a wooden one for 
animals. You halt on the further side of the river—the width of which, 


at this place, is about a cos. 


33d Stage, of three cos, to Nam. Two cos from Changé is a moun- 
tain, over which yon pass. The passage of it is about one cos, and at its 


base is the village of Ndm, of five or six houses. Around Ndm are 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 529 


gardens belonging to the Lahassa Sircar, which abound in fruit, such as wal- 
nuts, and apples, and plums. Travellers are seldom prevented from gather- 


ing some of these fruits. At this village I got six fowls’ eggs for a needle. 


34th Stage, of five cos, to Netang. From Nam, one cos, you come to 
the mountain of Ldchain-Lachin. Thence forward all is sandy plain. 
In this stage you again see the Yéko-Chdango river. Nitang is a large town, 
in which some Chinese live, from whom the traveller can buy dressed 
meats for dinner. The shops exhibit quantities of Kochin and Postin, 


and many other manufactures. There is a post house at Netdng. 


35th Stage, of three cos, to Thi-sambar. 'The whole way you travel 
through cultivated fields of pease, and wheat, and barley. Thi-sambar isa 


large town, tenanted, besides Bhotias, by Chinese and Newars, and Cashmiris. 


36th Stage, of three and a half cos, to Lahassa. One cos in advance 
of Thi-sambar, is a town called Birbim,* situated at the base of a moun- 
tain named Kimbi: the houses and roads of this town are made of stone. 
The inhabitants of this place are obliged to wear one of three sorts of 
cap called Pichili, and Chang-dama, and Sikhshd. If you wear not one 
of these you get beaten by the people, and punished too by the authori- 
ties. All the inhabitants of Birbum are Lamas, who practise celibacy. 
No women can enter Birbium, save one day of the year, whereon a festi- 
val is held. There are no shops within the place, but a market is held 
without the walls daily from morn till noon, when the market is closed 
by sound of bell. On the eighth month of the Bhotia year, a festival is 
held at Birbéim, the origin of which the people account for by the fol- 


lowing tale. Formerly, there were two Rulers of Birbiim, one of them 


* So called in my text, but the context proves it to be a Monastery. However, in Bhot now, 
as in Egypt of old, convents are often towns in size, and a great part of the population monastic. 
IEMEE 


p 4 


530 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


was rich and the other poor. The former, desirous of possessing himself 
of the latter's portion of the country, addressed him as follows: ‘TI pos- 
sess such skill that I can cut a cat in five pieces with one blow,’ and he 
did so accordingly with an axe, before the poor Prince and many others. 
The multitude shouted applause, and the rich Prince continued to the 
poor one—‘ What princely qualities hike mine do you possess, —the poor 
Prince answered, ‘I know yet a more cunning trick than thine—let the 
people collect to-morrow at noon, and witness my skill—if in their opinion 
it surpass thine, I will be sovereign—if otherwise, thou shalt be sole Ruler.’ 
The people assembled at the appointed time, and the poor Prince having 
fixed a peg in the ground at the top of the neighbouring hill, and ano- 
ther peg at the bottom of it, suspended a rope between the pegs—and then 
proceeding to the hill top, and causing his legs and arms to be tied up, 
laid his chest on the rope and slid down it without aid of hands or feet : 
the people crowned the poor Prince’s exploit and buried his partner in 
rule, alive, and erected over his remains a monument shaped like the 
Chaitya of Sambhu in Nepdl. Such is the tale—and annually at present 
there is a rope festival held at Birbém, in commemoration of the event. 
There is another annual festival at Birbim, called Birbiumshitin, when 
all the inhabitants of those parts are assembled. They are divided into 
two bodies—one of males, the other of females—and no male is allowed 
to mix with the females—more especially no male belonging to the 
monastic establishment of Birbim. The festival is in honour of the god 
Nibd-Rumchd, and is maintained with all sorts of merriment and feasting 
for one whole day—after which the people disperse to their several homes. 
One cos in advance of Birbum you come to the delightful retreat called 
“The Garden of the Cashmiris’—half a cos beyond which is mount 
Pitla, the monastic abode of the great Lama. The Convent stands on 
the hill-top, and is very magnificent—the roofs being gilt and the pillars 
of silver. The slopes of the hill are well cultivated and peopled, and all 
necessaries are procurable in abundance. From Pztla onwards, to the 


City of Lahassa, the whole way is thickly covered with dwellings. Lahassa 


——_—_— 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 531 


is a vast and splendid city, enclosed with a wall of stone. The Ruler of 
Lahassa abides in the middle of the city, and four persons next in rank to 
him, at the four corners of the city. These five persons, with two others, 
whose ordinary function is the distribution of justice, form a council of 
state. Small offences are punished by fixing the offender in a sort of stocks 
by the neck, in the midst of the city—where he remains for four or five 
days, and is then flogged and dismissed. Murderers are punished with 
decapitation, after a trial before the two persons above alluded to, and who 
are called T'azeen. Political offences, and grave matters affecting the State, 
are reported to the Emperor of China. There are five gates to the City 
of Lahassa, called the Nepali, and Sélungi, and Ladakhi, and Di-jwani, 
and Chinese gates—all of which are cautiously guarded—especially 
that leading to China-—-to get through which costs the traveller a whole 
day of solicitation, and sundry rupees in presents. The cold of winter 
at Lahassa is intense, so much so that spittle will freeze almost before 
it reaches the ground. In summer, the heat is very temperate. The 
winds are always boisterous. The chief inhabitants of Lahassa are 
Bhotias ; next in number to them are Chinese; next Newars, and least of 
all, Cashmiris. The Newars, who, like the Cashmiris, reside at Lahassa, 
for the sake of commerce, have about five hundred houses or shops, and 
the Cashmiris, perhaps, three hundred houses. Lahassa itself stands on 


a plain—but around it, on all sides, are mountains. 


37thStage, of ten cos, to Téjing. Acos beyond Lahassa is a river called 
Shanga, whichis about one hundred paces wide, which is passed by leathern 
and wooden boats: the former formen, the latter for beasts. Two cos beyond 
the river you come to the village of Chyi, of about fifty houses. Travellers 
halt here awhile to refresh themselves. Thence to 7'éjing, the remaining five 


cos are through afine fertile plain, sprinkled with cultivation and population. 


38th Stage, of eight cos, to Mat-kiéin-ga. Four cos from Téjing, you 


come to the village of Lémi-chi-kyé, full of Lamas, who abstain from 


532 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, 


eating eggs, and flesh, and fish, and ghee, and salt, and onions, holding 
the eating of any one of these to be a great sin: there are about twenty 
houses. The traveller halts here to refresh, and then proceeds four cos 
to the great town of Mat-kun-ga, inhabited (besides Bhotzas,) by many 
Chinese. There are some twenty Chinese soldiers cantoned here, and a 


much larger number of Bhotia soldiers. The whole Stage is over a plain. 


39th Stage, of four cos, to Vi-si-king. This short Stage is over a_ 
plain, and you accomplish it by noon. V7-si-king is a village of seven or 
eight houses. The animal called King, already described, abounds here- 
abouts, and at night many of them come close to the village, being never 
disturbed by the inhabitants, who regard them with respect as being the 
horses of the gods. 


40th Stage, of five cos, to Chumra. Chumra is about as large as 
Vi-si-king, and is inhabited of Bhotias and Chinese. The road to it is 


level, and the village itself affords abundance of supplies for the traveller. 


Alst Stage, of ninecos, to Kam, which is a town of about one hundred 
houses. It is a station of the post. The whole nine cos are over a level 


country, but rarely sprinkled with inhabitants. 


42nd Stage, of five cos, to Kimdah. One cos from Kam is a 
mountain called Kiung-bdla, of moderate height. The ascent is very good, 
but the descent (in going out) as bad; and when (as in winter) it is 
incumbered with snow, itis even perilous. Beyond the mountain, and 
near its base, is the town of Kimda. It is a large place, the station of a 


post, and of from two to three thousand soldiers of Khatai and of Bhot. 


43rd Stage, of eight cos, to Shu-ba-du. Two hundred paces beyond 
Kimda, you meet with the river Kéng-ju: over it is an iron bridge of 


twenty-five arches. On passing the bridge, you pay twenty-five pice to 


TO TAZEDO, ON THE CHINESE FRONTIER. 533 


the officers of the Ruler of Lahassa, and ostensibly for the support and 
repair of the bridge. The water of the Kimg-ju is very dark, like char- 
coal, but is good, and to its virtues is ascribed the freedom which those 
who drink it enjoy from the Goitre. From the river the whole way is level 
and cultivated. Shu-ba-du is a town of moderate size. The tails of the 
Yak are there sold for two pice a piece, and ghee also is exceedingly 
cheap; but notwithstanding these low prices theft and robbery are very 
common. The thieves are exceedingly audacious, and belong toa tribe 
called Khamba, who (probably from their vagrant habits) are noted as the 
great collectors of musk. At Shu-ba-ju is a Gumba, or monastery, of about 
two hundred monks, of the Lama tribe. These monks are famous for their 
learning. Yet wo-betide the wealthy trader who passes their abode with- 
out making them a present—for, in that case, his merchandise will be 
plundered as sure as fate. There are about one hundred soldiers, (Chinese 


and Bhotias ) at Shi-ba-ju. The houses are mostly of wood, roofed with stone. 


44th Stage, of seven cos, to Nodmdri. The country is mostly level, 
with occasional cultivation. There is, however, an insulated hill, which 
you pass on the right. Noomdari is a large town, filled with people of 
various nations—but no Cashmirians. ‘There is a powder magazine here. 
Most of the houses are of stone, and the people are famous for their skill 


in making bows and arrows. 


45th Stage, of eight cos, to Mangam. Allthe way lies through a 
level country, and on your right flows the Kiung-ju river, already men- 
tioned. There are many Chinese soap-makers at Mangam—also many 


Newari and Bhotia merchants. 


46th Stage, of seven cos, to Taya. The road towards the middle of 

the stage is very stony. This town is famous for thieves, whe come at 

night in the guise of dogs and other animals, to rob the merchant traveller. 

The Governor of the town is appointed from Lahassa. Before his door are 
Qa 4 


534 ROUTE FROM CATHMANDU, IN NEPAL, &c. 


suspended two Gantahs, one small and the other large. The merchant, 
upon his arrival at 7’dyd, must go and strike one of the Gantahs. If he 
strike the small one, he will surely be robbed at night; but if he beat the 
large one, as surely he may sleep in peace with his property secure. In 


other words, the police of this town must be well bribed to do their duty. 


A7th Stage, of eight cos, to Po-chu-zan. Twocos from Véyd, the 
way is constantly crossed by deep channels of water for irrigation. The 
whole country is level and cultivated; deer, and a ravenous animal like a 
dog, abound. Po-chu-zan is a large town, inhabited by Chinese and Bhotias. 
The latter are called here by the names Kumi and Khambah. There is a 
Chinese bazar and a Bhotia bazar. The people wear a large woollen frock 
extending to the knees, and trowsers reaching to the mid-calf. The 


women plait their hair like a mat. The houses are of stone. 


48th Stage, of nine cos, to Amdo. The whole way over a level and 
cultivated country, producing wheat and barley. The people of these 
parts live a good deal in small tents, made of woollen stuff. The cotton 


cloths of Amdo are excellent, and are exported to Lahassa and China. 


49th Stage, of twelve cos, to Tdézédé. All the road is level, and the 
whole country beautifully cultivated and fertile—producing besides wheat 
and barley, and peas and potatoes—rice and mangoes, and carrots, and 
grapes, and almonds. Fruits of all sorts abound. T%azédo is a large city, 
and is the frontier town between Bhot and China—the latter kingdom 
being held to commence from JZézédé. It is walled—the inhabitants are 
of Khatat, of Bhot, and of China, and no others. The Khatats are Chinese 
Mohammedans, of a very fair complexion, and large stature. They are 


mostly soldiers. 


VIII. 


CENSUS. 


OF THE 


CAT Y 04 DAC A: 


By HENRY WALTERS, Ese. 


Tue accompanying Statements, drawn up much after the plan of Mr. 
W. B. Bay ey’s published Register of the population of Burdwan, have 
been arranged from materials, which my situation of Judge and Magis- 
trate of the City of Dacca, has enabled me to collect through the instru- 
mentality of the Police, and aided by the heads of castes and professions, 
with as great a regard to correctness as is usually attainable in such 
matters ;—and as such, I submit them in the confidence of their general 


accuracy. 


Statements Nos. 1 and 2, exhibit a detailed account of the number of 
houses inhabited by Hindus and Mohammedans, arranged according to 
their several castes and professions; and distinguishing the number of 
males and females above and below sixteen years of age; with the pro- 


portion of inhabitants to a house. 


536 CENSUS OF THE 


Statement No. 3, contains an Abstract of Nos. 1 and 2; and includes 
also the Armenian, Greek, Portuguese, and French inhabitants,—with the 


proportions of male and female—adult and minor. 


Statement No. 4, shews the number of dwelling-houses, inhabited 
by all descriptions of persons,—and No. 5, the total number of brick and 


straw-houses of every description, including shops, golahs, &c. 


No. 6, exhibits the number of brick-houses of one or more stories, 
with the number of enclosed gardens, and the proportion ‘of fixed residents 
and lodgers; besides the buildings included in this Statement, are the 
ruins of the Palace erected by Azim-usHAN, towards the end of the 17th 
century, compared by Bishop Heser to the Kremlinof Moscow. Also 
two gate-ways, and several Mohammedan and Hindu buildings of a re- 
ligious character; viz. Mosques, 158—-Makberahs, or Mausoleums, 109— 
Sangats, 10—Akaras, 52—and Ka4li Baris, or Hindu Temples, 55. These, 
with the exception of the latter, are mostly in ruins. There are also four 
Christian Churches, kept in good repair, and the remains of three Katrahs 


or Caravan-serais. 


The Statements marked 7 and 8, shew the number of Hindu and 


Mohammedan inhabitants, actually found residing in each house or chouk. 


Statement No. 9, exhibits the average prices of some of the neces- 


saries of life for ten years, from 1820 to 30. 


The total Native population, as shewn by the Statements, exclusive 
of Military, is sixty-six thousand, six hundred and sixty-seven, of which 
thirty-one thousand four hundred and twenty-nine are Hindu, and thirty- 
five thousand two hundred and thirty-eight Mohammedan—to which, three 
hundred and twenty-two Armenians, Greeks, and others, being added, 


CITY OF DACCA. 537 


gives a total population of sixty-six thousand nine hundred and eighty- 
nine souls, residing in sixteen thousand two hundred and seventy-nine 
houses or chouks—an amount which falls far short of the estimates here- 


tofore made of the population of this city. 


Hamitton, in his Gazetteer, estimates the population of Dacca as 
exceeding one hundred and fifty thousand; and Bishop. HreBer in 1823, 
States it at three hundred thousand, and the number of houses at ninety 
thousand. 


That the population has fallen off very rapidly since the opening 
of the free trade, is apparent from the fact that, in 1814, when the Cho- 
kidari tax was first introduced, (the records of which furnish the only 
authentic information of the population in former years now procurable,) 
the number of houses actually assessed amounted to twenty-one thousand 
six hundred and thirty-one—and the amount collected, at an average of 
two anas per house, maintained nearly eight hundred Police Chokidars 
-—whereas, in the present year, (1830,) the number of houses actually 
assessed, amounted only to ten thousand seven hundred and eight—and 
the number of Chokidars maintained to two hundred and thirty-six. 
Hence, in sixteen years, a diminution in the population of about one half 
may be assumed. The number of native inhabitants found actually 
existing in each house or chouk, varies from one to ninety ;—and the 
average to each dwelling house is four and one-eighth—a less proportion 
than at Burdwan, which is stated at five and a half; or than at Benares, 


where six has been assumed as a fair average for all sorts of houses. 


The number of native males, as shewn by the Statements, exceeds 
that of the females ; the former being thirty-seven thousand four hundred 
and twenty-two, the latter twenty-nine thousand two hundred and forty- 
five,—or about one hundred and three and two-thirds males, to one hundred 

R 4 


938 CENSUS OF THE 


females. As this is the converse of what is found to occur in other coun- 
tries ; and it is professedly difficult to obtain a faithful account of the 
“ dwellers behind the curtain,” if the proportion of males and females may 
be assumed to be nearly equal,—as they have been found to be at Benares 
and Burdwan,—and if the military be also included, the total population 
of Dacca may be fairly assumed to amount at the least to seventy-five 
thousand. It may at the same time, however, be remarked, that a late 
Census of the population of Gorakhpur, gives one hundred and eight 


males to one hundred females, for the whole population. 


Dacca, notwithstanding its present insignificance as compared with 
its former grandeur, may nevertheless still be classed among second-rate 
cities. It has a population greater than Devonport or Brussels, and nearly 
equal to that of the whole county of Fife. Some new brick dwellings 
have silently sprung up here and there, it may also be observed, within 
the last year or two; and this City can now boast an Oil Mill, driven by 
steam, and an Iron Suspension Bridge. Three more Steam Engines are 
in the course of erection. On the whole, an increase may be looked for, 
rather than the contrary, in the wealth, population, and importance of the 
City of Dacca. 


It would be curious to compare the gradual decrease of the population, 
with the falling off of the manufacture of those beautiful cotton fabricks, 
for which this City was once without a rival in the world. The first fall- 
ing off in the Dacca trade, took place so far back as 1801, previous to 
which, the yearly advances made by the Honorable Company, and private 
traders, for Dacca muslins, were estimated at upwards of twenty-five lacs 
of rupees. In 1807, the Honorable Company’s investment had fallen to 
5,95,900, and the private trade to about 5,60,200. In 1813, the private 
trade did not exceed 2,05,950, and that of the Honorable Company 


was scarcely more considerable. And in 1817, the English Commercial 


CITY OF DACCA. 539 


Residency was altogether discontinued. The French and Dutch factories 
had been abandoned many years before. The division of labour was car- 
ried to a great extent in the manufacture of fine muslins. In spinning the 
very fine thread, more especially, a great degree of skill was attained. 


b) 


It was spun with the fingers ona “ Takwa,” or fine steel spindle, by 
young women, who could only work during the early part of the morning, 
while the dew was on the ground; for such was the extreme tenuity of 
the fibre, that it would not bear manipulation after the sun had risen. 
One retti of cotton could thus be spun into a thread eighty cubits long; 
which was sold by the spinners at one rupee eight annas per sicca weight. 
The “ Raffugars,” or Darners, were also particularly skilful. They 
could remove an entire thread from a piece of muslin, and replace it by 
one of a finer texture. The cotton used for the finest thread, was grown 
in the immediate neighbourhood of Dacca, more especially about Suner- 
gong. Its fibre is too short, however, to admit of its being worked up 
by any except that most wonderful of all machines—the human hand. 
The art of making the very fine muslin fabricks is now lost—and pity it 


is that it should be so. 


In 1820, a Resident of Dacca, on a special order received from 
China, procured the manufacture of two pieces of muslin, each ten yards 
long by one wide, and weighing ten and a half sicca rupees. — The 
price of each piece was sicca rupees one hundred. In 1822, the same 
individual received a second commission for two similar pieces, from 
the same quarter; but the parties who had supplied him on the for- 
mer occasion, had died in the mean time, and he was unable to execute 


the commission. 


The annual investment, called the ‘ Malbis Khas,” for the royal 
wardrobe at Delhi, absorbed great part of the finest fabricks in former 


times: the extreme beauty of some of these muslins, was sufliciently 


540 CENSUS OF THE 


indicated by the names they bore; such as, ‘ Abrowan,” running water ; 


“‘ Shebnem,” evening dew, &c. 


Coarse cotton piece goods still continue to be manufactured at Dacca, 
though from the extreme cheapness of English cloths, it is not improba- 


ble that the native manufacture will be altogether superseded ere long. 


In 1823-4, cotton piece goods, mostly coarse, passed the Dacca Cus- 
tom House, to the value of 14,42,101. In 1829-30, the value of the same 
export was 9,69,952 only. There was a similar falling off in silk and 


embroidered goods during the same period. 


In the export of the articles of cotton yarn again, there has been an 
increase. In 1813, the value was 4,480 rupees only ; whereas in 1821-22, 
it amounted to 39,319 rupees. From that period it has, however, decreas- 
ed; and in 1829-30, the value of the native cotton yarn exported from 


Dacca, amounted to 29,475 rupees only. 


Annexed are two Statements—No. 10, shewing the comparative prices 
of Muslins now manufactured at Dacca, and of the same description of 
cloth the produce of British looms.—No. 11, the comparative prices of 
Dacca cloths, manufactured from yarn spun in the country, and from Bri- 
tish cotton yarn. These cannot fail to be interesting at the present mo- 


ment, and their general accuracy may be relied on. 


CITY OF DACCA. 541 


STATEMENTS. 


No. 1. Detailed account of the number of Houses inhabited by 
Hindus, arranged according to their several castes and professions—dis- 
tinguishing the number of males and females above and below sixteen 
years of age—with the proportion of inhabitants to a house. 


No. 2. Detailed account of the number of Houses inhabited by 
Mahommedans, arranged according to their several professions—distin- 
suishing the number of males and females above and below sixteen years 
of age—with the proportion of inhabitants to a house. 


No. 3. Exhibits an Abstract of No. 1 and 2, and includes also the 
Armenian, Greek, French, and Portugueze inhabitants—with the propor- 
tions of male and female, adult and minor. 


No. 4. Exhibits the number of Dwelling Houses inhabited by all 
descriptions of persons, 


No. 5. Shews the number of Brick and Straw Houses of all descrip- 
tions in the several Thannahs. 


No. 6. Shews the number of Brick Houses of one and more stories 
—the number of Gardens encompassed with walls—and the proportion of 
fixed inhabitants and of lodgers. 


No. 7. Shews the number of Hindu Inhabitants found actually resid- 
ing in each House or Chouk. 


No. 8. Shews the number of Mahommedan Inhabitants found actu- 
ally residing in each House or Chouk. 


No. 9. Exhibits the average prices of some of the necessaries of 
life for the ten years, from 1820 to 30. 


No. 10. A comparative Statement of the prices of Muslins, manu- 
factured at Dacca, and the produce of the British Looms. 


No. 11. A comparative Statement of the prices of Dacca Cloths, 
manufactured with cotton yarn spun in the country, and from British 


cotton yarn. 
s 4 


D942 CENSUS OF THE 
No. 1. 
g ° Se iss e 
8 CASTE AND PROFESSIONS. ie S S 2 g 4 S 2 E ee Bree i 
g Sa pee | sel fo 1s. |S | doa Bouse 
5 Ze sa | Es S =| 65 | 528 
| a ee a Les 
1 | Brahmin—Heydayat, ...........- 9 21 23 11 8 63) 7 
2 JajmAn, ..... Aeeisitine 107 | 182] 131 66.| 47| 4296] 4 
3 Malakar wrvecsiss cee 5 36 0 1 0 37 | 72 
4 Shopkeeper, ...... ...- 7 11 0 0 0 il 14 
5 Thread-maker, ........ 1 0 2 0 0 2/ 2 
6 Service Ge. 38 Sees 103 | 320] 115] 68| 40] 543 | = 
7 Beggar, .....2.i0e- ae 29| 46] 30| 14| I] iol] 32 
8 Merchant, 2/0 2)j.05..)0% 6 17 7 3 2 29 | 48 
aS) Broker, iccinecicseienees 2 2 0 0 0 2 1 
10 Physician)». .)oi:5 6: ej02 2 20 20 5 | 2 47 | 231 
11 Picture-drawer, ...... 5 
12 | Khettri—Service, ......... 
13 TTAGED;: are s:ecis: to5019 
14 | Mahajanor Merchant, .......... 
15 Shopkeeper,.......... 
16 Physician, ........ ae 
17 Cooly; - oct e sans 
18 ZeMINdaY, siciccewasisce 
19 Grihastha, .....0-+06 
20 | Baisya—Zemindar, .....ccccscove 7 
21 SOLrvice, eels sere siatars cle stars : 52 
22 Shopkeeper, .........e4. 2 
3 
23 | Sidra Kayat—Service, .......... | 500] 1190 | 741 | 331 ) 295 | 2557 | 5} 
24 Grishtha, ........ | 348 | 603 | 549; 295| 166; 1613 | 42 
25 Cooly; 25 edge sede 75 140 46 16 6 208 2 
26 Shopkeeper, .... 878 | 1404} 6461 327 1 266 | 2643] 3 & upwards.} 


CITY OF DACCA. 545 


nN 
my BS 2S se ise ae a8 Pro tion of 
3 CASTE AND PROFESSIONS. a ep a 2 ee : S 3 5 3 fe operon 
5 ZF ‘em |ga|as S2 | a2 | toa House. 
Z = Ss Oo = oO ‘s = 
a ee ee 
Sidra Kayat—( Continued. ) 
27 MDM OT) tsetse cs stele 1 0 1 0 1 2.4.2 
28 Weavers Testi 1 2] 1 0 1 4) 4 near. 
29 Broker, 2.2... ..).6 2 2 2 0 1 5 | 23 
30 Thread-maker,.... 3 0 | 5 1 1 Fo QE 
31 Physician, ...... 3 6 3 1 1 11 | 32 
32 | Gota-maker orLaceman, ........ 9 10 16 3 3 82] 38 
33 IBTASIET SI [scieie'sehcleveys 52 99 | 54 29 Wr 22 204. 4 
34 Bricklayer, ........ 6 10 11 5 3 29 | 5 
35 Picture-drawer, .... 1] 1 1 0 2 2 
36 Zemindar, ........ 13 73 43 15 16} 147! 1145 
37 Stone-cutter, ...... 4 16 4 | 0 0 20; 5 
38 Baylor cts ses 2! 414 Onl oho Oct 7 
i 1898 | 3570 | 2123 | 1023 782 | 7498 4 
39 | Bairagi—Beggar, ..........-+-. | 290] 248] 159 | 78 68 | 553 | 125 
40 Courtezany toldeciiacces . | 154 | 7 | 388 | 6} 138, 589 | 35% 
41 SINGER ciersleieleleterers oreteiets 1 0 2 0 0 QD 
155 7 390 6 138 | 541 34 
42 | Baidya—Zemindar, ...... aerere 1 | 3 0 | 0 | 0 | 3 | 3 
43 Bhysicianinvis ddcleeseeh «> 48} 141 19 | 44 1} 215 | 42 
49 144 | 19 44 11 218 44 
T eae el ea 
44 | Sidra—Carpenter, ....-..0-0000. 104 200 151 | 110 UME 538 53 
45 Goldsmith, ........... A 1 5 5 | 5 0 15 | 15 
46 Mogar or Brasier,........ 2 3 ay 1 1 9} 43 
47 Tambir Maker, ........ 1 2 2 0 0 4 
48 | Kashidadoz, or Embroiderer, .... 2 0 0 2 
49 | Garowar—Boatman, ..........+. 
50 WEIS Goobo salvielejelsiere 
61 Shopkeepery | eiicece «i 


44 


Number. 


73 
74 


CENSUS OF THE 


CASTE AND PROFESSIONS. 


Shopkeeper? cetereweicrs cetoree 
Thread-maker, .......,... 
Picture-drawer, .......... 
HemMin dare see seis winger 


Gota-maker, or Laceman,........ 


Kiulal=-Potter,.cacacscideicncabies 


Khotta—Drum Beater, .......... 
Gunri—Shopkeeper, ........... Ps 
Karmi—Service, ........0. Societe ‘ 
Kandu—Cooly, ....... suse srouslerete 
Shopkeeper, ..... Tee 
SOLVICes o ocfetlesis -ceieoiers 
Banian—Shopkeeper,..... ....-- 
SELVICES © je ores dieters eiecetare ous 
Tambili—Shopkeeper, .......... 
Fant Service pee: sesie ce oly cceteie ease 3 
Chandal—Thread-maker, ........ 
SUM LCL yo fe ciate cee eiererieneie 
Service, ..... siete evn 4 
Physician) 2000.2 sieic.cheic ete 
Gribastha, ...<,,.0.'0' exete 


wi Nn 
o wm 

a | © > 2 S a2 
ws > i) A S ars 
OS, iS ee WS ll ees Poe es ! 
ei | 2E | we | Ok | SE | BE : h 
B sey 5s |“ s.15 8.) se | Proportionos| 
2 6 o> iN = : | 
ga | o> aa) Meal ie > Sg Inhabitants 
c= seh as |e | SS) 8.) tow Etouse 
Z, fs fl o 

oe ® = ® £3 

2 fo fx og 

(am) BS 

2 3 3 1 8} 4 


112 238 163 73 Ys 531 


240 | 493 361 175 119 | 1148 


| 


1 2 0 1 0 3 

1 1 1 1 0 3 

2 0 4 1 2 Pane ge 

9 3't270 0 1 14! 18 
i2/ 61 6 2 Til. 700) eee 

1 1 1 0 1 ilu 
$51 63+ 118'| ‘29 30 |/2240: [anes 


109 128 139 32 395 334 335 


CITY OF DACCA. 545 


a 24 
Sed Peas fe | 8 | as 
t , Be eee ee | ee | 2 el SE | peorncbixe 
3 CASTE AND PROFESSIONS. an | Sal unacleaelus | Sa roportien 
2 Fea Ba OO ow oO | Oo ts B Inhabitants 
| Bes Sent ee gs eee ime ee We) We a to a House 
Ss Zo co go «oO go ra @ ye 
; a — 
82 | Chamér—Currier, ........ 2.006 175 | 364! 924] 154] 101 | 943] 54; 
| ne ede | Ts a (a i ae 
| 83 | Sahu—Weaver, ..... Bvecrabetalatetoters 9 15 12 2 7 36) 4 
| SH) Shopkeeper, .cciccecsscecc se sles . | 646] 959 | 584] 293 | 351 | 2187 | 3.9, 
| Os) || Wes Hensoon sdabeed salem o bo 5 12 10 6 3 31 61 
| SouleSaratee steer ee ee, 29] 44] 20 2| 281 54] 32 
| Sm|pBxoker, | fore. 0h 2s tees cc des || (258 f° 477-|| 1866"! 232 | 141“) 1216 | “ars 


Servicesenaeccbotee. dbocoecdans 195 | 452] 268}; 153] 101] 974 
HPNYSICIAT etesetee oie civetisees cose: ] 1 1 1 1 4: 
Zemindar, ....... aici Rhea ate 1 7 13 34 36 90 


me OO 


1144 


1967 | 1274 


Nat—Songster, ..............008. 
Khatak—Hogkeeper, .......... 
Mali—Flower Seller, .. 
ishermam yen. sf Sebel oleae 4 
Mehter, 

Sankari—Shell Ornament-maker, 


Teéli—Bullock-keeper,............ 


99 | Iron Smith, 

100 

101 | Talakdar, ........ 

HOW Needle-makery |... ce ec cee. tee 


76 | 
2 2 4 1 1 8 4 


103 
104 


Mogar or Brasier, 
Bicturerdrawer, | Yeh.:. Git. 4.24 


664 | 52 


126 275 195 107 87 


105 
106 


Gartria—Blanket Seller, ........ 


SERVICE; « oicreretaii4 ales 


107 | Dhobi—Washerman, ..........-+ 141 


108 | GowAla—Milkman, .......... ean 248 | 298 | 2055 | 5$ 


98 Kshirkiti—Maker of Chara,...... 


Gold Ornament-maker, .......... 


046 CENSUS OF THE 
a Bun 
ERS Cie eee 
5 5a 3 F ce 3 ; 3 z 3 5 Proportion of 
2 CasTE AND PROFESSIONS ae 2 oie 5 = 213 S oe Tahabitants 
5 es Gai go ae ao = 3 to a House. 
es |e 8 = S ie 
a re | B® [ee 
109 | Toyepal—Shopkeeper, ...... wees | 103 | 206] 153 86 64] 509} 5 
ADO} MME ry iledscisiew Sates Seleis, 2 toleks 4 0 5 1 0 6] 14 
RIL, | Weaver; te iecast an seh-teute dens 35 | 50 58] 24] 23] 155 | 42 
112 ; Cloth Seller,......... Sife eke vocaistd ASG 19 37 39; 16 19 111 54 
113°) Trader. . 2.20... .f. adoys.clelatctcie;, efeieraie]e 4 5 8 8 2 23.) 52 
A14 | Talakdar : .j..3.:.:0lees.« Joins heielejeis.eiwie'cl 2 5 1 0 10 5 
115 | Broker, 2) sree 30% siaelelniegsheyoveiotaiehs 13 18 33 13 13 77 6 
116 | Ropemaker, 0.0. cee). < sient syeie's s aleve fe 8 1 12 6 1 20 | 24 
117 | Brasier, ..... DPR Res poet aoe 4 4 (6 1 en) Hie oe) 
118 SOLrviCe;-sjsisreierero-4 ote orapere erelatetrere| ote 11 14 16 3 6 29 34% 
119 ( Barber—Physician, ........ ..<« 
120 SOEVICESG Riise Ve ciotoie.dieicie 
121 Barbers] Boice ils tte: eiondiaies 
122 | Kahar—Service, .......cceee00: AG | 
No. 2. 
eB Bu 
Z| caste ano Provessions 12m |®8 | 8] 25 | 28 | Sm | Proportion of 
| | <6 ES ao | ge EE | to a House. 
z Pah eo |e eo ee 
=) Be 
1 | Musselman—Zemindar, ........ oe 74 | 416 | 341 149 | 159 | 1065 ; 142 
2 Service, .oestige odieay 2067 | 4231 | 2436 | 1458 | 931 | 9056 | 43 above. 
3 Shopkeeper, ........ 1080 | 1724 | 1326 ; 594) 3876 | 4020] 38 
4 Grihastha,.......... 1070 | 1425 | 1459 | 649 | 346 | 3879 | 32 nearly. 
5 Rafugar or Darner,.......... 002 45 66 75 42 172{,.)200: | 4€ 
GB] Cooly. eee ocelot al olla vals ater aherete 461 656 | 609 234 179 | 1678 3$ 
7 | Nadaéfi or Cotton cleaner, ....—. 15 15 16 10 4 45 3 
8 | Tika or Gal seller, ........ 0+. Ae 85 85 88 40 42. | 255 |. 3 
9 | Mullah, ......e0eceees Hatrercre init 23 43 | 34 | 11 11 99 | 42 above. 
10 | Beggar, ..csccevcererce, cecssoes 218 ' 259! 232 90 47 ' 628° 28 


CITY OF DACCA. O47 
ry n 
| % he eee | Ey Vs | ee 
Beep. ire 20/02 | 5 81 ee 
| Pa ou |} ae ce | ac é | 3a? Proportion of 
8 CASTE AND PROFESSIONS. 5 bp ” i; 8 Q 2 eC 8 © 2 = Lihabitants 
| 5 Fe Sion a= i | go = 3 to a House. 
z ele ® s= a) S'S 
| A a ee a ees 
A Naylon seis Se: tee ee 188 | 312} 295] 153} 95] 855| 4,5 
foultrader. 0 ea a, 121 | 297| 132] 23| 20] 472] 32 
13 | Sikalgar or Polisher of Steel, 11 23 23 7 2 55 | 5 
| 14 | Picture Drawer, %............00. 2 2 0 0 0 2/1 
15 | Tushhizgar or Knife ia 4 6 7 2 2 17 | 43 
16 | Flower seller, ........ 2... 7 5 9 5 4 23 32 
Mei COURLEZAN Se) < 10.02 sfe)e c cizileieia's ols, Wes 139 7 | 207 7 13 | 234] lis 
US SongstersiGe od f.5.. dooeono boos 18 14 29 10 2 55 3 
19 | Physician,..... boboadodclodes ddd 9 16 21 3 5 45 | 5 
20) |NGrayer Digger Ves ears ou ele 11 9 12 11 4 36) 33% 
21 | Green Grocer, ......... Bbetsrs 43 87 25 14 9 135 | 34 
22 | Kunti or Corn Thrasher, ...... 2055 | 2994 | 3181 | 1334 | 1233 | 8742 | 44% 
23 | Shoe seller, ......... Bee siall aiare 63 58 11 5 76| 13 
24 | Brass or Copper seller, ....... 10 20 0 0 0 20} 2 
25 | Jardozi or Embroiderer, 4 6 8 2 0 16} 4 
Qealmsoapmakern secede eee 3 2 4 1 0 71 23 
27 | Rejagarri or Terrace beater, .. 12 10 17 6 0 33 | 22 
28 | Water carrier, ...... alert Prati: 10 15 17 8 9 49 | Ayo 
29 | Bullock keeper, ........... ? 21 25 35 15 15 90 | 4 
Si). 1) CCG etiod oommnonooouDE ome shevonche 3 5 5 6 2 18 6 
31 | Weaver,....... drys dees ca ee ee 18 25 23 13 4 65 | 32 
32 | Ellachabandi or Ornament stringer,| 30 42 52 20 16} 130} 43 
SomleNoTchabundser seegere cicekc 23 32 27 30 5 94 | 4 nearly. 
Saale Nardiaugi. | yatta ck eee cok we 5 7 6 6 4 93] 43 
35 | Nakarchi or Drum a mde 27 48 43 15 21 | 127 | 43 
Sop Breadmakers ut!seetacscsices cece 16 17 17 0 0 34} 23 
STAID Er; Ps laces oe Sorsiatecetelaissiatecreiders 23 28 26 12 8 74| 3% 
SOmiMMVelNidigvers Ws) veces cee SSHEGOO 16 25 2 0 0 27°|- 13 
SOM Nam buriee saneecen ccs BAe rashes 3 2 4 1 1 8} 22 
400 Merchant Sasericc. Wh... leminehls: 126 ; 216 37 10 23 | 286 | 23 
41 ; Fisherman, ..... aieieicicclet ae ckeerriere 90 146 | 128 40 20} 3829'| 3¢ 
AQMP Lorehibearetys acces bclctccere 4 5 7 2 2 16 | 4 
45ul Chuaritsellerssiioc dorerecvautesiee 42 | 122 70 6 6} 204] 48 
44 | Kashidadoz, ........... cauoHese 89 8 99 10 6} 123] 
45 | Khandigar or Ivory seller,,....... 56 71 53 35 21] 180] 3% 
AG HIOLISE) qercicele renee aritereteeteinials cfs 29 62 59 18 11] 144] 9 
47} Bricklayer,Wea; a.ctlelabietiele vertes Nepal ir ci 69 55 | 475 | 4); 
48] Pine workers sie. trocere veteran oeretts 5 5 8 5 2 20] 4 
49 | Washerman, ......... 14 23 22 13 9 67 | 444 


548 CENSUS OF THE 


a o oA 
2 | BS 2 z a2 
33 an OR Oise HAO) seh] RSS 

° a) rr um ot mn on | 
5 C P j gt | es : € 2 ¢ | |e | Proportion of 
4 Gad a Mas ie a) WU = Bl lashes] (OB [am |e By 2 Inhabitants 
5 Ss= [oe | so} seo | ee] oa to a House 
cs IZ; OS malinegior re|- pee uy een dre : 
Z |= S = 2 Ss 

a BS 
50 | Dandy, ....... svetabere ic prolsheval al afererere 13 20 22 10 9 61 bye 
51 | Pattaraseller, ....... 4 akote int vie Loveve 3 24 64 15 6 7h 92 | 4 
520) WBarbery |. 08: o5,distes we otis seve siels Sere 3 3 4. 3 1 il 5 
53 ; Charcoal seller, ...............00- 8 19 18 5 3 45 | 5 
54 | Khadem to Dargah, ............ 3 3! 3 0 2 8 | 22 
55:1 Strinpyseller, coh ss Reise Re 25 25 25 13 | 12 751 3 
56 | Chabuk-sowar,.....i.4.:.0.0cee8 6 8 7 0 16 | 24 
57: | Chikand oye ns os Se osieg hE sole AM 6 14 19 6 1 40 | 64 
58) | ‘Dinner, « h6s8 cto orete oe ha 6 b:0 sip otaee 103 | 305 54 9 1|. 869 | 34 
59 | Turhand! binder) 2..../.1). 6.54). 4. 8 6 2 2 18 42 
60; | Oilman, | GER oj. Bas 5h eh boston 16 50 38 16 10 114 72 
61 | Tankadar Nizamat, ...,.........% 9 13 82 7 6 58 64 

8825 | 4428 {11741 | 5271 | 3798 |35238 4 


wi es) 
a g e = 
Se : S = s S 
ae cr ge]. Ses 8.8 \aarne i ae e 
CAsTeE. Ol ip cs nS 2&8 Fai i roportion 0 
aa ae 2: no 2.10: S38 Inhabitants 
= = 3 2 © 3 
os Gr 5 © © 50 =o to a House 
z 5 oy a e s 
= i 
Armeniany3 ..5é0.. 42 49 37 25 15 126 3 
Greek; cnt. Jed. 21 19 12 10 o 48 21 
Portuguese, ...g0.+ 41 52 36 38 18 144 | 33 
Frenchy, (3 ceGiorde pyerscsre 1 2 0 | 2 0 4 |. 4 
Total.... 105 122 85 75 40 322 345 
Hindoo, ...... Meverele's 7327 13045 9907 4678 3799 31429 42 \ 4 
Mussulman, ........ 8825 14428 11741 5271 3798 35238 4 i 
Total..., 16257 27595 21733 10024 7637 66989 43, 


Males ¢ Females 
above a 27595 ahora i 21733 | Adults... 149328 0 
Males 
under 16 
— 


Total Males, {37619 | Total Females, |29370 


Females ; 
: 10024 Re eng, 7637 | Minors .. {17661 | 0 


0 0 0 


| 


CITY OF DACCA. 


Z 
© 
= 


ea eo UN po ee = 2 
2 He label oie Nasco Se allem Gig sca, Ss 
ae | Seo | 529 |-6829 | One| a8 
Names or THANNAHS. 2s )/208/ e565 | 28s] + oe] + os 
Se Wises ton Sagon 8 Sio jssis.5..|..5- 57° 
Se) Smo | Fst | SE] est | eo 
ZS (4 Zs Aa sao so 
Zz Zz 
Islampur, .........++- aerte 20 1239 755 21 19 3 
Girdkillah, .......0...... 31 926 1663 5 4 12 
Dacca Serry, 3000 10 315 561 0 0 0 
Sultadnganj, .. 12 531 480 0 0 
SUP AUP UIT) eieyere/eeie  “eleiele « ake 11 286 628 0 0 0 
Ptrabda4rwazah, ........ 19 293 1604 22 17 0 
Amiligola; 3:3... AB AUC 24 1239 1361 0 0 0 
Nawabpur, .......... 17 1137 582 0 i 0 
INARA GIA’, Geicies sis ilelereteroief- 18 542 527 0 U 0 
Sardfatganj, ....... BS acbO 16 752 730 0 1 0 
Total, .... | 178 7260 8891 48 49 15 


Barees in- | 


Houses of 
Europeans. 
Total of Houses 
habited. 


Number of the 


or 


No oO oO 0 0 Cc GO = @ 


—_ 
fon) 


Z 
2 
a 


Number of Brick | Number of Straw 


Names or THANNAHS. Houses of all des- | Houses, including 


criptions. Golahs, Shops, &c. 

EST ADINTV UTS ctalayalavaleletstelelelelslolelelefeleiele ste (evel Vale : 604 2513 
Girdkillah, ...... sdooccodt prelemeieter: Shoo 1225 2110 
IFAC CANS OLIV i o/-nlelele eiel-lelevehaicio'« «\eis ote ogoce 112 694 
Sultaangunj, ......... oncsooadodocduobe 18 1927 
STEMI: oodteoooed Deo opeBNodE CoDouG 53 541 
PUPA DOATWAZAM alsalcic cleccccie simsclere A eC 192 1674 
LOU PSR Goikic SG8GqadeCenadoacecasé ac 251 4028 
INE EE Oaedeeot caaneoreguacen on C8 2 212 1558 
INURL IES ts etats TATE ce lain, ojchoie. a ars aierate mattisie 238 1749 
SALALAtC AD Prmmuaitetntetet cieiatcialofereinfaleleie (+ alate 259 1169 

Total, 3164 17963 


550 CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


No. 6. 


tet oe | eet Dip PG % 

on omy ones 

oa a ~ 2S 4 Sa 

of} s5Su]oco8 

NAMES OF THANNAHS. 25/20, ),2n2 
Ha | euag | uo 

pe | bao) eee 

5 as as 

ESIAMAUP UR, slots ieiers bee s'oceleie ale 20 | 276 321 
Sultadnganj, ...02+cescccece 12 14 12 
Ptrabdarwazah, ......00+. 19 139 45 
Sujaitpur, ...... Btevelevoetsisiets 11 28 18 
Nardindta,. 0.0.61. 3 dlececte 18 133 113 
Sarafatganjf es. ses. ealds ocele 16 132 127 
Girdkillah, (-.. .ccedececes [Sl 221 1001 
Dacca Serry,..ccccccsecrce 10 66 35 
Nawabpur, ..ccocesccceee 17 105 153 
Amligola, .i.scebecdts asics 24 139 85 
Total, .... | 178 1253 1910 


: au 

mw os 222 
MN st fool 
Reo lege 
i Sole a8 
SRO ay a li 
Pos Bat 
eae 5 oc 
o 1438 

71 24 
0 0 
2 10 

1 6 

2 29 
6 4 
4 10 
2 14 
12 20 
4 36 
104 158 


Number of 
fixed Native 
Inhabitants. 


4520 


57267 


Number of 
Lodgers. 


290 
718 
1492 
1301 
497 
1287 
280 


9400 


| Total Inhabi- 
tants. 


| 


66667 


551” 


CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


No. 7. 


ooo00De50000]0 90080090101 cooy oi}; CODBSDOO DS OO FSCS 
‘ojdoag } 2 
a Sear Becca he BEE Toco coe C OD OOO EOD 
aeale Gael a hee sale sical Payee Pee cE IE 
3 TooooOT OOOO || coooc oS © || cao TOSS CoS oO SCO OOS on) | 
*SOSnOyy qi 
DIO OEOHOHON)S|OLO Onno 20/0 CIC SnOTONEO oo) DISIS Spoon 1 oO ONO) O|ONS IO 
*ajdoag | , 
© é =| = —————— 
° DEOL ONOTOEONONO ONO TON| nO) eo) ee DIOS OS O|OND oOo OO CIO 
*sosnopy : 
© oye ONS) OOOO | 0) DooCoOO OO Soo] goooscscompocc ao 9o 5 
*o[doag 
f || ee eee 
5 SiO OjoOIS |S S ONS jO|S)O|O|OTONON IO Seopeo ©0099} 0)0, 055,55 OS o> Onlpe 
*sosnoyy | 
SOS SIS Op OL SON |S ra Caw) GOA OSS Co 0S So como 
‘aidoog | | : 
SS roel 
8 SjO_OTONOTOHOTOTONONON| iO OO 0, ONOjON INO e-5 nl Sones OOD ooo Soo] oO 
Dojo ooo SC O10 FO 9/0019 | o Sool]s |lmo ooo cee Ops os 9scs fo 
“o1doogq 
8 Sogossocc oso Do S19 0 OO Oy |S DONO SSS OS OS OOS SSSI po 
=| =i 
a Soo oc oS [> a= Be SSS SS OOO OOS FSIS 
sojdoog 
a DHOPOHO|OPONONONOLONON (NO) DjO|O|O|O|O0 Oo DOO |S | moe 6 0 ooo 010 010909 F105) 5 
“saSno FT | 
DIOPOHOLOPOHOTONS) OPO |S. DIO, 0) O50 COON INO. SSS SCO SOO OOS FS ONO 
-oidoag 
a = || S 
3 DIOLS LOIS O|ONOHOHONON| NO SOIO|SIO O10 0 [uo SSS 
-sosnoyy 
DIO|OIS OPTS) OLS OLN | NO) Op OHO|GIO|OFOjON|NOn||— OpONON [ES SSCS SOOO OOOO OOS TS 
-o[doag 
8 DoesseSecosso || ssssseooso || coo SOO OS OSH OOOO STS 
*sosno py 
DIO joo OROPONONONON| NO) DjOIO]O|0)O,OjOm On| | OROEON |S ssocessssscososcysso! 
-9|doog : 
CS DIOIO|O|OOESIONO NOLO N| NO | || meCEONChO OsOLOTONINO. DjONO) DO OS OPTS OOS S SISSIES | 
*s05N0 fT 
DjO|ONO|ORONO OlOO HOMIES DpOHONSTSO ONO) [Ou || EO TONON | NO SoS S SUSU US TET 
-ajdoog | 
8 SSSSSSSSCSC So || sessccos)6 ||-soe so || socsce so soscssosyo 
*sosnoyy 
D[S|O|O|OIOEOTSEO CjOm|EON || pECTOLOHOLONONONON INO. DOTS Doecos se oO SCC oOOo SO 
raldoag 
R DIOS OC OIO|O CIS IONS Ce - l | cocoocooascoocScoS =| 
ssasnoyy 
OjO|O S/O FOL Oj] OO |p OE|| mCNOCTOTOpO|ONON | O a el | ee a) 
sajdoog ‘ 
a SoSooSS SSeS ye|l>socsc ooo, || o00 70 || 5000000 010,010 0/5 00 01/0 
*sasnoyy 
a SIO|OpS|OOLOn |) Op || mo OONINO: i 
-o\doog 
a SSeesoeeeosyjo || scsscocc|s |l-cco OO] O|O|O) OjO|OHOTONS [ONO ONION INS 
*sasno}y 
DjopO)O OOO; O)O1On|O. DpO_OONOpONOIO) |) |p OpOHONPNO! DOO OC] ODO OO} O | ONOTONONONON INO! 
‘adoog 1 
& Sooooooooo eyo || coooosc0 © || coo) 0 || cooc5 00000500000 10 
*sasnoyy 
SeeooS SOOO o NS DpOIOLO |S OLOTOm|EO Spo One. Zeoossooo ooo em eo O 
‘aidoog = = a a 
jo; O|O LOMO ONO OLOm|at SHORES |OPOHON | ON || ppo_OnOn| NO) IO) 0|0 0) 0000) Oj=GO ON em 
*sosnogy 2 
SION) OpONO|O ONO =O DI OjO|OPONOHO ON (ON | OLO LOT. RIEO|OIO|O GO ONONO OPOROLO TOON |W 
-odoog acya iz = 
a OQ} ONO O| ONO HO ONO —IO [i OOOO Oj S [SI] © CLO] Su|| 03 0)0)0) 0 ©) 0) 0) ONOIONONONO ON [Cm 
‘sasnoyy 
‘SjORO|SEONONO zB 010 09/0/00 | ©) || oo; 1 © QIO|OHONO) OL O|OIOEO OL OECNONONON IETS 
-o{doag a a a 
a Sooo SS SCOR OI || Cope Seo o Fe l!_co > SSSSSSSSCSSSSOSOSSA 
*sasnoyy 
I QIO|S| ONO CHOON | NON || oropOn|pOn || mcloEONSES DlOUONCEO  CUCLONGONON Ec 
-ajdoag 2 a 
a 
a ee De) coooSosooy Oo eco yseo FO OOS 0010/0 010) 9 9/0 SON yi 
-sosnoyy 
OpOIO|O | OFO|OPOTOO LON | O SISHOEONONOTONON) Ton || IOEOTON [NO I 
-ajdoog a a 
ag DIO] O]0]| 050,000 OLOnI nO DjO_O|O|O|OLO|ON | O D/O | On| | mim IONDES lOOEOEO OLOTONOEOTONON urs 
*sosnoH , 
OjO|O}O ODIO} 0100 ONS oe a |) Roesoosecososescs S| 
aidoag a cS) a S| 
2 U = 
a SO] OS OiOpONONO On| OIOIO|O|OOHOION|EO aa) DISES|S|S|O|OESTO|O|ONOEOTONO ONO 
*sosnOoH 
DI O]O}0)050,0)010/0On[ O GjOHOIONO ONONON| On| |S wopOpON aS DISIO|C IS [OEOEO NOOO] O|OEONOUON (NO) 
-o[doag 
2 eS 
= (OO]O|O|OROLO|OLO|O LON O) jOROEONSHOIONON [yO SONON |S DjO|OEOEO|O_OTO| ONO NO |OLONONONON INC 
«sosnoyy 
DOO 1050) 0] 05010 On| nO || OTOHONOO|ONOION [nO Ojon |S DiSIS OS 0010, O/O 11S O SIONS 
sajdoog = 3 
2 =| 
© | [eza|| 9 PEPE = SoSS se SSS || cos) S|) mossS oOo ES OSS OO 
SSeS DjoqOjO S|O|OIONNO || ONOTO [no SOHO ISTO (OEOHO LON O|OEONONONONI NO 
sodoog q 5 = | 2 | 
Ss 
5 =I O)O] S| ONO O ONO On [um DIQO|O|O|O|O ON] O Onno DEO|OLO_S FO NOESTONO |OlONONCTONON| NO! 
ssasnoy 2.2 
SLOSOIOIOINSTOFORONON |) DOES CHOI OOO, || Huo ojo So Doo oooOoC CODCOD OOOO OTS 
‘aidoog. % a | © = 3 
° 
= OIOjO!O OI O;OLO LS omic Sr) © lp 1 19)O|O)O OO ONOFOHON Em 
eon r-e) DOIN EO DyOjO OILS 
CjONAPOHOHOES | OLONO LO) na OjORO: =a ce | 5) TEOTOIOHO OEOTOTOTOTO OHO NONONON IED, 
‘adoog I tI SOU SSS 2 = 
to) —_ 
i ClFOROICLOTOL VOLO R= o = = ||" moosssocoscoos ooo l= 
‘sasnoyy Spo_OEONOI =O. ooo )) 5 ° 
SSO} OOO Oj Onan, TOROm > SjOEOEOHONORONON EON ON I 
-3doagy SS = 3 CjOsOyS|S C1010) | 0 a) Secss ry = 
1 
= INO O|Osoi yO, OO Ono = > joK I 
‘sosnoyy OjOjOLSEOHOEOFON EO a RijO|O|O|O|O|ONOHCTONS! 
CIOHO|ONO, OO) OO On| nO Fy | DpS|SyO|S S/O O]O] ONOONSTONS. 
-ayddoagy Reesssos Ta || cools || scacce iE 
2 = 
a Soo C SoS oS SSO > S)6_||_=o= 50 550 0 0 ooo OO Sie 
“sosnoyy TNO ONO OHO LOO CR oD 2) 2 ° 
ee = fz >). =) DO SA SpoSONO | |p 
‘adoag Bra CjOsOEONOIONONON [NO ojOSa ES ee S050 a 3 3 
a) 
I Ojo} O|O ONO EOHOHONS IC [uy Se] i on | Sooo sors) |S 
*soSnofy OjOjONOIOIONONSN [nO Soom ie SouojOyONS 
jo Ojo TO]O OO LOn = = = = ||-ss37 5 = = SSSoeSeeooelS 
caydoag = = OOS Cras] cos Bssecess 5 
Ge! SON SFO Spa) OOO On fume SiO =eopar||> SONOS ISIS) ONS Oa 
“Somonr | sonecemo ja || ooo) 5 ||naocc5 [= 
SP OLCTOEC ECR ROROES Iie i) =) 20 = || MLOIOS SSO ONON SSIS PONOEONON [IDs 
sajdoog. =) 3 ARCA OLORON | =) salle 5 & aa g 
= || | 
=) DONO Ole cd O10 0 Spon cD 3 —=s = c =) = oe 
ssosnoyy | DpOiey OPO TONONON |u=> =) SSS R 
AASSOM OG ODO )o ° 7 Ae ee ec) 
‘aidong | Ea iy Doeoooco aa) 3 5 3 
C 
= S10 = 3 = Bo S1S/S 9 SSDS SOTO 
‘sosnoyy Wem OOO || oo aco oo) 5 = 
TAIDIONO OF LO OO [> -) > Dm ogo 0000 oO COO MMO 
amy oo Bl gecemeccc le SUre \3 
n 
Sma co = ig SO DOO) OO|O ONO on poy 
“soSn0 fT Doeseo la || wooas ooo] 4 qo ex [= 
wah oom tooo a oo) = || pos SPO ea oo 
‘odoog = as USS Sige poe eeaN a a o3°3 a 5 3 
& 3 
aaa CoM OS = c \ma o wes oo ONS mon =) 
-sosnoyy GS o)o S G00 000 | oO oo I° Be OF onolo as 
OMS OCcmMa oon aN -} re) oo ye 
‘aidoog I wa S B} PIES Pel S258 opese x 
=) 
=a oohad oom ts = ay |||> x = 5) 
‘sosnogy Ss qeeseens a Smile QB oosooem ace aE 
> WS OCCoMOOom > 1) Ou Te | Po) Di QO OOO HOM OOo | oO 
ajdoag 5 & a5 MAPP ACAI OLOCAON AR F283 ae |= 
re) 2 
=oSomm Oo on rsaonon ie Qa =a aoe 2 
won| 8° =A ae aa aR a ET Sa SSE 
O2 oc oS co = Saal 
ofdovgr 8 25) I} 200] 0 BSRg oT oe oes TTR 
by | =) = 
om oo oom Soo iNom 
*sosnoyy I = a a) PUsRQ om oS oN ANS SS g 
Cat ‘Ql ooo |) oO. 2S ) Woomoo |S 
‘odo 85 8 ae Soman 3 
C) S S = 
RROSosnN nis = == WaoR ra 
*nORNOTT bel =] 2B Sooye Sarason ATA es SO g 
CR CaN e oN al | I Daaononwnoanonono |S 
‘oy doog 8 Be 8 aja a ER PER 8 $ 
Oy) ral e 
CD Ota Da a =S oO Sora reo ry =Gonmomo 
HORNOTT tl io) 3 Stree 1EGe 273 TaNoRgS g 
= a s 
Gate oamoqo co}° aRinoo oc eo oNsOOMO lm 
‘oidong = a x 5 | TaRooce S 5 
Vimeo ooo % So ronien SST _ y Secon 
WOUNO TT a a x Or) FaRgro oso oN oS ais 
y t . ‘ uy od Svs 4 
i : i. : By SMO 
6 s . -$ of 
S | dy ba 
By 3 re * Ad aire 
, gk Betilig 
Fs a ene] Shel eaee ees 
" wee OURERE ROR 
i) § 
“| & a 
o ie 
) 
2) ONS al a i 
ba br [A By ON Ls) 
coun Howgenag an RRS 


CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


oy;oc]° eoyo eooc°o oocy° 
» | sojdooa } 
$ Syeoye | os ,s||-coeee Tee] Se 
*sosnionT | | | 
a s oo C) oo oi easog -a-r-) o 
weal [| k 
8 |S ewes aS ceoss STSIOR TS, 
*SosnopyT | 
Oo) oo] 2 Oo po oO O10 0 Soo] ° 
‘oqdoner | ] | 
3 Sapa S soy > Socce ooo | > 
\ “sosnoy] | 
°°) oo ° oo ° coooo eoo ° 
Tint 
5 =)ee ]° CON NO 0500 0)) 2 Cojo fo 
oF l 
= =) oo s -) ‘om eoscceo ° ooo oO | 
“oj doog | 
8 |- o) 2° 0c oO] o | 
*"sosnoy{ | 
Spa |e SC See] es 
ajdoad | 
a a) ee Closon eo 
“SOSNO EL | 
poo ol Come 00/0010 [oO DONO N | c) 
‘ojdoad 
! 
3 of Slo E> ao 1S SpOEOEOTON | NO ii 
sosn op 
5 ye So) ° O)ONOsOON (No iy 
soi doag 
8 a) 2° |e |\|—oe 1° C/O OO On [PON || mOLOlo) | o 
*ROSNOTT 
ee 
° oso S oo ceoooo S ooo ° S ° -i--- 0-0-0) 2 ° ° ° | 
sajdood. | 
8 ooy° CO SOOM O O00 [0 ° © SERRE SS 3 aie ° Seis 
aa a) SpOESHONON [NO Pea sie Spee esooscolls Zell 
& i) I | a a Oa SS [ie cyeoye 
“SOSNOLT | 
oo, oS po ee fe CCNOEONON |! ooo ];° Ca i is oyeye 
ail Cc) 
91d09 qT i 
2 i Le 
3 a) Ojon I a) SO ON/,0 ain a a ie syeyle 
“sasnoyy | 
OR oR E | Eo) oo];eo CIO ONONS) [po Soo; of cope poesoccooccoco lS copes | 
‘odo. 
Se |) 5-5-0 a) a) cpPpoloascogacocooos) 0° cycles 
*sasnoyy | 
sypocys OlCN|NOm|| MCECNONCNON|N Cn ooo] ° O | o)| Sooo ooo DSC oS Sycors 
‘ajdoag | 
a Spoe © || 22 e|| co c2 oo |lmooe > a cance 
*soSno py 
on Cyn [ES OECEOONON Ol i el | ae Be i SL es oye ye | 
-ajdoag a) Gi 
* < 
Speco y= a a | Sooo a I TT aa 
“sOsnory | | 
a con ES SEOEOHONO ly EO Ono a eT TE Se ]S)° 
‘y{doog | o 5 
=) — 
n Oy] Sonne Sone Cae Spoon |S So aso soso 0c o= p= || mona 
-sosnoyy | | 
oyeooyo oof > Oo005 |) 5 Soo] S Cae ee a) syeye 
‘ajdoog | 
° 3° 2 oo ° cooosoo ° ooo So |) ° es;rsscossosococe o > S 
=| 
Sa Oa oooco)s Ca et a CHC 
ajdoag 
x 
oy) oy, oc]> oa cos os] > oooye i an omonES 
ee l 
1 
aS SOnES Sp OROEONON ES SS Spo DOOD SOS SNe SaaS 
2 doa 1 
a — | 
Gi Sap ONOn ES Sion E> DpOEOHONON | © = ae a] 2 
*sasnoyy 
2 ae SJ OS So oo oo9 ° ° OporcsosooSoooosS So > ° c 
-ajdoog | 
2 = 
a Su ECTOn| NS a OI a a 
*sasno fy ) | lie 
I ay ae) Dojo oon] Oo In a ee oon] 
‘ojdoag i | a o) 
| | 
2 2 a Oe) coyo ~e iSTOTS = GIONS, iS) ° ° ecocomoossooso —_ ° So : 
*sasnofy | 
2] 22 = CS la Soeec ys ll oso, 0 SSO OO |SO|OO OLOLOn ES ae 
-ajdoag | a | o s || iS | 2 Jaz S | | 
— — 
a i o-l- wooo oI Spopmeooseosco oOo so s;n ope pe 
“sasno fy | 
Syjooyo lise yo OPOOPONON| NON || maoTOEON NO in LLL opPop,e 
-ajdoag | | | 
= 
= eyesye SOm|ES SjOROIOHOn| ES O)O) [n> Spon | Sue) Om OONONOTONON |S ae 
“soso fy 
sypecys on | 2 SpoyOEOHON IO DOHON [Eo =) ECHOES OTOH a 
-adoag | | =i All ] al Les 2| 
2 
tJ ° oo ° o- = csooce 2 ooo °. = eooscoe nk o > ° 
‘sasnoy, | | | ae ee) | |] 
° oo 2 oso 2 escocse ° ono = = ° co ° 
‘a[doag > > ° ° pin Soir al ke | | 
6 
=I 2 ore SpSEOTSTON | =o =) z Sao 
‘sosnoy S a PP RRS SSSA =| 
° oF J os = csooos ° ooo ° oS ecooooo > ° > ° 
-ajdoog a) eeoce lz 
Ss = = 
= oro Sono SPOROTONS npn || seonopon |) O o. 
“sasnoxy | l ats og Seis = aise aal = | a | 
ipa oo ° |: | 
= Ie Soy il SS = r = rc r 
-odorg Se I = 5 Sypeypesscsss SSSR i) =e 
i) | 
ry oy oo1e CONES ee) I i) = > = = 
| sosnoy on || ee pence cere sere “T a) 2 
i 
- specs oS SSoSy ojoN| No Su SSRIS aICLONSNON ORONO [uc =)=]°2 
aydoog = = aca l=) =} 
a SLE | | | 1 
I a Son p> =sooc)]-— = —SSS= = |S 
‘sasnont | | | a csaye S Sars ae ie = 
Sy] O°. [en || ore, o 212) Oyo Onno CIELO pCa 
x Ea g Cin ko Ss CS) 
aydoag Pa = 5] & secon s 
5 = 
= 25° == s — 
“sosnopy | eas | SETS 99035 75 | Peal == SicwoySNs OOO 2 ail =) He 
adoag | 1 | ° > [> aa See sS pe | sss e > a ie a]? > 
Y = I | a 
‘sosnoyy | SERRE Pee F897 OOHRS! PRE 2) oooseecoocsa || a = 
i 
Sif © Ono sae SSSSeS = = 37 | 
E ° ze =s=)= = a= = z =)° ) > 
ai doog =|-= = [ea i a asl SITS CR a] = | 
mo J ° = J 
“SORNO PT RS Cee ier = CCNY oc) oO, -Noom= oc9000/0 =y]e 7° 
y oy;sc\s oe) Sc12 1c) Ssye | == = = =) 
ado | le = SHSa aR a s0° |= =)°)escearo== =a Sl | 
—) | ' ct 3} 
Th \teoe TeSys > 2 > > Oo) =o F r B > )= )> 
SOsNO Ly | = | VN) Tpreprseconesagee-=1 3 S | 
oo E = = r 
‘aydoag | TTP || Seip S| ee Se pay || was Spe peSsawecseoa (a | aio Ic 
Gy jee E = 
Sn) Son |p: = SSS Ss —= sss 
‘sosnoy | | ono ioe ase | ails s=s Soroemclss Ce 
‘ord DNPH [pty || enon [ne Ce ar) a so} a o5 nO 8 SoS ery 
a doo a a Sno; a es Hae esoces B Z1> 
oH G 3 
70 | o> ||—< —— |}. pee —_—— 
*HONNOTT | COTS = ooo STS a > a Se = ae] = 
F Saisie ica oye I) 5 s TS = 
adorg ” o I" aig, Sia aa°18 a SIS GEOL SECROLN 2 =i) CS 
w a 
TO POLOM [aC | | teotea | ee Ses = 
‘sonnoyy | 5 Ta ||sae/s |= 7s sgoemeeem oem ells )° 
Ss Ro Dp > Oo, © |ll-m oo so o TA —3-—4 —=—__s a 
‘dong | 3 | # | SOS BCR ISICT | «3: B2°, 8 alt TESS Fooso ceo s eyele 
° —_ = = S 
OC) no | a >| |=alacorore = = + —— a 
*wONNOTT CDS Oa are) Dio) = To; oRem wees soon Ss a)? 
, A a | Be a ae ou oa | ——$—_—_— —— — — SSS TS 
odong als B lh Ble Ey Carls i? ]> | omoane ooo oesS 3 
i = : ¥; a R 
Sones 
‘wownort | toa! “ OG LO RG O1Os C585 8.9) Q 
a ae a =| 
olong o's S TYoonowrwWooeN | ec 
Ch By * a a 
whe |p = 
6°16 SETS oe SoSH B 
arene y = 
ey 8 S 
: 8 
are) val | 
7 Boa 
opdoogy % ‘) sa 
7 Tm ry ee] S| ie. =F Se 
wounogy | | = = Siow Some Oy 
rodong | 8 |? a PSCC SOOO TR 
WOOT a | ee “ Swe OSS “| 
4 ‘ : : 
d 
6 | ,, 
Ci) . 
j it 
2) i fh 
i 
a | Pi : y 
f tis a 
- Li oI Ow i a) 
un [8 8 ee 
¥ PAGY " cue , ' 2 
FARES RRs FRSVARARECURTY $b 8 


| 1 2 osjo} o lie 
sc) =) 
ct = 2 Seon [not re a) 
un 
o Sion ES opel? 
3 o ooo Spo > 
ORNOTT 
nao On oo, o oo] > 
sooo a * 
on i 
3 op= 5°) a) eye |° 
*sOSNOTT 
Of Oo;o no 20 ),° apo, 
‘oqdooa 
5 are) 20 a oe 2. 
sNOLT 
Spocoys eo en a 0 Cpeosooos cools syTele ls 
‘odoog | 
ae ee 
Gs Ss oee | en||—seae || fe | ose oo) o le |occcccc co || © poo 
=oaon|) | 
‘Sp ooepe |e one Spol,ooscoy > 5 a 7 [oe ape 
“odo g 
3 o | o°° |e a) a On| 00 00D Ol On [no =) 
ere cl 
Soe ao) S/S | oo ;onmnen f= Sp aSeaeeee |e 
‘900d | = F 
3 op os° je CON iy ieee La 
‘saSnOTT 
Of Oo one oO] o a Cf ooo OOo CONC, oe 
tajdong | 
1 |—_______—_ 
Ca) CHOON | TS ooo S]o | cocoa | > Sy] ONS OOOO On Io sypeyoy,? 
*sasnory 
a Soo a i a i opolo Te 
‘odoog 
ra) ie =e 
2 Sao one || rene 2 [2 || co 0 aa a en 
OFT 
iv a I Bon OF ie on Lao So oue 
oda. | 
G ae coo Oe a Sees co oo Sal onppone 
*sasnopy 
So) SSO || m Oren (een em fncn or ene: S1on |e Oj OO OjO ONO OL ONES oo po 
-apdoog. | 
8 SPSlo pe || coy elle] oS) coco oy on|| op coo ooo oO ono oO onmonponte a 
'SOSNO]T 
% a Son |e i oe > 
on | | 
a SS SOO || oor pron|| me |) Sup Goro ropon | On || = ony On ope o) oro OpOn [eon Il onmonmontmo 
= | l | [| 
Ou] Doon © a) CNpoy pS oyereen pe a a a a) 
*ajdood | | | 
2 
a Ce ran -) ara) Ca ee [oop ONO TS ONES! a a a 
“sosnoH | | | 
a Reors ae ee Sy [g SNe) CO lONONONON [mo a on 
‘adorg a a 
a a a =e ]o i ace Sp] o 1S Oo CNOONOn INO 2) “ho 
eae ra 
yp ooo pe cele ee a a) Su 01010 OO OONONINO apo ,o po 
‘o1doog | | 
2 
on a ee ooy;o cy}o;pococoyeo oposcoocooc;s ecypore|,o 
*sosnoyy | | | 
a) a°1g 5 I De) aa a) ool > 
‘aldoag a a 
» i 
a an =o |- ies eo on ae 
*SOSnOH | | 
a a a) 25/12 SIcion nS: Sy SpSO NS) SISTONON [> oo [oe 
ia | Eo rr 
o an rae) a Sy | pONSEONONONOTONOn [mO™ Caan i 
— | (eeaiiea| 
sypecsye seye e--a-n ) a eI cl a ae 
-a1dood | a a 
a 
a o aE SSE eels ° Serres s le (Seis 
Ca) a a =a 
=) ) poe Specs oogoo ag a= 
a po 
x = oeye I-50) a es ae a Dd 
*sosnoyy 
Se ed SromiES coocsco;so a ee opyol1oyo 
enrres | l 
R aa a | w--e- ) a -e D) a)Seypo ys] 
, TA | l 
iS) 5 a ae Ca a eyeoyels 
S atta | | al Fol dia eres ESS 
= = 
fa) ce Syecsoyes soys 2 == So Oni a Dd oo) = 
za eT | 
S| peec/eS coye csc a Sa oe od 
fe) -aidoag o|= = | = le | | 
> = 3S 
S 8 io [ol Seyo so) o>=55]) = Le oye p> 
a *sosnoyy | | | | 
~ I 
oO “ado0q, co rate cele oyo SOF | =| ESESee ery o)eo iis 
ayloag = 
g | 2 
= aa rn o> i ee) Speopo pe 
= sain] —] meh rea ewe cial Aes 
| a ee cS yo = ; aS ouEcuNom ES 
By ‘aidooa | = Sh RRR A 2 Siac [= | 
le} & L 
= Se i o=7- |e = Se ie oi 
Z sea" fal Seed (i es se 
mM oycososTs ocoye = a epessconsesol/s oyeoye ye 
Zz, ‘a1doag | | 2 |F co ei 200 | = E | | 
] 3 
“=I Sy Scop o = o]- o)2 Sy OLS Deon oNONON ict oa) Sapeue 
o *soSnoRT | ziE epee | | | | 
— 
aa Says So) ae Sa oaeS 
rodoog |= 3 = |> ape Pa Fle | S°°8S Js =| | |= 
=I oo pa alae == = os = 
-SoSnOH y Oo) o> [1S Son DERE > a> =i] 
STs 52 = a) =T= >) osc os o> SaeS 
‘aidoog & = 2 iE eee = Sy) EF =| l= 
anal = So,0 zara wl oy) ooo Om crea > ie 
© | oo 0 2 3 5 
-aqdone, 2 "2/8 = +a ill alec =SPaqe S Tel 
r= >| oo 3 = 2 S > r- 
-sosnoxy nile oa ya S al wl Sec s a ele ibs 
OP ooo yo ooTeo oye a co) eypemocoxocysa eye 
‘adooa | al ks Ea 3 2 Slat | 
a 
= co] ooo oe || « = = 
‘Sosnofy So Iilfe =) ia al —_— = “iia 
|__| 
4 Sjc=cT= =le oo S) Spomeocemools e,>°) ope 
| eon] [°="J=|l ==] [eels ioe eal E: eel 
= —— 
= c]o=o)= || = 
‘sasnoiy | call Sap Sais a ST eR ape ells 
Sc ,ooo TS = 2 cE) 2 =) cf ocmla co o])° 
“oidooat | liz |= $38 /8 5) mela = = or S ali 
sc << _<<$<____'__ 
aoe |b Spaooy— a) > Sooo} > Sao omboolS oy)e)o)|)=—)= ee 
7: |i aa al inl Me ieee a 
Cyl noo ps i> o> So ooo TOO) pea peape | 
oat | w 2 S518 ic fl S ogo oSa> |= > ale = 
a _ 
So) oo yc OO TS = SS 
‘sasnoys | = ale oasis SSooreoossS TAI 
a eae i) =) A o> — 
*odoogy i aa |e 2 | Seale Sa eace gf) TASS 
2 | L 
oypsnoya ao 1 o opopes D = = 
‘yosnoyy |] ae ail =| aeiae as | ele 
cpeeo]s r Z ~ cS 
OT = 38/8 Sela ee 6 SE2°SE°" [5 
a Le = 
== Opa Oo | Ht = 
‘wORNO}T ¥ op,o;oooom |= al EeSeR Se 
_— ¥ 
‘0 dong Cs Sa 3 3 
of 
=on om) = 
HONNOTL “il = Fy S 
syRSS) : eee 
‘otooa] ° [REE |S a[peea ley! e = 
op Hac | o ~ = 
‘wounoyt | TTD iS |g pe pL SS 
wo mol by 7 
‘ooo [ARs t SF | RONNIE Haat eS aS 
= a 3 
pean | Spoomon |S 
F = S| -~Rom oa 
nor | § a RB=P]R 
yi 2 BLP omar oe = 


Service, «--c00-e-- 


Te 


a“ 


CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


oo1° ecoooDo;0 soj° O1o|20050cbb50]65 eoojo clo 
ie | [3 
g oo [> SoD Oo Sono a DD oS e Ss ope 
ona | | l | 
Seonies sooo o) oS Slonins rl | es 
‘oudover | | | 
B ooo SuOpo ONO ION |S oo] > So |= o=eccc oss oS = 
‘soot | | | 
seo |l-c ooo o oe] 0° oo > o [2 |) oe PSs copoo] o oz 
“gidoog | | | 
3 oo > Dopo |S) | co] > Sa a Spe 
*SOBNOTT 
ea) SoS omen ron| | prone a Nc cooy ol] 2° 
atiena 
S 5) DjoyopoyOION |) oO co |? Cy e;oeoeoo oo ooo OS a) a 
ail 
soe Dojo > OO) [po oon] 2 an 
sodoog | 
8 oo [> Seoooe | ° oo [2 So | Soo ojoro|onor ono 
‘sasnon | | 
Zz oOo] oO eae) oo > Oa 
*oidoa gy | 
3 OPO [PO ol) oo oS Coron TO! oe Oe ie 
*SOSNO ET | 
a) —i-a- Oro) in LLL 
‘adood 
3 DIOS GOS SS opoporaroron |e cole i ae 
“SOSnOHT 
So5/o Sooo oo] > ooo Sion cieye opener oo 
‘aldaner | 
8 a | Sooo oo] 0 Tope o Ti sl a oe 
co] ° ToD OTON al) i oo 
BY — 
o coy Ss ee} oo peo Oa ae ooo; ° oye 
‘sosnont | 
ooys DOOTOTO ONO HOMO || Ompuem|mel meron ono OO O10 Onll=o oo pno ols 
sojdood | | ¥ 
3 Soy > DEOTOPONONON NO. oo] ° ah ee Sn o1= 
*SOSNOFT | 
vey OOOO OOO aa) Crp Su [ne CrerejoonOnonoOn nO oo | O “1S 
‘aydiorat | =| aq | 
S So fo Dooo00)0 ||—oe > a pe i oye 
asnon | 
> DEOHOHO ONO | nO oO [PO a i eT) aa | eT) 
*adood } 
R solo OOO oo] 0 HONS Op Op | Suen onOnonone Or OpOn [no SjOTON IO) oye 
*sasnogy 
i 
coos ooy5 one i La Seopon TE ne 
rojdood | 
EA i 
Gi) oo] ° DjOjOHO CONN! Ci) in a aan ry o 
*SOSnO HT 
. 
ooy° CICTOPONONON NO i i i Ln So oS 
-aidoad 
Sf Soo SEOEONONCNON| NO Seon [no i aan i SjoIOn|NS op eu 
‘sasnoHt | " | | | | 
T-3 ) DOPOHONONO | S| | opm em Ca a [ia i oT 
saidood | | 
) S---- ee ae 5) Se Onjece 
o oo50007] 5 ea a) ooo] o oye | 
= 
o DIOPOIONONON DONS OpOIOEONOEONON NO! a aa | 
*SoSDOH = 
DIO|O}O CO ONTO Como a SoSys ss 
“adovar | | | 7 
a Doo oO oO OONEO Spepoesccoesssoccys oOonES ol 
SOSnOH 
Sogo DOO OSS a) ey en Oo) sess oT 
rageoa || | | | | | 
a Some DIO |OIO SO ONO aa S pepe oco COS oS SOO on ony 
-sosnont | | 
Son DEOEOTO|O Ona ee) Sn Len i a) = Te 
‘aidoog. | 
& so) > OTC SON] O1On TO a CONES Ons 
‘sosnont | | 
aa) DEOTONOLONO [SO o> Se eo i SEOTONES STA 
‘oidoog 
a a) Tlojorororon| Oo Sonne ae ie ee ooo To o> 
*sasnoH | I 
oops CIO OFO|SIO >)S)cecercerce 
q a 1 |S 
ajdoad | als 
& se a =)RLesoesoeee 
“sOsnoeT \F 
oo Ne Seopo TOONS a i iio 
-aidorg | 
s 3-5 a) SL LLL 
*SOSHOET 
a i oo) ° i LLL 
“ado | a = = 
eo 
= SION Eo Coo Done oa a La 
ia | 
Soyo Sa ooo Shp) SS osrorS SSIoIOn | Sono > 
oidoag =) = | | i fa! 
S | = 
5 aaa) T=)o Ooo Sono in aS Ge 5) > 
*sasnoyy | H | 
So fpo Se oe i Se an =) 
-aidooar | a =| | 
© 
= a) T= OC Son = oo] 0° i LLL ao) ° } 
*sOsnOyy | | 
ono Se ai) i LSS Sn =) 
“adoog | all | 
5 j 
to 7° )° Dio SION [no ooo =) |=) | SaSsonS CuOTONOnONCN no ee ) S) 
Fara l 
Soo oso ODS yp ooo oo | Soe moomoo) ilo cone =) 
auton | 4 rt = = x | 
- aa CSOs oe so, ° Oe ae eosys o 
‘sasnout | | | | 
cops On aa) Do] ° HEN] IS) SOS oro TONOTONON nO =) 
‘aydooar | a =| ‘wis a 
2 
_ oo} > OM OOO] ont oO]; ° OG [2 Ooo ccrosororon inc P15 
*SOSNOH | | Sroxom ti | a) 
DO onl] woaen oo on ooyo i So oye 
‘adona | | ae i) Pe } “yaks jz 
2 
_ oo > coo jo eer) S 
‘sosnout | | 3 
— | a es ee 
ae) Sofo SPR [ISS SS SSS OO a So > OTS 
odoog | | 13 3 8 
4) —— 
a) oo] ° oo To Cas ce) val | era 
SNOT | s 
oo 2 ae) SS DOO Soon |S 
‘oj doo, &/al[aoce =) Sale 2/3 
el 5 
C) = 
‘iat Oa ONS ooo yA Copo || aya jc = =) z 
‘sosnoTy Gch || Njosoin ope oo lon) me Doo) |) > a 
Sear) ATs o | a oo ops) DOS oP. 5 S 
‘aidova | § 3 8 MS - ka § alba [5 
2 = 
2° =F = 7 rorersa) coe |==oe ae 
‘sosnott | | Crosciens soy eee ia =78 
iS eZ = = ee 
‘oldongr Freres ooo Soe 1R Pa = )8 
* 
2 = 
oo sow a SS) Sa 
*sONNOLT ot Secon ors ooyso Pisile a "8 
a os pt Bape m TS S = o 
of dooe =| T2138 Do} ° || Tos |S ee 7718 
Roe |} ————— es |< || eee Ba A 
om] a = eos STE Son) || = oo pe va 
‘SORNOLT os) a “ape Soays =F 18 
oo] ° SR oona ss = 
‘ooo nS=tan.s oo ,o Sai) B 
© — 
oS ODD on = Ss SSS — 
‘WONNOTT | os ve rr) 2 
— 8 
a a ar) =a 2000 );S° a soe TS = 
‘ooo } aw ze Cae QHoo_ ooo sR 3 
= 2 
P See || sre oars ae a R 
HONNOYT . = 1D RHeotoo- 1A — 
| iS 
CO ara | e-1C—  l| Ln : Gaye yt Sn 
oidoog Boon TR | TSS eee ee Tos | a S 
” ile =/8 = § 
om mo oom oO |S Op || — Sars = 
*woNnOTy a mS Wg poeateaas on |F g 
TAT Ta Te | sae ow oS ha | eae es! = 
*ordoog ae oT nie e 8 Qeeoces sags $ 
i nd ee ne = : 
D mr OO ae x - = ee 
ono Or le Shes a | WoT oR Say | N 
irony Oy Wc Sse | Wr 0-0 el | Pe TT ao 
aloo | 6 S Ne a ono Se) & 
Cy | hee NS 
C2 a | Wm ara elr, |b—ar3 l| U 5 
Hono | | | Oo | a aw 
= aS o) oo | 5 ik e 
CI LY 
= oo) oS sys x 
*/] 2 g 
4 r 
8 j 
4 a oe 
r ‘ aie 
fa Hy ; satus : 
4 ) nes : 
F qi 
ry 8 i 4 Bah : 
1 : a - Be : 
4 i 8a a] fi 3g 
6 i rr BR Ad 
the uf : t 
i 4 a 
* ob af: 4 my 
Tr) 40) | . Mii : 
TT KR sug b ® S8a2e44"ene ais 
Peer Py x . 225 . +] 2h 


° ° ° ° ° 
[doo ane 
oo» Ge so 
ng g SS ee oo oo 8-6 S. ~ 
ic} ROSNOYY | 
——<—_ ss = 
SaaS OD eS Ca So noe OU DPS Se 7 
sojdooe 
_——__—— ———————— 
3 a ee te a a Spe 8 8) 8 8 eS = 
“Sosnoyy | 
sos eS Se ne ete Se = 
‘oydood, 
eS ee 
2 ee a OT Ese ee aI Umm. Se Se 
, *SoSnOp] 
‘ se 
= ne in-ear ao | 
‘oidood | 
= —— —— 
S ae So OS nn De Da Sa DS ee TSS 
*sosnoH 
$s > —— eee eee 
i Cn OO (On SOG GO Sao rT O pO TO OT ONT ES me nn ce Cane = 
aaa 
EE a a 
3 5 ne LL OS So ee eee STS = 
“sosnoyy | 
= ——— 
= a 
SS OO OO OS Ss = 
“dood 
ie) 10" Oma Ot —$—$—_ 
Go) po en On i RDO m Cmte ros Geo a oo SS a) => 
“sOSnOpT 
| _-_.—_-_=—3-s-s-s_ 55 8 © © Ol Oita Ola C kar Onan omc, =o 
st ake ee eel ee ey o> ile 
‘ojdoog 
oH 
3 SETURL TOR OT OCR SOCIO MONG, cs Deen eo" to mo oon on OO OS ea 2 ) 
*sosnoH 
Gy ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° rT) ° ° ° -} o co o o ° ° ° ° ° ° [-} o ° ° 2 
*9{doo gq a Cr) 
2 ————— 
8 oO iO OOM MMC IMLS eC SOMO EON, OC hag Omen Ore nO TON On nT ODN S nan er © aia aC aE! = 
*sosnoyy | 
oo LS ran Cn) CaO NGO aa OLS ia O Nato eno mento een eet CORRECT g 
‘aidoag. | o | ze 
——— 
8 SS SaaS CSC OO MC OO nO ee rae OO) SO gem ee oS a a = 
*sasnoyy 
Seg ROO IO IO CRON COMO =O ORIOL Ome On CnC ieee ree ee ee OS ee a 
7 2 
‘9idoog 
GS TTT a a — T= = N= kD ana = 
= o o 
*sasnoy, 
SSS SOO OL LOLS CN ON Oty NC las Onl usO asl © nO uml Ogee oo o-oo oe On O18 =} 
Mi *ajdoog 
” 3 ee nS a ecm S 
“soSnOFT 
SSCS elo OMS TS NS Heal Oi ee CL OR OE ie © IO a a oy 
‘dood a 3 6 
& = SG LO nO LORETO © Ie © lai © NO fal © ENT CEO TEES > TL © © = 
*sosnoy, | 
° ° ° o o ° ° o ° ° ° ° ) ° o ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° c ° ° oO oS °° =) T-) 
rajdoag 
& SSO aD aS a ae OO CS MC NOM Ol Oe ONO OD al OO ners le © Rams o_O OO 1 O= = O-O == Om GinS) = 
“sosnory 
7) s ° ° ° ° o ° co ° —* ° o r-) ° o ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° =) o =] oO 
odoaq i 
6 ies 
a SSS OO OO SSS > 
“sosnoyy H 
ea SSS OL eS SP ee ao es TS Se Ss FS =] 
a[doag ot o 
So 
a ° co o ) o o o co o ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° - o ° ° co ° ° ° co o = 
"sasnoyy 
SOO SSS SS 6 ee oe OOD OT eS FS TG 
-oidovg 3 | a 
Nel ‘ oy 
Aol Senn l SSS SS SO ESD EO TO EO RO MOTTO [ORC nO N= PLO DLO LO Cs ONTO nat © el Se ie Seen ae aS =) 
“aploog | Sie de he ne. Ceneremomommetnn se te Da OO, © Or LO OLR EO” 10a CGN ONt CMO RLS ilo heC Ras CHRO) zB 
a San BS SS SO OS OS SS CLO OO nO nS COO aS Se OO in ORS et OORT Sa eet Oa) ' a 
eave ] Sen ne on En a See Se = 
ES 
Ot - DPSS OT SO OO OF OF TOTO OO OOS IO iO in © [il © nan Ogun OTE CEST CT © BSCS HO eel CaS a SO o 
‘sasnoH 
! 
“aitloogy eS OOO OL SO OO RON OPTION 5 OS SiRF O DELO nO SE ee la aaa =) S 
a 5 
g a 
*sosno yy | SSO SO ONL ee Om Oi Oma O) AS CoO RTO PaO ENO tar OL IO eC es In st at eae 5 
EVRA i i a ee a en ae Oe Oa ee a 
s i Fonte SS So STO SO Tao On TO NO =O) TORS Olan Om Ol =O Os ORCI On. Olen: Ot On OF SO SC SNS SSeS, or 
iS) = sss z 
=a Pees | S = SS oO OO OS Ore OOO) HORROR O EO NaNO > = en 
a S 
A 3 = 
= “sosnoy] SD a! aS a a 0 O_o. OL 0, 30 a0 0) 10 =O mn aa eee ) 
x AEDS St OTS OTS TS ETO OO ONS ROC SS a © RC a OE © SR y 
a = = 
& = ce) 
5 “sosnoHy ON TS ONO TS eT On STOO = OM ONS AO AO AO Reg Og ane as One nee eet ee ee ee ee er er) ) 
\ a 
| -ajdoogr BDF eS OOO OF HO OF MORRO IO ORO LO OO gaat lS Pa eC ee ee a ed oe Ss 
at st 
& { CeomOH BS TOF ROMO OOO On (Oa O SORT OO Oa Om Ota OO tO SO OS Ae = 
& ” 
lo} maidoaey SO SE TS NTO SS LOO TS a a0 Ol Ol Oe Oe OO Oe eS S 
a x | 
2 b “sosnoH I> OT TO PALO SO SOTO OO = AO SO OO sO meaTO IO ane One SO iO See Mae es Oe ee Le ete a = 
a -ajdoog So OO OT TO OOO OS ENR LO RO Oa OU a = 
ie) © m a 
*sosnoHt SLE De Se OST OMM OR OTe Sm OO aOR ) ro) 
s 
a ee rt 
-g]doog S = RO PIOUS Se Ce CRORES So OO Oma o_o 3 o- esa a ss =) S 
o = a 
= oOo SN Ot = 
*sosnoF, = a) [se - a a -  - T-  ~ a ae oe Ye — = Es ee _ en See =) | 3 
=x oO ot o ° lh ~ Fa 
‘a1doaq = 8 5 S SS SOO OO SO as Oe an Ona ea On o 
* : a 
= co Y or ° ° — 
*sosnoH | = ONO oO OGL OS OO SOL NO! On Om wp ge Oat lO See Gee ee a CS | & 
SBT Lo Le) SLRS TO ea TO LON Oo mao LO LO Nn eR Oe OAR = 
Lol fc} a ° CORE ° ° ° io o = °o ° ° ° ° ° ° ° oo.” ° ° ° ° 2 ° ° o ) a > 
a OS TO a1 OER Os CU CN CRO OOO IT © HN OL Risk Cos 
B= 3 Tae & g 
a a = 
FETC LO) LO OTS EO Te etre op Oye On et a a = 
~~ 2 [) ° o ° = o = ° ° ° ° ° ° ° o.[6m68} ° ° ° ° ° J ° ° ° ol 
a 5 a 8 =) i} 2 o 3 $ 
SS 
2 Sj oo cy ° ° S or oon ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Ce) °° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° coy 
} ——— 
Ae 2 S = eae eS ee - - ) oo = a = = a= eo ae 
- D ¢ z @ E = Si 9 2 = = 
tf | at) 8 Ba EI 5 5 
co % an 2 OT °o ° ) col Cc ° o ° ° o ° oc o ) 2 = ° > ° 2 ° ° o ) = 
r 3 2 3 3 
D SOO OO OO OE ON OOS nO Ole oR TOE OFS) 
= 8 3 Ee a = 2 
eg ctel orn eT eo onto SSeS tae O al} ROsaT OTRAS ay EO CRNA On iO Rl iS ae Cl Cl By 
a > FS OD ERO Of] Om ORS ONO ARE Se GeO ae OmEO ROR SC mrc = 
= get ane ear Sis 
a 2 
= el a ee SES Ee [LS NS eS Ra Ml ON te oy 2 
* S Sa La aE ano nae ff al Oa ORO ORES 
m SO Om RAE One si 3 7 = ope = 
xz E 8 = & 3 5 BY S s 
"HONNOLT "TT Sam a To a aoe G2 8 oe ee ee 3 
‘aydoo, 2 205 aD eT SRO | Oh OEY Co) PT C—O = DT -  - OS Da 
‘d en a Ome ame mnt a ms E} ays 
4 @ = = 
ONO LY = 1), ta LSS a SSA a ee BS Oe A 5 
———__ = 
‘odoog a g oo Ss = 7] a= en er — el er one ee Sl Ol a Oma 
G = > eS o 3 y 253 = = 28 > 
B= Qa e@ ° 08 § oS Sae a e 
‘wo mal Geir) sa a8 era 8 
Seta ostcltaon omen oa amen omeS Qs ee ae es me) eS 
he Oe Ce ee a aon 3 | Ss 
a t=, ————— T= RON VeasTS T PRT? = ao 
& Gat oa ee Geese a) 72 = == sea “eB 
——— == 5 cs et = 
2 A 2 ; i) ae) ° Dm NX gy = 8 
OWE) 2h aac ae ee 7 {2 eo 
a — a pa GS Ki S 
< eee eet Sweat: em oe a eS 
8 2,9 ft su r Saag ae OO) |KO oo Oo a Oo a © & R 
+ 3 : 8 = 8 
Cia) : 
| oo oo NS mm | oe 
a 
m | g 
B TT a - ee ae ew) 
LS 
cA : 
Md WTC ae Bane) aos ie 
S 
Dy 
A st ——— 
ny ° om N om oe + a 
71 5 
t — = = 
B 1 Peet <1 - Ter — a = 
| ys Heer 4 : TEER a 
rest ee we ; : tea ey 
sees 3)” aes 3 Seite Sa tian s 
é ibe tetas | : 4 weep 5 
4 Bream ‘elites 18 a 
os A eds ee io : ewe th : 
4 o ‘ Oh Tart Hm He MY 
P| a oer as : i Less : 8 
4 i Te : Hee ry eee eit 
Py J - % taut t 8 ve as \ § 
4 (5 Pettis 5 8 eee hE 
| 4 a A yo bo At bos Cae 
| 1) oy ; wy, 
‘ i t} a i 4S 
7 t i. i Y , § 3 ¥ 
y | y i . § 
now Bw A a & ao 
7 " ¢£ t ’ ” ” 
s in epwoeh RO et 8 RH f¥ehaes & & 


CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


°° 
sa1dooer 
SS 


*soRnoyT 


40 


‘opdood a 
[IR | 2 le 
so dood prea, 2 

3 *soSnOH ‘ 


*sosnolT 


a 


GouCun § 


*SOSnOTT 


“odoog 


*SOSNOFT 
‘oydoog 
*sosnoyT 
sodoog 


*SaSnopy 


-9idood 


° 
*sasnopy 
sodoad | 

5 
*sosno fy 

as) 

‘ojdoag | 

= Sao 
“soso HT | 


-aidoad. | $ 


*sasnoy] | 

= ae 
-ajdood | 

& = 
*soSnOH, | 


Brest 


Casta axp Pxortssrex. 


z 
= 


ex Dram bea! 


och 


akar 


al 


seile 


Sava 
S 
sajdoag | 
a =) 
*sasnoyy 
=o 
saydoag. | a 
a 
Gl =o 
‘sosnoyy | ™ 
Sle 
ratdoag |= = 
a = 
*sosnoyy 
cl 
‘ajdoag | = 
S 
a a) 
‘sasnoyy |) ™ 
*sosnoyy 
oo 
cadoog | @ 
2 = 
rs C0 ms OR CRI O = Oh Cn OO =a CRMC ©. [0 5 Om ORE (On OO nm OTC Innis nO ll o/s SOM 
*soSnOF, 
D 
ROTO OOS OL TOs oO CO SCMECEmEI O_o. 10g OO 10 oS Orr SOMO (oh Ao mem CTS a. 2 
‘adoag | 2 
6 — ae 
=I z cf Oa ta nL O > CO nici =~ = =) EaeS 
‘sasnoyy 
= S 
a Say OL ann > Oa Omron Ena c gos 2 Sree S 
‘adovg | 3 a 
= = = = 5 ee a 
SRR OSS Cpe OSS SO TOT OPO =O mC OO. Onno nla > Lom Omid pO eto oa nel S = 
‘sasnoy | = 
S 2 SiO Ot 1D. (On Oreo =D) =O mp, ea -1 a eC Cn a cle en a 5 
‘ajdoag | 2 2 = 
o 
os 3 o CAO) OO mr ONO MeO SOLO TO OD eaten On cor eO Ol ao oa aer oer CMOS soem os On 1c. 8 
"sasnoyy | 
Sp SS a ae aS om = LAS = a S| 
x ee 
i Cee OREO OREO met Ors Oren OMe ONES. oT SCL SOE ORO OG he OMS ero aro Cle Cy ae nmr oe | 5 
CO. OPE Or So Ors Or One cam OT C= ORION LO TOTO SOmO” SU ROR Ono Cla Oa OesTO =O 0 Mee & 
Gi 
a) . — 
I A> tao ne Ose Oma Or- 0.7 Or TO Ol © =1 0, NOmm OOM Opiye Oreos SIO MOE Om og oT Yo gonto™ a 
‘sounoyy | =) Car) s > B 
a 5 : - = ] 
-aidoag | 2 Po Ee Len OO OPIS = MBER oo Toto eC e Or me Se Tone OOS 3 
o a 
I = os onene oe = = = Ses = 
Tun OL 5) co 0 SMO Srl oy As OO CEO IO a On to ao Or saltoT oO Ne To OFS 7 
~ ras Te 
-ajdong | 2 2 CRORE OAC OS OFs OlmOr 0} go> Op NOmEOmlGn 0. TO neo Gq oro fe; or we gee eS =) iN 
rf meeOmao = — ooo = x 
“aOSOHT | 3 DT Se) Ge Sy Dn GS ta ee ee = 
>. Sn Le Le = aac nS = 
5 = 2 On) S ; r=) haa ee) = 
% aydoag | 5 n} nD) SaaS = 
=! oar === > SS = r= 
‘sosnoyy | 3 ee yo cmon ey rea ele ee a 5 
= Goin © ae KT - T) 
“adoagy | Ss er TESS SO eee 2) CL a a ae = n° S 
5 2 
| a eae ee ee aE Lae 
Oe TO RE OO OCR O ) a Soo = oo amo 
“Hono LY | gj Cera Sooo oO Pe. = = 
Cie) Someone 10m On 10 amon Om O. Omotmes 5 mie Ln Se ee ry 
- z 5 aoe oa a g s)s 
_ 2 CREO IO reo) OO tare nos CaO Rp ire ee oO On Io SOmmO Ors Of TO aay s 
= : = 
Bo SOOO ET he 
dora | & a = = moma = oo 6 oO ROE Gao S 
& = oa 
? Cee Oe Co OS aC a O ONC Oma = oo =e 
‘wounoyy | 12 SOO on solo 5 ii ar) z 
Ta a Ome nO OM ORO mn OM Os Ono. > re 
i oY 8 8 EI a é 
= E mo = fo mo oo moo oS a 
‘wounoyy Al Sermom~ oa ee TI orm ery 8 
i 
= 9 1 = Tae Fa ¢ a — = TR T= rey Vee a Da CT a=] = 
adooa| Pe ae a s 3 s Soo 3 S l 3 
"g Cm 28 o » © 9 © OF 0 @om @ 6 o = SO — oo 
nowy | © a a ° 7 Ce a — a a) © 
a - a 8 
a a a a a aa a eae ar) == =e 
dood 8 i ht a Sys a TY a = 
” = A 
a a a iS 
y Oo = a oO = ~—=. J — 
womnoyt | B 4 oa a 
= ir 
Desh Cg. = 19s oO hore 
‘adoog, 5 a oy | $ 
a a sm — Sie SO SO = oS 
vomnoyy | Hy rr) } R 
2 a 
‘Al | Sack | 
‘iiou| abel 
(om fi 5 Baste 1K 
‘wovno4y ile. ee er a a sss f 
“toon | 2S =e 
“anno a S68 ae 
co) 


erbend Binder, .. .--20---000 


Tt 


CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 557 
No. 9. 
RIce. 

© Sarr.] Or. | GHEE. |JaGry TURME- 
2 Fine. | Coarse tS 
nn [arora a Pcs a te | pai AS la 
9 | A. D. S : [e , a5 2 e 
< s| lols] [Els] (Sls! [Sls] [Sls] [Sle] [és 
ap Sy Qe Sy ea en Ges H PRS SI og ha VS a 
a e/O/SlalS[Slsleilial/s/Lie/SiSlaleislael/esie 
fs ZlalDl=|n 15 |= ln lo [Ela lo [= |2 [Olea |S je la ls 

a es es Se | ee — |— | — | — 1 — I — J — | — | I FS I I FS I CI I YI I I I I I 
1227} 1820-21] 0/31] 4] 0133} CG] 6} S}12] OG] 5] OF O} 2] 8] OG] 9] GF O} S| oO 
1228] 1821-22] 0/35] 0} 0/39] ©] O} S| 8} oO! 5} 8] O] 2) 8} O} 9] 8} OF 8) O 
1229] 1822-23] 0/37) 8] 1] 3} Oo} O| 6} 8} Of 4] 8} O} 2/ 2} O11) 0} O| 8] 8 
1236] 1823-24] 0/23} 0} 0/28] 0} Oo] 8} 0} OG} 5} 8} GO] 1] 8] O/11) 4} O}10} 8 
1231] 1824-25] 0/22) 4; 0/27/12] 0} 8} 4] O} 6} 4} O} 2) Oo] O} 9}12) 0/12) 2 
1232} 1825-26} 0/31} 4| 0/36} 4} O} 8} 2} O} 5| 1} O} 1/12) 6} 8]12) O/1d) 4 
1233] 1826-27] 0/33/12] 1] 1] 4] 0} 7} O} O} 3] 8} OF 2} OF O;10) 8} O}L6! 6 
1234! 1827-28! 0/33] 0} 0/36] S 71 4) O} 4{15} O} 2} 8l O;L1] 8! 0/20) 4 
1235 1925-29 0/355]10) 0}38]14 8] 4] O} 6} 5) OF 2] 8] O}13} 5] O}18 
1236] 1829-30; 0/50} 8] 0/36] 6] O] 8] 6] 6) S112] OF 2) O} O;1O! 4} GO] 8 

Toil of 10 years,...... |....| ..se-6 | 7/33) 2] 9} 0; G| 1/39] O| 1)12] 5} 0/21) 6} 2/24/18] 3) 6) O 

DitiealemlatediatSoOSas Pi. ke eee | ee ee fe 

8 s. weight per Seer, 
oF Me rie rent | ... | 0/31] 5] ol36] of of 7]14] of 5} 4] 0] 2} 2} of10} 8} of12] 9 
ineryeretsts oe 
pene 6 | 


No. 10. 


Compeative Statement of the Prices of Muslins manufactured at Dacca, and the 


produce of the British Looms. 


ASSORTMENTS. M aa yee ne ; British 
i Looms. 
Jamdani, vith small spot, ........ dig ol emir at Fs SOntie/vers 25 8 
2d ditto, .... 16 5 
Jamdant, Miposh, ....ecee.-eesee Sores Ha esha eaten « cate 27 to 28 6 
Ditto; Piagial pattern, .....--sescacee,-n0s Sd COB DECC ore Hat 12 to 13 4to 4} 
Jaconet Mun, 40!, corresponding with Jungle Ist sort, .. 38 to 40 20 to 22 
Cassee Ne kee des RAG ann te 3 AL ee \ 2d ditto, .... 24 to 25 9 to 10 
NRO eet tone av stele nndare BPs cafevowdarcacbice 8 to 9 5 to 6 
Cambric, COMponding with Camiz Cossas,...,.......-.sceeeees : 13 to 14 6 to 9} 
Jamdani blue red sprigs, ........400- ate toate nongnanconecs etelain a 15 to 16 4 to 5 
Jamdani Saris,....,,, hs ae Be alas Bite Aa ee te 12 to 13 oto Sh 
Book Muslin, Gesponding with Mulmulls, ....... apis althalestajeivels 10 to 11 8 


Sahun, 48 by 3,,.... 


28 to 30 


598 CENSUS OF THE CITY OF DACCA. 


No.o11. 


Comparative Statement of the Prices of Dacca Cloths, manufactured with Cotton Yarn 
spun in the Country, and from British Cotton Yarn. 


Dacca MUSLINS. 


ASSORTMENTS. Manufactured | Manufacturd 
with Country | with Europ 
Cotton Thread.| Cotton Yan. 


Mulmuls, 40 by 2, ..... 0.4. yd eitrcen beck Istisort;). 3. 8 to 9 31) toi 4: 
2d ditto, .. 10 to 12 5 to 6 
3d ditto, .. 14 to 15 9 to 1¢ 

Sablams, 40 by: 25. 10). joi dwelsie ats tis do casing Let) dittosy... 4nto 44 23 
2d ditto; = . 5} to 6 3 
3d ditto, .. | 11. to 12 6 

4th ditto, .. 14 to 15 8 
| 5th ditto, .. 17. to 18 10 tol 
| Sarbands,.40 cubits,:, jcc die eee eee ves wc» 1sti ditto, .. 3 1g 
2d ditto, .. 34 to 33 13 

AMlabalig: Adi ,\ J ci)s lei. asshd o's ays Wile wd dsitweh ESthantto, .° 5 to 54 3 
2d ditto, .. 7 to 7 4 | 
3d ditto, .. 8 to 9 5 to dk 
4th ditto, .. 9 to 10 6 to 63 

Parindans: 40 ‘cubltsidiccy oiy3 FS ok ocdyei dies eyes . Ast ditto, .. 43 to 5 3 
2d ditto, .. 63 to 7 4° 
3d ditto, .. | 11 to 12 7 to8 
Ath ditto, .. 13 to 14 10 tol 

Sari; per Pair yin 2.4 dees 6 ie’ ieieislete merce LSt: dittosisi. 5 3 
2d ditto, .. 5 to 54 34 tc 4 
3d ditto, .. | 9 to 10 5k t 6 

Dhotis, per-pair, - 556... Sis “o,elege oe aicseinsiey a JESG ONL, of 5 3 
2d ditto, .. 6 to 63 J 
3d ditto, .. 7 to 73 a 
Ath ditto, .. 8 to 83 ) 
5th ditto, .. 10.103 to 11 8 1 Bi 
6th ditto, .. | 9 to 10 7 to 7h 

Sheraganj Cossas, 40 cubits, ............ Ist ditto, .. 4 27 
2d ditto, .. 5 3} 
3d ditto, .. 53 to 6 (4 
Ath ditto, .. to. a3 a) 

Sth ditto, 851" 8,}-fo. 482 6 

Sheraganj Hamam, 40 by 3, ....-....2..- Ist ditto, .. 5 34 
2d ditto, .. 6 to 63 4 
3d ditto, .. 74 to 8 5 
4th ditto, .. 9 to 93 Bip. tong 
5th ditto, .. 11 to 12 8 to 9 
6th ditto, .. 14 «to 15 10 to 11 

Jamdan Dhotis, 10 cubits, ........-.++s0 Ist ditto, .. 54 to 6 | & 
2d ditto, .. 6. to 7 | 4 
3d ditto, .. 74 to 8 2) 


TX. 


DESCRIPTION 
OF 
See T CO1N Ss; 


FROM ORIGINALS OR DRAWINGS IN THE POSSESSION OF THE 
ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


By H. H. WILSON, Kse. 
Secretary A. S. 


‘Tur subject of Indian Numismatics has hitherto received but little 
attention from the Members of our Society. The cause of this neglect it 
is not difficult to explain. 
Q 

Collections of Coins, formed in this country, have always been the 
work of private individuals. Whilst in existence, therefore, they have 
been accessible only to the friends of the proprietors, and after the death 
of the latter, they have been either dispersed and lost, or sent to England, 
and equally lost to India. Few opportunities have consequently occurred 
of examining with any degree of attention such Coins as have been met 
with, or of knowing indeed in what number, or of what description, 


ancient Medals have been found. 


Another reason why the subject has been neglected is the want of 


assistance from descriptions or plates: little, it is believed, having been 


published in Europe upon the ancient Coins of India, and at any rate 


560 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


such publications not being procurable in this Country. The chief means 
of instruction and comparison have therefore been defective, and the guid- 
ance of those scholars to whom the study of Coins and Medals is familiar, 
has been equally unavailable. Any attempt to elucidate the ancient cur- 
rencies of India, must consequently be conducted under peculiar disadvan- 
tages, and the consciousness of this has no doubt deterred collectors and 
antiquarians from attempting to give any description of their cabinets to 


the public. 


The Coins found in india, either purchased in the Bazars or dug up at 
different places, have been of various descriptions. The Coins of the 
Arsakian and Sassanian Princes are occasionally met with, and Roman 
Coins are not atall uncommon. The Coins of the Mohammedan Kings ef the 
several principalities, founded by the Musselmans, constitute a third and 
extensive division, whilst the fourth, the rarest and least familiar, are 
either of comparatively recent date and known Hindu origin, or are 
apparently of more remote antiquity, and may be conjectured to be the 
Coins either of early Hindu Princes, or of foreign Sovereigns ruling over 
territories in Hindustan. The two first classes need no particular illus- 
tration at present, and the third has occasionally found a place in publi- 
cations on Oriental Coins. The last has recently attracted some notice in 
Europe, from the interesting specimens given by Lieutenant-Colonel Top, 
in the Ist Volume of the Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society, with 
his remarks, and the further observations of AuGustus ScHLEGEL in the 
Indische Bibliothek, which have added another Sovereign to the list of 
Kings of Bactria, and thrown some new light upon the history of the 


people, by whom the Bactrian kingdom was overthrown. 


The perusal of these papers suggested to me an examination of the 
Cabinet of the Society, in order to ascertain, if any of the pieces it con- 


tains, were likely to confirm or extend the discoveries made in Europe. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 561 


The result has been so far satisfactory, that it has produced duplicates of 
some of Colonel Top’s Coins, and added others of evidently analogous 
fabrication, although it must be confessed that it does not furnish any 
positive information as to their origin or date: it would scarcely be 
worth while therefore to publish the particulars, except as a contribution 
to a branch of enquiry hitherto almost unattempted, and as promoting the 
fuller investigation of the subject. 


The chief collections of Coins made in this country, of which we 
have most of us heard, and which some of us may have inspected, are the 
following: I. The collection of the late Colonel WiLLovucuey, of Patna: 
this was a very miscellaneous assemblage, of which the most valuable 
part was a tolerably numerous series of Mohammedan Coins. It has, I 
believe, been.sent home. II. The collection of a Mr. Seymour, of which 
I had no personal knowledge, but which from drawings in our possession, 
seems to have contained some curious Coins. This collection has, I be- 
lieve, been dispersed. III. A large collection of Copper Coins, chiefly 
Mohammedan, but many Roman, made by Dr. R. Tyruer, and presented 
by him to the Honorable the Court of Directors ; and lastly, IV, the collection 
of the late Colonel Mackenzie, which contained a few curious Hindu 
pieces, anda vast number of the Copper Coins of the South of India, many 
modern, but some ancient, including Roman Coins dug up chiefly at 
Dipaldinna and Amaravati, near the Godaveri. The bulk of this collec- 
tion is now also in the Museum of the India House, but the duplicates 
of such as existed in any number, were presented by the liberality of the 
Government of Bengal to the Cabinet of our Society. 


Besides the specimens derived from this source, the Society is in 
possession of others presented at different times by various benefactors, 
and of duplicate drawings of Coins from the collections above men- 
tioned, or of specimens in the hands of private individuals. Some of the 

A 5 


562 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


latter have been selected for the accompanying remarks; whilst for the 
drawings of the rest, as well as of a few Coins in his own possession and 
in mine, the Society is indebted to our associate Mr. James Prinsep. The 


results of these joint researches I shall now proceed to particularise. 


Puate I. Fieure 1. 
A Go.p Coin. 

Osverse.—The upper half of a male figure in a close 
or mailed vest with sleeves. On the head is a cap or 
helmet with flaps covering the ears, and fillets projecting 
behind. The right hand holds a mace or sceptre; the face 
has mustachios but no beard—round the margin are the fol- 
lowing characters. q4y PQ OAQHvopUKOXLKUI4»,e 
These bear a strong resemblance in several instances to Greek ; 
but donot, as far as lam able to ascertain, form any legible 
inscription: some of them resemble the characters on the 


staff of Feroz Suan, at Delhi, and on other columns. 


ReEversE.—A seated figure, the upper part of the body 
naked, the lower clothed in the common Hindu Dhoti. The 
head wears a helmet; one hand rests against the side, the 
other is extended and holds what appears to be a ring or 
discus: from. the shoulders rise what may be intended 
either for two other arms or for a halo: the feet rest ona 
footstool and the legs of the seat or throne are those of an 


animal. On the left of the figure is an emblem or Mono- 
gram, a sort of key, the handle apparently incomplete, za 


and four wards. There are also characters like those on the 


obverse, but less distinct. wantaoGa 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 563 


Although there is no exact duplicate of this Coin, yet it is identifiable 
with several of those which remain to be described in various parti- 
culars. Thus similar characters are observable in Nos. 2 and 3, 4, 
of the first Plate, and in Nos. 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, and 34, of the second 


Plate, whilst the emblem on the reverse or a mark of this form Fs 


occasionally a little varied, the handle being a lozenge instead of a circle, 
or three points being substituted for four may be observed on a still 
greater number or Nos. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, of Plate I. and in Nos. 24, 
25, 26, 31, 33, and 35, of Plate IT, besides indistinctly in some others. Many 
Coins again on which it does not appear, are identified by other charac- 
teristics, leaving little doubt of their belonging to a common series, 
although probably struck at various periods and under different Princes. 
The whole of this series appears to me to comprehend the following : Plate 
I. No. .1 to No. 16. Plate Il. No. 23 to No. 40. Some others may 
belong to the same, but are of very rude execution, as in Plate I. No. 22, 
in Plate II. 41 to 47. 


The original of this Coin was lately discovered by General VENTURA, 
in an ancient building at Mdnikydla: an impression in wax was sent by him 
to the Society, from which several plaster castes were carefully taken, and 
thence drawings made by Mr. Prinsep. It would have been more satis- 
factory, it is true, to have consulted the original, but there is no doubt of 


the characteristics of the Coin being faithfully represented. 


An account of General Venrura’s investigations is given as an Appen- 
dix to this paper. They do not, as far as we are acquainted with them, 
determine the age or origin of the Tope Ménikydla, although they leave 
it likely that it is a structure of the 3d or 4th century of the Christian 
era, if not earlier. As the Coins dug up there, are of evidently different 


periods, it can only be asserted of them, generally, that they. preceded the 


364 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


erection of the building; but by how long an interval it is not safe to 
conjecture, nor is any light thrown upon their origin, although it is not 
likely that they were of remote fabrication either with regard to place or 
time, and the present Coin may be referred with some probability to the 
Indo-Scythic princes of Western India, about the commencement of the 


Christian era. 


The Coin in question is not Greek in any of its details, except the 
doubtful similarity of some of the letters. It differs also very materially 
from the Parthian or Arsacidan Medals in the general character of the ob- 
verse, although in some of VarLuant’s Coins, particularly one in the Ap- 
pendix, ‘Nummus Regis Persarum incogniti,’ the head dress is much the 
same. The reverse, however, is totally different from any thing observ- 
able in the Parthian Coins, and on both faces the impressions are utterly 
distinct from those borne by Medals of the Sassanian princes of Persia. 
It cannot, therefore, be referred to either of those series; and, from the 
decidedly Hindu character of the reverse, is no doubt the Coin either of an 
Indian prince or of a prince ruling over a Hindu people probably in the 
Panjab, or on the north-western frontier, (see observation on No. 23,) 


about the commencement of the Christian era. 


Puate I. Ficure 2. 
A Goup Coin. 


Oxsverse.—A male figure standing: he has a cap on his 
head, with fillets floating over his shoulders: he appears an 
old man with a beard and mustachios, and is drest in a sort of 
tunic and pantaloons, witha mantle at his back: his right arm 
is extended, and his hand appears to grasp a small altar, his 
left supports a sceptre or spear: the following inscription is on 


the Inercin— @ PAUNYPNODPFOKA sunpRiIKOprne. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 365 


Reverse.—A female figure with long hair, a halo round 
her head, dressed in a stole, and holding in her right hand, 
the only one visible, what may be intended for a lotus : the 


characters #4S.N are legible, and the symbol appears a 
sort of key, or ring and staff, surmounted by four points, ~*~ 


it wants the cross bar. 


This Coin is allied to the preceding by the identity of the characters, 
and by the symbol, which, however, wants the cross bar that occurs in 
the preceding. The head dress and physiognomy of the figure on the 
obverse, are also different, and it would seem to be therefore the Coin of a 
different prince, although of the same dynasty. The principal figure recurs 


in several after Coins. 


This Coin is one of two turned up in a field by a husbandman plough- 
ing near Comilla, in Tipera; the original was in the possession of Dr. 


Carry: the engraving is from a drawing in the Society’s possession. 


Puate Il. Fieures 3 and 4.* 


GoLp Coins In THE CABINET OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


Osverse.—A figure, in its general character, similar to 

the former—a man erect, with a tunic of mail or a cuirass 

| with skirts : he has a tiara or crown on his head, with fillets 
and a halo: theright arm is extended, and grasps what looks 
like a bucket with a handle, or may be a cuirass : above the 
arm is a trident: the left arm holds a three-pointed spear, 


or a spear with a guard: he has a sword at his side. The 


* They were inadvertently and unnecessarily engraved in duplicate, being precisely alike. 


~- 


B Vv 


566 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


epigraphe is in characters like those of the preceding in most 


respects, or QIMSACHR TE Ges GOTOMOY. 


Reverse.—A figure, apparently female, in front ofa bull : 
the right arm is extended, and has an oval band apparently 


attached to the wrist: the left arm supports a trident: above 


the right occurs a similar symbol as before, Py but with a 


lozenge handle and cross bar : there are these characters on 


the left margin, OGwjo. 


These Coins are connected by the costume of the figure on the obverse, 
the characters and the symbol with the two preceding: the reverse is 
decidedly Hindu: the two characters in the middle may be forms of 4 and 
q, or they may represent the figures qi fifteen. The pieces in the Society’s 
possession, were part of a number in the Mackenzie Cabinet, and by their 
freshness, as well as by their identity, appear to have been recently fabri- 
cated from the same die. What their history is, has not been ascertained, 
but they were probably multiplied at Colonel Mackenztr’s expence, from 


some common original which he considered of great curiosity. 
Puate I. Ficure 5, 


Oxsverse.—A male figure, with a crown or a wreath on 
his head, also surrounded by a halo: he wears a short tunic 
with skirts and trowsers: his left hand inverted holds the 
bottom of what appears to be a trophy or standard : his right 
holds a spear, or another trophy or banner: there are charac- 
ters on the right, which offer some analogy to those found in 
ancient Ndgari inscriptions, and the upper row might be 

_ conjectured to form the syllable Sr. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 507 


Reverse.—Female figure seated on a throne or bed, 
with a foot-stool: there are characters {#JT9* on her right, 
which correspond with some recognised as ancient Nagari,— 
thus the two first occur as Cand aT. The whole is, however, 
too broken to allow of a complete word being formed. The 
upper marks on the left hand appear to be the lower part of 


the lozenge symbol. 


The relation of this Coin to the preceding is not altogether decided, 
but it is evidently allied to Nos. 7 and 13, in which we have the symbol 


characteristic of the series, and is unquestionably Hindu. 


The engraving is froma drawing in the possession of the Society, from 


an original said to be in the possession of Colonel GRACE. 


Puate I. Ficure 6. 


A Goup Coin. 
Osverse.—A male figure with high cap, halo, fillets on 


the head, and the person arrayed in a tunic and trowsers : 
with his right hand he appears to be offering incense on a 
fire-altar, and above the arm is a trisul or trident: the left 


arm appears to hold a spear, whilst a sword hangs from his 


waist. 


Reverse.—A female figure seated ona throne with a 
back, or the supporters of a canopy: her body is naked 
above, but clothed below the waist: her feet rest on a cushion: 
the right arm is extended: the left appears to hold a sort of 
cornucopeia, but the execution is indistinct: on the left are 


characters which resemble some of those on other Coins : on 


3o68 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


the right is the symbol, which, though worn, appears clearly 
enough. 


The attitude and costume of the figure, the characters, and the sym- 
bol, ally this Coin to Figures 2, 3 and 4, whilst the sitting figure on the 


reverse resembles that of Figure 5. 


The drawing is taken from the original, which is in my possession, 
being purchased from a Native, according to whose account it was found 
about a year and a half ago, in the bed of a tank in the village Daspur, 


Purgunnah Pandua, of the Hugh district. 


Puate I. Figure 7. 
A Goup Corn. 

Osverse.—Male figure in a similar costume as the last, 
only the body appears to be dressed in a coat or waistcoat 
with skirts: the attitude is the same, and the hands are 
similarly occupied: above the right arm appears something 
like a standard or trophy, a staff surmounted by a bird, an 
eagle or Garuda: characters round the margin like these 


mi xT: are imperfectly distinguishable. 


Reverse.—A female in a stole, seated as before: the 
symbol is distinct: on the left are these characters— -LITFX : 
the three first may be the letters 4, 1, @, but they will 
not assist us to a probable meaning or name. ‘The costume 
and attitude of both figures, and the symbol on the reverse, 
shew these Coins to belong to the same family as the 
preceding, and to be of Hindu origin. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 569 


The plate is taken from the drawing of a Coin said to be in the posses- 
sion of Mr. Epwarps, and the differences between this Coin and No. 6, 


may possibly be, in some degree, variations in the delineation. 


Puate I. Ficures 8, 9, and 10. 
Gop Coins. 
Osverse.—A male figure in cap, tunic and pantaloons, 
as before: on his right appears something like a club; there 
are no characters, but various marks, the purport of which is 


not evident. 


Reverse.—A very rude representation of what appears 


to be intended for a female figure. 


Of these Coins, two are in my possession, and were procured at 
Kano); the third belongs to the Society. The costume of the male 
figure allies them to the preceding, and the figure on the reverse may be 
designed for the seated figures of 5, 6, 7, but the pieces are of very rude 
execution. 


Puate I. Ficure 11. 
A Goup Coin. 


Osverse.— Figure as in the last. 


Reverse.—A female figure seated, her feet resting upon 


a lotus: a few characters in the margin undecypherable. 


The figures on this Coin ally it with the preceding, but it is of rude 
execution, and much worn. The plate is from the drawing of a Coin 
stated to belong to Colonel Grace. 

C5 


570 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Prate lL. Figure 12. 


A Goup Corn. 


Osverse.—A male and female figure on either side of 
what appears to be a column, surmounted by a bird: both 
figures are Hindu: the man holds a bow, the woman a flower: 
there are two or three characters on the upper margin, but 
imperfect. 


Reverse.—A female figure sitting on a lotus, which 
rests upon what looks like a tortoise: her right hand is 
extended, and holds what is perhaps meant for the lotus with 
its long fibrous stalk : above the arm occurs a monogram of 


a similar description with that in preceding pieces: instead 
of acircle, however, there is a lozenge ro , and the points 


are only three: characters are legible, of which some are 


clearly Nagari, but the combination is illegible: they are 


Ki¥e Rye 


This Coin is decidedly Hindu, and the figures on the obverse are, in 


all likelihood, intended for Rima and SirA: the bird on the pillar or the 


staff will, in that case, be Garura: the figure on the reverse appears to be 


that of Laxsumi seated on a lotus resting upon a tortoise. The mono- 


gram connects it with the first number of the series, from which it may 


differ in being the currency of Native Hindu princes. The staff and bird 


on the obverse, ally it to Figures 5 and 6. 


The drawing is made from the original Coin, which was obtained by 


W. Bacon, Esq. at Kanoj, and presented to the Benares Literary Society : 


the execution is very neat. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 571 


Puate I. Ficure 13. 
A Goip Corn. 

Osverse.—A male figure with a halo round his head, 
necklace and jewel on his breast, an open tunic on his body 
apparently, but naked below the waist: his left hand holds a 
bow: his left appears to be pulling up a trophy or pillar, sur- 
mounted by a bird: there are characters on the right, clearly 


Nagarti: the first is broken, but the rest form AAS HS 


Reverse.—A female figure as in the preceding: both 
arms are extended, and the implement in the right hand looks 
like a whip. The monogram is the same: the characters 


differ, and scarcely look like letters. 


This Coin is evidently connected with the preceding by the reverse, 
whilst the obverse is essentially the same as in Figures 5 and 6. It also 
resembles the two first of Captain Top’s fourth series : the marks or cha- 
racters on the reverse are precisely the same as in the second of them, and 
which Colonel Top considers to be the same with those on the column at 
Delhi; but on comparing them with the plates in the seventh volume of 
the Researches, the similarity does not occurtome. It appears that these 
Coins are not uncommon. Colonel Top has them from Agra, Mathura, 
Ujayin, and Ajmer. ‘‘ Dr. Wiuxtns,” he adds, “has some found even in 
Bengal; he thinks he can make out the word Chandra upon them.” The 
final of the word on the reverse, in our specimen, is not impossibly Ta, 
and we should thus have a Coin of Chandragupta; but the preceding letters 
cannot satisfactorily be identified with q=gz: the word may be 4U7qa: - 


There is a difference in the position and character of the emblem in 


this and in the last Coin, although essentially it is the same. It is more 


a72 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


like a banner in this than in the former, and looks as if it were upheld by 
the right hand. Colonel Top calls it a trophy, the ancient Grecian or 
Roman standard, the eagle with expanded wings on a staff. It has the 
characters of a Roman standard, but the type is not like an eagle : it is 
more like a goose—it is very probably, however, Garura, whilst the figure 


is that of Visunu or Rima, the latter being characterised by the bow. 


The plate is from the drawing of a Coin in the Cabinet of the late 
Colonel WiLLoueusy. 


Puate I. Fieure 14. 
A Goup Corn. 
Oxverse.—Male figure as in the last, but in a more 
energetic attitude: the right hand extends rather beyond the 
trophy: the characters on the right are not within the face 


of the Coin: others, of a less certain description, occur on 
the left. 


Reverse. —Female figure as in the last; monogram: the 
same characters distinct, but unknown, though possibly 


ancient Nagari. 


This is the same Coin essentially as the last, but of ruder execution, 
or it has been less carefully delineated. The plate is from a drawing of a 


Coin in the possession of Mr. Bre. 


Puate I. Fieure 15. 
A Goip Coin. : 
Osverse.—A figure with a bow in his left hand, and 
various undecypherable marks. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS, 573 


Reverse.—Apparently a figure is intended, but it is very 
indistinct ; it seems to represent HanumAn. The figure on 
the obverse allies it to the three preceding, and the reverse 
would be an appropriate accompaniment to the person of 
Rima. 

The plate is from a drawing of a Coin in the Cabinet of the late 


Mr. Seymour: the specimen is of rude execution. 


Puate I. Ficure 16. 
A Sitver Coin, 
Oxsverse.—A figure apparently intended for a female, 
with the bow and trophy or banner of Nos. 5 and 7, &c. and 


characters. 


Reverse —Sitting figure, apparently the same as in 


Figures 12, 13 and 14. 


This Coin is most probably of the same family as the foregoing, 
although the sex of the principal figure differs, and the Coin is of ruder 


execution. It is taken from a drawing of a Coin in the Cabinet of the late 


Mr. Epwarps. 


Puate {. Fieure 17. 
A Goup Corn. 

Osverse.—A male figure mounted on a mule or ass: the 
costume, and particularly the cap, is that of a Hindu mendi- 
cant, a Bairagi or Gosain. ‘These characters are on the 
margin 14yQ4bX,, which resemble those on the Delhi 
pillar, and on some of the preceding Coins: the second and 
fourth are in some inscriptions @ and @ or @. 


DO 


574 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Reverse.—A female figure precisely like that in Figure 
12: the relative situation of the impression differs, and the 
figure is lower and more on one side: the symbol is there- 
fore almost excluded, but it appears to have been the same: 


the characters are similar, and are evidently meant for 
. v 3 Ce i 
ancient Nagari: they are Quyae) , and the first may be 


read 3] Wal—but it is not easy to conjecture what sense even 
if completed to Prakirtti, fame, should be attached to the 
legend. 


The Natives call this Coin, arbitrarily of course, the Coin of Hiranya- 
KASIPU : it is allied to the preceding by the figure and characters on the 


reverse. The drawing is from the original, which I obtained at Kanoj. 


Puatre I. Fieure 18. 
A Go.p Coin. 


OpverseE.—A man on horseback. 


Reverse.—A female seated in profile, and feeding what 
appears to be a peacock: there are some characters in the 


margin. 


This Coin is not apparently allied to any of the preceding, and is of 
very questionable character. It is taken from a drawing of a Coin said to 
belong to Mrs. Wuire, of Futtehgerh. 


Puate I. Ficure 19. 
A Gotp Coin. 
Oxverse.-—A female figure in profile, seated on a morah, 


or stool of basket-work: a rod or sceptre is behind her, and 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS, 575 


on the left are characters, ~2% reall U2 : she has the halo 


round her head: her right arm is extended, and the hand 


seems to hold some such article as in Figures 12 and 13. 


Reverse.—A male figure seated in a manner common 
amongst the Hindus on a seat with a back: his left arm 
appears to rest upon a pillow: he has a halo round his head, 


and large ears: on his left are characters yap EGIEQ. 


The plate is from the drawing of a Coin belonging to the same 
proprietor as the last. 


Puate I. Ficures 20, 21 and 22. 

Goup Corns. : 

The first of these is from a drawing of a Coin found in Behar, by the 
late Dr. Hamriuron : the second is from a Coin in my possession, procured. 
at Kanoj. ‘They are very rude and fantastic, and of uncertain origin, and 
bear some resemblance to the uncouth Coins of the Seljuk and Turkoman 
princes of Persia and Syria. The third is from a Coin also procured by 
me at Kanoj—a rude and imperfect Coin, but bearing some analogy to 
the Copper Coins at the foot of the next plate. 


Puatre Il. Ficeures 23, 24 and 25. 


No. 23.—A Copper Corn in the possession of Mr. Prinser, procured 


at Benares. 


Oxsverse.—A head with a cap or tiara and fillets: one 


arm apparently is extended. 


Reverse.—A man with a similar head-dress, mounted, 
and extending one of his arms. 


576 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS, 


No. 24.—A Drawine in the Society’s Collection, from a Copper Coin 
in the Cabinet of the late Mr. Seymour. 


Oxsverse.—As before, but the impression is more dis- 
tinct: the head-dress is a sort of crown, and the hand holds 
a sceptre: there is an appearance of characters round the 
margin, but they are probably only parts of an ornamental 
border: behind the head is the symbol or symbol noticed on 


so many of the foregoing specimens. 


Reverse.—The mounted figure as before: the symbol 
is repeated: there is a circular legend, but the characters are 
imperfect: they have some appearance of Greek very rudely 
cut. The words BAZIAEY2 BAZIAEQON may be conjectur- 


ed as part of the inscription. 


No. 25.—A Coprrrr Corn in the Society’s possession, procured by 


Lieutenant Burnes, in the vicinity of Manikydla, 


Oxsverse.—A head with rays, but apparently no cap or 
crown: in other respects, as the position of the hand and 
sceptre, and in the symbol, it resembles the two preceding 


Coins. 


Reverse.—The mounted figure as in the two last, but of 
very superior execution: the hand appears to hold something, 
perhaps a hawk: the same symbol is repeated, and there is a 
legend round the margng@ SMmY PLU EIA EY A, 
which may be conjectured to be intended for BAXIAEY2 
BASIAEQN, as in No. 24, but several of the characters are 
more distinct, and are undoubtedly Greek. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 577 


Two engravings of a similar Coin are given in the Plate published in 
the Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society of the Coins belonging to 
Colonel Top. The numbers are omitted, but they constitute his second 
series. Colonel Top appears to regard them as Coins of ‘ Miruripares, 
his successors, or a minor dynasty in India,” (Transactions'R. A. S. Vol. 1. 
p- 340,) although he notices their general resemblance to the medal of 
Evcratipes, thus described by Baver,—Caput tectum est galea, sub ea 
frontem diademate stringi fascie argumento sunt, que circum cervicem 
fluctant. In aversa duo equites cumtiariis Bactriis, ramis palme et sa- 
rissis. Inscriptio BAZIAEOX METAAOY EYKPATIAOY. We have in 
two of our Coins, and in Colonel Ton’s, the helmeted head and fascie: and 
in all three, one horseman with the Bactrian fillets, butnospear. Colonel 
Top says, that on his Coin the extended arm holds a hawk, but it is not 
clear what the object isin our Coins. |The general character of the head 
is Grecian—that of the Equestrian figure Parthian or Bactrian. The 
symbol is not noticed in Bayer’s description. Colonel Top calls it appa- 
rently the sacerdotal instrument for feeding the sacred fire. There can be 
little doubt that they are Bactrian Coins, and it is only a question to what 
reign or period they belong. Scuiecet is probably correct in referring 
them to the interval between the death of Eucratipes and the subversion 


of the Bactrian kingdom.—Journal Asiatique, November, 1828. 
Puate II. Ficures 26, 27, 28 and 30. 
These are different specimens of the same Copper Coin. 


Oxsverse.—A man in aclose tunic, having on his head 
a high cap with fillets: the general character is the same as 
that of the figure on the Gold Coins, Plate I. Figures 2, 3, 
&e., and so is the attitude, the right arm being extended, 
either grasping a trophy or presenting an oblation on a fire- 


Dv 


578 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


altar: a trident stands on his right, and a sword or club 
appears to be attached to his left: an inscription occupies 
the whole margin, the first part of which is like the following, 
rFQAGConRog xyes. This is tolerably distinct in 
No. 26 only: in the others the letters are obliterated. 


Reverse.—A_ female figure standing in front of a bull, 
in the 26th figure is very distinct; it is less so in the others: 
the bull is characteristically Indian, having the hump on his 
shoulders: an inscription similar to that on the obverse 
occurs : above the tail of the bull also recurs the symbol 
so frequent in the preceding Coins,—the key with: three 
points. 


A Coin exactly similar to these is the first of the third series of Colo- 
nel Top’s plate, who thus describes it—*‘ No. 10, represents a priest or king 
sacrificing: his head is adorned with the high cap of the Magi, and he is 
feeding the flame on a low altar: a club is placed in his left : of several in 
my possession, though we distinctly read of the King of kings preserver, 
and on another of the Great King of kings, yet no proper name can be 
discovered: on the reverse is the sacred bull with a man, perhaps the sacri- 
ficing priest, and the epigraphe is in the Sassanian character.” Colonel 
Top assigns the Coins to the successors of Miruripares, like the preced- 
ing. ScHLEGEL’s Commentary upon Colonel Ton’s Coin, the epigraphe of 
which, as it appears in the plate, is very legible, discovers in the characters 
preceding BACIAG USBACIA€G ON the name € AOBITPIC, Eposiertis, which 
he regards as the appellation of a Tartar Khan, one of the Indo-Scythian, 
who succeeded to the domination of the Bactrian kings, and ruled over 
the provinces along the Indus, from the Punjab to the Gulph of Cambay, 
about the commencement of the Christian era. Colonel Top considers 


them to be of Parthian origin, whilst the Bactrian kingdom was subject to 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 379 


Parthian kings, and the costume of the principal figure and the worship of 
fire, if that is the subject of the die, appear favourable to his view. It is 
by no means clear, however, that a fire-altar is intended to be represented, 
and the general effect is more that of a military trophy, indicative of the 
Greek or Scythian conquest of India. The symbol belongs to Bactria, if, 
as is most likely, No. 1 be a Bactrian Coin. The name, it is true, is ofa 
barbaric aspect, if rightly decyphered ; but ScuiteGex admits that he can 
make nothing of the letters which immediately precede it, IHPNIGIC, and 
his separation of Edobigris from them cannot be unhesitatingly and unre- 
servedly admitted. The character of the reverse, however, leaves no 
doubt that whether Parthian or Indo-Scythic, the Coin was the work of a 


prince, of whose dominion the seat was India. 


The first of these specimens is from a drawing of a Coin in the Cabi- 
net of the late Mr. Epwarps: the second is in the possession of Mr. Prin- 
sEP, and was found at Chunar: the two last, with several others less dis- 


tinct, are in the Society’s collection. 


Puate Il. Ficure 29. 


A Copper Coin. 

This, although smaller and of ruder execution, appears to be allied to 
the preceding, especially by the reverse, on which we have the standing 
figure and the bull. The Coin is one of many found amongst the ruins of 


Dipaldinna, by the late Colonel Mackenzie. 


Pruate II. Ficures 31, 32, 33 and 34. 


Correr Corns. 
Osverse.—A male figure, resembling, in costume and 
attitude, that on the preceding Coins,—the right arm, how- 
ever, is extended nearly in a straight line, and in place of the 


trophy, or altar, is the common symbol, or key with four 


580 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


points, ey . Inone specimen, figure 31, there are characters 


which look like the Persian numerals 261190 Purge. 


Reverse.—A man riding on an elephant: there are 
traces of characters or of an ornamented margin, it is not 


possible to determine which, on some of the pieces. 


Colonel Top has a Coin, No. 12, of his plate, which corresponds with 
the Coins here described, the differences in the detail of the figure being, 
perhaps, those of the impression of the Coin, or the accuracy of the draw- 
ing. The figure on the obverse is supposed by ScHLEGEL to be Stva 
with four arms; but this may be doubted, the marks on the left shoulder 
being nothing more than part of the trophy with which we have met 
before,—a staff surmounted by a bird. Both Colonel Top and ScuHLEeGeEL 
refer this Coin to the Indo-Scythic kingdom, and it evidently belongs to 
the same series as several of the preceding, attributed to the same origin. 
As to the characters on No. 31, supposing them to be Persian cyphers, 
they might have been cut subsequently, as it is exceedingly common for 
Native bankers and others to make such marks as they think proper, 


even on the current Coins. 


Of the Coins now engraved, two belong to the Society, and two to Mr. 
JamMES Prinser, who has several others. He states that they are very 
common in Upper India, particularly about Benares, “Mirzapore, and Alla- 
habad. The Natives call them Téna mui Pysa, the meaning of which I 


have not been able to ascertain. 


Puate Il. Fieure 35. 
A Copper Coin. 
Osverse.—A male figure leaning on a staff or spear 
with one hand, and extending the other as to grasp a trophy: 


on the margin are some characters. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 581 


Reverse.—An upright figure, with the right arm extend- 
ed: below the arm is the symbol with three points: the head 
appears surrounded by a halo, and on the left are characters 
distinct enough, HP®. 


This Coin is one of the three found by General Ventura in the Tope 
Manikyala, of which impressions were sent to the Society. It is connect- 
ed, by the costume and attitude of the figures, with many of the preced- 
ing Coins, and is evidently the same as the No. 11 of Colonel Ton’s plate, 
one of the series referred by him to the successors of MiTHRIDATES, or a 
minor dynasty in India. The site in which this Coin has been discovered, 


is an argument in favour of its Indo-Scythic origin. 


Puate Il. Fieure 36. 
A Copper Corn. 
Oxsverse.—A figure which, though indistinct, corres- 


ponds in character with that on the preceding and other Coins. 
Reverse.—A figure apparently in a gymnastic attitude. 


This Coin is in the possession of the Society, and agrees exactly with 


No. 13 of Colonel Top’s plate: his drawing has the symbol on the reverse. 


Puate Il. Ficures 37 and 38. 
Copper Coins. . 
Oxsverse.—A man in a long tunic, erect, and holding a 
spear in his right hand: he has a singular head-dress, but 
in the first figure it is apparently the Mogul morion, or iron 
cap, with the veil of mail thrown over it, and hanging down 
on each side: in the second figure it is less marked: there are 
square characters round the margin. 


= 


¥ o 


582 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Reverse.—A female figure in a stole: on her right, in 
the first Coin, is a conch shell—on her left the branch of a 
tree. In the second specimen a flower or lotus is substituted 
for the shell, and on the left an emblem perhaps intended to 


be the symbol in the preceding Coins. 


There can be little doubt that these are Indian Coins, or Indo-Scythic, 
for the figure on the reverse is designated as Laxsumi by both the em- 


blems, the conch and the lotus. 


The first of these is in the Society’s Cabinet, the second is 
engraved from the drawing of a Coin in the possession of the late 


Mr. Epwarpbs. 
Puate Il. Ficeures 39 and 40. 


Copper Corns in the Society's possession, presented by Dr. TyTLer, 
and procured by him at Allahabad. 


Osverse.—Of both: a figure identifiable, by attitude 


and costume, with several of the preceding. 

Reverse.—A figure dancing, perhaps Siva, is on one of 
them: on the other is a figure seated, but the Coin is much 
worn. 


Pruate Il. Fieures 29 and 41. 


Copper Coins in the Society’s possession, found amongst the ruins 
at Dipaldinna, by the late Colonel Mackenzie. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 583 


The figures on the obverse are of similar character with the preceding: 
the reverse of No. 29 has the standing figure and bull connecting it with 
the series 26, &c.: the head of the bull is in an opposite direction: a 
female figure, apparently with cymbals in her hands, is on the reverse of 
No. 41. 


Puate If. Ficure 42. 


Drawine of a Copper Corn in the Cabinet of the late Mr. Srymour. 
Oxsverse.—A figure like those of the preceding, with a 
different and peculiar head-dress: the usual symbol with 


four points. 


Reverse.—A half-length figure, apparently a female: 


characters like the Nagari q@ and < reversed. 


The Coin is of very rude execution, but appears to belong to the same 


family as the rest, of which it may possibly be an imitation. 
Pruate II. Ficaures 43, 44, 45, 46 and 47. 


Copper Coins. 
Oxsverse.—A non-descript figure, but which may possi- 
bly be intended for the same person as is represented in 


figure 26, &c., only very rudely executed. 


Reverse.—A figure, the purport of which it is not easy 
to determine. It may be intended for a scorpion or a crab, 
or a rude outline of a body with legs and arms, like the type 
of JAcanNatH. In figures 43, 44 and 45 Devanagari letters 


are distinctly legible. 


584 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


These Coins are not uncommon: one has already occurred, No. 22, in 
gold. Of the Copper, one, No. 46, belongs to the Society: Nos. 44, 45, 
and 47 to Mr. Prinsrp: they were dug up at Kylie, in the Saugur dis- 
trict. No. 43 is an impression of one found in the Tope Méanikydla, by 


General VENTURA. 


The circumstances under which these Coins have been found, are 
favourable to their early origin, whilst the characters upon them indicate 
their being Hindu. On figure 43, the first element is a common form of 
the prefix Sri, and is followed by the old Nagari type of a: the next may 
be <, forming the usual proem to the title of a king, Srimad, auspicious. 
In figure 44, we have what may be conjectured to be 47a; and in 45, what 
looks like aq. It is not very safe to attempt to make a word or words 
out of such meagre and uncertain data; but in the absence of any other 
conjecture, I may hazard a supposition that the legend may have been 
Srimad Deva Pratapa, a legitimate appellation of a Hindu prince. No. 44 
may also be read | G—and the obverse of 43 3f| a¥T, in which case we 
might have Sr¢t maha (Raja) Chakra—also part of a Hindu name or title— 
CHAKRAVERMA is a designation of frequent occurrence. The rudeness of 
their execution renders it probable that these Coins date posterior to the 
last traces of Greek workmanship, and they are probably the indigenous 
currency of the Indian princes of the Punjab, after the downfall of the 


Indo-Scythian power in that direction. 
Puiate III. 


This and the two following plates contain series of Coins of a charac- 
ter differing evidently from these which have preceded: some of them 
admit of verification, and belong to Hindu dynasties of a comparatively 
recent date. It is not unlikely that those, the appropriation of which 
must be left undetermined at present, are also the Coins of Hindu princes 


who have reigned in similarly modern times. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Or 
(ec) 
Qn 


Puate III. Ficures 48, 49 and 50. 


Two Goup Coins AND ONE Copper. 


Oxsverse.—A sitting figure, in the first and last of rude 
execution, but more carefully executed on the second. The 
character is that of Durea, but the figure is probably intend- 
ed for Laxsumi as the princes of the dynasty to which it 
may be referred appear to have been Vaishnavas, from the 


names of several of them. 


Reverse.—An inscription in Devanagari letters on the 
first and third, particularly on the latter, is clearly, al- 
though not entire, intended for flag atlases we Sa Srimad 
Govind Chandra Deva, and appropriates these Coins to the 
dynasty of Rahtore princes, who reigned from the begin- 
ning of the 11th to the end of the 12th century at Kanoj, 
GovinpA CHANDRA was the sixth (Asiatic Researches, Vol. 
XV. 461). In the inscription on the second piece, there is 
some indistinctness, but it is perhaps designed for slafs Wa 


zq Visaya Deva, the successor of Govinp CHANDRA. 


One of the Gold Coins belongs to Mr. Prinsep, being one of two dug 
up in the district of Azingerh: the other Gold and the Copper Coin were 
procured at Allahabad, by Mr. R. Tyrer, and presented by him to the 
Society. The Gold Coins are by no means uncommon ; ten of them were 


lately sent to the Calcutta Mint as part of a remittance for re-coinage. 
Puate Il. Fieure 51, 
A Gou.p Coin. 


Osverse. — A female figure, with sundry indistinct 


emblems. 


586 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Reverse.—An inscription much worn and indistinct. 


This Coin was procured by me at Kanoj, where it was said, without 


any satisfactory reason however, to be a Coin of Buosa, king of Dhar. 


Puate III. Ficure 52. 
A Goxp Corn. 
Osverse and Reverse the same, being a Nagari inscrip- 


tion of the words Ram Ndm. 


This was procured also at Kanoj, and was there attributed to Jaya 
Deva, the last prince of that state. The inscription would designate a 


worshipper of VisHNU. - 


Puate Il. Ficures 53 and 54. 
Sitver Coins. 
Ozsverse.—A figure of the Vardha, or Boar incarnation 


of VISHNU. 


Reverse.—An inscription in Nagari, containing the let- 


ters AZ-Z-<TE, part, no doubt, of Srz Mad deva Varéha. 


One of these Coins is in my possession, the other in that of Mr. 
Prinsep: the latter was dug up near Sultanpur, Benares, with several of 
the next series. The Society has a number of these Coins, but less per- 


fect than the specimens here given. 


Puate III. Ficures 57, 58, 59, 60 and 61. 
Goup Corns, 
Osverse.—Indistinct marks, some of which appear to 


be intended for the same figure as -that on the preceding 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 587 


pieces, or the Vardha incarnation: two of them have the 


letter © reversed. 
Reverse.—Emblems of unknown import. 


A number of these Coins belong to the Society, and several are in 
Mr. Prinsep’s possession: they have been found in various places, some 
along with the preceding, indicative of their being current at a similar 


3D? 


period. 


Puate III. Ficures 63 and 64. 
SILVER CoIns. 

Oxsverse.—An imperfect inscription, of which the letter 
@ alone appears on the first : on the second it is preceded by 
a q, and is compounded with another letter, either < or ¥: 
part of the letter <, the initial of ¢4, perhaps follows, or it 
may be supposed to represent @&RZ, a name of VisuNv in the 
south of £ndia, and thence borne by many princes, especi- 


ally the Rajas of Vijayanagar. 
Reverse.—Indistinet marks. 


These Coins are also not uncommon, but they are of rude execution, 
and much worn: they are probably of the same period as the preceding, 


in company. with which they have been occasionally dug up. 


Puare III. Fieure 65. 
A Srinver Coin. 
One of two dug up at Kotah, and in Mr. Prinser’s possession: the 
marks upon them are too indistinct to admit of any conjecture as to what 


they represent. 


588 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Puatre III. Ficures 68 and 69. 


CopreEeR CoINs. 


Oxsverse.—Various emblems of uncertain import. 


Reverse.—An elephant, a small figure in front, anda 


sword underneath. 


There are several of these in the Society's Cabinet : two of them were 
found in the ruins of Kazra, an ancient city on the banks of the Gogra: 
one in Mr. Prinser’s possession was found in making the new Allahabad 
road. The Natives call them the Coins of Manpuiri, a prince of Ayodhya, 
in the Teta or second age. They are probably the Coins of some Hindu 


prince of Oude, in a comparatively recent period. 
Puare IIL. Ficure 70. 


A Copper Corn in the possession of Mr. Prinsep, found in making 
the new Allahabad road. 


Puate Il]. Ficeures 71, 72 and 73. 


Copper Coins. 
OsverseE.—An uncouth figure, perhaps intended for 


Hanuman. 


Reverse.—Dots and marks, some of which look like 


Arabic characters. 


These Coins are found in various parts of India, in considerable 


numbers: they occur sometimes of silver. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 089 


Puatre IV. 


The Coins contained in this plate may be referred to the dynasties of 
the south of India, especially the princes of Vijayanagar, and are not 
therefore of very high antiquity : several of them have been delineated by 
Major Moor; but we can scarcely admit his notion of them to be correct, 
when he states that there can be little doubt of most of them having been 


struck as early as the age of VIKRAMADITYA. 


Puate IV. Ficure 74. 


A Goup Coin. 


Osverse.—Concave, Rima crowned, Sfri sits by him: 
LaxsHMAna is on his right, and Buarata on his left: other 
figures complete the groupe. There are characters below, 
but they are of doubtful import, although they offer some 
analogies to old forms of both Nagari and Grandham letters, 
and may possibly form the words <TawaHt, the assembly of 
Rima. It is possible that they have not been very carefully 


copied in the drawing. 


Reversr.—Convex, a figure of Hanumin, with cha- 


racters that may be read Svi Raméswara. 


Coins of this description are of not very rare occurrence, apparently, 
in the south of India, where they arecalled Rama Tankas, or Rama Maras. 
The present drawing is copied from a drawing of a Coin belonging to the 
late Colonel Mackenzie, which was obtained at Seringapatam, having 
been, like that delineated by Major Moor, No. 10 of his plate 104, part 
of a Collection that had belonged to Tipu Suxiran. According to the 
popular belief, these coins were struck by RAmAcHanpRa himself, but the 


HS 


5390 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Rama Tankas are enumerated in the Rama Rajé Charitra, amongst the 
Coins paid to his troops by Rima, the last prince of Vijayanagar, and 
they were no doubt coined under his government. It is not unlikely, as 
Major Moor supposes, that these hollowed Coins were never generally 
current, but were struck for particular occasions, as offerings to D eities 


or distribution on festival occasions to the leading individuals of the 
Royal Court. 


Puate IV.. Figure 75. 
A Goup Coin. 


Oxsverse.—Concave. The coronation of Rima as before: 
characters below. 


Revaerse.—Convex. HanumA&n as before, but in a dif- 
ferent attitude. 


This Coin is also copied from a drawing of a Coin made for Colonel 
Mackenzie. Itis the same as that figured by Major Moor, Plate 104, 
No. 10: the characters are not precisely the same in the two plates, and 
offer in neither a decypherable legend, although it might be guessed to 


signify something like Sri Rémachandrasya Sabha. 


Puate IV. Ficure 76. 
A Goup ColIn. 


Osversre.—Convex. Four figures, representing pro- 
bably Rima, attended by his three brothers LaxsHmana, 


Buarata, and SATRUGHNA. 


Reverse.— Concave. Rima and SfrA seated, attended 
by Hanumin and Laxsumana, the latter holding the impe- 
rial Chattah over his brother’s head. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 591 


The engraving is from the drawing of a Coin inthe possession of 


Colonel Bowzer. 


Pruate LV. Ficure 77. 
A Goup Coin. 
OsverseE.—Concave. RdAma’s coronation. HAaNnuMA§N is 


below the throne. 


Reverse.—Convex. <A double triangle, considered as 
the Rama Yanira. It is surrounded by a circular border, in 


the departments of which are characters, probably cyphers 


conveying a Mantra, or mystical formula, sacred to RAma. 
From a drawing of a Coin in the Macxenzte Collection. 


Puate IV. Ficure 78. 
A Gop Coin. 
Oxsverse.—Concave. Rima crowned: the lower part 


of the Coin is embellished with a kind of flower. 


Reverse.—Convex. Hanum&n in an attitude of praise 


or supplication: one Nagari letter 4 appears on the margin. 


This is also from the drawing of a Coin in the Mackenzie Collection : 
the originals of this and the others belonging to that Officer are now in 


the Museum at the India House. 


Puate IV. Ficure 79. 
A Gop Corn. 
Oxsversr.—The usual types of JAGANNATH, attended by 


BALARAMA and SuBpHADRA. 


592 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Reverse.—An inscription in Déva Nagari 3 aca 
GRaTAH SF 24.98, Sri vira vara Purushottama Deva, 1534. 
a) 


This Coin is the most satisfactory one in our whole series, specifying 
the prince and date. Purusnorrama Deva was Raja of Orissa from 
A. D. 1478 to 1503, and the Samvat year 1534 corresponds with the year 


of his accession. 


The engraving is taken from the drawing of a Coin in the possession 
of the late Mr. Seymour. 


Pruate [V. Ficure 80. 
A Go.Ltp Corn. 
Ospverse.—Dots. 


Reverse.—Part of an inscription, of which the last part 
is <r@ Raya, so that it is most probably a Coin of some one 
of the Vijayanagar princes, who commonly bore that title, or 
it may be a Coin of Deva Raya, who ruled over that princi- 
pality about 1430. 


It is copied from a drawing belonging to Colonel Mackenzie. 
Puate IV. Fiaure 81. 
A Goup Corn. 
Osverse.—Four fish. 


Reverse.—An inscription in square characters. 


This is copied froma drawing in the Mackenzie Collection, and 
taken probably from one of those described by Major Moor, who calls 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 595 


them Arjuna Huns, and states that about twenty of them were found in a 
box in the palace at Seringapatam, with a memorandum in Persian, the 
purport of which was that these Matsya, or Fish-marked Coins, were the 
Coins of ArsunA, and were seven thousand years old. The letters are 
termed Bdlabandi. 


According to a memorandum accompanying the drawing, these Coins 
are attributed to Parixsuitr, the son of Arjuna, and successor of the 
Pinpavas on the throne of Hastinapur, an origin as little probable as that 
assigned to them in the Persian paper. The Bdlabandi characters, which 
term Major Moor was unacquainted with, are considered to be the old or 
primitive Mahratta letters, and were probably a modification of Nagari. 
What the characters on our Coin are intended for, it is not easy to guess, 
but on the reverse of one of Major Moor’s Coins, Plate 104, Figure 9, they 
may be designed for qufaa sa, although very rude and unsatisfactory. 
On the reverse, however, of his other specimen, Figure 11, is an inscription 
similar to one on the reverse of our figure 90—a coin assigned to Vira 
Narasinua Deva, Raja of Vijayanagar. In that case, these Matsya Huns 
must abate something of their pretensions to antiquity. It seems not 
impossible, however, that they are Coins of the Belal Rajas of Canara, or 
even of the Wadeyars of Mysur. One account noticed in the list of Coins 
in the Mackenzie Cabinet (Mackenzie Collection, Vol. 2, App. p. 225,) 


ascribes them to the Pandya Rajas, or princes of Madura. 


Puate LV. Ficeures 82, 83, 84 and 85. 
Gop Coins. 


Osverse.—The anterior part of the body of an elephant. 
Reverse.—A scroll. 


These Coins are not unfrequent, and are the work of the Gajapati 
princes of Orissa, who reigned fiom the eleventh to the sixteenth century. 


Iv 


594 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Several of them are in the Cabinet of the Society, and others were in the 


possession of Colonel Mackenzie. 


Puare TV. Ficures 86 and 87. 


Goup Coins. 
Osverse.—-Convex. Blank. 


Reverse.—Concave. A flower with characters on the 


margin: the two together furnish WA Aslsa. 


These are taken from drawings in Colonel MACKENZIE’S possession, 
and are described as having been found at T'ripeté and Handver. 1 rather 
suspect they are the same as those termed in the Catalogue Kamala 


Mudrds, and there said to have been dug up at Banawwast. 


Puate 1V. Ficure 88. 


A Goup Coin. 
Osverse.—A figure of Vardha. 


Reversrt.—A legend, which, when completed, is no 


doubt WwataRw Wea. 


This isa Bijnagar Hun, of the time of Krisana RAya, who ruled in 
the first part of the 16th century, or 1508-1530. It is drawn from a Coin 


,u my possession. There were several in the Mackenzie Cabinet. 


Puate IV. Ficure 89. 
A Gop Corn. 
Oxsverse.—Uncertain marks, perhaps intended to form 


a figure. 


Reverse.—A legend, same as before. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 595 


This is alsoa Vijayanagar Hun, or Pratapa, from the title Sri Pratapa. 


It is copied from a drawing belonging to Colonel Mackenzie. 


Pruate IV. Ficure 90. 
A Gop Coin. 
Reverse.—A figure standing on an animal, said to be 


VisHNnu on a lion, typical of the Narasinha Avatar. 


Osverse.—Characters which, by Colonel Mackenzie's 
Pundits, were asserted to be Hala Canara, expressing the 
name Narasinua, or Sri Vira Narasinna Deva, Raja of 


Vyayanagar, at the end of the 15th century. 


Prare IV. Ficure 91. 
A Gotp Corn. 


Oxsverse.—A figure seated. 


Reverse.—Characters undecypherable, with an orna- 
mented border. 


The plate is taken from a drawing belonging to Colonel Macken- 


ZIE: itis probably of the Vijayanagar or late currency. 


Puate IV. Ficures 92, 93, 94, and 95. 
Gotp Coins. 
Oxsverse.—A double-headed figure of Garvura, holding 


an elephant in each beak and each claw. 


Reverse.—A legend in which the first part is clearly 
enough 3yaTG Sri Praripa: the following letters are less 


distinct, but are apparently intended for 4\< tte 


596 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


In the Catalogue of Colonel Mackenzie’s Coins, the GArupa Mupras, 
are ascribed to Vira Ray of Coimbatur. The drawings are from that 


Collection. 


Puate IV. Fieures 96, 97, and 98. 
Goutp Corns. 


Osverse.—A figure of VisHnu as VENKATA RAMANA. 


Reverse.—On two of them a legend, the first part of 
which in oneis distinctly 3}4a¥zw; on the third, the reverse 
is blank. 


These Coins are not uncommon: the drawings are made from some in 
the possession of the Society or in mine: they were struck by VENKATA- 
pati, Raja of Chandragiri, in the beginning of the seventeenth century, 
after the overthrow of the Vijaynagar kingdom. Besides these specimens 
of the Coins of the Vijayanagar dynasty, there are otbers still current in 
the South of India in very considerable numbers, which bear at least the 
names of some of the princes, particularly Krishna Raya: some of these 
are given by Major Moor, and others are noticed in the Catalogue 
of Colonel Mackenzir’s Coins. See Mackenzie Collection, Vol. 2. 


Appendix. 


Puate V. Figures 101 to 108. 
SILVER CoIns. 
These are a few specimens of Coins frequently found by the late 
Colonel Mackenzig,.in all partsof Ludia. They are thus described in the 


Catalogue of his Coins. 


“These are all of one description; they are of an irregular form, being 


square, angular, round, oval, &c., they bear no inscription, are not unfre- 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. O97 


quently quite plain, and in any case have only a few indistinct and 
unintelligible symbols: that of the sun or a star is most common and 
those of the Lingam, the crescent, and the figures of animals, may be 
traced : these Coins are very numerous throughout India, but particularly 


in the South ; their weight varies.” 


Puate V. Ficures 109 to 113. 


Coprer Corns. 
Osverse.—A rude figure, apparently intended for 


HANUMAN. 


Reverse.—In some an equally rude figure, with legend: 
that of figure 111 appears to be Sri Ra&ma NArua. 


_ These are delineated from some in the possession of the Society, 
being a few of those collected by Colonel Mackenzie at Dipaldinna, and 
presented to the Society by the Government. No. 111 is copied froma 


drawing of one found at Kandya, in Ceylon. 


y Puate V. Ficures 114, 115, and 116. 


Corrrr Corns. 
Osverse.—A figure of rather a non-descript animal. 


Reverse.—Rude unintelligible marks. 


These are from the same collection asthe last, being part of the seven 
hundred and ten old Coins found at Dipaldinna. (See Mackenzie Collection, 
Appendix 238.) 


Puate Ve Ficure 117, &c. 
Lrap Corns. 
These are copied from drawings in the possession of Colonel Mac- 
KENZIE, of Coins of Lead found at Mahabelipuram and Nellore. Various 


K 9 


598 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


figures are stamped upon them, especially the Sinha of Durea and the 
Bull of Siva, but there is nothing else which illustrates their origin, or 


renders them of any interest or value. 


The result of the investigation of such materials as we possess 
towards a history of Hindu Numismatics, must be admitted to be meagre 
and unsatisfactory. With exception of a few of comparatively modern 
origin, no one piece has been ascribed to any individual reign, and even 
the general appropriation of any number rests upon mere conjecture. 
At the same time, the Coins perhaps admit of being classed under differ- 
ent heads, and may be considered as contributions to the illustration of 


various political revolutions in India. 


The first series, consisting of the Copper Coins, Plate II, Figures 23, 
24 and 25, are wholly of a Greek or mixed Grecian and Persian charac- 
ter, and belong apparently to the Bactrian princes of Greek or Parthian 
descent: they are connected with the two following series by the common 


symbol. 


The second, and much more extensive series, comprehending most of 
the Coins of Plates I. and II., bears a mixed character, and combines 
Indian figures and emblems with Scythian or Parthian costume, indicat- 
ing the origin of the Coins in the reigns of those princes, whilst they occu- 
pied the western provinces of Hindustan. In confirmation of this view of 
their origin, it may be observed, that neither on the older nor comparatively 
modern remains of Persian antiquity, neither in the sculptures of Perse- 
polis or Nakshit Rustam, do we find any decided resemblances in costume, 


characters, or minor details, such as to authorise a conjecture that these 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 999 


Coins belonged either to the old Kaianian dynasty of Persia, or to the 
Sassanian kings. The remarkable symbol, the high but conical cap, not 
to speak of the more decidedly Hindu emblems, are not visible in the 
Plates of Le Bruyn, Cuarpin, Niesuur, nor in the more recent deli- 
neations of Monier, Ousexey, and Porter. Ifthe object which has been 
supposed to represent a fire altar, be what it is supposed, it differs widely 
from the altars on both the Arsacidan and Sassanian Coins. If however 
it be held in the hand it can scarcely be an altar, and that such is the case, 
is rendered probable by the sole exception I have met with to the asser- 
tion that I have not found any thing analogous to the details of our Coins, 
as on Plate 156 of Le Bruyn, he gives a sculptured fragment found at 
Persepolis, ahand grasping avery similar article to that on several of 
our plates. He offers no conjecture as to what it is meant to represent, 
though from a figure of the same, on a smaller scale, in Kerr Porrer, 


Plates 47 and 49, it appears to have been a kind of vase or bucket. 


The third series, that with the archer on one face, and the sitting 
figure on the other, is apparently Hindu, but that it has some connexion 
with the preceding is evinced by the presence of the common symbol, and 
in some of the specimens by the workmanship, which is of a superior 


description, and may be indebted to Greek art for its superiority. 


Passing over single specimens of uncertain character, we may perhaps 
consider No. 28 of Plate 1 and 43, &c. of Plate 11, as constituting a fourth 
series of rude, and probably purely Hindu fabric. It is worthy of notice 
however, that a representative of this class, as well as of two of the preced- 
ing, was found in the Tope Manikyala, and so far we may refer all the 
four orders to a prior or cotemporaneous date with that monument, and 
possibly, therefore, to the ages immediately preceding and following 


the era of Christianity, 


600 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


The fifth series belongs to a much later period, the 11th and 12th cen- 


turies, or the times coeval with the twe Mohammedan invasions. 


Subsequently to that date few Hindu princes in Gangetic Hindustan, 
were allowed to strike their own Coins, and it is to the south of India, 
therefore, that we must look for a further supply. These may be regarded 
as forming a sixth series, the far greater proportion of which belongs to 
the Sovereigns of the last independant Hindu kingdom of any considera- 


tion, that of Vijayanagar. 


The details of these six classes, and the formation of others, must 
be left to future enquiry, the conduct of which, it is hoped, will have been 


facilitated by the researches now submitted to the Society. 


Account oF THE Excavations oF Tope MANIKYALA, BY 


LIEUTENANT-GENERAL VENTURA. 


Having adverted in former pages to the discovery of ancient Coins in 
the Punjab. by General Ventura, it may be satisfactory to notice the 
circumstance at more length on the present occasion, and, in justice to 


the first explorer of the monument, in his own words. 
Letter from General Ventura to Messrs. ALEXANDER AND Co. 


Lahore, 3 Avril, 1830. 

MEssIEURS. 

Dans le courant. du mois d’ Avril dernier, me trouvant campé aux 
environs de Manekiala, (ville du cheval aux yeux blancs,) sous laquelle reposent les décombres 
@ une grande cité, Je fus poussé a la suite de la découverte faite précédemment sur les lieux de 
médailles portant des inscriptions Grecques, 4 entreprendre les fouilles d’ une coupole, dont la 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 601 


hauteur & la circonférence prodigieuses, les ruines dont elle est entourée, révélent un de ces 
monumens de I’ antiquité, sur les quels le ravage des siécles, n’ ayant qu’ une prise secondaire: 
sont destinés par leurs fondateurs a transmettre aux 4ges futurs la mémoire du temps ancien, 
J’ai poursuivi ces fouilles pendant deux mois. Desireux aujourdhui de mettre a jour le mémoire 
& le résultat de ce travail gigantesque, J’ai Phonneur, Messieurs,.de vous adresser un état 
présentant la situation du lieux, l'emploi du temps & les trouvailles faits; Je vous prie, d’en 
donner connaissance a la Societé Scientifique de Calcutta, & apres l’ avoir fait traduire en 
anglais, Je vous serai obligé de le faire insérer dans les Journaux de cette ville. 


Mon opinion particuliére basée sur des conjectures, il est vrai, mais sur la présque certitude 
quw’un Roi seulement a pu ordonner un si grand travail, me porte a croire, que 1d a existé la 
ville de Bucephalia batie par ALEXANDRE en l’honneur de son cheval & que Vinscription que 


porte la seconde boite peut se rattacher aux événemens qui ont signalé le passage de ce grand 
Capitaine dans ces contrées. 


\ 


_ Je recommande, Messieurs, a votre bienveillance le soin de me faire connoitre que vous 
aver bien voulu remplir mes désirs a cet égard. 


Recevez la nouvelle assurance de ma consideration distinguée & de mon estime. 


Le Cur. GENERAL. VENTURA. 


ETAT des travaux faits par M. Le Chevalier VENTURA, Général d Infanterie au Ser- 
vice de Maharadja Ranvsiv SINGH Bahidour, pour les fouilles @une Coupole de 
Soixante quinze pieds de hauteur, sur Trois cent Soixante quinze de circonference, 
située a@ Manekiala, sur les Ruines @une grande cité a quarante miles de Djilim 


(Ancien Hydaspe ) 32° Latitude 72° Longitude méridien de Paris. 


Le 27 Avril, 1830. Les fouilles ont été commencées tout a fait au bas de la coupole du 
coté du midi, ou n’ayant rencontré que d’immenses décombres, l’issue n’a pu étre pratiquée, 


Le 28 ditto. Le chapeau de la coupole a été entamé; on a trouvé, a trois pieds sous terre, 
six médailles. 


Le 1 Mai, Ona découvert un carré parfait 4 douze pieds, tres bien établi au centre, bati 
régulierement en pierres de taille & trés bien conservé; aprés avoir creusé dix pieds, on a trouvé 
une Medaille au milieu d’ un bloc de terre. 


Le 6 ditto, Ona trouvé une Médaille en argent & six en cuiyre a la profondeur de 
vingt un pieds, 


Lv 


602 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


Le 8 Mai. On a trouvé une Boite en fer qui a éte brisée par un coup de pioche; ‘il y avait 
dans cette premiére Boite une seconde Boite en or, contenant une Médaille méme matiére, & 
une Bague idem, surmonté d’ une pierre ou l’on découvre des caracteres, trois grandes Mé- 
dailles en argent & trois petites, tm morceau de Rubis, le tout au bas du carré dont la batisse 
réguliere s’est terminée la. 


Le 12 ditto. Ona poursuivi les travaux jusqu’ 4 la profondeur de trente-six pieds od on 
a trouvé une Médaille en cuivre. 


Le 22 ditto. Comme on supposait qw on ne trouverait plus rien dans le centre de la cou- 
pole a cause de la discontinuation du carré, on a fait une ouverture du coté dunord de la hauteur 
de six pieds sur la largeur de douze; on a poursuivi les travaux des deux cotés. 


Le 25 ditto. On a atteint la profondeur de quarante cinq pieds, et c’est en dtant une grosse 
pierre de taille qu’ on a trouvé dessous une pierre carrée au milieu de la quelle était un trou 
rond, et au milieu de ce trou une Boite en cuivre et un cylindre, ayant a sa droite & a sa 
gauche nne petite ouverture: au centre du cylindre se trouvait un morceau de linge blanc dans 
lequel était enveloppé un morceau de cristal de roche travaillé et un autre petit cylindre cassé 
et en or. , 


Le 27 ditto. Ala profondeur de cinquante quatre pieds on a trouvé une medaille en cuivre. 


Le 29 ditto. Ona trouvé un trou irregulier de la largeur de six lignes a la profondeur de 
soixante quatre pieds; on a découvert dedans une Bague en cuivre argentée, surmontée d’ une 
pierre rouge, une medaille en cuivre & un hhar-mouré (pucelage, cyprwa moneta): a dix lignes 
plus bas une bague en fer et trois medailles : le trou suivi dans la méme direction. 


Le 31 ditto. On a decouvert une immense pierre qui couvrait presque toute la surface: on 
a oté cette pierre et l’on a appercu un petit Bassin bati en pierres & en chaux, d’ un pied de hau- 
teur & d’ un de largeur; au milieu se trouvait hermétiquement fermés, savoir— 


1°. Une Boite en fer contenant un liquide composé. 


2°. Dans la Boite en fer, une seconde Boite en métal composé, ayant une 
pyramide au milieu du couvert et autour du couvert, une inscription ; cette Boite contenait aussi 


un liquide composé, et cing médailles. 


3°. Dans la seconde Boite une troisieme en or, contenant un liquide com- 
posé, & mélangé avec une espéce d’ ambre brisé, deux médailles en or, V une grande & I’ autre 
petite, & un morceau de fiscelle nouée, 


Dans le méme bassin & sur le méme niveau, on a trouvé une collection de quarante quatre 
médailles en Cuivre. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 603 


Le 2 Juin. A trois pieds plus bas une médaille. 


Le 3 ditto. A trois pieds plus bas six médailles. 


Le 8 Juin, 1830. LL’ ouverture d’ en bas et celle d’ en haut se sont reunies, & |’ on a trouvé 
Ja terre: les travaux ont été poursuivis jusqu’ a vingt pieds en dessous du niveau de la coupole 
sans rien trouver. Les pluies ont necessité la discontinuation de l’ entreprise. M. VENTURA a 
V intention de les continuer pour que les fouilles soient faites sur tous les points. 


The letter having been communicated to the Society by Colonel 
Younc, General Ventura was addressed for further information, in reply 
to which he sent to the Society a revised statement of his labours, in 
substance the same as the above, and impressions in wax of three of the 
Coins. From these again, a number of impressions were taken in biscuit by 
Mr. Prinsep, and the Figures 1 of Plate I, and 35 and 43 of Plate II, 
delineated and engraved from the same. Subsequently similar Coins 
have been procured in the vicinity of Manikyala by Lieutenant Burnes: 
two of which he sent to Calcutta. One is not decypherable satisfactorily, 
but the other has been delineated and engraved as No. 25 of Plate II.* 


Of the origin of these Coins, a conjecture has been already expressed. 
Coin 25, is probably a Bactrian. Coin, two of the others are Indo- 
Scythic, or Coins of the princes who ruled in the Punjab after the downfall 


of the Bactrian kingdom, and one is the rude Coin of a Hindu sovereign. 


Some of the impressions taken of the Coins in Calcutta, were sent to 
Paris, and a late number of the Journal Asiatique contains two short 
notices of them by M. Rernaup and M. J. Sarnt Marin. The 


latter gentleman gives a particular description of our figure 1 Plate I, and 


* A subsequent communication from Lieutenant Burnes, to whom a copy of the Plates I. 
and IJ. had been transmitted, states that all the Coins found at Manihyala were of a type analogous 
to Nos. 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30. He mentions also having found a Coin very like No. 26 at Balkh, 


604 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


reads part of the inscription on the obverse NANOBAOOT. ... -PKIKOY— 
and on the reverse MANAOBA... .FO, but he remarks that a greater 
number of pieces and those in better preservation are necessary before 
any attempt can be made to interpret the Greek and Indian inscriptions 
observable on the Coins. He ascribes them, however, to Greek or 
Asiatic Princes, who inherited the authority of ALEXANDER’s successors 


in the countries watered by the Indus. 


‘With regard to the remarkable building at Manckyala, in or near which 
these Coins were found, it was first visited by Mr. E:puinsrone on his 
return from his mission to Cabul. A plate of it is given in his work. On the 
march from the Indus to the Hydaspes, a party from his camp set out on a 
search for the remains of Tawxila, the capital of ALEXANDER’s ally Tawiles, 
or more correctly Vaksha-silé*, the name of the Hindu city which 
the late Colonel Witrorp conjectured was situated in this direction. 
The party met with no ruins or remains of an ancient city except this 
building, resembling a cupola in its outline, but which proved to be a solid 
structure on alow artificial mound. It was about seventy feet high, and 
one hundred and fifty paces in circumference, cased in most parts with 
stone, but in some parts apparently unfinished : some broad steps led to 
the base which was encircled by a moulding about eight feet high. This 
was surmounted by a perpendicular wall for about six feet from whence the 
building continued in aspherical form. Mr. Exveninsrone adds, ‘“‘ There 
was nothing at all Hindoo in the appearance of this building. Most of the 
party thought it decidedly Grecian. It was indeed as like Grecian archi- 
tecture as any building which Europeans in remote parts of the country 
could now construct by the hands of unpractised native builders.” The 
structure was termed by the natives, the Tope, the mound or tumulus of 


Manikyala. No opportunity offered for any examination of the Tope or 


* Literally—Pierre de taille, as if the city was famous for its stone buildings. 


DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 605 


its vicinity: the mission having to make the best of their way on their 


return. 


Mr. Erskine, in apaperin the Bombay Transactions, on the Remains 
of the Buddhists in India, notices this building, and says of it “although 
its origin is unknown, yet in its hemispherical form and whole appear- 
ance it carries with it sufficient proof thatit was a magnificent Dagope 
(a Bauddha shrine) constructed at a remote period by persons of the Bud- 
dhist faith.” 


There can be little doubt of the correctness of Mr. Ersxine’s conjec- 
ture as to the character of the monument. It is a well known peculiarity 
of the Bauddha religion, to enshrine relics of a Buddha, his hair, teeth , 
nails, &c. in solid masses of masonry,* and the caskets or boxes found in 
the present instances may have originally contained some such exuvie. 
The existence of a Bauddha monument is not incompatible with Colonel 
Wiurorp’s notion that here stoodthecity of Taxiles, especially as we know 
the religion of Buddha flourished at an early age in Cashmir, and that 
the Hindus, in the days of the Maha Bharat, looked upon the people of 
the Punjab as little better than outcastes. The city could not have been 
Bucephala, as General Ventura supposes—for Arrian states that ALEX- 
ANDER built that city on the bank of the Hydaspes, at the place where he 
crossed the river. The same authority informs us that the country between 
the Indus and Hydaspes was governed by Taxttes, who was reasonably 
apprehensive of the ambition of Porus, the sovereign of the country on 
the east of the Hydaspes. But although Manikyala and Takshasila may 
have been the same place, the monument in question is, from the charac- 
ter of the Coins, subsequent to ALEXANDER and to the first Bactrian 


princes. It is also obvious that they are of different eras, and the monu- 


* Whence the term Dagope—or Deha—the body; Gopa, what preserves. 


M O 


606 DESCRIPTION OF SELECT COINS. 


ment is of course of more recent date than the most modern of the Coins. 
The subversion of the Bactrian kingdom brings us within little more than 
a century of Christianity ; and about that time, and for one or two centu- 
ries after it, we know from Chinese accounts, as well as from the fathers 
of the Christian Church, that the Buddhist religion flourished, especially 
in Bactria and the north western provinces of Jndia,—circumstances 
strongly corroborative of the supposed origin and history of the monument, 
leaving no doubt of its being aBauddha structure, and rendering it pro- 


bable that it was erected about the commencement of the Christian cera. 


ft 


As. Lees. Vol XVI 


ANCIBWI COINS. 


Llile, L. 


SSS 


Nee AS ~ 
NS 
Ss AS 


svmilh sowipsed 


her. 


Lar trom souilys cabind catalogue 


Fact trum drawings by J. Prins¢p. 


od Lhinsee dd. 


* 
ome 


ANCIENT COINS. 


ee 
As. Tes. Vol. XVL. 


Plate Il. ANCIBIWT COINS. As. Ties. Vol. XVI. 


S.Prinsep ded. 


Late, Lh | ANCIZ IW? COLNS. As. Les. Vol, XV. 


ey XN AS 


welys catalogue Ausinath scukes 


Sey 


UNG 
ey 


ee | ANCIENT COINS. EVO, AVE 
Siwver. 


aR 


See 
ail o> # 


te. catalogue Hiesinath scudpesi 
i 


X. 


REMARKS 


ON THE PORTION OF 


THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 


By H. H. WILSON, Esa. 
Secretary A. S. 


Jn the Ninth volume (page 93) of the Researches, the late Colonel Wr1- 
FORD, quoting the Dionysiacs of Nonnus, asserts that they are really the 
history of the Maha Bharata, or Great War. A certain Dionysius, he 
continues, ‘wrote also a history of the Mahdbhdrata in Greek, which is 
lost ; but from the few fragments remaining, it appears that it was nearly 
the same with that of Nonnus, and he entitled his work Bassarica.” The 
Dionysiacs, he states, supply deficiencies in the Mahabharata in Sanscrit, 
such as some emigrations from India, which it is highly probable took 


place in consequence of this bloody war. 


Srr WiixiiAm Jones had a different notion of the Dionysiacs, although 
he also was disposed to draw a parallel between them and a Hindu Poem, 
the Ramayana. Ue expresses himself confident that an accurate compa- 
rison of the two Poems would establish the identity of Dionysos and the 


elder RAma. 


610 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


became a Christian monk. The hero of his poem is Baccuus or Dionysos, 
one of whose exploits is the conquest of India, to which several books are 
devoted. Itis with these only that we are concerned, and in adverting to 
them more particularly, I shall point out what appear to be coincident 


with Indian traditions or belief. 


The first twelve books are occupied with a variety of matters wholly 
unconnected with ‘India; but in the thirteenth, Juprrer sends Iris to 
Baccnuus to direct him to force the impious Indians to drink wine and cele- 
brate nocturnal orgies, or to expel them from Asia. The king of the 
Indians is named Deriapes, and it is not a very rash etymological specu- 


lation to find in this an affinity to the Kuru prince Duryopnana. 


In the fourteenth book, Baccuus advances with his army against the 
Indian Prince, or General, Astrais, whom he defeats on the borders of the 
lake or marsh of Astakis. After the victory, the water is changed to 
wine, and the Indians are delighted with the new beverage. Baccuus 
next proceeds to the river Chali, the waters of which being converted to 
wine, the Indians become intoxicated, and dropping asleep, fall easy cap- 
tives to the motley groupe of Corybantes, Centaurs, Satyrs and Nymphs, 


of whom the Dionysian host is composed. 


The fifteenth and sixteenth books are mostly taken up with the story 
of Nixm#a, a maiden addicted to the chase, residing in a cave of the moun- 
tains, attended by lions, and inexorably cruel to her lover Hymnus. 
Baccuus becomes enamoured of her, makes her intoxicated, and violates 
her. She kills herself, and Baccuus after his victory over the Indians 
built a town termed Nykea, after the Astakian nymph. In all this there 
is nothing that can be considered peculiarly of Indian origin. The term 
Astakianmay have been obtained from Arrian, who mentions the Astakenz 


as an Indian people dwelling between the Cophenes and Indus ; and the 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 611 


town of Nykea may have a similar origin, being borrowed from the city 
Nysa, the birth-place of the Indian Bacchus, and the tribe Nysw, whom the 
fabulous writers amongst the Greeks considered to be a colony settled in 
India by Baccuus on his invasion of that country. It is important to 
remark, however, that the reading of Nonnus is Nikea, not only after the 
nymph, but after x7 victory, and we might fancy this a translation of 
some Jaya pura in the west of India; but to admit this reading, would be 
fatal to speculations founded on the earlier terms Nusa or Nysa, Nuow. It 
is not easy to trace, in original authors, any Sanscrit terms equivalent for 
Nysa or Nyse in the sense in which they are used by the Greeks. The 
identity of Natshada and Nysa intimated by Sir Wituiam Jones, cannot be 
readily recognised, especially as the former was in the South and the latter 
in the North of India. Neither of them was the birth-place of Rama, nor 
entitled to the designation Dionystopolis, even if RAma bore such an appel- 
lation as Dionysos; but none of his names approach to such a denomination. 
Witrorp’s Deva-Nauusua is not a whit more admissible, as although the 
latter be the name of a king, it is never compounded with Deva—nor has 
the history of NauusHa any thing in common with that of Baccuus. 
How far, indeed, the ancient legend of the Deity’s invasion of India, 
or of his origin, and that of his emblems, his worship, and the use 
of wine, from thence, are traceable in Sanscrit writers, is yet to be 
investigated. To all attempts to illustrate the subject by reference to 
Siva, in his Pauranic or Tantrika character, it is a serious objection 
that the authorities which depict him in the light of a Bacchanal, are 
probably of comparatively recent date, and subsequent to the era of 
Christianity. The name of Bagisa I have never been able to meet with, 
except in Sir Wm. Jones’s remarks, and in its etymological purport, 


‘Lord of Speech,’ it has little connexion with either Stva or Baccuus. 


In the beginning of the seventeenth book, Baccuus again enters India, 


where he is hospitably received by Broneuus, a pastoral Chief, inhabiting 


612 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


a cavern amongst the mountains of Alybes, on the river Gendis. Baccuus 
teaches the mountaineers the cultivation of the grape and the manufacture 
of wine. It requires more ingenuity than I pretend to, to discover any 


thing decidedly Hindu in these occurrences. 


Astrais, the former commander of the Indians, applies to a Chief 
named OrontTes, for succour. Oronres is the son of the River Deity 
HHydaspes, and father-in-law of Deritapes. He raises an army against 
Baccuus, and by the course of the story it should appear that he is the 
ageressor, invading Asia Minor or Lydia. Being overthrown, he kills 
himself rather than submit, calling upon the sun and earth and holy water, 
‘“‘ the God of the Indians,” to witness his determination to reject the yoke 
of the effeminate Bromius: 

Od ail oper Boousa Sndveeore paervens shaw 

Hédsov xocs yocsce coreopuoree, xcs seov Ivdaw 

A’yiov vdug 
This adjuration does bear an Indian character, and although the name 
Orontes does not offer any very close approximation to a Sanscrit ori- 
ginal, it may possibly be derived from ArinpDas or ARINDAMAS, “the sub- 


29 


duer of enemies,” an epithet sometimes applied to Hindu warriors and 
kings. At the same time, Nonnuvs is not the inventor of this story ; for 
two centuries before his time Pausanras states that it was a tradition in 
Syria, that an Indian warrior had fallen in battle on the banks of the 
Orontes, which was thence named after him. He also mentions that a 
skeleton, eleven cubits long, having been found near the river, the Syrians 
consulted the oracle of Claros, which replied that it was undoubtedly the 
skeleton of the Indian hero. Nownnus says that the Hamadryads interred 
Oronres on the banks of the Daphne, and inscribed upon his tomb; ‘the 
General of the army, the Indian Orontes, after defying Baccuus, lies 
here killed by his own right hand.” 
Baxyov aprnous orenrns weowos evade xesrous 


Avrorivw ruddun deduiywéros “Ivd0s ’ Ogorras. 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 613 


Part of the Indians found a refuge in Mount Taurus, whence they 
returned to India, but the curly-haired Buemys, king of the ruddy Indians, 
submitted to Baccnus. He, itappeared, held Deriapes, his rule and man- 
ners in abhorrence: his own country was Arabia Felix, but he afterwards 
removed to Agypt and AXthiopia, becoming king of the latter country, of 
which the people were called after him Blemyes. This is no more than 
the version which Nonnus chuses to give of the old and numerous tradi- 
tions that identified the Indians and Ethiopians, as intimated by Puttos- 
TRATUS, who speaks of Ethiopian colonies of Indians, cultivating the wis- 
dom of their ancestors, the wisest of mankind.— Life of Apollonius, 6. 6. 
ch. 16. 


Baccuus, following up his advantage, marches towards India, and is 
met on his way by Staruyuuvs, king of the Assyrians, with his son Borrys, 
and‘on the visit of the Divinity to the palace of the Assyrian monarch, he, 
his son, his wife Mrerue, and an old man named Piruvus, are introduced 
to the taste of the juice of the grape, and become intoxicated. The males 
are finally metaniorphosed into the articles their names imply, or Staphyle 
a grape, Botrys a bunch of grapes, and Pethos a barrel, whilst Methé 
signifies intoxication. The whole is therefore merely a diffuse pun, or 
series of puns, although the late Col. Witrorp was disposed to detect 
Sanscrit etymologies under these appellations, Pita or Prtri—and Maté 
or Mai, by which designations Stva and Buavani are often worshipped, 
and are so particularly, according to him, on the banks of the Indus. 
Staphyle he would resolve into Ashita phalam, the eight-leaved Lotus, 
the type of the great universal mother. Mata, drunk, has possibly some 
relation to Methé. 


We have in the eighteenth book a new origin for the Indians, who are 
descended from one of the sons of Terra, or Giants, named Indus, cast down 
from heaven by Jurirer in the Saturnian war. 


omy) 


614 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


The two next books are chiefly occupied with an Episodical war 
between Baccuus and Lycureus, worshipped as a deity by the Arabs. 
On the submission of the latter, the story of the Indian war is resumed in 


the twenty-first book. 


In reply to the ambassador of Baccuus, Deriapzs declares that he 
does not offer worship to Jove or Saturn, or the celestial Gods, or the Sun 
or Planets, and that the Earth and Water are his only Deities. 


~ ing / 
Mayor eros yeryouccos Seok, woes yockor, zoek VOwe. 


This is not quite, perhaps, an exact representation of ancient Hindu 
notions; but we find the elements appealed to in preference to the chief 
persons of the Pantheon in poems of an early date. Thus in the Uttara 
Rama Cheritra, the Ganges is declared to be the peculiarly tutelary divi- 
nity of the house of Raghw—and Rima, on deserting his wife, invokes the 
Earth to protect her. The formule of the Vedas are constantly addressed 
to the elements, and especially to Fire. 

e 

The Indians awaited the approach of Baccnus on both banks of the 
Hfydaspes. 'THureis commanded on the west, and Derrapes on the east 
bank: the river was also guarded by a fleet of boats. THurets is des- 
cribed as being alarmed, and blaming the conduct of Morruevs and the 
foolish Deriades: he however attacks the enemy, but is defeated and 


driven across the river, in which numbers of the Indians are drowned. 


Mor-rheus is possibly, as conjectured by Wixrorp, (R. A. ix. 72,) a 
corruption of Maharaja, or Ma-raj—Moireis, according to Hesycutus, 


being the Indian term for king, and Mai implying great. 


In the twenty-third and twenty-fourth books, the followers of Baccuus 


cross the Hydaspes by various means, amongst which is that of inflated 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 615 


skins, still common in the rivers of the Punjab. Atewart Quowrtm dsewerocey 
Ld ‘Ydaory. The Hydaspes endeavours to overwhelm the Bacchic host, 
but their leader sets the river and surrounding country on fire. The river 
submits, and its waters are turned to wine. The division under DertapeEs 
is defeated, and retreats to the town, which, besides being strongly fortified, 
was defended by its position amongst the mountains. We have here an 
intimation that the name of Derzades is connected with the word for battle. 
Aresidns ext ojew exavvuoy wadsocy Ldots. 

The Sanscrit etymology of Duryodhana has a similar purport as would 
appear to be intended for Dertapes, being Dur, bad or strenuously, and 
Yudh to fight, or Yodha war, battle. 


The rest of the twenty-fourth and twenty-fifth books are filled with 
old classical tales, wholly unconnected with the Indian war, which, it is 


incidentally mentioned, will not be terminated for six years. 


In the beginning of the twenty-sixth book, DeriapEs again prepares 
for war, and a turious enumeration ensues of his forces and their Chiefs. 
Acraus and Putoaius are the two principal generals. The troops are 
from Kyra and Baidion, on the Ombelus river ; from the strong hold of 
Rodoes, conjectured by Major Witrorp to be Rotas, and from the Para- 
panisan mountains, the western portion of the Jmaus or Himalaya chain— 
from the lofty Es¢neus and Gazos, which we may perhaps conjecture in the 
modern Gizni. Next come the Dards, with whom we are familiar in Hindu 
history as the Daradas, or mountaineers, on the borders of Kashmir—the 
Prasii—the Prdchya, or eastern tribes—the Salange, rich in gold—the 
Zabii, with curled hair, under their king PautrHanor, whom Baccuus, 
after the war, removed to Thebes and the banks of the Jsmene—Dip- 
NASUS, who is here termed the father of Oronres, and his other son, the kine 


MorrueEvs, burning to revenge on Baccuus the death of his brother; he 


616 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


especially commands the people of thre, the city of the sun, Anthene 
abounding in shrubs, in which Wuitrorp recognises Oude, and the 
reedy Orykea.. Also Nesaia, Melaine and Patalinne, with a saline soil. 
The latter is readily identifiable with the Indo-Scythic town Patalene, at 
the mouth of the Indus. With these march the hairy-breasted Dusswi 
and Sabiri—the latter possibly the Suviras or Subiras of the Puranas. 
Also the men who sleep wrapped up in their own ears. These are com- 
manded, apparently, under the Maharaja by Brineus—a Hindu name, 
either Buricus or Burincas—Danyx os, Hiprurus and Trcrarnor. 
The old story of the Grecian daughter is told of this Chief, and having 
been condemned by Deriapes to die of hunger in prison, his life was 
preserved by his daughter’s milk, which circumstance becoming known to 
the king, he restored the prisoner to freedom. The Bolimgz are under his 
command. The Arachosians march under Gineion, THureis and Hrppar- 
mos. The Derses, armed with bows, are commanded by Hasratuous, an 
unwilling auxiliary, labouring under the disgrace of having had his head 
shaved by order of Dertapes—a mark of infamy, it is said, amongst the 
Indians, Ivdoss wizgov ovesdogc—and this is no doubt an old sefitiment, for it is 
said of Sacara that when he had subdued various outcaste tribes, he was 
induced by the intercession of the Sage VAsisHTHA to spare their lives, 
contenting himself with enforcing the practice of keeping the head shaved 
either wholly or in part.. We have then the Xuthi, Arient, Za-ori, I-ori, 
Kaspeiri, whom we know to be Kashmirians—the Arbie, the people of 
Hysperos—the people of Arsania, a city of the south, famous for its 
cotton manufactures—the Krrhwi, a people of the islands, navigating in 
skins—the people of Aryzantea, where there are trees shedding honey ; 
the trees are haunted not only by birds and bees, but dragons and serpents, 
and the story may be borrowed from the Hindu notions of the Sandal tree, 
the growth of the Malaya mountains, or Southern Ghats, the favourite 
haunts of snakes. There also are birds that sing with human voices, and 


others that predict future events—varieties of the feathered species frequent 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 617 


in Hindu fiction. Next come the Sibe, the Sivas of Pauranic geography, 
the people of Hydarké and Karmina, and those inhabiting the mouth of 
the Indus and islands in its vicinity, under Ricsasus and Aretus, with 
his five sons Lyxus, Myssus, Guauxos, Perteuras and Mevtanes. We 
have then the inhabitants of the Pyke or passes, perhaps the Ghats; of 
the Eastern Eucolla, which Major Witrorp recognises in Utkala or 
Urissa, and of the fertile Goryandis, Gaura-dés or Bengal, and O-etha, fur- 
nishing superior elephants, which the same authority conjectures to be 
Ayodhya or Oude. ‘The armament is completed by the people of Eristo- 
bareia, the Derbici, the Ethiopians, Sakai, Bactrian and woolly-headed 
Blemys. All these obey DeErtapes, who is the son of the Hypasres by 
the Nymph Asrris, a daughter of the Sun by Cero the Nazad. The 
Hindu legend makes Duryopuavn, not the son exactly but the descendant 
of the Sun through his daughter Tapati the Naiad, or Goddess from whom 


the Taptz river derives its name. 


In the twenty-eighth book, a battle takes place between the forces of 
Baccuus and Derriapes: the Indians are described as armed with swords 
and shields, bows and arrows, their Chiefs wearing mail, and mounted on 
chariots, or riding on elephants: some of them use swords twenty cubits 
long, an exaggerated description of the two-handed sword which may 
sometimes be seen in India. The Cyclopean followers of Baccuus fight 
with brands and bolts of fire: the chief hero of the Indian army is termed 
Korymeasos, but he is at last killed, and the Indians are repulsed : they 
rally again; and the battle is resumed in the twenty-ninth book, until 


night separates the combatants. 


In the thirtieth book, Morrueus falls upon the Satyrs, and wounds 
EuryMepon, the son of Vutcan, who comes to his succour and involves 
the victor in a flame of fire. Hypasrrs comes to his aid and extinguishes 
the flame. This is undoubtedly Indian, and both in the Mahabharat and 


P vo 


618 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS 


Rémayana we have repeated introductions of the counteracting elements, 
fire and water, employed as weapons by the chief heroes. The troops of 
Baccuus have now the worst of the battle, and Baccuus himself flies in 
alarm. He is stopped by Minerva, and encouraged to return to the field, 


when the action is renewed. 


The greater part of the two next books is occupied with a prolix imi- 
tation of Homer’s account of Juno’s device to divert Jupirer’s attention 
from the fields of 7roy—Juno being, in the Dionysiacs, the friend of Dert- 
apes and the Indians. Whilst Jove sleeps in her embraces, the furies, by 
her direction, render Baccuus insane, and he deserts his own troops ; but 
Mars, disguised as Mope@vs, comes to their aid, and maintains the con- 
flict against Dertapes and Morrueus, until the latter becomes enamoured 
of one of the Bassarides, or nymphs of Baccuus, CHALCOMENE, and directs 
his efforts more to her capture than the general cause. The army of Bac- 
CHUs is nevertheless dispersed, and many of the Bassarides taken and put 
to death. CHALcoMENE leads Morrua@us away, under pretence of com- 
plying with his desires, but her chastity is guarded. by a dragon, from 
whom Morrna@us escapes with difficulty. Witrorp says it is here 
that he is called Sandes,—whence he is the same with Jara-sandha. 
I have not found the expression. In the mean time, Jove awakes, 
Baccuus recovers his senses, and the fight is renewed. The Gods 
take part in the encounter, but are separated by Mercury. Denrt- 
ADEs attacks Baccuus, who, after various transformations, is wounded: 
he binds, however, Dreriapzs with a vine, and the prince is obliged to 
humble himself—on which he is set at liberty. He again prepares for 
war, and Baccuus finding that it is impossible to vanquish the Indians by 
land, prepares to attack them by sea. With this view, he orders the Arab 
Kthadaumanes to build him a fleet. The Indians are nothing dismayed at 


this, and Morruevs, who has returned to his duty, encourages them, by 


RELATING TO THE INDIANS. 619 


observing that the Indians are accustomed to naval warfare, and are more 
formidable at sea than on shore. 
Iydos yore eSgwoves esos xv00s0v 
Bion ss, os waddov agisedsot Iurcoon 


Ti"dovt Ongiovres. 
These matters carry on the poem to the end of the thirty-sixth book. 


Nothing to our purpose occurs in the two next books, of which one is 
occupied with the funeral games solemnized by Baccuus—the other in the 
true style of the Puranas by a system of Astronomy. A few lines at the 
beginning of the thirty-seventh book correctly express Hindu sentiments. 
The Indians, says Nonnvs, burned their dead with tearless eyes, consi- 
dering that the deceased had escaped the bonds of life, and the spirit had 


returned in its circular revolution to the goal from whence it first set out. 


In the thirty-ninth and fortieth books, the Rhadamanes or Arabs enter 
the Hydaspes with their fleet, which being manned by the Bacchantes, is 
encountered under the walls of Deris by the Indian flotilla, commanded 
by Dertapes and Morruevs. A sanguinary conflict ensues—Morruevs 
is wounded, and retires into the town. Dertiapes, after retreating to the 
bank, is also wounded by Baccuus, and falls into the Hydaspes, by which 
the war is terminated, and Baccuus triumphs. It does not appear that 
his sovereignty is permanently established, for the poem conducts him 


back to Asia Minor, and we have no further notice of India. 


From this sketch of the Indian portion of the Deonystacs, it must be 
clear that they have nothing in common with the Ramdyana, and little 
more with the Mahabharat. They no doubt offer some analogies in the 
names of persons and places, and it is not impossible that their author 


may have picked up some hints in addition to those afforded by Arrian, 


620 ON THE DIONYSIACS OF NONNUS, X&c. 


Strraso, and other writers on India. This is capable of easy explanation. 
There can be no doubt that an active intercourse subsisted between India 
and Egypt in the early ages of Christianity, by way of the Red Sea, car- 
ried on by both Arab and Indian vessels. The ancient fictions, and it may 
be added laws of the Hindus, and the vestiges of their race, language, and 
religion found in distant countries, particularly in the Eastern archipelago, 
prove that there was a time when they were enterprising navigators, and 
that they were, as Nonnus asserts, accustomed to naval tactics. That 
they should visit Egypt—that some of them, probably many, were to be 
found at Alexandria and other cities of that country, is therefore nothing 
unaccountable, and from them Nonnus, himself an Egyptian, might easily 
have collected much more valuable accessions to his long and elaborate 
composition than those which it actually affords. The few analogies that 
it does present, may be received in evidence of the existence of the story of 
the Mahabharat as early as the fifth century of our era, but throws no fur- 
ther light upon the history of ancient India, and gives no additional weight 


or consistency to the Grecian fables of the conquests or origin of 
Baccuus. : 


EN D. 


APPENDIX. 


List of the Donors and Presents made to the Asiatic Society's Museum from 
April 1828 to September 1832. 


AINSLIE, W. EsQ.—2 Bottles containing extract of the Upas and a Creese. 
ANDERSON, LIEUTENANT.—A Quiver, Arrows, Sword, a Matchlock and a Suit of Mail. 


Avpatt, J. Esg.—Fragment of a Brick from the ruins of Babylon. Fourteen» Antique 
Roman Coins. 


9) 
Baytey, W. B. Esg.—2 Specimens of the large Bamboo from the Island of Pula goon, and 
various Specimens of Ore of Antimony from Martaban. Two Mother of Pearl Oyster 
Shells from Mergui. The Skull, Horns, and Hide of the Wild Cow of Tenasserim. 


Beatson, Masor W. S.—Two Slabs of Sandstone from Gwalior. 


Brecum Someproo, HER HicHness.—Silver and Brass Coins struck in the reign of Feroz 
Shah and Mohummud Shah. 


Brown, Rovert, EsQq.—A Copper-plate found at Jhoosy with Facsimile of Sanscrit 


inscriptions. 


Buruint, L. Esg.—A Dried Head of a South Sea Islander, the Bladder of a Tiger, Jaw of a 
Shark, a Sword Fish, a Collection of Shells, and a Dried Fish. 


CaTHCcART, J. F. EsQ.—Specimen of a Cape Fish called there ‘‘ Sea-horse Fish,” also a pair 
of Cape Pheasants. 


CAUTLEY, LIEUTENANT P, T,—Seven Silver Coins found in digging a Canal in the Doab. 


Q Vv 


622 APPENDIX. 


CRAWFORD, CAPTAIN J.—Impression and Drawing of a Coin, with Cufic Characters, found at 
Baitool. 


Davis, W. Esq.—A Skin of a large Snake Boa Constrictor measuring 22ft. found in the 
Sunderbuns. 


Ditton, Capt. P. Commander of H. C. Ship Research, on his Voyage in search of La 
Perouse. Some Spears from the Feejee and Friendly Islands. Two Spears from 
New Zealand. One Spear set with Shark’s teeth from Simpson’s Island. One Bow 
from Mannicolo. One bunch of Poisoned Arrows pointed with human bone. One bunch 
ditto, with wooden point. One Mannicolo Club. Some Clubs from the Friendly and 
Feejee Islands. One Club from the Island of Rathama. One ditto from Indenny or 
Santa Cruz Island. One Club from New Zealand. Some Feejee and Friendly 
Island Pillows. Two Mangeer Fans. One Porcupine Fish Cap from Simpson’s 
Island. Three Cava or Grog Dishes from the Friendly Islands. Specimens of 
Cloth from the Mannicolo Islands apparently woven. One New Zealand Noble- 
man’s Cloak or Great Coat. Four bundles of Cloth manufactured from the Mulberry 
Tree of the Friendly Islands. One War Cloak and Mask of Mannicolo. One 
large Stone Axe of Mangeer. Some spotted Cowrie Shells. Some white ditto. 
Sixteen different kinds of Cowrie Shells. One deep Sea Shell. Three dozen long 
Ditto. One Neck Ornament of Mannicolo. Thirty-six Cong or Spider Shells. Three 
dozen ditto. Six Cong Shells. One earthen Jar manufactured by the Natives of the 
Feejee Islands. 


Garrow, D. RevEReEND.—A Wheel of Jagganath’s Ratha, or Car, from Cuttack. A speci- 
men of China Grass from ditto. Also a specimen of Country Cochineal. 


GerorGE, J. Mr.—A Snake called Kala Ganny. 


GERARD, CapTartn A.—A specimen of the Stone used for Lithographic Printing in Tibet. 
Fossil Remains from Himalaya. A Collection of Fossils. 


GERARD AND Royte, MEssiEuRS.—Specimens of Minerals from the Upper Provinces. 
GoopHALL, H. EsQ.—Drawings of a Fossil Shell. 


THE GOVERNMENT OF BENGAL,—Articles of Tibetan manufacture; viz. No. 1. A Pair 
of Mongol Boost. 2. Ditto of Shoes. 3. A Silk Purse. 4. Ditto. 5. A Watch 
Case. 6. Cover for Snuff Box. 7. Pillow Cover. 8. Belt for knife. 9. Silk Bags. 
10. A Pair of Eye Covers. 11. Ditto Ear Ditto. 12. Lanthorn in Tin Case. 
13. Ditto in Red Box. 14. A Wooden Cup. 15. Knife and Sticks. 16. Ditto. 
17. Inkstand Case. 18. A Fan. 19. Ditto inaCase. 20, A Brush with Napkin. 
21. Hight China Drawings. 22. Spectacles. 28. Ditto. 


‘ APPENDIX. 623 


Grey, Hon’sie CHARLES Epwarp.—Two Cabinets of Minerals. Specimens of Rocks from 
Penang. 


“Hayes, Sir J. Commoporr.—A Conglomerate of Silicious Sand, Mica, Alumine and 
Peroxyde of Lron, from the Arracan Coast. 


Hrreerr, Caprarn J. D.—Horns of Various kinds of Deer. 
Hewett, Carrain.—The Head of a Woodcock killed near Kurrah in the Doab. 
Hoveson, H. B. Esq.—Specimens of Gold of Bhote and of a Medicinal Root from Nepal. 


KALikIssEN, BAHADOoR MouwA Rasa.—Models of Culinary Vessels and Paun Vessels of the 
Hindus. Model of a Kettle. 


MackENZIE, Caprain J.—Mineral Specimens and some small Figures of Buddha, 

Martin, J. R. Esg.—The skin of an Emu. The tail and feathers of the Manula Superba and 
a piece of Net of Native fabric. A Cast of the face of a Native of New Holland, 
and a specimen of Gum of the Acacia. Mimosa of that Country. A Pig, with two 
heads, and two young Kangaroos, in spirits. 

MATHOORNATH MUL Ick, Basoo.—A Malay Kreese. 

Mircuet., CApraiN.—A poisonous Insect called Bish Copra, in spirits. 

Morton , —— Esq.—The Leaf and Fruit of the Cocoa de Mer. 

PARKER, CAPTAIN.—Two Pearl Oyster Shells from Valparaiso. 


Evuiot, J. Hon’spie.—A stuffed Civet Cat. 


PRINSEP, JAMES EsQ.—A brass Equestrian Figure, said to be that of Rajah Salya, found at 
Silwan, in the Futtehpur District. 


Rapuacaunt Des, Basoo,—A young Pigeon, with two heads. 


RAMcOMUL SEN, Bazoo.—Models of the Instruments used in the Charuk ; viz. Vetrasana 
2. Pator Bag. 3. Sutrasana. 4, Rattan Ditto. 5. Bamboo ditto. 6. Logline. 7. 
Dasanakhi. 8. Bati. 9. Bhara. 10, Visesaya, 11. Three Bans and Kapali. 12. 
Charak Canta or hooks. 13. Belcar or Lancet. 14, Charak Gach or Swinging Post. 
15. Some Belcars or lancets. 16. Two Nagapisa. The Coat, Cap, Cup, and Staff 
of Byragees. Musical Instruments used by the Hindus; yiz. 1. Dhak Drum. 


624 APPENDIX. 

2. Dhola. 3. Dholaka. 4. Jaraghayi. 5. Tasa. 6. Dagara. 7. Kada. 8. Ram-a-Kada. 9. 
Dhamsha. 10. A small Drum. 11. Tikaras. 12. Jayadhak. 13. Mridanga. 14. Madala. 
15. Pakwaz. 16. A pair of Tabla. 17. Dampa. 18. Dara. 19. Two Khanjaris. 20. 
Damroo. 21. Doobdoobi. 22. Been-setara. 23. Setara. 24. Serang. 25. Sarindaé. 26. 
Bark. 27. Bhorung. 28. Bheree. 29. Bansies. 30. Two Sanayis. 31. A pair of Karé- 
tala, 32. Jhanj. 33. A pair of Mandira. 34. One Kansara. 35. Ghanta or bell. 36. 
Sankha or blowing Conch Shell. 37. Nripura. 38. Ghungura. 39. Mochung or Harp. 
40. Tooree. 41. Kansi. The Banner of Madari. A Dried Fish. 


SANDERS, CAPTAIN, AND Mr. E. V. Irnvin.—An Ancient Coin. 


PrinsePp, H. T. EsQ.—FrRoM THE GOVERNMENT OF BomBAy.—Two Gold Coins, one of 
Toghlek Shah and the other of Mohummud Shah, found in the Konkan. 


Tuomason, J. EsQ.—18 Coins found at Khurrah, in the District of Futtehpoor by A. F. 
Linn, Esq. Judge of that district. 


SHAKESPEAR, C. EsQ.—Six Models of Rustic Cane and Suspension Bridges 


SivAcHUNDRA Doss, Basoo.—A Gorakh Jhanda—an Iron rod set in a Number of rings, 
and used by a particular Hindu sect. 


Strone, F. P. Esqg.—A Flying Fish in spirits. 
Swinton, G. EsQ.—The Vertebra and Cranium of a Whale. 
TWEMLOw, CAPTAIN.—2 Copper Coins, one of Toglek Shah, found at Ellora. 


TurneER, R. EsQ.—Specimens of Fossils from England collected in the vicinity of Whitby, in 
the Yorkshire coast. 


VANZETTI, CAPTAIN.—A Statue of Devi, from Kemaon. 

Watters, H. Esg.—One Kampti Hat. A Spear and Sword. A Tibet Sword. A stuffed 
Nepal Pheasant. A Kitten with a double body. A Copper plate with fac-simile 
inscriptions found in the district of Dacca. 


WILLIAMS, T. EsQ.—13 Copper Weapons found in the earth near Futtehgerh. 


Witson, H. H. Esq.—Musical Instruments; viz. 1. Tanpura. 2. Ektara. 3. Gajee 
4. Khartala. 


APPENDIX, 625 


List of the Donors and Donations made to the Asiatic Society's Library, 
from April 1828 to September 1832. 


Axspoot Masip Mautavi.—A Copy of the Koran, with interlinear versions in Hindustani. 

Axspoor RAHEM MAutLavi.—Copy of an Arabic Grammar. 

AcapEmMy Royat or Prussta.—Questions for Prize Essays for 1832. 

ASHBACK,—EsQ.—History of the Ommiades in Spain. 

AvpALL, J. Esg.—Porteus’ Evidence of Christianity translated into Armenian. The Prayer 
of Nierses Clajensis in 24 languages. Abridgment of Chamick’s Armenian Grammar. 
Translation of Paul and Virginia into Armenian. Lament on the Capture and 
Destruction of Edessa,an Armenian Poem, written in the middle of the 12th Century, 
by Nierses Shonorbali, in Armenian. 

Basi, Monsr.—A Sheet shewing the Balance Politique du Monde. 

Buacx, THomas, Mr.—A Copyof Nul Dumun, in Persian. 


Bunt, Lizut. A.—Dictionary of the Tamul and French Languages. 


Boarp, Mepicat, or Mapras.—Reports of the prevailing diseases of European Troops 
serving under that Presidency. 


BovLpERSon,—EsQ.—Copy of an Inscription found in a Temple near Allahabad. 


Bowpircnu, Dr. 


ist and 2d Vols. of the Translation of the Mecanique Celeste. 


Breton, P. Dr.—A Vocabulary of Anatomical terms. Copies of his Lectures in Oriental 
Languages. 


Buruint, L. EsQ.—A Copy of the 3d Vol. of the Asiatic Researches, and that of Cambry 
Monumens Celtiques. 


Burnes, A. CApTAIN,—A Map of the Eastern branch of the Indus, 


R ov 


626 APPENDIX. 


Burnour, Monsr.—Vendidad Sade text, first Fascicle, Manava Dharma SaStra Sanscrit, 
2 Vols. Meng Tseu, in Chinese, with translation by Monsr. Julien. Eloge Sur la 
Prise d@’ Edesse (Turkish). Essai on Pali, by the Donor and Monsr. Lassen. 
Georgian Grammar and Vocabulary, by Monsr. Klaproth. Elements of Japanese 
Grammar. 


Cuezy, Monsr.—Yajnadatta Badha text and translation, and Theorie du Sloka. 
Cuitry, Simon Casiz.—Copy of a description of the Tamul Castes. 
CoLLEGE oF Fort WiLLIAM.—The Kah gyur, and other Tibetan MSS. 


CoMMITTEE, GENERAL, OF PusLic INsTRUCTION.—Bhatti Kavya, 2 vols. Laghu Kaumudi. 
Mugdabodha. Rajniti. Bhasha Parichcheda. Lilavati. Miscellaneous Tracts in 
Persian. Moolukhhusool Tuwareekh. Fatawa Alemgiri, in Arabic. Moojizool 
Qanoon. Mejmua Shemsi. Inayah. A%sop’s Fables, Nyaya Sutra Vritti. Vedanta 
Sara. Sahitya Darpana. Menu Sanhita. Mrichchakati. Vicramorvasi. Malati 
Madhava. Uttara Rama Charitra. Mitakashara. Daya Bhaga. 


CoMTE DE Noge, Monsr.—Memoires de l’Expedition Anglaise de l’Inde en Egypt. 
De Sacy, SYLVESTRE, BARoN.—Grammaire Arabe Nouvelle Edition.—A Copy of Chresto- 


mathie Arabe, 3 vols. and Nouveaux Apercus Sur l Histoire de  Ecriture. Memoire 


Sur le Traité entre Phillipe le Hardi et le roi de Turins. Observations sur une 


Pratique Superstitieuse des Druses. “ 


De Tassy, Garcin, Monsr.—Doctrine et devoirs de la religion Musulmane. Conseils aux 
Mauvais Poetes. Relation de la prise de Constantinople.—Memoire sur les Mussul- 


manes de l’ Inde. 


FRANKLIN, COLONEL.—A Copy of Researches on the Tenets and Doctrines of the Jains and 
Buddhists. 


FisHer, Esq.—The Ass overladen. 
GAULIANOYF, CHEVALIER DE.—Copy of Essai Sur les Hieroglyphes d’ Horopollion. 
GooDHALL, H. EsQ.—Drawing of a Fossil. 


GRAntT, J. EsQ.—A Copy of an Inscription from the walls of an old Temple at Nhiatrang, 
in Cochin China. 


Grey, Hon’pie Sir CHArRLes EpwarpD.—Lexicon Greco Latinum Constantine. Platonis 
Opera Omnia, 3 vols. Aristotelis Opera Omnia, 11 vols. 4to. in 6. Ciceronis 


APPENDIX. 627 


Opera Omnia, 10 vols. The Works of Dugald Stewart, 5 vols. Histoire de la 
Philosophie Moderne, 6 vols. 


~ 


HamMER Von, CouNcELLor.—2d, 4th, Sth, 6th, 7th and 8th vols. of his History of the 
Ottoman Empire. Letters on the Library at Turin. Observations on the Byzantine 
Historians. Jahrbucher der Literatur Nos. 45 to 52. Siege of Vienna, by the Turks. 
Meditations of Marcus Antoninus translated into Persian. Origines Russes. Reponse 
a Tutundjou Aglow, and several Tracts 

Hopeson, H. B. Esg.—A Copy of the work of Bibasius on Surgery, found in Nepal. 

Homes, Rev. Mr.—First part of Sanscrit renderings of Scriptural terms. 

° 
HoweELL AND STEWART, Messrs.—Supplement to Oriental Catalogue. 


JACQUET, Monsr.—Considerations Sur les Alphabetes des Philippines. 


JAMESON, Proressor.—The first Eight and 19th, and 20th Nos. of the Edinburgh Philo- 


sophical Journal. 


KaixisseN, Mana Rasa.—A Copy of his Translation of Poorooshpareeksha, and Moral 
Sentences and Nitisankulun. 


KASSIPERSAUD Guoskr, BABoo.—The Shair and other Poems. 
D 

KENNEDY, Dr.—Visconti, a Tragedy. 

KiarrotH, Monsr.—A Memoir on the sources of the Irawadi and Brahmaputra. Etude 
Comparative des langues. Fragmens Boudhiques, and Description du Tibet, and 
several Pamphlets. 

Lassen, ProrEessor.—Pentopotamia Indica. A new edition of Hitopadesa. 

LAUTERBACK.—EsQ.—Exposure of a fictitious translation of Confucius, by Schotts. 

Low, JAMES CApTAIN.—A Copy of the Siamese Grammar. 


LUKSHMINARAIN PuNpbirT.—A Copy of the Mahabharut, in Hindee, 4 vols. 


Lyceum or Natrurat History or New Yorx.—2d vol. and 1st and 2d Nos. of the 3d vol. 


of their Annals. 
Macan, T. Caprain.—A Copy of the printed edition of the Shahnamah, 4 vols. 


Macucuiiock, Mr.—His Researches into the history of the Aborigines of America. 


628 APPENDIX. 

MACNAGHTEN, W. H. EsQ.—On the Principles and Precedents of Hindu Law. 

Manpras, GOVERNMENT oF :—Astronomical Observations, Madras Observatory, vol 5. 

Makowski, Count.—Copy of a Grammar of Sanscrit in the Polish language. 

Marcoz, Mr.—Astronomie Solaire d’ Hipparque. 

Marce., Monsr.—Essai sur les Hieroglyphes. Ditto Horopollion. 

Moreau, Cesar, Monsr.—General view of the Financial state of the British possessions 
in India, British and Trish produce, and manufactures. Past and present state of 
British Navy. State of the trade of Great Britain. ‘ast India Company’s Records. 
Chronological Records of British Navy. Examen statistique du Royaume de 
France. 

Norton, Mr.—History of London. 

OGLE, DuNcAN AND Co.—Catalogue of their Library. 

OTTMARFRANK, Proressor.—The 3d vol. of Vyasa. 

Parerson, J. Dr.—A copy of Sacred Lemmas. 


Perces, JAMsEs, Rev.—India’s cries to British humanity. g 


Rarn, Proressor.—The 3d vol. of the Scripta Historica Islandorum. The Krakumal, a 
( Poem, and various Tracts. 


RAMcOMUL SEN, Basoo.— A copy of the Ist vol. of his English and Bengalee Dictionary. 


RAMDHAN SEN, Basoo.—A copy of the 3rd and 4th vols. of the Inayah, and’ his English 
and Persian Dictionary. 


READBOLD, ENsiGN.—Two Persian Fal namas. 
Rosertson, W.S8. Esq.—A copy of his Translation of Roostum and Sohrab. 


SCHLEGEL, PRorEssor.—The Ist vol. of the Ramayana and No. 4 of the 5th vol. of the 
Indische Bibliothec. 


— AND Lassen, A copy of the Hitopadesa. Commentary on Ditto. 


SIvacHANDRA Doss, Banoo.—A copy of the Hanoomana Charita MSS. and a Map of the 
World according to the Geography of the Puranus. 


APPENDIX. 629 


Society, AGRICULTURAL AND HorTICULTURAL, OF CALCUTTA.—Ist vol. of their Trans- 
actions. 


, Dirro pitto of ENcLAND.—The first 3 parts of the 7th vol. of their Transactions, 
with a list of Members and Reports. 5 


, D AGRICULTURE ET DE COMMERCE DE CAEN.—2nd and 3rd vols. of their Trans- 
actions, and several Pamphlets. 


, AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL.—3rd vol. of their Transactions, in 3 parts. Elliott’s 
Botany, 2 vols. and Tracts. 


, ANTIQUARIAN oF EWGLAND.—22nd and 23rd vols. of their Transactions. 


, AsIaTic oF Paris.—Journal Asiatique, for June 1829, and January to March 1832. 
-, Royal DITTO OF ENGLAND.—2d and 3d parts of the Ist vol. of their Transactions. 


, ASTRONOMICAL OF DITTO.—2d part of the 3d vol. of the new Series of their 
Transactions. 


, BATAVIAN.—8th and 12th vols. of their Transactions. 
, BouRDEAUXx, RoyYAL.—2 vols. of their Transactions. 
» 


———.,, EpINBuRGH.—1st part of the 11th vol. of their Transactions. 


————, GEOGRAPHIE DE PARtIS.—2d vol. of Recueil des Voyages, with a list of its 
Members, and copies of their Proceedings, Nos. 22 and 23. 


———.,, GEOLOGICAL oF ENGLAND.—=3d part of the 2d vol. and Ist part of the 3d vol. of the 
new Series of their Transactions, with a list of Members, &c. 


————,, LINNEAN oF pirro.—The 2d part of the 16th vol. of their Transactions, with a list 
of Members, &c. 


———., MEDICAL AND Puysicat or CatcurtTa.—4th and Sth vols. of their Transactions. 


————, Mepico-Boranicat or LonpoN.—Copy of an Oration delivered before that 
Society, &c, 


, oF Arts, &c.—45th, 46th, and 47th, and 1st part of the 48th vol, of their Trans- 
actions, with a list of Members, &c. 


, PLyMouTH.—Ist vol. of their Transactions, 


So 


630 APPENDIX. 


Society, Royat or ENGLAND.—1st and 2nd parts for 1828, 3rd part for 1829, and 1st and 2nd 
parts for 1830, of their Transactions. 


, YORKSHIRE PHILOSOPHICAL.—Annual Report of their Proceedings and list of their 
Members. 


StronG, F. P. EsQ.—aA copy of Dugdale’s History of Embanking and Draining. 
Sutty, D.—A Treatise on Hydrophobia. 


TRAIL, D.—Report of the Proceedings of the Ist General Meeting of the Subscribers of the 


Oriental Translation Fund. 
& - 
TRUSTEES OF THE British Musrtum.—Catalogue of the Maps, and Plans in the collection 
of His late Majesty. Annual list of Donations and Bequests to the British Museum. 


Catalogue of the Library of H. M. Grorce IV. 
TWINING, W. Esg.—A copy of his Work on the Diseases of Bengal. 
TYTLER, J. EsQ.—A Treatise on the Heart, translated into Arabic. 


VAUGHAN, J. EsQ.—Relhan Flora Cantabrigiensis. Lucian’s Observations on the nomencla- 
ture of Wilson’s Ornithology. Letters on Commerce and Navigation of the United 
States, and Dan’s Outlines of Mineralogy and Geology. 


Vipvua, Count.—A Tagala Dictionary. 


Witson, H. H. Esa.—McKenzie Collection, 2 vols. The Mrichakati, in the original Sanscrit. 
On the External Commerce of Bengal. THlarris’s Collection of Voyages. Histoire 
Generale des Voyages. Tagala Dictionary. Picart’s Religious Ceremonies of all 
Nations. Historia Antipodum. Agricola de Re Metallica. Assemanni Bibliotheca 
Naniana. Vaillants Numismata Imperatorum. D’Olivet Langue’ Hebraique. 
Forster’s Indian Zoology. Steuart’s Bengal Coins. Sanscrit and English Dictionary, 
MSS. Medailles de PV Egypte. 


Woop, H. Esg.—A Map of the Country, 40 miles round Calcutta. Map of Hindoostan, in 
Persian characters. Book of Roads in India. Resources of India. A copy of Goolis- 


tan and Bostan, and Alif Luela, all Lithographic Publications. 


Woop, G. EsQ.—Zoography, published by M. Wood, Esq. 


APPENDIX. 631 


MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 
1852. 


Patras, 


Tue Rireut HonorasLte Lornp WILLIAM CAVENDISH BENTINCKE, G. C. B. 
and G. C. H., Governor General, Sc. Sc. 
His ExceLuency GrneraL Sir EDWARD BARNES, G.C. B. 
Commander in Chief. Members of the 
Tue Honorasie Sir C. T. METCALFE, Barr., Vice President. i tees Council. 
THe HonorasLE WILLIAM BLUNT, Esa. 
PRESIDENT.—Tue HonorasLe Sir EDWARD RYAN. 
VICE-PRESIDENTS.—Tue Honoraste Sir J. FRANKS. 
Honorasie Sir C. T. METCALFE, Bart. 
JAMES CALDER, Esa. 


Committee of Papers. 


THE PRESIDENT, VICE-PRESIDENTS, SECRETARY, AND MEMBERS ;—Viz. 


Rev. Dr. W. CAREY. JAMES PRINSEP, Esq. 
Major G. EVEREST. J. THOMASON, Esa. 
G. J. GORDON, Esq. CapTain A. TROYER. 
Rev. PRINCIPAL Dr. W. H. MILL. J. TYTLER, Esg. 


AGENT IN EuROPE.— 

SECRETARY.—HORACE HAYMAN WILSON, Esa. 

LIBRARIAN AND SUPERINTENDANT OF THE Mustum.—Dr. LOUIS BURLINI. 
ASSISTANT LIBRARIAN.—HERAMBANATH THAKOOR. 
TreAasureRS.—Messrs. MACKINTOSH & CO. 

CoLLEcTtorR.—Basoo RAMCOMUL SEN. 

BooxksELLERS IN ENGLAND.—MeEssrs. PARBURY, ALLAN & CO. 

DitTo FoR THE CONTINENT.—MEssrs. DONDEY, DUPRE & CO. 


Physical Class. 


PRESIDENT.—THE HonorabBLe Sir E. RYAN. 
Vicr-PREsIDENT.—JAMES CALDER, Ese. 
SECRETARY.—JAMES PRINSEP, Esa. 


All Resident Members of the Society are Members of the Committee. 


Achmuty, J. 

Ainslie, M. 

Anbury, Col. Sir Thomas 
Ashburner, J. 

Atkinson, J. 

Avdail, J. 


Bagshaw, R. J. 

Baillie, Colonel John 
Baillie, N. B. E. 

Balfour, Francis, M. D. 
Bayley, Hon’ble W. 5B. 
Benson, Major R. 

Berry, Andrew, M. D. 
Biddulph, Robert 

Bird, W. W. 

Brightman, E. 

Brooke, Thomas 

Bryant, Lieut.-Col. Sir Jeremiah 
Buckley, Captain W. 
Buller, Sir Antony, Kt. 
Bunwari, Govind Roy, Raja 
Burke, W. A., M.D. 
Burney, Major H. 
Burroughs, Sir Wm.,, Bt. 


D 
Daniel, Thomas 


APPENDIX. 


HMembers. 


Calder, James 

Caldwell, Major H. 

Carey, Rev. Dr. W., D.D. 

Cautley, Captain P. T. 

Chester, G. 

Colebrooke, Sir J. E., Bt. 

Colebrooke, Major W. 

Colebrooke, H. T. 

Colvin, A. 

Colvin, J. BR. 

Compton, Sir Herbert 

Cooper, H. 

Coulthard, Captain T. 
Cowles, Captain C. : 
Crawfurd, J. 
Crisp, Captain J. 


DeNoyé, Dr. 

Dillon, Captain P. 
Dobbs, A. 

Dowdeswell, George 
Doyle, Lieut.-Col. C. J. 
DuBois, De Beauchesne 
Dundonald, Hon’ble Lord 


Dwarakanath Tagore 


APPENDIX. 


Fast, Sir E. Hyde, Kt. 
Edmonstone, N. B. 
Egerton, C. C., M. D. 
Ellis, Captain E. 8. 
Erskine, Wm. 

Everest, Major G. 
Everest, Rev. R. 
Ewer, W. 


Ferguson, J. H. 
Fombelle, John 
Forbes, Captain W. N. 
Francis, R, B. 
Franklin, Captain J. 
Franks, Hon’ble Sir J. 
Fraser, J. B. 

Fraser, Captain J. 
Fullarton, John, M. D. 


Gerard, Captain A. 
Gilchrist, J. B., L. L. D. 
Goldingham, J. 

Goodwin, R. T. 

Gordon, G. J. 

Gordon, Lieut. A. D. 
Grant, W. L. 

Grey, Hon’ble Sir C. E. 


633 


Hale, E. 

Hall, Captain B. 

Halliday, F. J. 

Hamilton, Lieut.-Col. Wm. 
Hamilton, R. N. C. 
Hardwicke, Major-General T. 
Hare, D. 

Hardy, J. 

Harriott, Colonel J. S. 
Henderson, Captain H. B. 
Herbert, Captain J. D. 
Hodgson, Lieut.-Col. J. A. 
Hodgson, Henry 

Hogg, J. W. 


Home, R. 
Howison, James 
Hunter, J. 

J 
Jackson, Dr. A. R. 
Jenkins, R. 

K 


Keating, Colonel C. H. 
Keene, Henry George 
Kelso, Alexander Hamilton 
Kennaway, Sir John B. 
Kyd, James 


Lachlan, Captain R. 
Larruleta, M. 


~ 


o 


654 


Lewin, T. 

Linton, Wm. 

Lloyd, Chas. 

Lloyd, Lieut-Col. Herbert 
Low, Captain Jas. 
Lumsden, Dr. M., L. L. D. 
Lushington, G. T. 


M 


Macaulay, Col. Colin 
Macdonald, Col. Alex. 
Macdougall, Capt. J. P. 
Mackenzie, Holt 
Mackenzie, Capt. J. 
Mackillop, G. 

Macnaghten, Sir Fras. W., Kt. 
Macnaghten, W. H. 

Macan, Capt. T. 

Malcolm, Major-Genl. Sir J. 
Mansell, C. G. 

Marsden, Wm. 

Marshman, Rev. Dr. Joshua 
Marshman, J. C. 

Martin, Wm. Byam 

Martin, Dr. R. M. 

May, J.S. 

McWhirter, John, M. D. 
Melville, Hon’ble W. H. L. 


Mendes; Francis 


Metcalfe, Hon’ble Sir C. T., Bt. 


Middleton, Nathaniel 

Mill, Rev. Prinl. Dr. W.-H. 
Money, G. 

Moore, Major Edward, F. R. S. 


APPENDIX. 


Morrison, Captain M. 
Mundt, Dr. C. 


Nicolson, Dr, Simon 


Neave, R. 


Oliver, Wn. 
Ouseley, Sir George, Bt. 


1 ed 


Palmer, John 

Parson, Rev. J. 
Patterson, Col. Wm. 
Pearson, J. Dr. 
Pearson, J. c 
Pemberton, Captain R. B. 
Price, Major W. 
Prinsep, H. T. 
Prinsep, C. R. 

Prinsep, James 

Proctor, Rev. T. 


Rajchunder Doss 

Ramcomul Sen 

Renny, D. H. 

Ricketts, Chas. Milner 
Roberts, B. 

Robertson, Lieut,-Col. Thos. 


Robertson, Revd. T. 


Robinson, Ven. Archdeacon 


Robison, C. K. 
Romer, John 

Ross, Jas. 

Ross, D. 

Royle, J. F. 
Russell, Sir Henry 
Russomoy Dutt 
Rutherford, T. 
Ryan, Hon’ble Sir E. 


Schalch, E. W. 


Scott, Lieut.-Col. Richard 


Sherer, John Walter 
Seppings, J. M. 
Sibchunder Doss 
Smith, A., M. D. ‘ 
Smith, Courtenay 
Smith, R. P. 
Stewart, Major J. W. 
' Stewart, Col. Mathew 


Stewart, Han’ble C. F. 


- Stewart, Jas. 
Stirling, E. 

Stirling, Capt. 
Strange, Sir Thos. 
Strong, F. P. 
Sulley, B. C., M. D. 
Sutherland, J. C. C. 
Swinton, G. 


Syamlal Tagore 


APPENDIX. 635 


Taylor, Lieut.-Col. 
Teignmouth, Right Hon’ble Lord 
Thomason, J. 

Thompson, John 
Thompson, George 

Tod, Major Jas. 

Trail, Henry 

Trant, W. H. 

Trotter, Archibald 
Trotter, John 

Troyer, Capt. A. 

Tucker, Henry St. George 
Turton, T. E. M. 
Twining, Wm. 

Tytler, J. 


Ww 


Walker, Captain W. 
Wallich, N., M. D. 
Walpole, Major H. 
Warren, Lieut.-Col. John 
Webb, Major W. S. 
White, Major F. S. 
Wilcox, Captain R. 
Wilkins, Charles 
Williams, John Lloyd 
Wilson, H. H. 
Withers, Rev. G. U. 
Wynch, P. M. 


Young, James 


Young, Revd. Dr. J. 


636 APPENDIX. 


Honorary Members. 


Dr. Belanger. Mons. Langbois. 
Mons. de Blosseville. Mons. Du Marcel. 
Professor Bopp. Count de Noe. 
Mons. Burnouf. Professor Oersted. 
Mons. Chezy. Sir Wm. Ouseley. 
Right Honorable Earl of Munster. Sir R. Palmer. 
Baron Richmont de Debassayn. Sir John Phillipart. 
Professor Fischer. Professor Rasmussen. 
Professor Frahn. Mons. Remusat. 
Henry Sullivan Greme. Professor A. Schlegel. 
Joseph Von Hammer. Baron Sylvester de Sacy. 
Professor John Jameson. Mons. Garcin de Tassy. 
Mons, Lassen. General Walker. 

THE END. 


Printed at the Bengal Military Orphan Press, by G. H. Huttmann. 


bo RAT A. 


Line 3fromthe bottom, for Dihong read Dihing. 
Fe LD a navigation op magnitude. 
ny 5 Kd Tezakhana Me Zezakhana. 
Unie? » . Tsokak es Taokak. 
Note insert a comma after north bank, and omit that after nearest. 
line 19 for time read line. 
aA 2 from the bottom, Be the is thick. 
mM 1 “6 Pasu 9 Pasi. 
4 8 En Suhatu op Sukatu. 
is 8 > Feng ye chou ns Teng ye chou. 
| 22 BS Survey > Snowy. 
yy 8 a improving 99 imposing. 
A 3 from the bottom, 5 area re arms. 
A LO a assembly 9 assemblage. 
yn) 8 read far above the level of their bases ; omit the — after plain. 
a 6 for body read bed of. 
Hs 1 Hi carved a curved. 
43 «23 a ultimate alternate. 
3 1 3 Luri Lung. 
3 9 * first ih one half. 
nae Me having a5 heavy. 
20 a and receive a and that we should 
follow and receive. 
, - 8 from the bottom, 33 rather 5 though. 
“n 16 oy come 5 con. 
A 3 from the bottom, . houses a Harés. 
last line, 5 whose . where. 
line 13 an but it A but though it. 
ay 6 from the bottom, Ke Mishmis Miris. 
See Le a elliptics ee ellipses. 
last line, 5 morning ss morang. 
line 5 55 tribes AA tales. 
»,  l4andin Note, 5 Sho a Lho 
. 5 from the bottom, Bs and found a and we found. 
A 3 ditto ditto, Me views en news. 
a 7 Mi partiality . hostility. 
As 16 oi and hills oh of hills. 
Note a a few rods A upwards. 
line 17 “ Dibong of Dihong. 
5 4 from the bottom ie of moving ee in moving. 
Ay le/ omit of frequent occurrence. 
= 4 for twenty-seven read. 27° 29! 54”. 
11 insert a comma after fern. 


aneaee 


ae ty) 


\ a a 
; = 14 '. 
/ a - 7 
z ! - . 
rf 
: 
F 


gad 


4 a 
n 
f 
4 4 ‘ i 
ae i 
it 3 ¥ . 
v hi é 
ard 
i ‘ w 
Ss 
4 
sontha: 
os 
ri : 
¢ 
= j y ~ 
1 5 P 
oo = ‘ d 
re 7 
t ‘ . 
/ } 
ana, i 
i 
- 4 i" 
} 
\ . z 7 i. 
cs) : 
1} ! 
i - é ? => 
F , A 
3 i 
n ma ; . ‘ < 5 : 
4 4 [ - 
‘ uy 
1 
1 F 3 
f eee : _ . 
& ‘ 
‘ 
) $ a 
¢ . ' 
ad P 
= 4 a 
c 
5 © 
hk E Ps 
~ = 7 
= = 
t 
\ 
= ra : 
5 
S 
) i , 
as 5 
Pe! < 
‘ 
i 
2 
4 
ey